Ir+adv+4251+series-sm-other

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235/4225 Series Service Manual Revision 2 Product Overview Technology Periodic Service Parts Replacement and Cleaning Adjustment Troubleshooting Error Code Service Mode Installation 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Appendix

0-2 Application This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory,

The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are

installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the

inconsistent with local law.

products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.

Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks

Corrections

of the individual companies.

This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this

Copyright

manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major

This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may

changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new

not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the

edition of this manual.

written consent of Canon Inc.

(C) CANON INC. 2015

Caution Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

0-2

0-3 Explanation of Symbols

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual. 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the Symbols

Explanation Check.

Symbols

Explanation Remove the claw.

relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal. The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power.

Check visually.

Insert the claw.

2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from circuit

Check the noise.

Use the bundled part.

to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not

Disconnect the connector.

Push the part.

discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads. The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product

Connect the connector.

Plug the power cable.

improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins.

Remove the cable/wire from the cable guide or wire saddle.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Turn on the power.

Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine.

Set the cable/wire to the cable guide or wire saddle.

Remove the screw.

Tighten the screw.

0-3

Blank Page

0

0-5

Contents 0 Safety Precautions Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-7 Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-7 Turn power switch ON--------------------------------------------------------0-8 Power Supply-------------------------------------------------------------------0-8 Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-8

About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-8 Toner on Clothing or Skin--------------------------------------------------------- 0-8

Notes When Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH Batteries-------------0-8 Notes Before it Works Serving----------------------------------------------0-9 Points to Note at Cleaning---------------------------------------------------0-9 Notes On Assembly/Disassembly------------------------------------------0-9

1 Product Overview Product Lineup------------------------------------------------------------------1-2

Main Body---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 Pickup/Delivery System Option------------------------------------------------- 1-2 Applicable Option for Each Model------------------------------------------------------- 1-2 Required Options/Conditions------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3

Scanning System Options-------------------------------------------------------- 1-4 Required Options and Conditions------------------------------------------------------- 1-4

Function Expansion System Options------------------------------------------ 1-4 Required Options and Conditions------------------------------------------------------- 1-4

Feature---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-7

Product feature---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 Service Features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 Service Mode--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7 Improved Upgrading Operability--------------------------------------------------------- 1-8 Jam/Error Code Display Specifications------------------------------------------------ 1-8

Specifications----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-10

Product Specifications------------------------------------------------------------1-10

0

Weight and Size-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11 Productivity (Print speed)--------------------------------------------------------1-12 iR ADVANCE 4251-------------------------------------------------------------------------1-12 iR ADVANCE 4245-------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13 iR ADVANCE 4235-------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14 iR ADVANCE 4225-------------------------------------------------------------------------1-15

Paper Type--------------------------------------------------------------------------1-16

External View/Internal View----------------------------------------------- 1-29

External View-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-29 External Cover-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-29

Cross Sectional View-------------------------------------------------------------1-29

Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-30

Power Switch-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-30 Types of power switch---------------------------------------------------------------------1-30 Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch----------------------------1-30

Control Panel-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-31 Control Panel--------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-31 Main Menu------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-31 Settings/Registration Menu--------------------------------------------------------------1-32

2 Technology Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2

Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2

Original Exposure System (Reader)--------------------------------------2-3

Features (Reader)------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3

Specifications (Reader)-------------------------------------------------------2-3

Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3

Names of Parts (Reader)----------------------------------------------------2-4

External View--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4 Cross Section--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4 Major Components-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4 Reader Relay PCB-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5

Controls (Reader)--------------------------------------------------------------2-6

Basic Sequence------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-6 Controlling the Scanner Drive System------------------------------------------------- 2-7 CCD Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-8 Enlargement/Reduction-------------------------------------------------------------------2-10

0-5

0

0-6 Detecting the Size of Originals----------------------------------------------------------2-10 Dirt Sensor Control-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-14 Image Processing--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-15 Color offset correction in sub scanning-----------------------------------------------2-17

Servicing (Reader) -------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-18 Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-18 Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-18 Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-18 Action to take when replacing parts----------------------------------------------------2-18 Major Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-18 Troubleshooting-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-18

Main Controller--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-19

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-19 Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-19 Specifications/configuration--------------------------------------------------------------2-20 Boot/Shutdown sequence----------------------------------------------------------------2-23

Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Flow of Image Data------------------------------------------------------------------------2-25 Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)------2-26 Option HDD----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-34 HDD mirroring feature (option)----------------------------------------------------------2-35 Removable HDD (option)-----------------------------------------------------------------2-40 HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)---------------------------------------2-40 Security Policy Function------------------------------------------------------------------2-44

Service Operations----------------------------------------------------------------2-49 HDD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-49 Main Controller PCB 1--------------------------------------------------------------------2-50 Main Controller PCB 2--------------------------------------------------------------------2-51

Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-55

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-55 Specifications/Controls/Functions------------------------------------------------------2-55 Main Configuration Parts-----------------------------------------------------------------2-55 Control System Configuration-----------------------------------------------------------2-56

Various Controls--------------------------------------------------------------------2-57 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-57 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing-----------------------------------------------2-57 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light------------------------------------------------2-59 Controlling the Polygon Motor-----------------------------------------------------------2-59

0

Controlling the Laser Shutter------------------------------------------------------------2-59

Work of the service----------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Scheduled Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Measures in the Parts Replacement---------------------------------------------------2-60 Adjustment-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60 Troubleshooting-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60

Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-61

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-61 Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-61 Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-61 Major Components of Image Formation System-----------------------------------2-62 Image Formation Process----------------------------------------------------------------2-63

Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------2-64 Sequence of Operation (initial rotation)-----------------------------------------------2-64 Sequence of Operation (printing)-------------------------------------------------------2-64 Sequence of Operation (last rotation)-------------------------------------------------2-64

Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-65 Image Stabilization Control--------------------------------------------------------------2-65 Drum Unit-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-66 Developing Assembly----------------------------------------------------------------------2-67 Toner cartridge------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-68 Transfer Unit---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-70 Waste toner container---------------------------------------------------------------------2-72

Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-73 Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-73 Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-73 Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-73 Action to take when replacing parts----------------------------------------------------2-73 Major Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-73 Troubleshooting-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-73

Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-74

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-74 Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-74 Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-74 Major parts configuration-----------------------------------------------------------------2-75

Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-76 Fixing temperature control: overview--------------------------------------------------2-76 Standby temperature control------------------------------------------------------------2-76

0-6

0

0-7 Print temperature control-----------------------------------------------------------------2-77 Down sequence control-------------------------------------------------------------------2-79 Fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence--------------------------------------------2-82 Fixing film edge cooling control---------------------------------------------------------2-82 Paper loop amount control before fixing----------------------------------------------2-82 Protection features-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-83

Work of Service--------------------------------------------------------------------2-84 Periodical ServicePeriodical Service--------------------------------------------------2-84 Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-84 Periodical Servicing------------------------------------------------------------------------2-84 Action to take when replacing parts----------------------------------------------------2-84 Major Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-84 Troubleshooting-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-84

Pickup Feed System-------------------------------------------------------- 2-85

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-85 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-85 Specification---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-85 Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-85

Energy saver function---------------------------------------------------------------------2-98 Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep----------------------------------------------2-98 Quick Startup -------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-99 Heater control------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-101 Fan Control--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-102 Counter control---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-105 Restricted function----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-107

Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-107 Periodically Replaced Parts------------------------------------------------------------ 2-107 Consumable Parts------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-107 Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-107 Action to take when replacing parts-------------------------------------------------- 2-107 Major Adjustments------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-107 Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-107

MEAP------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-108

Preparation for Using SSO-H------------------------------------------------- 2-108

Diagram of Paper Paths------------------------------------------------------------------2-87

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-108 Domain authentication management------------------------------------------------ 2-108 PC environment of administrator users and general users-------------------- 2-109

Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-88

Preparation for Using SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-110

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-88 Cassette Pickup Assembly --------------------------------------------------------------2-88 Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly--------------------------------------------------------2-91 Fixing / Registration Assembly----------------------------------------------------------2-92 Duplex / Delivery Assembly--------------------------------------------------------------2-92 Detecting Jams------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-93

Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS---------------------------------------------- 2-110 Settings on the Device Side----------------------------------------------------------- 2-111 How to Check the Serial Number----------------------------------------------------- 2-118

Arrangement of Sensors---------------------------------------------------------2-86

Work of Service--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-94

Maintenance service--------------------------------------------------------------2-94 Periodically replaced parts---------------------------------------------------------------2-94 Consumable parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94 Periodically Servicing parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-94 Action to take when replacing parts----------------------------------------------------2-94 Major Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94 Troubleshooting-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94

External Auxiliary System-------------------------------------------------- 2-95

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-95 Power Supply Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------2-95

0

Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-98

Login to SMS---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-118 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-118 When SMS Cannot Be Accessed---------------------------------------------------- 2-119 How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of Access--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-120

Installing an MEAP Application----------------------------------------------- 2-120 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-120 Procedure to install applications------------------------------------------------------ 2-121

Resource Information----------------------------------------------------------- 2-123 About MEAP Application Management Page-------------------------------------- 2-123

MEAP Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 2-124 What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?-------------------------- 2-124

MEAP Application Management--------------------------------------------- 2-127 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-127

0-7

0

0-8 Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application---------------------- 2-127 Managing the License File------------------------------------------------------------- 2-129 Other License File Management Functions---------------------------------------- 2-133

Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-135 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-135 About Login Service--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-135 Default Authentication overview------------------------------------------------------ 2-136 SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview------------------------------------------------ 2-136 Local device authentication------------------------------------------------------------ 2-140 Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)------------------------- 2-141 Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)------------------------------------- 2-143 Server authentication and local device authentication-------------------------- 2-144 Steps to Change Login Services----------------------------------------------------- 2-144 Login Service Installation Procedure------------------------------------------------ 2-145 Login Service Uninstallation Procedure--------------------------------------------- 2-146

System Application Management-------------------------------------------- 2-147 Password authentication---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-147 RLS Authentication----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-148

Setting the method to login to SMS----------------------------------------- 2-149

Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-158 Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-158 Formatting and Replacing the HDD-------------------------------------------------- 2-162 MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)------------------------------------------------------------- 2-164 Collection of MEAP Console Logs--------------------------------------------------- 2-167 Using USB Devices---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-172 Integrated Authentication Function--------------------------------------------------- 2-177 Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-178 Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-179

Reference material-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182 Glossary------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182 Option for exclusive individual measure-------------------------------------------- 2-184

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-149 Initial Display Languages of SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-151

Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-187

System Information-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152

Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-187 Features and benefits------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-187 Major Functions--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-187

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152 Checking the System Information---------------------------------------------------- 2-152 Display of System Information Details---------------------------------------------- 2-152 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application------------------------ 2-153 Content of MEAP system information----------------------------------------------- 2-153

MEAP Application Information------------------------------------------------ 2-154 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-154 Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information----------------------------- 2-154

Check License-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155 Procedure to Check the License File------------------------------------------------ 2-155

Changing SMS Login Password--------------------------------------------- 2-155 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155 Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password--------------------------------- 2-155

MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-156

0

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-156 Advantages Obtained When Using the Services--------------------------------- 2-156 MEAP Application Setting Information Management---------------------------- 2-157 MEAP Application Log Management------------------------------------------------ 2-157

Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-187

Limitations------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-188 Service Mode Menu Transmission Function--------------------------------------- 2-188

Service cautions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-189 E-RDS Setup---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-190 Confirmation and preparation in advance------------------------------------------ 2-190 Steps to E-RDS settings---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-190 Steps to Service Call button settings------------------------------------------------ 2-193 Steps to Service Browser settings--------------------------------------------------- 2-197 Initializing E-RDS settings-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-198

FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-198 Troubleshooting------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-200 Error code and strings---------------------------------------------------------- 2-204

Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-207

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-207

0-8

0

0-9 Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-207

Installing MEAP Application/System Option------------------------------- 2-209 System Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-210 List of Functions--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-210 Distribution Flow-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-211

Limitations and Cautions------------------------------------------------------- 2-212 Limitations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-212 Cautions------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-212

Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-214 Overview of Preparation---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-214 Setting Sales Company’s HQ---------------------------------------------------------- 2-214 Network Settings-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-215 Enabling UGW Link---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-218 Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode------------------------------- 2-219 Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode------------------- 2-219 Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)---------------- 2-220 Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode----------------------------- 2-220

System Management Operations-------------------------------------------- 2-222 Various Setting---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-222 Displaying Logs--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-224 Communication Test--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-227

Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-229 Upgrading Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-229 Formatting Hard Disk-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-229 How to Replace Controller Boards--------------------------------------------------- 2-229 How to Replace Devices---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-229

FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-230 FAQ on Installing Firmware------------------------------------------------------------ 2-230 FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment---------------------------------- 2-231 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option---------------------------- 2-232 FAQ on General Matters of Updater------------------------------------------------- 2-232

DCM--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-234

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-234 General limitations on DCM------------------------------------------------------------ 2-234 Restrictions about import/export------------------------------------------------------ 2-235 Import/Export All from Remote UI---------------------------------------------------- 2-235 List of items which can be imported------------------------------------------------- 2-236 Setting/Registrations--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-236

0

Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM----------------- 2-239 Import/export by service mode (external)------------------------------------------ 2-245 Import/export by service mode (internal)------------------------------------------- 2-251

3 Periodic Service Periodical Service Operation Item-----------------------------------------3-2

4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning List of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-2

List of External / Internal Cover------------------------------------------------- 4-2 List of Main Units / Parts---------------------------------------------------------- 4-3 Consumable Parts ----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4 List of PCBs-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5 List of Solenoids--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6 List of Sensors----------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-7 List of Motors------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9 List of Fans--------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10 List of Switches--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-11 List of Clutches---------------------------------------------------------------------4-12 Others---------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13

External Covers-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-14

Removing the Reader Left Cover----------------------------------------------4-14 Removing the Reader Front Cover--------------------------------------------4-14 Removing the Support Cover---------------------------------------------------4-14 Removing the Toner Supply Cover--------------------------------------------4-15 Removing the Front Cover------------------------------------------------------4-17 Removing the Left Cover--------------------------------------------------------4-18 Removing the Inside Base Cover----------------------------------------------4-18 Removing the Delivery Tray-----------------------------------------------------4-19 Removing the Left Rear Cover-------------------------------------------------4-19 Removing the Reader Right Cover--------------------------------------------4-19 Removing the Reader Rear Cover--------------------------------------------4-20 Removing the Rear Cover-------------------------------------------------------4-20 Removing the Lower Rear Cover----------------------------------------------4-21 Removing the Rear Right Cover (Upper)------------------------------------4-22 Removing the Rear Right Cover (Lower)------------------------------------4-23

0-9

0

0-10 Original Exposure System (Reader)------------------------------------ 4-24

Removing the Platen Glass-----------------------------------------------------4-24 Removing the ADF Scan Glass------------------------------------------------4-25 Removing the CCD Unit----------------------------------------------------------4-26 Cleaning in the CCD unit (Mirror No. 1 - 5)----------------------------------4-30 Removing the Reader Controller PCB----------------------------------------4-32 Removing the Reader Assembly-----------------------------------------------4-32

Controller System------------------------------------------------------------ 4-36

Main Controller PCB 1------------------------------------------------------------4-36 Main Controller PCB 2------------------------------------------------------------4-37 HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-41

Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 4-46

Removing the Laser Scanner Unit---------------------------------------------4-46

Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 4-48

Removing the Developing Assembly------------------------------------------4-48 Removing the Developing Cylinder-------------------------------------------4-49 Removing the Transfer Roller---------------------------------------------------4-51 Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator----------------------4-52 Removing the Waste Toner Container----------------------------------------4-53 Removing the Drum Unit---------------------------------------------------------4-53 Removing the Toner Supply Assembly---------------------------------------4-54

Fixing System----------------------------------------------------------------- 4-57

Removing the Fixing Unit--------------------------------------------------------4-57 Removing the Fixing Main Unit-------------------------------------------------4-58 Removing the Fixing Film Unit--------------------------------------------------4-59 Removing the Pressure Roller--------------------------------------------------4-65

Pickup Feed System-------------------------------------------------------- 4-68

Removing the Right Cover Unit------------------------------------------------4-68 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1----------------------------------------4-68 Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 2----------------------------------------4-70 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller----------------------------------4-71 Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad-------------------------------4-72 Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller----------------------------------------4-73 Removing the Cassette Feed Roller------------------------------------------4-73 Removing the Cassette Separation Roller----------------------------------4-74 Removing the Main Drive Assembly------------------------------------------4-74

0

Removing the No.2 Deliivery Assembly--------------------------------------4-76 Removing the No.1 Deliivery Assembly--------------------------------------4-77 Removing the No.1 Deliivery Drive Assembly------------------------------4-77

External Auxiliary System-------------------------------------------------- 4-78

Removing the DC Controller PCB---------------------------------------------4-78 Removing the HVT PCB---------------------------------------------------------4-78 Removing the Power Supply PCB---------------------------------------------4-79 Removing the Control Panel Assembly--------------------------------------4-79 Removing the Air Filter-----------------------------------------------------------4-80

5 Adjustment Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2 When Replacing Parts--------------------------------------------------------5-2

Original Exposure System-------------------------------------------------------- 5-2 Platen Glass---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2 ADF Scan Glass----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-3 CCD Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-3 Laser Scanner Unit-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6

External Auxiliary System--------------------------------------------------------- 5-7 DC Controller PCB-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-7

Controller System------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-8 HDD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-8 Main Controller PCB 1--------------------------------------------------------------------5-10 Main Controller PCB 2-------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-11 TPM PCB-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-14

6 Troubleshooting Initial Check---------------------------------------------------------------------6-2

Initial check items list-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-2

Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-3

Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-3 How to View the Test Print-------------------------------------------------------- 6-4 Grid (TYPE=1)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)----------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4 Solid white (TYPE=4)----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-5 Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)------------------------------------------------------- 6-5 Solid black (TYPE=7)----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-6

0-10

0

0-11 Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)------------------------------------------------------------ 6-6

Troubleshooting items--------------------------------------------------------6-7

Troubleshooting items------------------------------------------------------------- 6-7 Image Faults------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-7 Scattered image at center----------------------------------------------------------------- 6-7 Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner----------------------------------------------- 6-7 Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of Paper----------------------------------------------- 6-8 Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void--------------------------------------------------------- 6-8 Image Deletion/Blur/Dew Condensation----------------------------------------------- 6-9 Too Large Curl-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-9 Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with Small Leading-Edge Margin (1-4 mm)----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-9 Thin Paper Jam (63g/m2 or Less)------------------------------------------------------6-10

Version upgrade-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-11

Overview----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-11 Overview of Version Upgrade----------------------------------------------------------- 6-11 Writing System Software------------------------------------------------------------------6-12 Download Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-13 System Software Components----------------------------------------------------------6-14 Note on Download Process--------------------------------------------------------------6-15

Version Upgrade via SST--------------------------------------------------------6-16 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-16 Copying System Software----------------------------------------------------------------6-17 Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-18 Downloading System Software (Assist mode)--------------------------------------6-20 Downloading System Software (Single mode)--------------------------------------6-21 Formatting HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-24 Backup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-28

Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device-------------------6-32 Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device-----------------------6-32 Copying System Software----------------------------------------------------------------6-33 Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-36 Upgrading System Software-------------------------------------------------------------6-37 Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)-------------------------------6-39 Downloading System Software (Confirmation)--------------------------------------6-40 Downloading System Software (Overwriting)---------------------------------------6-42 Formatting HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-43 Backup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-45

0

Clearing Download File-------------------------------------------------------------------6-45 Download Menu 2--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-45 Other Menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-46

Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------6-46 Error Code: E753-0001-------------------------------------------------------------------6-46

Optional language support------------------------------------------------------6-47 The number of the installable languages---------------------------------------------6-47 Optional language selection-------------------------------------------------------------6-47 Optional language confirmation---------------------------------------------------------6-48 Firmware to be exported to USB memory -------------------------------------------6-48

Startup System Failure Diagnosis--------------------------------------- 6-49

Useful Operations------------------------------------------------------------------6-49 How to Use Startup System Failure Diagnosis-------------------------------------6-49

Startup Failure Analysis Policy-------------------------------------------------6-50 Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure--------------6-51 Applicable Condition of the Flow-------------------------------------------------------6-51

Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow--------------------------------------------6-53 Applicable Condition of the Flow-------------------------------------------------------6-53

Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow---------------------------------------6-58 Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-58

Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow------------------------------6-60 Applicable Condition of the Flow-------------------------------------------------------6-60

Flow E: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis----------6-66 Status Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-66 Check item-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-66

Reference: --------------------------------------------------------------------------6-67 Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis------6-67

Controller Self Diagnosis--------------------------------------------------- 6-69

Controller Self Diagnosis---------------------------------------------------------6-69 Introduction-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-69 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-69 Layout Drawing------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-70 Basic Flowchart-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-71

Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-71 Controller System Error Diagnosis-----------------------------------------------------6-71 Restrictions-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-74

Version Upgrade via CDS-------------------------------------------------------6-78

0-11

0

0-12 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-78 Preparation-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-78 Enabling UGW Link------------------------------------------------------------------------6-81

a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)-----------6-82 b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)----------------6-82 c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)--6-84 Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule------------------------------------6-90 Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)-------------------6-91 Deleting Downloaded Firmware------------------------------------------------6-92 Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation-----------------------------------6-93 Information required for Reports-----------------------------------------------6-94 Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site-----------------6-94 Information to Report----------------------------------------------------------------------6-94

Debug Logs-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-95 Obtaining Log Files------------------------------------------------------------------------6-95

Error Messages--------------------------------------------------------------------6-96

Error Codes------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-102

Error Code------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-102 How to read an error code------------------------------------------------------------- 6-102 List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed----------------------------------------- 6-103 Error Code---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-106 Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function----------------------------- 6-118 Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them--- 6-119

Debug log-------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-120

Scope of Application------------------------------------------------------------ 6-120 Purpose ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-120

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-120 Function Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-120 Description of Log to be Collected -------------------------------------------------- 6-121

Collecting System Information------------------------------------------------ 6-121 Collection Destination ------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-121 Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)------------------------------------- 6-121 Uploading Data by SST----------------------------------------------------------------- 6-122 Preconditions: - --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-122

When to Obtain Logs----------------------------------------------------------- 6-124 Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs--------------------------- 6-126

0

Location of LEDs------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-126 Preconditions------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-126 Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1---------------- 6-126

7 Error Code Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2 Outline------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2 Location code--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2 Pickup position code------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2 Pickup size------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2 Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON----------------------------------------------- 7-3 Points to Note When Clearing HDD---------------------------------------------------- 7-3

Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-4

Error Code Details------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-4 E000 to E5F6--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-4 E602 to E996--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-20

Jam Code---------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-65

Jam Type-----------------------------------------------------------------------------7-65 Jam screen display specification-----------------------------------------------7-65 Host machine + Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1--------------------------------7-66 Paper Deck Unit-B2---------------------------------------------------------------7-67 DADF-AG1--------------------------------------------------------------------------7-67 Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 + External Hole Puncher-B2----7-68 Buffer Pass Unit-H1---------------------------------------------------------------7-69 Inner Finisher-D1 + Inner Hole Puncher-A1--------------------------------7-69

Alarm Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-70

List of Alarm Code-----------------------------------------------------------------7-70

8 Service Mode Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Entering Service Mode-----------------------------------------------------------Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------Service mode item explanations------------------------------------------------

8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2

0-12

0

0-13 I/O information enhancement------------------------------------------------------------- 8-3

Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description------------------------------ 8-3 COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation-------------------------- 8-4 Security features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5 Related service modes--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5

Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)--------------------------------------------Back-up of service mode---------------------------------------------------------Service Label-----------------------------------------------------------------------The data output of the service data print-------------------------------------

8-6 8-7 8-7 8-8

Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-8 Service Prints and Data File Names That Support File Output------------------ 8-8 How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device --------------------- 8-9 How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST ------------------------8-10

COPIER------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-12

DISPLAY-----------------------------------------------------------------------------8-12 VERSION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-12 USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-37 ACC-STS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-37 ANALOG--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-39 CST-STS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40 HV-STS----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40 CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40 SENSOR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-41

I/O--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-42 Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016) -----------------------------8-42 Reader (R-CON>P001 to P008)--------------------------------------------------------8-47 DADF-AG1 FEEDER > P001 to P009-------------------------------------------------8-48 Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031----------8-49 External 2, 2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher-B2 SORTER > P032 to P037-----------8-53 Inner Finisher-D1/Inner Hole Puncher-A1 SORTER>P001 to P015-----------8-54

ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56 AE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56 ADJ-XY----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-56 CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-58 LASER-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-67 DEVELOP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-68 DENS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-68 BLANK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-68

0

PASCAL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-68 HV-PRI----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-69 HV-TR-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-69 FEED-ADJ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-70 CST-ADJ--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-72 FIXING----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-73 MISC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-74

FUNCTION--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-77 INSTALL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-77 CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-80 CST--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-81 CLEANING-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-81 FIXING----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-82 PANEL-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-82 PART-CHK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-83 CLEAR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-84 MISC-R----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-87 MISC-P----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-87 SYSTEM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-89

OPTION------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-90 FNC-SW--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-90 DSPLY-SW-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-98 IMG-FIX------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-100 IMG-TR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-104 IMG-LSR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-104 IMG-RDR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-105 IMG-MCON--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-106 IMG-SPD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-107 CLEANING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-108 ENV-SET------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-108 FEED-SW----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-109 NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-110 CUSTOM----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-119 USER---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-120 CST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-132 ACC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-136 INT-FACE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-138 LCNS-TR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-138

0-13

0

0-14 TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-146 PG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-146 NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-147 NET-CAP----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-148

COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-150 TOTAL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-150 PICK-UP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-151 FEEDER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-152 JAM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-152 MISC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-153 JOB------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-154 DRBL-1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-154 DRBL-2-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-156 LF--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-159

FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-160

DISPLAY--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-160 ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-160 FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-161 OPTION------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-162

SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-163

ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-163 FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-167 OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-168

BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-170

OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-170

9 Installation How to check this Installation Procedure--------------------------------9-2

When Using the parts included in the package----------------------------- 9-2 Symbols in the Illustration-------------------------------------------------------- 9-2

Attaching the Handle Covers------------------------------------------------------------9-17 Affixing the seal-----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-17 Affixing the ADF Label (only for the standard model with an ADF)------------9-17 Affixing the Labels to the Reader-------------------------------------------------------9-18 Affix the Service Book Holder-----------------------------------------------------------9-18 Installing the Right Cover (Lower) (only when the cassette feeding unit is not installed)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-19

Securing the Host Machine------------------------------------------------------9-19 Auto Adjust Gradation------------------------------------------------------------9-19 Checking the Print Image--------------------------------------------------------9-19 Image Position Adjustment------------------------------------------------------9-20 Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)-----------------------------------------------9-20 Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)----------------------------------------------9-20 Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)-----------------------------------------9-21

Checking the Network Connection--------------------------------------------9-21 Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-21 Checking the Network Connection-----------------------------------------------------9-21 Operation Procedure Using Ping-------------------------------------------------------9-22 Checking by the Remote Host Address-----------------------------------------------9-22

Making Pre-Checks------------------------------------------------------------9-2

Network Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------9-22

Points to Make Before Installation-----------------------------------------9-4 Table of Options Combination----------------------------------------------9-4 Checking the Contents-------------------------------------------------------9-5 Unpacking and Installation Procedure------------------------------------9-7

Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine----------------------9-22 Checking Network Function on the Main Controller----------------------9-23

Selecting the Site of Installation------------------------------------------------- 9-2

Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials------ 9-7

0

Installing the Toner Cartridge---------------------------------------------------- 9-9 Installing the Drum Unit----------------------------------------------------------9-10 Installing the Air Filter-------------------------------------------------------------9-13 Connecting the cord---------------------------------------------------------------9-13 Setting the Environment Heater Switch (if equipped with the cassette heater)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-14 Turning ON the Main Power----------------------------------------------------9-14 Stirring Toner------------------------------------------------------------------------9-14 Installing Trays----------------------------------------------------------------------9-15 Setting the Cassettes-------------------------------------------------------------9-16 Installing the Other Parts---------------------------------------------------------9-17

Checking Connection of the Network Cable-----------------------------------------9-22 Operation Procedure Using Ping-------------------------------------------------------9-22

Printer Model (for Europe)------------------------------------------------- 9-24

Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-24

0-14

0

0-15 Checking the Contents----------------------------------------------------- 9-25 Contents of Printer Cover-E1--------------------------------------------- 9-26 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------- 9-26 Unpacking and Installation Procedure---------------------------------- 9-26

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-68 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-68 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-68

Heater Kit-K1------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-34

After Installation--------------------------------------------------------------------9-72

Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials-----9-26 Installing the Printer Cover------------------------------------------------------9-28 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------------------9-34

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-34 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-34 Points to Note Before Installation----------------------------------------------9-35 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-35

Reader Heater Unit-H1----------------------------------------------------- 9-44

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------------------9-44

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-44 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-44 Points to Note Before Installation----------------------------------------------9-44 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-45 Installing the Reader Harness-----------------------------------------------------------9-45 Installing the Reader Heater ------------------------------------------------------------9-48

Drum Heater-C1-------------------------------------------------------------- 9-50

Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-50 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-50 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-50 Confirmation of Heater Driver PCB--------------------------------------------9-50 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-51

Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1----------------------------------------------- 9-60

Confirmation of Heater Driver PC----------------------------------------------9-60 Checking Bundled Components-----------------------------------------------9-60 Turning OFF the Main Power Switch-----------------------------------------9-60 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-61

Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1--------- 9-67

Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-67 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-67 Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2-----------------------------------------------------------------9-67 Copy Control Interface Kit-A1-----------------------------------------------------------9-68

0

Preparation before Installation----------------------------------------------------------9-68 When Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2--------------------------------------9-69 When Installing the Control Interface Kit-A1-----------------------------------------9-71

Additional Memory Type A (512MB)------------------------------------- 9-73

Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-73 Pre-Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------9-73 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-73 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-73 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-74 Checking after installation-------------------------------------------------------9-74

Utility Tray-A2----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-75

Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-75 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-75 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-75 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-76 When Installing the USB Keyboard-------------------------------------------9-77

Voice Operation Kit-C2----------------------------------------------------- 9-78

Points to note when Installing---------------------------------------------------9-78 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-78 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-79 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-79 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-79 Checking after Installation-------------------------------------------------------9-84 Operation Check-------------------------------------------------------------------9-84 When Starting to Use----------------------------------------------------------------------9-84 When Stopping to Use--------------------------------------------------------------------9-84

Copy Card Reader-F1------------------------------------------------------ 9-85

Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-85 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-85 Copy Card Reader-F1---------------------------------------------------------------------9-85 Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3----------------------------------------------------9-85

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-86

0-15

0

0-16 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-86 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-86 Checking after Installation-------------------------------------------------------9-92

Voice Guidance Kit-F2------------------------------------------------------ 9-93

Points to note when Installing---------------------------------------------------9-93 Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-93 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-94 Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-94 Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-94 Checking the Settings---------------------------------------------------------- 9-100 Operation Check----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-100 When Using-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-100 When Stopping to Use------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-100

Stamp Unit-B1-------------------------------------------------------------- 9-101

Checking the contents---------------------------------------------------------- 9-101 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-101 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-101 Installation procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-102 Operation Check----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-103

Document Scan Lock Kit-B1-------------------------------------------- 9-104

Points to note before installation--------------------------------------------- 9-104 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-104 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-104 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-104 Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-105

Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------- 9-106 Inner 2Way Tray-H1------------------------------------------------------- 9-107

Points to Note When Installing----------------------------------------------- 9-107 Checking Bundled Components--------------------------------------------- 9-107 Confirmation item of host machine main power supply OFF.--------- 9-107 Diagrammatical view at the time of the installation.--------------------- 9-107 Installation Procedures--------------------------------------------------------- 9-107 Setting after installation-------------------------------------------------------- 9-108

USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3------ 9-109

Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-109 Check Item when Turning OFF the Main Power------------------------- 9-109

0

Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-109 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-109 USB Device Port-E3--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-109 USB Device Port-E4--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-111 Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3----------------------------------------------------- 9-113

Installation Procedure ---------------------------------------------------------- 9-114 Installing the USB Device Port-------------------------------------------------------- 9-114

Installing the Card Reader----------------------------------------------------- 9-118 Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer------------------------------------ 9-120 Operation Check----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-123 Writing Check------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-123 Reading Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-124 Memory Media Removal---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-125

Combination of HDD Options------------------------------------------- 9-126 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export:-------------------- 9-127 Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)--------------------- 9-128

Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings---------------------- 9-128 Backup of MEAP Application-------------------------------------------------- 9-128 Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Uninstallation--------------------------------------------------------- 9-129 User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-129 Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data------------ 9-130

Removing the HDD-------------------------------------------------------- 9-131 TYPE-1----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-135

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-135 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-135 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-135 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-135 Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-136 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-139

TYPE-2----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-144

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-144 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-144 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-144

0-16

0

0-17 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-144 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-145 Installing the Encryption Board----------------------------------------------- 9-145 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-149 Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-150 Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-150 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-150 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-150

TYPE-3----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-151

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-151 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-152 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-152 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-152 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-152 Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-153 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-156 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-162 Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-163 Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-163 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-163 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-163

TYPE-4----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-164

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-164 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-165 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-165 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-165 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-165 Assembling the Option HDD-------------------------------------------------- 9-166 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-167 Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------- 9-172 Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-172 Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-173

0

Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-173 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-173 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-173

TYPE-5----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-174

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-174 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-175 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-175 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-176 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-176 Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)----------------------------------------------------- 9-176 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)----------- 9-179 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-182 Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------- 9-188 Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-189 Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-189 Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-189 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-190 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-190

TYPE-6----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-191

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-191 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-191 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-191 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-191 Assembling the Option HDD-------------------------------------------------- 9-192 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-193 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-195 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-195

TYPE-7----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-196

0-17

0

0-18 Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-196 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-197 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-197 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-197 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD------------------------------- 9-197 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-200 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-205 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-205

TYPE-8----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-206

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-206 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-207 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-207 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-207 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-207 Assembling the Option HDD-------------------------------------------------- 9-207 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-209 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-214 Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-214 Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-214 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-215 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-215

TYPE-9----------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-216

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-216 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-217 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-217 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-218 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-218 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD------------------------------- 9-218 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-221 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-227 Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-228 Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-228 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-228 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-228

TYPE-10---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-229

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-229

0

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-230 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-230 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-230 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-230 Assembling the Option HDD-------------------------------------------------- 9-230 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-232 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-238 Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-238 Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-239 Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-239 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-239 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-239

TYPE-11---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-240

Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-240 Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-241 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-241 Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-242 Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-242 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)--------------- 9-242 Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)----------- 9-245 Installation to the Host Machine---------------------------------------------- 9-248 Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-254 Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-255 Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-255 Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-255 Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-256 Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-256

Relocating the Machine-------------------------------------------------- 9-257

Required Articles----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-257 Preparation for Relocating the Machine------------------------------------ 9-257

0-18

0

0-19 Work Procedure------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-257



Appendix Service Tools------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-2

Special Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------------------10-2 Oils and Solvents---------------------------------------------------------------------------10-2

General Circuit Diagram---------------------------------------------------- 10-3

General Circuit Diagram (1/11)----------------------------------------------------------10-3 General Circuit Diagram (2/11)---------------------------------------------------------10-4 General Circuit Diagram (3/11)----------------------------------------------------------10-5 General Circuit Diagram (4/11)---------------------------------------------------------10-6 General Circuit Diagram (5/11)---------------------------------------------------------10-7 General Circuit Diagram (6/11)---------------------------------------------------------10-8 General Circuit Diagram (7/11)----------------------------------------------------------10-9 General Circuit Diagram (8/11)------------------------------------------------------- 10-10 General Circuit Diagram (9/11)------------------------------------------------------- 10-11 General Circuit Diagram (10/11)----------------------------------------------------- 10-12 General Circuit Diagram (11/11)----------------------------------------------------- 10-13

General Timing Chart----------------------------------------------------- 10-14

2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1--------------------------------------------- 10-14

List of User Mode---------------------------------------------------------- 10-15

Device Information Delivery Settings--------------------------------------- 10-15 Environment Settings----------------------------------------------------------- 10-16 Paper Settings----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-16 Display Settings--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-17 Timer/Energy Settings------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-18 Network------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-19 External Interface------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-27 Accessibility-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-27

Adjustment/Maintenance------------------------------------------------------- 10-28

Receive/Forward ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-41 Store/Access Files------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-42 Secure Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-43 Web Access-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-43

Set Destination------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-45 Set Destination--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-45

Management Settings---------------------------------------------------------- 10-46 User Management------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-46 Device Management--------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-46 License/Other------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-49 Data Management------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-49

Detail of HDD partition---------------------------------------------------- 10-50 Soft Counter List----------------------------------------------------------- 10-51

Soft counter specifications----------------------------------------------------- 10-51 Soft Counter List----------------------------------------------------------------- 10-51 000 to 099---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-51 100 to 199---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-52 200 to 299---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-53 300 to 399---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-54 400 to 499---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-55 500 to 599---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-56 600 to 699---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-56 700 to 799---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-56 800 to 899---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-57 900 to 999---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-58

Backup Data----------------------------------------------------------------- 10-60 Removal---------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-73

Removal---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-73 Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-73 Work Procedure--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-73

Adjust Image Quality--------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-28 Adjust Action------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-28 Maintenance------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-28

Function Settings---------------------------------------------------------------- 10-29 Common------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10-29 Copy----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-33 Printer---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-33 Send----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-37

0

0-19

Safety Precautions ■ Laser Safety ■ Handling of Laser System ■ Turn power switch ON ■ Safety of Toner ■ Notes When Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH Batteries ■ Notes Before it Works Serving ■ Points to Note at Cleaning ■ Notes On Assembly/Disassembly

0-21

Laser Safety Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Therefore this machine is classified in Class 1 laser products that are regarded as safe during normal use according to International Standard IEC60825-1.

Handling of Laser System This machine is classified in Class 1 laser products. However, inside the machine, Class 3B laser beam is emitted and is hazardous when entered into an eye. When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power. If you must service while the power is turned on, be sure to keep the followings: - Do not use a screwdriver or tools that have a high level of reflectance in the laser path. - Remove watches and rings before starting the work. (They can reflect the laser beam, possibly hitting an eye.)

F-0-1

The machine's covers that confine laser beam radiation are identified by means of warning label (Figure). If you must open the cover, be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work. The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950-1). Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet. Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefährlich, wenn dieser Strahl in die Augen gerät. Bei Servicearbeiten am oder in der Nähe des Laserteils zuerst das Hauptgerät abschalten. Bei Servicearbeiten, die unbedingt bei eingeschaltetem Gerät durchgeführt werden müssen, auf jeden Fall die folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen beachten. - Keine stark reflektierenden Schraubenzieher oder ähnliche Werkzeuge direkt in den Lichtpfad des Laserstrahls bringen. - Vor Beginn der Arbeit Uhren, Ringe und ähnliche Gegenstände abnehmen. (Reflektierende Laserstrahlen könnten sonst in die Augen geraten.) Die Geräte-Abdeckungen, die Laserstrahlen reflektieren können, werden durch einen besonderen Warnaufkleber gekennzeichnet (siehe Bild). Muss die Abdeckung geöffnet werden, besondere Vorsicht walten lassen, damit der Laserstrahl nicht in die Augen gerät.

0-21

0-22

Turn power switch ON

Safety of Toner

The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode).

About Toner • When disposing of the waste toner, be sure to follow all applicable regulations of the local government. • The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.

Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602). Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.

Toner on Clothing or Skin • If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it off with water. • Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the fibers of the cloth. • Tonner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.

F-0-2

Power Supply

Notes When Handling the Lithium and Ni-MH Batteries

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

1. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one for local rated voltage and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord.

The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).

Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr. Gebrauchte Batterien gemäß der Anleitung beseitigen.

2. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.

0-22

0-23

Notes On Assembly/Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device. • Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works. • If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall. • Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when

Notes Before it Works Serving

assembling. • To keep electric conduction, binding screws with washers are used to attach the grounding wire and the varistor. Ensure to use the right screw type when assembling. • Unless it is specially needed, do not operate the device with some parts removed.

• If the power plug is exposed to dust, humidity, or oily smoke, the resulting buildup can prove to be a fire hazard. (The buildup of dust, for instance, can absorbmoisture and suffer insulating failure.) Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a periodical basis, and remove any buildup of dust and dirt with a dry cloth. • At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.

• Never remove the paint-locked screws when disassembling. • The fuse is mounted on the neutral line of The AC driver PCB. It may result in an electrical shock, in case that the power plug is connected while assembling/disassembling after fuse blowing. Symbols or caution, shown below, is indicated on the PCB also describes this note.

Points to Note at Cleaning N

When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.

F-0-3

• During disassembly, reassembly or transportation of the printer, remove the cartridge if required. When the cartridge is out of the printer, put it in a protective bag even in a short period of time to prevent the adverse effect of light. • Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity. • When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached, be sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the new part.

0-23

1

1

Product Overview

Product Overview ■ Lineup ■Product ■ ■Feature ■ ■Specifications ■ View/Internal View ■External ■ ■Operation

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model

Product Lineup

1-2

Pickup/Delivery System Option ■■Applicable Option for Each Model

Main Body

US ONLY

Inner Finisher-D1 with 2/3 Hole Puncher-A1

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251 / 4245 / 4235 / 4225 The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: print per minute).

Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 Inner Hole Puncher-A1 Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1

Paper Deck Unit-B2

Inner Finisher-D1

Inner 2Way Tray-H1

Buffer Pass Unit-H1

F-1-1

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251 Print speed Positioning

Control Panel HDD Communication method with pickup/delivery option

51 ppm Target machine: iR5055/5050

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4245

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4235

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4225

45 ppm 35 ppm 25 ppm Target machine: iR3245/3235/3230/3225 Series

Staple Finisher-G1

Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1

Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1 External Hole Puncher-B2

Booklet Finisher-G1

Cassette Heater Unit-37

FL Cassette-AM1 FL Cassette-AQ1

Flat Control Panel Standard: 160 GB, Maximum: 1 TB IPC (Inter Process Communication)

F-1-2

T-1-1

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model

1-2

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions

■■Required Options/Conditions

●● Delivery System Options Product name

●● Pickup System Options Product name

Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1

Required options, conditions, etc.

FL Cassette-AM1

Pickup capacity:2,700 sheets (80 g/m2), 3,000 sheets (64 g/ m2 ) Paper size: A4, LTR Paper weight: 60 to 128 g/m2 Paper type: plain paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2), plain paper 2 (64 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, color paper, heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2) ,heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2), prepunched paper Option for Paper Deck Unit-B2 Use it to suppress the moisture absorption of the paper in the paper deck. Pickup capacity:550 sheets (80 g/m2), 680 sheets (64 g/m2) Paper size: Standard (universal) A3, B4, A4, B5, 279mmX432mm(11"X17"), LGL, LTR, A4R, B5R, LTRR, A5R, STMTR, 8K, 16K, 16KR, EXEC Paper weight: 64 to 128 g/m2 Paper type: plain paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2), plain paper 2 (64 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, color paper, heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2) ,heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2), prepunched paper Option for cassette of main body and Cassette Feeding UnitAF1 Use it to suppress the moisture absorption of the paper in the cassette. Heater Kit-K1 is required. Option for 2nd cassette of the main body

FL Cassette-AQ1

Option for 1st cassette of the main body

Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1

Option for 2nd cassette of the main body or easy envelope feeding. Holds up to 50 envelopes.

Paper Deck Unit-B2

Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1

Cassette Heater Unit-37

1-3

T-1-2

Inner Finisher-D1

Inner 2 Hole Puncher-A1 Inner 2/3 Hole Puncher-A1 Inner 2/4 Hole Puncher-A1 Inner 4 Hole Puncher-A1 Inner Finisher-D1 with 2/3 Hole Puncher-A1 Buffer Pass Unit-H1 Inner 2Way Tray-H1

External 2 Hole Puncher-B2 External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B2 External 2/4 Hole Puncher-B2 External 4 Hole Puncher-B2 Staple Finisher-G1

Booklet Finisher-G1

Required options, conditions, etc.

Option for Inner Finisher-D1 Stacking capacity Non-collate/collate/group mode:100 sheets (12.5 mm or less in height) Staple mode:60 sheets (8.1 mm or less in height) Stacking capacity: 1,000 sheets (81.4 g/m2; A4, B5, A5R, LTR, STMTR, EXEC, 16K) Paper weight: 52 to 220 g/m2 Stapling capacity: 50 sheets (81.4 g/m2; A4, B5, A5R, LTR, STMTR, EXEC, 16K) Option for Inner Finisher-D1. Hole type: 2 holes (AB), 2 holes/3 holes (Inch), FRN, 2 holes /4 holes, SWE/4 holes Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 279mmX432mm(11"X17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR Paper weight: 52 to 220 g/m2 US only Refer to Inner Finisher-D1 and Inner 2/3 Hole Puncher-A1. Staple Finisher-G1 or Booklet Finisher-G1 is required. Tray capacity: Tray A: A4, B5, LTR: 250 sheets (80 g/m2) A3, B4, 279mmX432mm(11"X17"), LGL: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Tray B: A4, B5, LTR: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) A3, B4, 279mmX432mm(11"X17"), LGL: 50 sheets (80 g/m2) Option for Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1. Hole type: 2 holes (AB), 2 holes/3 holes (Inch), FRN, 2 holes /4 holes, SWE/4 holes Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 279mmX432mm(11"X17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC Paper weight: 52 to 220 g/m2 Using with Booklet Finisher-G1 is not available. Paper weight: 52 to 220 g/m2 Maximum stacking capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, B5, A5R, LTR, STMTR, EXEC, 16K) Stapling capacity: 50 sheets (81.4 g/m2; A4, B5, LTR, EXEC) Using with Staple Finisher-G1 is not available. Paper weight: 52 to 220 g/m2 Maximum stacking capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, B5, A5R, LTR, STMTR, EXEC, 16K) Stapling capacity: 50 sheets (81.4 g/m2; A4, B5, LTR, EXEC) Saddle capacity: 16 sheets (81.4 g/m2; A3, B4, A4R, 279mmX432mm(11"X17"), LGL, LTRR) T-1-3

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions

1-3

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions

Scanning System Options

1-4

Function Expansion System Options

■■Required Options and Conditions

■■Required Options and Conditions Utility Tray-A2

EU ONLY

Stamp Unit-B1 Platen Cover Type R

DADF-AG1

Card Reader-F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3/B4

Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2

Printer Cover-E1 Color Image Reader Unit-H1

Reader Heater Unit-H1

USB Device Port-E3

Voice Operation Kit-C2

ADF Access Handle-A1

2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1 2.5inch/1TG HDD-K1 Removable HDD Kit-AJ1

Voice Guidance Kit-F2

HDD Mirroring Kit-F1 HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4

Serial Interface Kit-K1

Heater Kit-K1

Licence option

F-1-3

DADF-AG1

Product name

Platen Cover Type R ADF Access Handle-A1 Stamp Unit-B1 Reader Heater Unit-H1

Color Image Reader Unit-H1 Printer Cover-E1

Copy Control Interface Kit-A1

Required options, conditions, etc.

Paper weight: <1-sided> AB configuration: 42 to 128 g/m2, Inch configuration: 50 to 128 g/m2 <2-sided> 50 to 128 g/m2 Stacking capacity: 100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) -

Additional Expansion Bus-F2 Memory Type A (512MB)

It is the cover to be installed at the top of the host machine when using this equipment as a printer model. Option for ADF For 200V Use it to suppress the dew condensation in the reader unit. Heater Kit-K1 is required. ADF+Reader EU only It is the handle to support opening and closing the Feeder. EU only

Super G3 FAX Board-AP1 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AP1 Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1

F-1-4

T-1-4

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions

1-4

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions

●● Hardware Products Product name Utility Tray-A2 Card Reader-F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3/B4 Super G3 FAX Board-AP1 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AP1 Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1

Voice Guidance Kit-F2

Voice Operation Kit-C2 USB Device Port-E3 Additional Memory Type A (512MB)

Heater Kit-K1 2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1

2.5inch/1TB HDD-K1

Removable HDD Kit-AJ1 HDD Mirroring Kit-H1

1

1-5 Product name

Required options, conditions, etc. Using with Handset-G2 or Voice Operation Kit-C2 is not available. Copy Card Reader Installation Kit-A2 is required. Using with Serial Interface Kit-K1 and Control Interface Kit-A1 is not available. Required when Card Reader-F1 is installed. Fax transmission and reception are available. It is also possible to send a document created using the application by fax directly from a computer via the network. A board used when expanding and adding a second line to Super G3 FAX Board-AP1. Super G3 FAX Board-AP1 is required. A board used when expanding and adding a third or fourth line to Super G3 FAX Board-AP1. Super G3 FAX Board-AP1 , Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AP1 and Additional Memory Type A (512MB) is required. Using with Voice Operation Kit-C2 is not available. Recorded voice provides confirmation of basic copy menu settings, making the system easier to use for the visually impaired. Using with Voice Guidance Kit-F2 or Utility Tray-A2 is not available.Enables the user to set various functions on the device using verbal instructions and audible feedback. An option required when adding a USB port. When this equipment is connected, 2 USB ports can be added. No particular options and conditions are required. An option for increasing the memory installed as standard to this product. It is also required when using 600dpi color scan or when adding a third or fourth fax line. It is needed Heater Kit-K1 when installing the optional heater. This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Mirroring Kit-AJ1 or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4. No particular options and conditions are required. This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD Mirroring Kit-AJ1 or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4. No particular options and conditions are required. A kit used to house the built-in HDD in the dedicated case.

Required options, conditions, etc.

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4 An option used for reducing the risk of leakage of important data by encrypting the data stored in the HDD and for backing up the data in the HDD to the added Option HDD. When executing the mirroring function, either 2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1 or 2.5inch/1TB HDD-K1 is required. Expansion Bus-F2 Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2

NE Controller-C1

An option required when using an SD card, memory stick, CF card, or Microdrive. To install this equipment, USB Device Port-E3 needs to be installed. Required when the coin manager is connected. Using with Card Reader-F1 and Control Interface Kit-A1 is not available. Required when the coin manager is connected. Using with Card Reader-F1 and Serial Interface Kit-K1 is not available. No particular options and conditions are required.

eM Controller-C1

No particular options and conditions are required.

iR-ADV Security Kit-K1 for IEEE 2600.1 Common Criteria Certification Drum Heater-C1

No particular options and conditions are required.

Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2 Copy Control Interface Kit-A1

Heater Kit-K1 is required. T-1-5

Option HDD (2.5 inch/160 GB)-G1 or Option HDD (2.5 inch/1 TB)-K1 are required.

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions

1-5

1

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions

●● License Products

Product name

At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate included. Then, enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine, so that the applicable functions are enabled. There is no physical installation work at the time of installation. Product name PCL Printer Kit-AY1

Required options, conditions, etc.

Universal Send Digital User Signature Kit-C1

The PCL Printer Kit supports PCL emulation printing solutions. It supports PCL5c/PCL6 emulation printing solutions. The PS Printer Kit enables you to use the machine as a PS printer. It is also necessary when printing PDF files from memory media or the Advanced Space. Trace & Smooth PDF Searchable PDF or Searchable XPS Reader Extensions PDF Encrypted PDF Device Signature PDF or Device Signature XPS The Direct Print Kit (for PDF/XPS) enables you to print PDF and XPS files from the Remote UI. It is also necessary when printing PDF files from memory media or the Advanced Box. The Direct Print Kit (for PDF) enables you to print PDF files from the Remote UI. It is also necessary when printing PDF files from memory media or the Advanced Box. The Direct Print Kit (for XPS) enables you to print XPS files from the Remote UI. PDF/XPS with Digital User Signature.

Universal Send Trace & Smooth PDF Kit-A1

No particular options and conditions are required

Remote Operators Software Kit-B1

The Remote Operator's Software Kit enables you to access settings or process job from a personal computer by displaying the machine's control panel on the computer screen. The Encrypted Secure Print Software enables you to encrypt print data ent from a computer using the Secured Print function, and decrypt it at the machine. This enables you to strengthen the security of print data by preventing the contents of your printed documents from being seen by other users, and preventing the unauthorized use of confidential information.

PS Printer Kit-AY1

Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-D1/E1 Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1 Direct Print Kit (for PDF/XPS)-H1

Direct Print Kit (for PDF)-H1

Direct Print Kit (for XPS)-H1

Encrypted Secure Print Software-D1

1

1-6 Required options, conditions, etc.

Encrypted Printing Software-D1

The Encrypted Secure Print Software enables you to encrypt print data ent from a computer using the Secured Print function, and decrypt it at the machine. This enables you to strengthen the security of print data by preventing the contents of your printed documents from being seen by other users, and preventing the unauthorized use of confidential information. Barcode Printing Kit-D1 The Barcode Printing Kit enables you to print bar codes. Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 Offers embedded security to prevent copying of sensitive printed documents whilst providing the ability to analyse any security breach of the document. Access Management System Kit-B1 The Access Management System Kit enables you to restrict the use of various functions for each user. Restricting the Send function enables you to reduce the risk of confidential information being leaked, and restricting users from making onesided printing of multiple page documents enables printing costs to be reduced. Web Access Software-H1 The Remote Fax Kit is needed to use the Remote Fax function. Even if the machine is not equipped with the fax board, you can send fax documents via another imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine with the fax board installed on the same network. Remote Fax Kit-A1 Enables the device to send and receive fax from another device connected with a fax board. PCL International Font Set-A1 Adds PCL support for Andalé Mono WT J/K/ S/T(Japanese/Korean/ Simplified Chinese/ Traditional Chinese) Universal Send Advanced/Security Feature Set & US/CLA/CAN only PS/PCL Print Package-F1 The following options are bundled. • PCL Printer Kit-AY1 • PS Printer Kit-AY1 • Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-E1 • Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1 IP FAX Expansion Kit-A1 The subordination of the G3 FAX1 line is optional. IP - FAX are limited by a plural line and exclusive control.

Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions

T-1-6

1-6

1

Product Overview > Feature > Service Features > Service Mode

1-7

Feature

Service Features ■■Service Mode

Product feature

Waste toner container - User replaceable

The description of each service mode item is displayed as well.

Fixing film - Stainless steel is adopted for the heatsink to improve (efficiency of) heat radiation.

Low running cost High-speed support Laser scanner unit - Capable of 1200 dpi - 4-beam laser *1 *1:iRA 4025 is 2-beam.

Drum unit - Highly-durable OPC drum is adopted.

High image quality

High image quality

High-speed support

Low running cost

Next generation Controller High image quality High-speed support F-1-6 F-1-5

●● Features • Display in natural language • Items in the following are newly classified: COPIER > OPTION > BODY • Enhanced I/O information • The description of error code/alarm code is displayed. • Easy switching of screens between Level 1 and Level

1

Product Overview > Feature > Service Features > Service Mode

1-7

1

Product Overview > Feature > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications

■■Improved Upgrading Operability

1-8 ■■Jam/Error Code Display Specifications

Almost all of the options (*) can be upgraded through the host machine.

Jam code:

SST (Service Support Tool) is used for upgrading as usual.

“Jam Code” and “Location Code” are displayed on the screen (*) when a paper jam occurs.

* Excluding External Puncher-B2.

aabbbb aa: location bbbb: jam code インナーフィニッシャー・D1

F-1-8

ステイプルフィニッシャー・G1

外付け2 穴パンチャー・B2

中綴じフィニッシャー・G1 F-1-7

1

Product Overview > Feature > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications

1-8

1

Product Overview > Feature > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications

1-9

Error Code In addition to “Error Code”, “Location Code” is displayed on the screen when an error occurs.

Exxxxxx-yyyy-aa xxxxxx:エラーコード yyyy：詳細コード aa：発生箇所

F-1-9

Service Advantage When a paper jam/error is reported from the user: • The location (device) causing the paper jam/error can be recognized before the service technician is sent to the user site. • The cause of trouble and the remedy can be assumed before the service technician is sent to the user site. • Depending on the cause of the paper jam (e.g.: paper jam caused by wrong operation by the user), support can be completed by the phone or e-mail. (Visiting to the user site is not necessary.)

1

Product Overview > Feature > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications

1-9

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications

Specifications Product Specifications Item Copyboard Body Light source type Photosensitive medium Image reading method Reproduction method Exposure method Charging method Development method Transfer method Separation method Pickup method Fixing method Delivery method Reproduction ratio Drum cleaning method Toner type Toner replenish method Toner level detection function Image margin Non-Image Width Warm-up time

Number of gradations Reading resolution Writing resolution First print time Paper type (Cassette)

1

Specifications Stream reading, original fixed reading Desktop LED (white) OPC drum (30 mm dia) CCD Indirect electrostatic method Laser exposure system Roller charge Dry single component projection developing By transfer roller Curvature and static eliminator Cassette: Retard separation method Manual feed pickup tray: Pad separation method On demand Face down delivery (in-body delivery) 25% to 400% By cleaning blade Magnetic negative charge toner Toner cartridge Yes Top margin: 4.0 +1.5mm/-1.0mm Left margin: 2.5±1.5mm Leading Edge Non-Image Width: 4.0 +1.5mm/-1.0mm Left Non-Image Width: 2.5±1.5mm (2.5±2.0mm in ADF mode) 30 sec. or less (*1) When the room temperature is 20 degree C *1: Until the copy button is displayed on the top menu from when the operation display becomes effective after turning the power supply ON. 256 gradations 600×600dpi 1200×1200dpi iR ADVANCE 4251: 3.7 sec or less iR ADVANCE 4245/4235: 3.8 sec or less iR ADVANCE 4225: 5.2 sec or less plain paper 1 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/m2), plain paper 2 (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched paper, heavy paper 1 (91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2), heavy paper 2 (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)

Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications

1-10 Item Paper type (Manual feed pickup tray)

Paper size (Cassette 1) Paper size (Cassette 2)

Paper size (Manual feed pickup tray) Pickup capacity Duplex method Memory capacity HDD capacity Environment temperature range Environment humidity range Environment atmosphere range Noise (At the time of printing)

Rated power supply

Specifications transparency (52 g/m2 to 59 g/m2),plain paper 1 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/m2), plain paper 2 (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched paper, heavy paper 1 (91 g/m2 to 105 g/ m2), heavy paper 2 (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2), heavy paper 3 (129 g/m2 to 163 g/m2), heavy paper 4 (164 g/m2 to 220 g/m2), bond paper, labels, OHP, Envelopes (No.10 (COM10), ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL) A4, A4R, A5R, B4, B5, B5R, LTR, LTTR, LGL, STMTR, 8K, 16K, 16KR, EXEC Standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K,16KR, 279mmX432mm(11"X17"), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXEC, 304mmX457mm(12"X18")) Envelopes* (No.10 (COM10), ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL) * The optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 is required. Cassette feedable size Custom paper size (99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 431.8 mm) Cassette: 550 sheets (80g/m2), 680 sheets (64g/m2) Manual feed pickup tray: 80 sheets (80g/m2) Through path duplex For Main Controller 1: 1GB (standard) For Main Controller 2: MAX 768MB 256MB(standard),512MB(option) Standard: 160GB, Maximum: 1TB Refer to "Installation" in Chapter 610 to 1013 hpa (0.6 to 1.0 atmospheric pressure) iR ADVANCE 4251: 76.85 dB or less iR ADVANCE 4245: 74.75 dB or less iR ADVANCE 4235: 71.25 dB or less iR ADVANCE 4225: 67.75 dB or less iR ADVANCE 4251: AC120V (10.4A), AC230V (5.6A) iR ADVANCE 4245: AC120V (9.3A), AC230V (5.2A) iR ADVANCE 4235: AC120V (9.3A), AC230V (5.2A) iR ADVANCE 4225: AC120V (7.0A), AC230V (4.3A) *All the optional power supplies are supplied by the main body

1-10

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size

Item Power Maximum power consumption consumption At the time of printing

1-11

Weight and Size

Specifications 120-127V: 1.5kW or less 220-240V: 1.5kW or less

Product name Width (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm) Weight (kg) 565 708 902 77.9 imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251 / 4245/ 4235/ 4225 (with the DADF) 372 603 473 37 Paper Deck Unit-B2

120-127V: iR ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235: 105.0Wh(Reference) iR ADVANCE 4225: 688.4Wh(Reference) 220-240V: iR ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235: 944.0Wh(Reference) iR ADVANCE 4225: 681.8Wh(Reference) At the time of sleep 0.9W or less (In environmental heater switch OFF)

(Deep Sleep) At the time of standby

Dimension (WxDxH) Weight

120-127V: iR ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235: 80.9Wh(Reference) iR ADVANCE 4225: 78.2Wh(Reference) 220-240V: iR ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235: 101.9Wh(Reference) iR ADVANCE 4225: 103.2Wh(Reference) 565mm × 708mm × 769mm (with the platen cover) 565mm × 708mm × 902mm (with the DADF) Max (with the DADF): Approx. 78 kg Min (without the reader for EU): Approx 62 kg T-1-7

Staple Finisher-G1

648

646

1097

46

Booklet Finisher-G1

766

646

1097

75

External 2 Hole Puncher-B2

107

623

908

7.2

Color Image Reader Unit-H1

565

540

201

14.4

ADF-AG1

565

540

140

7.9

Inner Finisher-D1

697

554

295

12.0

Inner Hole Puncher-A1

144

531

216

7.7

Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1

565

650

248

27.5

Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1

384

450

70

1.5

Inner 2Way Tray-H1

427

407

76

0.57

Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1

439

307

81

1.2 T-1-8

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size

1-11

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4251

1-12

Productivity (Print speed) ■■iR ADVANCE 4251 Fixing mode

Transparency* (52 g/m2 to 59 g/ m2), plain paper 1 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/ m2), plain paper 2 (64 g/m2 to 90 g/ m2), recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched paper *The 2-sides print are impossible. And the paper feed is possible only from the multi-purpose tray. BOND

Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2)

Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2)

Heavy paper 3 (129 to 163 g/m2), heavy paper 4 (164 to 220 g/m2), labels OHP Envelope mode

Postcard mode S postcard mode

Size

A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR

A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),A4R,LTRR B4,LGL,8K B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),B4,LGL,8K,B5R, A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR,B5,EXEC,16K LTRR,A4R,B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR B4,LGL,8K A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17") A4/LTR Monarch ISO-C5 COM10 DL Postcard Postcard

iR ADVANCE 4251 Cassette

1-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

Cassette

2-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

51 51 37 22 25 20/18/14

30 30 21 15 17 17

51 -

51 51 37 22 25 20/18/14

30 30 21 15 17 17

51 -

30 30 21 14 17 17/16 28 17 14

25 14 13 17 30 30 21 14 17 17/16 28 17 14

30 28 -

30 30 21 14 17 17/16 -

25 14 13 17 30 30 21 14 17 17/16 -

30 -

12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 -

20, 30(label) 14, 21(label) 11, 17(label) 10, 14(label) 25 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 18/14/10 18/14/10

-

-

-

T-1-9

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4251

1-12

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4245

1-13

■■iR ADVANCE 4245 Fixing mode

Transparency* (52 g/m2 to 59 g/ m2), plain paper 1 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/ m2), plain paper 2 (64 g/m2 to 90 g/ m2), recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched paper *The 2-sides print are impossible. And the paper feed is possible only from the multi-purpose tray. BOND

Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2)

Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2)

Heavy paper 3 (129 to 163 g/m2), heavy paper 4 (164 to 220 g/m2), labels OHP Envelope mode

Postcard mode S postcard mode

Size

A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR

A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),A4R,LTRR B4,LGL,8K B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),B4,LGL,8K,B5R, A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR,B5,EXEC,16K LTRR,A4R,B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR B4,LGL,8K A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17") A4/LTR Monarch ISO-C5 COM10 DL Postcard Postcard

iR ADVANCE 4245 Cassette

1-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

Cassette

2-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

45 45 32 22 25 20/18/14

30 30 21 15 17 17

45 -

45 45 32 22 25 20/18/14

30 25 30 15 17 17

45 -

30 30 21 14 17 17/16 28 17 14

25 14 13 17 30 30 21 14 17 17/16 28 17 14

30 28 -

30 30 21 14 17 17/16 -

25 14 13 17 30 30 21 14 17 17/16 -

30 -

12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 -

20, 28(label) 14, 17(label) 11, 13(label) 10, 14(label) 25 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 18/14/10 14/10

-

-

-

T-1-10

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4245

1-13

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4235

1-14

■■iR ADVANCE 4235 Fixing mode

Transparency* (52 g/m2 to 59 g/ m2), plain paper 1 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/m2), plain paper 2 (64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched paper *The 2-sides print are impossible. And the paper feed is possible only from the multi-purpose tray. BOND

Size

A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR

A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),A4R,LTRR B4,LGL,8K B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2) A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2) A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),B4,LGL,8K,B5R,A 5R,STMTR,16KR Heavy paper 3 (129 to 163 g/m2), A4,LTR,B5,EXEC,16K heavy paper 4 (164 to 220 g/m2), LTRR,A4R,B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR B4,LGL,8K labels A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17") OHP A4/LTR Envelope mode Monarch ISO-C5 COM10 DL Postcard mode Postcard S postcard mode Postcard

iR ADVANCE 4235 Cassette

1-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

Cassette

2-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

35 35 32 22 25 20/18/14

30 30 21 15 17 17

35 -

35 35 32 22 25 20/18/14

30 25 30 15 17 17

35 -

30 30 21 14 17 17/16 28 17 14

25 14 13 17 30 30 21 14 17 17/16 28 17 14

30 28 -

30 30 21 14 17 17/16 -

25 14 13 17 30 30 21 14 17 17/16 -

30 -

12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 -

20, 28(label) 14, 17(label) 11, 13(label) 10, 14(label) 25 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 18/14/10 14/10

-

-

-

T-1-11

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4235

1-14

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4225

1-15

■■iR ADVANCE 4225 Fixing mode

Transparency* (52 g/m2 to 59 g/ m2), plain paper 1 (60 g/m2 to 63 g/ m2), plain paper 2 (64 g/m2 to 90 g/ m2), recycled paper, color paper, prepunched paper *The 2-sides print are impossible. And the paper feed is possible only from the multi-purpose tray. BOND

Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2)

Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2)

Heavy paper 3 (129 to 163 g/m2), heavy paper 4 (164 to 220 g/m2), labels OHP Envelope mode

Postcard mode S postcard mode

Size

iR ADVANCE 4225 Cassette

1-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

Cassette

2-sided Multi-purpose Tray

Deck

25 25 17 15 12 17/14

25 25 17 15 17 17/14

25 -

25 25 17 15 13 17/14

25 25 17 15 13 17/14

25 -

25 25 17 14 13 17/16 25 17 14 13 17/16 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 -

25 14 13 17/14 25 25 17 14 13 17/16 25 17 14 13 17/16 20, 25(label) 14, 17(label) 11, 13(label) 10, 14(label) 25 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 12/10/8 18/14/10 14/10

25 25 -

25 25 17 14 13 17/16 -

25 14 13 17/14 25 25 17 14 13 17/16 -

25 -

A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR

A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),A4R,LTRR B4,LGL,8K B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR B5,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17"),8K B4,LGL B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR,EXEC,16K A4R,LTRR A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17") B4,LGL,8K B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR A4,LTR,B5,EXEC,16K LTRR,A4R,B5R,A5R,STMTR,16KR B4,LGL,8K A3,279mmX432mm(11"X17") A4/LTR Monarch ISO-C5 COM10 DL Postcard Postcard

T-1-12

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print speed) > iR ADVANCE 4225

1-15

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

1-16

NOTE: The copy speed changes by temperature of the fixing unit and paper size. The value "*/*" in the list express a greatest / minimum.

Paper Type Following shows the types of usable papers. See the table below for the custom paper size. Type Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length)

Feeding direction (mm) 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0

Width direction (mm) 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 T-1-13

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

1-16

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

1-17

Kinds of usable paper Yes: It is possible to feed paper. / Under guarantee Yes*1: It is possible to feed paper. / Out of guarantee No: It is impossible to feed paper. Type

Thin paper (52 to 59 g/m2)

1

Size

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9

297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9

A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes *1 Yes *1 No No

No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

No No No Yes *1 No No No No No No Yes *1 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-17

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Thin paper (52 to 59 g/m2)

Recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2) Color paper (64 to 80 g/m2) Plain paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2) Plain paper 2 (64 to 90 g/m2)

1

Size

1-18

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A3 B4

148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0

A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19")

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No

No No No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No

No No No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No

No No No No No No No No No

420.0 364.0

297.0 257.0

Yes Yes

No Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

No No

297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6

210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No

No Yes No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-18

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2) Color paper (64 to 80 g/m2) Plain paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2) Plain paper 2 (64 to 90 g/m2)

Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2)

1

Size

K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R

1-19

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

Yes Yes No No Yes Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *1

Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No No No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

No No No Yes No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-19

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Heavy paper 1 (91 to 105 g/m2)

Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2)

1

Size

GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO

1-20

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No No No No No

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No No

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

No No No Yes No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No

1-20

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Heavy paper 2 (106 to 128 g/m2)

Heavy paper 3 (129 to 163 g/m2)

1

Size

A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC

1-21

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No No No No No

Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No No No Yes No Yes No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-21

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Heavy paper 3 (129 to 163 g/m2)

Heavy paper 4 (164 to 220 g/m2)

1

Size

EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR

1-22

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-22

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Heavy paper 4 (164 to 220 g/m2)

Bond paper (75 to 90 g/m2)

1

Size

STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5

1-23

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

Yes No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

1-23

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Bond paper (75 to 90 g/m2)

Labels

1

Size

A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A3 B4 A4R

1-24

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 420.0 364.0 297.0

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

297.0 257.0 210.0

Yes *1 Yes Yes

No No No

No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No

No No No

No No No

1-24

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Labels

1

Size

A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length)

1-25

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0

297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

Yes Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes *1 Yes *1 No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-25

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Pre-Punched paper

1

Size

A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2

1-26

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0 340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8

297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0 220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes *1 Yes *1 No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1

No Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No No

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No No

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No No

No No No Yes No No No No No No Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-26

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Pre-Punched paper

OHP Postcard

Envelope

Transparency (64 to 80 g/m2)

1

Size

Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length) A4 LTR Postcard Reply Postcard 4 On 1 Postcard COM10 Monarch ISO-C5 ISO-B5 DL A3 B4 A4R A4 B5R B5 A5 A5R 11x17 LGL LTR LTRR STMTR STMT SRA3 304mmX457mm(12"X18") EXEC EXEC-R OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO

1-27

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 210.0 215.9 148 200 200 241.3 190.5 229 250 220 420.0 364.0 297.0 210.0 257.0 182.0 148.0 210.0 431.8 355.6 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 450.0 457.2 184.1 266.7 317.5 320.0 355.0 341.0

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No

No No No No No

No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No

297.0 279.4 100 148 296 104.7 98.4 162 176 110 297.0 257.0 210.0 297.0 182.0 257.0 210.0 148.0 279.4 215.9 279.4 215.9 139.7 215.9 320.0 304.8 266.7 184.1 215.9 220.0 216.0 216.0

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 No No No Yes *1 No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No

No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No

No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1-27

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

Type

Transparency (64 to 80 g/m2)

Size

A-OFFICIO FOLIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR GLGL AFLS FLS 330mmX483mm(13"X19") K8 K16 K16R F4A Free size Free size (long length) Custom paper size 1-1 Custom paper size 1-2 Custom paper size 2-1 Custom paper size 2-2 Custom paper size 3-1 Custom paper size 3-2 Custom paper size 5 (long length)

1-28

Feeding direction (mm)

Width direction (mm)

340.0 330.0 220.0 280.0 266.7 203.2 330.2 337.0 330.2 482.6 390.0 195.0 270.0 342.9 148.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 148.0 to 181.9 182.0 to 431.8 431.9 to 630.0

220.0 210.0 280.0 220.0 203.2 266.7 203.2 206.0 215.9 330.2 270.0 270.0 195.0 215.9 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 139.6 99.0 to 139.6 139.7 to 147.9 139.7 to 147.9 148.0 to 297.0 148.0 to 297.0 99.0 to 297.0

Multi-purpose Tray

Cassette 1

No No No No No No No No No No Yes *1 Yes *1 No No Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1 Yes *1

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Pickup position Cassette 2 Cassette 3 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Cassette 4

Side Paper Deck

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No T-1-14

1

Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type

1-28

1

Product Overview > External View/Internal View > Cross Sectional View

1-29

External View/Internal View

Cross Sectional View CCD Unit

External View

Toner Cartridge

Drum Unit

■■External Cover

Delivery Assembly

DADF (standard or optional) Reader front cover

Control panel

Reader left cover

Rear left cover

Support cover

Delivery tray

Fixing Assembly

Toner supply cover

Inside base cover

Front cover

Drum

Cassette 1

Left cover

Cassette 2 Lower left cover F-1-10

Platen glass Reader rear cover

Reader right cover

Rear cover

Right cover

Lower Rear cover

Manual feed pickup tray

Laser Scanner Developing Cassette 2 Unit Assembly Cassette 1 Toner Supply Assembly F-1-12

Right cover (lower rear)

Right cover (upper rear) F-1-11

1

Product Overview > External View/Internal View > Cross Sectional View

1-29

1

Product Overview > Operation > Power Switch > Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch

Operation

1-30 ■■Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch • Do not turn OFF the Main Power Switch while the progress bar (to be displayed when the

Power Switch

power is turned ON) is displayed, which indicates access to the HDD. • Be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch to cut the power (there is no need to perform

■■Types of power switch

the shutdown sequence which has been performed with the conventional machines).

This machine has the Main Power Switch, the Energy Saver key and the Environment Heater Switch. Turning ON the Main Power Switch supplies the power in the usual case (except when the

• After turning OFF the power (after turning OFF the Main Power Switch), do not turn ON the Main Power Switch unless the screen disappears. • Do not turn OFF the power during downloading.

machine is in sleep mode). The Environment Switch supplies or blocks the power to the Drum Heater, the Cassette Heater and the Reader Heater. Energy Saver key.

Main Power Switch

Environment Heater Switch

F-1-13

1

Product Overview > Operation > Power Switch > Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch

1-30

1

Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Main Menu

1-31

Control Panel

■■Main Menu ●● Menu screen

■■Control Panel 6

9

Energy Saver

Main Menu

7

1

8

Quick Menu

2

1

Settings/Registration

2

3

4

10 Log In/Out

Start

Reset

Status Monitor/Cancel

11

15

14

12 17

5

Scan and Send

Stop

16

3 4

Clear

Processing/Date

Error

Main Power

5 13 F-1-14

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

Main Menu Key Custom Menu Key Check/Stop Status Key Volume Adjustment Key Brightness Adjustment Key Touch Panel Display Energy Saver key.

[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

Settings/registration Key Check Counter Key Stop Key Operation Pen ID Key Clear Key Reset Key

[8] [9]

USB Slot Numeric Key

[17] Start Key

6

7

8

Fax / I-Fax Inbox 9

F-1-15 T-1-15

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

Copy Scan and Send Scan and Save Access Stored F Fax/I-Fax Inbox Secured Print Introduction to Useful Features Remote Scanner Shortcut to Settings/Registration T-1-16

1

Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Main Menu

1-31

1

Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Settings/Registration Menu

1-32 ■■Settings/Registration Menu

●● Differences in Main Menu iR 3245 Series Copy Send/Fax Box

Menu Switch Key ----Remote Scanner ---------

iR ADVANCE 4251 Series

●● Menu screen

Copy Scan and Send Scan and Save (New) Access Stored Files (New) Fax/I-Fax Inbox ----Secured Print Remote Scanner Shortcut to Settings/Registration (New) Introduction to Useful Features

Settings/Registration Select an item to set

TOP

Preferences

1

Adjustment/Maintenance T-1-17

2

Function Settings

3

Set Destination

1/1

Management Settings

4 5

OK

Log in

F-1-16

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

Preferences Adjustment/Maintenance Function Settings Set Destination Management Settings T-1-18

●● Differences in Settings/Registration Menu iR 3245 Series Common Settings Timer Setting Adjustment/Cleaning System Settings Output Report Copy Settings Send/Receive Settings Mail Box Settings Address Book Settings

iR ADVANCE 4251 Series Preferences Adjustment/Maintenance Management Settings Function Settings

Set Destination T-1-19

1

Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Settings/Registration Menu

1-32

2

2

Technology

Technology ■ Configuration ■Basic ■ Exposure System ■Original (Reader) ■ Controller ■Main ■ Exposure System ■Laser ■ Formation System ■Image ■ System ■Fixing ■ Feed System ■Pickup ■ Auxiliary System ■External ■ ■MEAP ■ RDS ■Embedded ■ ■Updater ■ ■DCM

2

Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration

2-2

Basic Configuration Functional Configuration The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.

Original exposure system Reader controller PCB

Exposure lamp

CCD

Controller system HDD

Main controller 1/2

Option board

DC controller

Delivery Fixing system

Fixing

Laser exposure system Laser scanner unit

Transfer Image formation system

Cassette 1

Flow of paper Flow of signal Laser beam

Duplexing feed

Pickup

Pickup/feed system

Cassette 2

F-2-1

2

Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration

2-2

2

Technology > Specifications (Reader)

Original Exposure System (Reader) Features (Reader) • Adapting new CCD unit, allows low power consumption. • Improvement of the CCD unit disassembly

2-3

Specifications (Reader) ■■Specifications Item Original exposure Original scan In book mode In ADF mode Read resolution

Indirect exposure by LED (LED & photoconductive body) Scan by movement of CCD Stream reading with CCD fixed 600 dpi (main scanning) x 600 dpi (sub scanning)

Gradation Carriage position detection Magnification

256 gradation CCD HP sensor (S11) 25% to 400%

Main scanning direction Sub scanning direction Lens CCD CCD unit drive control Original size In book mode detection In ADF mode

Specification/function

Image is processed on main controller PCB 2 In book mode: speed change by carriage travel, image process on main controller PCB *1 In ADF mode: original feed speed change, image process on main controller PCB *1 ST lens Number of lines: 4 (R, G, B, B/W) Number of pixels: 7500 x 3 color lines, 7500 x 1 B/W line Maximum original read width: 317.5mm By scanner motor (M14) Main scanning direction: by CCD Sub scanning direction: by reflection sensor Main scanning direction: by photo interrupter on DADF Sub scanning direction: by photo interrupter on DADF T-2-1

*1 Controls differ depending on magnifications. Refer to [Magnifications] for more information.

2

Technology > Specifications (Reader)

2-3

2

Technology > Names of Parts (Reader)

2-4

Names of Parts (Reader)

■■Major Components Following shows major components of document exposure system.

■■External View

UN4

M14

Reader rear cover H6 S13

S14 S15 S12 S11

Reader front cover

H6

Reader left cover

CCD unit F-2-2

■■Cross Section CCD unit

ADF scan glass

F-2-4

Item Scanner motor CCD HP sensor Copyboard Cover Open/ Closed Sensor (front) Copyboard Cover Open/ Closed Sensor (rear) Original Size Sensor 1

Platen glass

F-2-3

Notation

Specification/function

M14 S11 S12

Pulse motor: controls the carriage drive Detects CCD home position Ends original size identification with the copy board cover at 5 deg

S13

Detects the copyboard cover open/close. Starts original size identification with the copy board cover at 30 deg.

S15

Helps identify original size(AB, INCH/AB/K, A)

Original Size Sensor 2 CCD unit

S14 -

Reader Heater (Option) Reader controller PCB

H6 UN4

Helps identify original size(INCH/AB/K, INCH/A) Indirect exposure by LED (LED & photoconductive body) Prevents condensation on the copyboard glass Controls the reader unit drive and image process T-2-2

2

Technology > Names of Parts (Reader)

2-4

2

Technology > Names of Parts (Reader)

2-5

■■Reader Relay PCB The function configuration of reader controller PCB is described below.

J501 J508 J507 J503

J506

J504 J505

J509

J502

J510

F-2-5

Jack No J501 J502 J503 J504 J505 J506 J507 J508 J509 J510

Description Communication with CCD Communication with main controller PCB Connection to Scanner motor Receives power from the machine (printer unit) Power supply to DADF Connection to copyboard cover open/close sensor and CCD HP sensor Connection to original size sensor 2 Connection to original size sensor 1 Communication with DADF Not used T-2-3

2

Technology > Names of Parts (Reader)

2-5

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-6

Controls (Reader)

●● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (ADF mode/1 original) Copy start

■■Basic Sequence

(Scanner motor)

●● Basic Sequence at Power-On

B

Dust detection control F F F B F

ON

(CCD HP sensor )

STBY

(Scanner motor)

B

B F F F B F

Light-ON

(LED)

End

In stream reading

Light-ON

ON Shading correction

F Light-ON

(LED) (CCD HPsensor)

F-2-8

Dust detection control

ON

This is activated when any of the following conditions is true. • Dust has been detected in all 3 locations at previous 1 job.

CCD adjustment F-2-6

Footnote

• Dust detection could not be activated due to JAM etc at previous job. Footnote

• F: Scanner motor moves forward (toward right).

• F: Scanner motor moves forward (toward right).

• B: Scanner motor moves backward (toward left).

• B: Scanner motor moves backward (toward left).

• Light-ON: LED on CCD unit lights-on.

• Light-ON: LED on CCD unit lights-on.

• ON: When CCD HP sensor (photo interrupter type) detects.

• ON: When CCD HP sensor (photo interrupter type) detects.

●● Basic Sequence at Start Key ON (book mode/1 original) Copy start (Scanner motor) (LED) (CCD HP sensor )

B

End

In reading F

B

F

Light-ON

ON

ON Shading correction F-2-7

Footnote • F: Scanner motor moves forward (toward right). • B: Scanner motor moves backward (toward left). • Light-ON: LED on CCD unit lights-on. • ON: When CCD HP sensor (photo interrupter type) detects.

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-6

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-7

■■Controlling the Scanner Drive System

●● Scanner Motor Control 1) Forward movement when scanning an image

●● Configuration of drive system

CCD operation is controlled by the following sensors when scanning the image.

Parts configuration of scanner drive is described below.

Start position position

Scanner motor (M14) Reader controller PCB (UN4)

Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (S13)

Carriage drive belt

Normal speed

Acceleration

Sensor light block sheet

Original trailing edge

Original leading edge

Stop

Deceleration

Shift speed Forward

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Shift distance Backward

[1]Acceleration area: Accelerates until a speed suited to the selected mode is reached [2]Run-up speed area: Run-up margin to ensure a stable speed. [3]Image reading area: Reads an image at a specific speed. [4]Deceleration area: Decelerates and stops promptly once the image end is reached.

Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (S12)

F-2-10

CCD unit

CCD HP sensor (S11)

NOTE: The scanning speed of this machine is as follows. Black/white (600dpi x 600dpi):260 mm/sec Color SEND(600dpi x 300dpi):140 mm/sec

Guide shaft F-2-9

• Scanner motor (M14) drive signal Turns on/off the motor and controls its direction/speed of rotation. • CCD HP sensor (S11) detection signal Checks if CCD is at home position.

2) Backward movement after scanning an image After scanning an image, CCD moves backward to CCD shading position at a specific speed (260 mm/sec).

• Copyboard cover open/closed sensor (front: S12/rear: S13) detection signal Detects the open/close status of the copyboard cover

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-7

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-8

■■CCD Unit ●● Overview The machine uses the CCD to expose and read an image and the image is read on a line-byline basis. CCD features 4 lines (R, G, B, B/W) and B/W line is used in B/W copy and R, G, B lines are used at color scan.

LED (light source)

CCD overview 1. Integrated scanning configuration; CCD, lens, light source and mirror are integrated. 2. Light source: LED 3. Effective number of pixel: 7500 pix x 3 color lines, 7500 pix x 1 B/W line 4. Color filter: Colored filter (Red/Green/Blue) [Optical path from LED] The light generated from LED is reflected by an original and by the 5 mirrors. And then it is irradiated to the CCD through the lens.

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

Photoconductive body

2-8

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-9 Items CCD Lens LED(light source) Mirror No. 1 - 5 CCD PCB

Description

F-2-11

Receives the reflected light that has gone through the lens and converts it into electric signal to output it. Collects the light reflected by an original. Light source to expose an original to laser Return the light CCD drive, analog image process, A/D conversion, A/D conversion, backup of the service mode about the reader and ADF T-2-4

Lens

LED (light source) mirror No.4 mirror No.3 mirror No.2

CCD PCB mirror No.1

mirror No.5 Lens

CCD Red (R) line Green (G) line Blue (B) line Black & White (B/W) line

F-2-12

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-9

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-10

■■Enlargement/Reduction

■■Detecting the Size of Originals

●● Magnifications in Main Scanning Direction

●● Overview

In book mode/ADF mode

The machine identifies the original size by the combination of measurement result of reflection

An image is read at 100% in main scanning direction. Magnification variation and its data

light from the reflection sensor and specific points of CCD. Also to identify it accurately even

process are controlled on main controller PCB 2.

though an original moves when ADF is closed, the machine measures 2 points for each size. • Main scanning direction: CCD (AB type: 12 points measurement, inch type: 6 points

●● Magnification in Sub Scanning Direction

measurement) • Sub scanning direction: Reflection type photo sensor (AB type: 1 point, inch type: 1 point,

To vary the magnification of sub scanning direction, the machine operates as below

AB/inch type: 2 point)

depending on the original reading methods and the magnifications.

The followings are the procedures of original size identification.

1) Magnifications in book mode

1) External light search (main scanning direction only)

To suite the selected rate of magnification, the machine changes the speed of original

According to the LED status, the machine identifies the CCD level of each detection

reading and executes data processing on main controller PCB 2. e.g.) Reduction to 25%: an original is read at 260mm/s, and the data is processed for 25% reduction (skipping for 4/1) by the main controller PCB 2.

The machine turns on the LED on CCD unit and measures the CCD level of each detection

e.g.) at 100%: an original is read at 260mm/s. Operation 25% to 50% Speed change of original reading (mm/sec) Digital magnification process (%) on the main controller PCB 2

position in main scanning direction. 2) Output level detection of each sensor

Magnifications 50.1% to 199.9% 200% to 400%

260

260

130

25 to 50

50.1 to 199.9

100 to 200 T-2-5

2) Magnifications in ADF mode

position in main scanning direction. Also, turns on the LED on reflection type photo sensor in sub scanning direction and measures the sensor output. The original size is identified by the combination of these output result.

●● Control Details For main scanning direction, the machine moves the CCD unit to the following CCD original

To suite the selected rate of magnification, the machine changes the speed of original

detection positions according to the location of original to measure the CCD level of each

reading and executes data processing on main controller PCB 2. e.g.) Reduction to 25%: an original is read at 260mm/s and the data is processed for 25% reduction (skipping 4/1) by the main controller PCB.

detection position. For sub scanning direction, the machine uses the original sensor 1, 2 to identify sizes.

e.g.) Enlargement to 200%: an original is read at 130mm/s and the data is processed for 100% direct reproduction by main controller PCB. Operation 25% to 50% Speed change of original reading (mm/sec) Digital magnification process (%) on the main controller PCB 2

Magnifications 50.1% to 199.9% 200% to 400%

260

260

130

25 to 50

50.1 to 199.9

100 to 200 T-2-6

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-10

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-11

AB type

1. 2 points original detection at each detection position For each point of measurement in main scanning direction, the machine checks the presence/absence of an original with reference to the CCD output at 2 points near the point of measurement.

Original sensor 1

* The machine checks if the signal is changed or not from ADF (pressure plate) open to close Original detection position 1 Original detection position 2

at both points of 1A and 1B.

A5R

Change in the signal: Yes

B5R

Original detection A5 position 3 Original detection B5 position 4 Original detection position 5

Change in the signal: No

A4R K16

Original detection position 6

Judgment is done by the measurement results of 1A and 1B, and it indicates the presence B4

A4

K8

of original if either point shows No (absence). It indicates absence of original if both signals show Yes (presence).

A3

CCD original detection position

Borderline of original size

Inch type

approx 13mm

1A=additional detection point 1

Original sensor 2 Original detection STMTR position 1

Original detection position 2 STMT Original detection LTR position 3

approx 4mm

Borderline of original size LTRR

LGL

F-2-14

279.4×431.8mm (11"×17")

CCD original detection position F-2-13

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

1B=conventional detection point 2

Change

Result of detection

1A

1B

Yes No Yes No

Yes Yes No No

Original absence Original presence Original presence Original presence T-2-7

2-11

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-12

2. Priority on the front sensor When checking the measurements for main scanning direction, if the absence of an original is indicated at the rear while the presence of an original is indicated at the front, the machine will give priority to the indication at the front.

●● Detection Operation Overview 1) Standby state (The following is in case that the AB type, A4R size is set.) CCD unit: shading position LED: OFF Original sensor: OFF

Rear side

CCD unit Copyboard glass Original sensor 1

Original sensor

Position of detection 1

ADF

Position of detection 2

Reader unit

CCD original detection position

Position of detection 3 Position of B5 detection 4 Position of detection 5 Position of detection 6 Front side

Position of detection 1 Position of detection 2 Position of detection 3 Position of detection 4 Position of detection 5 Position of detection 6

F-2-16

2) ADF opened CCD unit: moves to original detection position LED: OFF Original sensor: OFF

CCD original detection position F-2-15

In case of B5 size original Position of detection

Result of detection

Result of identification

1 2 3 4 5 6

Yes No Yes Yes No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

(External light)

F-2-17

3) ADF closed T-2-8

CCD unit: in original detection position LED: OFF to ON Original sensor: in original detection operation • With the ADF angle at 25 deg or less, the external light is blocked at the original width area. Then, the machine determines that the original is absent at the points that the external light is detected (external light search operation). When the original mount sensor (rear) detects [close], original size detection is started. In this case, B5/B4/A4/ A3 size is eliminated at this point.

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-12

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-13

• After external light search, LED is turned ON at main scanning side and the CCD checks the reflection light (4 points). For sub scanning direction, original sensor detects the size.

5) Standby status (waiting for start key) CCD unit: in original detection position LED: OFF Original sensor: OFF

(External light)

F-2-18 F-2-21

25 deg

F-2-19

4) ADF fully closed (5 deg or less) CCD unit: in original detection position LED: ON Original sensor: in original detection operation • For 2 sec from the original mount sensor (front) detected [close], this monitors the changes of output level of each sensor. The machine determines that the original is present in the position where the level is not changed. The machine identifies the original size by the combination of level changes at 5 points (in case of AB type size).

5 deg

F-2-20

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-13

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-14

■■Dirt Sensor Control

[Particulars of control] • At the end of a job (dust detection)

●● Overview The machine changes the original read point or executes image correction depending on the presence/absence of dust on the stream reading glass or the platen roller of the ADF to prevent the dust from showing up in the output. These operations are carried out only when the ADF is in use and, in addition, is closed.

CCD checks the light reflected by the surface of the platen roller of the ADF at the read point to detect the presence/absence of dust. Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order. The point where least dust is detected will be used as the read position for the next job. The point selected here will be used as the read position for the next job. • At the start of a job (dust bypass) Presence of dust is detected at points A, B, and C in this order in the same manner as at

[Control timing]

the end of the job. Read will take place at the point where least dust is detected.

• At the end of a job • Between sheets (for each reading of a sheet) • At the start of a job (only when any of the following conditions is true.) Dust detected at all points of detection at the end of the previous job Dust detection failed to end normally at the end of the previous job (e.g., ADF opened) Main power switch ON WMUP

Start key ON STBY

1st SCAN Dust detection Dust detection control control

2nd SCAN Dust detection control

A

B

C

F-2-22

F-2-23

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-14

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-15 ■■Image Processing

• Between sheets The machine does not move CCD. It reads the original using the position determined at the end or start of a job; however, if the presence of dust is still detected at the position, the machine will execute image

●● Overview The functions of image processing system’s PCB are described below. • Main controller PCB • CCD PCB

correction.

Shading correction (executed per each job), CCD drive, analog image process, A/D conversion, A/D conversion, backup of the service mode about the reader and ADF

The machine uses the main controller PCB to process images for every single image line. Specific functions are as follows. a. Main controller PCB 0.5mm

0.5mm

Platen roller

• Shading correction • Color offset correction in sub scanning b. CCD PCB (inside CCD unit) • CCD drive

A B C

• CCD output gain correction, offset correction CCD PCB CCD (4lines)

Stream reading glass

Reader controller PCB Analog image signal

ASIC

EEP-ROM

CCD drive control

F-2-24

Service Mode (Lv1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L1 (used to adjust the dust detection level between sheets) (Lv1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR > DFDST-L2 (used to adjust the dust detection level at the end of a job)

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

Analog image process - gain correction - offset correction

A/D conversion

Shading correction Color offset correction in sub scanning

Gain correction data

SRAM CPU

Digital image signal

CCD/AP PCB F-2-25

2-15

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-16

●● CCD Drive

●● Shading Correction (Overview)

The machine's CCD sensor is a 4-line linear image sensor consisting of 7500 pixels. After

The output of the CCD is not necessarily even for the following factors even when the density

completion of photoelectric conversion in the light-receiving block, the signals are output to

of the original is uniform:

the analog front end PCB unit on CCD PCB in parallel for each channel (Color scan: R, G, B

1) Variation in the sensitivity of the CCD among pixels

B/W scan: B/W) of the CCD array.

2) Variation in the intensity of the rod lens array 3) Variation in the intensity of light that goes through the center and surroundings of lens 4) Variation in the intensity of light at the center and surroundings of LED 5) LED deterioration The machine executes shading correction to even out the output of the CCD. Shading correction may be the shading correction executed for each job.

Red(R)line Green(G)line Blue(B)line Black & white(B/W)line

●● Shading Correction The machine executes the shading correction for every scan made. In this correction, the analog image process unit on CCD PCB digitalizes the LED light reflected by the standard white board. After the reflected light is digitalized, it is held in the

Expanse

shading correction circuit on main controller PCB as a shading coefficient. Shading correction circuit compares the stored target value with the shading coefficient. The difference between the two will be held as the shading correction value for use in correcting variation among CCD pixels when scanning the original, thus evening out the density levels of the image.

Light-receiving block

CCD output

Output L

L H H L H L

Features after correction

H H H L ………

Target value F-2-26

●● Gain Correction and Offset Correction of CCD Output

Features before correction

Measurement value

The analog video signal generated by the CCD is corrected so that it will have a specific level (gain correction); moreover, the output voltage occurring in the absence of incident light is also corrected so that it will have a specific level (offset correction).

●● A/D Conversion of CCD Output The corrected analog video signal is converted into a digital signal that is suited to the voltage

White

Original density Standard white plate F-2-27

level of individual pixels by the A/D converter.

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-16

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-17

■■Color offset correction in sub scanning When R, G and B are not accurately synchronized in sub scanning, the color offset correction will be made so that RED and BLUE synchronize with GREEN by shifting RED and BLUE image within single pixel in the sub scanning direction. Example) For GREEN, RED offsets upward and BLUE offsets downward in the scan for black line image. Color offset in sub scanning R-G

1 line

Color offset in sub scanning G-B

Before correction

After correction F-2-28

MEMO: Outstanding point of this CCD unit:

• Corrective values are different by the position in the main scanning.

There are 12 corrective values in the book scan and 4 values in the ADF scan for the color offset correction. The color offset corrections have been made at the factory and all the corrective values have been stored in the service mode. (In COPIER > ADJUST > CCD) At the beginning of job, color offset correction is performed based on the stored corrective values. Book scan 100%

50%

Main scanning position 0 100-RG 100-GB (rear)

50-RG 50-GB

Main scanning position 1 100-RG-2 100-GB-2 (center)

50-RG-2 50-GB-2

Main scanning position 2 100-RG-3 100-RG-3 (front)

50-RG-3 50-GB-3

ADFADF scan 100%

50%

100DF-RG 100DF-GB

50DF-RG 50DF-GB

T-2-9

2

Technology > Controls (Reader)

2-17

2

Technology > Controls (Reader) > Servicing (Reader) > Troubleshooting

2-18

Servicing (Reader) ■■Periodically Replaced Parts None

■■Consumable Parts None

■■Periodical Servicing None

■■Action to take when replacing parts Part name CCD unit

Copyboard glass

Stream reading glass

Action • Platen board cover white level automatic adjustment • ADF white level adjustment (This action is applicable only when the DADF is installed in the host machine.) • The values input of the label included to the new CCD unit • White plate data adjustment • Platen board cover white level automatic adjustment • ADF white level adjustment (This action is applicable only when the DADF is installed in the host machine.) • Platen board cover white level automatic adjustment • ADF white level adjustment T-2-10

■■Major Adjustments None

■■Troubleshooting None

2

Technology > Controls (Reader) > Servicing (Reader) > Troubleshooting

2-18

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Features

2-19

Main Controller

Main Controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the Riser (connector for interface). Removability/installability of Main Controller PCB 1 has been improved by introducing this configuration (Slot-in/out)

Overview ■■Features Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high functionality. Main Controller PCB 1

Main Controller PCB 2

F-2-30

F-2-29

Main Controller PCB 1 controls the entire system while Main Controller PCB 2 mainly controls image processing.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Features

2-19

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration

2-20

■■Specifications/configuration

●● Memory Main controller PCB 1

●● PCBs

BAT1

HDD(Option) Main Controller PCB 2

HDD(Standard) Main Controller PCB 1

Flash PCB TPM PCB F-2-31

Parts name Function, specifications, features Main controller PCB CPU: 1.2 GHz, Control of the entire system Various controls (HDD control, memory, control panel, electric power, voice), 1 Flash PCB TPM PCB

Main controller PCB 2

HDD

I/Fs (PCI, USB(host), USB(devise), LAN), RTC Boot program To generate and save encryption key Available only when TPM settings is ON: Management Settings> Data Management> TPM Settings (default: OFF) Not available with China models CPU: 400 MHz, Image control Image processing (resolution conversion, image rotation, halftone process, scanner image process, printer image process, compression/ decompression, decoding, direct mapping, image area determination, generation of histogram, Trimming, Masking) , USB(devise) control, I/F (Reader, Printer, FAX, HDD, Power supply) 2.5 inch SATA I/F Standard: 160 GB Up to 2 HDDs can be mounted in the case of mirroring configuration. BOX data, Address book, security information (password, certificate) Op.: (2.5 inch / 160 GB) HDD-G1, (2.5 inch / 1 TB) HDD-K1

F-2-32

Parts name DDR2-SDRAM

Function, specifications, features

2 slot / 1GB (standard) Clock frequency: 333 MHz Used for saving image, program data Lithium battery (BAT1) For RTC Life: approx. 10 years T-2-12

T-2-11

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration

2-20

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration

2-21 ●● I/F, connector

Main controller PCB 2

Main controller PCB 1 Voice J13 Memory PCB Mini-USB J6 UI J4 DDR2-SDRAM

FAN J15 LAN J7

Riser J17

USB (D) J3 F-2-33

Parts name DDR2-SDRAM

USB (H) J5

Function, specifications, features

256 MB (standard) / clock frequency: 200MHz Scanner image process, printer image process, resolution conversion, compression/decompression, coding/decoding 512 MB (Op) / clock frequency: 200MHz DDR2-SDRAM Product name: Additional Memory Type A (512MB) Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding/decoding Required when 600dpi color scanning (mode) is used or Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1 16 Mbit SRAM To save data in Settings/Registration Mode/ Service Mode and image data management information in HDD Lithium battery (BAT1) For SRAM backup, Life: approx. 10 years

CC-VI J21

Coin J20

TPM PCB J8

Flash PCB J11

PCI J1025

F-2-34

No. J3 J4 J5 J6

T-2-13

J7 J8 J11

Function, specifications USB I/F (Device) UI:Control panel I/F USB I/F (Host) For MEAP, For USB keyboard (Op.) Mini-USB I/F Connect USB Device Port-D1(Op.) USB Device Port-D1 is required when using Mobile Connect Kit-A1 (sold separately). LAN I/F 1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T TPM PCB I/F Flash PCB I/F

No. J13 J15 J17 J20

J21

Function, specifications Voice I/F (Op.) FAN:Fan I/F Riser I/F To connect Main Controller PCB 2 Coin:I/F for card reader, I/F for serial interface kit, I/F for coin manager (all Op.)

CC-VI:I/F for control interface kit (Op.)

J1025 PCI expansion PCB I/F (Op.) T-2-14

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration

2-21

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration

2-22 ●● Function expansion options

Main controller PCB 2

Main controller PCB1

Reader J8133

Voice Guidance PCB Voice Operation PCB

Memory PCB J8134 Data Analyzer Board J208 FAX Control J206

FAX Power Supply J205

Riser J101

DC Controller Control J8112 Laser Data J8143 USB-FAX HDD J204 J102

F-2-36

HDD Power Laser Control Power Supply J8142 Supply J8130 J103

Name Function, specifications, features Voice guidance PCB Product name: Voice Guidance Kit-F2 (only for non-Japanese models),Voice Voice Operation PCB Operation Kit-C2(only for Japanese models) T-2-16

F-2-35

No.

Function, specifications

J101 Riser I/F To connect Main Controller PCB 1 J102 HDD I/F J103 HDD Power Supply I/F J204 USB-FAX I/F for 2 to 4-lines FAX Product name: Advanced G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AP1, Advanced G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1 J205 FAX Power Supply I/F J206 FAX I/F 1-line FAX Product name:Super G3 FAX Board-AP1 J208 Image analysis PCB I/F Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1

No.

Function, specifications

J8112 DC Controller Control data I/F J8130 Power Supply I/F J8133 Reader I/F J8134 Memory PCB I/F

J8142 Laser Control I/F J8143 Laser Data I/F

T-2-15

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration

2-22

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence

2-23

●● HDD

■■Boot/Shutdown sequence

The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added.

●● Boot sequence

User Box area is 50 GB (same as the existing machine) and Advanced Box area is 15 GB.

[ ]: program storage location

Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.

FSTDEV TMP_GEN TMP_PSS TMP_FAX APL_SEND APL_MEAP APL_GEN APL_KEEP APL_LOG IMG_MNG PDLDEV FSTCDEV THUMDEV BOOTDEV CRBDEV APL_CDS

- Starting BIOS [Main controller PCB 1]

Image data (User Box)

- Starting IPL, OS [Flash PCB]

Universal data (temporary file) For PDL spooling FAX data Address book, filter MEAP application Universal data MEAP saving data

- Starting system software for main/sub CPU [HDD -> DDR2-SDRAM]

System log Text management table PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.) Job archiving (chasing)

- Starting application

Thumbnail System software (System, language, RUI, etc.） For Advanced Box For distribution server F-2-37

Standby screen display F-2-38

NOTE: Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not synchronized. For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting. See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence

2-23

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence

2-24 ●● Shutdown sequence

Related error codes (major error codes): Error Detail Description code Code Hard disk error E602 0001 HDD detection error. Unable to detect HDD,

0002 0006 4000

4001

E604 0000

Remedy

Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion processing (to preventdamage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed

1. Connection of the HDD cable. not become Ready, return an error. 2. Reinstall the system. 3. HDD. 4. Main Controller PCB. There is no startup file. There is no program 1. Reinstall the system. for main CPU in /BOOTDEV/BOOT/ on HDD. 2. HDD. There is no SubBootable for the PDL type in / 1. Reinstall the system. BOOTDEV/BOOT. 2. HDD. Unable to install OS. 1. Cable connection error. 2. After HDD All Format, reinstall the system software. 3. HDD. No OS startup script. 1. Cable connection error. 2. After HDD All Format, reinstall the system software. 3. HDD. Insufficient memory Insufficient memory (require 768 MB). DDR2-SDRAM

toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is called “shutdown sequence” and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration). When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts/executes automatically.

NOTE: On the assumption that the shutdown sequence was not completed normally, the host machine is shut down by the Relay PCB in approx. 120 seconds.

T-2-17

NOTE: When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. E602-0001, 0002, 0006, 4000, 4001

2

Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence

2-24

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data

2-25

Controls

●● Print

■■Flow of Image Data

Network

Following shows major image data flow. • The arrow mark indicates the flow of image data.

LAN Controller

• Numbers (1, 2, etc.) indicate processing order.

●● Copy

Printer driver language interpretation

①

②

Image data buffer

Image data buffer

（SDRAM ）

（SDRAM ）

⑤

Reader

Riser Connector

③ Rendering

①

Scan type image processing

⑦

④

Compression

Decompression

⑥ ② Image data buffer

Image data buffer

（SDRAM ）

（SDRAM ）

④ Riser Connector

Compression

⑧

Main Controller PCB 1 Spool

To DC Controller

（ HDD）

Decompression

Main Controller PCB 2

F-2-40

⑤

③

●● SEND

Print type image processing

⑥

Reader Main Controller PCB 2

Main Controller PCB 1 Spool

（ HDD）

Format conversion

To DC Controller

⑤

①

F-2-39

②

LAN Controller

⑥

Image data buffer

Image data buffer

（SDRAM ）

（SDRAM ）

Scan type image processing

Compression

Riser Connector

④

Network

③

Main Controller PCB 1

Main Controller PCB 2

Spool

（ HDD） F-2-41

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data

2-25

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-26

■■Security features (encryption key and certificate, password

●● FAX

protection)

FAX

●● Overview

①

The Main Controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named “TPM PCB”.

FAX reception

TPM stands for “Trusted Platform Module”, which collectively refers to the chip set for Image processing

generating and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption.

② Image data buffer

(JBIG Conversion)

（SDRAM ）

④ Riser Connector

③ Main Controller PCB 1

Decompression

⑤

TPM PCB

Main Controller PCB 2 Spool

（ HDD）

To DC Controller F-2-42

F-2-43

The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys) stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored data other than security information. The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information. The TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security information of the host machine is securely protected even in the following conditions. • When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and installed in the MFP with the different serial number • When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network Enable this function in Setting/Registration mode. Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings -> ON (OFF by default)

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-26

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

●● Configuration of Security Information

2-27

When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is

The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM settings.

protected only by the common key.

When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three

conventional machines.

The security information held in this machine is protected at the level equivalent to the

keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected. The security information can be accessed by the three keys and multiple passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD. Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the figure below). Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security information is activated only when data in all the layers are linked. For the backup purpose, the backup key is temporarily stored also in the HDD to be prepared for a TPM failure (only for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON). This key can be backed up using the USB memory. Once backed up, the backup key is deleted from the HDD. The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key

The security functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD. The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key stored in the SRAM is cleared when the Main Controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after MN-CON clear. Since the common key stored in the HDD will automatically restore the common key in the SRAM, the security information is decodable correctly even after servicing. Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON, the password information stored in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted. However, the password information is maintained in the SRAM.

stored in the SRAM is cleared when the Main Controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after

- When the TPM setting is OFF:

MN-CON clear. However, the common key stored in the HDD automatically restores that in

SRAM

the SRAM so that the security information is decodable even after servicing. Note that the

Common Key

security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because

HDD Backup

the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute “Initialize All Data / Settings” in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF. This will maintain the password information in the SRAM even after the password information is initialized.

Password

- When the TPM setting is ON

Backup of Common Key Password

TPM PCB F-2-45

TPM Key

●● TPM Setting for Security Information The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM

(Temporarily stored in HDD)

HDD Public Key

SRAM Common Key

Backup Key for TPM failure

settings in Setting / Registration mode. USB memory

• When the TPM setting is ON The security functionality is enabled in 4 levels (TPM key, public key, common key and password). • When the TPM setting is OFF

Backup

The security functionality is enabled in 2 levels (common key and password). Backup for Common Key

Password

Password

F-2-44

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-27

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

●● Preparation before Installing TPM

●● Works before / after introduction

Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.

The works above are basically done by users.

2-28

Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (“TPM setting” is OFF by default). Follow the steps below to back up data.

1. Enable the feature

1) From Remote UI, execute Settings/Registration> Management Settings> Data

2. Backup the TPM key

Management> Import/Export.

3. Restore the TPM key

The following data types should be backed up.

4. Disable the feature

• Address book *1 • Device settings (transfer settings, address book, frequently-used Send functions) *2 • Settings/Registration

CAUTION:

• Printer settings can be exported

When the TPM setting is set to “ON”, advice users on the following:

• Favorites stored in the web browser (only when the web browser is enabled) *3

• Back up the TPM key swiftly after the setting is ON

*1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device settings, this step can be disregarded. *2 Among settings in the main menu, only “Frequently-used Setting” under “Scan and Send” can be backed up. *3 These are available only in the specific models or configurations. 2) Select “Export” from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up “Custom Menu Setting Information”. 3) Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote

• Keep the password used at backup securely • Never lose the USB flash drive with the backup TPM key file saved The TPM key should be restored after the TPM PCB is replaced due to failures or the like. (TPM key restoration is enabled only at TPM PCB replacement.) Unless the key is restored, the security information (passwords, encryption key, and certificates) cannot be used. When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others, “Initialize All Data / Settings” should be executed to reactivate TPM functionality. The security may be undermined if the old Setting / Registration data are maintained as it is.

UI. Then, execute “Export” to back up “User Information of Advanced Box”.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-28

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

1. Enable Functionality

2-29

2.TPM Key Backup The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB memory (supported file system:

CAUTION: Setup of “System Management PIN”

FAT32).

It is recommended for users (administrators) to set the system management PIN before installing TPM. The TPM key is backed up after the TPM setting is set to “ON”. However, the key backup is permitted only once. Unless the key is properly backed up, users other than administrators may illegally obtain the backup file. To avoid such risks effectively, the system management PIN should be set.

Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.

F-2-48

1) Insert the USB memory to the machine. 1) Set Management Settings> Data Management> TPM Settings to ON.

The USB I/F (host) is found at the side of the Control Panel as well as the Main Controller PCB 1. CAUTION: Ensure to insert only one USB memory. If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB memories connected, the message is shown to notify that the backup is failed.

F-2-46

NOTE: The USB memory holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB memory.

2) Click [Yes], and restart the machine. 2)Click [Backup TPM Key] in Management Settings> Data Management> TPM Settings.

F-2-47

This setting is enabled after the machine is restarted.

F-2-49

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-29

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for

2-30

5) Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB memory.

confirmation. CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup. If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure to recover this. • The USB memory is not inserted to the machine • 2 or more USB memories are inserted to the machine • The USB memory has insufficient free memory space • The USB memory is write-protected • No key is found

CAUTION: The USB memory should be securely stored. Give advice users on the following points. • The USB memory should be securely stored • Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB memory, never save the backup file on a server or the like accessible to unanimous users. F-2-50

4) Click [OK] to initiate TPM key backup. NOTE: Name of TPM key backup file The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name.

3. Restore of TPM key Procedure is about the same as the backup work. Difference between restore work and backup work: Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore work.

F-2-51

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-30

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

1) Connect the USB memory that saves TPM key.

2-31

4. Disable the feature

2) Select the following: Management settings> Data management> TPM settings; and click

To set OFF for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data/Settings].

[Restore TPM key].

F-2-53

F-2-52

3) Enter the password set in the backup process. 4) Click [OK] on Start Restoration Screen. The restoration process is started. 5) Click [OK] on Restoration Completion Screen. Remove the USB flash drive and turn OFF/ ON the main power.

CAUTION: Points to caution when disabling functionality To disable the use of TPM, all data and settings should be initialized. If this is executed, user information saved in the HDD/ SRAM is totally cleared. Ensure to back up the data before disabling TPM settings.

CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration. If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for recovery. • The USB memory is not inserted to the machine • 2 or more USB flash memories are inserted to the machine • The USB memory is security-protected • No TPM key is saved in the USB memory • The TPM key saved in the USB memory is not for the machine • The wrong password is entered • After the TPM key was backed up, [Initialize All Systems/ Settings] was executed • SRAM (the Main Controller PCB 1) or HDD is crashed

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-31

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

List of data to be cleared

2-32

Steps of data restoration after recovery

• Data saved in BOX/ Advanced Box

The restoration process triggers Settings/Registration> Management Setting> Data

• Data saved in Inbox (Fax Box/ System Box)

Management> Import/Export.

• Destination data registered in Address Book

The data listed below cannot be restored, thus should be set again.

• Read mode registered using Send function • Mode memory registered using Copy/ Box function

• Environment Settings

• MEAP applications and their license files

• Paper settings

• Data saved using MEAP applications

• Display settings in the destination to save

• Password for MEAP SMS (Service Management Service)

• Time fine-adjustment for timer/ power settings

(The password is returned to default if any change is made.) • User authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)

• Date/ time settings (excluding time zone and daylight-saving settings) • User settings for SNMPv3 • Context settings

• Unsent documents (documents for scheduled transmission and reserved transmission)

• Firewall settings (excluding MAC address filter)

• Job logs

• Adjustment/Maintenance

• Contents set in Settings/Registration

• Function Settings

• Image-composite registration form

• Image-composite form for the common print operation

• Registered transfer settings

• Printer settings

• Key pair and certificate and CRL registered in Management Setting (Settings/Registration)>

• Transfer settings for the common receipt/ transfer settings

Device Management> Certificate Settings

• Inbox settings • Frequently-used Copy settings • Registered short-cuts in “Other Functions” • Frequently-used Send settings • Frequently-used settings for saving/ using files • Address Settings • Address Book • Management Settings • Sheet counts in Department ID Management • Settings for device information distribution • Certificate settings • License registration • Remote operation settings • Box backup/ restoration • TPM Settings

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

2-32

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

●● Overview of Actions taken against Troubles Location TPM Setting: ON with failure TPM PCB 1. Check the TPM PCB connection

TPM Setting: OFF

●● Related Error Code Relevant Error Code

N/A (TPM PCB is not 2. Replace the TPM PCBs in use when the TPM 3. Turn OFF/ ON the power setting is set to OFF.) 4. See the section of “Restoring TPM Key” to restore the TPM key. 5. Turn OFF/ ON the main power for recovery

HDD

Main Controller PCB 2 (SRAM)

Initially E746-0031 error is shown on the screen. When the power is turned OFF/ON after the TPM PCB is replaced, E7460032 error is shown (only when the TPM setting is set to ON). 1. Replace the HDDs. 1. Replace the HDDs. Initially E602-xxxx error 2. Format the HDD. 2. Format the HDD. is shown (the different 3. Download the system software. 3. Download the extension is shown 4. See the section of “Disabling system software. depends on cases). After Functionality” to execute “Initialize 4. Restore the the system software is All Data/ Settings”. password reinstalled, E746-0033 5. Turn OFF/ON the power. The TPM information stored error is shown. setting is automatically set to OFF. in the HDD. 6. Set the TPM setting to ON (the public key and the common key are automatically set). 1. Replace the main controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the main E747-xxxx error (the The common key backed up in the controller PCB 2. different extension is HDD will be automatically restored The common shown depends on in the SRAM. key backed up cases). 2. The TPM setting on the control in the HDD will panel is reset to OFF. Manually be automatically set the TPM setting to ON (the restored in the machine is operated in the TPM SRAM. setting ON). 2. Restore the 3. Restore the password information password stored in the SRAM *. information stored in the SRAM *.

Error Detail Description Code Code Error in encryption E746 0031 Hardware error (TPM)

* If “No” is indicated in the field of Backup Column in the table of “Security Information Storage Location”, the relevant information should be set manually again.

Remedy

The TPM PCB is not installed, the TPM PCB for other model is installed, or failure of TPM Chip. 0032 Error occurs, but system recovery is possible (TPM) Mismatch of key. 0033 Error which the system recovery is not possible occurs (TPM) Location of security information in HDD/SRAM is unknown. 0034 Error occurs, but auto recovery of system is possible (TPM) Mismatch of key occurs. However, recovery by restart is possible.

Install a TPM PCB for this machine. Replace the TPM PCB with a new one. Execute restoration of the TPM key. Execute "Initialize All Data/ Settings".

Turn OFF and then ON the power.

T-2-19

●● Security Information Storage Location Storage Location

Data Type

Function

HDD HDD HDD HDD

Password/ PIN Password/ PIN Password/ PIN Password/ PIN

BOX BOX SEND MEAP

HDD

SSL,AMS

HDD

Certificate/ Secret Key Certificate/ Secret Key Others

SRAM SRAM SRAM

Password/ PIN Password/ PIN Password/ PIN

SRAM

Password/ PIN

SRAM SRAM SRAM SRAM

Password/ PIN Password/ PIN Password/ PIN Password/ PIN

SRAM

Password/ PIN SEND

HDD

T-2-18

2

2-33

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)

Signature SEND User setting information BOX BOX Advanced BOX Advanced BOX SEND SEND SEND SEND

Name of Data

Backup Availability

BOX Password Password for Fax BOX Password for a file destination of Address Book Authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO-H Device key pair (SSL, AMS)

Yes Yes Yes Yes

User key pair

No

Key information linked to user (password)

No

Password for encryption at BOX backup Password for SMS server at BOX backup Password for Advanced BOX backup

No No No

Password for SMS server at Advanced BOX backup Password for LDAP server Password for POP3 server Password for time-stamped PDF Password for Adobe ES Rights Management Server PIN for destination list (in destination setting)

No

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-33

2 Storage Location

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Option HDD

Data Type

Function

SRAM SRAM SRAM SRAM

Password/ PIN Password/ PIN Password/ PIN Password/ PIN

UI Network Network Network

SRAM SRAM SRAM

Password/ PIN Network Password/ PIN Network Password/ PIN Network

SRAM SRAM

Password/ PIN Others Password/ PIN Others

SRAM

Encryption key MIB

Name of Data Password for service mode Password for IPP authentication Password for FTP authentication User name and password for client in Proxy authentication Login password for Netware print server Policy common key for IPSec User name and password for PEAP/TTLS authentication Password for FAX receipt Department management data (including System Manager password) Authentication and encryption keys for SNMPv3

2-34 Backup Availability No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No

●● Security Information Storage Location (data managed under the mechanism other than TPM management)

HDD HDD

Function

Password/ MEAP PIN Password/ Advanced PIN BOX

Name of Data

The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160 GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 inch/1 TB HDD-K1 (option) makes 1 TB in HDD capacity. High capacity is required in the case of saving large amounts of data with “Advanced Box” Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box. 15 GB: in the case of 160 GB HDD capacity 629.2 GB *: in the case of 1 TB HDD capacity

Yes Yes

T-2-20

Storage Data Type Location

■■Option HDD

Backup Availability

SMS login password

No

User information in Advanced BOX

Yes T-2-21

FSTDEV TMP_GEN TMP_PSS TMP_FAX APL_SEND APL_MEAP APL_GEN APL_KEEP APL_LOG IMG_MNG PDLDEV FSTCDEV THUMDEV BOOTDEV CRBDEV APL_CDS

Image data (User Box) Universal data (temporary file) For PDL spooling FAX data Address book, filter MEAP application Universal data MEAP saving data System log Text management table PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.) Job archiving (chasing)

Thumbnail System software (System, language, RUI, etc.） For Advanced Box For distribution server F-2-54

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Option HDD

2-34

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

■■HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-35 Mirroring PCB controls reading/writing timing of HDD data. LED PCB makes the LED show operation status of the HDDs.

This option enables mirroring of HDD data (RAID1). In the case of failure in one HDD, the operation is performed with the other HDD. This feature minimizes downtime as well as improves reliability as the document server. There are 2 types of mirroring configurations according to the HDD capacity (160 GB/1 TB):

Ch A (HDD1)

Master HDD (HDD1) 160 GB Standard

Ch B (HDD2)

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4

F-2-56

Mirroring PCB

LED PCB Ch A

Backup HDD (HDD2)

Ch B

160 GB Option Option 2.5 inch/160 GB HDD-G1

Master HDD (HDD1) 1 TB Option Backup HDD (HDD2)

Option 2.5 inch/1 TB HDD-K1 HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4 Mirroring PCB Ch A

LED PCB

Ch B

1 TB Option Option 2.5 inch/1 TB HDD-K1 F-2-55

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-35

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-36

●● To start using this feature (installation)

●● HDD reading/writing operation At reading:

Install HDD2

Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB for HDD1,HDD2

At writing:

Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD) only

HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the mirroring PCB. HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the mirroring PCB.

The same data is written to each HDD at the same timing

Main controller PCB 2

Slot.1 (HDD1) Slot.2 (HDD2)

Mirroring PCB

Main controller PCB 2 Mirroring PCB

Ch B Ch A Turn ON the main power

Turn ON the mirroring feature

(Lv.1) COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> W/RAID -> “1”

HDD 1

Turn OFF the main power

HDD 2

HDD 1

HDD 2 F-2-58

The LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up/blinking if reading/writing to each HDD is

Turn ON the main power

performed properly. In the case of failure, the LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking.

Start “Rebuild”

Complete “Rebuild”

The storage data of the 1st HDD is automatically copied to the 2nd HDD (this operation is called “Rebuild”).

If only one HDD is faulty, the operation is continued by the other HDD.

Time needed: 160 GB HDD Approx. 40 minutes 1 TB HDD Approx. 240 minutes

List of operation status (LED) Status F-2-57

“Rebuild” progress is shown in a massage at the status line on the control panel. “Copying hard disk data... xx%“ NOTE:

• This machine can be used even during “rebuild” process (operation is performed with HDD1) • The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during “rebuild” process. “Rebuild” is resumed once the power is turned ON the next time. This does not apply in the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during “rebuild” process

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation.

At normal operation During access with HDD1 During access with HDD2 HDD1 is faulty HDD2 is faulty During data copy to HDD1 (rebuild) During data copy to HDD1 (rebuild)

HDD 1 (Ch A) HDD 2 (Ch B) Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF blinking OFF

OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF/ON OFF/ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF blinking T-2-22

2-36

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-37

●● Description of Modes

Mode Flow at Start-up

The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes. The status flows among the

Turn ON Main Power Switch

modes below during operation. The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses. Name of Mode Description Both HDDs are normally Mirror Mode

In normal operation

In normal operation

Degrade Mode Any trouble occurred in

In normal operation

With troubles (HDD not installed/ HDD in trouble)

operated

Rebuild mode

Halt mode

Master HDD Status

Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion

the backup HDD suspends mirroring operation. The machine can be used under this condition, however, the backup HDD should be replaced at the earliest convenience. The data of the master HDD is In normal operation copied (rebuilt) to the backup HDD. The machine can be used under this condition. Both HDDs are in trouble * In trouble (HDD not installed/ HDD installed not registered/ HDD disconnected while the Mirroring PCB is in operation)

Backup HDD Status

Degrade Mode

Mirror Mode

See Overview of Trouble Recovery

Trouble

Both HDDs

In which HDD?

Either HDD

Degrade Mode

With troubles (HDD not installed/ HDD installed not registered/ HDD disconnected while the Mirroring PCB is in operation) T-2-23

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

Rebuild Mode

Trouble

Backup HDD In which HDD?

Master HDD

See Overview of Trouble Recovery

In recovery from the trouble (Copying data of Master HDD)

* Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.

2

Halt Mode

Degrade Mode See Overview of Trouble Recovery Unable to detect Master HDD at Start-up

Unable to detect Master HDD at Start-up Halt Mode Halt Mode

Halt Mode

Halt Mode

See Overview of Trouble Recovery

Mirror Mode F-2-59

2-37

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-38 ●● Setting the Mirroring

Mode Flow during Operation

1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine. 2) Make a setting of mirroring.

Mirror Mode

Specify “1” under “Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID”. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.

Trouble

4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

In which HDD?

5) Make sure that the LED blinks.

Either HDD

HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

Degrade Mode

Both HDDs

See Overview of Trouble Recovery

Halt Mode

In which HDD?

Master HDD

Backup HDD

Halt Mode

Rebuild Mode Trouble Unable to detect Master HDD

Halt Mode

HDD Status?

Unable to detect Backup HDD

When successfully Rebuilt

Degrade Mode

Note: Rebuild process starts after setting “1” for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure. 1)»Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2)»Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set “0”. 3)»To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4)»Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set "1". 5)»To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine.

The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation. An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.

Unable to detect Master HDD

See Overview of Trouble Recovery

Halt Mode

Mirror Mode F-2-60

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-38

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-39

●● Overview of Trouble Recovery

●● Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality

When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to

• The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.

each mode.

The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended

The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.

not to turn off the power and wait until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD

In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the

removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.

green LED is lit on the LED PCB. The firstly blinked green LED (Ch A/Ch B) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly. The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.

• The mirroring PCB controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed based on the HDD serial number and the model serial number instead of slot locations. • If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and

Mode

Status

Action for Recovery

Mirror Mode Normal (at standby) HDD1 in trouble Degrade Mode *1

Under normal operation 1. Check the connection between HDD1 and Mirroring PCB or Main Controller PCB 2. 2. When the trouble is not recovered, replace the HDD1. HDD2 in trouble 1. Check the connection between HDD2 and Mirroring PCB or Main Controller PCB 2. 2. When the trouble is not recovered, replace HDD2. Copying data to HDD1 Copying (under Rebuild) (Rebuild) Copying Data to HDD2 Copying (under Rebuild) (Rebuild) Both HDDs in trouble 1. Check Master HDD and Backup HDD *2 2. When the trouble is not recovered, replace the two HDDs (format the replaced HDD and download the system software).

Rebuild mode Halt mode

HDD1 (Ch A) Red LED

HDD2 (Ch B) Red LED

OFF ON

OFF OFF

Backup HDDs may be switched. • When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring PCB automatically recognizes the backup HDD as the master. Thus, the master and backup HDDs are switched even without changing the slot locations. If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel the green LED is lit on the LED PCB. The firstly-blinked LED (Ch A/Ch B) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after power-on.

OFF

ON

• For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct them not to change the removable HDD location in advance. Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.

*

OFF

OFF

*

ON

ON

* Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds

T-2-24

Otherwise, HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed. • The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON. • Removable HDD is extended • Either HDD is in trouble CAUTION: Be sure to use a new HDD when replacing the HDD.

*1 This mode shows the message, “Need to replace hard disks (contact your service engineer)”, on the control panel. In addition, “310006” is indicated in CODE field of Alarm Log in service mode (COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2). *2 Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to the firstly-installed machine, thus this machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to

• Upgrading should be done only in Mirror Mode while mirroring in ongoing. Upgrading in Degrade/Rebuild mode is basically prohibited. Always prioritize Mirror Mode when you take any actions.

reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)

2-39

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

■■Removable HDD (option)

2-40 ■■HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).

This option enables to generate the encryption key inside the Encryption PCB and to encrypt

Moreover, the HDD slot opening can be locked.

the whole HDD including the system software. Encryption allows leaks of confidential data, even when the HDD is stolen, including image

This option is assumed to be used for: enhancing information security at government/public

data (temporarily generated at Copy or Print jobs) and user data stored in BOX/ Advanced

offices or private

BOX.

• Remove the HDD at the end of the working hours and keep it in a safe.

In addition, the data written into the two hard disks are also encrypted when the HDD

• Install the HDD at the beginning of the working hours. Lock it during the working

mirroring functionality is enabled.

hours.

The following descriptions focus on the HDD encryption function. See the previous section for the mirroring functionality.

●● HDD Encryption Functionality

Removable HDD

The HDD of the host machine holds temporary image data including scanned images or PDL data as well as user data in BOX and Advanced BOX. Such images or user file information are saved in the HDD only with system information cleared. Under this condition, the data or images can be restored by accessing directly to the stolen HDD using the access editor and the like. To counter such threats against securities, data written to the disk should be always encrypted to protect them from illegal restoration of image data or others. This product employs an unconventional approach to achieve HDD encryption and mirroring functionality with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two F-2-61

NOTE:

• To use this option, no setting is required with the software. • The user needs to prepare a key because there is no key with this kit.

functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.

●● Data Encryption Mechanism The encryption PCB receives signals transmitted from the Main Controller PCB, and encrypts and saves them in the HDD. The encryption PCB receives the encrypted data saved in the HDD to decode and send them to the Main Controller PCB. The encryption PCB can be configured with a HDD and an encryption/ mirroring PCB, or with 2 HDDs and an Encryption/Mirroring PCB.

●● Conditions for Encryption PCB Operation The Encryption PCB has the function to recognize and authenticate the host machine. An error is triggered if a second-hand HDD Encryption/Mmirroring PCB is installed to the other machine.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

2-40

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

2-41

●● Compatibility among Device, Encryption PCB and HDD

●● Actions against Troubles – Overview

E602-2000 error may occur if the unmatched authentication information is found between the

Servicing HDD replacement

controller and the HDD Encryption PCB and the Encryption PCB is mounted. The device, the Encryption PCB and HDD can be connected in 4 use cases. Case 1

Correct Main Controller

Encryption

two-way authentication Case 2

Correct HDD (Protection property)

Correct Encryption PCB

Correct Main Controller It is not possible to decode.

Case 3

Main Controller not authorized

Correct Encryption PCB

It is not possible two-way authentication Case 4

Correct Main Controller

Encryption PCB not authorized

two-way authentication

cleared

Main Controller PCB 2 cleared replacement (SRAM) Correct HDD (Protection property)

Correct HDD (Protection property) Encryption Correct HDD (Protection property)

It is not possible to decode.

Main Controller PCB 1 replacement Main Controller clear (COPIER> FUNCTION> MNCON)

not cleared

Recovery

Action

Replace HDDs

1) Format the HDD 2) Install the system software Install HDD Data 1) Replace Encryption PCB Encryption Kit 2) Initialize Encryption PCB *1 3) Format the HDD 4) Install the system Clear the key for HDD 1) Initialize the Encryption PCB *1 Data Encryption kit 2) Format the HDD and install HDD Data 3) Install the system Encryption Kit N/A N/A

Information After MN-CON clear held in SRAM process is done cleared

MN-CON clear does not clear authentication information; no work is required specifically for HDD Encryption kit T-2-25

* How to Initialize Encryption PCB 1) Initialize the Encryption PCB via SST. This step makes the disk unformatted (E602-0001 error is triggered if the unformatted

F-2-62

Case 1: Normally operated Case 2: HDD-related error (other than E602-2000) occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read Case 3: E602-2000 error is triggered by failure in mutual authentication Case 4: Unable to decode properly due to unmatched key for the Encryption PCB

2

Encryption PCB replacement

User data cleared

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

disk is started). 2) Format the HDD and reinstall SYSTEM via SST. When you start the HDD formatting, the message is shown to confirm whether to initialize the Encryption PCB (Key Clear). Key Clear will disable accesses to HDD data permanently. Cautions should be taken in Key Clear execution.

2-41

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

Points to Note in Initialization via SST The screen below is shown when you gain access to SST in safe mode due to E6022000 error. Poor PCB connection also causes this error. Check the board connection to seek error recovery. Initialization of the Encryption PCB will disable accesses to HDD data permanently. Cautions should be taken in initialization.

2-42 ●● Relevant Error Codes E602 and detailed codes Error Detail Description code Code E602 2000 Authentication error between

Remedy

1. Connection error between the Encryption PCB and the Main Controller PCB (turn OFF and then ON the power). 2. Execute the key clear of the Encryption PCB using SST (at this time, HDD becomes unformatted; thus, it is necessary to execute HDD format and system reinstallation). 2001 Although the Host Machine does Although the Host Machine does not have the not have the authentication authentication information of the Encryption PCB, the information of the Encryption authenticated Encryption PCB is installed. PCB, the authenticated Encryption PCB is installed. 1. Connection error between the Encryption PCB and 2002 Failure of Encryption PCB, others. the Main Controller PCB (turn Off and then ON the power). 2. Execute the key clear of the Encryption PCB using SST (at this time, HDD becomes unformatted; thus, it is necessary to execute HDD format and system reinstallation). 3. After replacing the Encryption PCB, execute HDD format and system reinstallation using SST. 4. Main Controller PCB. Host Machine and Encryption PCB.

F-2-63

Points to Note in Initialization using USB memory The message below is shown on the control panel when E602-2000 error occurred and the machine is started in safe mode using the USB memory with system data stored. Select [0] when you are ready to initialize the Encryption PCB. Encryption board error occurred. Check connection of the board. Initialize the board. All data is deleted at initialization. [0]=Initialization [other key]=exit

T-2-26

F-2-64

The message below shows the final screen in initializing the Encryption PCB. Select [2] when you initialize the Encryption PCB. We recommend checking the PCB connection before starting initialization Attention! Once initialization is started,you cannot cancel it. is that OK? [2]= Yes [other keys]=No

F-2-65

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

2-42

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

2-43

●● E610 and detailed codes Error Detail Description Remedy code Code Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/ E610 encryption key error/encryption processing error)

Check the hardware configuration. 0001 The Encryption Board does not exist. 0002 Not meeting the memory configuration to execute

0101 0102 0201 0202 0301 0302 0303

encryption operation. Failed to initialize the memory of key storage area. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Failed to initialize the encryption processing part. Error in the encryption processing part. Error in the encryption processing part. Failed to create the encryption key. Failure of the encryption key is detected. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Due to this error, HDD content is initialized.

0401 Error is detected during encryption. 0402 Error is detected during decryption. 0501 Error in document management information on /

Turn OFF and then ON the power.

FSTDEV.

T-2-27

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit (option)

2-43

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-44

■■Security Policy Function The security policy function is used to collectively configure the security-related settings, which were located on various screens,as security policies. If the user has set security policies such as basic policies on information security and remedy standards, the settings can be managed/configured collectively on the basis of the security

NOTE: The security policy password is also included in the policy setting information copied using the Import/Export All function. When a password-protected file is imported, a security password is set on the device. Password-protected files cannot be imported to devices where a security password has been already set.

policies. In previous models, network security settings were located on the network settings screen and interface security settings were located on the interface settings screen, which made it bothersome to configure security settings at a time. The security policy function of this model enables security-related settings to be configured on one screen. These settings can be protected using a dedicated password to achieve a high level of security measure.

●● Specifications Administrator who can configure security policy settings Only system administrators can access the Security Policy Settings screen, therefore the settings can be configured only by system administrators. Password protect the security policy setting function The security policy setting function can be protected with a password (policy password) to distinguish between ordinary system administrators and system administrators who also serve as security policy administrators. Policy passwords are set by system administrators and cannot be changed by users other than system administrators, thereby preventing creation of security holes.

Various security settings are gathered into one page.

F-2-66

The information configured in the security policy can be exported or imported using the

NOTE: When a password is set for the security policy setting function, this password is required to execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in the [Settings/Registration] menu. This prevents users other than security policy administrators from initializing the device and disabling the security policies.

DCM function, and can be copied to multiple devices together with other information to be duplicated to multiple devices. By using iW EMC DCM Plug-in, the settings can be copied to multiple devices at a time.

When you forget the password The policy password can be initialized in service mode. If the user forgets the security policy password, this service mode can be used to initialize the password. • (LEVEL 2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > PCPW-CLR

Security policy settings

NOTE: If [Restrict Service Representative Access] in the [Settings/Registration] menu is set to "ON", PCPW-CLR cannot be executed (the [OK] button does not function when pressed). This prevents users other than security policy administrators from initializing the password and disabling the security policy settings.

DCM File

F-2-67

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-44

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

Linked operation with the Restrict Service Representative Access function Linked operation with the Restrict Service Representative Access function can be set as one of the policies.

2-45 automatically cleared. Settings/Registration menu settings forcibly changed by the security policies when the settings are cleared cannot be restored. • If you try to newly create security policies on a device connected with a non-Canon-

However, if the "Restrict Service Representative Access" function is enabled, execution of

made controller:

the service mode for initializing the above-mentioned policy password is restricted and the

If connection with the non-Canon-made controller is detected, the policy editor will not

service mode cannot be executed.

work at all. It is not possible to set the security administrator password or configure policy settings.

●● Limitations/Points to Note Points to note when "Prohibit Use as USB Device" is enabled When "Prohibit Use as USB Device" is enabled, security-related settings are restricted from being changed, therefore caution is required when configuring settings during installation. For example, when "Prohibit Use as USB Device" is enabled, functions to be performed by a service technician fusing USB memory (e.g. installation of applications) are not available. In consideration of convenience of service works, the download mode and the following service mode items are not restricted. • COPIER > FUNCTION > DBG-LOG > LOG2USB Save debug logs to a USB storage device • COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > RPT2USB Save report information to a USB storage device

Access URL of UGW (E-RDS settings) When the user enables [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] (by changing the setting value to "ON") (see NOTE), the following service mode setting needs to be changed. • [SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR] • If [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] is disabled (the setting value is "OFF") https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010 (Default) • If [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] is enabled (the setting value is "ON") https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010

Import/Export All function When security policies are set, settings that do not comply with the security policies cannot be imported. Settings cannot be imported if the security policy password of the export source device and that of the export destination device do not match. In such cases, it is necessary to cancel the password of the import destination device or set the same password as that of the export source device. When password-protected security policy settings are imported, the same password is set on the import destination device. F-2-68

Connection of a Non-Canon-made Controller When a non-Canon-made (Oce, Creo, HP, etc.) controller is connected to a device supporting this function, such alliance controller has its own security settings and does not have a specification to apply the security policies set by the device, therefore this function is not supported. • When a non-Canon-made controller is connected to a device where the security policies are already set: The security policy settings, including the security administrator/policy settings, are

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

NOTE: Path of [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] • Control Panel

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [ Encryption Settings ] > [ Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]

• Remote UI

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [Security Policy Settings] > [Key/Certificate] > [Prohibit use of weak encryption]

2-45

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-46

●● Screens when Security Policies are Applied

●● Procedure to Check Configured Settings

If the security policies are applied, the following message appears when the user tries to

The configured policy settings can be confirmed on the following screen in remote UI.

access the [Settings/Registration] screen or tries to execute [Initialize All Data/Settings].

1. Start remote UI as a user with administrator privileges. 2. Display the following screen.

Example of the Remote UI Screen

• [Settings/Registrations] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [Security Policy Settings] > [Confirm Security Policy]

F-2-69

Example of the screen of the Operation Panel (Touch Panel)

F-2-72

●● Exporting and Importing Setting Information Since security policy settings are covered by the setting information export/import function (hereinafter referred to as the [Import/ Export All] function), the settings can be exported and F-2-70

Example of the Initialize All Data/Settings screen

imported using the [Import/Export All] function. Security policies can be exported/imported together with other setting information using the [Import/Export All] function, and it is also possible to export/import only security policy information. Export Procedure 1. Start the remote UI as a system administrator user.

F-2-71

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-46

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-47

2. Select the following item to execute export. (For the detailed procedure, refer to e-Manual） • [Settings/Registrations] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Export] > [Security Policy Settings]

●● Differences between Security Administrators and System Administrators In the Security Policy Settings function, in addition to the conventional "system administrator", there is an administrator called "security administrator".

Screen example

The system administrator is a user for whom the role "Administrator" is set on the User Management screen and is allowed to operate/configure the settings of all the Settings/ Registration menu of the device. Note that even the system administrator cannot operate or change the settings against the security policies set by the security administrator described below. The security administrator creates, applies, edits, backs up and restores security policies. The security administrator is a system administrator (the user for whom the role "Administrator" is set on the User Management screen) and knows the password for the security policy settings. (There is no role named "Security Administrator".)

* Restricted by the policies

NOTE:

ura Tam

Tam Tam

ura

*

*

ura

Service technician Tam

Tam

ura

-

*

ura

Tam

-

-

-

-

Tam ura

Tam ura

-

ura

-

ura

-

Tam

ura Tam ura Tam

ura Tam Tam ura ura Tam

End users

Tam

procedure for importing DCM files. For the detailed procedure, refer to e-Manual..

-

ura

The procedure to import security policy setting information is the same as the normal

*

Tam

Import Procedure

*

ura

F-2-73

Add/delete Settings (Administrator settings) Settings (Other than administrator settings) Initialize (Settings/ Registration menu) Initialize (Service mode) Policy-related Implement/ change Browse Backup/ estore Disable the restrictions

Tam

Account Settings/ Registration menu

ura

Security System Administrator Administrator

T-2-28

• If there are policies that cannot be recognized by the model, the unrecognizable policies are ignored. • When policies of a device where a security password is set are applied to a device where a security password is not set, the same password will be set.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-47

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-48

●● Initialization of the Security Administer Password If the password for the security policy settings is set on a device and then forgotten, the settings restricted by the policies cannot be changed on the device. In such a case, the service technician can execute the following service mode to initialize the security policy administrator password. • (LEVEL 2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > PLPW-CLR CAUTION: If the Restrict Service Representative Access setting ([Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Device Management] > [Restrict Service Representative Access]) is enabled, the foregoing service mode cannot be executed. Be sure that the user understands the importance of not forgetting the password when setting the password for the security policy settings with the Restrict Service Representative Access setting enabled. If the password is forgotten, a remedy such as initialization of the HDD will have to be performed.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security Policy Function

2-48

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > HDD

Service Operations

Target data

HDD 4-41 1. Before Replacing Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. 1) Backup of the set/registered data Use the Remote UI. Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up/Restore Target data: Target data

Set Paper Information Favorite Settings Default Settings Shortcut settings for "Options" Previous Settings Button Size information Wallpaper Setting Button information in Quick Menu Restrict Quick Menu Button settings in Main Menu Button settings on the top of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Other settings for Main Menu User Box specification settings (Register Box Name, Password, Time until Document Auto Erase, Print uponstoring from the printer driver) Image data of User Box, Confidential Fax Box, and System Box Image Data

2

User Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Address Lists))

Forwarding Settings

User

Data File of Advanced Box Advanced box account

■■HDD

Address List

2-49

Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Paper Information)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Bacup/Restore)

Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Remote UI(User Access Control for Advanced Box) Network place setting information Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Web Access setting information Remote UI(block of Export/Import) MEAP application License files for MEAP applications SMS User authentication information registered in the Local SSO-H Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) Data saved using MEAP applications SMS (Service Management Service) password of MEAP Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Job logs Key Pair and Certificate and CRL in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values PS font Key and settings information to be used for encryption Settings/Registration(Management Settings when TPM is ON > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings) Audit Log Remote UI(Settings/Registration > Device Management > Export/Clear Audit Log)* T-2-29

* Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported. 2) Printing the set/registered data Use the service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed. 2. After Replacing 1) HDD format 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn ON the main powerswitch.) 1-2) Use SST to format all partitions. 2) Downloading system software

Remote UI(Bacup/Restore)

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > HDD

2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others). 3) Initializing the key pair, certificate and CRL

2-49

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1

(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY 4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch 5) Restoring the backup data Use the Remote UI. Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up/Restore 6) Resetting/registering the data While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement, reset/register the data. 7) When the user generates and adds the key pair, certificate and/or CRL, request the user to generate them again. 8) Executing “Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)” Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation

2-50 When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced, reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following procedures. 1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press “OK” button.(e.g.: If No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter “1” of the leading card.) 2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations from Settings/Registration mode. In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals, be sure that “ID00000001” to “ID00001000” are created. Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then, turn OFF and ON the main power switch. If “System Manager ID” and “System PIN” are not registered, “card registration to device” cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting operation. 3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body again. 4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card ID is displayed. 5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting Manager is collected.

CAUTION:Points to Caution when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other achine (different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.

■■Main Controller PCB 1

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1

2-50

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-51



In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is

Main Controller PCB 1 4-36

provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.



1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB

Service part:

• Flash PCB

Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 1 + Controller Box Frame + Cooling Fan

• TPM PCB

Parts number differs on a model basis (speed basis). Main Controller PCB 1

Cooling Fan

Controller BOX Frame

TPM PCB

Flash PCB F-2-75

F-2-74

NOTE: Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.

■■Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2 4-37 Service part: Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 2 + Controller Box Frame

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-51

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-52 Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand.

Main Controller PCB 2

1) Backup of the set/registered data Use the Remote UI. Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export Target data: Target data Address List

Forwarding Settings Preferences(Except for Paper Type Management Settings) Adjustment/Maintenance Function Settingss(Except for Printer Custom Settings, Forwarding Settings) Set Destination(Except for Address List) Management Settings(Except for Address List) Printer Settings F-2-76

1. Before Replacing HDD can evacuate in SRAM of Main Controller PCB 2 with a service mode. Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK[5] BACKUP But You cannot use this function when there is HDD Encryption Board.

User Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Address Lists)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) -

Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Printer Settings)) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF Key and settings information to be used for encryption when Settings/Registration(Management TPM is ON Settings > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings) Service mode setting values (MN-CON) T-2-30

When there is HDD Encryption Board, like before, I back it up in the following procedures. a) Back up contents of the SRAM by SST; and re-after board exchange; store it. Refer to "SRAM backup method when there is HDD Encryption Board".

Note: Back Up/Restore of the SRAM at the time of replacement of the Main Controller 2 is available provided that the HDD is not replaced.

b) Back up contents of the SRAM by USB memory; and re-after board exchange; store it. Refer to "Backup SRAM of Main controller 2 by USB memory". c) Like before, You back it up in a procedure as follows.

2) Printing the set/registered data Use the service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-52

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

SRAM backup method when there is HDD Encryption Board

2-53 Backup SRAM of Main controller 2 by USB memory:

When the HDD Encryption Board is installed while the version of SST is Ver. 4.41 or later, you do not need to format the HDD or install the system even if you replace Main Controller

Prepare for:

PCB 2 as long as you can restore the SRAM image.

"USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine is stored."

Procedure:

or

SST Ver.4.41or later, obey Steps to Upload Data; Single > Upload Data > SramImg.bin

The USB memory recognize it in the Host machine.

> Save

On USB memory, You make the blank folder of the same name to recognize USB memory on a service mode when You registered a system software for Host machine by SST.

When the HDD Encryption Board is installed: Data in the HDD is encrypted when the HDD Encryption Board is installed.

Ex: iA4245

For Main Controller PCB 2 to access to data in the HDD, the file description of the Encryption key on the HDD Encryption Board needs to be the same as that of SRAM

Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK

on Main Controller PCB 2; otherwise, Main Controller PCB 2 cannot access to the

[5] BACKUP

data in the HDD and this causes failure in startup of the machine.

According to a list, perform a Backup Restore as follows. Viewpoint of the Table:

When the following parts are replaced, the procedure is as follows:

Title

[[[[[ download Menu (HDD) ]]]]]]]]]]] -----------------------------Select line [5]: Backup [8]: download Menu 2

• Replacement of the HDD Encryption Board > Inconsistent description of encryption key file between Main Controller PCB 2 and SRAM on the HDD Encryption Board. • Replacement of Main Controller PCB 2 > Inconsistent description of encryption key file between Main Controller PCB 2 and SRAM on the HDD Encryption Board.

[Reset]: Shutdown

• Replacement with a new HDD > Select the following because there is no system data in the HDD: Format ALL >

Waiting SST Connection Checking USB.

Download the system software With SST Ver. 4.31 or before, it was necessary to format the HDD (Format ALL), and then install the system in any case. With SST Ver.4.41 or later, if the description of SRAM (SramImg.bin) on Main Controller PCB 2 is kept in the PC, you can restore SramImg.bin on Main Controller PCB 2 by using SST after holding down 2 and 8 to start the machine. When the description of SRAM on Main Controller PCB 2 can be restored, it means that the file description is the same as that of the encryption key on the HDD Encryption Board, which enables access to the HDD.

1 2 3 4 5

Title download Menu (HDD) download Menu (USB) download Menu (USB) Backup Menu (USB) Backup Menu (USB)

Select line

Operation Connect USB memory. [5]: Backup "5" /[5] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0" [7]: SRAM(USB) "7" /[7] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0" F-2-77

Therefore, you do not need to format the HDD or install the system when the file description of SRAM can be restored even if replacing Main Controller PCB 2.

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-53

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2. When Replacing

Backup SRAM of Main controller 2 by USB memory Title Select line

Operation

1

download Menu (HDD)

2 3

download Menu (USB) download Menu (USB)

[5]: Backup /[5] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

Connect USB memory. "5" "0"

4

Backup Menu (USB)

[7]: SRAM(USB)

"7"

5

Backup Menu (USB)

/[7] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

6

"0"

7

[SramImg.bin] Backup OK. ---Please hit any key--Backup Menu (USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

8

download Menu (USB)

[Reset]: Shutdown

"Reset"

9

download Menu (USB)

/[Reset] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0"

10

download Menu (USB)

Remove USB Device then shut down. ---Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown.---

11

A power supply is cut automatically.

2-54 1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB • DDR2-SDRAM • Memory PCB

Memory PCB

"C"

Remove USB memory. "Reset"

DDR2-SDRAM

T-2-31

SRAM Restore While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch. Title

Restore in SramImg.bin in the USB memory Select line

Operation

1

download Menu (HDD)

2

download Menu (USB)

[8]: download Menu 2

Connect USB memory. "8"

3

download Menu (USB)

/[8] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

4

download Menu 2nd (USB) [2]: Restore

"2"

5

download Menu 2nd (USB) /[2] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

6

Restore Menu (USB)

[2]: SRAM(USB)

"2"

7

Restore Menu (USB)

/[2] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

8

"0"

9

[SramImg.bin] Restore OK. ---Plese hit any key--Restore Menu (USB) [C]: Return to download Menu 2nd

10

download Menu 2nd (USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

"C"

11

download Menu (USB)

[Reset]: Shutdown

"Reset"

12

download Menu (USB)

/[Reset] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0"

13

download Menu (USB)

Remove USB Device then shut down. ---Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown.---

14 A power supply is cut automatically.

F-2-78

Prohibited Operation: Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial number).If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration. • Main Controller PCB 1 • Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)

"C"

• Memory PCB

Remove USB memory. "Reset" T-2-32

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-54

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-55

3. After Replacing 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. 2) Restoring the backup data Perform following either: a) You download it if You upload SramImg.bin by SST. SST Ver.4.41or later, obaey Steps to Download Data; Single > Download Data > SramImg.bin > Start b) Carry out Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK [8] Download Menu 2 > [2] Restore if You carry out [5]BACKUP c) Use the Remote UI. Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export 3) Resetting/registering the data While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed out before replacement, reset/register the data. 4) When the user generates and adds the key pair, certificate and/or CRL, request the user to generate them again

■■TPM PCB .Main Controller PCB 1 4-36 When TPM setting is “OFF” Any operation is not necessary at replacement. When TPM setting is “ON” It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to “ON”. 1) Removing the network cable Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately. 2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch 3) Restoring the TPM key Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key 4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch

2

Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 2

2-55

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Main Configuration Parts

Laser Exposure System

2-56 ■■Main Configuration Parts

Overview Laser Unit

■■Specifications/Controls/Functions

BD mirror

●● Laser light iR4251 / iR4245 / iR4235 The number of laser light Output Wave length

iR4225

4 2 10mW 5mW 775nm to 899nm (Infrared laser) 785nm to 800nm (Infrared laser) T-2-33

●● Polygon motor iR4251 / iR4245 / iR4235 Motor type The number of rotation

DC brushless motor Approx 27000 rpm/16000 rpm

iR4225 DC brushless motor Approx 32000 rpm T-2-34

●● Polygon mirror The number of facet

Polygon mirror

6 (Φ40)

BD PCB

T-2-35

●● Controls

F-2-79

Name

Synchronous control Laser intensity control Others

Main scanning direction synchronous control APC control Laser ON/OFF control Polygon motor control Laser shutter control

Function

Laser Unit

Emits laser

Polygon mirror BD mirror BD PCB

Scans the laser light in the main scanning direction Reflects the laser light in the BD PCB direction Generates the BD signa T-2-37

T-2-36

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Main Configuration Parts

2-56

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Control System Configuration

2-57

■■Control System Configuration Controls for the laser exposure system are mainly performed by the DC controller PCB and image PCB. Laser driver PCB J21

J1

BD PCB Polygon motor PCB

BD signal

Image signal

Laser control signal

J10

Polygon motor control signal

J7

J208 DC Controller PCB

Main Controller PCB2 J8143

J8142

F-2-80

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Control System Configuration

2-57

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing

Various Controls

2-58

■■Controlling the Laser Activation Timing

■■Overview

●● Laser ON/OFF Control

●● Basic Sequence

CNT0-0/0-1/0-2, C/D laser: CNT1-0/1-1/1-2) from the image PCB.

Laser ON/OFF control is dependent on the combination of the laser control signal (A/B laser:

Initial rotation (INTR):After the control panel key is ON, the machine starts the polygon motor and rotates the laser polygon motor until it reaches the number of target rotation while keepingall laser OFF.

NOTE: iR4225 does not control the C,D laser for 2 beam.

Once it reaches the target, the machine enters stand-by mode(FG control). If pressing the start key before the control panel key is ON*, standby time gets shorter after the polygon motor reaches the target.



Print (PRINT):When copy start key is ON, the machine drives A laser. After BD PCB detects A laser, the machine performs the APC (laser intensity) control of each laser.

Laser control signal CNT0-0 CNT0-1 CNT0-2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Oncethe BD signal reaches the specified cycle, the machine is ready to print. Image data is output from the main controller based on the synchronous signal and laser isemitted corresponding to it. But iR4225 does not control the C,D laser for 2 beam (A, B laser only). Control panel key ON (Start key ON 1 )

STBY

Start key ON

INTR

PRINT

STBY

BD control

Speed down

Light off

Light off

Light on

Light off

Laser control signal CNT1-0 CNT1-1 CNT1-2

: BD detection/APC control : AP control

BD * 1

BD * 1

Laser A

Laser A

Laser B

Laser B

Laser C

Laser C

Laser D

Laser D

*1: BD signal is generated based on A laser light. Only A laser light reaches BD sensor on BD PCB and B/C/D laser does not reach.

2

Image data output.

Forced output of the A laser Forced output of the B laser. Forced output of the A/B Laser Output compulsion OFF. A Laser (APC control) B Laser (APC control) Electric discharge: APC reset T-2-38

PVREQ signal Laser

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0



Waiting in FG control Speed up

Polygon motor

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

Laser status

Image per 1 line

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Laser status Image data output.

Forced output of the C laser. Forced output of the D laser. Forced output of the C/D laser. Output compulsion OFF

C Laser (APC control)OFF D Laser (APC control)OFF Electric discharge: APC reset T-2-39

F-2-81

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing

2-58

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing

2-59

CTRL_1-2 CTRL_1-1 CTRL_1-0 CTRL_0-2 CTRL_0-1 CTRL_0-0

[6]

BD signal

J8142

Main Controller PCB2 J8143

J8142

F-2-82

[1]

●● Main Scanning Synchronous Control

BD_SYNCH

Main scanning synchronous control is operated at synchronous PCB based on BD synchronous signal.

[2]

RE_A

[2]

RE_B

[2]

RE_C

[2]

RE_D

Based on BD signal that is formed from A laser light detected by BD PCB, BD synchronous signal for each laser is formed inside image PCB. Image data written in the line memory is read out by the readable signal (RE_A, RE_B, RE_ C, RE_D) according to the 4 phase differences formed inside the delayPCB based on the BD synchronous signal (BD_SYNCH) and is sent to the laser driver. Because iR4225 is a 2 beam, the reading possibility signal becomes RE_C and RE_D. NOTE: Regarding BD signal formation Not B laser but A laser only reaches BD sensor on BD PCB. BD signal is formed based on A laser light.

[5]

[3] [3] [4] [3] [3]

Main Controller PCB2 F-2-83

[1] Synchronous PCB [4] VDO [2] Delay PCB [5] VDO signal process unit [3] Line memory [6] Laser driver PCB BD_SYNCH: BD synchronous signal RE_A/B/C/D: Readable signal T-2-40

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Controlling the Laser Activation Timing

2-59

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Controlling the Laser Shutter

2-60

■■Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light

■■Controlling the Laser Shutter

●● APC Control

●● Laser Shutter Control

The machine monitors the laser light that is emitted to the built-in photo diode of laser diode

When a drum unit was drawn, laser shutter will be closed by laser shutter link that works in

and adjusts the laser to appropriate intensity.

conjunction with the drum unit and the laser light is blocked. Also, when the front door or right door open is detected, polygon motor and the laser emission will be turned OFF.

■■Controlling the Polygon Motor Laser shutter

●● Controlling the Polygon Motor From when the polygon motor starts and the polygon motor reaches the number of target rotation to before image formation starts, the machine controlsthe rotation speed by referring to the polygon motor rotation speed signal (FG signal). During image formation, it controls the polygon motor rotationspeed based on BD signal. Polygon motor rotation speed is controlled by speed-up signal (ACC signal) and speed-down signal (DEC signal).

Laser shutter link DURAM UNIT IN

DRUM UNIT OUT Laser shutter

Laser unit

Laser shutter

FG

DEC

ACC

Laser unit

J208

DC Controller PCB F-2-84

Laser shutter link

Laser shutter link F-2-85

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Various Controls > Controlling the Laser Shutter

2-60

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Work of the service > Troubleshooting

Work of the service

2-61 ■■Adjustment • none

■■Scheduled Servicing ●● Periodically Replaced Parts

■■Troubleshooting

• none

• none

●● Consumable parts • none

■■Measures in the Parts Replacement • When replacing the laser unit, enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the laser unit to be replaced for the following in the service mode:

-10

0

147

136

93

Ｂ

Ｃ

Ｄ

Ａ Ｅ

16

117

Ｆ

Ｇ F-2-86

Input example • Adjust of write start position of laser A. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST > 136 • Difference in magnification between the lasers. B. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ1-K > -10 C. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ2-K > 0 D. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ3-K > 147 • Difference in the phase between the lasers E. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ4-K > 93 F. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ5-K > 16 G. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ6-K > 117

NOTE: There are two kinds of laser units of four beams (iRA4251/4245/4235) and two beams (iRA4225). Changed the number of the pins of the connection connector as incompatible measures.

2

Technology > Laser Exposure System > Work of the service > Troubleshooting

2-61

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications

Image Formation System

2-62 ■■Specifications Item Photosensitive Material Drum diameter drum Cleaning method Process speed

Overview ■■Features • High image quality is supported. Charge control and the parts for image formation process are optimized. • High durability drum

Primary charging

E drum is adopted.

Primary charging roller Photosensitive drum

Developing

Transfer roller Developing cylinder

F-2-87

Transfer

Separation Waste toner

Specifications/Mechanism/Method

OPC drum (E-drum) φ30 Cleaning blade At cassette pickup: 51/45/35cpm model: 230mm/sec 25cpm model: 137mm/sec At manual feeder pickup 51/45/35/25cpm model: 137mm/sec Primary charging roller Charging method AC bias constant voltage control: approx. 600 to 2600Vp-p DC bias constant voltage control: approx. -400 to -800V DC bias switch control (variable according to environment sensor detection) φ14 Roller diameter Brush roller (φ10) Charging method Developing method Dry one-component jumping development AC bias constant voltage control: approx. 800Vp-p DC bias control: approx. -300 to -700V DC bias switch control (variable according to density setting, environment sensor detection) Developing cylinder φ20

diameter Toner Toner level detection Transfer method

Magnetic negative toner Toner detection by toner level sensor (inside sub hopper and developing unit)

Transfer roller DC constant current control: approx. 20 µA Cleaning bias control: -2700V (DC constant voltage control) DC current level control (variable according to environment sensor detection, paper type, paper width, source of paper) Φ16 Roller diameter Cleaning bias application Charging method Separation method Static separation (Static eliminator) + Curvature separation DC constant voltage control: -2800V (high bias), -2300 (low bias) Collected into waste toner container Waste toner container capacity: approx. 750g T-2-41

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications

2-62

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Major Components of Image Formation System

■■Major Components of Image Formation System

Name Toner cartridge Drum unit Brush roller

Drum unit Brush roller Primary charging roller

Toner cartridge

Cleaning blade Waste toner feed screw Photosensitive drum Static eliminator

Sub hopper

Transfer roller Developing cylinder

Toner feed screw Toner feed screw

Developing unit F-2-88

2

2-63 Function Toner cartridge filled with the toner for supply

Unit consisting of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, etc. Rotates in connection with the primary charging roller to clean its surface. Primary charging roller Rotates in connection with the photosensitive drum to cause it negatively charged. Scrapes off the residual toner on the photosensitive drum. Cleaning blade Waste toner feed screw Feeds the toner scraped off by the cleaning blade to the waste toner container. Forms images on the surface of the photosensitive drum. Photosensitive drum Applies negative charge to the back of paper to cause it separated from Static eliminator the photosensitive drum. Applies positive charge to the back of a paper to cause the toner to be Transfer roller transferred to it. Transfers the toner in the developing unit to the photosensitive drum. Developing cylinder Unit consisting of the developing cylinder, developing blade, etc. Developing assembly Feeds the toner supplied from the sub hopper into the developing unit. Toner feed screw

(Inside developing unit) Feeds the toner supplied from the toner cartridge to the developing Toner feed screw unit. (Inside sub hopper) Stores the toner supplied from the toner cartridge. Sub hopper

Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Major Components of Image Formation System

T-2-42

2-63

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Image Formation Process

2-64

■■Image Formation Process The image formation system of the machine mainly consists of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing cylinder, transfer charging roller, static eliminator, and cleaning blade. The image formation process around the drum unit contains the six blocks.

Image Formation Process Description Charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a Primary charging block Laser exposure block Developing block

Primary charging roller

Drum cleaning block

Cleaning Blade

Transfer block Photosensitive drum

Separation block

Paper

Primary charging block

Separation block Static eliminator

Drum cleaning block

uniform negative potential. Exposes laser beam on the surface of the drum for charge neutralization to form the latent image formation. Causes the negatively-charged toner on the developing cylinder to adhere to the latent image formation on the surface of the photosensitive drum to form a visible image. Applies positive charge to the back of a paper to transfer the toner on the drum to the paper. Separates a paper from the photosensitive drum with its elastic force and at the same time applies negative charge to the back of paper to facilitate paper separation. Scrapes off the residual toner on the surface of the drum using the cleaning blade and feeds it to the waste toner container. T-2-43

Laser exposure block

Developing block Transfer charging roller Transfer block Developing cylinder F-2-89

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Image Formation Process

2-64

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Basic Sequence > Sequence of Operation (last rotation)

Basic Sequence

2-65

■■Sequence of Operation (printing) • Pickup from cassette 1 (fixing mode: plain paper 1)

The basic sequence is as follows.

Registration ON

■■Sequence of Operation (initial rotation)

Image formation sequence (1st sheet)

• Pickup from cassette 1 (fixing mode: plain paper 1) Pickup ON

Image write end

Registration ON

Main Motor (M1) Primary charging AC bias

Registration ON

Sheet-to-sheet sequence

Image formation sequence (2nd sheet and later)

Main Motor (M1) Primary charging AC bias Primary charging DC bias Laser Developing AC bias

Primary charging DC bias

Developing DC bias

Developing AC bias Developing cylinder clutch (CL1)

Developing cylinder clutch (CL1) Transfer bias

Transfer bias

Static eliminator bias

Developing DC bias

Static eliminator bias F-2-91 F-2-90

■■Sequence of Operation (last rotation) Image write end Main Motor (M1) Primary charging AC bias Primary charging DC bias Laser Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Developing cylinder clutch (CL1) Transfer bias

[1]

Static eliminator bias

In [1] above, a cleaning bias (-2700V) is applied.

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Basic Sequence > Sequence of Operation (last rotation)

F-2-92

2-65

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control

Controls

2-66 ●● PASCAL Control This control stabilizes gradation density characteristics on the image.

■■Image Stabilization Control

This control is executed when the following is selected in user mode: Auto Adjust Gradation > Full Adjust

●● Overview At times, changes in the environment or wear on the machine can cause its image output to become unstable. To obtain a stable image, the machine uses the following control

Execution timing

mechanisms.

During execution of Full Adjust: User mode > Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance

PASCAL control: Corrects the gradation density of an image.

Main controller

Patch pattern on the test print is scanned by the Reader to create a gradation table.

> Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation

Reader controller PCB

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

PASCAL control

Primary charging roller

first print

Photosensitive drum Paper

second print

Output test print (copy)

Output test print (Printer2: 1200dpi)

Read test print (copy)

Read test print (Printer2: 1200dpi)

Generate gradation table (copy)

Generate gradation table (1200dpi)

Output test print (Printer1: 600dpi)

End

third print

Read test print (Printer1: 600dpi) Generate gradation table (600dpi)

Transfer roller

F-2-94

Developing assembly F-2-93

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control

2-66

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit

2-67

■■Drum Unit

●● Primary Charging Bias Control The machine is directly charged by the charging roller. DC bias and AC bias that stabilized

●● Outline The drum unit mainly consists of the photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, brush roller,

the charge is applied to the primary charging roller. Primary charging roller

cleaning blade, and waste toner feed screw, and is driven by the main motor (M1).

Photosensitive drum

Cleaning blade in contact with the photosensitive drum scrapes off the residual toner on its surface without being transferred to a paper. The residual toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is fed from the toner ejection part into the waste toner container by the waste toner feed screw. The primary charging roller is cleaned by the brush roller in contact with it. Waste toner feed screw

HVT PCB

Cleaning Blade

Toner ejection part

Environment sensor

Brush roller

[2]

[1]

Primary AC bias control circuit

M1

Primary DC bias control circuit

DC Controller PCB

Photosensitive drum

F-2-96

[1]

Primary charging roller

[1] Primary charging bias control signal [2] Environment sensor detection signal T-2-45

DC Controller PCB F-2-95

M1 Main motor [1] Main motor drive signal

●● Constant voltage control of DC bias and AC bias The primary AC bias control circuits on the DC controller PCB control the DC bias and AC bias applied to the primary charging roller to keep their voltage at the fixed level.

T-2-44

The primary AC bias control circuits control constant voltage control and current quantity of electric discharge control of the AC bias by the environment. * The current quantity of electric discharge control minimizes charged AC bias to lengthen drum life. Electric discharge product on the drum decreases by decreasing the primary AC bias. Therefore, the image smear by fusion with the water decrease.

●● DC/AC bias switch control The DC/AC bias output varies according to the environment detected by the environment sensor (S16).

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Unit

2-67

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly

■■Developing Assembly

2-68 ●● Developing Bias Control The DC bias and AC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.

●● Outline The developing assembly mainly consists of the developing cylinder, developing blade, toner

Photosensitive drum

agitation plate, and toner feed screw, and driven by the main motor (M1) and developing cylinder clutch (CL1). The toner supplied from the toner cartridge is fed into the developing assembly by the toner feed screw and toner agitation plate. The toner presence/absence in the developing assembly is detected by the developing assembly toner sensor (S25) which is a magnetic permeability sensor.

Density Setting

Main Controller PCB

Toner feed screw

Toner agitation plate

Environment sensor

Developing Blade

HVT PCB [3]

[2]

[1]

Developing AC bias control circuit

S25 Developing cylinder

Developing cylinder

Developing DC bias control circuit

DC Controller PCB F-2-98

CL 3

[1] Developing bias control signal [2] Environment sensor detection signal [3] Density setting signal

M1

T-2-47

[3]

[2]

[1]

●● Constant voltage control of DC bias and AC bias The DC bias and AC bias control circuits on the DC controller PCB control the DC bias and

DC Controller PCB

AC bias applied to the developing cylinder to keep their voltage at the fixed level. F-2-97

S25 CL1 M1 [1] [2] [3]

Developing assembly toner sensor Developing cylinder clutch Main motor Developing cylinder clutch drive signal Main motor drive signal Developing assembly toner sensor detection signal T-2-46

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing Assembly

2-68

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner cartridge

2-69 ■■Toner cartridge

●● Toner Supply Shutter Opening/Closing Mechanism There are shutters at the supply mouths of the toner supply unit to prevent toner scattering. The shutter is opened/closed in conjunction with push-in and pull-out of the developing assembly.

●● Outline Toner cartridge is filled with toner and supplies to the developing assembly.

Shutter Toner supply unit Toner cartridge

F-2-100

Toner supply unit

The toner in the toner cartridge is fed to the sub hopper and then to the developing assembly

Shutter

by the toner feed screw. The toner presence/absence in the sub hopper is detected by the sub hopper toner sensor (S26) which is a magnetic permeability sensor. If the developing assembly toner sensor (S25) detects the absence of the toner in the developing assembly, the hopper motor (M16) drives to rotate the toner feed screw to feed toner in the sub hopper to the developing assembly. Also, if the sub hopper toner sensor (S26) detects the absence of the toner in the sub hopper, the bottle motor (M17) drives to rotate the toner cartridge to feed the toner in the Toner cartridge to the sub hopper. If the sub hopper toner sensor (S26) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than

Toner

the specified period of time, no toner in the toner cartridge is assumed and the message to F-2-99

replace the Toner cartridge will be displayed. Also, if the developing assembly toner sensor (S25) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than the specified period of time, no toner in the developing assembly is assumed and a No Toner error message will be displayed.

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner cartridge

2-69

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner cartridge

2-70 ●● Toner Level Detection

Sub hopper Toner feed screw

Toner level

Route of toner supply

Status

Message

100 to 11%

Toner cartridge

No

Alarm No

S26 S26

Operation When the sub hopper toner sensor (S26) detects absence of toner, the bottle motor (M17) is driven. Once the sub hopper toner sensor (S26) detects presence of toner, the bottle motor (M17) is stopped (to prevent toner leak).

S25

10 to 1%

S26

Toner feed screw

Replace the notice*1 toner cartridge. (Continuous printing is enabled.)

Developing unit S25

M16

M17

M1

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

DC Controller PCB F-2-101

S26 M1 M16 M17 [1] [2] [3] [4]

Sub hopper toner sensor Main motor Hopper motor Bottle motor Sub hopper toner sensor detection signal Hopper motor drive signal Main motor drive signal Bottle motor drive signal

0%

S26

T-2-48

S25

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner cartridge

Replace the No toner cartridge. (Job is stopped.)

If the sub hopper toner sensor (S26) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than 90 seconds after the drive of the bottle motor (M17) has been started, a message is displayed in the bottom of control panel because the system determines that there is no toner in the toner cartridge. This state continues during printing and the toner cartridge can be replaced during printing. After the Toner cartridge is replaced, the toner level returns to 100%. NOTE: After "Replace the toner cartridge."message is displayed, and approx. 2,000 sheets* are printed, *A4 6% image If the developing assembly toner sensor (S25) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than 40 sec after the drive of the hopper motor (M16) has been started, a message is displayed in the bottom of control panel because the system determines that there is no toner in the toner cartridge. The print operation stops. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the toner level returns to 100%.

2-70

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit

Toner level

Status

Message

After exchange.

No

Alarm notice*2

S26

S25

2-71 ■■Transfer Unit

Operation When detected a toner with hopper toner sensor (S26) and developing assembly toner sensor (S25) after the exchange of the toner container, a signal is notified of. In addition, a toner residual quantity counter is initialized automatically.

●● Outline The transfer unit mainly consists of the static eliminator and transfer roller which rotates in connection with the drum unit.

T-2-49

*1 Prior delivery alarm There are two kinds of following detection methods.

Static eliminator

• Set a detection timing. (service mode) Detect it at a toner residual quantity counter (total of rotary time of the Hopper motor). Set it at toner residual quantity 40-0%. (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > BODY > T-DLV-BK • Detect it in hopper toner sensor (S26). If the sub hopper toner sensor (S26) keeps detecting the absence of the toner for more than 90 sec after the drive of the bottle motor (M17) has been started, the detect.

Transfer charging roller

(Toner residual quantity 10-1%) *2 Exchange completion alarm WWhen detected a toner with two sensors (S26/S25) after the exchange of the toner

F-2-102

container, a signal is notified of. E020-0000: The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner. E024-0000: The connector (J209) of developing assembly Toner Sensor (S25) is disconnected. E024-0001: The developing assembly Toner Sensor (S25) is disconnected. E025-0000: The connector (J207) of Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (S26) is disconnected. E025-0001: Failure of the Bottle Motor (M17)

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit

2-71

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit

2-72

●● Transfer Bias/Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control

●● Cleaning Bias Control

DC bias is applied to the transfer roller and static eliminator.

To return the toner adhered on the transfer roller to the photosensitive drum, negative voltage is applied at the last rotation.

Photosensitive drum

●● Separation Static Eliminator Bias Control Either of the two types of negative voltage (low bias or high bias) is applied to the static

Static eliminator

eliminator depending on the print mode and sequence for reducing electrostatic suction to facilitate separation of paper from the photosensitive drum.

Environment sensor

HVT PCB [3]

Transfer charging roller

Transfer bias control circuit

[2]

[1]

Static eliminator bias control circuit

DC Controller PCB F-2-103

[1] [2]

Separation static eliminator bias control signal Transfer bias control signal

[3]

Environment sensor detection signal T-2-50

●● Transfer Bias Constant Current Control The transfer bias control circuit on the DC controller PCB controls the transfer bias applied to the transfer roller to keep the constant current.

●● Transfer bias level control The transfer bias output varies according to the environment, paper type, paper width, and/or source of paper detected by the environment sensor (S16).

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer Unit

2-72

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste toner container

■■Waste toner container

2-73 ●● Waste Toner Full Level Detection Status

●● Outline Residual toner adhered on the photosensitive drum without being transferred to a paper is scraped off by the cleaning blade in contact with the photosensitive drum, then fed into the waste toner container by the waste toner feed screw. The waste toer container is supported by a spring. If the waste toner container sinks down lower than specified with the weight of collected toner, the waste toner full sensor (S17) detects the waste toner container full. Drum unit

Detection timing

Warning for full level of waste toner (Approx. 99% of the full criterion)

When the Switch is pressed and the total counter value exceeds 50,000 sheets Full level of waste When 2,000 sheets toner (Full criterion) are printed since the full level warning. When the Switch is pressed and the total counter value fails 50,000 sheets *2

Detecting to (location)

Alarm

Operation

Waste toner full notice*1 sensor (S17)

Continuous printing is enabled. (Please prepare a waste toner container)

The number of prints

Host machine is stopped (error display).

No

Waste toner full No sensor (S17)

T-2-52

Waste toner container

When replacing it for a new waste toner container after the waste toner full sensor detected presence of a waste toner container, the internal counter for full detection is cleared automatically. And the warning/indication message on the operation panel disappears. When changed a collection toner container, the collection toner container part counter ( service mode:WST-TNR)is reset automatically. • COUNTER > DRBL-1 > WST-TNR *1:Prior delivery alarm When detected Waste toner full level detection condition, notify of " warning indication for full level of waste toner" (message) and prior delivery alarm. Waste toner full level detection condition • When the total counter value exceeds 50,000 sheets • Full level detection of Waste toner container. *2: Special full level detection When attaching a waste toner container that has been used by the other machine, or the counter information is lost for some reason, it is necessary to notify full level before an alert S17

is given. (The counter shows less than 50,000 although the sensor detects full level of waste

S17

toner) In such a case, it is determined as full level without an alert and the machine cannot F-2-104

S17 Waste toner full sensor

continue printing. Explain the user that there will be no alert when any of the above is executed.

T-2-51

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste toner container

2-73

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting

2-74

Servicing

■■Major Adjustments None

■■Periodically Replaced Parts None

■■Troubleshooting None

■■Consumable Parts No

Items

1 2 3

4

Parts Number

Q'ty

Life

Remarks

Transfer roller FC9-0693 Separation static FM3-9296 charge eliminator Developing FM4-9730 assembly

1 1

240,000 sheets 240,000 sheets

1

Waste toner container

1

600,000 sheets: 51/45/35cpm model 500,000 sheets: 25cpm model 80,000 sheets Defined by 6% document. If service engineer removes the waste toner from the Waste Toner Container, the Waste Toner Container can be reused.

FM3-9276

T-2-53

■■Periodical Servicing No 1 2

Items Transfer guide Pushing wheel (developing assembly)

Interval 120,000 sheets 120,000 sheets

Remarks Dry wiping Dry wiping

■■Action to take when replacing parts

T-2-54

When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts and Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the Parts Counter (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1)

2

Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting

2-74

2

Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications

2-75

Fixing System

■■Specifications Item Fixing method Fixing speed

Overview

Function/method On-demand fixing Process Speed H

■■Features This machine introduces the on-demand fixing method. Process Speed L

Fixing delivery roller

Fixing heater Control temperature Temperature detection Cleaning control Edge heat rising prevention control Fixing loop control Protective Function

Separation guide

Fixing heater

233mm/sec (1/1-high speed: 1.4% speed-up) 233mm/sec (1/1-end speed: 0.9% speed-up) 230mm/sec (1/1-speed) 224mm/sec (1/1-slow speed: 4.5% speeddown) 139mm/sec (1/1-high speed: 1.4% speed-up) 139mm/sec (1/1-end speed: 0.9% speed-up) 137mm/sec (1/1-speed) 131mm/sec (1/1-slow speed: 4.5% speeddown)

Ceramic heater 215 deg C (Process speed H, plain paper 1, single sided) *1 By the main thermistors and the sub thermistors (front) and (rear) Cleaning sequence control Paper edge cooling fans (front)/(rear) and sequence control

Loop sensor "Main thermistor and Sub thermistors (front)/(rear) Thermo Switch (operating temperature: 250 deg C)" T-2-55

*1. Target temperature is specified depending on the process speed, the fixing mode and the fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control.

Fixing film Fixing inlet guide

Pressure roller

F-2-105

2

Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Specifications

2-75

2

Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Major parts configuration

2-76

■■Major parts configuration -----

Film unit

H1/H2 TH3 TH2 TH1 TP1 S19

Pressure roller

Part name Film unit Pressure roller

Function / method

Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper fixed (fused).

Fixing heater Main thermistor

Ceramic heater To be in contact with the heater Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise Sub thermistor (front) To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area) Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise, temperature detection/cooling control on the edges Sub thermistor (rear) To be in contact with the heater (non-feeding area) Temperature control, detection of abnormal temperature rise, temperature detection/cooling control on the edges Non-contact type with the heater Thermo Switch To block AC electric power supply when a failure is detected. Fixing outlet sensor Jam detection T-2-56

Fixing outlet sensor (S19) Thermo switch (TP1) Main thermistor (TH3)

Fixing hiater (H1/H2)

Sub thermistor (front) (TH2) Sub thermistor (rear) (TH1) F-2-106

2

Technology > Fixing System > Overview > Major parts configuration

2-76

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Standby temperature control

2-77

Controls

■■Standby temperature control

■■Fixing temperature control: overview

Max. 10 sec

F-2-108 F-2-107

●● Standby temperature control To preheat the fixing assembly to reduce time for starting print. • Flying start temperature control

●● Print temperature control To increase temperature to meet the fixing target temperature and keep the target temperature during printing. • Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control • Print temperature control • Sheet-to-sheet temperature control

●● Down sequence control

●● Flying start temperature control Purpose: To reduce the print time (FPOT) of the 1st sheet Starting conditions • When opening the copyboard cover or ADF, and also the detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 100 deg C. • When the original sheet is set on the ADF tray, and also the detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 100 deg C. • When the main power switch is turned ON or the machine condition is shift from the sleep mode to standby, and also the detection temperature of the main thermistor is less than 180 deg C. Control description:

To prevent fixing failure due to rising temperature at the edge or fall in temperature. This

• The target control temperature is set to 155 deg C and the fixing motor starts to rotate

control causes reduced the productivity (through-put).

with a half speed. The control continues for maximum 10 seconds.

• Down sequence when feeding small size paper • Down sequence when switching paper size

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Standby temperature control

2-77

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print temperature control

2-78

■■Print temperature control

C.Sheet-to-sheet distance temperature control To prevent the excessive temperature rise and to save the power consumption, the target temperature is set 5 deg C low (in case of plain paper *1) from the printing temperature. *1. When the fixing mode is the plain paper 1, plain paper 2 or thin paper, set to -5 dec C. In the other cases, set to -15 or -20 deg C low or +5 deg C high according paper type

F-2-109

●● Startup (warm-up rotation) temperature control To increase fixing temperature to be ready for printing after receiving the print-start command

●● Print temperature control To set optimal target temperature to prevent fixing failure or offset, and keep the specified target temperature during printing A.Setting target temperature Target temperature is specified depending on the paper type, paper size, elapsed time since the last control (including the standby control) of fixing temperature and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control. B.Temperature control during printing When the paper passes in the fixing unit, the fixing temperature is controlled to keep the target value (see the table on the next page) according to the detection result of main thermistor.

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print temperature control

2-78

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print temperature control

Target temperature during printing The control temperature is determined according to the fixing mode and to the fixing

2-79 No. Fixing mode 15 S-Postcard

Postcard

Paper setting

Weight (g/m2) ---

16

Envelope

---

temperature at the start of warm-up control. The following 16 modes are provided as the fixing mode. The fixing modes are changed by the paper setting and the service mode setting. The following table is the control temperature when the fixing temperature is less than 55 deg C at the start of warm-up control.

3

4

Plain paper 1_N1

Plain paper 1_N3

5

Plain paper 2

6

Plain paper 2_N1

7

Plain paper 2_N3

8

Heavy paper 1

9

Heavy paper 2

10 11 12 13 14

Heavy paper 3 Heavy paper 4 OHP film Bond paper Postcard

2

T-2-57

51/45/35 cpm machine (Process speed H)

●● Fixing Mode No. Fixing mode 1 Thin paper 2 Plain paper 1

Envelope

Fixing mode Paper setting

Weight (g/m2)

Thin paper Plain paper 1

52 to 59 60 to 63

Translucent paper Plain paper 1 Translucent paper

64 to 80 60 to 63 64 to 80

Plain paper 1 Translucent paper

Remarks (Fixing grade priority (14cpm) Service mode "PSPPR2"is set to 0.

60 to 63 64 to 80

Recycled paper Color paper Punch hole paper Plain paper 2 Recycled paper Color paper Punch hole paper Plain paper 2

64 to 80

Recycled paper Color paper Punch hole paper Plain paper 2 Heavy paper 1 Label paper Heavy paper 1 Label paper Heavy paper 3 Heavy paper 4 OHP film Bond paper Postcard

64 to 80

81 to 90 64 to 80

81 to 90

81 to 90 91 to 105 151 to 181 106 to 128 151 to 181 129 to 163 164 to 220 15 to 181 75 to 90 ---

Remarks

The control temperature is lower than the normal temperature. Service mode "TMPTBLC" is set to 2. The control temperature is lower than the N1 mode. Service mode "TMPTBLC"is set to 3.

The control temperature is lower than the normal temperature. Service mode "TMPTBLC"is set to 2. The control temperature is lower than the N1 mode. Service mode "TMPTBLC"is set to 3. Japan except Japan

Control Temperature (deg C) 1-sided/first of 2-sided Second of 2-sided

Plain paper 1 Plain paper 2 Plain paper 1_N1 Plain paper 2_N1 Thin paper

195 225 189 180 180

205 215 174 170 170 T-2-58

51/45/35/25 cpm (Process speed L) Fixing mode Plain paper 1 Plain paper 2 Plain paper 1_N1 Plain paper 1_N3 Plain paper 2_N1 Plain paper 2_N3 Thin paper Heavy paper 1 Heavy paper 2 Heavy paper 3 Heavy paper 4 Bond paper OHP film Postcard S-Postcard Envelope

Control Temperature (deg C) 1-sided/first of 2-sided Second of 2-sided 150 180 142 137 142 137 142 185 190 190 205 190 170 195 205 195

165 175 158 135 139 135 132 180 185 185 200 185 165 ------T-2-59

Speed priority (18cpm) Service mode "PSPPR2"is set to 1.

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Print temperature control

2-79

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control

Related Service Mode Offset of fixing control temperature (High and low of control temperature) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FX > FIX-TEMP (Setting of control temperature (Plain paper 1, Cassette)) > TEMP-CON (Setting of control temperature (Heavy paper 1)) > TEMPCON2 (Setting of control temperature (Plain paper 1, Manual feed)) > FX-S-TMP (Setting of control temperature (Curl correction in high humidity)) > TMP-TBL2 (Setting of control temperature (Heavy paper 2)) > TMP-TBL4 (Setting of control temperature (Heavy paper 3)) > TMP-TBL6 (Setting of control temperature (Envelope/Postcard/S-Postcard)) > TMP-TBL7 (Setting of control temperature (Plain paper 2, Cassette)) > TMP-TB12 (Setting of control temperature (Plain paper 2, Manual feed)) > TMP-TB13 (Setting of control temperature (Thin paper, Cassette)) > TMP-TB14 (Setting of control temperature (Thin paper, Manual feed)) > TMP-TB15 (Setting of control temperature (Plain paper 1, Second of 2-sided)) > TMP-TB16 (Setting of control temperature (Plain paper 2, Second of 2-sided)) <Setting value>

0 to 2: +15 deg C 3 to 11: +12 to -12 deg C (each 3 deg C) [Default: 7] 12 to 14: -15 deg C

2-80 ■■Down sequence control ●● Down sequence when feeding small size paper Purpose: To prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area in the case of continuous print of small size paper (less than A4 of length in width direction), fixing offset or deterioration of fixing film. Starting conditions: 1. Normal down sequence (1) When the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) reaches 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously during printing (2) Whenever the thermistor detects 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously, the down sequence is carried out with the maximum 4 steps. 2. Heavy paper down sequence (3) When one minute have passed with the heavy paper mode 1/2/3/4, or when the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) reaches 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously (4) When the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) reaches 255 deg C or higher for 400 msec continuously with the heavy paper down sequence, the productivity is compared with the normal down sequence. If the productivity of the normal down sequence is low, the sequence is shift to the normal down sequence. Operation: The fixing temperature is reduced by making wider sheet-to-sheet distance to control the temperature at lower than the target temperature for normal print. (Unit: sheets)

Down sequence

A4/ LTR

B4/ LGL

B5/ A5

A4R/ LTRR

A5R/ B5R/ EXE-R

Post -card

S-Post -card/ Envelo -pe

Free size

Normal down 1 Normal down 2 Normal down 3 Normal down 4 Heavy paper down

12 10 8 8 16

20 12 10 8 8

20 12 10 8 16

20 12 10 8 10

18 14 14 14 16

14 10 10 10 10

10 8 8 8 8

12 10 8 8 8 T-2-60

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control

2-80

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control

2-81

Completion conditions: (5) When the fixing temperature reaches 175 deg C and lower for 400 msec continuously, the productivity returns to normal. (6) When the fixing temperature reaches 175 deg C and lower for 400 msec continuously after shifting from the heavy paper down sequence to the normal down sequence, the sequence is shifted to the heavy paper down sequence.

Normal

(3)

(1)

F-2-111

Normal down <1st Step>

Starting conditions:

(2)

(5)

Normal down <2nd Step>

Thick paper down

(2)

Normal down <3rd Step>

If the temperature difference between sub thermistor (front) and main thermistor or between sub thermistor (rear) and main thermistor exceeds 20 deg C (*1) when switching to the paper which has longer width than the preceding paper.

(4)

(2)

Operation:

Normal down <4th Step>

Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as well to decrease the fixing temperature.Completion conditions:

(6)

When the temperature difference between sub thermistor (front) and main thermistor F-2-110

or between sub thermistor (rear) and main thermistor reaches 20 deg C and less (*1) *1. It is different according to setting value of the user mode (Special mode S or Rotation/collation adjustment).

Related Service Mode

Setting for down sequence start temperature COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FX > EDG-WAIT (Change of detection temperature for fixing edge)

<Setting value>

0: +20 deg C, 1: +10 deg C, 2: 0 deg C [Default: 2], 3: -10 deg C, 4: -20 deg C

●● Down sequence when switching paper size

*1. It is different according to setting value of the service mode (Productivity priority mode or Productivity priority in rotation collation mode).

Related Service Mode

Setting for down sequence start temperature COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD > PSP-PR1 (Set productivity priority mode) > PSP-PR4 (Set productivity priority in rotation collation mode)

Purpose: This down sequence prevents temperature rise of non-feeding area: there can be possible fixing offset or wrinkle of the succeeding paper due to increased temperature of non-feeding area of the preceding paper when continuously making prints or feeding wider length of paper than the preceding paper.

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control

2-81

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control

●● Change of the fixing grade with the other service modes The following service modes influence the fixing grade in addition to the service modes described above. Service mode

Outline

Setting value

Curl correction mode The fixing temperature 0 (Auto) is changed in the plain for plain paper paper 1 mode and plain paper 2 mode. COPIER >OPTION The fixing grade is >IMG-FX >TMP-TBLC improved by lowering the productivity.

1 (Off) (Default) 2 (Medium) 3 (High)

Curl correction mode The fixing temperature 0 (Off) is changed in the thin (Default) for thin paper

paper mode. The fixing 1 (Medium) grade is improved COPIER >OPTION > by lowering the IMG-FX >TMP-TBL5 productivity. 2 (High)

Fixing grade improvement mode COPIER >OPTION >IMG-FX >FIX-PR

2

The fixing temperature 1 (Off) is changed in the (Default) thick paper 1/2/3/4 2 (On) mode and bond paper mode, and also the plain paper 1/2 mode and thin paper mode under the prescribed environment.

Fixing temperature control / Throughput Change the normal temperature control and N1 mode (*1) according to the environment (temperature/ humidity) Normal temperature control (plain paper mode control) N1 mode temperature control N3 mode (*2) temperature control Normal temperature control (plain paper mode control) S-thin paper mode temperature control (The control temperature of thin paper mode is lowered by 10 deg C uniformly.) SS-thin paper mode temperature control (The control temperature of thin paper mode is lowered by 15 deg C uniformly.) Normal control The throughput of every size paper is lowered by 4 cpm in the thick paper 1/2/3/4 mode and bond paper mode. The throughput of every size paper is lowered by 5 cpm in the plain paper 1/2 mode and thin paper mode when the environment sensor detects less than 18 dreg C.

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Down sequence control

2-82 Service mode Loosened down sequence mode

Outline

The print speed-down is loosened at the temperature rise of non-feeding area. The COPIER >OPTION productivity has priority >IMG-SPD>PSP-PR1 over the fixing grade by shortening the wait time at the size change. (*3)

Productivity priority mode in rotation collation COPIER >OPTION >IMG-SPD>PSP-PR4

Setting value Off (Default)

On (Productivity improvement)

The productivity has 0:OFF priority over the fixing (Default) grade by shortening the wait time at the rotation Image Priority collation mode.

Fixing temperature control / Throughput The temperature difference between the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for allowing the pick up operation is 20 degree C. The temperature difference between the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for allowing the pick up operation is 30 degree C. Normal control

The temperature difference between the main thermistor and the sub thermistor for allowing the pick up operation is 20 degree C. Speed Priority 1 The temperature difference (Productivity between the main thermistor improvement) and the sub thermistor for allowing the pick up operation is 40 degree C. Speed Priority 2 The temperature difference (Productivity between the main thermistor improvementand the sub thermistor high) for allowing the pick up operation is 60 degree C.

*1. N1 mode: "Normal control temp." - 15 degree C (when the fixing temperature is 100 degree C or more at the start of warm up control) *2. N3 mode: "Normal control temp." - 48 degree C (when the fixing temperature is 100 degree C or more at the start of warm up control) *3. The set value of the productivity priority mode has priority at the rotation collation mode.

2-82

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper loop amount control before fixing

■■Fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence Purpose:

2-83 ■■Paper loop amount control before fixing Purpose:

To prevent the dirt of the pressure roller causing the dirt of the paper back side.

To get a proper image by avoiding a shock when the trailing edge of paper comes out of the registration roles, an appropriate paper loop is formed between transfer roller

Starting conditions:

and fixing roller.

When the detected temperature of sub thermistor (front) or (rear) is higher 18 deg C or more than the one of the main thermistor. Fixing film

Operation:

Pressure roller

After completion of the last rotation, the temperature control is executed so that the fixing heater turns on and the toner on the pressure roller is melted to transfer it to the fixing film. After transferring the toner to the fixing film, the fixing motor is rotated slightly to shift the nip area, so that re-transferring the toner to the pressure roller is

Sensor: OFF

Drum

prevented. Completion conditions: This sequence is finished when either following condition is satisfied. • After 5 seconds (maximum 10 sec) from shifting to the pressure roller cleaning

Registration roller

Loop sensor(S6) Transfer roller

sequence. • When the next job is started during the pressure roller cleaning sequence.

■■Fixing film edge cooling control When making prints with the paper that the width is shorter than A4, to prevent temperature rise of non-feeding area, the fan attached near the fixing assembly sends air and cools to the front and rear side of the fixing film. For details of the fixing film edge cooling control, see Technology > Controller System > Controls > Fan.

Sensor: ON

F-2-112

Starting conditions: This control is performed at every paper feeding. Operation: The fixing motor drive speed is controlled as follows by detecting the paper loop between transfer roller and fixing roller with the loop sensor. 1) The fixing motor drive speed is reduced by 4.5% when the reading edge of paper is fed 35mm from the transfer roller. The reduced speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned on by the formed paper loop.

Related Service Mode

Setting for down sequence start temperature COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FX > EDG-WAIT (Change of detection temperature for fixing edge)

<Setting value>

0: +20 deg C, 1: +10 deg C, 2: 0 deg C [Default: 2], 3: -10 deg C, 4: -20 deg C

2) After detecting the ON condition of the loop sensor for 50 msec continuously, the fixing motor drive speed is increased by 1.4% compared with the process speed. The increased speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned off by the deleted paper loop. 3) After detecting the OFF condition of the loop sensor for 50 msec continuously, the fixing motor drive speed is reduced by 4.5% compared with the process speed. The reduced speed is kept until the loop sensor is turned on by the formed paper loop.

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Paper loop amount control before fixing

2-83

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection features

4) Repeat steps 2) and 3). The fixing motor drive speed is increased by 0.9% compared with the process speed when the trailing edge of paper reaches 65 mm before coming out of the registration roller.

2-84 ■■Protection features Code E000

5) When continuously making prints, return to step 1). When making a single print, shift to the last rotation.

Description

Fixing temperature abnormal rise 0001 The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not rise to the specified value during startup control.

Error Clear Yes

E001

Fixing unit temperature rise detection 0000 The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more continuously for Yes 200 msec. 0001 The hardware circuit detects overheating of the main or sub thermistor for Yes 200 msec. 0002 The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more continuously for Yes 200 msec.

E002

Fixing unit temperature insufficient rise 0000 1.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 115 deg C continuously Yes for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has indicated 100 deg C. 2.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 150 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has indicated 140 deg C.

E003

Low fixing temperature detection after standby 0000 The reading of the main thermistor is less than 140 deg C continuously for Yes 400 msec or more.

E004

Thermistor disconnection detection error 0000 When disconnection is detected with connector (J214) for 30 sec continuously.

E014

Unstable rotation of the Fixing Motor (M2) 0001 Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, the drive detection signal is absent for 2 sec. 0002

E261

No

During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the No drive signal is absent 5 times in sequence.

Error in Zero Cross 0000 Zero Cross failed to be detected for 500ms or more while the relay was ON. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed.

No

T-2-61

Related Service Mode

• Error code clear COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR

2

Technology > Fixing System > Controls > Protection features

2-84

2

Technology > Fixing System > Work of Service > Troubleshooting

2-85

Work of Service

■■Major Adjustments None

■■Periodical ServicePeriodical Service None

■■Troubleshooting None

■■Consumable Parts No 1

Item Fixing main unit

Parts No. FM4-9733

Q'ty 1

Life 240,000 sheets

FM4-9734

Remarks 120V: 51cpm 230V: 51cpm

FM4-9736

120V:45/35/25cpm

FM4-9737

230V:45/35/25cpm T-2-62

Fixing main unit F-2-113

■■Periodical Servicing No 1

Items Fixing inlet guide cleaning

Interval

Remarks

120,000 sheets Wipe with dry cloth T-2-63

■■Action to take when replacing parts When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts and Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the Parts Counter (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1)

2

Technology > Fixing System > Work of Service > Troubleshooting

2-85

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration

2-86

Pickup Feed System

■■Parts Configuration ●● Arrangement of Rollers

Overview

Reversing roller Tray 2 delivery roller Tray 1 delivery roller Vertical path slave roller Duplexing inlet roller

■■Overview • Free size correspondence.(Manual feed pickup tray only.) 99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 431.8 mm • Expansion of paper grammage which can print. Cassette: 64g/m2-90g/m2 => 60g/m2-128g/m2

Fixing outlet roll 2 Fixing outlet roll 1

Manual feed pickup tray: 64g/m2-128g/m2 => 52g/m2-220g/m2

Fixing film Fixing pressure roller Duplexing/feeding roller 1

■■Specification Item Paper storage method Pickup method Cassette Manual feed pickup tray Paper stack Cassette Manual feed pickup tray capacity Paper feed reference Paper size Cassette 1

Description

Front loading method Retard separation method Pad separation method 550 sheets (80 g/m2), 680 sheets (64 g/m2) 80 sheets (80 g/m2), 80 sheets (64 g/m2) Center reference A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,LTR,LTTR,LGL,STMTR,EXEC, 8K,16K,16KR A4,A4R,A3,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,LTR,LTTR,LGL,11"" x 17"", Cassette 2 STMTR,EXEC,8K,16K,16KR, Free size(139.7 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 431.8 mm) envelope (No.10(COM10),ISO-B5,ISO-C5,Monarch,DL) *The optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 is required. Manual feed pickup tray A4,A4R,A3,A5R,B4,B5,B5R,LTR,LTTR,LGL,11"" x 17"", STMTR,EXEC,8K,16K,16KR, Free size (99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 431.8 mm) envelope (No.10(COM10),ISO-B5,ISO-C5,Monarch,DL) Label (B4,A4R,A4,LTR,LTRR) 60g/m2 to 128g/m2 Paper Cassette Manual feed pickup tray 52 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 grammage By the user Paper size Cassette Manual feed pickup tray By the user switch Through path Duplexing method

Drum Duplexing/feeding roller 2 Transfer roller Registration roller Manual feed pickup roller Manual feed pull-up roller Pickup roller (cassette 1) Vertical path slave roller (cassette 1) Feed roller (cassette 1) Separation roller (cassette 1) Pickup roller (cassette 2) Vertical path slave roller (cassette 2) Feed roller (cassette 2) Separation roller (cassette 2) F-2-114

T-2-64

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Overview > Parts Configuration

2-86

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Arrangement of Sensors

2-87

Arrangement of Sensors

●● Route of Drive M10 SL12

M20

S24

S22 M2 SL13

S21

M9

S19

M1

S6 S7 CL3

S5

CL12

S9

M13

S1

S3 S4

S34 S32

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S9

Cassette 1 pickup sensor Cassette 1 paper sensor Cassette 1 paper level sensor B Cassette 1 paper level sensor A Pre-registration sensor Loop sensor Duplex feed sensor Manual feeder paper sensor

S19 S21 S22 S24 S31 S32 S33 S34

S2

M3

S33

SL1

SL11

S31

F-2-115

Fixing Outlet Sensor No.1 delivery sensor No.2 Delivery Sensor Reversal Sensor Cassette 2 paper sensor Cassette 2 paper level sensor A Cassette 2 pickup sensor Cassette 2 paper level sensor B T-2-65

2

SL2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Arrangement of Sensors

F-2-116

M1 M2 M3 M9 M10 M13 M20

Main motor Fixing motor Cassette 2 pickup motor Duplex Feed Motor No.1 Delivery Motor Cassette 1 Pickup motor Reversal motor

SL1 SL2 SL11 SL12 SL13 CL3 CL12

Cassette 1 Pickup solenoid Manual feed pickup solenoid Cassette 2 Pickup solenoid Reversal solenoid No.2 delivery solenoid Registration clutch Manual feed pickup clutch T-2-66

2-87

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Arrangement of Sensors > Diagram of Paper Paths

■■Diagram of Paper Paths

2-88 ●● Interval speed

Reversing point

Delivery to tray 2 (option) Delivery to tray 1

(iR-ADV4251,4245,4235)：230(137)mm/sec (iR-ADV4225) ：137(137)mm/sec (iR-ADV4251) ：600(600)mm/sec (iR-ADV4245,4235)：550(550)mm/sec (iR-ADV4225) ：550(550)mm/sec (iR-ADV4251) ：550(230)mm/sec (iR-ADV4245,4235)：460(230)mm/sec (iR-ADV4225) ：230(230)mm/sec

Pickup from manual feeder

(iR-ADV4251,4245,4235,4225)：345mm/sec

Pickup from cassette 1

Pickup from cassette 2

Pickup from option cassette F-2-117

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Arrangement of Sensors > Diagram of Paper Paths

F-2-118

( ): in the case of manual feeder.

2-88

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly

Controls

2-89 Area Cassette Pickup Assembly

■■Overview

Detection, Control Outline Paper Level / Presence Detection Paper Size / Cassette Presence Detection

Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly Outline Paper Presence Detection

Duplex Feed Control

Fixing / Registration Assembly

Paper Size Detection

Fixing / Registration Assembly Duplex / Delivery Assembly JAM Detection

Registration Control Duplex Feed Control JAM Detection T-2-67

■■Cassette Pickup Assembly ●● Overview The paper inside the cassette is held up by the lifter plate. When pickup takes place, the pickup solenoid (SL1/SL11) is turned on, and the pickup roller

Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly

is moved down. When the pickup roller comes into contact with the surface of paper, the sheet is picked up by rotation of the roller. Only a single sheet of paper picked up is moved to the feed path by the feed roller and the separation roller, and moved as far as the registration roller by the pickup vertical path roller.

Cassette Pickup Assembly

The pickup vertical path roller, pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup motor (M3/M13)

Pickup roller Pickup vertical path roller Feed roller Separation roller

Lifter plate F-2-119

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly

F-2-120

2-89

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly

2-90

●● Paper Size Detection

Cassette size switch (S29/S30)

Paper Size Detection Paper size of the cassette can be automatically detected by adjusting the position of the

Rear detection rink

guide plate. Concavo-convex area of the cassette dial is switched when the guide plate is shifted and two Size Switches on a printer are switched.

Rear guide plate

Length and width are detected according to the ON / OFF combination of switches. As long as standard paper, both AB type and inch type can be used. However, size should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of A5-Rand STMT-R or the combination of B5-R and EXEC. S29/S30 S28/S35

Detection dial

Side guide plate F-2-121

Cassette size switch (S28/S35)

Detection dial Cassette size switch (S28/S35)

F-2-122

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly

2-90

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly

Width B5 EXEC 16K A5-R A4 STMT-R LTR B5-R LTR-R A4-R LGL B4 8K A3 LDR

257.0 267.0 270.0 148.5 297.0 139.7 279.4 182.0 215.9 210.0 215.9 257.0 270.0 297.0 279.4

Length 182.0 184.0 195.0 210.0 210.0 215.9 215.9 257.0 279.4 297.0 355.6 364.0 390.0 420.0 431.8

Width detection(S29/S30) 1 2 3 4 0 0 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ON ON ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 0 0 0 ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON ON 0 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 0 ON

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2-91

Length detection(S28/S35) 1 2 3 4 0 0 ON ON ON ON ON 0 ON 0 ON ON ON 0 0

0 0 0 ON ON ON ON ON 0 ON ON ON ON 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON ON ON ON

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ON ON 0 ON 0 ON ON ON T-2-68

Paper level sensor Paper level in a cassette is detected with the sensor indicated below. Cassette paper level sensor A

S4/S32

Cassette paper level sensor B

S3/S34

Cassette paper sensor

S2/S31 Cassette paper sensor (S2/S31)

Cassette paper level sensor A (S3/S32)

Flag

Cassette paper level sensor B (S4/S34)

Also, the cassette presence is detected when the size switch is pushed. (If no switch is pushed, it is determined as no cassette.)

Setting method when the size detection patterns are overlapped ASize should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of A5-Rand STMT-R or the combination of B5-R and EXEC. Specify the ecognition method for the special paper with user setting.

Paper sensor flag

The setting size is indicated below.

Lifter gear

Related Service Mode PRINT> CST> CASX> CSTX-UY> Number X shows Cassette Number. Y shows size category. (X, Y is one of the number 1/2/3/4.) U-size.

Size

U1

26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 36: A-OFI, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 30: A-LTRR, 42: FA4, 34: G-LGL 0: default 32: G-LTR-R, 34: G-LGL, 23: K-LGL-R, 0: default 22: K-LGL, 31: G-LTR, 29: A-LTR, 0: default 28: B-OFI, 0: default

U2 U3 U4

Tray F-2-123

T-2-69

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Cassette Pickup Assembly

2-91

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly

If the paper is full Cassette Paper Level Sensor B

Cassette Paper Level Sensor A Paper

OFF OFF If the paper is approx.half Cassette Paper Level Sensor B

2-92 Cassette paper level sensor A

Cassette paper level sensor B

Cassette paper sensor

Paper level

ON

ON

ON

100% to 50%

OFF

ON

ON

50% to 50 sheets

OFF

OFF

ON

50 sheet or less

---

---

OFF

no paper

Display

Cassette Paper Level Sensor A

T-2-70

Paper

■■Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly ●● Overview The paper in the tray of the manual feed pickup unit is forced against the manual feed pickup roller by the work of the pickup guide plate, and only a single sheet of paper is separated and

OFF ON If the paper is a little Cassette Paper Level Sensor B

moved into the machine by the work of the manual feed pickup roller and the separation pad. Cassette Paper Level Sensor A

Pickup guide plate

Paper Side guide

ON ON

Cassette Paper Sensor

If the paper is absent

Manual feed pickup tray

Manual feed pickup roller Pressure spring

F-2-124

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Multi-Purpose Pickup Assembly

Separation pad

F-2-125

2-92

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Duplex / Delivery Assembly

2-93 ■■Duplex / Delivery Assembly

●● Paper Presence Detection The paper presence is detected by the Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor. When the paper absence is detected, if there is the same size & same type paper exists in other cassette, auto cassette change is executed.

●● Duplex Feed Control On this machine, the paper is revered outside the machine with using the reverse mouth. Delivery mouth is determined depending on whether or not the 2 way tray is installed. Following is the number of sheet circulation by size.

●● Paper Size Detection This machine does not have the paper size detection function. The user must set the size of the paper in the multi manual feed tray using the operation panel, or the user must register a fixed size in the user mode. Image masking area is regulated based on the result of paper width detection so that the

• With 2way tray All size

No.1 delivery tray

No.2 delivery tray

3

3

image to be reproduced does not beyond the paper width

M10

■■Fixing / Registration Assembly

Reverse mouth

●● Registration Control

M20

SL12

2

The registration roller is driven by the main motor (M1). In between the registration roller and the main motor is the registration clutch (CL1), servicing to turn on and off the registration roller so that the paper will be matched in relation to the image on the drum at correct registration.

Tray 2 Delivery mouth SL13 M9

Tray 1 Delivery mouth

M1

CL3

S7

Registration roller F-2-127 F-2-126

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Duplex / Delivery Assembly

2-93

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Detecting Jams

■■Detecting Jams

2-94 • Jam in Feed System 01xx: Delay, 02xx: Stationary, 0Axx: Residue, 0Bxx: Door open jams

●● Jam Code List

0Cxx: Jam except the above factor, 0D91: Paper size jams, 0CF1: Error Jams Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect Sensor No.

S24

xx01 xx02 xx05 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx0D

S22

S21 S19

Sensor name

Jam type Delay

S1 S33 S5 S19 S21 S22 S24 S7

Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor Pre-Registration Sensor Fixing Outlet Sensor No.1 Delivery Sensor No.2 Delivery Sensor Reversal Sensor Duplex Feed Sensor

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Stationary Residue Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes T-2-71

• Other Jams S6 S7 S5 S9 S1

S3 S4

S34 S32

S2

S33

Sensor No. 01FF 02FF 05FF 07FF 08FF 09FF 0AFF 0DFF 0B00 0CA0 0CF1

Sensor name S1 S33 S5 S19 S21 S22 S24 S7 (SW2) -

Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor Pre-Registration Sensor Fixing Outlet Sensor No.1 Delivery Sensor No.2 Delivery Sensor Reversal Sensor Duplex Feed Sensor Front Door Switch Dcon re-try jam *1 Fin comm time out jam *1

Jam type Sequence error jam Sequence error jam Sequence error jam Sequence error jam Sequence error jam Sequence error jam Sequence error jam Sequence error jam Door Open jam (TThe sensor ID is non-display.) T-2-72

S31

*1 By service mode setup, the conversion from a jam cord to an error code is possible. As an assist function of the cause elucidation of the jam, for the jam that the identification F-2-128

of the cause is difficult, convert a jam cord into an error code and enable the acquisition of the log. (Lv2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-D

2

Technology > Pickup Feed System > Controls > Detecting Jams

2-94

2

Technology > Work of Service > Maintenance service > Troubleshooting

2-95

Work of Service Maintenance service ■■Periodically replaced parts None

■■Consumable parts No

Item

1 Manual feed pickup roller

Parts No. FL3-1352

Q'ty 1

2 Manual feed separation pad FL3-3469

1

3 Cassette pickup roller

FB6-3405

2

4 Cassette feed roller

FC6-7083

2

5 Cassette separation roller

FC6-6661

2

Life

150,000 sheets 150,000 sheets 150,000 sheets 150,000 sheets 120,000 sheets

Remarks

T-2-73

■■Periodically Servicing parts No

Item

1 Pre-registration guide (Static charge eliminator)

Parts No.

Q'ty

-

1

Life As needed

Remarks Dry wiping with the lint-free paper T-2-74

■■Action to take when replacing parts When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts and Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the Parts Counter (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1)

■■Major Adjustments None

■■Troubleshooting None

2

Technology > Work of Service > Maintenance service > Troubleshooting

2-95

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration

2-96

External Auxiliary System Overview ■■Power Supply Configuration ●● Power Supply Configuration inside the Host Machine +24V

+24V/+12V generation circuit

Main switch

+3.3V generation circuit

Front door switch

Power supply PCB

Fixing heater

+3.3V Semiconductor SW +12V

Heater control circuit

Main controller PCB

+12V

+12V +24V

DC controller PCB

+24V

HVT PCB

+12V +24V

Reader controller PCB

+24V Inner finisher Enviorment heater switch

Cassette heater Deck heater

Booklet/Staple finisher

Heater PCB Relay

Reader heater Drum heater

Option or standard

F-2-129

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration

2-96

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration

●● Power Configuration of the Reader Unit

2-97 ●● Power wire connection from the Host Machine to the Options Reader/ADF

24V 5V 24V Printer

Reader Controller PCB

12V 6V

Motor Sensor

CCD PCB

12V

LED Lamp Unit

Inner finisher

12V 24V 12V

DADF driver PCB

F-2-130

Wiring inside the machine 2-cassette pedestal

F-2-131

The inner finisher and the 2-cassette pedestal are connected to the host machinel with the connectors inside the covers. It is connected to the ADF with a cable outside the machine.

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration

2-97

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration

2-98

Reader/ADF

Buffer pass unit

Booklet/Staple finisher

Paper deck Wiring inside the machine

2-cassette pedestal F-2-132

The buffer pass unit and 2-cassette pedestal are connected to the host machinel with the connectors inside the covers. It is connected to the ADF, the paper deck and the staple/booklet finisher with a cable outside the machine.

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration

2-98

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep

Controls

■■Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep The moment the host machine enters sleep mode, the back light of the Control Panel is

■■Energy saver function

turned OFF. By pressing the Energy Saver Switch, the device returns from sleep mode and the back light of the Control Panel is turned ON.

Deep Sleep Shifting time (specified in Settings/ Registration) has passed

Press power-save switch

conditions.

PDL job is complete

STANDBY Press power-save switch

Entering auto sleep mode is prohibited when the host machine is in one of the following

PDL job occurs Press power-save switch

SLEEP-STNDBY

PDL job is complete

Power-saving

PDL job occurs

Sleep standby

F-2-133

The mode that can start operation immediately. All power is supplied in this mode, but display on the Control Panel is OFF. Energy Saver The mode to reduce energy consumption by reducing the control temperature when the Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the energy saving rate (this mode can be changed in Settings/registration “Change Energy Saver Mode” Default: -10%).

Settings in Settings/Registration Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings • Sleep Mode Energy Use > High. • During the time set in [Auto Sleep Time] Preferences > Network   • TCP/IP Settings > IP Address Settings > Auto IP > ON • TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > mDNS Settings > ON • AppleTalk Settings > Use AppleTalk > ON • IEEE 802.1X Settings > Use IEEE 802.1X > ON Function Settings   Time is specified in [Receive/Firwird > Common Settings > Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox > Memory Lock Start Time / Memory Lock End Time] (*1) Send > Common Settings > Communication Management Report > Specify Print Time > ON (*1) Send > Fax Settings > Modem Dial-in Settings > Set Line > Line 1 to 4 > ON. Send > Fax Settings > Fax Activity Report > Specify Print Time > ON (*1) 10 minutes or less is specified in [Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Communication Settings > Next > POP Interval] (except when the interval is set to "0")

*1 The device may enter DeepSleep mode when there are still 10 minutes or more left until

Deep Sleep The state that only 3.3V on the All-night Power Supply PCB is supplied. To be shifted to the standby mode when the next job is generated. • Print job • Pressing the power key on the Control Panel

2

2-99

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Conditions for Not Entering Deep Sleep

operation. Hardware status The Serial Coin Vendor is connected. The EFI (Video Option Board) is installed. The iSlot Extension Card is connected. The device is connected to a USB host. IP Sec board is connected and the setting for IP Sec is activated.

2-99

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup

System Performance Status An application is communicating via network (TCP connection on a port dedicated to CPCA / within 15 seconds after reception of UDP). Either of SNTP, DHCP, DHCP6 or eRDS communication is in progress. A job is being executed/in standby (Print/Copy/SEND/FAX/Report/Forward/Save, etc) During Fax / I-Fax communication During distribution of device information During export/import by Remote UI MEAP application is being executed (depending on the MEAP application) During backup of Mail Box documents A file is being opened (read/written) in Settings/Registration > Access Stored Files > Network. (*Common with WebDAV and SMB) The device is operating with the printer/scanner function stopped. The screen is shifting to service mode screen/download mode. The sleep mode exit timer is running (for 15 seconds after exiting Deep Sleep). The hard disk drive protection timer is running (for 10 minutes after exiting from Deep Sleep and the hard disk drive is powered ON. However, after a printing, scanning, and fax job is completed, this timer is disabled.) The network timer is running (for the number of seconds (default: 15 seconds) set by service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK > WUEN-LIV). The wake up timer is running (for 10 minutes after receiving a wake up packet). Timer is running after link-up (for 1 minute after network communication starts since machine power-on).

2-100 ■■Quick Startup To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to the All-night Power Supply PCB. Thereby, the main menu can be displayed after 30 seconds from turning ON the Main Power Supply Switch. Although when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following PCBs. • AC Driver PCB • All-night Power Supply PCB • Relay PCB • Main Controller PCB 1 Image of existing power supply

Main SW Relay

Relay Power supply

By turning OFF the Main Switch, all power turns OFF All-night Power Supply

NOT All-night Power Supply

All-night Circuit Main Controller Main Controller PCB 2 PCB 1

Energized area when the Main Switch is OFF

Image of power supply for iR-ADV 4200 Series

Main SW

Power is supplied to the All-night Power Supply even if the Main Switch is turned OFF

Semiconductor SW

Relay Power supply

All-night Power Supply

All-night Circuit Main Controller Main Controller PCB 1 PCB 2

NOT All-night Power Supply F-2-134

Disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker when performing work with the possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. PCBs may get damage. If a conductive material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup

2-100

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup

damage on it. The following illustration is used at the place where attention needs. When the following label is affixed, be sure to disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker.

Quick Start

Plug Off F-2-135

In addition, quick startup is not performed under the following conditions. At first startup after the AC Power Plug is connected to the outlet Under the following conditions (settings), the machine always starts up normally (even quick startup is ON). When any of the following network settings is set to "ON". • RARP • BOOTP • IPsec • IPv6 • NetWare • AppleTalk

2-101 As for startup right after shutting down of the machine under any of the following conditions, it starts up normally (even quick startup is ON). FAX • There is a fax transmission reservation. • Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from disconnection of a fax line • Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from non-detection of reception from a fax line • Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from putting down the fax sub device or handset MEAP During execution of MEAP application which prohibits moving to Deep Sleep A scheduled processing is reserved on MEAP. Job processing • During print/scan job processing • During SEND job processing • During I-Fax communication/job processing • During report job processing • During forwarding transmission job/reception job processing • During processing of data storage to Advanced Box • During fax communication/phone communication • During distribution of device information • During Box backup • During export/import by RUI • During opening/reading/writing file of Advanced Box (common with SMR/WebDAV) • During rebuilding with the HDD Data Encryption/Mirroring Board installed Others • When the machine state remains unchanged for more than 110 hours after turning ON the power as quick startup or turning OFF the power. - > At the time of shutdown, it will be normal shutdown. * This is to prevent a risk of UI freeze caused by memory leak. • Within a specified period of time (20 seconds) from turning OFF the Main Power Supply Switch - > In such a case, the machine reboots and then starts up normally at startup. Therefore, it will take a few more seconds compared with the normal startup. * This is for starting up the machine normally at the time of failure (UI freeze, etc.). • After moving to the Settings/Registration screen of service mode or RUI • After changing the user mode that requires restart • The machine is shut down from RUI • When an error occurs • When resource downloader is active • In printer/scanner limited functions mode • When a login application is switched by SMS • A license has been registered. • Startup by pressing the Control Panel Key T-2-75

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup

2-101

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Heater control

■■Heater control

2-102 Name Heater PCB

●● Power Configuration of the Heater Reader Heater

Reader heater Drum Heater Deck Heater

Drum heater

Heater PCB

Cassette heater

Deck heater

Description Reference value The heater PCB is not available as a product for USA/ CAN/ EUR. There is an exclusive built-in cassette heater PCB in the host machine for CSPL/ CHK/ CLA/ CA/ CCN. When installing a heater other than the cassette heater, the cassette heater PCB must be replaced by the heater PCB-K1. Reader heater is not available as a Surface temperature: product for USA/ CAN/ EUR/ TW. About 120-140 deg C Power consumption: About 8.3W (120V) /9.7W(200V) Drum heater is not available as a Surface temperature: product for USA/ CAN/ EUR. About 80 deg C Power consumption: About 20W or less Cassette heater is not available as a Surface temperature: product for USA/ CAN/ EUR. About 60 deg C There is a cassette heater in the host Power consumption: machine as a standard feature for About 16W CSPL/ CHK/ CLA/ CA/ CCN. Deck heater is not available as a Surface temperature: product for USA/ CAN/ TW. About 73 deg C Deck heater is available as a service Power consumption: part for EUR. About 20W

Cassette Heater

T-2-76 F-2-136

●● Heater operating condition Reader heater

OFF Turning on the Standby mode OFF environment heater Printing switch (SW4) ON Turning off the main power switch ON Sleep mode*1 *1: Sleep Standby mode/Deep Sleep mode/Sleep 1 mode

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Heater control

Drum heater*1

Cassette heater

Deck heater

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

T-2-77

2-102

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control

■■Fan Control

2-103 No.

●● Overview Fan layout

FM12

FM3

FM7

FM1 FM4 FM2 FM5

Name

Function

Error code E840-0001 E840-0002

FM1

Fixing film cooling fan (rear)

FM2

Fixing film cooling fan (front)

FM3

Exhaust fan (rear)

Cools the fixing unit.

E805-0000 E805-0001

FM4

Exhaust fan (front)

Cools the fixing unit.

E805-0002 E805-0003

FM5

Power supply cooling fan

Cools the power supply.

E804-0000

FM6

Main body cooling fan

Cools the power supply. Circulate air in the host machine.

E806-0000 E806-0001

FM7

Paper cooling fan

Cool paper.

E806-0002 E806-0003

FM12

Controller cooling fan

Cools the main controller.

E880-0001

Cools the fixing unit. Cool paper on the delivery tray

E840-0003 E840-0004

T-2-78

FM6

F-2-137

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control

2-103

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control

WUP Fixing film cooling fan (rear) (FM1)

STBY

INI

PTINT

*2

*1

*2

*1

*2

Power supply cooling fan (FM5)

*1

*2

Main body cooling fan (FM6)

*1

*2

*1

*2

*1

*2

*1

*2

Exhaust fan (rear) (FM3) Exhaust fan (front) (FM4)

Paper cooling fan (FM7) Controller cooling fan (FM12)

JAM/ERR/Deep Sleep /Sleep 1

●● Fixing film edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) control Purpose These fans are used to prevent the sections where paper is not fed from heating excessively

*1

Fixing Film Cooling Fan (front) (FM2)

LSTR

2-104

when narrow paper (narrower than the A4 size (297 mm)) is fed. These fans are used for the following purpose when paper wider than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed. • Cool paper that has passed through the fixing unit. • Cool paper to prevent the adhesion of paper interval on the delivery tray. Overview

: Full speed

• [A]: When paper narrower than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed, the air outlet of the paper edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) opens to blow air to both ends of the fixing film, thus cooling the sections where paper is not fed. • [B]: When paper wider than the A4 width (297 mm) is fed, the air outlet of the fixing film edge cooling fan (rear)/(front) closes to cool paper that has passed through the fixing unit and paper on the delivery tray. : Half speed F-2-138

*1: The fan operates at half speed only when the machine enters the standby mode after running for more than 8 minutes for fixing. *2: The fan control in PRINT/LSTR performs full speed/half speed drive/stop depending on print mode and fix control temperature. • Change of rotational speed for paper edge cooling fan

Fixing unit

(Lv.2) COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING > FN-MV-SW 0: OFF, 1: Half speed (default), 2: Full speed • Fan drive extension mode after job (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > FAN-EXTN 0:OFF, 1:ON

FM1/2 F-2-139

Control sequence 1) The shutter motor (M8) is energized and the shutter HP sensor (S10) detects the edge cooling shutter.

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control

2-104

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control

2) Aperture width of the edge cooling shutter is depending on the paper size. The edge cooling shutter starts to move when the registration clutch turns ON. Opening width of the Paper size shutter A3, A4 (in respective mode other than N1/N3) 0mm (closed) 18mm 23mm 24mm 29mm 30mm 50mm 53mm 58mm (opend)

A3, A4 (in N1/N3 mode and the surface temperature of the pressure roller is 95 degrees C or more.) LDR, LTR, A-LTR K8, K16 EXEC, G-LTR, K-LGL B4, B5 A3, A4 (in N1/N3 mode and the surface temperature of the pressure roller is less than 95 deg C.)*1 LTR-R, LGL, A-LTR-R, OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO, E-OFFICIO, M-OFFICIO, FOOLSCAP, F4A A4-R, FOLIO Other than the above-mentioned sizes

2-105 Shutter (rear)

Film unit

Shutter HP sensor (S10)

Shutter motor (M8) Shutter (front)

FM1

T-2-79 *1: The width of the edge cooling shutter aperture can be adjusted by service mode;

SERVICE MODE > COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING > ADJ-FNSH (Open width adj of paper

FM2

edge cooling fan shutter; in N1/N3 mode, A3/A4). Adjusting value; "0"-"6": Aperture width changes in 0mm – 24mm by 4mm steps. Adjusting value; "7"-"14": Aperture width changes in 30mm – 58mm by 4mm steps.

3) When Fixing film edge cooling fans (rear/front) (FM1/FM2) and the main body cooling fan

F-2-140

(FM6) are ON, their power (full speed, half speed and stop) and width of the edge cooling shutter aperture are controlled by the subthermistor (TH1/TH2).

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control

2-105

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control

2-106

■■Counter control

Target

Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item

1st delivery tray No.1 delivery sensor (S12)

Host machine

2nd delivery tray No. 2 delivery sensor (S42) Inner finisher inlet sensor (S1) Tray A Duplex feed sensor (S7) Reference Sensor: (Upper Tray) Tray B Feed Path Sensor (S102) (Lower Tray) Reference Sensor: Saddle area Saddle inlet sensor (S201)

Inner finisher

Staple Finisher / Booklet Finisher

T-2-80

Default counters for each country (model) are listed below. Target

Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item

2

000 Copy

000 Total A

(Total

2

2) 231 Total

148 Copy

000 Copy

(Large)

(Total 1)

(Large)

103

201

000 *1

203

*1

000 *1

000 *1 000

Counter 6

101

*1

Counter 5

102 Total 1

*1

Counter 4

Taiwan model

101 Total 2

*1

Counter 3

JP model Type 2 (New method)

Total 1

Counter 2

Counter 1

JP model Type1 (Conventional method)

Country Code

*1

000 *1

000 *1

UL model Type 2 (New method) General model

UK model Type1 (Conventional method) 240V UK model Type 2 (New method) CA model

JP

JP

TW

000

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control

FRN model Type1 (Conventional method) FRN model Type 2 (New method) GER model Type1 (Conventional method)

Total 1

*1

*1

US

203 *1

000 *1

000 *1

US

000 Copy

000 Copy

000 *1

000 *1

SG/KO/CN

(Large)

(Total 1)

(Large)

101 Total

103 Total

201 Scan

203 Print

000 *1

000 *1

GB

(Black/

(Black/

(Total 1)

(Total

Large)

Small)

112 Total 1

113 *1

501 *1

301 *1

000 *1

000 *1

GB

101 Total 1

000 Total

000 Copy

000 Copy

000 *1

000 *1

AU

(Large)

(Total 1)

(Large)

101 Total

103 Total

201 Scan

203 Print

000 *1

000 *1

FR

(Black/

(Black/

(Total 1)

(Total

Large)

Small)

112 Total 1

113 *1

501 *1

301 *1

000 *1

000 *1

FR

101 Total

000 Total

000 Scan

000 Print

000 *1

000 *1

DE

(Black/

(Black/

(Total 1)

(Total

Large)

Small)

112

113

000

000

101 Total 2

Total

Copy

Copy

(Large)

(Total 1)

(Large)

103 Copy

201 *1

2) 202 Total

Counter 6

Target of delivery

UL model Type1 (Conventional method)

Counter 5

Print mode Single-sided/Doublesided Double-sided (1st side) (2nd side) Count-up timing

Counter 4

• Delivery position (Finisher).

Counter 3

• Print mode (1-sided page, 2nd side of 2-sided page, 1st side of 2-sided page)

Counter 2

Counter 1

Count-up timing differs according to the following.

Country Code

(Total 102 Total 1

1)

1)

1) 501

301

2-106

2 Target

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control

Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item

*1 000 *1

Country Code

Counter 6

*1 000

Counter 5

*1 000

Counter 4

*1 000

Counter 3

Total 1 101

Counter 2

Counter 1

GER model Type 2 (New method) AMS model Type1 (Conventional method)

*1 000 *1

2-107

• Total: Copy + Print; 1 count up • 2-Sided: 1 count up when auto 2-sided copy • Country code change of CONFIG is executed from COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW >

DE

CONFIG.

Total

Scan

Print

(Black/

(Black/

(Total 1)

(Total

PT/NO/

Large)

Small)

1)

DK/FI/

ES/SE/

PL/HU/ CZ/SI/ GR/EE/ RU/NL/ 113

501

301

000

000

• Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction) • Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction)

Total

112

<Explanation of the list>

SK/RO/

• Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service mode items. (Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1 to 6 • COUNTER2 to 6 can be changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER). • The change of the counter display type (New method/Conventional method) can be changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > CNT-SW). *1: Nothing is displayed as default. However, you can change this setting from the service mode.

HR/BG/ AMS model Type 2 (New method)

Total 1 101

*1 000

*1 000

*1 000

*1 000

*1 000

TR ES/SE/ PT/NO/ DK/FI/ PL/HU/ CZ/SI/ GR/EE/ RU/NL/ SK/RO/ HR/BG/

ITA model Type1 (Conventional method) ITA model Type 2 (New method)

*1

*1

TR IT

301 *1

000 *1

000 *1

IT

000

000

000

Total

Total

Scan

Print

(Black/

(Black/

(Total 1)

(Total

Large)

Small)

112 Total 1

113 *1

501 *1

101

000

000

1)

T-2-81

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control

2-107

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Restricted function

Servicing

■■Restricted function The restricted function mode is activated when several specific errors are detected so the surviving functions still can operate. Item Specific error in ADF

Copy Book copy :

2-108

ADF Scan Disabled

Book Scan Enabled

Print Enabled

■■Periodically Replaced Parts

Finisher Enabled

No

Items

Interval

1

Air filter

240,000 sheets

Remarks

enabled

T-2-83

■■Consumable Parts

ADF copy: Specific error in Reader Specific error in Host machine Specific error in Finisher

disabled Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled

Enabled*1

T-2-82 *1: Only the straight pass delivery is available. Stapling, aligning, punching are not available.

ADF restriction error code E413

None

■■Periodical Servicing List None

■■Action to take when replacing parts Part name DC Controller PCB

Reader restriction error code E202, E225, E227, E248, E280, E400 Printer restriction error code E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, E010, E014, E020, E024, E025, E110, E261, E800, E805,

Air Filter

E806, E840

Action 1. Before Replacing 1)Backup of the Service Mode data (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP 2. After Replacing 1)Restoring the backup data (Lv.2)COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES 2)Switch OFF and then ON the main power. 3)Execute auto gradation adjustment. 4)Test print When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts, be sure to clear the Parts Counter. (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > OZ-FIL1)

Finisher restriction error code • Staple/Booklet finisher E514, E530, E531, E532, E535, E537, E540, E542, E590, E591, E592, E593 *E590 to E593: for the puncher unit (option). • Restricted operation at Finisher error (for Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1) (Lv.1) SORTER > OPTION > FIXING > MD-SPRTN 0: Normal, 1: Restricted operation

T-2-84

■■Major Adjustments None

■■Troubleshooting None

• Inner finisher E505-0002, E531, E551, E590, E5F3, E5F4, E5F6

2

Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Restricted function

2-108

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Domain authentication management

MEAP

2-109 • Users accessing the domain authentication server (Windows Server) • They belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory. • Use name contains only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low line),

Preparation for Using SSO-H

or % (percent).

■■Outline When using Single Sign On-H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H) as login service for the MEAP device, the system environment required differs depending on whether domain authentication is used for management or local device authentication is used for

Note: The difference in time setting of the domain authentication server and the machine (and the computer for login) should be within 30 minutes. (If the difference in time setting is longer than 30 minutes, an error will occur during the domain authentication process at login.)

management. The system requirements of each authentication method are shown below. Note: For the machine's login user name, use the name registered in "User logon name (preWindows 2000)" on the Active Directory.

■■Domain authentication management In order to use domain authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments are required.

User registration screen example (Windows Server 2003)

●● Domain authentication server To use domain authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments are required. • Domain authentication server (Windows Server) • Active Directory and DNS are installed in the server. • A group named "Canon Peripheral Admins" has been created on the Active Directory. • The OS should be one of the followings. List of OS supporting SSO-H OS Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Microsoft Windows Server 2012

32bit version

64bit version

Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Supported

F-2-141

T-2-85

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Domain authentication management

2-109

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC environment of administrator users and general users

• Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows • Lotus Domino V8.5 for Windows 2) OS where the LDAP server runs • It should comply with the specifications of the LDAP server product.

The following environment is required to use a MEAP device (managed by SSO-H) from a PC on the network. OS and other PC and Other Environments Classification Client OS

Operation check has been conducted for the following OS.

Operating System Windows XP Professional SP3 Windows Vista SP2

• Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2

iPv6 ura

1) LDAP server

Tam

When using LDAP authentication by SSO-H, the following conditions need to be satisfied.

■■PC environment of administrator users and general users

ura

●● LDAP authentication

2-110

Tam

2

Windows Server 2008 SP2

Windows Server 2008 R2 MAc OS

Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura

Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2

Tam

Windows 8 Server OS

ura

Windows 7 SP1

Tam

Note: When an LDAP server other than the server shown above is used, SSO-H may not work properly. Windows Active Directory works also as an LDAP server, but is not supported.

ura

• Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise

Supported browser Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Internet Explorer 9

Java Runtime Environment JRE5.0/JRE6/ JRE7 (Exclude JRE6 update4/5. )

Internet Explorer 8 Internet Explorer 9 Internet Explorer 10 Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Internet Explorer 7 Internet Explorer 8 Internet Explorer 9 Internet Explorer 8 Internet Explorer 9

Mac OS X v10.5

Safari 4.0.5 Safari 5.0.5

J2SE5.0 Java SE 6

Mac OS X v10.6

Safari 4.0.5 Safari 5.0.5 Safari 5.1

Java SE 6

Mac OS X Lion

Safari 5.1

Java SE 6 Java SE 7

Mac OS X Mountain Lion

Safari 6.0

Java SE 7

JRE : Java Runtime Environment

T-2-86

J2SE : Java 2 Platform Standard Edition Note: common to browsers

• The browser should support Java. (The environment such as Modern UI version of Internet Explorer on Windows 8 in which Java add-on cannot be used is not applicable.) • JavaScript should be enabled. • Refer to the website of JAVA (http://java.com/) for how to obtain the Java environment.

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC environment of administrator users and general users

2-110

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS

2-111

Preparation for Using SMS

Note: Internet Exproler-related

• In order to use JRE6 Update24 with Internet Explorer 9/10, JRE6 Update24 or later is required. • The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer. • In Internet Explorer, if [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is disabled in [Internet Options] > [Security] > [Custom level...], a warning message that JRE has not yet been installed is displayed. • When using Windows XP in an IP v6 environment, IP v6 may need to be installed manually in some cases.

To use SMS, you need to set up network settings for the PC, browser, and devices that are used to access SMS.

■■Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS ●● Checking of operation environment In order to access SMS using password authentication, the PC and browser need to comply with the following system environment.

Note: MacOS-related Java does not work in the case of combination of MacOS 10.6.8, Java SE 6 update6 (Java for MacOS X 10.6 Update 6) and Safari5.0.5. Either of the following measures needs to be taken to make it run.

Combination of the Browser and the OS Operating System

• Not installing Java SE 6 update6 (Java for MacOS X 10.6 Update 6) (it is however not possible to uninstall it if it is already installed and running) • Providing a symbolic link again using the command of ln -s /System/Library/Frameworks/ JavaVM.framework/Resources/JavaPluginCocoa.bundle • Upgrading Safari to version 5.1

●● Network ports used Port No. Connecting 53

Listening

Application

Supported browser

Windows XP Professional SP3 Internet Explorer 7, Internet Explorer 8 Windows Vista SP2

Internet Explorer 7, Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9

Windows 7 SP1

Internet Explorer 8, Internet Explorer 9

Windows 8

Internet Explorer 10

Mac OS X 10.5

Safari 4.0.5, Safari 5.0.5

Mac OS X 10.6

Safari 4.0.5, Safari 5.0.5, Safari 5.1

Mac OS X Lion

Safari 5.1

Mac OS X Mountain Lion

Safari 6.0

Communication with DNS server (fixed)

T-2-88

88

Kerberos authentication with KDC (Key Distribution Center)

In order to access SMS using RLS authentication, the environment should comply with the

1-65535 (Default:389)

Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389, may be changed to any port on LDAP service side)

environment for using SSO-H as the login service. (For details, refer to "PC environment of

10000-10100 T-2-87

administrator users and general users".)

●● PC and browser settings The PC and browser used to access SMS need to satisfy the following conditions. • The supported browser language should be the same with the language of the OS. • Java Script should be enabled. • The supported screen size should be 800 x 600 or larger (recommended size: 1024 x 768). • Session cookie should be enabled. • Only alphanumeric characters and some of the symbols ("-" or ".") should be used as the machine domain name and host name. • If an invalid character string such as a low line ("_") is included in the host name, cookies cannot be enabled.

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS

2-111

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

■■Settings on the Device Side ●● Network configuration process In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings need to be made from the touch panel of the machine. (this setting is [ON] by default). 1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [Use HTTP] and press [On] button.

2-112 Note: When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button. (This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is also applied to the touch panel.) When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button for this message.

F-2-144

2) Press [ OK ] button to return to Main Menu screen. 3) Restart the device. CAUTION: • The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the device. F-2-142

Note: In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by default, so “Network” and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected. Return to the top screen, press “Login” button at the lower left of the screen, login as the system manager, and configure the settings. The default setting for the System Manager ID is “7654321”, and the password is” 7654321”.

• You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use, enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser. Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator. • If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to use SMS. • To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP device’s touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some characters. • When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with [SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL Settings] on the device.

F-2-143

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

2-112

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

●● Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication

2-113 2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key and Certificate Settings ].

To use SMS via SSL connection, it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as the key to be used. Since a key (default key) that can be used for encrypted SSL communication is installed as standard on the device, advance setting of the key pair and server certificate is not required. In order to use an encryption key other than the default key, follow the procedure "Generating a key pair" shown below to make settings for the key pair and server certificate necessary for encrypted SSL communication. Note: • MFP has a server certificate registered as standard. • For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting, refer to [e-Manual > Security]. • As for SMS, by setting a Default Key, encrypted SSL communication is always executed regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] (Settings/Registration) > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings]: ON/OFF.

F-2-146

3) Click [ Generate Key... ] button. Generating a key pair 1) From a PC on the same network as the device, use a web browser to access the remote UI's portal page. Then, select [ Settings/Registration ] from the menu on the right side of the screen. URL to access: http://<device's IP address>:8000/

F-2-147

4) Click [ Network communication ].

F-2-148

F-2-145

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

2-113

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button.

2-114 6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Key and Certificate Settings ].

F-2-150

Default Key Settings 1) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Network Settings ] > [ TCP/IP Settings ] > [ SSL Settings ].

F-2-149

Input example Item name

Type

Key Settings Key Name

Content

Compulsory An arbitrary character string

Signature Algorithm Key Algorithm Certificate Settings Validity Start Date Validity End Date Country/Region Organization State Organization Unit Shared Name

Entry Default Key

Compulsory Selected from:SHA1/SHA256/SHA384/SHA512 SHA1 Compulsory Selected from:512/1024/2048/4096 1024 F-2-151

Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary Arbitrary

Date Date Country or region name Organization name State name Organization unit Shared Name*

15/5/2011 15/5/2036 US -

2) Click [ Key and Certificate... ] button.

T-2-89

Note: When the IP address of the device has been entered in the [Shared Name] entry field, if you install a server certificate to the browser ( See "Installing a server certificate (reference information)" ), the message "Certificate Error" that usually appears when access is made from Internet Explorer 7 or later will not be displayed.

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

F-2-152

2-114

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

3) Select the generated key, and then click the [ Default Key Settings ] button.

2-115 Installing a server certificate (reference information) When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key for SSL, "Certificate Error" appears if the version of Internet Explorer (IE) is Version 7 or later. Error display example

F-2-155 F-2-153

4) Check that [ SSL ] is displayed in the [ Key Usage ] entry field.

To disable display of "Certificate Error", use the following procedure (for IE8) to set the key generated in "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication" (i.e. the key with the IP address of the device specified as the shared name) as an SSL key. 1) Access SMS from the browser, and then click "Certificate Error" in the URL entry field.

F-2-156 F-2-154

2) Click [ View certificates ].

5) Log out from the remote UI, and then restart the device.

F-2-157

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

2-115

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab.

2-116 5) In [ Certificate Store ] , select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and then click the [ Browse ] button.

F-2-158

4) [ Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Next ] button. F-2-160

6) In [ Select Certificate Store ] , select [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ] , and then click the [ OK ] button.

F-2-161

F-2-159

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

2-116

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification Authorities" appears in [ Certificate ] , and then click the [ Next ] button.

F-2-162

8) [ Completing the Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Finish ] button.

2-117 9) A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully. Click the [ OK ] button.

F-2-164

10)

A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully. Click

the [ OK ] button.

F-2-165

F-2-163

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

2-117

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

●● Network Port Settings

2-118 4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field

The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the

is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.

servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443. In the case that these ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s). By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well as the existing system. The procedure for setting the HTTP/HTTPS server port is shown below.

1) Startup level 2 of [ SERVICE MODE ]. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ NETWORK ]. F-2-168

Note: A port number can be any integer from 0 to 65535. To avoid port numbers that are frequently used, do not use any integer from 0 to 1023. Server HTTP Server HTTPS Server

Setting value

Default value / Value after RAM clear

1024 to 65535 1024 to 65535

8000 8443 T-2-90

Note: F-2-166

3) To specify the HTTP server port, click the [ MEAP-PN ]. To specify the HTTPS (SSL) server port, click the [ MEAP-SSL ].

• If PS Print Server Unit is connected, do not specify port 8080. If port 8080 is specified, the RUI of the device where the MEAP authentication application is running cannot be displayed. (Port 8080 is reserved to allow the PS Print Server Unit to redirect to the device.) • The HTTPS server port can be used only for devices that support the SSL function.

5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, restart the device.

F-2-167

F-2-169

2

Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side

2-118

2

Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline

2-119

Login to SMS

■■How to Check the Serial Number When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some cases.

■■Outline SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed

Examples of where the serial number is necessary

to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.

• When initializing SMS login password (obtaining a switch license) • When obtaining a MEAP application license from LMS

SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)

• When obtaining a transfer license of MEAP application • When obtaining a special license for reinstalling MEAP application If a problem occurs in the MEAP device and you want to contact the support department of the sales company, you need to provide the serial number. Perform the following procedure to get the serial number.

●● Checking from the PC browser The serial number of the device is displayed on the SMS login screen, SMS screen, and remote UI portal screen.

F-2-172

Login method

F-2-170

●● Checking from the device's Control Panel You can see the number by pressing the counter key on the Control Panel of the device.

Authentication method

Authentication service name

Users who may log in

Password authentication

Password authentication

SMS Installer Service (Password Users who know the SMS Authentication) login password

RLS login

SSO-H

SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication)

Users registered as administrators with SSO-H T-2-91

Note: If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, ‘RLS Authentication’ is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if ‘RLS Authentication’ is selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot be changed.

F-2-171

2

Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline

2-119

2

Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed

■■When SMS Cannot Be Accessed

2-120 ●● If login is not possible due to exclusive control

●● If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization) After changing the default SMS login password, if you forgot the new password and cannot log in to SMS, you can use a switch license for password initialization to change the password back to the default value "MeapSmsLogin".

Because SMS uses exclusive control, if there is another user already logged in to the SMS of the same device, then you cannot log in. Exclusive control message example

Note that there is no special password for service. 1) Obtain a switch license file for password initialization. Contact the person in charge of support at the sales company, give the device's serial number, and have a switch license file for password initialization issued. 2) Load the switch license file. With nothing entered, click the [ Log in ] button to display the area for specifying a switch license file for password initialization. F-2-174

If you cannot log in due to exclusive control, you need to ask the other user to log out before you can try again. Note: If you close the browser without logging out, the session remains active. In this case, you cannot log in again. If this problem occurs, you can wait for 5 minutes so that the session is disconnected. Or, you can restart the device to force the session to disconnect.

F-2-173

3) Specify the switch license file. Click the [ Browse ] button and specify the switch license file. 4) Initialize the login password. Click the [ Initialize ] button to display an initialization confirmation page, and click the [ OK ] button. Note:

• The default password is “MeapSmsLogin.” (The password is case-sensitive.) • If you click the [Cancel] button on the initialization confirmation page, password initialization is not performed and the login page appears.

2

Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed

2-120

2

Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline

●● If [ Key and Certificate Settings ] is not set If [ Key and Certificate Settings ] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS (https://<devices's IP address>:8443/sms/). In this case, you can use the following procedure to solve the problem. 1) Go to http://<device's IP address>:8000/sms/, and check to see that "HTTP 500 Internal

2-121

Installing an MEAP Application ■■Outline From the MEAP application installation screen, you can install the MEAP application as well as the license file.

Server Error" appears. 2) If the message is displayed, see the procedure described in " Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication " in this manual to deal with the problem. Note: As for SMS, by setting the key to be used, encrypted SSL communication is always executed regardless of the following setting: (Settings/Registration) > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [Use SSL] > ON/OFF.

■■How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of Access When accessing from the browser to SMS, a message "Certificate Error" appears in some cases. In that case, perform the procedure "Installing a server certificate (reference information)" in this chapter.

F-2-175

Before installing the MEAP application, be sure to check the following items.

●● Device compatibility with the MEAP application To find out whether the device is compatible with the MEAP application, check the devices supported by the MEAP application. Depending on the application, the device's firmware may require version upgrade.

●● Resources availability (remaining amount) The necessary resources (free storage space and free memory available) must be secured for an MEAP application to run; otherwise, you cannot install the MEAP application. To check the resource information, see "Device's resources" in this manual.

2

Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline

2-121

2

Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications

■■Procedure to install applications

2-122 CAUTION:

1) Long on to SMS.

• You cannot install only the license.

2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu.

• You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license. Be sure to select its license file. • If you are adding a license to an existing application, see "Procedure adding a license file". • If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is running.

F-2-176

3) Check [ Install MEAP Application/License ] page appears. 4) Click [ Browse.. ] button, and select the application file and the license file of the application;

Note: The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which device to install with the license file. Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should be taken when confirming the contents of the license file. Sample file

License File ID

then, click [ Install ] button.

Application ID Note: Application File: identified by the extension “jar”. License File: identified by the extension “lic”.

Serial Number Validated Period Counter informations

F-2-178

F-2-177

2

Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications

2-122

2

Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications

5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ Yes ] button.

2-123 Note: As for an application that has just been installed, the status is "Installed". In order to use the application, it is necessary to click the [Start] button to change the status to [Started].

F-2-179

6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and click [ OK ]. 7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation.

F-2-182

Note: There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI. Screen example

F-2-180

8) Upon installation completed, click [ To MEAP Application Management ] button shown on the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.

F-2-181 F-2-183

[Register/Update Software] provides two types of installations. One is [Manual Installation] where you specify a jar file and a license file and then install. The other is [Delivered Installation] where you enter a license access number. For details of the procedures, please refer to the e-Manual.

2

Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications

2-123

2

Technology > MEAP > Resource Information > About MEAP Application Management Page

Resource Information

2-124 ●● Device's resources When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as

■■About MEAP Application Management Page

follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the

Application Management page shows [ resource information ] for information of the whole device resources including Amount Used, Remaining, and Percent Used. This function enables users to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional

MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS. Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger

application. Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the

value than the following values.

top of each application, which declares the resources required in the application. Therefore,

List of Available Resources

the information does not necessarily show the resources actually in use.

Product Name

The following resource information is shown: • Storage • Memory • Threads

Storage Memory Thread Socket

File Description

iR-ADV C5051 series

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

iR-ADV C9075 series

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

iR-ADV 6075 series

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

• Sockets

iR-ADV 8105 PRO series

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

• File Descriptors

iR-ADV C2030/ C2025/ C2020 series

Flash model

220MB

32MB

162

128

128

HDD model

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

You will not be able to install an application if the size of the remaining disk space falls short

iR-ADV 4051 series

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

of the size declared by the application. Moreover, the specifications have been designed so

iR-ADV C5255 series

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

that an application will not be able to start up if there is a shortage of memory for any of the foregoing items (i.e., memory, thread, socket, file descriptor).

iR-ADV C2220/C2230 series

Follow the steps below to check the remaining memory:

iR-ADV 4251 series

Flash model

220MB

32MB

162

128

128

HDD model

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256

1024MB

128MB

256

256

256 T-2-92

1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click [ MEAP Application Management ]. 3) Check [ Resource Information ] for information of the whole device resources.

Note:

• As for memory, check the available resource when starting up the application. For other resources other than memory, check them when installing. • Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the User’s Guide that comes with the individual applications. • Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate. (However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication application is not included in this number. • The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication application is not included in this number.)

CAUTION:

F-2-184

To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device. http://www.canon.com/lms/license/

2

Technology > MEAP > Resource Information > About MEAP Application Management Page

2-124

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?

MEAP Specifications

2-125

in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of

■■What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?

MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the

MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the

application rejects installation of such an application. MEAP Specifications for each model Product Name

function.

●● About Name The displayed name for Meap Specifications differs depending on the screen or the location

iR-ADV C5051 iR-ADV C5045 iR-ADV C5035 iR-ADV C5030

where the name is displayed.

Initial MEAP SpecVer 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45

In this document, it is referred to as "Meap Specifications". The location where the name is displayed/shown Platform Information : SMS > [System Management] > [System Information] > [Platform Information] System Information Print : Local UI [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [ System Information Print] Manifest file of the MEAP application SDK documents

Displayed name MEAP Specifications

T-2-93

●● Mechanism MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2 • Device Specification ID • MEAP Specifications Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number, thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP

iR-ADV C9075 iR-ADV C9070 iR-ADV C9065 iR-ADV C9060 iR-ADV C7065 iR-ADV C7055

application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects installation of such an application. Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always have the same version. MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable

2

Ver.38.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49 Ver.50.xx or later 5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18,19,25,26,27,29,30,31,32, 33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,44,45,46,47,49,50,51,5 2,53,54,55,56,57,58,59

MeapSpecVersion

information below:

Remarks Ver.37.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45

Ver.65.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74 Ver.37.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46 Ver.38.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 49 Ver.50.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 Ver.65.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74

2-125

2 Product Name iR-ADV 6075 iR-ADV 6065 iR-ADV 6055

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?

Initial MEAP SpecVer 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49

iR-ADV 8105 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, iR-ADV 8095 PRO 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, iR-ADV 8085 PRO 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49

iR-ADV C2030 iR-ADV C2025 iR-ADV C2020

iR-ADV 4051 iR-ADV 4045 iR-ADV 4035 iR-ADV 4025

iR-ADV C5255 iR-ADV C5250 iR-ADV C5240 iR-ADV C5235

2

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 74, 78, 80

Remarks Ver.20.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 Ver.42.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74 Ver.20.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 , 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 Ver.42.xxor later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25 ,26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74 Ver.10.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53 Ver.29.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53, 74 Ver.11.xx or later 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74

-

Product Name iR-ADV C2230 iR-ADV C2225 iR-ADV C2220

iR-ADV 4251 iR-ADV 4245 iR-ADV 4235 iR-ADV 4225

2-126 Initial MEAP SpecVer 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15,17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 69, 70, 72, 74, 78, 79, 80 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 69, 70, 72, 74, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82

Remarks -

-

T-2-94

MEAP Specifications List Ver

Description

1 2 5 6 7

MEAP basic function MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL Reserved MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF (Text Searchable) + USB Host (Buffering of Interrupt Transfer) Reserved MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host (Exception + Clear Feature + Set Feature+ Hot Plug) + WINS address acquisition using MIB Agent + Timer Service + SSL client authentication MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth PDF + CTK2.0 Device signature PDF IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) , IPv6, Extended encryption function (AES/RC4) Acquiring images of JBIG format Parsing XML documents (XML parser) Enhancement of IMI function (IMI Version1.2 series) Reserved API to access the HID/Mass Storage class devices. MEAP driver preference function Symbols that can be used with MibAgent added. (symbols for IPv6 address acquisition) IMI API added (IMI version 1.2.1 enabled)

9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18 19 21 25 26 27 29

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?

2-126

2 Ver

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?

Description

30 Extended address book function. (e-mail/group/i-FAX/file) 31 Integrated ERS function 32 Extended Imaging function (function to generate PDF/OOXML (PowerPoint) with visible signature) 33 Extended function for imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE series (API for address book/ CTK/ TopMenu) 34 Extended IMI Box function (v1.3.0) 35 Extended SIS function (function to check the network cable status, function to check PS print server unit status) 36 Reserved 37 CLS (Contextual Login Service) Supporting API Added 38 imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series administrative privileges supported 39 MEAP Specifications added according to Jcrypto API Specification Change 40 ImagingAPI (Creation API of Visible Signature PDF) added 41 Reserved 42 Reserved 44 imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series Remote Address Book Supported, RemoteFAX Supported. 45 Addition of API that allows acquisition of the HID installation status 46 Multilingualization of the USB keyboard of the System Driver 47 Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption PDF document 48 ID expressing the scan function for iR-ADV C2030/C2025/C2020 series 49 Reserved 50 SecurityOptionalPackage 51 IMI function expansion of iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later) or later 52 (iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later)) Addition of registered API to enable SSL communication setting (On/Off) for each URL 53 Disclosure of registration/deletion function to/from Quick Menu 54 Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode. 55 System account release function 56 MEAP User Preference Service 57 MEAP Application Configuration Service 58 MEAP Application Log Service 59 Reserved 60 SFP basic functions 61 AVS (Lightweight Applet Viewer Service) for LBP 62 SIS (Lightweight System Interface Service) for LBP 63 LDT 64 IMI customization 65 Extension of MEAP User Preference Service (Ver56) (preference shared among applications) 66 Reserved 68 Addition of Office Open XML's Word creation API 69 Extension of the encryption PDF function (AES 128-bit/256-bit) 70 Addition of 3 formats (uncompressed searchable PDF, XPS, and linearized searchable PDF)

2

Ver 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83

2-127 Description

Reserved Reserved API that supports A4 scanners and allows for specifying of the direction of the original image Support for addition of the CN validation function Reserved Addition of the SFP ExtendedTextInputView class Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved API to recover from Sleep 1 API for restricting Quick Startup Standby

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?

T-2-95

2-127

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application

MEAP Application Management

2-128

●● If the MEAP application cannot be started If the conditions to start the MEAP application are not satisfied, the MEAP application cannot

■■Outline

be started.

You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks of the MEAP application (start, stop, uninstall), or check the device's resource information.

If the MEAP application cannot be started, check the following items. Is a valid license installed?

■■Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application

If the license has expired, you cannot start the application. If the license has already expired,

●● Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application

manual.)

obtain a new license and then update the license. ( See "Managing the License File" in this

1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to 'Login to SMS' in this manual.) 2) Click [ Application List ]. (If the Application List is already being displayed, this operation is

Are the necessary resources available? If the resources such as memory capacity or number of threads are not sufficient, the

not necessary.) 3) Click [ Start ] or [ Stop ] button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped.

application also cannot be started. Delete any unnecessary data to secure sufficient resources. If the application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions, contact the support department of the sales company.

F-2-185

4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [ Stopped].

F-2-186

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application

2-128

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application

●● Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application

2-129

1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu.

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, check that the following conditions are met. • The MEAP application has stopped.

2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has been disabled. (The status is "Not Installed".)

• The license has been disabled or deleted. (The status is "Not Installed".)

F-2-189 F-2-187

3) Click [ Uninstall ] button for the application to be uninstalled.

For information on the procedure to stop the MEAP application, see the previous section "Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application". For information on the procedure to delete the license file, see the following section "Managing the License File". Note: When a user tries to uninstall an application before deleting the license, the following message is shown.

F-2-188

If the license file of the selected application cannot be deleted, the [ Uninstall ] button is grayed out and therefore the application cannot be uninstalled.

F-2-190

4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [ Yes ] button. Upon [ Yes ] button clicked, uninstallation process is started.

CAUTION: If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application

F-2-191

2-129

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

■■Managing the License File

2-130 ●● Procedure adding a license file 1) Log on to SMS.

●● Outline The license file management functions allow you to perform the following operations related to the license file necessary for the MEAP application to run.

2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.

• Update the license which has already expired. • Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application. These license management functions can be performed from the [ MEAP Application Management ] screen. The main license management functions are as follows: Adding a license When the license has expired, you can add a license file. Disabling a License File Before uninstalling the MEAP application, the license needs to be deleted. In that case, you must first disable the license file because a license file which has not been disabled cannot be downloaded or deleted. Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File

F-2-192

3) In [ Application / License Information ] page shown on the screen, click [ License Management ] button.

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, you need to delete its license file which has already been disabled. By downloading the license file to your PC before it is deleted, you can use it when installing the application again to the same device.

CAUTION: After deleting the license file which has been disabled, you can no longer download the license file.

F-2-193

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

2-130

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

2-131 ●● Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license)

4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.

CAUTION: • Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file. • Once suspended, the status of the license will be ‘Not Installed’, and its application will no longer be available for use. • You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR, the device with the same device serial number. • If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, use the transfer license during the replacement. ( See "License for forwarding" in this manual. ) 1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.

F-2-194

5) Click [ Install ] button.

F-2-196

F-2-195

6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [ Yes ] button

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

2-131

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.

2-132 4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button.

F-2-197

3) On Application/ License Information page, click [ License Management ] button. F-2-199

5) Click [ Yes ] button.

F-2-200

F-2-198

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

2-132

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

●● Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file

2-133 5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button.

Note: The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same device (with the same device serial number). Please note that reusable licenses (refer to "Reusable license") can be installed on other devices. 1) Login to SMS. 2) Application List page appears. On MEAP Application Management page , click the name of the application you want.

F-2-203

6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen. 7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button.

F-2-201

3) Check Application/ License Information page appears. 4) On Application / License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.

F-2-204

F-2-202

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File

2-133

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions

2-134

●● License for forwarding

8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button.

If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, you can transfer the license information used in the MEAP application to the new machine and continue its usage. Service engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not open to users). F-2-205

CAUTION:

The procedure is shown below. 1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (See "Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling

Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file before deleting the application.

the MEAP Application" in this manual).

■■Other License File Management Functions ●● Reusable license When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded ( See "Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license)" and "Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file" in this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation. This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications. To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times as needed by the same license file (It can be installed on other devices). This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.

F-2-206

2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).

Note : For devices of iR-ADV C5255 series and later, a new encryption method different from that for previous models has been adopted. As a result, if a license encrypted by the new encryption method is downloaded by a device supporting the new encryption method, it can be installed only on devices supporting the new encryption method, and it can no longer be installed on devices supporting the old encryption method. If a license encrypted using the new encryption method is downloaded by a device supporting the old encryption method, it cannot be installed on devices supporting the new encryption method.

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions

F-2-207

2-134

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions

3) Specify the application to be forwarded.

2-135

6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click [ Download ].

F-2-208

4) Click [ Disable ] at Create Transfer License File. F-2-211

7) The dialog [ File Download ] is displayed. Click [ Save ] button.

F-2-212 F-2-209

8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ] button.

5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ].

F-2-210

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions

F-2-213

2-135

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > About Login Service

9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation screen and click [ Yes ] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).

2-136

Enhanced System Application Management ■■Outline [ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging in to devices. • Installing and uninstalling Enhanced System Application Management (login services, etc.) • Switching login services (switching the method to log in to devices)

F-2-214

10)

Log out of SMS.

11)

Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation,

• Checking installation status of other System Applications

it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new license for installation in the new device. Note: When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.

12)

Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.

F-2-215

■■About Login Service The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled device is booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System Management ] page. The preinstalled login applications are Default Authentication and Single Sign On-H, and Default Authentication is enabled by default. CAUTION: This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent.

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > About Login Service

2-136

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

■■Default Authentication overview

2-137

CAUTION:

This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ ON ] on Setting / Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or Remote UI.

■■SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features. • The following three authentication methods may be selected from.

• When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be used. • When the setting is SSO-H, start up takes a little longer when compared to Default Authentication (because of the time required for object initialization). • To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the device are used. • The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management is required. • Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However, application settings information cannot be ported.

• Server authentication • Server authentication and local authentication • Local device authentication • Active Directory or LDAP can be used as the server for server authentication. • It is not necessary to prepare a server for Security Agent (SA). (In the case of SSO, SA is necessary.) Differences from conventional SSO Domain B

Domain C DC

Domain B DC

Domain C DC

DC

DC

DC

SA

Device Domain A

SSO

Device Domain A

SSO-H F-2-216

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

2-137

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

2-138

●● Environment confirmation

●● Setting the Authentication Method

Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements

In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods.

needed in each login service.

The combination can be changed from the SSO-H setting screen. (For details, refer to e-Manual > MEAP > Menu for Administrators > Setting the SSO-H > "Setting the User

●● Specification of SSO-H

Authentication System".)

Item

Specification

No. of local device users

Up to 5000

Maximum number of domains

Active Directory :200 domains (“this device” not included)

IPv6

Authentication provided in IPv6 supports AD/KDC/DNS of Windows Server 2008 only)

Resource used

Memory : 3600KB Storage : 27000KB File Description : 27 Thread : 33 Socket : 33

Network portsused Connecting

Listening Supported authentication server

F-2-217

88 : KDC 53 : DNS 1 - 65535 ( Default : 389) : LDAP

Note: The default settings are shown below.

• User authentication method : "Server Authentication + Local Device Authentication" • Type of authentication : "Active Directory"

10000 - 10100 Active Directory : Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 * Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 * Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 * Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 *64-bit OS is not supported.

CAUTION: • To ensure the security, it is recommended to change the password and the user name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of shipment immediately after you have started using SSO-H. • Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.

LDAP : Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows Lotus Domino V8.5 for Window Availability of Department Management Linkage

Available only in local authentication T-2-96

SSO/SDL handling Conventional SSO and SDL are not packaged in Administrator's CD of this model. In addition,

●● Using an Accounting Product When SSO-H Is Used

this model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.

SSO-H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE / iW Accounting Manager, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Console Access Management Plug-in, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Console Accounting Management Plug-in. For details on the combination, refer to the User's Manual or Service Manual of the product.

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

2-138

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

●● Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used

2-139

3) Disable Depart ID Management.

Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.

In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]

Usage Conditions

Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID

In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following conditions need to be satisfied.

> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/ Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department ID Management].

• Only "Local Device Authentication" can be used as the user authentication method. • The department ID and password have been already set for the SSO-H login user before enabling department ID management. • The information (the department ID and password) set for the login user coincides with the information registered in Department ID Management. Setting Procedure In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following procedure needs to be performed to enable the setting. 1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication). Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)

F-2-219

4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication. Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS". )

F-2-218

2) Restart the device. Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. F-2-220

5) Restart the device. Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

2-139

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.

2-140

7) Enable Depart ID Management.

Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in

In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]

Department ID Management.

> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/

Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.

Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID

SSO-H user registration information edition screen

Management].

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or https://:8443/sso/Edit).

F-2-223

8) Check that the device can be logged in. Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled. F-2-221

SSO-H user registration information import screen (SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information] or (https://:8443/sso/Import).

F-2-224

F-2-222

2

Note: In the case of conventional SSO, department management can be conducted also when server authentication is used provided that iWAM/iW EMC account management is used, which is not supported by SSO-H.

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

2-140

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication

2-141

■■Local device authentication

●● Setting the Administrator for Server Authentication When using Server Authentication, the user who satisfies the specified conditions (user attribute and its match criteria) becomes the administrator (the device administrator and the SSO-H administrator).

It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H, and is used for an device on a stand-alone basis.

The default user attribute and whether the setting value can be changed or not are shown

Device

below. Item Search Criteria: User Attribute: Character String:

Default value

Active Directory

LDAP

Exact Match memberOf Canon Peripheral Admins

Not Available Not Available Available

Available Available Available

Local user

Remote user T-2-97

The settings of the administrator can be changed on the following screen: remote UI > Single F-2-226

Sign-On H > Configuration (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/ActionSet)

Register the user to be authenticated on the database in the device. User management can be performed from the User Management screen (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/) or imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. The login destination is [This device]. F-2-225

●● System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to SystemManagers)

User Management screen

SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter “SA”) to authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers (users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this function.

F-2-227

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication

2-141

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)

■■Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)

2-142

CAUTION:

●● Outline It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed with the device linked with a domain controller on the network in an Active Directory environment. It is a user authentication where the user is authenticated by the domain on the network when the user logs into the device. In addition to users belonging to the domain

Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.

that includes the device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable relationship with the domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of the login destination can be selected by the users themselves upon login. Using one of the options (Net Spot Accountant, imageWARE Accounting Manager, or imageWARE EMC Accounting Management Plug-in) makes it possible to analyze/manage the device usage.

Dmain A

Domain B Domain controller （Active Directory）

With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the device, or the subnet Active Directory. • The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF. • Access Active Directory within same site only.

Domain controller （Active Directory）

Trusting

●● Access Mode in Sites

• If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an authentication error.

relationship

• Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located. • If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory external to the site will be accessed. • If all attempts to access Active Directory fail, there will be an authentication error.

Available Domain A user

Device

Domain B user

The operating specifications of the site internal access mode are as described below. F-2-228

The protocol used is as follows. • Kerberos:LLS/RLS/ILS • NTLMV2:WLS(Web Service Login Service) User information acquisition is done by LDAP, so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be made accessible. If LDAP connection fails, the authentication will end in error. No. of supported domains: 200 (unchanged from SSO) Site access supported.

When first logging in to the login service after booting iR, the domain controller (DC) is obtained from the site list. However, upon the first login, even if the site functionality is active, connection to DC is random. (This is because, if connection to DC should fail, the site to which the device belongs cannot be ascertained.) If the device IP address or the domain name are changed, the site settings are acquired once more.

CAUTION:

In this mode, at the first login (first authentication of domain to which the device belongs)

In the case of using Server Authentication (Active Directory authentication), it is necessary to synchronize the time settings of the Active Directory server and the machine (and the PC for login). If the difference in time setting is 5 minutes or longer, an error will occur at the time of login. (The setting of the allowable difference in time can be changed.)

LDAP-Bind is performed directly to DC and site information acquired by LDAP from DC.

2

From the acquired site list, the site to which the device subnet belongs is extracted and this becomes the site to which device belongs. Active Directory address is acquired (retrieved from DNS)

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)

2-142

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)

2-143

Settings for access mode in sites

needs to be accessed in LDAP, so SASL-Kerberos-Bind is used by the login user account. If authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login. In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in

F-2-229

The figure below shows a sample of processing Access Mode in Sites. Sample of Processing Access Mode in Sites

Domain X DNS Server A records: AD 192.168.1.2 AD 172.24.12.2 AD 172.24.35.2 AD 211.111.1.30 SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80 SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90 SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3

such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that

4.Access Active Directory of same site DC-Tokyo/DNS 172.24.12.2 n

Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory

Site internal access mode settings window (DMS)

io

After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the

detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.

at

Site list acquisition

Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as

lic

The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net. In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed. Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first. If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories belonging to different subnets than the device are listed. • The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained. • If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which the address list was obtained.

pl

• • • •

Re

Note:

N WA3. Access Active

Active Directory will be accessed.

ation

1. When making initial settings, obtain site list and ascertain which site the device belongs to. SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80 WAN

Site:Osaka:: 192.168.1.0/24 Site:Hakata:: 211.111.1.0/24

Directory of same subnet

LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No. 389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another

2.Get Active Directory list

Site:Tokyo:: 172.24.12.0/24 172.24.35.0/24

Repllic

DC-Osaka/DNS 172.168.1.2

Site:Tokyo 172.12.12.0/24 172.24.35.0/24

DC-Hakata/DNS 211.111.1.30

Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired.

Site:Osaka 192.168.1.0/24

SSO-Tokyo 192.168.1.90

SSO-Tokyo Site:Hakata 211.111.1.0/24

211.111.1.3

F-2-230

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)

2-143

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)

1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories. Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings (upon device settings or changes to NW

2-144

■■Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication) It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed with the device linked with the LDAP Server on the network in an LDAP environment.

settings, etc.).

Local user

[Site subnet list]

Device

LDAP Server

Remote user

Site: Tokyo: = 172.24.12.0/24, 172.24.35.0/24 Site: Osaka: = 192.168.1.0/24 Site: Hakata: = 211.111.1.0/24 As a result, since SSO-Tokyo is 172.24.12.80, the subnet is 172.24.12.0/24, and is judged as belonging to site Tokyo. 2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set in the device. [Active Directory] 172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30 3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are 172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2. Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2. Therefore, this one will be accessed. 4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2, will be accessed. 5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is an optional operation. Logging into other domains at multi-domain At multi-domain, if another domain is logged into, based on the site/ subnet information retrieved in the home domain, the Active Directories of the login destination domain/ KDC address list are computed. In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other domains are outside of the site access range, and only the domain controller within the site is programmed for access, an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site information is incorrect.

F-2-231

LDAP server authentication can be used for devices that support MEAP User Preference Service (MEAP Specification Ver.56) and MEAP Application Setting Information Management (MEAP Specification Ver.57). As for models that do not support MEAP User Preference Service and MEAP Application Setting Information Management , [LDAP Server] cannot be selected as the type of the authentication server on the SSO-H Configuration page. Moreover, it is not possible to access the LDAP Server Management screen and the Add Server screen. Simple bind (a method where the password is not encrypted) is used as the bind (authentication) between SSO-H and LDAP server. It is therefore strongly recommended to always use SSL connection from a security standpoint. As for the version of LDAP, only Ver.3 is supported. ON/OFF of SSL connection can be changed on the LDAP Server Management page. The time-out value of connection is 60 seconds. In the case of using LDAP server authentication, the characters entered as the user name are not case-sensitive, but the characters entered as the password are case-sensitive. In the case of SSO-H, authentication is not allowed when the user name includes "* (asterisk)". If authentication is performed with "* (asterisk)" used in the user name, an authentication error occurs. CAUTION: Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)

2-144

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services

■■Server authentication and local device authentication

2-145

■■Steps to Change Login Services

It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication" function and

1) Click [ Enhanced System Application Management ] on [ System Management ].

the "local device authentication" function. It is possible to use server authentication to authenticate the users registered on the authentication server under normal conditions and use local device authentication when a user who cannot be added to the authentication server needs to be temporarily authenticated. If a trouble occurs in the authentication server, local device authentication can be used as an emergency measure until recovery from the trouble.

Local user

Server authentication Localローカルデバイス認証 device authentication

F-2-233

2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click [ SWITCH ] button for the login service to be used. Remote user F-2-232

F-2-234

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services

2-145

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure

3) When login service application you have selected turns to [ Start after Restart ] , restart the device.

2-146

■■Login Service Installation Procedure Follow the procedure show below to install login services. 1) Access SMS, and then click [ System Management ] > [ Enhanced System Application Management ].

F-2-235

CAUTION:

F-2-237

In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login method.

2) Click the [ Browse ] button, and specify the Enhanced System Application file/License file.

F-2-236

This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default Authentication.

F-2-238

When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the password authentication.

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure

2-146

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure

2-147

■■Login Service Uninstallation Procedure

3) Click [ Install ] button.

Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services. In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status). Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped. 1) Access SMS, and then select [ System Management ] > [ Enhanced System Application Management ].

F-2-239

F-2-240

2) Click the [ Uninstall ] button of the login service you want to uninstall.

F-2-241

2

Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure

2-147

2

Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication

System Application Management This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS. For the login services, you can use "Password Authentication" where you enter an SMS

2-148 Note: If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.

original password on the SMS login screen and log in. You can also use "RLS Authentication" where you do not use the SMS login screen but enter the user ID and password on the RLS (Remote Login Service) screen and conduct authentication. F-2-243

■■Password authentication Enter the password on the SMS login screen for authentication. Only one password can be set for SMS. The login procedure is shown below.

Note: If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the system administrator. Note that there is no special password for service.

1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The URL is as follows. URL: https://<MEAP Device IP address>:8443/sms/ Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/ Note: To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing with URL (non-SSL) before.

2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default password is “MeapSmsLogin.” (The password is case-sensitive.)

F-2-244

F-2-242

2

Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication

2-148

2

Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication

■■RLS Authentication Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for authentication in the RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication. The login procedures are as follows.

2-149 Note: Only the following users may us SMS via RLS.

• For local device authentication, users with Administrator or Device Admin authority. • In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon

Peripheral Admins) specified as the device administrator on the SSO-H Configuration screen.

1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the MEAP device. URL: https://:8443/sms/rls/ Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls/ Note:

• To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing with URL (non-SSL) before. F-2-246

F-2-245

Note: SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI. Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to gain access to SMS. When only the password authentication is enabled, the password authentication screen is shown. When only the RLS authentication is enabled, no further authentication is needed to access SMS. This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote UI.

Note:

• When the device authentication method used is server authentication, enter the user name, password and login destination registered with authentication server and then click ‘Log In’. • If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name, password and login destination registered in the device and click ‘Log In’ button. The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are case sensitive. - User Name: Administrator - Password: password

F-2-247

2

Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication

2-149

2

Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline

2-150

Setting the method to login to SMS

●● Setting for login by Password Authentication The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.

■■Outline

1) Access SMS login screen by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network

The method to log in to SMS can be specified by one of the following methods. • If you want to change the password authentication settings: Use RLS Authentication to log in, and change the settings. • If you want to change the RLS authentication settings: Use Password Authentication to log in, and change the settings.

URL: https://:8443/sms/rls/ Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls 2) Enter the user name and the password of the user registered as an administrator, select

The following table shows the start/stop combinations of the two login methods.

the login destination, and then click the [Log In] button.

Combination of Login Methods Start RLS Authentication

as the MEAP device.

Stop RLS Authentication

Start Password Authentication

Login available with either method

Login available only with

Stop Password Authentication

Login available only with RLS Authentication

Setting unavailable

Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)

T-2-98

CAUTION: If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons. • Authentication server is down • Network problem, no communication with authentication server In the event of either of these cases, try the following.

F-2-248

3) Select [System Application Management]

1) If local device authentication is active, try logging in with local device authentication. 2. If only domain authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device service mode. After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS, set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log into SMS with password authentication.

F-2-249

2

Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline

2-150

2

Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline

2-151

4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) to check if the status is changed.

●● Setting for login by RLS Authentication The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows. 1) In order to make a setting for Login by RLS Authentication, you need to Login by Password Authentication. URL: https://:8443/sms/rls/ Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls 2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default password is "MeapSmsLogin". (Case sensitive) Login screen by Password Authentication

F-2-250

5) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start] , another password authentication login screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after clicking [ Start ] to change the status to [Stop] , the user is automatically redirected to RLS authentication screen. Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen F-2-252

3) Select [ System Application Management ] on System Management menu.

F-2-251

F-2-253

2

Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline

2-151

2

Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Initial Display Languages of SMS

4) Click on [ Start ] or [ Stop ] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed.

2-152 ■■Initial Display Languages of SMS SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the drop down list on a login page. The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting. Start

Logged in by RLS authentication. No

F-2-254

5) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window. When RLS authentication is set to [ Start ] , another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [ Stop ] , the user will be redirected to the password authentication screen. RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen

Refer to the setting of the Accept-Language header, which a browser sends out.

Refer to the value of portalLang stored in Cookie.

Yes

Remote UI display English or Japanese setup language Except English or Japanese

English or Japanese Language priority setting of a browser Refer to the setting of a language Except English or Japanese displaying in registration/initial setting [Additional Function]. English or Japanese Display setting of a device Except English or Japanese Display in English.

Display in the language configured. F-2-256

●● When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) It is referred in order of the language priority (setting of the Accept-Language header which a browser sends out) and the display-language setting in the "user mode". When the language setup is other than English or Japanese, it is displayed in English.

●● When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication). Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie) F-2-255

selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese, Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) mentioned above.

2

Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Initial Display Languages of SMS

2-152

2

Technology > MEAP > System Information > Display of System Information Details

System Information

2-153 ■■Display of System Information Details The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information

■■Outline You can check the device's platform information and the MEAP application's system information.

all at the same time: platform information, system application information, information on the installed MEAP applications, etc. 1) Log in to SMS.

■■Checking the System Information

2) On System Management menu, click [ System Information ] 3) Click [ Display Details ] button.

System information that can be checked from the screen: • MEAP Specifications version (MEAP Spec Ver) • MEAP Contents version • Java Virtual Machine version • System application information • The name of the installed system application • The installation date of the installed system application • Application ID of the installed system application • The status of the installed system application The checking procedure is shown below. 1) Log in to SMS. 2) On System Management menu, click [ System Information ] button.

F-2-258

4) The system information of each application (including System Application) is shown in a separate window. Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as text information. This function is useful to check status information of each application.

F-2-257

F-2-259

2

Technology > MEAP > System Information > Display of System Information Details

2-153

2

Technology > MEAP > System Information > Content of MEAP system information

■■Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application

2-154 ■■Content of MEAP system information

MEAP system information can be printed out with device for confirmation.

Application System Information

Note: The system information of the MEAP application that you checked in the previous section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP application that is output.

Follow the steps below when confirming information: 1) Select [ Settings/ Registration ] > [ Management Settings ] > [ License/ Other ] > [ MEAP Settings ] > [ Print System Information ].

Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5 Application Version: 1.0.0 Status: Resolved Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003 Vendor : Canon Inc. License Status : Installed Maximum Memory Usage : 1024 Registered Service :

Item

Content

Application Name

Note: When System Manager ID and PIN are set, go to Top screen and log in as System Manager to continue jobs.

2) Press [ Yes ] button.

F-2-260

Note: MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However, the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling devices without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).

It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program. Application ID/System Application ID (application-id) items which are declared on the Application Name declaration statement in the application program are printed. Application Version It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement within the application program. Status It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically, Installed: the application has been installed. Active: the application is being in use. Resolved: the application is at rest. Installed On It indicates the date on which the application was installed. Vendor It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name (bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program. License Status It indicates the status of the license; specifically, None: no license is needed. Not Installed: no license has been installed. Installed: the appropriate license has been installed. Invalid: the license has been invalidated. Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit. License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. Counter Value It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. Maximum Memory Usage It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the application program, and is expressed in kilobytes. Registered Service It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the MEAP framework. Some services may not have printable data. T-2-99

2

Technology > MEAP > System Information > Content of MEAP system information

2-154

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information

MEAP Application Information

2-155

■■Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information 1) Log in to SMS.

■■Outline You can use this function to check the MEAP application installed on the device. The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen.

2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Information] on System Management menu.

Application Information • Application Name • Description • Version • Export Package • Application ID • Manufacturer • Copyright • Export Service • Installed on • ContactAddress • Applet-Name • Import Package • Applet Number

F-2-261

3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the information of the target application.

• Category • URL • Import Service • Resources Used (Storage, Memory, Threads, Sockets, File Descriptors) License Information • Status • Serial Number • Expires after

F-2-262

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information

2-155

2

Technology > MEAP > Changing SMS Login Password > Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password

Check License

2-156

Changing SMS Login Password

■■Outline

■■Outline

You can use this function to check the contents of the license file.

You can change the password for logging in to SMS. If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default

■■Procedure to Check the License File

value (MeapSmsLogin), see "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in this manual.

1) Log in to SMS.

■■Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password

2) On System Management menu, click [ Check License ].

1) Log in to SMS. 2) On System Management menu, click [ Change Password ] button.

F-2-263

3) Click the [ Browse.. ] button, specify a license file, and click the [ Check ] button. F-2-265

3) Enter both the current password and a new password, and then click the [ Change ] button.

F-2-266

F-2-264

2

Note: The [ Reset ] button on the [ Change Password ] screen is used to clear the value entered in the text field. It is not a button for changing the SMS login password back to the default value.

Technology > MEAP > Changing SMS Login Password > Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password

2-156

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Advantages Obtained When Using the Services

MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management ■■Outline

2-157

■■Advantages Obtained When Using the Services By using MEAP Application Configuration Service and MEAP Application Log Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can perform data management tasks all together.

The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log Management page provide menu related to "MEAP Application Configuration Service" for managing MEAP application setting information and "MEAP Application Log Service" for managing log information respectively.

●● Devices and MEAP applications which do not support new functions App1 Dedicated management tool

App2 Dedicated management tool

Setting and reference

Setting and reference

App1

App2

Setting and reference

Config data

(App1 format)

Pref data

(App1 format)

Log data

(App1 format)

Device

Setting and reference

Config data

(App2 format)

Pref data

(App2 format)

Log data

(App2 format)

F-2-268 F-2-267

●● MEAP Application Configuration Service This service manages the MEAP application setting information. It has functions such as saving setting information to the MEAP area. Ver 57 of MEAP Specifications supports this

As for devices and MEAP application that do not support the service, the setting information and log data are managed separately by application.

●● Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions

service. General-purpose management tool

●● MEAP Application Log Service

Setting and reference

This service is used to collect MEAP application logs (debug logs and authentication logs).

App1

Ver 58 of MEAP Specifications supports this service.]

App2

Device

The collected logs can be downloaded or deleted in user mode. The settings such as the log level to be saved cannot be made from SMS. These settings

Configuration management service

depend on the MEAP application. For detailed information, refer to the manual for the

Preference management service

Log management service

Platform

application. Config data

Preference data

Log data

(common format)

(common format)

(common format)

F-2-269

As for devices and MEAP application that support the service, information can be managed all together.

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Advantages Obtained When Using the Services

2-157

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management

■■MEAP Application Setting Information Management

2-158

■■MEAP Application Log Management

The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP application which supports the

The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP application which supports the Log Service

Configuration Service can be deleted. The procedure is shown below.

can be downloaded or deleted. The procedure is shown below.

1) Log in to SMS.

1) Log in to SMS.

2) On System Management menu, click [ MEAP Application Setting Information Management

2) On System Management menu, click [ MEAP Application Log Management ] button.

] button.

F-2-272 F-2-270

3) Click [ Download Application Logs ] or [ Delete Application Logs ].

3) Select an application you want to delete, and then click the [ Delete ] button.

F-2-273 F-2-271

Note: If the installed MEAP application contains setting data which is not dedicated to the application but can be shared, the application name [ Shared Setting Information of Applications ] will be displayed.

2

Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management

2-158

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

4) To download the log The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify a destination and save the file.

2-159

Maintenance ■■Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST ●● Outline When replacing or formatting the hard disk, the data in the MEAP application area needs to be temporarily saved to your PC. This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and recovering the backup data.

F-2-274

5) To delete the log The confirmation screen will appear to prompt you to delete the log. Click the [ Yes ] button to delete the log.

In the case of MEAP-installed devices, the application is license-managed, so the application needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing or formatting the hard disk. In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens on the service technician. The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup

F-2-275

function of SST (Service Support Tool). This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician. Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be recovered only when the device has the same serial number. CAUTION: • You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the storage drive has been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings and the storage drive contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation. • Do not disable the license during the period from backup using SST to restoration of data. It is not necessary to reinstall the license file when restoring the backup data.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

2-159

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

2-160

●● Backup Item Automatically Copied

●● Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices

The following data are backed up using SST:

In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application. Therefore the

The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.

following items can be also backed up (stored as Meapbackup.bin).

• MEAP applications.

• Setting items of each menu in the main menu ( Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and

• Setup data generated by MEAP applications (Note that image data stored in BOX will not be saved for MEAP applications using BOX function).

Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, ). • Favorite settings

• User information data registered for local device authentication in SSO-H

• Default settings

• SMS password

• Settings of option shortcuts • Previous settings

CAUTION:

• Settings of quick menu

Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup using SST to recovery of the data.

• Button size information • Wallpaper settings • Quick menu button information • Restrict quick menu use

●● Requirements for Backup Using the SST The following conditions must be met for use of the function: 1) Device Firmware Version Device Firmware Version for SST (Ver4.2x) Boot ROM F-2-276

When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to decrypt encrypted backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to decrypt the data. It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been recovered using SST. If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.

System

SST

iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series

Boot ROM is not equipped.

Already supported since the 1st version.

The version supporting the corresponding devices.

imageRUNNER ADVANCE series other than iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series

Already supported since the 1st version.

Already supported since the 1st version.

The version supporting the corresponding devices. T-2-100

2) SST Version Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed, upgrade the SST. 3) Space for backup To back up the HDDof the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

2-160

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

●● Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST 1) Switching Login Service / Backup of Login User Information

2-161

4) Connecting the device using SST When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [ Start ] button.

If SSO-H is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing up the user information. Although SST will back up local device user information, it is recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H login page opens with the URL "https://<device IP address>:8443/sso/"). CAUTION: • If a hard disk of a system that uses SSO-H is formatted without changing the login service to the default authentication, the error message “The login service must be set again with SMS” appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to restart the system after formatting. • If this problem occurs, change the login service to SSO-H with SMS. If you cannot access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system with FIXIP mode -hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on. The IP address “172.16.1.100” will be automatically assigned for the device. Then log in to SMS specifying the address.

F-2-277

5) Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC (uploading) Click [ Upload Data ] button of SST and select “Meapback.bin” as the item to be backed up

2) Starting the device in Download Mode

to click [ Start ] button.

Press [ 2 ] and [ 8 ] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled only in Download Mode. 3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to start SST on the PC.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

F-2-278

2-161

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

6) Saving backup data Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [ OK ] to save the backup data on the PC.

2-162

CAUTION: Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup using SST to recovery of the data.

F-2-279

When the file is successfully saved, click [ OK ] button, and then click [ Return to Main Menu ] button.

F-2-281

When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to decrypt encrypted backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to decrypt the data. It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been recovered using SST. If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.

F-2-280

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST

2-162

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD

2-163 ■■Formatting and Replacing the HDD

●● Procedures to Restore Backup Data 1) Connecting to the device Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST.

●● Outline If the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the system (excluding the MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced. When the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the MEAP application stored in it will be

2) Restoring backup file Click [ Upload Data ] button and select the data backed up in the previous step (Meapback. bin) to click [ Start ]. Note that the data backed up in a different version cannot be restored.

lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to “Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST” if possible. If a backup cannot be made, the MEAP application and the license files need to be reinstalled. As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the conventional counter. If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a

F-2-282

3) Transferring Data

general user. In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in

When the data is successfully transferred, click the [ OK ] button shown on the screen. To

charge of support of a sales company.

continue other jobs, click [ Return to Menu ] button.

When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed. In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question. F-2-283

4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that MEAP applications are surely restored.

Note: The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the same license.

5) Restore the backup data and setting saved. Note that the user information of the local device is included in the backup data, thus does not need to be restored.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD

2-163

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD

2-164

●● Formatting the HDD

●● HDD replacement procedure

Follow the following procedure to format the HDD.

Outline The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally

1) Connecting to the device

or not.

Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of "Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST".

If the MEAP application area cannot be backed up If the HDD does not function correctly due to failure or for other reason, the MEAP application

2) Formatting the HDD Select “Format HDD” from SST menu to format the HDD. Note: HDD can be formatted also by starting Download mode using the USB memory and executing formatting from the displayed menu.

area cannot be backed up. It is therefore necessary to reinstall the application after replacing the HDD. The procedure is shown below. 1) Preparation for replacement Copy a set of license files for reinstalling the MEAP application (special licenses and reusable licenses) to a laptop for service operation. Register a set of system files of a target product to SST. Or, prepare USB thumb drive of the System file transfer settlement. 2) Replacing the drive Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive. 3) Formatting HDD Format the HDD referring to Formatting the HDD. 4) Reinstalling the MEAP application When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation. Installation method is the same as normal installation. 5) Importing user information As necessary, make login service selections and import user information. Note: When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter will not be released and the message “The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.” is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD

2-164

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)

●● If the MEAP application area can be backed up If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD, so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation. 1) Preparation for replacement

2-165 ■■MEAP Safe Mode (level 2) ●● Outline Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default

Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up

files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up. When you have made

the MEAP application area using SST.

changes and restart the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF' in its upper left corner.

2) Replacing the drive Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.

The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a conflict or wrong

3) Formatting HDD Format the HDD referring to Formatting the HDD.

sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause the trouble. If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid;

4) Restorering the backup file Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data. 5) Importing user information As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.

otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change the login service as necessary.

●● Starting in Safe Mode 1) Startup level 2 of [ SERVICE MODE ]. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ USER ].

F-2-284

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)

2-165

2 3) Press

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)

or

2-166

button for several times until [ MEAPSAFE ] is shown. Click [

Note: If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title bar of the browser.

MEAPSAFE ].

Example of display when starting in MEAP SAFE mode: Service Management Service : :: Safe Mode

F-2-288 F-2-285

4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [ OK ]

CAUTION: If the device has been started in the MEAP SAFE mode, all MEAP applications stop and the status becomes "Installed".

button.

This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is cancelled and the device is started again in normal mode. It is therefore necessary to access SMS after normal startup, and start the MEAP application.

F-2-286

5) Check that the notation ‘MPSF’ has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then, restart the device.

F-2-289

F-2-287

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)

2-166

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)

2-167

●● How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode

4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, click [ OK ] button.

1) Startup level 2 of [ SERVICE MODE ]. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ USER ].

F-2-292 F-2-290

3) Press

or

button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] is shown. Click [MEAPSAFE .

F-2-291

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)

5) Check that the notation ‘MPSF’ has appeared in the lower right corner of the screen; then, restart the device.

F-2-293

2-167

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

■■Collection of MEAP Console Logs

2-168 3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button.

●● Overview When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases. The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal software and service mode.

●● What to Prepare • PC connected with the same network as the device • Commercially available terminal software Note: In the procedure shown in this manual, "Tera Term Pro" and "Hyper Terminal" are used as the terminal software.

F-2-295

4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.

●● Work Procedure Device Setting Procedure 1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ] buttons.

F-2-296

5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.

F-2-294

F-2-297

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

2-168

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used)

2-169 4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the "OK"

1) Install the terminal software on the PC.

button.

2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button.

F-2-300

F-2-298

Connection Host Service TCP port#

: Select [TCP/IP] (Default) : Device Host Name or IP Address : Select "Telnet" : Enter 19001

Terminal ID New-line Receive

: VT100 : LF

5) Select [Log...] from the [File] menu.

3) The connection window will open. Select [Terminal…] from the [Setup] menu.

F-2-301

F-2-299

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

2-169

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save] button.

2-170 Note: While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu. Comment to Log... : You can add a comment to the log being collected. The added comment is reflected in the log file.

F-2-302

7) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect. Show Log dialog... : The logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed.

F-2-303

8) Click the [Close] button in the log dialog.

F-2-305

F-2-306

Change directory... : The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed.

F-2-307

F-2-304

Note: To suspend log collection, click the [Pause] button.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

2-170

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.

2-171 PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used) 1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.

F-2-308

Note: Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order to collect logs.

CAUTION: After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled (select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL] > 0, and restart the device).

F-2-309

2) Set [TCP/IP(Winsock)] for [Connect using].

F-2-310

3) Enter the IP address of the target device in [Host address], and enter "19001" (fixed) in [Port number].

F-2-311

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

2-171

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen.

2-172 8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.

F-2-312

5) The [Console Properties] dialog will appear. Select the [Settings] tab, select [VT100] for [Emulation], and then click the [OK] button.

F-2-316

9) Select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] > [Stop] from the menu.

F-2-313

6) Return to the Hyper Terminal window, and select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] from the menu.

F-2-317

10)

Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored

correctly.

F-2-314

7) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Specify the save

F-2-318

destination.

Note: Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order to collect logs.

F-2-315

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs

CAUTION: After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled (select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL] > 0, and restart the device).

2-172

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

■■Using USB Devices

2-173 Operating mode Conventional USB settings [ Use MEAP keyboard enabled MEAP driver as USB input application device ]

●● USB Driver Two types of USB drivers While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as “MEAP driver”), not only MEAP driver but also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as “system driver”) can be used in iR-ADV series. System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the other driver cannot be used.

ON * MEAP driver (conventional compatibility mode) OFF (*default) * Native driver

Can use USB keyboard. Can work only on the conventional applications that support the MEAP application driver. Cannot use USB keyboards. (Device cannot be detected.)

Software keyboard application (System Driver/ MEAP Driver)

System driver supported MEAP application

Cannot use USB keyboards. (Device cannot be detected.)

Cannot use USB keyboards.

Can use USB keyboards.

Can use USB keyboards. Via software keyboards only. T-2-101

USB driver setting (iR-ADV series): System driver is active by default in iR-ADV series. The driver can be changed in Settings/Registration (user mode).

Note: When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted.

Usually, It is not necessary to change the setting because it is specified in the MEAP application side. Only in the case of a special MEAP application, it is necessary to change the USB driver setting.

Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference registration) If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP application driver cannot use the USB input device.

For details, refer to specifications of MEAP application side.

Therefore, for the USB drivers used by USB devices/MEAP applications, there is setting function (MEAP driver preference registration) to give priority to the MEAP driver. If you register the ID of the USB device by using this function, the USB device can use the MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings. Using this function requires the conditions below: • Supported MEAP SpecVer: 26 • Describe the idVendeor(VID) and idProdutc(PID) of USB device in the manifest or activate/ deactivate the VID and PID by calling API from MEAP applications. The driver setting that is used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timing. F-2-319

Note: The [Use USB Host] menu on the screen is hidden at the time of shipment. To display this menu, start [SERVICE MODE] in level 2, and then change the value of [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [USBH-DSP] from ‘0’ to ‘1’.

When registering from a manifest file. • The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is restarted. • The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is restarted. Note: You can display/check the used driver setting at “USB device report print” described below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from API.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

2-173

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

2-174

Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)

Specifications for the use of USB keyboards

plugged to device

Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional

When the HID keyboard is MEAP application installed > USB Settings: Application System Registration [Use MEAP Driver for USB System with driver not status of Input Device] Native driver VID/ PID supported/ USB device When the Mass Storage is application supported declared conventional A installed > USB Settings: application in Manifest application [Use MEAP Driver for for x External USB Device] Not registered Registered

OFF ON OFF ON

YES: USB device available

YES NO NO NO

YES NO NO NO

NO YES YES YES

YES YES T-2-102

NO: USB device not available

Setting to use MEAP application Registration System System driver Application MEAP driver status of USB Native driver not supported with VID/PID (Additional USB device device application supported / conventional declared in Functions B application application Manifest for B mode) Not used B (Native driver to C be used) To be used B

YES YES

YES YES

NO NO

NO

NO

YES

C Not used B (Native driver to C be used) To be used B C

NO NO YES

NO NO YES

YES YES NO

YES NO

NO NO

NO NO

YES YES

YES YES

YES: USB device available

2

NO: USB device not available

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

keyboard (in-line entry not possible). • When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be remembered. • The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can be entered from the software keyboard. • Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will • Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software keyboard or numeric keys. • Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/ connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when

Storage) plugged to device

Not registered

• When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB

not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).

Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass

Registered

control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.

in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep. • When USB device is attached to device, devices do not shift to deep sleep mode. • Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/ Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is guaranteed.) Note: The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards, [Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF). Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings. • ON: when using MEAP application keyboard • OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)

T-2-103

2-174

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

2-175

●● Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration

4) Press [ OK ] button and restart this device.

When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode. Steps to initialize preference use registration 1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Function ] > [ CLEAR ].

F-2-322

●● USB Device report print F-2-320

3) Press

or

button for several times until [ USBM-CLR ] is shown on the screen.

Press [ USBM-CLR ].

To check the vendor IDs (idVendor) and the product IDs (idProduct) registered in this device by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications, output the USB Device repot report print. Steps to output the USB Device report print 1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Function ] > [ MISC-P ].

F-2-321

F-2-323

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

2-175

2 3) Press

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

or

2-176

button for several times until [ USBH-PRT ] is shown. Press [ USBH-

Example of output result

PRT ].

USB device information

******************************** *** USB Device report print *** ********************************

T: Bus=01 Lev=02 Prnt=03 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0 D: Ver=2.00 Cls=00(>ifc) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1 P: Vendor=066f ProdID=4210 Rev=10.02 S: Manifacturer=SigmaTel, Inc. S: Product=STIr42xx S: SerialNumber=0002F0F7261287A5 C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=100mA I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=fe(app.) Sub=02 Prot=00 Driver=irda-usb E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms

F-2-324

4) When pressing [ OK ] button, [ ACTIVE ] blinks on the status field.

F-2-327

USB device information Content Display the information of the USB device, which the device recognized. If not displayed, there may be some fault occurred. Some of standard optional devices are not displayed on a report. The details of each item are as follows. T : Topology F-2-325

5) When [ OK ] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the print.

Internal hierarchical structure, which a USB device is connected, is shown. The number of a connected bus, the hierarchical structure and connection speed can be indicated. D : Device Information of USB devices is shown. P : Product Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized here. S : String The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a product name can be recognized here.

F-2-326

C : Configure The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is active.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

2-176

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

2-177

I : Interface

The content of MEAP preferred device information

The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle

Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with

can be recognized.

MEAP application. By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the

The value and the content of Driver are as follows. Labeling

status using a specific USB device.

Content

AppID : Application ID

usbhid

It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device connected.

usb-storage

It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are connected.

irda-usb IrDA

It is displayed when the dongle is connected.

hub

It is displayed when HUB is connected.

gpusb

It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned to the input device connected.

gpusbex

It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.

VID : Vendor ID PID : Product ID

Note: By starting, stopping or uninstalling a MEAP application, the driver settings of the USB device may be changed. If the device needs to be restarted following this setting change, a message prompting the user to restart the device is displayed.

T-2-104

E:Endpoint The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown. Right or wrong of report output Connecting device HID Storage

User installation

Report printing

Available

Yes

Available

Yes

Not available

No

IrDA

Not available

Yes

Multimedia Card Reader

Not available

Yes

IC Card Reader

Not available

Yes

Image Data Analyzer Board-A1

Not available

No

Hub

Internal Hub*

Not available

No

External Hub

Available

Yes

FAX USB Device Port

* USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction

8

F-2-328

T-2-105

Note: Some connecting devices such as the Image Data Analyzer Board and USB Device Port are not installed depending on the model.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices

2-177

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function

2-178

■■Integrated Authentication Function

●● Disabling the Integrated Authentication Function If you do not want Volatile Credential to be used from a security standpoint, the function can

●● Sharing the Authentication Information

be disabled.

Separately managing the authentication information at login and the authentication information for MEAP applications creates inconveniences such as that the authentication process is executed many times. In order to solve this problem, the device has an integrated authentication function. This function allows authentication information to be shared between MEAP applications in a MEAP environment. The supported version of MEAP Specifications is Ver.59, which needs to be supported by both the device and the MEAP application in order to use this function. There are 2 types of authentication information that can be shared: Volatile Credential whose

The function can be disabled from remote UI or service mode. Persistent Credential cannot be disabled. On the setting screen of remote UI, the function can be disabled on a protocol-by-protocol basis. Remote UI You can access the setting screen on remote UI for disabling integrated authentication as shown below.

registered information is discarded at the time of logout or shutdown of the device and Persistent Credential whose registered information is not discarded at the time of logout.

●● Volatile Credential Volatile Credential is used in cases where the authentication information is shared between applications which use the same security domain for authentication. The credential is registered mainly by the login application, therefore the applications which access the security domain that was used for authentication by the login application can use the credential.

●● Persistent Credential Persistent Credential is used to help entry of authentication information when accessing a different security domain for authentication. The credential is registered mainly by general MEAP applications, and the authentication information can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later.

●● Comparison of Functions Volatile Credential Registered information

Persistent Credential

Character strings and arbitrary Java objects

Character strings only User ID/ Password/ Domain/Arbitrary character strings Lifetime Registration At login (the login application), and at any At any timing of registration by an timing of registration by an application application Deletion Can be used until logout/shutdown. Can be used until deletion by the application or management tool. Encryption of Not supported Data retained on the HDD is credential data encrypted. Store (Save) to Memory in the device HDD in the device

F-2-329

T-2-106

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function

2-178

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting

2-179

■■Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for

Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button.

Main Power] Setting If some of the MEAP applications are running on the device, the following problems will occur.

●● The [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] setting cannot be enabled. If a MEAP application that restricts the device from shifting to deep sleep mode is running, even when the setting of [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), the device starts normally instead of quick startup. F-2-330

In that case, it does not affect the behavior of the MEAP application.

• [Disable integrated authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled regardless of the authentication method. • [Disable integrated authentication using credentials for local device authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of local device authentication. • [Disable integrated authentication using credentials for LDAP server authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of LDAP server authentication.

●● Changes made in the settings of a MEAP application are not reflected. If the startup setting [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), even when the Main Power Supply Switch of the machine is turned OFF, a shutdown process is not executed internally. Therefore, in the case of a MEAP application where changes in settings are enabled when the device is restarted, changes in settings are not reflected just by changing the settings.

Service mode The location of the service mode setting for disabling integrated authentication: Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled

Follow either of the restart procedures shown below to enable the changes made in the settings. • Execute restart from remote UI. • Turn OFF the Main Switch, and then turn it ON within 20 seconds.

●● After recovery from quick startup, MEAP applications do not work properly. MEAP applications that are scheduled to execute processes at specified times may not work properly after recovery from quick restart. Unexpected problems such as that the application executes a task at an unexpected timing may occur. Problems may occur in the following two cases.

F-2-331

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting

2-179

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in

In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours" A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay execution". If execution is delayed for some reason, the delay time is ignored. Problem: If 24 hours have passed since the last execution of the task, the task is executed only once. => The task may be executed at a timing other than the time the user expects it to be executed.

2-180

■■Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in ●● Overview Department ID Management and SSO-H (Local Device Authentication) manage user information separately. Therefore, in order to allow coexistence of Department ID Management and SSO-H, it is necessary that the information of SSO-H and the information of Department ID Management are the same.

31/Dec

1/Jan

2/Jan

3/Jan

4/Jan

5/Jan

(1)

Starting

SSO-H user management information User name

Password

Stopped (Quick startup standby)

(2)

The timing the task is expected to be executed The timing the task was actually executed

Authentication

(6)

F-2-332

In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task at 00:00 every day"

Role Administrator Administrator Administrator

Dept. ID Password 7654321 1111 2222

7654321 1111 2222

(3)

Privilege elevation

(5)

A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-rate

SSO-H Dept. ID Management

execution".

(4)

Dept. ID Management Info

If execution was delayed for some reason, two or more tasks are continuously executed to

O K

"make up for the delay". Problem: The tasks of Jan. 1, Jan. 2, and Jan. 3 are executed after quick startup. 31/Dec

1/Jan

2/Jan

3/Jan

4/Jan

ID : 1111 Password : 1111

Administrator Password CANONTARO pass User : CANONTARO CMJTARO Makuhari Password : pass

Dept. ID Password 7654321 1111 2222

7654321 1111 2222

Verification

5/Jan

F-2-334

1) The user enters the ID and password of SSO-H to a device where both SSO-H and Department ID Management are enabled.

Starting

2) SSO-H checks the entered ID and password with the SSO-H user information table. 3) SSO-H sends the department ID and password which correspond to the entered ID and

Stopped (Quick startup standby)

password to the department ID management function. 4) The department ID management function checks the department ID and password sent

The timing the task is expected to be executed The timing the task was actually executed

from SSO-H with the user information table. F-2-333

5) The user is elevated to the corresponding privilege. 6) The user is authenticated. If the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management, the authentication ends in failure and the user can no longer log in to the device.

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in

2-180

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in

Note : Even if the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H do not coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management, login is possible when all of the following conditions are satisfied. • System manager information of the device ([Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [System Manager Information Settings]) is set. • Login is performed as a user with the administrator right of SSO-H.

2-181

• Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch. Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function", resulting in mismatch. (The SSO-H user information cannot be changed in Import All Function.) Device A

SSO-H user management information User name

PAssword

Administrator Password CANONTARO pass CMJTARO Makuhari

Department ID Management was enabled before changing the department ID and password registered in SSO-H to match with the information of Department ID

1111 2222 3333

Import All Function (Only the Department ID Management information was updated.)

Management in the following cases: when Department ID Management was enabled.

Dept. ID Password 1111 2222 3333

Device B

The user information of SSO-H does not coincide with the user information of Department ID • The user information of SSO-H was different from that of Department ID Management

Dept. ID Management Info

Role Administrator Administrator Administrator

Dept. ID Management Info Dept. ID Password 1234567 9999 8888

1234567 9999 8888

Dept. ID PAssword

Mismatch

1111 2222 3333

1111 2222 3333

Management.

F-2-337

SSO-H user management information User name

Password

Administrator Password CANONTARO pass CMJTARO Makuhari

Dept. ID Management info

Role Administrator Administrator Administrator

Dept. ID Password 7654321 1234 5678

7654321 1234 5678

Dept. ID Password

Mismatch

1111 2222 3333

1111 2222 3333 F-2-335

Only the department ID and password registered in SSO-H or those in Department ID

Role Administrator Administrator Administrator

Password

Administrator Password CANONTARO pass CMJTARO Makuhari

Dept. ID Password 7654321 1234 5678

7654321 1234 5678

Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application

Dept. ID Password

Match

Only the SSO-H user information was updated

SSO-H user management information USer name

1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).

Dept. ID Management info

SSO-H user management information Administrator Password CANONTARO pass CMJTARO Makuhari

Procedure

Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)

Management were changed. Password

If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID/password, perform the following remedy.

• Only one of information was updated, resulting in mismatch.

User name

●● Remedy

Role Administrator Administrator Administrator

1234567 9999 8888

7654321 1234 5678

Dept. ID Management info

Dept. ID Password 1234567 9999 8888

7654321 1234 5678

Dept. ID Password

Mismatch

7654321 1234 5678

7654321 1234 5678 F-2-336

F-2-338

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in

2-181

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in

2) Restart the device.

2-182

5) Restart the device.

Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.

Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service. 6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.

3) Disable Depart ID Management.

Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in

In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]

Department ID Management.

> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/

Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.

Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department

SSO-H user registration information edition screen:

ID Management].

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or https://:8443/sso/Edit).

F-2-339

4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication. Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".) F-2-341

SSO-H user registration information import screen: (SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information] or (https://:8443/sso/Import).

F-2-340

2

Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in

F-2-342

2-182

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary

2-183

7) Enable Depart ID Management. In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/ Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID Management].

F-2-343

8) Check that the device can be logged in. Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.

Reference material ■■Glossary Terms & Acronyms

A program unit to provide users with solutions.

Application ID

An identifier assigned to each application. A unique ID is assigned to each MEAP application.

Applet (Applet Type Application)

A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications show buttons on the touch panel display.

Code Sign

Information to check if an application is genuine. An application marketed in the normal procedure has a code sign assigned by LMS. MEAP platform rejects applications without Canon code signs for being installed or executed on the device.

CPCA (Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture)

Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or modifying objects in the device.

CPCA Java CL (Class Library)

CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a device.

Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other -Department ID authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is Management turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI Device Specification ID

ID allocated to each device type. This represents CPCA API specification and the version number to use MFP generic functions or obtain information including maximum allowable copies.

Esplet (Esplet Type Application)

A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications do not show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined word created by Canon, consisting of [ Espresso ] or Italian coffee and [ let ] derived from Applet/Service.

File Description

An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a program. A program descriptor includes an identifier and information such as a file name and size, which helps OS to judge the file to be edited.

HID class

HID stands for Human Interface Device, representing man-machine interfaces of PC components and peripheral devices. HID class means USB class classified as HID.

iR Native application

The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy, Universal Send and Mailbox.

ISV (Independent Software Vendor)

Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers application developer in this document.

F-2-344

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary

Definitions and Explanations

Application

2-183

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary

Terms & Acronyms

Definitions and Explanations

J2ME Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun (Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular Edition) phones and PDA. J2RE (Java 2 Runtime Environment)

A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming language of Java2. This set includes Java virtual machine providing runtime environment for Java applications among others. Java applets do not require J2RE since these are executed on Web browsers using Java runtime environment provided on browsers. However, standalone Java applications require Java runtime environment such as J2RE for execution. Runtime environments can be downloaded for free of charge from the Web site of Sun Microsystems, the Java developer.

Java

A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A. Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java.

JavaScript

A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A., runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer. Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as animated buttons and display of timetables.

2-184 Terms & Acronyms

MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that (MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model. MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files (*.jar) and the license file (*.lic). MEAP-enabled device imageRUNNER (iR) devices with built-in MEAP platform. MFP (Multi Function Peripheral)

Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.

OSGi (Open Service Gateway Initiative)

Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/".

Portal Service

The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.

Protocol

A set of rules applied to data transmission procedures over network. Major communication protocols include: • FTP: File Transfer Protocol. This is a communication protocol or protocolimplemented commands to provide file transfer between a host and clients over TCP/IP network. • DHCP: An upward compatible protocol of BOOTP. This communication protocol allocates a dynamic IP address to each client machine upon communication startup on TCP/IP network and collects the allocated IP address when communication is completed. The server allocates one of multiple IP addresses and notifies the setup information to a client. • BOOTP: A communication protocol to automatically load setup information including IP address and a domain name from the server to a client on TCP/IP network. • RARP: A communication protocol to request IP address information via the network adaptor address (MAC address) of a client. • IPP: A communication protocol to execute remote printing between the print server and clients via Internet. • TCP/IP: A standard communication protocol required to access to Internet and other large-scale network.

Proxy Server

Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next request.

Java VM JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine (Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native instruction set. License Access Number

A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number of access numbers, to issue license access numbers

Licensae File

A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application.

LMS The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled (License Management device. LMS is the server issuing [ License Files ] as well as license access System) numbers. Login Service

Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device - Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On).

Mass Storage class

Mass Storage means a storage device with large capacity, generally secondary storage devices. Mass Storage class means USB class classified in the secondary storage device group.

MEAP (Multifunction Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java Platform) platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for MEAP. MEAP Contents

2

Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device.

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Glossary

Definitions and Explanations

Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without this module cannot work on MEAP platform.

2-184

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Option for exclusive individual measure

Terms & Acronyms

2-185 ■■Option for exclusive individual measure

Definitions and Explanations

SDK (Software Development Kit)

The kit containing information and tools required for software development.

Service

A functional unit or an application program working on MEAP platform. [ Applications ] are generally termed [ Services ] in Java world.

This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel.

Servlet (Servlet Type Application)

A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications is designed to show user interface on the Web browser.

Default value

●● Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2) Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel.

1: display

SMS The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle (Service Management management. Service) Socket

A virtual interface of an application for network communication. A user only needs to specify a socket as a unit of an address and a port from an application. This establishes the network connection for data transmission, eliminating complication related to detailed communication procedures.

SSO-H (Single SignOn H)

Login service providing features of both local device authentication and domain authentication. The former is the method that device independently authorizes users; whereas the latter is that device links to the domain controller on the network in the Active Directory environment to authorize users.

Thread

A unit for program execution. A multi-task system allowing multiple programs to run concurrently assigns a memory space and other resources independently to each program, providing users with a feel as if only a program is running. At least one thread is generated upon a program generated.

URL (Uniform Resource Locator)

The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [ http://www.w3.org/default. html ]. [ http ] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web page on the Internet.

USB

Abbreviation of Universal Serial Bus. This is the interface standard to link between information devices.

USB system driver

The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.

Setting range, item 0: hide 1: display Setting Procedure 1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 2. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ].

F-2-345

3) Press [ UI-COPY ].

T-2-107

F-2-346

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Option for exclusive individual measure

2-185

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Option for exclusive individual measure

4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.

2-186 ●● Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2) In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/ JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc. Note: Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.

• As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure] • As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]

F-2-347

5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.

Default value 1: No activation of warning display Setting range, item 0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen Setting Procedure 1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 2. 2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ].

F-2-348

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Option for exclusive individual measure

2-186

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Option for exclusive individual measure

2-187

3) Press [ ANIM-SW ].

F-2-349

4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.

F-2-350

5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.

2

Technology > MEAP > Reference material > Option for exclusive individual measure

2-187

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions

2-188

Embedded RDS

■■Features and benefits E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing

Product Overview

of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment.

■■Overview Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine, information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System).

■■Major Functions ●● Service Call Button If a user touches service call button on the touch panel display when corrupt image, paper jams, or/ and other problem has occurred, E-RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW. Moreover, E-RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request

●● Service Browser

The following device information/ status can be monitored. • Billing counts

Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge, and is

• Parts counter

used for referring to the FAQ contents which is connected to UGW.

• Firmware info

In order to grasp on which devices the service browser is enabled, when the status of the

• Service call error log

service browser is changed from disabled (0: OFF) to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser

• Jam log

information to the UGW.

• Alarm log • Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)

●● Service mode menu Transmission E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:

Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs

• When a specific alarm and service call error are detected

communication between this machine and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol. Customer Environment

• When the setting is changed in service mode The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service

UGW

mode menu:

This machine

Transmission timing

Internet

When the following alarm is detected.

Firewall

Sales Company

DNS Server

Proxy Server

Administrator

The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system configuration F-2-351

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions

Alarm codes for transmission: 0x060002,                     // Fixing 0x060004 - 0x069999,  // Fixing 0x090005 - 0x099999,  // Dram 0x100006 - 0016, 0x100022 - 0099, 0x100101 - 9900,          // Development 0x300001 - 0x309999   // High voltage

Transmitting data COPIER

Display

Error retry

ANALOG No HV-STS CCD DPOT DENS FIXING SENSOR MISC HT-C HV-TR P-PASCAL

2-188

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function

Transmission timing

Transmitting data

When the following service call error is detected. COPIER

Display

Error codes for transmission: E000 - E00F,  // Fixing E020,              // Development ATR E060 - E06F   // High voltage

When a value is set to [COPIER - Adjust] subordinate’s Service mode menu. (Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of setting)

COPIER

When the first communication test is done. (For transmission process, 5 minutes after the execution)

COPIER

Adjust

Error retry

ANALOG No HV-STS CCD DPOT DENS FIXING SENSOR MISC HT-C HV-TR P-PASCAL Yes

2-189

Limitations ■■Service Mode Menu Transmission Function 1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted. • When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E-RDS at poweron • When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is detected • When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an alarm or a service call error ended in failure • If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being obtained after detection of an alarm or a service call error, the data being obtained is not sent.

Display

ANALOG Yes HV-STS CCD DPOT DENS FIXING SENSOR MISC HT-C HV-TR P-PASCAL

2) If alarms/service call errors successively occur, and if the time of the host machine is corrected or changed while the log is being sent, service mode menu data may not be properly sent. It is because a Link No.* may be applied to the old log although it should be applied to the new log. * Link No.: A common number for linking the service mode menu data with the alarm log/service call log data to be sent After completion of log transmission, the service mode menu data is obtained, and is sent with this number attached.

Adjust T-2-108

NOTE: Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.

3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the time of power-on. (There is a time lag.) 4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted. Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function

2-189

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions

2-190

Service cautions

NOTE: Path of [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption]

• After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board, initialization of the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed. Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become unusual. Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.

• Control Panel

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [ Encryption Settings ] > [ Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]

• Remote UI

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [Security Policy Settings] > [Key/Certificate] > [Prohibit use of weak encryption]

• The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.

• If the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS : 0).

• Set port number of UGW [SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]

• With this machine, a communication test can be conducted from the [Settings /

Default : 443

Registration] key on the Control Panel. When conducting a communication test from the • When the user enables [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] (by changing the setting value to "ON") (see NOTE), the following service mode setting needs to be

[Settings / Registration] key on the Control Panel, pay attention on the following points: • During a communication test, do not take any actions such as pressing a key. Actions are not accepted until the communication test is completed (actions are ignored).

changed. [SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR] • If [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] is disabled (the setting value

• When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or from the [Settings / Registration] key on the Control Panel, do not conduct a communication test from the other. These operations are not guaranteed.

is "OFF") https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010 (Default value) • If [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] is enabled (the setting value is "ON") https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010

NOTE: *The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result. If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits) appears on the touch panel display.

F-2-352

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions

2-190

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings

E-RDS Setup ■■Confirmation and preparation in advance To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are required.

2-191 (3) Network settings Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this machine network related settings. See Users’ Guide for detailed procedures. CAUTION:

(1) Advance confirmation Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/

When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to reboot this machine.

imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.

■■Steps to E-RDS settings (2) Advance preparations

1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system

2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.

administrator in advance. Information item 1 IP address settings

NOTE: This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values. For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing E-RDS settings".

• Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP • Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set Information item 2 Is there a DNS server in use? If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following. • Primary DNS server address • Secondary DNS server address Information item 3 Is there a proxy server? If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following. • Proxy server address • Port No. for proxy server Information item 4 Is proxy server authentication required? If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following. • User name and password required for proxy authentication

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings

F-2-353

3) Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot this machine. • Installation of the CA certificate: Perform installation from SST or Remote UI. • Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate in the factory setting is automatically installed.

2-191

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings

2-192 (3) Reboot this machine.

CAUTION: After following procedure, the registered key and CA certificate are deleted, and only the CA certificate installed at the time of shipment is registered.

CAUTION:

It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance.

E-RDS, it is necessary to register again from SST or Remote UI.

(1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 2. (2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button.

If a key and a CA certificate have been registered in order to use a function other than

4) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 5) When the user enables [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] (by changing the setting value to "ON") (see NOTE), the following service mode setting needs to be changed. • [SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR] • If [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] is disabled (the setting value is "OFF") https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010 (Default value) • [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] is enabled (the setting value is "ON") https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010

F-2-354

"OK!" is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized. When "NG!" is displayed, see the section of "Troubleshooting" to execute the remedy, and then perform initialization of the CA certificate again and check to see if the CA certificate is initialized.

F-2-356

NOTE: Path of [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] • Control Panel

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [ Encryption Settings ] > [ Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]

• Remote UI

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [Security Policy Settings] > [Key/Certificate] > [Prohibit use of weak encryption]

F-2-355

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings

2-192

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings

6) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS].

2-193 CAUTION: The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be change unless there are specific instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.

F-2-357

7) Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.) NOTE: This operation enables the communication function with UGW.

F-2-358

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings

2-193

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

2-194 ■■Steps to Service Call button settings

8) Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK]. NOTE: This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.

●● Steps for settings to display the service call button In order to use the "Service Call" button, follow the procedure shown below to display the "Service Call" button. 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2) Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALL-SW].

F-2-359

If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the "Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed. F-2-361

3) Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)

F-2-360

NOTE: The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COMLOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

F-2-362

2-194

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

NOTE: When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the Monitoring Service screen by touching the [Monitoring Service] button on the Check Counter screen.

●● Steps for settings of service call completion

2-195 3) Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1 or 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.) NOTE: E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the alarm to UGW.

F-2-364

When the service technician completes the work for the service call, follow the instruction as described below to execute the service call completion work. 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

NOTE: In the current condition, touching the [OK] button completes the service call regardless of whether 0 or 1 is set.

2) Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALLCMP].

F-2-363

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

2-195

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

●● Steps for service call request

2-196 4) Select the request details and touch the [Request] button.

Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call. 1) Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter screen.

NOTE: E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to UGW.

2) Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring Service screen.

F-2-365

3) Touch the [New Request] button on the Service Call screen.

F-2-367

5) If the service call request is successful, "The service call request has been sent." is displayed. If "Could not send the service call request." appears, refer to the "Troubleshooting" and repeat until "The service call request has been sent." is displayed.

F-2-366

CAUTION: When a service call has been already requested, another service call cannot be sent. The previous service call needs to be canceled, or a service technician needs to

F-2-368

perform processing for service call completion.

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

2-196

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

●● Steps for service call cancellation

2-197 4) "The request has been canceled." is displayed.

To cancel the service call, follow the instructions as described below. 1) Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter screen. 2) Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring Service screen.

F-2-371

F-2-369

3) Touch the [Cancel] button, and touch the [Yes] button in the check screen. NOTE: E-RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing, and sends the alarm to UGW.

F-2-370

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings

2-197

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings

■■Steps to Service Browser settings

2-198 3) Reboot this machine.

1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [BRWS-ACT] and then touch [OK].

4) Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS].

NOTE: When the status of the function is changed from disabled to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser information to the UGW.

F-2-374

5) When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the Service Mode screen. F-2-372

If the connection is established with UGW successfully, "OK!" is displayed. When "NG!" is displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection is established with UGW.

F-2-375

NOTE: Generally, once service browsing is enabled (BRWS-STS : 1), it cannot be disabled (BRWS-STS : 0) again*. To disable service browsing, clear SRAM. * The function is disabled (BRWS-STS: 2) by executing BRWS-ACT again. F-2-373

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings

2-198

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ

2-199

FAQ

■■Initializing E-RDS settings It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the default value.

No.1 Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail? A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!" case.

●● Initialization procedure

1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been halted.

1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Network cable is blocked off.

2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK].

3. Proxy server settings is not correct. No.2 Q: When does E-RDS send counter information to UGW? How many data is sent? A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW side. The send time cannot be specified on the E-RDS side. Data is sent once every 16 hours. The data size of counter information is approx. 285 KB. No.3 Q: Will data which failed to be sent due to an error in communication with UGW be resent? A: Data shown below will be resent. • Jam log F-2-376

●● Setting values and data to be initialized The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized. • COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS • COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR • COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT • COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG

• Service call log • Alarm log • Service mode menu The newest data is resent only when the settings are changed in service mode. • Browser information It is resent only when the web browser option is enabled. Data is resent endlessly (after 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 minutes since the occurrence of communication error; once 30 minutes have passed, it is resent at 30-minute intervals) until it

CAUTION:

is sent successfully. Resend continues even if the power is turned OFF and then ON.

In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the status is not returned to the factory default.

No.4

When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory default CA certificate file.

A: Up to 30 log data can be saved. The data size of error information is maximum 128

For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.".

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ

Q: What is the upper limit of the number of COM-LOGs? What is the upper limit of the number of characters of error information displayed in a COM-LOG? characters.

2-199

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ

2-200

No.5

No.10

Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed.

Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?

Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA? A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic" while "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA (as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to "Basic" authentication on the server. No.6 Q: Can I turn this machine power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system operation? A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time. It will become "Server connection error" or "Proxy connection error" errors if the power supply of network equipment such as HUB is made prolonged OFF.

A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below. Transmission timing

Detailed procedure

When the service 1) Specify the service browser browser is enabled from setting in the service mode the disabled state [OFF] menu. 2) Send browser information to UGW. 3) Once obtaining OK response from UGW, enable the service browser mode [ACTIVE]. (To use the setting, it is necessary to reboot this machine)

Transmission information

Error occurs

Service browser mode: Retransmission [Register] is not performed. WEB browser option: [ON] or [OFF] according to the license status

("Disabling [OFF]" continues to be set.)

T-2-109

No.11

No.7 Q: How does E-RDS operate while this machine is placed in the sleep mode? A: While E-RDS is enabled, and if there is information that should be sent, the machine recovers from the sleep state and starts data transmission. Immediately after completion of data transmission by E-RDS, the machine starts shifting to sleep state. However, the time required to shift to sleep state depends on the device. If the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes, the machine does not shift to sleep state.

Q: Can I make another service call request when I have already requested a service call? A: No, you cannot make another service call request if you have already made a service call request. Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call which you’d made. Or the service technician performs a service call completion process. No.12 Q: Is the "Requesting" status cancelled when this machine is rebooted? A: The requesting status is not cancelled even if the device is rebooted. The information

No.8 Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Department counter? A: No, E-RDS does not support Department counter.

of the notified service call request (the time that the request was made, the service call request description) is also retained during the "Requesting" status.

No.9 Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of transmission? A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to transmission of the service mode, see the "Service mode menu Transmission".

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ

2-200

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-201

Troubleshooting

No.13 Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of this machine is turned ON? A: Yes. When a scheduled send such as that for counter could not be executed due to the power of this machine being turned OFF, etc., and the scheduled send time has already passed at power-on, the send is executed immediately.

Scheduled send Immediate send (Service call log / Alarm log / Jam log)

Cause1: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete. Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below. 1) Check network connections YES: Proceed to Step 2.

Status of this machine Power OFF

Sent

Not sent*1

Sleep

Sent

-

Sent*2

Power ON

Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!

Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON?

The following shows data send according to the status of this machine. Send types

No.1

NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected. 2) Confirm loop back address (* In case of IPv4 )

Sent*2

Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 T-2-110

Settings] > [PING Command], enter "127.0.0.1", and touch the [Start] button.

*1: Immediately sent if the send time has already passed at power-on. *2: Sent after recovery from sleep mode. No.14 Q: What is the number of the network port used by E-RDS? A: The port number used by E-RDS for communication with UGW is "443". If this setting is changed, an error occurs during communication with UGW. Therefore this setting should not be changed unless otherwise instructed. No.15 Q: After the setting for E-RDS was made, the IP address of the host machine was changed. In that case, is it necessary to execute COM-TEST again? A: It is not necessary to execute COM-TEST again because the IP address used by E-RDS is automatically changed. However, it is necessary to restart the device to reflect the change in the setting of the IP address

F-2-377

Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.) YES: Proceed to Step 3). NO: There is a possibility that this machine’s network settings are wrong. Check the details of the IPv4 settings once more.

F-2-378

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-201

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-202

3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.

(c) Select [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS server noted down

Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network.

in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.

Does this machine respond? YES: Proceed to Step 4).

Does the screen display "Response from the host."?

NO: Confirm the details of this machine’s IP address and subnet mask settings.

YES: Proceed to Remedy 2. NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and

4) Confirm DNS connection

then touch the [Start] button.

(a) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings], write down the primary and secondary

Does the screen display "Response from the host."?

addresses of the DNS server, and touch the [Cancel] button.

YES: Proceed to Remedy 2. NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the address with the user’s system administrator. Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG) 1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the right side. The communication error log list screen is displayed.

F-2-379

(b) Touch the [Up] button.

F-2-381

NOTE:

• Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication error log list screen. • "*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only. F-2-380

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-202

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-203

3) When each line is selected, the communication error log detailed screen is displayed as shown in the figure below. (Example: No. 02)

NOTE: Path of [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] • Control Panel

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [ Encryption Settings ] > [ Prohibit Use of Weak Encryption]

• Remote UI

[Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Security Settings] > [Security Policy Settings] > [Key/Certificate] > [Prohibit use of weak encryption]

No.2 Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly. Cause: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for E-RDS have been changed. Remedy: The following points should be checked. 1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on. F-2-382

2) Check the E-RDS setting values. • Check the communication error log from COM-LOG.

NOTE:

• A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters) • Touch the [OK] button to return to the communication error log list screen.

4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and strings".

• Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGWPORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see "Service cautions". No.3 Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Device is not ready, try later" in error details of COMLOG list.

Cause 2 : [Prohibit Use of Key/Certificate with Weak Encryption] in the security policy settings is enabled (the setting value is "ON") (see NOTE). Remedy : Change the URL setting in the following service mode. Setting value: https://b01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010

Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking. Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below. 1) Check networking conditions and connections. 2) Turn on the power supply of this machine and perform a communication test about 60 seconds later. No.4 Symptom: "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test (COM-TEST) has done successfully. Cause: It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty. Remedy: Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status with a network and UGW administrator.

F-2-383

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-203

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-204

No.5

No.8

Symptom: Enabling Service Browser (BRWS-ACT) results NG!

Symptom: Initializing the CA certificate (CA-KEY) results in NG!

Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test

Cause: Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally.

result is NG!

Remedy: Initialize the HDD.

Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes successfully.

No.9 Symptom: A service call request is failed, and a message "Could not send the service call

No.6

request" is displayed.

Symptom: The display indicates that the service browser is enabled (BRWS-STS: 1), but the service browser fails to be activated.

Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test result is NG!

Cause: The main power switch of this machine has not been turned OFF and then ON. ON/ OFF of the service browser is enabled after reboot.

Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes successfully.

Remedy: Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine. No.10 No.7

Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs.

Symptom: A service call request cannot be made because the [New Request] button is

Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COM-

grayed out.

TEST was executed again. Remedy: When repeatedly executing COM-TEST, execute COM-TEST at intervals of 5 minutes or more.

F-2-384

Cause: There has been already a service call request. Remedy: Perform either of the following remedy works: • Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call request that has been made. • A service technician performs a complete processing for the service call request that has been made.

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting

2-204

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings

2-205

Error code and strings

No.

The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen. (Here, "server" means UGW.)

Code

9

• The error information are displayed in the following form. [*] [Error strings] [Method name] [Error details provided by UGW] NOTE: "*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only. 11

No. 1

Code

Error strings

2

0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode changed. 0500 0003 SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed.

3

0xxx 0003

4

0xxx 0003

5

84xx 0003

6

8600 0002 8600 0003 8600 0101 8600 0201 8600 0305 8600 0306 8600 0401 8600 0403 8600 0414 8600 0415 8700 0306 SRAM version unmatch!

7

8

Remedy Initialize the E-RDS setting (ERDS-DAT). Perform a communication test (COM-TEST).

Rebooting the device while the communication test had not been performed although E-RDS is enabled. Server schedule is Blank schedule data have Perform and complete a not exist been received from UGW. communication test (COMTEST). Communication test Communication test has not Perform and complete a is not performed completed. communication test (COMTEST). E-RDS switch is A communication test has Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS) setted OFF been attempted with the to 1, and then perform a E-RDS switch being OFF. communication test (COMTEST). Event Registration Processing (event processing) Turn the device OFF/ ON. is Failed within the device has failed. If the error persists, replace the device system software. (Upgrade)

8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS version unmatch!

2

Cause Unmatched Operation Mode

Improper value is written in at the head of the Main Controller PCB 2 SRAM domain of E-RDS. Improper value is written in at the head of the Main Controller PCB 2 SRAM domain of Ae-RDS.

Turn the device OFF/ ON.

Turn the device OFF/ ON.

Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings

Error strings

8xxx 0004 Operation is not supported 10 8xxx 0101 Server response error (NULL)

8xxx 0201 8xxx 0202 8xxx 0203 8xxx 0204 8xxx 0206

Cause

Method which E-RDS is not supporting attempted. Communication with UGW has been successful, but an error of some sort has prevented UGW from responding. When (Null) is displayed at the end of the message, this indicates that there has been an error in the HTTPS communication method. Server schedule is During the communication invalid test, there has been some kind of error in the schedule values passed from UGW.

Remedy Contact help desk Perform and complete a communication test (COMTEST).

When the error occurs, report the details to the support section. After the UGW side has responded, try the communication test again. 12 8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is The schedule data in the Perform a communication test 8xxx 0208 broken inside of E-RDS is not right. (COM-TEST). 13 8xxx 0221 Server specified list Alarm/Alert filtering error: The Alert filtering is not supported is too big number of elements of the list by UGW. specified by the server is over restriction value. 14 8xxx 0222 Server specified list Alarm filtering error: Unjust Alert filtering is not supported is wrong value is included in the by UGW. element of the list specified by the server. 15 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try The semaphore consumption Try again a communication test later error at the time of a after a period of time. communication test. 16 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact match TrackingID notified by Updater the support department of the differs from the thing of UGW sales company. designates. 17 8xxx 2000 Unknown error Some other kind of Perform and complete a communication error has communication test (COMoccurred. TEST). 18 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme The header of the URL of the Check that the value of URL of error(not https) registered UGW is not in https UGW (RGW-ADR) is https:// format. a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/ agentif010. 19 8xxx 2002 URL server A URL different to that Check that the value of URL of specified is illegal specified by the UGW has UGW (RGW-ADR) is https:// been set. a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/ agentif010.

2-205

2 No.

Code

Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings

Error strings

Cause

20 8xxx 2003 Network is not ready, try later

Communication attempted without confirming network connection, just after booting up a device in which the network preparations are not ready.

21 8xxx 2004 Server response error ([Hexadecimal]) [Error detailed in UGW]*1 22 8xxx 200A Server connection error

Communication with UGW has been successful, but an error of some sort has prevented UGW from responding.

23 8xxx 200B Server address resolution error

Server address name resolution has failed.

24 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection error

• TCP/IP communication fault • The IP address of device is not set.

2-206 Remedy

Check the network connection, as per the initial procedures described in the troubleshooting. Perform a communication test (COM-TEST) about 60 seconds later, after turn on the device. Try again after a period of time. Check detailed error code (Hexadecimal) and [Error details in UGW] from UGW displayed after the message. • Check the network connection, as per the initial procedures described in the troubleshooting. • When proxy is used, make the settings for proxy, and check the status of the proxy server. • Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ ugw/agentif010. • Check that Internet connection is available in the environment. Check proxy server address / port and re-enter as needed.

Could not connect to proxy server due to improper address. 25 8xxx 2015 Proxy address Could not connect to proxy • Check that the proxy resolution error server due to name resolution server name is correct. If error of proxy address. the proxy server name is correct, check the DNS connection, as per the initial procedures described in the troubleshooting. • Specify the IP address as the proxy server name. 26 8xxx 201E Proxy Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and authentication error password required in order to login to the proxy, and re-enter as needed.

No.

Code

Error strings

27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate error

28 8xxx 2029 Server certificate verify error

29 8xxx 2046 Server certificate expired

30 8xxx 2047 Server response time out

31 8xxx 2048 Service not found

2

• The route certificate registered with the device has expired. • Certificate other than that initially registered in the user’s operating environment is being used, but has not been registered with the device. • The device time and date is outside of the certificated period. Due to network congestion, etc., the response from UGW does not come within the specified time. (HTTPS level time out) There is a mistake in the UGW URL, and UGW cannot be accessed. (Path is wrong)

32 8xxx 2052 URL error

The data which is not URL is inputted into URL field.

33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error

SOAP Client fails to obtain SOAP Response. Possibility of a problem in UGW or of a temporary problem in the network load. SOAP communication error has occurred.

34 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault

Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings

Cause • No route certificate installed in device. • Certificate other than that initially registered in the user's operating environment is being used, but has not been registered with the device. • The date and time of the device is not correct. The server certificate verification error occurred.

Remedy • Install the latest device system software. (Upgrade) • Correctly set the date and time of the device. • Execute CLEAR > CAKEY, and turn OFF and then ON the device. (The CA certificate at the time of shipment is automatically installed.) Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-ADR) is https:// a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/ agentif010. Check that the device time and date are correctly set. If the device time and date are correct, upgrade to the latest system software.

If this error occurs when the communication test is being run or Service Browser is being set, try again after a period of time. Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-ADR) is https:// a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/ agentif010. Check that the value of URL of UGW (RGW-ADR) is https:// a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/ agentif010. Perform and complete a communication test (COMTEST).

Check that the value of port number of UGW (RGW-PORT) is 443.

2-206

2 No.

Code

Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings

Error strings

35 xxxx xxxx Device internal error

36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND: Initialize Failure!

Cause An internal error, such as memory unavailable, etc., has occurred during a device internal error phase. Internal error occurred at the initiating E-RDS.

2-207 Remedy

Turn the device OFF/ ON. Or replace the device system software. (Upgrade) Turn the device OFF/ ON. T-2-111

*1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW. [Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.

2

Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings

2-207

2

Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline

2-208

Updater

a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-Remote Update) If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting are registered on UGW in advance, full remote firmware update is available on an

Overview

imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device. Upon downloaded from CDS, the firmware is updated on the device.

■■Outline Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System (hereinafter CDS) or Local CDS to install firmware, MEAP applications and system options.

3) Give a firmware distribution command to e-ROS.

1) Set up customers, device types, distribution schedule and the command for download

UGW

Sales Company / Partner

UGW Operator

• Firmware Installation Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS or Local CDS via Internet. Particularly on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices,

2) Notify distribution information to CDS.

e-RDS

firmware can be updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services.

4) Download firmware

CDS

Updater

• MEAP Application/System Option Installation By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater, regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in

Firmware Upload

Firmware

Canon Inc.

imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is ADVANCE automatically started upon download completed. F-2-385

devices.

b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution / Update) If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule is registered on UGW in

●● Installing Firmware With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3 methods.

advance, firmware can be distributed to an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device before a service technician actually visits the customer site. This allows the service technician to update the firmware manually immediately after completing device inspection.

Distribution Method a. UGW-linked Download / Update (Full-remote update) b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution / Update) c. Manual Download / Update (On-site Update via Service mode) d. Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in*3) e. Update by the SST

Download Downloadable Firmware Versions Update Previous Current Newer Commanded Timing Ver Ver Ver by: UGW

Auto

No

Yes*1

Yes*2

UGW

Manual

Yes

Yes*1

Yes

Local UI

Auto Manual Auto

No Yes No

Yes*1 Yes*1 No

Yes*2 Yes Yes*2

iW EMC + DFU Plug-in *3 SST

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

*1: Do not execute distribution of updated module only. *2: Only the versions for which remote update is allowed can be selected. *3: Device Firmware Update Plug-in

Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline

UGW

1) Set up customers, device types, distribution schedule and the command for download

Sales Company / Partner

UGW Operator

2) Notify distribution information to CDS.

e-RDS

4) Download firmware Updater

T-2-112

2

3) Give a firmware distribution command to e-ROS.

imageRUNNER ADVANCE

Service Technician

CDS Firmware

Firmware Upload

Canon Inc.

5) Writing process is started by manually executing Updater. F-2-386

2-208

2

Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline

2-209

c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update via Service Mode)

e. SST update

If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device has connection with the external network,

In the cases of devices other than imageRUNNER ADVANCE series and devices of

a service technician can gain access to CDS via Service mode to download and update

imageRUNNER ADVANCE series that are not connected with external network, the foregoing

firmware. This allows service technicians to update the firmware as needed on the

three methods cannot be used to distribute firmware. Firmware released in the future will be

customer site even without PCs.

distributed via CDS instead of distribution using a master CD. In the field, these firmware can

1) Manually execute Updater. Updater

imageRUNNER ADVANCE

be downloaded from CDS using a PC web browser.

CDS Firmware

Firmware Upload

Canon Inc.

Updater function available machine CDS Firmware

Service 2) Firmware distribution Technician

1) Firmware Update Canon Inc.

Update function impossible machine F-2-387

NOTE: “External network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.

d. As preparation for distribution, obtain firmware from the update CDS using iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in) and register the firmware in the

2) Download firmware to PC 3) Update via SST

The service technician downloads the firmware from CDS in advance and executes update using SST.

Sales Company

Service Technician

F-2-389

local CDS. In service mode of the host machine, make preparations to allow reception of firmware distributed from the local CDS. The firmware can be updated on the user's intranet by executing the task from Device Firmware Update Plug-in on iW EMC.

NOTE: Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 4 methods by introducing CDS. See User Manual for detailed information. Download Distribution Method Commanded by

F-2-388

Manual download/ update via Local UI Manual download/ upload via Remote UI Special download/ upload via Remote UI Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plugin*3)

Local UI Remote UI

Update Timing Auto Manual Auto Manual

Remote UI

-

Firmware update process Plugin

Auto

Downloadable Firmware Versions Previous Ver Current Ver Newer Ver No No No No

No

No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No Yes *1 No Yes *1 Specific version only (Obtain it separately) No

Yes *1

*1: Only the latest version of Remote update-enabled version is downloadable.

2

Technology > Updater > Overview > Outline

2-209

2

Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option

2-210

Installing MEAP Application/System Option

LAN

The following is the installation method of MEAP application/system option which is enabled

LAN

Sales Company

LMS

by applying CDS. User

5) Manuals, etc.

a. LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or

LAN

service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application

2) License Authentication CDS

1) Enter LAN

or a system option.

3) Create LF

Manual Upload

Application

Installing MEAP Application LAN

User

4) Transmit LF LAN

Sales Company

5) Manuals, etc.

LAN

LMS If a customer enters LAN purchased from the sales company to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, a LF can be installed.

2) License Authentication CDS

1) Enter LAN

Canon Inc.

imageRUNNER ADVANCE

MEAP Application

LAN: License Access Number LF: License File (DSN: Device Serial Number, automatically sent to CDS upon LAN entered.) F-2-391

Manual Upload

3) Create LF

Application

imageRUNNER ADVANCE

4) Transmit MEAP Application/LF

If a customer enters LAN purchased from the sales company to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, MEAP application/LF can be installed.

Canon Inc.

LAN: License Access Number LF: License File (DSN: Device Serial Number, automatically sent to CDS upon LAN entered.) F-2-390

Installing System Option

2

Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option

2-210

2

Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions

■■System Configuration

2-211 ■■List of Functions

The figure below schematically shows the system configuration.

The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater. Category

CDS Dealer Manual Readme

License Access No.

LMS

Application/License

Updater

MEAP application Manual

Internet

User

Firmware

eRDS

Sales Company

CDS Application Firmware

Business Group

Firmware

UGW

Service Technician

Command for Firmware Distribution

QA

Canon Inc.

F-2-392

Local CDS

MEAP application/ system option

System Management Internal system error notification

Function Checking firmware compatibility Checking special firmware Checking latest firmware version Registering/deleting firmware distribution schedule Confirming and downloading firmware Updating downloaded firmware Cancelling downloaded firmware Acquiring firmware distribution information registered from UGW Notifying firmware version information Inquiring license for MEAP application/system option Installing MEAP application / system option Settings Testing communications Displaying update logs Displaying system logs Notifying internal system error occurrence to distribution server

Service Mode

User Mode

Remote UI

UGWlinked

Yes Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes T-2-113

F-2-393

2

Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > List of Functions

2-211

2

Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow

■■Distribution Flow

Local CDS Category

MEAP application/ system option

Internal system error notification

●● Firmware Installation Flow

Function

Firmware

System Management

2-212

Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods.

Checking latest firmware version Registering/deleting firmware distribution schedule Confirming and downloading firmware Updating downloaded firmware Inquiring license for MEAP application/system option Installing MEAP application / system option Settings Testing communications Displaying update logs Displaying system logs Notifying internal system error occurrence to distribution server xxxxx

a: UGW-linked download and update b: UGW-linked download c: Manual download and update d: Local CDS Download and Update (iW EMC + DFU Plug-in) e: Update via SST

: Operator of each company

T-2-114

: User operation

Firmware Market Release

a

Automatic update

e b c

Distribution Setting to UGW (UGW-linked)*1

Automatic download

d

Firmware acquisition

Register the firmware in the LCDS

Distribution setting & Download Via Service mode (Local UI)

Scheduled download

Distribution setting & Download Via User mode (Local UI)

Distribution setting & Download Via User mode (Remote UI)

Download via SST

Executing the task from Device Firmware Update

Apply (Update) Via Service mode (Local UI)

Scheduled update

Apply (Update) Via User mode (Local UI)

Apply (Update) Via User mode (Remote UI)

Update via SST

Automatic update

F-2-394

*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.

2

Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option > Distribution Flow

2-212

2

Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions

2-213

●● MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided. Be sure to use the user mode to install. : Operator of each company

: User operation

Limitations and Cautions ■■Limitations Changing Date/Time on Device When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as scheduled.

Application Market Release

But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.

License Access Number Acquisition (packaged with the product)

Change of Setting from Service mode Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device.

■■Cautions Device Serial No. Acquisition (from the device)

Concurrent use of Updater functions Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with Remote UI.

License Key Acquisition (from LMS)

License File Acquisition (from LMS)

Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions from Remote UI.

Install Via User mode (Local UI)

Install distributed application Via User mode (Remote UI)

System Option Install Via User mode (Local UI)

System Option Manual Install Via User mode (Remote UI)

MEAP Application Manual Install Via User mode (Remote UI) F-2-395

Using Updater function from Remote UI Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for certain duration. • When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of Remote Login Service via SMS • When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use Remote Login Service via SMS. • When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI] button. Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed. This is the Updater-specific specification.

2

Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions

2-213

2 Job/Function type COPY PRINT FAX I-FAX Receipt

Report Print SEND

Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions

2-214

Receiving

Printing

Queued print jobs

Sending

Queued send jobs

Wait for EOJ (end of job) Wait for EOJ Cancel processing to trigger update * -

Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ

-

-

Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ -

Wait for EOJ -

Cancel Cancel processing to processing to trigger update * trigger update * T-2-115

*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.

Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is completed. Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs, the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending on the execution modes). Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue. Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.

2

Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions

2-214

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Company’s HQ

2-215

Preparation

• For Install of Application

■■Overview of Preparation The following should be prepared before using Updater. • For updating of firmware

CDSUGW

CDS-FIRM

Enabling Setting [Update Sales Network Enabling Firmware] Company’s Settings UGW Link Button of User HQ Mode

LOCLFIRM

LCDSFLG

LMS-linked Installation LMA-linked installation via Local UI LMS-linked installation via Remote UI

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Enabling [Local CDS]

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

-

HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is

Market Canada Latin America Hong Kong

Default Setting of Sales Company's HQ US US/SG SG

Setting of Sales Company's HQ after Change CA LA HK T-2-118

Yes

Yes

When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.

Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)

Yes

Yes

Enabling [Install Application/ Options] Button of User Mode

■■Setting Sales Company’s HQ

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

CDS-CTL

UGW-linked Download and Update UGW-linked Download Manual Download and Update Manual Download and Update via Local UI Manual Download and Update via Remote UI Special Download and Update via Remote UI Scheduled update via Local CDS

Network Settings

T-2-117

COPIER > FUNCTION Service Mode > INSTALL

Installation Method

Installation Method

Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ. Service Technician

Setting of Device Service Mode (Level 1)

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL

NOTE: The list below shows the setting of Sales Company’s HQ for CDS-CTS by market. Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.

-

Japan = JP USA = US Singapore = SG Europe = NL Korea = KR

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

-

-

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

-

Yes

China = CN Hong Kong = HK Australia = AU Canada = CA Latin America= LA

T-2-116

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Setting Sales Company’s HQ

2-215

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings

2-216

■■Network Settings

[COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ] CDS-FIRM

●● Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.

LCDSFLG

NOTE:

• Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required. "Enabling UGW Link" "Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode" "Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode" • “External Network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.

CDS-UGW

CDS Local CDS 1 1

To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user (administrator). When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater can be activated from the user mode. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Whether to display or hide the screen for setting the server to be 0 connected 0: Hide 1: Display To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server. 1 When "1: Enabled" is set, Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with CDS. 0 to 1 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1

0

T-2-119

●● Connection to the local CDS When updating firmware using iW EMC + Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in), start service mode and enable the following setting. [COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-FIRM]

●● Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

[COPIER ] > [ OPTION ] > [ FNC-SW ] > [ LCDSFLG]

2. Press [Updater] button.

Then, disable the following setting. [COPIER] > [OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CDS-UGW]

F-2-396 F-2-397

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings

2-216

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings

2-217

3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

5.

Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside

the [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one. Delivery Server CDS

F-2-398

4. Press [Settings] button.

F-2-400

Delivery Server Local CDS

F-2-399

F-2-401

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings

2-217

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings

2-218 3.

Note:

Press [Software Management Settings] button.

• For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port number. • To display the button of the local CDS, execute Settings/Registration > Management Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service mode.

6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set.

●● Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server.

Note: CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS.

F-2-403

4. Press [Test Communication] button.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button.

F-2-404

F-2-402

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Network Settings

2-218

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link

2-219 ■■Enabling UGW Link

5. Press [Yes] button.

When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGWlinked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.

Service Technician

Setting of Device Service Mode (Level 1) Setting of UGW WebPortal

COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW (0 -> 1)

In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware]. See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution Setting of Authorities on Sales Company's HQ Information" to grant the appropriate authorities UGW WebPortal to each account.

NOTE: F-2-405

Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to execute the communication test to the distribution server). Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).

• See “imageWARE Remote Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation Manual“ for how to operate UGW WebPortal. • [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen. • If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not be set to each account in Firmware Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.

6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-406

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link

2-219

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode

■■Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode

2-220

■■Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode

To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be

To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation

set to ON for users in advance.

should be set to ON for users in advance.

Service Technician

Setting of Device Service Mode (Level 1)

Service Technician

COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM (0 -> 1)

• User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)):

• User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)):

F-2-409

F-2-407

• User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)):

• User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-MEAP(1)):

F-2-408

2

Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP (Level 1) (0 -> 1)

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode

F-2-410

2-220

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode

■■Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI) To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance. Service Technician

2-221 ■■Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode Service Technician

Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-LVUP (Level 1) (0 -> 1)

Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM (Level 1) (0 -> 1)

• Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):

F-2-411

• Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (LOCLFIRM (1)): F-2-413

F-2-412

Note: In order to use manual update of the remote UI, firmware for manual update is required. Since firmware update is not supposed to be done by users at this point, we have no plan to provide dedicated firmware. Just in case it becomes necessary to support such update on the host machine side, the default value of LOCLFIRM in service mode is set to "1". On the RUI, the setting of manual update can be made in the following location. RUI > Settings/Registration > License/Other > Register/Update Software > Update Firmware > Manual Update

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode

F-2-414

2-221

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode

2-222

F-2-415

F-2-416

2

Technology > Updater > Preparation > Enabling [Scheduled Update] Button of User Mode

2-222

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting

System Management Operations

2-223 4. Press [Settings] button.

■■Various Setting ●● Setting URL of Distribution Server This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-418

5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL. • [Delivery Server URL]: Enter the "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif"

F-2-417

F-2-419

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting

2-223

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting

2-224 ●● Setting Log Level

• [Delivery Server Local CDS]

This section describes how to set system log levels. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-420

Note:

• For the URL of the L-CDS server, enter the address beginning with "htts://" specified in L-CDS. If the port number has not been specified, 443 is internally added as the port number. • To display the button of the local CDS, execute Settings/Registration > Management Settings > License/Other > Register/Update Software. It is not displayed in service mode. • The URL setting of the local CDS server can be made through the following 2 methods: - Manual input on this screen - Distribute the setting information from Device Firmware Update Plug-in (DFU Plug-in), and remotely make the setting.

F-2-421

4. Press [Settings] button.

6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set.

F-2-422

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Various Setting

2-224

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs

2-225 ■■Displaying Logs

5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list.

●● Update Logs This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

F-2-423

• [Log Level]:

2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4]. See the table below for logs output in each level. Log Level

Trace

Information

Yes

Yes Yes

0 1 2 3 4

Log Output Important Message Ordinary Error Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

System Error Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes T-2-120

NOTE: This list shows the contents of the Log Output. Log Output Trace Information Important Message

Ordinary Error System Error

Description Detailed logs for debug Logs related to operations done on the system Update logs output by firmware type Installation logs by MEAP application Logs related to enabled functions by system option Logs for ordinary errors Logs for internal system errors

F-2-424

6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs

2-225

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs

4. Press [Select Log Display] button.

2-226 6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-425

5. Press [Display Update Logs] button.

F-2-427

F-2-426

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs

2-226

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs

●● System Logs

2-227 5. Press [Display System Logs] button.

This section describes how to confirm System Logs. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-430

6. Updater internal logs are displayed. Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-428

4. Press [Select Log Display] button.

F-2-431

F-2-429

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs

2-227

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Communication Test

NOTE: See the section of "Debug Logs" under “Version Upgrade via CDS”, “Version Upgrade” of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual for more detailed information.

2-228 ■■Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-2-432

4.

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Communication Test

Press [Test Communication] button.

2-228

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Communication Test

2-229 6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-2-433

F-2-435

5. Press [Yes] button. Caution: Carry out the communication test with both Embedded RDS and CDS.

F-2-434

Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to execute the communication test to the distribution server). Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).

2

Technology > Updater > System Management Operations > Communication Test

2-229

2

Technology > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices

Maintenance ■■Upgrading Updater The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See the section of “Version upgrade” , Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual for how to update firmware. The setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are inherited in the upgraded version.

2-230 ■■How to Replace Controller Boards The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced. • Main Controller Board PCB 1 No steps follow. • Main Controller Board PCB 2 (including SRAM) The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See "Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.

■■Formatting Hard Disk Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP Service Manual for further information.

■■How to Replace Devices All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.

The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored. See "Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.

NOTE: When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.

2

Technology > Updater > Maintenance > How to Replace Devices

2-230

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware

2-231

FAQ

No.4 Q: In the course of “UGW-linked download”, what will happen if the user downloads the

■■FAQ on Installing Firmware

firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with “UGW-linked download” before?

No.1

A: The previously downloaded firmware in the method of “UGW-linked download” will be

Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS?

overridden by the subsequently downloaded one.

A: Firmware can be downgraded in some methods shown in the table below.

This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.

If download and update are performed consecutively, firmware can’t be downgraded. Distribution Method

The firmware downloaded in the method of “Service mode-linked download” and “UGWlinked download” can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it

Downgrade Possibility

UGW-linked Download and Update UGW-linked Download Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual) Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic)

cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service technician.

No Yes Yes No

No.5 Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution T-2-121

schedule has been set in “manual download and update”? A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing

No.2 Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in “manual download and update” compared to “update via SST”? A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware.

schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made valid.

When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in “manual download and update” compared to “update via SST” (It depend on network environment.).

No.6

As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, “manual download and update”

Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?

takes less time compared to “update via SST” because updating the firmware to multiple

A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by

devices can be executed simultaneously.

service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the ID and password separately.

No.3 Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after “UGW-linked download and update” done? A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen. E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as

No.7 Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older firmware version? A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service

destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion.

technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See "Troubleshooting on

On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find

Firmware Installation" in chapter 6 of this manual for details.

the distribution status per device as shown in the search result. No.8 Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware again? A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail. The user should register the firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on Installing Firmware

2-231

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment

2-232 ■■FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment

No.9 Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?

●● FAQ on the Number of Devices That Can Be Managed

A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown.

Q: How many devices can be managed by 1 set of DFU Plug-in + Local CSD? A: Up to 1000 devices can be registered. However, only up to 5 updaters can access the local CSD at a time.

●● FAQ on Firmware Distribution Task Q: If the version of the firmware on the local CDS is the same with or older than the firmware on the device, what will occur when firmware update is performed? (Will an error occur because firmware to be distributed does not exist?) A: The firmware will not be updated, and the result will be "normally completed".

●● FAQ on Firmware Update Process Q: Won't timer shutdown occur during a firmware update process? A: Updater deactivates the timer shutdown function at the start of a firmware update process. Therefore shutdown will not occur during update. F-2-436

No.10 Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive such a notification? A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting. Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with “,” (comma) or “;” (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.

●● Operation during Firmware Update Q: Can the following operations be performed during device firmware update? • Automatic timer shutdown • Shutdown from the local UI • Reboot from the remote UI • Switching between authentication applications from SMS A: Updater deactivates the following functions during device firmware update. • Timer shutdown • Shutdown from the local UI

No.11 Q: How long does the firmware update take? A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies

• Reboot from the remote UI • Access to SMS

on the network environment.

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on the Local CDS Operation Environment

2-232

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater

2-233

■■FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option

■■FAQ on General Matters of Updater

No.1

No.1

Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free

Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method?

space?

A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.

A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the

• For updating firmware

required space against free space to judge installation availability. No.2 Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application? A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown.

COPIER > FUNCTION Service Mode > INSTALL

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW CDSUGW

CDS-CTL No.3 Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled? A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually.

Installation Method

UGW-linked Download and Update UGW-linked Download Manual Download and Update Manual Download and Update via Local UI Manual Download and Update via Remote UI Special Download and Update via Remote UI Scheduled update via Local CDS

CDS-FIRM

Enabling Setting [Update Sales Network Enabling Firmware] Company’s Settings UGW Link Button of User HQ Mode

LOCLFIRM

LCDSFLG

Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)

Enabling [Local CDS]

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

-

-

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

-

Yes T-2-122

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater

2-233

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater

2-234

• For install Application Installation Method

Network Settings

Enabling [Install Application/ Options] Button of User Mode

LMS-linked Installation LMA-linked installation via Local UI LMS-linked installation via Remote UI

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes T-2-123

No.2 Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side? A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode. • Masking Firmware Installation Setting Device Service Mode (Level 1) Setting Device Service Mode (Level 1)

COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM (1 -> 0) COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM (1 -> 0)

• Masking Application Installation Setting Device Service Mode (Level 1)

COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP (1 -> 0)

No.3 Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test? A: Yes. During the communication test, “Cancel” button is displayed.

2

Technology > Updater > FAQ > FAQ on General Matters of Updater

2-234

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > General limitations on DCM

DCM

2-235 ■■General limitations on DCM • With DCM, stored data, MEAP application, and system option license cannot be migrated.

Overview DCM (Device Configuration Management) is a function to migrate the setting values (of user mode and service mode). In terms of the description in the User’s Guide, it is synonymous with "Import/Export All". Service mode setting values can be backed up/restored from the top screen of service mode. By the conventional method for backing up SRAM of the Main Controller 2, data could be backed up/restored only for the same machine. DCM supports the following 3 patterns. • The same machine (backup for the purpose of providing against emergency) • A different machine of the same model (setting values are migrated collectively to multiple machines when replacing a host machine) • A different model (e.g.: the setting values are copied from an old model to a new model) Where data is stored Store the backup data in the following location. • User > PC (RUI) • Service > USB memory device/HDD of the machine (top screen of service mode) Setting values that can be backed up The values changed by the user under [Settings/Registration] and those specified in service

• A .dcm file exported to the internal HDD is not deleted even when the machine is restarted. Only 2 files at a maximum are stored in HDD. When there are more than 2 files, the old .dcm files are deleted from the oldest. • Continuous import is not guaranteed. After importing a file, the machine must be restarted. If executing import without restart, NG is displayed and a file is not imported. • When importing DCM file in service mode and user mode separately, perform it in the following procedures. 1) Perform the import of the DCM data of the service mode earlier. 2) Reboot the Host machine. 3) Import the DCM data of the user mode. • As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it ends, but the final result becomes ERROR. • Data to which no password is set when exporting service mode cannot be loaded from collective import from RUI. When assuming to perform collective import from RUI, password must be set to data to be exported. • Following limitations are applied to password for DCM data: • Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters • No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set is allowed only for service mode.)

mode can be backed up.

• No space is allowed in the middle of a password.

Only setting values are backed up. Image data such as scanned image cannot be backed up.

• Password is case sensitive.

• [Settings/Registration] value that a user set. • Service mode setting values

• At the time of following setting, Host matchine does not recognize USB memory.The DCM function is not usable, too. • Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device = On

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > General limitations on DCM

2-235

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/Export All from Remote UI

■■Restrictions about import/export • An import/export process ends with error while the following specific job is executed;

2-236 ■■Import/Export All from Remote UI The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case

• Send job,

• Settings/Registration Basic Information

• Forwarding job,

• Box Settings

• FAX reception job,

• Department ID Management Settings

• IFAX reception job

• Main Menu Settings

• Print report job

• Favorite Settings

• If this function is executed with a print job simultaneously, it affects the operation such as; UI is locked, or a print job is cleared by reboot after import. So it requires careful operation.

• Address Book • Forwarding Settings

• A device rejects an import/ export request during shut-down.

• Quick Menu Settings

• If this function is executed with device information distribution or RUI import/ export

• MEAP Application Setting Information

(conventional function) simultaneously, the first coming job takes priority and they are

• Paper Type Management Settings

controlled exclusively.

• User Access Control for Advanced Space

• If this function is executed with a firmware update by a CDS Updater simultaneously, a

• Web Access Settings

firmware update process takes priority, and this function is stopped temporarily by reboot. • When error code is issued, this function ends with error. • If the display language differs between export and import, a setting value of a text corrupts in some cases. The character corruption can be solved by changing the display language to the appropriate one.

F-2-437

Note: Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the setting in the following service mode. Service mode L1 > Copier > Option > USER > SMD-EXPT [0]: Hide the service mode settings. (Def.) [1]: Display the service mode settings.

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/Export All from Remote UI

2-236

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Setting/Registrations

2-237 ■■Setting/Registrations

●● Collective Import Using Data Collectively Exported from RUI For the reason of security, it is not appropriate that the user mode can be exported from service mode without user's permission. Because of that, it cannot be exported due to the specification However, it is possible to import the setting values of user mode exported from RUI.

Preparation PC and web browser USB memory device to store the data of reference machine

Overall flow 1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine. 2. Export the data of reference machine including service mode from RUI. 3. Copy the data to the root of the USB memory device using a PC. 4. Connect the USB memory device to the copy destination machine. 5. Execute import by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode.

■■List of items which can be imported The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below. Compatibility level (Lv)

Description

0

Not supported.

1

Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only. Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.

2

Can import to a device of a same model.

3

Can import to a device of a different model also. T-2-124

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Setting/Registrations

Setting Information Preferences Paper Settings

Paper Settings*1 A5R/STMTR Paper Selection B5/EXEC Paper Selection Paper Type Management Settings Register Custom Size Display Settings Default Screen after Startup/Restoration Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel) Copy Screen Display Settings Display Fax Function Store Location Display Settings Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off Language/Keyboard Switch Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature Display Remaining Paper Message No. of Copies/Job Duration Status Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area Paper Type Selection Screen Priority mm/Inch Entry Switch ID/User Name Display On/Off Timer/Energy Date/Time Settings Time Format Settings Quick Startup Settings for Main Power Auto Reset Time Restrict Auto Reset Time Function After Auto Reset Auto Sleep Time Sleep Mode Energy Use Auto Sleep Weekly Timer Energy Saver/Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings Network Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes TCP/IP Settings IPv4 Settings Use IPv4 IP Address Settings • IP Address • Subnet Mask • Gateway Address • DHCP • RARP • BOOTP DHCP Option Settings IPv6 Settings Use IPv6 Stateless Address Settings Manual Address Settings Use DHCPv6 DNS Settings DNS Server Address Settings DNS Host/Domain Name Settings DNS Dynamic Update Settings WINS Settings LPD Print Settings RAW Print Settings SNTP Settings FTP Print Settings

Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-237

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Setting/Registrations

Setting Information Preferences Network

Function Settings

2-238 Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3

WSD Settings Yes Yes Use FTP PASV Mode Yes Yes Multicast Discovery Settings Yes Yes Use HTTP Yes Yes Use WebDAV Server Yes Yes Proxy Settings Yes Yes NetWare Settings Yes Yes AppleTalk Settings Yes No SMB Server Settings Yes No SNMP Settings Yes Yes Dedicated Port Settings Yes Yes Use Spool Function Yes Yes Startup Settings Yes Yes Ethernet Driver Settings Yes Yes Firewall Settings Yes Yes External Interface USB Settings Yes Yes Accessibility Key Repetition Settings Yes Yes Reversed Display (Color) Yes Yes Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust Image Correct Density Yes Yes Fine Adjust Zoom Yes No Quality Common Paper Feed Settings Feed Method Switch Yes Yes Suspended Job Timeout Yes Yes Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings*2 Yes No Offset Jobs Yes Yes Job Separator Between Jobs Yes Yes Job Separator Between Copies Yes Yes Different Paper Sizes for Output Tray Yes No Print Settings Print Priority Yes Yes Output Report Default Settings Yes Yes Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Yes Yes Copy Set Numbering Option Settings Yes Yes Secure Forced Secure Watermark/Doc. Yes Yes Watermark/ Scan Lock Document Scan Printer Driver Watermark/Doc. Yes Yes Scan Lock Lock Adjust Background/Character Contrast • Relative Contrast Yes No • Standard Value Set. Yes No • Latent Area Density Yes No Adjust TL Code • Dot Size Yes No • Dot Density Yes Yes QR Code Print Position Yes Yes Scan Settings Feeder Jam Recovery Method Yes Yes LTRR/STMT Original Selection Yes Yes Remote Scan Gamma Value Yes Yes Auto Online Yes Yes Auto Offline Yes Yes

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Setting/Registrations

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes

Setting Information Function Settings

Common

Copy

Send

Generate File High Compression Image Quality Level OCR (Text Searchable) Settings Trace & Smooth Settings OOXML Settings Specify Minimum PDF Version Format PDF to PDF/A Optimize PDF for Web 256Nobit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Rights Management Server Settings Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Set Authentication Method Auto Collate Auto Orientation Photo Printout Mode Cascade Copy Communication Timeout Common Settings E-Mail/I-Fax Settings Register Unit Name Communication SMTP RX POP Settings SMTP Server E-Mail Address POP Server POP Login Name POP Password POP Interval Authent./Encryption Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX Maximum Data Size for Sending Default Subject Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail Full Mode TX Timeout Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt Use Send via Server Allow MDN Not via Server Restrict TX Destination Domain Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail Addresses Fax Settings Register Favorite Settings Edit Favorite Settings Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings Default Screen Change Default Settings Register Options Shortcuts Register Sender Name (TTI) Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name ECM TX Set Pause Time Auto Redial Communication Mode Check Dial Tone Before Sending

Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-238

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Setting/Registrations

Setting Information Function Settings

Send

Fax TX Report Fax Activity Report Set Line Line 1 to Line 4 Register Unit Telephone Number Register Unit Name Select Line Type Edit Line Name for Select Line Screen Default Address List When Selecting Line Select TX Line TX Start Speed PIN Code Access Confirm Entered Fax Number Allow Fax Driver TX Remote Fax TX Settings Remote Fax Settings Receive/Forward Common Settings Fax Settings Store/Access Common Scan and Store Settings Access Stored Files Settings Files Settings Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits/ Restrict Access Mail Box Settings Advanced Box Settings Network Settings Memory Media Settings Secure Print Simple Authentication Settings Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs Set Change Default Display of Address Book Destination Address Book PIN Manage Address Book Access Numbers Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book Register LDAP Server Auto Search When Using LDAP Server Change Default LDAP Search Conditions Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions Acquire Remote Acquire Address Book Remote Address Book Server Address Address Book Communication Timeout Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment Make Remote Make Address Book Open Add. Book Open

2-239 Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes No

Yes Yes Yes No

Yes Yes Yes

No Yes Yes

No Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Setting Information Management Device Settings Management

License/Other

Device Information Settings Yes Device Register Destinations Yes Set MEAP Authentication Yes Information Set Auto Delivery Yes Delivery R e s t r i c t R e c e i v i n g D e v i c e Yes Settings Information Restrict Receiving for Each Yes Function Use MEAP Auth. When Receive Yes Report Settings Yes Display Job Status Before Yes Authentication Display Log Yes Audit Log Retrieval Yes Store Key Operation Log Yes Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2 Yes Message Board/Support Link Yes Remote Operation Settings Yes Back Up/Restore Settings Yes HDD Data Complete Deletion Yes

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No Yes No Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No Yes Yes No

Yes

Yes

Yes *4

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes *5

Yes *5

Yes

Yes

No

Data Management Box Settings Function Settings Receive/Forward Common Settings Store/Access Mail Box Settings Files Department Management Settings User System Manager Information Settings ID Department ID Register PIN Management Management Management Settings Main Menu Main Menu Settings Setting File Settings Favorite Function Settings Register/Edit Favorite Settings Settings*3, Copy Change Default Settings Register Options Shortcuts (Regular Copy) Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy) Send Common Settings Fax Settings Store/Access Common Settings Files Scan and Store Advanced Box Custom (Scan Size) (Scan) Address Set Destination Register Destinations Book Rename Address List Register One-Touch Forwarding Function Settings Receive/Forward Common Settings Settings Quick Menu Quick Menu Settings Button File Settings

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Setting/Registrations

Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3

2-239

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Setting Information MEAP Application Setting Information

Workflow Composer Flow Data File Operation Setting File MEAP User Setting Information Data MEAP Application Setting Information Data Paper Type Preferences Management Paper Settings Paper Type Management Settings Settings User Access User Access Control for Advanced Space Control for User List Advanced Integrated Authentication Settings Authentication/Operation Log Management Space Web Access Web Access Settings*7 Favorites Settings Settings

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes *6

Yes *6

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes T-2-125

*1 Custom Size setting is not imported. *2 If the number of the output tray of the machine for exporting is different from that of the destination machine for importing, the priority orders of the output destinations may not correspond. In this case, paper is output according to the priority order specified on the machine for importing. *3 [Previous Settings] is not imported. *4 Only [Photo Printout Mode] is imported. *5 If you specify the address in the Remote Address Book as the forwarding destination, the forwarding settings will not be imported. However, if the machine, which exports setting information, and the target machine for importing use the same Remote Address Book, the forwarding settings can be used in the target machine for importing. *6 In case B or C, only , <Weight>, , , , and are imported when importing paper information. In case A, all paper information is imported. *7 If favorites are registered as the shortcut buttons or [Default Screen after Startup/ Restoration] settings in the target machine for importing, the registered information is changed when importing the setting information of Web Access settings.

2

■■Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Lev.1 Lev.2 Lev.3 Yes Yes

2-240 The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.

Compatibility level (Lv)

Description

0

Not supported.

1

Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only. Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.

2

Can import to a device of a same model.

3

Can import to a device of a different model also. T-2-126

●● Service Mode Initial screen COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST

Middle ADJ-XY ADJ-XY ADJ-XY ADJ-XY ADJ-XY ADJ-XY AE BLANK BLANK CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD

Small ADJ-X ADJ-Y ADJ-S ADJ-Y-DF STRD-POS ADJ-X-MG AE-TBL BLANK-T BLANK-B W-PLT-X W-PLT-Y W-PLT-Z SH-TRGT 50-RG 50-GB 100-RG 100-GB 50DF-RG 50DF-GB 100DF-RG 100DF-GB DFTAR-R DFTAR-G DFTAR-B CCD-CHNG DFTAR-K MTF3-M1 MTF3-M2 MTF3-M3 MTF3-M4

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes -

Lev3 -

2-240

2 Initial screen COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST

2

Middle CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD

Small MTF3-M5 MTF3-M6 MTF3-M7 MTF3-M8 MTF3-M9 MTF3-M10 MTF3-M11 MTF3-M12 MTF3-S1 MTF3-S2 MTF3-S3 MTF3-S4 MTF3-S5 MTF3-S6 MTF3-S7 MTF3-S8 MTF3-S9 MTF3-S10 MTF3-S11 MTF3-S12 MTF4-M1 MTF4-M2 MTF4-M3 MTF4-M4 MTF4-M5 MTF4-M6 MTF4-M7 MTF4-M8 MTF4-M9 MTF4-M10 MTF4-M11 MTF4-M12 MTF4-S1 MTF4-S2 MTF4-S3 MTF4-S4 MTF4-S5 MTF4-S6 MTF4-S7 MTF4-S8 MTF4-S9 MTF4-S10 MTF4-S11 MTF4-S12 100-GB-2

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 -

Lev3 -

2-241 Initial screen

COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST

Middle CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD CST-ADJ CST-ADJ CST-ADJ DENS DEVELOP FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FEED-ADJ FIXING FIXING FIXING FIXING FIXING HV-PRI HV-PRI HV-TR HV-TR HV-TR HV-TR LASER LASER LASER LASER LASER LASER LASER LASER LASER MISC MISC

Small 100-GB-3 100-RG-2 100-RG-3 50-GB-2 50-GB-3 50-RG-2 50-RG-3 MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4 DENS-ADJ DE-OFST REGIST LOOP-CST LOOP-MF ADJ-REFE LOOPREFE RG-HF-SP ADJ-RE-L LOOP-THK LOOP-SP LOOP-ENV ADJ-PTMG FX-FL-SP FX-FL-TH FX-FL-LW FN-MV-SW ADJ-FNSH OFST1-DC OFST1-AC TR-OFST TR-SPP TR-TP-TM TR-TP-LV PVE-OFST LA-OFF POWER LDADJ1-K LDADJ2-K LDADJ3-K LDADJ4-K LDADJ5-K LDADJ6-K SEG-ADJ K-ADJ

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 -

Lev3 -

2-241

2 Initial screen COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

2

Middle MISC MISC MISC MISC MISC MISC MISC MISC MISC MISC MISC PASCAL INSTALL INSTALL INSTALL INSTALL INSTALL ACC ACC ACC ACC ACC ACC ACC ACC ACC ACC ACC CLEANING CUSTOM CUSTOM CUSTOM CUSTOM CUSTOM CUSTOM DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW

Small ACS-ADJ ACS-EN ACS-CNT C1-ADJ-Y C2-ADJ-Y C3-ADJ-Y C4-ADJ-Y MF-ADJ-Y DK-ADJ-Y ACS-EN2 ACS-CNT2 OFST-P-K E-RDS RGW-PORT RGW-ADR CDS-CTL BIT-SVC COIN DK-P CARD-SW CC-SPSW UNIT-PRC IN-TRAY MIN-PRC MAX-PRC MIC-TUN PDL-THR CR-TYPE FX-CN-SW SC-L-CNT MAILYEAR ABK-TOOL FLK-RD TMP-TBL TIFFJPEG UI-COPY UI-BOX UI-SEND UI-FAX NWERR-SW ANIM-SW UI-PRINT UI-RSCAN UI-EPRNT UI-WEB

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-242 Initial screen

COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

Middle DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW DSPLY-SW ENV-SET ENV-SET ENV-SET ENV-SET FEED-SW FEED-SW FEED-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW

Small RMT-CNSL UI-SBOX UI-MEM UI-NAVI UI-CUSTM SCT-BTN USER-DSP SDTM-DSP WT-WARN SCPL-DSP PCMP-DSP ENVP-INT IMG-BLD1 IMG-BLD2 IMG-BLD3 TFL-RTC SP-SW PK-SP-SW MODEL-SZ SCANSLCT SENS-CNF CONFIG W/SCNR FAN-EXTN ORG-LGL ORG-LTR ORG-LTRR ORG-LDR ORG-B5 MODELSZ2 SVMD-ENT KSIZE-SW ORG-B4 PDF-RDCT REBOOTSW SJB-UNW WEBV-SW CARD-RNG SJOB-CL USB-RCNT MIBCOUNT ILSZ-JAM W/RAID PSWD-SW SM-PSWD

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-242

2 Initial screen COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

2

Middle FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW FNC-SW IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-FIX

Small RPT2SIDE INVALPDL CDS-FIRM CDS-MEAP CDS-UGW LOCLFIRM BXNUPLOG SDLMTWRN JLK-PWSC FAX-INT CDS-LVUP WTM-DENS UA-OFFSW MIB-NVTA MIB-EXT SVC-RUI LCDSFLG STNDBY-A BXSHIFT NO-LGOUT T-DLV-BK JM-ERR-D JM-ERR-R ASLPMAX B4-USE FIX-CLN FIX-TEMP TEMP-CON TEMPCON2 FIX-LOW FX-S-TMP TMP-TBL2 TMP-TBL4 TMP-TBL5 TMP-TBL6 TMP-TBL7 RAG-CONT FIX-PROT FIX-OFST EDG-WAIT TMP-TBLC FIX-PR TMP-TB12 TMP-TB13 TMP-TB14

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -

2-243 Initial screen

COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

Middle IMG-FIX IMG-FIX IMG-LSR IMG-LSR IMG-MCON IMG-MCON IMG-MCON IMG-MCON IMG-MCON IMG-RDR IMG-RDR IMG-SPD IMG-SPD IMG-SPD IMG-SPD IMG-SPD IMG-TR IMG-TR IMG-TR IMG-TR NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK

Small TMP-TB15 TMP-TB16 COTDPC-D SC-PR-SW PASCAL SHARP VP-ART VP-TXT LIN-OFST DFDST-L1 DFDST-L2 CPMKP-SW PSP-PR1 PSP-PR2 PSP-PR3 PSP-PR4 HUM-SW TRANS-SW TROPT-SW TR-BS-SW RAW-DATA IFAX-LIM SMTPTXPN SMTPRXPN POP3PN FTPTXPN NW-SPEED STS-PORT CMD-PORT NS-CMD5 NS-GSAPI NS-NTLM NS-PLNWS NS-PLN NS-LGN MEAP-PN CHNG-STS CHNG-CMD MEAP-SSL LPD-PORT WUEV-SW WUEV-INT WUEV-POT WUEV-RTR WUEN-LIV

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-243

2 Initial screen COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

2

Middle NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST

Small IFX-CHIG DNSTRANS PROXYRES WOLTRANS 802XTOUT IKERETRY NCONF-SW IKEINTVL IPSDEBLV SP-LINK LM-LEVEL AFS-JOB AFC-EVNT ILOGMODE ILOGKEEP IPTBROAD PFWFTPRT IPMTU DDNSINTV SIPAUDIO SIPINOUT SIPREGPR PRCLTYPE VLAN-SW VLAN-PKT SSLMODE SSLSTRNG RAWTOUT RAW-PORT SSL30 U1-NAME U2-NAME U3-NAME U4-NAME ENV1 ENV2 CST1-P1 CST1-P2 CST2-P1 CST2-P2 CST3-P1 CST3-P2 CST4-P1 CST4-P2 CST1-U1

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -

2-244 Initial screen

COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

Middle CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST CST INT-FACE INT-FACE USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER

Small CST1-U2 CST1-U3 CST1-U4 CST2-U1 CST2-U2 CST2-U3 CST2-U4 CST3-U1 CST3-U2 CST3-U3 CST3-U4 CST4-U1 CST4-U2 CST4-U3 CST4-U4 IMG-CONT NWCT-TM COPY-LIM SLEEP SIZE-DET COUNTER2 COUNTER3 COUNTER4 COUNTER5 COUNTER6 DATE-DSP MB-CCV CONTROL B4-L-CNT TRY-STP MF-LG-ST CNT-DISP PH-D-SEL COPY-JOB OP-SZ-DT NW-SCAN HDCR-DSP JOB-INVL PR-PSESW IDPRN-SW PCL-COPY CNT-SW BCNT-AST PRJOB-CP DOC-REM

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-244

2 Initial screen COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

2

Middle USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER USER

Small DPT-ID-7 RUI-RJT FREG-SW IFAX-SZL IFAX-PGD MEAPSAFE AFN-PSWD PTJAM-RC PDL-NCSW SLP-SLCT PS-MODE CNCT-RLZ LDAP-SW FROM-OF DOM-ADD FILE-OF MAIL-OF IFAX-OF LDAP-DEF FREE-DSP TNRB-SW CLR-TIM HDCR-DSW SCALL-SW SCALLCMP USBH-DSP USBM-DSP USBI-DSP CTCHKDSP DFLT-ADJ USBR-DSP POL-SCAN PH-D-SL2 JA-SBOX JA-DFAX JA-REP JA-FREP JA-BOX JA-FORM JA-PREV JA-PULL JA-PDLB JA-JOBK JA-RUI JA-WEB

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-245 Initial screen

COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER COPIER FEEDER FEEDER FEEDER FEEDER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST OPTION ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST

Middle USER USER USER USER USER USER USER

Small EXP-CRYP SLEEP1SW CNCL-ATH SNDSTREN FAXSTREN SJ-UNMSK SJ-CLMSK DOCST LA-SPEED DOC-LNGH SIZE-SW PNCH-Y CLCT-SB STP-F1 STP-F2 STP-R1 STP-R2 STP-2P PNCH-X SDL-STP SDL-ALG ST-ALG1 SW-UP-RL PUN-V-RG PRCS-RET UP-CL DW-CL THC-CL THC-PUSH OFST-STC THN-STC STP-P-CH TRY-NIS TRY-SU FIN-NIS 1SHT-SHF SDL-SWCH SDL-ALM SFT-AMT1 SFT-AMT2 STP-NTN INSTP-F1 INSTP-R1 THN-STCL DSTP-F1

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -

Lev3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -

2-245

2 Initial screen SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER SORTER

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

Large OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION

Middle

Small BLNK-SW MD-SPRTN BUFF-SW PRCS-SP1 FDPL-SL STCR-DWN BUFF-INT PRCS-SP3 NSRT-STC THN-TRSW

Lev1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lev2 -

Lev3 -

2-246 ■■Import/export by service mode (external) The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting values in service mode. With export by which data is collected from the machine, service mode setting values can be backed up. With import, data backed up from service mode and that backed up from remote UI can be restored. The save destination of backup data can be selected from either a USB memory device or HDD of the machine.

T-2-127

●● Export Preparation • USB memory device * Required when exporting to an external USB memory device. It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is necessary.

Overall flow Select the save destination between the internal HDD or external USB memory device depending on the use case.

Procedure 1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1) 2. Register password 3. Export to external USB memory device 4. Remove USB memory device

Exporting data to an external USB memory device 1. Connect the USB memory device and check that it has been mounted. (When using the external USB memory device)

F-2-438

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2-246

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP.

2-247 5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed.

F-2-439

3. Select LIST after the screen moves to . F-2-442

6. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

Click here

F-2-440

4. When saving to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.

F-2-443

Note: Limitations regarding the DCM data password

• Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters • No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set is allowed only for service mode.) • No space is allowed in the middle of a password. • Password is case sensitive.

Limitations regarding the DCM data no password

• The exporte data cannot import from remote UI without appointing a password. You can import only from service mode UI.

F-2-441

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2-247

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2-248

7. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export. Reference:

iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm Model

Export YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS

S/N Main controller firm ware version

F-2-444

8. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.

DCM File format

DCM Job management number F-2-447

Press <-.

F-2-445

9. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK. Unmount the USB memory device. It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.

F-2-446

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2-248

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

●● Import

2-249 3. Select LIST after the screen moves to .

Preparation • USB memory device * Required when importing from an external USB memory device. • It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is necessary. • When necessary, copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance. • Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB memory device. • Do not change the extension from .dcm. (only .dcm files can be recognized.) • It is desirable to connect the USB memory device before entering service mode.

Overall flow Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device.

Procedure 1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)

F-2-449

4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.

2. Names of saved DCM data files are displayed 3. Register password 4. Import from external USB memory device 5. Remove USB memory device 6. Specification of export file name

Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device 1. Connect the USB memory device. (When using the external USB memory device) 2. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.

F-2-450

F-2-448

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2-249

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

5. The names of .dcm files referred to in the external USB memory device are displayed.

2-250 7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press OK.

03 iAC5255

F-2-453 F-2-451

8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.

6. Select SELECT.

F-2-454 F-2-452

Note: Specification of file selection display

• "*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in SELECT. • USB memory device: Up to 8 files are displayed in a screen.

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2-250

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

9. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

2-251 10. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.

Click here

F-2-455

F-2-457

11. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-.

OK

F-2-456 F-2-458

Note:

12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.

Specification of file selection display

• "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed. • "***" is displayed after the password is entered.

Unmount the USB memory device. It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.

F-2-459

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (external)

2-251

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

■■Import/export by service mode (internal)

2-252 2. Select LIST after the screen moves to .

When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen of service mode, service mode settings can be saved. Setting values of Main Controller 2, Reader Controller, DC Controller, etc. can be collectively saved. It can be used when recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for troubleshooting, etc.

Note: DCM must not be used when replacing a PCB. Be sure to use a method such as backup of SRAM of the Main Controller 2/service mode backup of DCON/RCON. DCM enables to back up only service mode setting values. There is still necessary information other than setting values when replacing a PCB. SRAM backup or service mode backup enables to save data other than setting values.

3. When saving to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.

F-2-461

●● Export Preparation There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.

Overall flow Here is a procedure for exporting data of the HDD of the machine.

Procedure 1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2) 2. Register password 3. Import from the internal HDD

F-2-462

4. The names of .dcm files saved in the internal HDD are displayed.

Procedure for backing up data to the HDD of the machine 1. Select LIST after the screen moves to .

F-2-460

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

F-2-463

2-252

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

5. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

2-253 7. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-.

Click here

F-2-464

Note: Limitations regarding the DCM data password

• Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters • No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set is allowed only for service mode.) • No space is allowed in the middle of a password. • Password is case sensitive.

F-2-466

Reference:

iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm Model

6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.

Export YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS

S/N Main controller firm ware version

DCM File format

DCM Job management number F-2-467

F-2-465

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

2-253

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

●● Import

2-254 3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.

Preparation There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.

Overall flow Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.

Procedure 1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2) 2. Register password 3. Import from the internal HDD

Import from the internal HDD 1. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.

F-2-470

4. The names of .dcm files referred to in the internal HDD are displayed.

F-2-468

2. Select LIST after the screen moves to .

5. Select PASSWD.

F-2-471

F-2-469

F-2-472

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

2-254

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected.

2-255 8. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.

Click here

F-2-475 F-2-473

7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.

F-2-476

Note: F-2-474

Note: Specification of file selection display

• " *" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in SELECT. • HDD : Up to 2 files are displayed in a screen.

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

Specification of file selection display • "<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed. • "***" is displayed after the password is entered.

2-255

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

2-256

9. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.

F-2-477

10. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed. Press <-.

OK

F-2-478

2

Technology > DCM > Overview > Import/export by service mode (internal)

2-256

3

3

Periodic Service

Periodic Service ■ Service ■Periodical Operation Item

3

Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item

3-2

Periodical Service Operation Item ♦: Replacement (Periodical replacement) ●: Replaced (consumables) Δ: Cleaned No.

System

Items

Interval

Transfer guide Transfer roller Separation static charge eliminator Developing assembly

5 6 7 8

Fixing system

9

Pushing wheel (developing assembly) Fixing inlet guide Fixing main unit

Pickup feed 10 system

Cassette pickup roller

11

Cassette separation roller Manual feed pickup roller Manual feed separation pad Pre-registration guide (Static charge eliminator) Air filter

12 13 14

15 External Auxiliary System

Cassette feed roller

Remarks

FM3-9276

1

80,000 sheets

FC9-0693 FM3-9296

1 1 1

120,000 sheets 240,000 sheets 240,000 sheets

FM4-9730

1

-

1

500,000 sheets: 51/45/35/25cpm 120,000 sheets

-

1

120,000 sheets

FM4-9733 (120V_51cpm) FM4-9734 (230V_51cpm) FM4-9736 (120V_45/35/25cpm) FM4-9737 (230V_45/35/25cpm) FB6-3405 FC7-9381 (For CHN) FC6-7083 FC7-9502 (For CHN) FC6-6661

1

240,000 sheets

2

150,000 sheets

2

150,000 sheets

2

120,000 sheets

FL3-1352

1

150,000 sheets

●

DRBL-1

M-FD-RL

FL3-3469

1

150,000 sheets

●

DRBL-1

M-SP-PD

-

1

As needed

-

-

FC0-3078

1 set (2 pcs.)

240,000 sheets

DRBL-1

OZ-FIL1

600,000 sheets

2 3 4

Counter 500,000 sheets

Image Waste toner container formation system

240,000 sheets

1

150,000 sheets

Life 120,000 sheets

Q'ty

80,000 sheets

Parts No.

●

DRBL-1

WST-TNR

DRBL-1 DRBL-1

TR-ROLL SP-SC-EL

DRBL-1

DV-UNT-K

Δ

-

-

Dry wiping

Δ

-

-

Wipe with dry cloth. If dirt cannot come off, wipe it with alcohol.

DRBL-1

FX-UNIT

●

DRBL-1

●

DRBL-1

C1-PU-RL C2-PU-RL C1-FD-RL C2-FD-RL C1-SP-RL C2-SP-RL

Δ ● ● ●

●

●

●

DRBL-1

Δ

♦

Defined by 6% document If service engineer removes the waste toner from the Waste Toner Container, the Waste Toner Container can be reused. Wipe with dry cloth.

Dry wiping with the lint-free paper

T-3-1

3

Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item

3-2

3

Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item

3-3

CAUTION: The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation. The value may vary depending on the site environment or user habit. The parts number may change because of changes in design.

3

Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item

3-3

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ of Parts ■List ■ Covers ■External ■ Exposure System (Reader) ■Original ■ System ■Controller ■ Exposure System ■Laser ■ Formation System ■Image ■ System ■Fixing ■ Feed System ■Pickup ■ Auxiliary System ■External

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover

4-2

List of Parts [23]

List of External / Internal Cover [2]

[3]

[24] [16]

[4]

[15]

[1]

[17]

[14]

[5]

[13]

[22]

[6]

[12]

[21]

[7] [8]

[11]

[20]

[10] F-4-1

Part name Reader Left Cover DADF (Optional or Standard) Reader Front Cover Control Panel Support Cover Toner Supply Cover Front Cover Cassette 1 Cassette 2(Optional or Standard) Lower Left Cover Left Cover Inside Base Cover Delivery Tray Rear Left Cover

[19] F-4-2

[9]

Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]

[18]

Reference p. 4-18 p. 4-14 p. 4-79 p. 4-14 p. 4-15 p. 4-17 p. 4-18 p. 4-18 p. 4-19 p. 4-19

Symbol [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24]

Part name Reader Right Cover Reader Rear Cover Rear Cover Lower Rear Cover Rear Right Cover (Upper) Rear Right Cover (Lower) Multi Pickup Assembly Right Cover Platen Glass ADF Scan Glass

Reference p. 4-19 p. 4-20 p. 4-20 p. 4-21 p. 4-22 p. 4-23 p. 4-24 p. 4-25 T-4-2

T-4-1

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover

4-2

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Units / Parts

4-3

List of Main Units / Parts

[7] [6] [8]

[1]

[4]

[9]

F-4-4

Symbol Part name CCD Unit [1] Laser Scanner Unit [2]

[2]

Reference

[3]

Toner Supply Assembly

[4]

Casstte Pickup Assembly(1)

[5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

Casstte Pickup Assembly(2) Right Cover Unit Main Drive Assembly Fixing Assembly

FM4-9177 FM4-9154 FM4-9179 -

p. 4-70 p. 4-68 p. 4-74 p. 4-57

Developing Assembly Multi Pickup Assembly No.1 Deliivery Drive Assembly No.2 Deliivery Assembly No.1 Deliivery Assembly

FM4-9730 FM4-7333 FM4-7918 FM4-7337 FM4-7915

p. 4-48 p. 4-77 p. 4-76 p. 4-77

F-4-3

[3]

Part number FM FM3-9406 (iR-ADV 4225 SERIES), [5] FM3-9407 (iR-ADV 4251,4245,4235 SERIES) FM4-7913 (iR-ADV 4251,4245 SERIES), FM4-7914 (iR-ADV 4235,4225 SERIES) FM4-9175

p. 4-26 p. 4-46

p. 4-54

p. 4-68

T-4-3

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Main Units / Parts

4-3

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Consumable Parts

Consumable Parts

Symbol [1] [2] [3] [4]

[11] [11] [2]

4-4

[6]

[5] [6]

[1]

Part number FC9-0693 FM3-9296 FM4-9730 FL3-1352

Reference p. 4-51 p. 4-52 p. 4-48 p. 4-71 p. 4-74 p. 4-58

[9] [10]

Manual Feed Separation Pad FL3-3469 Fixing Main Assembly FM4-9733(120V_51cpm) FM4-9734(230V_51cpm) FM4-9736(120V_45/35/25cpm) FM4-9737(230V_45/35/25cpm) Cassette Pickup Roller FB6-3405(Except for CHN) FC7-9381 (CHN) Cassette Feed Roller FC6-7083(Except for CHN) FC7-9502(CHN) Cassette Separation Roller FC6-6661 Waste Toner Container FM3-9276

[11]

Air Filter

p. 4-80

[7] [8] [4]

Part name Transfer Roller Separation Static Eliminator Developing Assembly Manual Feed Pickup Roller

FC0-3078

p. 4-73 p. 4-73 p. 4-74 p. 4-53

T-4-4

[5]

[3]

[10]

[8]

[7]

[9] [8]

[7]

[9] F-4-5

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Consumable Parts

4-4

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCBs

4-5

List of PCBs UN8 UN7 UN12 UN13 UN11

UN48

UN4

UN47

UN25

UN23 UN60

UN14

UN24

Symbol UN1 UN2 UN3 UN4

Part name Power Supply PCB DC Controller PCB Heater PCB Reader Controller PCB

Reference

UN6 UN7 UN8 UN11 UN12

HVT PCB LCD Unit Key Top PCB Assembly Sub Key PCB Volume Key PCB

p. 4-78 -

UN13 UN14 UN23 UN24 UN25 UN47 UN48 UN60

Control Panel CPU PCB Main Controller PCB 2 Laser Driver PCB (4 Beams) BD PCB Main Controller PCB 1 Image data analyzer PCB CCD PCB Laser Driver PCB (2 Beams)

p. 4-37 p. 4-36 -

p. 4-78 p. 4-32

-

T-4-5

UN6

UN1

UN2

UN3

F-4-6

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of PCBs

4-5

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Solenoids

4-6

List of Solenoids Symbol SL2 SL11 SL12

Part name Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid Reversal Solenoid

-

SL13

No. 2 Delivery Solenoid

-

SL1

Reference

T-4-6

SL13

SL12

SL2

SL1

SL11

F-4-7

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Solenoids

4-6

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensors

4-7

List of Sensors

S14 S15 S13

S23

S12 S11

S21

S22

S24 S20 S10

S9 S7

S2 S4 S35 S30

S3

S39 S33

S31

S25

S46

S5

S32 S34

S16

S28 S18

S29

F-4-8

4

S19

S26

S6 S1

S27

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensors

S17

F-4-9

4-7

4 Symbol S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28 S29 S30 S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S39 S46

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensors

Part name Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A Pre-Registration Sensor Loop Sensor Duplex Feed Sensor Manual Feeder Paper Sensor Fixing Film Shutter HP Sensor CCD Unit HP Sensor Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 1 Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 2 Original Size Sensor 2 Original Size Sensor 1 Enviorment Sensor Waste Toner Sensor Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor Fixing Outlet Sensor No.1 Delivery Full Sensor No.1 Delivery Sensor No.2 Delivery Sensor No.2 Selivery Full Sensor Reversal Sensor Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Sub Hopper Toner Sensor Manual Feeder Paper Size Sensor Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch Cassette 2 Paper Sensor Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch Cassette Cover Sensor Toner Cover Open/Closed Sensor

4-8

Reference T-4-7

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Sensors

4-8

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motors

4-9

List of Motors Symbol M1 M2 M3 M8 M9 M10 M11 M13 M14 M16 M17 M20

M14

M20 M2

M10

M9

Part name Main Motor Fixing Motor Cassette 2 Pickup Motor Fixing Film Shutter Motor Duplex Feed Motor No.1 Delivery Motor Polygon Motor Cassette 1 Pickup Motor Reader Motor Hopper Motor Bottle Motor Reversal Motor

Reference T-4-8

M17 M16

M11

M1 M8

M13

M3

F-4-10

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Motors

4-9

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fans

4-10

List of Fans Symbol FM1

FM12

FM3

FM7

Part name

Reference

FM2 FM3 FM4

Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Rear) Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Front) Exhaust Fan (Rear) Exhaust Fan (Front)

-

FM5 FM6 FM7 FM12

Power Supply Cooling Fan Main Body Cooling Fan Paper Cooling Fan Controller Cooling Fan

T-4-9

FM4

FM1

FM2

FM5

FM6

F-4-11

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Fans

4-10

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switches

4-11

List of Switches Symbol SW1

SW2 SW4

Part name Main Switch Front Door Switch Enviorment Switch

Reference T-4-10

SW1

SW2

SW4

F-4-12

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Switches

4-11

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Clutches

4-12

List of Clutches Symbol Part name CL1 Developing Cylinder Clutch CL3 Registration Clutch CL12 Manual Feed Pickup Clutch

Reference T-4-11

CL1

CL12

CL3

F-4-13

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > List of Clutches

4-12

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Others

4-13

Others Symbol [1] [2] [3] TH1 TH2 TH3 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 TP1

[2]

[1]

H5 H5 TH1

Part name Fixing Film Unit Pressure Roller Developing Cylinder Fixing Main Thermistor Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Fixing Heater 1 Fixing Heater 2 Drum Heater (Option) Cassette Heater Reader Heater (Option) Thermal Switch

Reference p. 4-59 p. 4-65 p. 4-49 T-4-12

TH2

TH3 TP1 H1

H3

H2

[3]

H4

F-4-14

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > List of Parts > Others

4-13

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Support Cover

External Covers

4-14

Removing the Support Cover 1) Open the front cover.

Removing the Reader Left Cover

2) Open the right cover. 3) Remove the support cover.

1) Remove the reader left cover.

• 2 Screws

• 2 Screws

• 2 Claws

x2

x2

F-4-15

3

Removing the Reader Front Cover 1) Open the ADF and remove the Reader Front Cover while pushing the claw at the bottom of the cover. • 2 Screws • 1 Claw

x2 F-4-17

x1

F-4-16

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Support Cover

4-14

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Toner Supply Cover

Removing the Toner Supply Cover

4-15

7) Remove the drum unit.

1) Open the front cover. 2) Open the right cover. 3) Turn the lock lever as shown to release the lock of the waste toner container. 4) Remove the waste toner container.

F-4-20

8) Open the toner supply cover. 9) Remove the toner container. 10) Remove the 2 Screws.

F-4-18

x2

5) Remove the screw securing the developing assembly pressure lever. 6) Turn the lever in the direction of the arrow to release the drum unit lock.

x1

F-4-19

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Toner Supply Cover

F-4-21

4-15

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Toner Supply Cover

4-16

11) Remove the link cover.

13) Remove the toner supply cover.

• 1 Claw

• 1 Claw

12) Disengage the Link Lever from the shaft. Claw

x1

Claw F-4-22

x1

F-4-23

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Toner Supply Cover

4-16

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Front Cover

NOTE: When closing the toner cover without the toner container, push the lock release lever.

4-17

Removing the Front Cover 1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the front cover belt. • 2 Screws

x2

F-4-25

3) Remove the front cover. • 2 Hinge Pins

F-4-24

F-4-26

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Front Cover

4-17

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Inside Base Cover

Removing the Left Cover

4-18

Removing the Inside Base Cover

1) Open the front cover.

1) Open the front cover.

2) Remove the inside base cover. (Refer to page 4-18)

2) Bend the left cover and remove the inside base cover.

3) Remove the left cover.

• 1 Screw

• 2 Screws

x2

x1

F-4-27

F-4-28

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Inside Base Cover

4-18

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Reader Right Cover

Removing the Delivery Tray

4-19

Removing the Left Rear Cover

1) Remove the support cover. (Refer to page 4-14)

1) Remove the left rear cover.

2) Remove the toner supply cover. (Refer to page 4-15)

• 4 Screws

3) Remove the inside base cover. (Refer to page 4-18)

• 2 Claws

4) Remove the support cover (left).

x2

x3

F-4-29

x4

F-4-31

5) Remove the delivery tray.

Removing the Reader Right Cover

• 1 Screw

1) Remove the reader right cover. • 2 Screws

x2

x1

F-4-30

F-4-32

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Reader Right Cover

4-19

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Rear Cover

Removing the Reader Rear Cover

4-20

Removing the Rear Cover

1) Open the platen cover (ADF/platen board cover).

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the ADF cable.

• 4 Screws

3) Remove the reader rear cover.

• 4 Claws

• 4 Screws

x4

x4

x4

F-4-34

F-4-33

MEMO: When installing the rear cover, tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Rear Cover

4-20

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Lower Rear Cover

Removing the Lower Rear Cover

4-21

3) Remove the power cord clamp. (100/120V only) • 1 Screw

1) Remove the connector cover. • 1 Screw

4) Remove the power cord.

x1

x1

F-4-35

2) When the cassette pedestal is installed, remove the connector.

x3

F-4-37

F-4-36

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Lower Rear Cover

4-21

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Rear Right Cover (Upper)

4-22

Removing the Rear Right Cover (Upper)

5) Remove the lower rear cover. • 4 Screws

1) Remove the rear right cover (upper).

• 3 Claws

• 2 Screws • 2 Protrusions • 1 Claw

x4

x3

x2 Protrusion

x1

F-4-38

Claw F-4-39

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Rear Right Cover (Upper)

4-22

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Rear Right Cover (Lower)

4-23

Removing the Rear Right Cover (Lower) 1) Remove the handle cover. 2) Open the Cassette right cover(upper). 3) Raise the handle at the rear right, and then remove one screw. 4) Release one claw with a flat-blade screwdriver, and then remove the rear right cover (lower).

x2 x1

F-4-40

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Covers > Removing the Rear Right Cover (Lower)

4-23

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Platen Glass

4-24

Original Exposure System (Reader) x2

Removing the Platen Glass CAUTION: When removing the platen glass, take care not to touch the following parts with your fingers: • Glass surface • Standard white plate Soils on these parts may cause white/black lines on images. If they are soiled, clean them with a lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

F-4-42

Take the action stated below in the service mode.

CAUTION: Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white level adjustment.

W-PLT-X

W-PLT-Y

W-PLT-Z F-4-43

F-4-41

1. Enter the value indicated on the platen glass in the following service mode:

1) Open the platen cover (platen board cover/ADF). 2) Remove the glass retainer. • 2 screws

(Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X/Y/Z (Input of standard white plate data) 2. Enter the service mode, and then select the following: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Platen Glass

4-24

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the ADF Scan Glass

servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

4-25

Removing the ADF Scan Glass

Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following

CAUTION:

(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3

• When removing the ADF scan glass, take care not to touch the glass surface with bare hand.

Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK

• Soils on the glass surface may cause white/black lines on images.

mode.)

• If the glass surface is soiled, clean them with a lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

servicemode.

4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the



glass for stream reading.)

1) Open the platen cover (platen board cover/ADF). 2) Remove the glass retainer. • 2 screws 3) Remove the ADF scan glass.

x2

F-4-44

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the ADF Scan Glass

4-25

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit

4-26

3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the ADF scan glass so that its sheet comes to the front and left side of the glass.

servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.)

Removing the CCD Unit 1) Backup of the Service Mode data (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP 1) Open the platen cover (ADF/platen board cover). F-4-45

2) Remove the platen glass. (Refer to page 4-24) 3) Move the belt and move the CCD Unit to the position where the machine frame is cut out.

1. Enter the service mode, and then select the following: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the

F-4-46

glass for stream reading.)

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit

4-26

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit

5) Loosen the screw, and then loosen the belt.

4-27

CAUTION: • Do not touch the PCB [A]. • Do not touch the LED area [B] on the CCD unit.

F-4-47

6) Unload the belt from the fixture in the bottom of the CCD Unit. F-4-49

7) Remove the CCD unit. • Cable retainer • CCD flexible cable

x1 F-4-48

F-4-50

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit

4-27

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit



4-28

servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2

NOTE: The EEPROM on the CCD PCB memorizes the reader-related service mode. The CCD unit of the service part is supplied in the state that adjustment value was written.

Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 3-3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for

1.If uploading of backup data succeeds before replacement

BOOK mode.)

1) Restoring the backup data

3-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following

(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES

servicemode.

2) Input the service label value packaged in the service parts content.

(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4

When changing the setting value, write a changed value in the service label inside the

Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the

reader rear cover.

glass for stream reading.) 4) Enter the service mode, and then select the following:

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD >

(Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1)

(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS CCD (stream reading position

MTF3-M1 MTF3-M2 MTF3-M3 MTF3-M4 MTF3-M5 MTF3-M6 MTF3-M7 MTF3-M8 MTF3-M9 100-RG 100-GB 50-RG 50-GB 100-RG-2 100-GB-2 50-RG-2 50-GB-2 100-RG-3 100-GB-3 50-RG-3 50-GB-3

adjustment) 5) Make an output of P-PRINT. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 6) Store the outputted P-PRINT into the service book. 7) After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image.

T-4-13

3) Perform the following in the service mode: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 3-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 3-2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit

4-28

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit

4-29

2.If uploading of backup data fails before replacement

2) Confirm the setting value of the following service mode. Set it depending on the model.

1) Input a value in the service label inside the reader rear cover. Because the value is written

• (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SENS-CNF (Setting of original detection size)

in at a new CCD unit, the input of the parts with a diagonal line is unnecessary. COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY>

FEEDER > ADJUST > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD >

(Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1)

0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration • (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODELSZ2 (Paper size detection global support

ADJ-X ADJ-Y ADJ-S ADJ-X-MG ADJ-Y-DF STRD-POS DOCST LA-SPEED OFST-P-K MTF3-M1 MTF3-M2 MTF3-M3 MTF3-M4 MTF3-M5 MTF3-M6 MTF3-M7 MTF3-M8 MTF3-M9 100-RG 100-GB 50-RG 50-GB 100DF-RG 100DF-GB 50DF-RG 50DF-GB 100-RG-2 100-GB-2 50-RG-2 50-GB-2 100-RG-3 100-GB-3 50-RG-3 50-GB-3 W-PLT-X W-PLT-Y W-PLT-Z

in bookmode) 0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media. • (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW (Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support) 0: Not supported, 1: Supported 3) Perform the following in the service mode: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 3-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 3-2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 3-3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 3-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 T-4-14

Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 4) Enter the service mode, and then select the following: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS CCD (stream reading position adjustment) 5) Adjust tray width. Perform either AB system or Inch system. a. AB system adjustment 1) Adjust the slide guide to the index "A4/A3". 2) Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the CCD Unit

4-29

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Cleaning in the CCD unit (Mirror No. 1 - 5)

3) Press OK, and register the A4 width. 4) Adjust the slide guide to the index "A5R". 5) Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R 6) Press OK, and register the A5R width. b. Inch system adjustment

4-30

Cleaning in the CCD unit (Mirror No. 1 - 5) 1) Remove the CCD unit. (Refer to page 4-26) 2) Remove the LED unit. • 2 screws • 2 connectors

1) Adjust the slide guide to the index "LTR/11x17". 2) Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR 3) Press OK, and register the LTR width. 4) Adjust the slide guide to the index "STMT/LTRR/LGL". 5) Select the item in the service mode.

x2

(Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR 6) Press OK, and register the LTRR width. 6) Finalize the setting in the following service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > CCD-CHNG > 1 (Data at factory shipment is not used)

x2

7) Make an output of P-PRINT. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 8) Store the outputted P-PRINT into the service book. 9) After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image.

F-4-51

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Cleaning in the CCD unit (Mirror No. 1 - 5)

4-30

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Cleaning in the CCD unit (Mirror No. 1 - 5)

3) Clean mirror No. 1 - 4 with lint-free paper.

4-31

4-2) Dry-clean the mirror No. 5 with the cleaning tool.

mirror No.4 mirror No.3

mirror No.2

mirror No.1 mirror No.5 F-4-52

4) Clean the mirror No. 5 with its dedicated cleaning tool.

F-4-54

4-1) Remove the cleaning tool inside the reader unit.

F-4-53

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Cleaning in the CCD unit (Mirror No. 1 - 5)

4-31

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

Removing the Reader Controller PCB

4-32

Removing the Reader Assembly

NOTE: The reader controller PCB does not memorize a reader-related service mode. Therefore the measures after replacing the PCB are not necessary.

1) Disconnect the ADF cable. 2) Remove the reader left cover. (Refer to page 4-14) 3) Remove the reader right cover. (Refer to page 4-19) 4) Remove the reader rear cover. (Refer to page 4-20) 5) Remove the rear cover. (Refer to page 4-20)



6) Remove the controller cover.

1) Remove the reader rear cover. (Refer to page 4-20)

7) Remove the reader front cover. (Refer to page 4-14)

2) Remove the reader controller PCB.

8) Remove the operation panel. (Refer to page 4-79)

• 2 flexible cables

9) Release the cables from the wire saddle.

• 6 connectors • 6 screws

x2

x6 x8 F-4-56

F-4-55

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

4-32

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

10) Remove the operation panel fixing plate .

4-33

12) Disconnect the flexible cable.

• 8 Screws

x8

x1

F-4-57

F-4-59

11) Disconnect the connector of the reader.

x1

F-4-58

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

4-33

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

13) Remove the grounding plate (L/R).

4-34

14) Remove the 5 screws from the left side of the host machine.

• 5 Screws

x3 x5

F-4-62

15) Remove the 2 screws from the right side of the host machine. F-4-60

x2

x2

F-4-61

F-4-63

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

4-34

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

4-35

16) Remove the reader assembly.

F-4-64

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Original Exposure System (Reader) > Removing the Reader Assembly

4-35

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1

Controller System

4-36

1) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. 2) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

Main Controller PCB 1

• 2 Screws (beside of arrow mark) • 3 Connectors

1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).

CAUTION:

• 2 Screws

Be sure to move the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable to the Reader side to prevent the cables from being trapped.

• 2 Protrusions • 1 Claw

USB Cable

x2

x3 Protrusion

Arrow Mark

Control Panel Communication Cable

x2 Arrow Mark

Connector

Claw F-4-65

Main Controller PCB 1 F-4-66

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1

4-36

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

4-37

Main Controller PCB 2

1) Transfer the parts from old PCB to new PCB.



• Flash PCB

HDD can evacuate in SRAM of Main Controller PCB 2 with a service mode.

• TPM PCB

(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD> OK [5] BACKUP But You cannot use this function when there is HDD Encryption Board. Perform any of the following methods. a) Back up contents of the SRAM by SST; and re-after board exchange; store it. Refer to "SRAM backup method when there is HDD Encryption Board". b) Back up contents of the SRAM by USB memory; and re-after board exchange; store it. Refer to "Backup SRAM of Main controller PCB 2 by USB memory". c) Like before, You back it up in a procedure as follows. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. c-1)

Backup the Settings/Registration data

Use the Remote UI. Management Settings> Data Management> Import/Export Target data Address List TPM PCB

Flash PCB F-4-67

NOTE: Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.

Forwarding Settings Preferences(Except for Paper Type Management Settings) Adjustment/Maintenance Function Settingss(Except for Printer Custom Settings, Forwarding Settings) Set Destination(Except for Address List) Management Settings(Except for Address List) Printer Settings

User Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Address Lists)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) -

Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Printer Settings)) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF Key and settings information to be used for encryption when Settings/Registration(Management TPM is ON Settings > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings) Service mode setting values (MN-CON) T-4-15

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

4-37

4 c-2)

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

Printing the Settings/Registration data by using the service mode.

4-38

Backup SRAM of Main controller PCB 2 by USB memory:

(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> USER-PRT List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed.

Prepare for: USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine is stored. or the USB memory recognize it in the Host machine.

SRAM backup method when there is HDD Encryption Board: With SST Ver.4.41or later, obey steps to upload the description of SRAM (Sraming.bin). Single> Upload Data> Sraming.bin> Save

On USB memory, You make the blank folder of the same name (e.g.: iA4245) to recognize USB memory on a service mode when You registered a system software for Host machine by SST.

Data in the HDD is encrypted when the HDD Encryption Board is installed. For Main Controller PCB 2 to access to data in the HDD, the file description of the

Service Mode:

Encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board needs to be the same as that of SRAM on

(Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD> OK

Main Controller PCB 2; otherwise, Main Controller PCB 2 cannot access to the data in the

[5] BACKUP

HDD and this causes failure in startup of the machine. • Replacement of the HDD Encryption Board / Main Controller PCB 2

According to a list, perform a Backup Restore as follows.

Inconsistent the description between SRAM on Main Controller PCB 2 and the encryption key file of the HDD Encryption Board.

Viewpoint of the Table:

• Replacement with a new HDD

Title

[[[[[ download Menu (HDD) ]]]]]]]]]]] -----------------------------Select line [5]: Backup [8]: download Menu 2

There is no system data in the HDD With SST Ver. 4.31 or before, it was necessary to format the HDD (Format ALL), and then install the system (Download the system software) in any case. With SST Ver.4.41 or later, if the description of SRAM (Sraming.bin) on Main Controller PCB 2 is kept in the PC, you can restore Sraming.bin on Main Controller PCB 2 by using

[Reset]: Shutdown

SST after holding down 2 and 8 to start the machine. When the description of SRAM can be restored, it means that the file description is the

Waiting SST Connection Checking USB.

same as that of the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board, which enables access to the HDD. Therefore, you do not need to format the HDD or install the system.

1 2 3 4 5

Title download Menu (HDD) download Menu (USB) download Menu (USB) Backup Menu (USB) Backup Menu (USB)

Select line

Operation Connect USB memory. [5]: Backup "5" /[5] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0" [7]: SRAM(USB) "7" /[7] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0" F-4-68

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

4-38

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

1) Backup SRAM of Main controller 2 to USB memory Title



Select line

1 download Menu (HDD)

4-39

1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper). (Main Controller PCB 1 4-36)

Operation Connect USB memory.

2 download Menu (USB) 3 download Menu (USB)

[5]: Backup /[5] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"5" "0"

4 Backup Menu (USB)

[7]: SRAM(USB)

"7"

5 Backup Menu (USB)

/[7] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

2) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. (Main Controller PCB 1 4-36) 3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1. (Main Controller PCB 1 4-36) 4) Remove the Rear Cover. • 4 Screws

6 [SramImg.bin] Backup OK. ---Please hit any key--7 Backup Menu (USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

"0"

8 download Menu (USB)

[Reset]: Shutdown

"Reset"

9 download Menu (USB)

/[Reset] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0"

10 download Menu (USB)

Remove USB Device then shut down. ---Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown.---

• 4 Claws

"C"

Remove USB memory. "Reset"

x4

11 Power is automatically turned OFF.

Claw

x4

T-4-16

2) After replacement, while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the main

Claw

power. 3) Restore Sraming.bin in the USB memory. Title

Select line

1 download Menu (HDD)

Operation

Rear Cover

Connect USB memory.

2 download Menu (USB)

[8]: download Menu 2

"8"

3 download Menu (USB)

/[8] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

4 download Menu 2nd (USB) 5 download Menu 2nd (USB) 6 Restore Menu (USB)

[2]: Restore

"2"

/[2] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

[2]: SRAM(USB)

"2"

7 Restore Menu (USB)

/[2] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

8 [SramImg.bin] Restore OK. ---Plese hit any key--9 Restore Menu (USB) [C]: Return to download Menu 2nd

"0"

10 download Menu 2nd (USB) 11 download Menu (USB)

[C]: Return to Main Menu

"C"

[Reset]: Shutdown

"Reset"

12 download Menu (USB)

/[Reset] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0"

13 download Menu (USB)

Remove USB Device then shut down. ---Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown.---

F-4-69

5) Remove the Controller Box Cover. • 6 Hooks Hook

"C"

Hook

Remove USB memory. "Reset"

14 Power is automatically turned OFF. T-4-17

Hook F-4-70

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

4-39

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

4-40





1) Remove the Main Controller PCB 2.

1) Transfer the parts from old PCB to new PCB.

• Flat Cable

• DDR2-SDRAM

• 10 Connectors

• Memory PCB

• 5 Screws (TP) Flat Cable Memory PCB

Main Controller PCB 2

x10 x5

DDR2-SDRAM

Connector F-4-71

F-4-72

Prohibited Operation: Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial number).If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration. • Main Controller PCB 1 • Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

4-40

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power. 2) Restoring the backup data by any of the following methods. a) When uploading Sraming.bin by SST Ver.4.41or later Single> Download Data> Sraming.bin> Start b) When backing up data by the service mode (Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD> OK, [5] BACKUP (Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DOWNLOAD> OK [8] Download Menu 2> [2] Restore c) When backing up data by using the Remote UI. Management Settings> Data Management> Import/Export 3) While referring to the list of Settings/registration data which was printed out before replacement, reset/register the data. 4) When the user generates and adds the key pair, certificate and/or CRL, request the user to

4-41

HDD Keep the following in mind when attaching/removing the hard disk. 1. Take countermeasures against electrostatic before work to prevent the hard disk from being damaged by electrostatic discharge. 2. Do not give a shock to the hard disk. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. 1) Backup of the set/registered data by using the Remote UI. Management Settings> Data Management> Import/Export Target data Address List

generate them again Forwarding Settings Set Paper Information Favorite Settings Default Settings Shortcut settings for "Options" Previous Settings Button Size information Wallpaper Setting Button information in Quick Menu Restrict Quick Menu Button settings in Main Menu Button settings on the top of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Other settings for Main Menu User Box specification settings (Register Box Name, Password, Time until Document Auto Erase, Print uponstoring from the printer driver) Image data of User Box, Confidential Fax Box, and System Box Image Data Data File of Advanced Box Advanced box account

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

User Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Address Lists)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Paper Information)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Remote UI(User Access Control for Advanced Box)

4-41

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

Target data

4-42

User

Network place setting information Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Web Access setting information Remote UI(block of Export/Import) MEAP application License files for MEAP applications SMS User authentication information registered in the Local SSO-H Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) Data saved using MEAP applications SMS (Service Management Service) password of MEAP Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Job logs Key Pair and Certificate and CRL in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values PS font Key and settings information to be used for encryption Settings/Registration(Management Settings when TPM is ON > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings) Audit Log Remote UI(Settings/Registration > Device Management > Export/Clear Audit Log)*

1) Open the plate in the direction of the arrow. • 2 Hooks

F-4-73

2) Disconnect the 2 cables. • 2 Connectors • 1 Wire Saddle

T-4-18

* Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported.

x2

2) Printing the Settings/Registration data by using the service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> USER-PRT List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed. 1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper). (Main Controller PCB 1 4-36) 2) Remove the Rear Cover. (Main Controller PCB 2 4-37) 3) Remove the Controller Box Cover. (Main Controller PCB 2 4-37) 4) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. (Main Controller PCB 1 4-36)

F-4-74

5) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1. (Main Controller PCB 1 4-36)

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

4-42

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

4-43

3) Remove the HDD Unit.

4) Remove the HDD Slide Rail from the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws

• 4 Screws

CAUTION: • Be careful not to drop the screws. • Pull out the HDD Unit until it stops, and then move it in the direction of the arrow to

x4

remove. • Be careful not to drop the HDD Unit.

x2 F-4-76

5) Remove the HDD Unit from the HDD Box. • 2 Screws

x2

F-4-77

F-4-75

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

4-43

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

4-44

6) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate.



• 2 Screws

1) format the HDD. 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn ON the main power.) 1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.

x2

2) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others). 3) Initializing the key pair, certificate and CRL. (Lv.2) COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CA-KEY 4) Turning OFF and ON the main power. 5) Restoring the backup data using the Remote UI. Management Settings> Data Management> Import/Export 6) Resetting/registering the data. F-4-78

7) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate.

While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement, reset/register the data. 7) When the user generates and adds the key pair, certificate and/or CRL, request the user to

• 4 Screws

generate them again. 8) Executing “Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)”. Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image Quality> Auto Adjust

x4

Gradation

HDD HDD Support Plate F-4-79

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

4-44

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

4-45

CAUTION: When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA collection control is not enabled after the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced, reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following procedures. 1) Go to COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> CARD and enter the numerical value of the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press “OK” key. Example: If No.1 to 1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter “1” of the leading card. 2) After turning OFF and ON the main power, perform the following operations from Settings/Registration mode. 2-1) In Management Settings> User Management> Department ID Management> Page Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created. 2-2) Set the following: Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings> IP Address Settings> IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask. 2-3) In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then, turn OFF and ON the main power. If “System Manager ID” and “System PIN” are not registered, “card registration to device” cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting operation. 3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body again. 4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings> User Management> Department ID Management> Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card ID is displayed. 5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting Manager is collected.

CAUTION: Points to Caution when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other achine (different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Controller System > HDD

4-45

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

Laser Exposure System

4-46

2) Draw the Laser Scanner Unit slightly. • 2 connectors

Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

CAUTION: Do not touch the PCB on the laser scanner unit. Do not change the setting of the variable resistor on the PCB.

CAUTION: When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.

CAUTION: Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it needs adjustment.

x2

Disassembling the unit may cause functional problems.

1) Remove the inside base cover. (Refer to page 4-18) 2) Remove the left cover. (Refer to page 4-18)

1) Remove the scanner retaining plate. • 1 screw

x1

F-4-81

F-4-80

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

4-46

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

3) Remove the laser scanner unit.

4-47

G. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ6-K > 117

• 2 pieces of sponge • 2 connectors

x2

F-4-82

• When replacing the laser unit, enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the laser unit to be replaced for the following in the service mode:

-10

0

147

136

93

Ｂ

Ｃ

Ｄ

Ａ Ｅ

16

117

Ｆ

Ｇ F-4-83

Input example • Adjust of write start position of laser A. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST > 136 • Difference in magnification between the lasers. B. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ1-K > -10 C. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ2-K > 0 D. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ3-K > 147 • Difference in the phase between the lasers E. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ4-K > 93 F. (LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ5-K > 16

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

4-47

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly

Image Formation System

4-48

CAUTION: When installing the developing assembly, insert the developing assembly while its guide engages with the rail of the host machine.

Removing the Developing Assembly 1) Open the right cover. 2) Open the front cover. 3) Remove the waste toner container. (Refer to page 4-53) 4) Remove the drum unit. (Refer to page 4-53) 5) Remove the toner supply cover. (Refer to page 4-15) 6) Remove the developing assembly • 1 connector

x1 F-4-85

F-4-84

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly

4-48

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder

Removing the Developing Cylinder

4-49

3) Remove the ring, the gear, the parallel pin and the gear.

Caution: Take note of the following points when removing the developing cylinder from the developing assembly: • Lots of self-tapping screws are used. Be careful not to damage the screw holes by tightening the self-tapping screws. • Do not touch nor give a shock to the developing cylinder.

F-4-87

1) Remove the developing assembly. (Refer to page 4-48)

4) Remove the gear unit.

2) Remove the top cover.

• 3 screws

• 4 screws

x3

x4

F-4-86

F-4-88

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder

4-49

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder

4-50

5) Remove the holder. • 2 screws • 1 pushing wheel 6) Remove the bearing.

x2

F-4-91

9) Remove the holder. • 2 screws • 1 pushing wheel 10) Remove the bearing.

x2 F-4-89

7) Remove the holder. • 2 screws

x2

F-4-92

F-4-90

8) Remove the developing contact spring.

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder

4-50

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller

4-51

Removing the Transfer Roller

11) Remove the blade unit. • 2 screws CAUTION:

CAUTION:

Remove the Developing Cylinder after removing the Developing Blade on a blade unit basis.

Do not touch the roller surface during work.

1) Open the right cover. 2) Remove the transfer roller.

x2

• 1 stopper (front) • 1 claw

x1 F-4-93

12) Remove the developing cylinder.

F-4-94

F-4-95

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller

4-51

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator

4-52

Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator

3) Remove the transfer roller. • 1 bushing (front)

1) Open the right cover. 2) Remove the separation static charge eliminator. • 1 claw

x1 2 1

F-4-96

CAUTION:

F-4-98

• When restoring the transfer roller, have the transfer roller fixed so its longer shaft comes to the machine rear side. • When restoring the transfer roller, install the spring of the transfer roller to the boss of the figure.

F-4-97

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Separation Static Charge Eliminator

4-52

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit

Removing the Waste Toner Container

4-53

Removing the Drum Unit





1) Open the front cover.

1) Open the right cover.

2) Turn the lock lever as shown to release the lock of the waste toner container.

2) Remove the waste toner container. (Refer to page 4-53)

3) Remove the waste toner container.

3) Remove the screw securing the developing assembly pressure lever. 4) Turn the lever in the direction of the arrow to release the lock of the drum unit.

x1

F-4-101 F-4-99

4) Remove the cap attached to the waste toner container, and then attach the cap to the opening so that the waste toner does not spill out.

F-4-100

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit

4-53

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Supply Assembly

4-54

Removing the Toner Supply Assembly

5) Pull out the drum unit slightly upward.

1) Remove the inside base cover. (Refer to page 4-18) 2) Remove the left cover. (Refer to page 4-18) 3) Remove the waste toner container. (Refer to page 4-53) 4) Remove the drum unit. (Refer to page 4-53) 5)Remove the toner cartridge. 6) Remove the toner supply cover. (Refer to page 4-15) 7) Remove the delivery tray. (Refer to page 4-19) 8) Remove the developing assembly. (Refer to page 4-48) 9) Remove the laser scanner unit.(Refer to page 4-46) F-4-102

CAUTION: • Do not touch the drum surface during the work. • Cover the Drum Unit with paper not to expose the drum. • When inserting the drum unit, check that the drum unit is securely engaged with the rail of the host machine.

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Supply Assembly

4-54

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Supply Assembly

10) Remove the toner supply assembly.

4-55



• 1 connectors NOTE:

• 1 screw

The service parts for toner supply unit do not come with a bottle ring. Remove the bottle ring from the old toner supply unit and attach it to the new one.

CAUTION: When removing the toner supply unit, do not incline the toner supply unit not to shed toner.

1) Remove the bottle base. • 2 screws

x2

x1 x1 F-4-104

F-4-103

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Supply Assembly

4-55

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Supply Assembly

4-56

2) Remove the bottle ring.

F-4-105

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Supply Assembly

4-56

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Unit

Fixing System

4-57 MEMO: Hold the fixing unit at the position shown below.

Removing the Fixing Unit CAUTION: The fixing unit may cause burn injury. Be sure to perform the operation after the unit is surely cooled.

1) Open the right cover. 2) Remove the fixing unit. • 1 screw (front side) • 1 knurled screw (rear side)

F-4-107

x2

F-4-106

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Unit

4-57

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Main Unit

Removing the Fixing Main Unit

4-58

1)Remove the fixing unit. (Refer to page 4-57) 2)Open the fixing outer delivery unit and remove the fixing outer delivery unit. • 1 screw

CAUTION: There are two kinds of film units for the fixing unit. One is for the 51 ppm machine and another one is for the 45/35/25 ppm machine. Attach the right fixing main unit.

• 2 claws

x1

45/35/25ppm film color: black

x2

51ppm film color: white F-4-109 F-4-108

3)Remove the positioning guide. • 1 screw

x1

F-4-110

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Main Unit

4-58

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-59

Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4)Remove the fixing inner delivery unit. • 1 screw

1)Remove the Fixing Main Unit.(Refer to page 4-58) 2) Remove the support plate. • 1 screw

x1 x1

F-4-111

F-4-112

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-59

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-60

3)Remove the drawer connector and the earth wire, and then release the fixing harness from

CAUTION:

the cable guide.

When installing the support plate, install it to engage the teeth with the locking lever at

• 3 screws

the position shown in the figure.

x3

F-4-113

F-4-114

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-60

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4)Remove the cable guide by pressing the embossment.

4-61

6)Turn the pressure release arm to pressurize the fixing film.

x1

F-4-117

7)Remove the 2 screws retaining the pressure plate units (front/rear). F-4-115

5)Remove the fixing film cover.

CAUTION:

• 2 screws

Never turn the screws pressurizing the fixing film unit. Turning the screws causes to change the pressure of the fixing film unit and results in the replacement of the fixing unit because the pressure adjustment cannot be performed in the field.

x2 x2

F-4-116

F-4-118

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-61

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

8)Release the pressure plate units (front/rear) to the arrow direction.

4-62

9)Turn the pressure plate units and separate them from the fixing film.

CAUTION: Release the pressure plate units while pressing the upper part of them, because the units are pressurized.

F-4-120

10)Remove the terminal cover. F-4-119

• 1 claw

F-4-121

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-62

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

11)Remove the 1 screw retaining the terminal.

4-63

12)Releasing the claw, take out the terminal plate to the arrow direction.

x1

F-4-123 F-4-122

CAUTION: Points to Caution when installing the terminal plate • Install the terminal plate while releasing a nail.

• Confirm that the terminal plate is fixed by 3 nails.

F-4-124

F-4-125

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-63

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

13)Press the both sides of the connector holder with the condition that the connector is

4-64

15)Take out the fixing film unit.

attached, and then remove the connect holder.

x2

F-4-126

F-4-128

14)Disconnect the connector from the drawer connector.

x1

F-4-127

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Fixing Film Unit

4-64

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller

Removing the Pressure Roller

4-65

3) Remove the fixing entrance guide. • 1 claw

1)Remove the fixing film unit. (Refer to page 4-59) 2)Remove the cable holder. • 1 screw

x1 x1

F-4-129

F-4-130

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller

4-65

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller

4) Insert the 5 to 6 sheets of plain paper between the fixing entrance guide and the pressure

4-66

5)Remove the pressure roller.

roller so that all ribs of the exit guide are covered with the paper. CAUTION: If the pressure roller is removed without inserting paper, the pressure roller will contact with the ribs on the exit guide so that the surface of the pressure roller is damaged. Surely insert the 5 to 6 sheets of paper between the fixing entrance guide and the pressure roller before removing the pressure roller.

F-4-132

F-4-131

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller

4-66

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller

6)Remove the E ring, pressure roller gear, bushings and bearings.

4-67

CAUTION: When the pressure roller is installed, set the pressure roller after covering the whole surface of the roller with 5 to 6 sheets of plain paper. Pull out the paper by turning the pressure roller gear with a hand.

F-4-133

F-4-134

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Fixing System > Removing the Pressure Roller

4-67

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1

Pickup Feed System

4-68

Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1 1) Draw out the cassette.

Removing the Right Cover Unit

2) Open the right cover. 3) Remove the stopper cover.

1) Open the right cover.

• 1 Screw

2) Open the rear right cover (Upper).(Refer to page 4-22) 3) Remove the right cover unit. • 1 Connector

x1

• 1 Wire Saddle • 1 Pin

x1 x1

F-4-136

4) Remove the right cover (lower).(only when the cassette feeding unit is not installed) 5) Remove the rear right cover (lower).(Refer to page 4-23)

F-4-135

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1

4-68

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1

4-69

6) Remove the handle cover.

9) Remove the cassette pickup unit 1.

7) Remove the front right cover (lower)

• 5 Screws

• 3 Screws • 2 Claws

x5 x2 x3

F-4-139

NOTE: Open the right cover unit to the maximum, and remove it while lifting the rear side of the paper pickup unit 1.

F-4-137

8) Remove the connection cable. • 2 Connectors • 4 Clamps

x2 x4

F-4-138

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 1

4-69

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 2

4-70

Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 2 1) Draw out the cassette. 2) Open the right cover. 3) Remove the right cover (lower).(only when the cassette feeding unit is not installed) 4) Remove the rear right cover (lower).(Refer to page 4-23) 5) Remove the front right cover (lower).(Refer to page 4-69) 6) Unload the cable harness from the cable guide. • 1 Connector • 1 Wire Saddle

x1 x1

F-4-140

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Pickup Unit 2

4-70

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller

4-71

Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller

7) Remove the cassette pickup unit 2. • 4 Screws

CAUTION: Do not touch the roller surface during work.

x4

1) Remove the manual feed pickup roller cover. • 1 Screw

x1 F-4-141

F-4-142

2) Release the claws, and then slide the bushing (front). 3) Remove the manual feed pickup roller. • 1 Claw

x1

Claw F-4-143

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller

4-71

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad

NOTE: Reassemble the manual feed pickup roller as shown. 1. Fit the hole of the manual feed pickup roller to the projection of the bushing (rear) and attach it. 2. Press down the separation pad. 3. Attach the bushing (front) to the manual feed pickup roller.

4-72

Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad CAUTION: Do not touch the pad surface during work.

1) Remove the manual feed pickup roller. (Refer to page 4-71) 2) Slide the bushing (rear) backward. • 1 Claw

x1

F-4-144

3) Remove the separation pad with a flat-blade screwdriver. NOTE: When replacing the consumable parts, be sure to clear the parts counter. (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-FD-RL)

NOTE: Insert a screwdriver diagonally.

F-4-145

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Manual Feed Separation Pad

4-72

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Feed Roller

NOTE: When replacing the consumable parts, be sure to clear the parts counter. (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > M-SP-PD)

4-73

Removing the Cassette Feed Roller CAUTION: Do not touch the roller surface during work.

Removing the Cassette Pickup Roller

1) Draw out the cassette from the main unit.

CAUTION:

2) Open the right cover.

Do not touch the roller surface during work.

3) Remove the cassette transfer roller. • 1 Claw

1) Draw out the cassette from the main unit. 2) Open the right cover.

x1

3) Remove the leaf spring with your fingers. 4) Remove the cassette pickup roller. • 1 claw

x1

F-4-147

NOTE: When replacing the consumable parts, be sure to clear the parts counter. - Cassette 1 (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-FD-RL) - Cassette 2 (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-FD-RL) F-4-146

NOTE: When replacing the consumable parts, be sure to clear the parts counter. - Cassette 1 (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-PU-RL) - Cassette 2 (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-PU-RL)

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Cassette Feed Roller

4-73

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Assembly

Removing the Cassette Separation Roller

4-74

Removing the Main Drive Assembly 1) Open the right cover.

CAUTION:

2) Remove the waste toner container. (Refer to page 4-53)

Do not touch the roller surface during work.

3) Remove the drum unit. (Refer to page 4-53) 4) Remove the toner supply cover. (Refer to page 4-15) 5) Remove the developing assembly. (Refer to page 4-48)

1) Draw out the cassette from the main unit.

6) Remove the rear cover. (Refer to page 4-20)

2) Open the right cover.

7) Remove the right rear cover (Upper). (Refer to page 4-22)

3) Remove the cassette separation roller.

8) Remove the controller box cover.

• 1 Claw

• 6 Hooks Hook

x1

Hook

F-4-148

Hook F-4-149

NOTE: When replacing the consumable parts, be sure to clear the parts counter. - Cassette 1 (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C1-SP-RL) - Cassette 2 (COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > C2-SP-RL)

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Assembly

4-74

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Assembly

4-75

9) Remove the main controller PCB 1.(Refer to page 4-36)

13) Remove the 3 clutches.

10) Remove the HDD unit.(Refer to page 4-41)

• 3 E-rings

11) Remove the small cover.

• 3 Connectors

• 2 Screws

x3

x2

F-4-152 F-4-150

12) Remove the HVT PCB unit.

14) Remove the main motor. • 1 Connector

• 1 Connector

• 4 Screws

• 2 Screws

x1 x4

x2

F-4-153 F-4-151

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Assembly

4-75

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the No.2 Deliivery Assembly

4-76

Removing the No.2 Deliivery Assembly

15) Remove the main drive assembly. • 4 Screws

1) Open the right cover.

• Cable

2) Remove the drive cover. • 1 Claw

x4

x1

F-4-154

Claw F-4-155

3) Remove the No.2 deliivery assembly. • 1 Connector • 2 Screws

x1 x2

F-4-156

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the No.2 Deliivery Assembly

4-76

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the No.1 Deliivery Drive Assembly

Removing the No.1 Deliivery Assembly

4-77

9) Remove the fixing unit. (Refer to page 4-57) 10) Remove the No.1 deliivery assembly.

1) Open the right cover.

• 1 Screw

2) Remove the inside base cover. (Refer to page 4-18) 3) Remove the waste toner container. (Refer to page 4-53) 4) Remove the drum unit. (Refer to page 4-53)

x1

5) Remove the toner container. 6) Remove the toner supply cover. (Refer to page 4-15) 7) Remove the delivery rear cover (upper/lower). • 1 Screw 8) Remove the delivery tray. • 1 Screw

x1

F-4-158

Removing the No.1 Deliivery Drive Assembly 1) Remove the No.1 deliivery assembly. 2) Remove the No.1 deliivery drive assembly. • 1 Connector • 3 Screws

x1

x1 F-4-157

x3

Connector F-4-159

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > Pickup Feed System > Removing the No.1 Deliivery Drive Assembly

4-77

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the HVT PCB

External Auxiliary System

4-78

Removing the HVT PCB

Removing the DC Controller PCB

1) Remove the rear cover. (Refer to page 4-20) 2) Disconnect all connectors on the HVT PCB.



3) Remove the HVT PCB.

1) Backup of the Service Mode data

• 1 Connector

(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP

• 3 Screws

1) Remove the rear cover. (Refer to page 4-20) 2) Remove the lower rear cover. (Refer to page 4-21) 3) Disconnect all connectors on the DC controller PCB. 4) Remove the DC controller PCB. • 4 Screws

x3

x4 F-4-161

F-4-160

1) Restoring the backup data (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES 2) If uploading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage to the DC controller PCB, enter the values of service mode items recorded on the service label. 3) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. (Turning OFF/ON the main power switch allows the values entered for the service mode items to take effect.)

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the HVT PCB

4-78

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Control Panel Assembly

Removing the Power Supply PCB

4-79

Removing the Control Panel Assembly





1) Remove the inside base cover. (Refer to page 4-18)

1) Remove the reader front cover. (Refer to page 4-14)

2) Remove the left cover. (Refer to page 4-18)

2) Remove the control panel assembly.

3) Remove the left rear cover. (Refer to page 4-19)

• 4 Screws

4) Remove the power supply PCB.

• 2 Claws

• All connectors on the PCB

• 2 Connectors

• 3 Screws

• 1 Reuse Band • 5 Wire Saddles

x3 x2 x2

F-4-162

Reuse Band Wire Saddle

x2 x6 x2 Wire Saddle F-4-163

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Control Panel Assembly

4-79

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Air Filter

4-80

Removing the Air Filter 1) Open the right cover. 2) Remove the filter cover (fornt/rear).

x2

F-4-164

3) Remove the air filter (fornt/rear).

F-4-165

4

Parts Replacement and Cleaning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Air Filter

4-80

5

Adjustment ■ ■Overview ■ Replacing Parts ■When

5

Adjustment

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > Platen Glass

Overview

5-2

When Replacing Parts

In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are mentioned. Parts to be replaced are categorized into 3 blocks based on their related technology as shown below.

Original Exposure System ■■Platen Glass

Parts Name Original Exposure System

Actions at Parts Replacement Platen Glass ADF Scan Glass CCD Unit Laser Scanner Unit HDD Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 TPM PCB DC Controller PCB

Controller System

External Auxiliary System



Reference p. 5-2 p. 5-3 p. 5-3 p. 5-6 p. 5-8 p. 5-10 p. 5-11 p. 5-14 p. 5-7

"Removing the Platen Glass"(page 4-24). Take the action stated below in the service mode.

CAUTION: Be sure to make the white plate data adjustment before ADF white level adjustment.

T-5-1

W-PLT-X

W-PLT-Y

W-PLT-Z F-5-1

1. Enter the value indicated on the platen glass in the following service mode: (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > W-PLT-X/Y/Z (Input of standard white plate data) 2. Enter the service mode, and then select the following: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.)

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > Platen Glass

5-2

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > CCD Unit

3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following

5-3

glass for stream reading.)

servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.)

■■CCD Unit 1) Backup of the Service Mode data (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMBUP "Removing the CCD Unit"(page 4-26).

■■ADF Scan Glass "Removing the Platen Glass"(page 4-24).

NOTE: The EEPROM on the CCD PCB memorizes the reader-related service mode. The CCD unit of the service part is supplied in the state that adjustment value was written.

1. Enter the service mode, and then select the following: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 1.If uploading of backup data succeeds before replacement 1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following

1) Restoring the backup data (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > RSRAMRES

servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1

2) Input the service label value packaged in the service parts content.

Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK

When changing the setting value, write a changed value in the service label inside the reader rear cover.

mode.) 2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > CCD Unit

5-3

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > CCD Unit

COPIER > ADJUST > CCD >

(Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1)

3) Perform the following in the service mode:

5-4

adjustment)

MTF3-M1 MTF3-M2 MTF3-M3 MTF3-M4 MTF3-M5 MTF3-M6 MTF3-M7 MTF3-M8 MTF3-M9 100-RG 100-GB 50-RG 50-GB 100-RG-2 100-GB-2 50-RG-2 50-GB-2 100-RG-3 100-GB-3 50-RG-3 50-GB-3

5) Make an output of P-PRINT. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 6) Store the outputted P-PRINT into the service book. 7) After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image.

T-5-2

(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 3-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 3-2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 3-3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 3-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 4) Enter the service mode, and then select the following: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS CCD (stream reading position

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > CCD Unit

5-4

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > CCD Unit

5-5

2.If uploading of backup data fails before replacement

2) Confirm the setting value of the following service mode. Set it depending on the model.

1) Input a value in the service label inside the reader rear cover. Because the value is written

• (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SENS-CNF (Setting of original detection size)

in at a new CCD unit, the input of the parts with a diagonal line is unnecessary. COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY>

FEEDER > ADJUST > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD >

(Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1) (Lv.1)

0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration • (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODELSZ2 (Paper size detection global support

ADJ-X ADJ-Y ADJ-S ADJ-X-MG ADJ-Y-DF STRD-POS DOCST LA-SPEED OFST-P-K MTF3-M1 MTF3-M2 MTF3-M3 MTF3-M4 MTF3-M5 MTF3-M6 MTF3-M7 MTF3-M8 MTF3-M9 100-RG 100-GB 50-RG 50-GB 100DF-RG 100DF-GB 50DF-RG 50DF-GB 100-RG-2 100-GB-2 50-RG-2 50-GB-2 100-RG-3 100-GB-3 50-RG-3 50-GB-3 W-PLT-X W-PLT-Y W-PLT-Z

in bookmode) 0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media. • (Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > KSIZE-SW (Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support) 0: Not supported, 1: Supported 3) Perform the following in the service mode: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/2/3/4 (DF white level adjustment) 3-1) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 3-2) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 3-3) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the platen glass, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 Read the white level in the BOOK mode. (Check the transparency of the glass for BOOK mode.) 3-4) Place a sheet of paper that the user usually uses on the DF, enter the following servicemode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL4 T-5-3

Read the white level in the DF mode (stream reading). (Check the transparency of the glass for stream reading.) 4) Enter the service mode, and then select the following: (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > STRD-POS CCD (stream reading position adjustment) 5) Adjust tray width. Perform either AB system or Inch system. a. AB system adjustment 1) Adjust the slide guide to the index "A4/A3". 2) Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-A4

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > CCD Unit

5-5

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > Laser Scanner Unit

3) Press OK, and register the A4 width. 4) Adjust the slide guide to the index "A5R". 5) Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- A5R 6) Press OK, and register the A5R width. b. Inch system adjustment 1) Adjust the slide guide to the index "LTR/11x17". 2) Select the item in the service mode.

5-6

■■Laser Scanner Unit "Removing the Laser Scanner Unit"(page 4-46). • When replacing the laser unit, enter the values recorded on the label affixed to the laser unit to be replaced for the following in the service mode:

(Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY-LTR 3) Press OK, and register the LTR width. 4) Adjust the slide guide to the index "STMT/LTRR/LGL".

-10

0

147

136

93

Ｂ

Ｃ

Ｄ

Ａ Ｅ

16

117

Ｆ

Ｇ

5) Select the item in the service mode. (Lv.1) FEEDER > FUNCTION > TRY- LTRR 6) Press OK, and register the LTRR width. 6) Finalize the setting in the following service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > CCD-CHNG > 1 (Data at factory shipment is not used) 7) Make an output of P-PRINT. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT 8) Store the outputted P-PRINT into the service book. 9) After turning OFF/ON the power, make a copy and check the copied image.

F-5-2

Adjust of write start position of laser A.(LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST > 136 Difference in magnification between the lasers. B.(LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ1-K > -10 C.(LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ2-K > 0 D.(LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ3-K > 147 Difference in the phase between the lasers E.(LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ4-K > 93 F.(LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ5-K > 16 G.(LV1) COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > LDADJ6-K > 117

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Original Exposure System > Laser Scanner Unit

5-6

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB

5-7

External Auxiliary System ■■DC Controller PCB 1) Backup of the Service Mode data (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP "Removing the DC Controller PCB"(page 4-78). 1) Upgrade of DC Controller PCB To ensure correct behavior, upgrade the firmware to the latest firmware combination. • When SST is used to upgrade the version, the upgrade needs to be performed in simple mode. • When download menu (USB) is used to upgrade the version, select service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD, and then press [OK]. download Menu (USB) > Upgrade(Auto) to upgrade the version. 2) Restoring the backup data (Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES 3) If uploading of backup data fails before replacement due to the damage to the DC controller PCB, enter the values of service mode items recorded on the service label. 4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. (Turning OFF/ON the main power switch allows the values entered for the service mode items to take effect.)

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB

5-7

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > HDD

Controller System

5-8 Target data

User

Data File of Advanced Box Advanced box account

■■HDD HDD 4-41 1. Before Replacing Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. 1) Backup of the set/registered data Use the Remote UI. Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up/Restore Target data: Target data

User

Address List

Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Address Lists))

Forwarding Settings Set Paper Information Favorite Settings Default Settings Shortcut settings for "Options" Previous Settings Button Size information Wallpaper Setting Button information in Quick Menu Restrict Quick Menu Button settings in Main Menu Button settings on the top of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Other settings for Main Menu User Box specification settings (Register Box Name, Password, Time until Document Auto Erase, Print uponstoring from the printer driver) Image data of User Box, Confidential Fax Box, and System Box Image Data

5

Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Paper Information)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Quick Menu)) Remote UI(Bacup/Restore)

Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Remote UI(User Access Control for Advanced Box) Network place setting information Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode Remote UI(Bacup/Restore) Web Access setting information Remote UI(block of Export/Import) MEAP application License files for MEAP applications SMS User authentication information registered in the Local SSO-H Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) Data saved using MEAP applications SMS (Service Management Service) password of MEAP Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Job logs Key Pair and Certificate and CRL in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values PS font Key and settings information to be used for encryption Settings/Registration(Management Settings when TPM is ON > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings) Audit Log Remote UI(Settings/Registration > Device Management > Export/Clear Audit Log)* T-5-4

* Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported. 2) Printing the set/registered data Use the service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed. 2. After Replacing 1) HDD format 1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn ON the main powerswitch.) 1-2) Use SST to format all partitions. 2) Downloading system software

Remote UI(Bacup/Restore)

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > HDD

2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others). 3) Initializing the key pair, certificate and CRL

5-8

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > HDD

(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY 4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch 5) Restoring the backup data Use the Remote UI. Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export Management Settings > Data Management > Back Up/Restore 6) Resetting/registering the data While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement, reset/register the data. 7) When the user generates and adds the key pair, certificate and/or CRL, request the user to generate them again. 8) Executing “Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)” Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation

5-9 When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced, reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following procedures. 1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press “OK” button.(e.g.: If No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter “1” of the leading card.) 2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations from Settings/Registration mode. In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals, be sure that “ID00000001” to “ID00001000” are created. Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then, turn OFF and ON the main power switch. If “System Manager ID” and “System PIN” are not registered, “card registration to device” cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting operation. 3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body again. 4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card ID is displayed. 5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting Manager is collected.

CAUTION:Points to Caution when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other achine (different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > HDD

5-9

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1

■■Main Controller PCB 1

5-10

In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.



1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB

Main Controller PCB 1 4-36

• Flash PCB



• TPM PCB

Service part: Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 1 + Controller Box Frame + Cooling Fan Parts number differs on a model basis (speed basis). Main Controller PCB 1

Cooling Fan

TPM PCB

Controller BOX Frame

Flash PCB F-5-4

F-5-3

5

NOTE: Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1

5-10

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

■■Main Controller PCB 2

5-11

Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand. 1) Backup of the set/registered data



Use the Remote UI.

Main Controller PCB 2 4-37

Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export



Target data:

Service part: Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 2 + Controller Box Frame

Target data Address List

Main Controller PCB 2

Forwarding Settings Preferences(Except for Paper Type Management Settings) Adjustment/Maintenance Function Settingss(Except for Printer Custom Settings, Forwarding Settings) Set Destination(Except for Address List) Management Settings(Except for Address List) Printer Settings

User Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Address Lists)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Device Settings)) -

Remote UI(Import/Export Individually(Printer Settings)) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF Key and settings information to be used for encryption when Settings/Registration(Management TPM is ON Settings > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings) Service mode setting values (MN-CON) T-5-5 F-5-5

1. Before Replacing

Note: Back Up/Restore of the SRAM at the time of replacement of the Main Controller 2 is available provided that the HDD is not replaced.

HDD can evacuate in SRAM of Main Controller PCB 2 with a service mode. Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK[5] BACKUP But You cannot use this function when there is HDD Encryption Board. When there is HDD Encryption Board, like before, I back it up in the following procedures.

2) Printing the set/registered data Use the service mode. (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed.

a) Back up contents of the SRAM by SST; and re-after board exchange; store it. Refer to "SRAM backup method when there is HDD Encryption Board". b) Back up contents of the SRAM by USB memory; and re-after board exchange; store it. Refer to "Backup SRAM of Main controller 2 by USB memory". c) Like before, You back it up in a procedure as follows.

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

5-11

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

SRAM backup method when there is HDD Encryption Board

5-12

Backup SRAM of Main controller 2 by USB memory:

When the HDD Encryption Board is installed while the version of SST is Ver. 4.41 or later, you do not need to format the HDD or install the system even if you replace Main Controller

Prepare for:

PCB 2 as long as you can restore the SRAM image.

"USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine is stored."

Procedure:

or

SST Ver.4.41or later, obey Steps to Upload Data; Single > Upload Data > SramImg.bin

The USB memory recognize it in the Host machine.

> Save

On USB memory, You make the blank folder of the same name to recognize USB memory on a service mode when You registered a system software for Host machine by SST.

When the HDD Encryption Board is installed: Data in the HDD is encrypted when the HDD Encryption Board is installed.

Ex: iA4245

For Main Controller PCB 2 to access to data in the HDD, the file description of the Encryption key on the HDD Encryption Board needs to be the same as that of SRAM

Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK

on Main Controller PCB 2; otherwise, Main Controller PCB 2 cannot access to the

[5] BACKUP

data in the HDD and this causes failure in startup of the machine.

According to a list, perform a Backup Restore as follows. Viewpoint of the Table:

When the following parts are replaced, the procedure is as follows:

Title

[[[[[ download Menu (HDD) ]]]]]]]]]]] -----------------------------Select line [5]: Backup [8]: download Menu 2

• Replacement of the HDD Encryption Board > Inconsistent description of encryption key file between Main Controller PCB 2 and SRAM on the HDD Encryption Board. • Replacement of Main Controller PCB 2 > Inconsistent description of encryption key file between Main Controller PCB 2 and SRAM on the HDD Encryption Board.

[Reset]: Shutdown

• Replacement with a new HDD > Select the following because there is no system data in the HDD: Format ALL >

Waiting SST Connection Checking USB.

Download the system software With SST Ver. 4.31 or before, it was necessary to format the HDD (Format ALL), and then install the system in any case. With SST Ver.4.41 or later, if the description of SRAM (SramImg.bin) on Main Controller PCB 2 is kept in the PC, you can restore SramImg.bin on Main Controller PCB 2 by using SST after holding down 2 and 8 to start the machine. When the description of SRAM on Main Controller PCB 2 can be restored, it means that the file description is the same as that of the encryption key on the HDD Encryption Board,

1 2 3 4 5

Title download Menu (HDD) download Menu (USB) download Menu (USB) Backup Menu (USB) Backup Menu (USB)

which enables access to the HDD.

Select line

Operation Connect USB memory. [5]: Backup "5" /[5] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0" [7]: SRAM(USB) "7" /[7] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0" F-5-6

Therefore, you do not need to format the HDD or install the system when the file description of SRAM can be restored even if replacing Main Controller PCB 2.

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

5-12

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

2. When Replacing

Backup SRAM of Main controller 2 by USB memory Title Select line

Operation

1

download Menu (HDD)

2 3

download Menu (USB) download Menu (USB)

[5]: Backup /[5] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

Connect USB memory. "5" "0"

4

Backup Menu (USB)

[7]: SRAM(USB)

"7"

5

Backup Menu (USB)

/[7] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

6

"0"

7

[SramImg.bin] Backup OK. ---Please hit any key--Backup Menu (USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

8

download Menu (USB)

[Reset]: Shutdown

"Reset"

9

download Menu (USB)

/[Reset] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0"

10

download Menu (USB)

Remove USB Device then shut down. ---Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown.---

11

A power supply is cut automatically.

5-13

1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB • DDR2-SDRAM • Memory PCB

Memory PCB

"C"

Remove USB memory. "Reset"

DDR2-SDRAM

T-5-6

SRAM Restore While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch. Title

Restore in SramImg.bin in the USB memory Select line

Operation

1

download Menu (HDD)

2

download Menu (USB)

[8]: download Menu 2

Connect USB memory. "8"

3

download Menu (USB)

/[8] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

4

download Menu 2nd (USB) [2]: Restore

"2"

5

download Menu 2nd (USB) /[2] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

6

Restore Menu (USB)

[2]: SRAM(USB)

"2"

7

Restore Menu (USB)

/[2] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0

"0"

8

"0"

9

[SramImg.bin] Restore OK. ---Plese hit any key--Restore Menu (USB) [C]: Return to download Menu 2nd

10

download Menu 2nd (USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

"C"

11

download Menu (USB)

[Reset]: Shutdown

"Reset"

12

download Menu (USB)

/[Reset] has been selected. Execute?/-(OK):0 "0"

13

download Menu (USB)

Remove USB Device then shut down. ---Please hit Reset Key to start shutdown.---

14 A power supply is cut automatically.

F-5-7

Prohibited Operation: Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial number).If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might cause to fail the restoration. • Main Controller PCB 1 • Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)

"C"

• Memory PCB

Remove USB memory. "Reset" T-5-7

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 2

5-13

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > TPM PCB

3. After Replacing 1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch. 2) Restoring the backup data

5-14

■■TPM PCB .Main Controller PCB 1 4-36

Perform following either: a) You download it if You upload SramImg.bin by SST. SST Ver.4.41or later, obaey Steps to Download Data; Single > Download Data > SramImg.bin > Start b) Carry out Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK [8] Download Menu 2 > [2] Restore

When TPM setting is “OFF” Any operation is not necessary at replacement. When TPM setting is “ON” It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to “ON”.

if You carry out [5]BACKUP

1) Removing the network cable

c) Use the Remote UI.

Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access

Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export 3) Resetting/registering the data While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed out before replacement, reset/register the data. 4) When the user generates and adds the key pair, certificate and/or CRL, request the user to generate them again

5

via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately. 2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch 3) Restoring the TPM key Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key 4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > TPM PCB

5-14

5

5

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > TPM PCB

Adjustment > When Replacing Parts > Controller System > TPM PCB

5-15

5-15

6

Troubleshooting ■ Check ■Initial ■ Print ■Test ■ items ■Troubleshooting ■ upgrade ■Version ■ System Failure ■Startup Diagnosis ■ Self Diagnosis ■Controller ■ Upgrade via CDS ■Version ■ Codes ■Error ■ log ■Debug

6

Troubleshooting

6

Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Initial check items list

Initial Check

6-2 Item

1 2

Initial check items list Item

No. Detail 1 2

Site Environment

3 4 5 6

Checking the Paper Checking the Placement of Paper

1 2 1 2

1 Checking the Durables 2 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts

Check

The voltage of the power supply is as rated (+/-10%). The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi re or dust. The site is not subject to ammonium gas. The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.) The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine level. The machine's power plug remains connected to the power outlet. The paper is of a recommended type. The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package. Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specific level. If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray. Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end of its life. Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached the time of replacement.

Pickup feed system

1

Reader

Image formation system

2 3 4 1 2 3 1

Fixing system 2 3

4

6 Drive system

Cassette

1 2 1 2 3 4 1

General

Checking Each Unit/Each Function System No. Detail

3

5

T-6-1

Item

No. Detail

6 7 1

Check

Check that there is no cut, dirt or any foreign particle on the scanner system parts. Check that the CCD unit moves smoothly and there is no dirt on the rail. Check that the lump light does not blink. Check that there is no dew condensation found on the scanning system parts. Check that the drum unit and developing assembly are properly installed. Check that there is no cut and dirt on the photosensitive drum. Check that the transfer roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/dirt. Check that the fixing film and pressure roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/dirt. Check that the fixing thermistor wire is not cut. Check that there is electrical conductivity among thermoswitch.

2 3 4 5

Others 2

Check

Check that there is no foreign particle such as paper dust etc. Check that the pickup/feed/separation roller does not accumulate the paper dust. Check that these rollers are not worn and deformed and have no cut/dirt. Check that the registration roller/paper path roller is not worn and deformed and has no cut/dirt. Check that the feed guide is not worn and deformed and has no cut/ dirt. Check that there is no edge fold/curl/wave/moisture absorption occurred on the paper. Check if using Canon recommended paper/transparency makes it better or not. Check that the drive system does not get heavy load. Check that the gear is not worn and not get chipped. Check that the cassette is installed properly and the paper size is configured properly. Check if the symptom appears or not after replacing the cassette with the cassette that works normally. Check that the cassette middle plate moves smoothly and is not deformed. Check that the cassette side guide plate/ trailing edge guide plate is properly set. Check that the cassette heater switch is ON (When the cassette heater is installed.). Check that the sensor/clutch/motor/solenoid works properly (Make sure to check the power source and signal transmission route with the general circuit diagram.). Check that there is no wire wedged/screw loosened. Check that all the external covers are installed. Check that the main power switch/control panel power switch is ON. Check that the wiring of power cable/signal cable to each option is properly installed. Check that the fuse on each PCB does not burn out. Check that there is no error in customer's usage method. If moving the machine from the cold place such as storage etc to a warm place abruptly, dew condensation is generated inside machine and it may cause various troubles. • E100 occurs due to dew condensation on BD sensor. • Low image density in the vertical scanning direction due to dew condensation on the dust-proof glass. • Low image density due to dew condensation on the reader CCD and copyboard glass. • Paper feed failure due to dew condensation on the pickup, feed guide. If the symptom d appears, wipe the pickup/feed unit with dry cloth. Moreover, if storing the toner container/developing assembly/drum unit in the cold place and unpacking them abruptly in warm place, dew condensation may be generated. To prevent dew condensation, place them in warm place sufficiently (for 1 to 2 hours) before unpacking. T-6-2

6

Troubleshooting > Initial Check > Initial check items list

6-2

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > Overview

6-3

Test Print Overview PG TYPE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Pattern

Gradation

Normal copy/print Grid 17 gradations Tbic rank 2 17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen) Solid white Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) Solid black Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces) Horizontal line (6 dots, 50 spaces) Horizontal line (2 dots, 3 spaces) Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) Halftone (density: 60H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) 15 to 50: For development

Transfer Fogging failure

Black line

Image check item Uneven White Uneven density line pitch (rear/ front)

Right angle accuracy Straight line accuracy

Side Magnification Shock registration ratio

PCB to generate PG

Yes

Yes

Yes

--Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 2 Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2

Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Main Controller PCB 2 --T-6-3

NOTE: When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases. 1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11. 2. When the setting value of the following service mode is "2" (TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5. COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > Overview

6-3

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)

How to View the Test Print

6-4

■■17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)

■■Grid (TYPE=1)

F-6-2

Check item F-6-1

Check item Right angle accuracy/ Straight line accuracy Side registration Magnification ratio

Check method

Assumed cause

Check whether lines in the horizontal/ vertical scanning directions are Feed system failure or Laser Scanner Unit paralleled to the paper and these lines failure is considered. are at right angles to one another. Floor at the installation site is extremely Check the left margin. distorted, or the feed system failure is considered. Check whether the grid is printed at Rollers’ feed system failure or laser 9.99mm intervals. (Check the image on exposure system failure (drum, Laser the second side at duplex printing.) Scanner) is considered.

Check method

Gradation

Check whether gradation in density is made appropriately.

Black line

Check whether black lines appear on the image.

White line

Check whether white lines appear on the image.

Assumed cause Drum failure, laser exposure system failure or developing system failure is considered. Laser light path failure, developing system failure, cleaning (drum) failure or transfer roller failure is considered. Developing system failure is considered. T-6-5

T-6-4

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)

6-4

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)

■■Solid white (TYPE=4)

6-5

NOTE:

• When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases. 1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11. 2. When the setting value of the following service mode is "2" (TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5. COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2

Check item

F-6-3

Check item Fogging

Check method

Assumed cause

Check whether foggy image appears in Drum failure, laser exposure system failure the blank area. or developing system failure is considered. T-6-6

■■Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)

Check method

Assumed cause

Check the evenness of halftone Transfer system failure or transfer roller Transfer failure density. Check whether uneven image failure is considered. or foggy image appears. Laser light path failure, grid failure, Check whether black lines appear on Black line developing system failure, cleaning (drum) the image. failure or transfer roller failure is considered. Check whether white lines appear on White line Developing system failure is considered. the image. Check whether lines appear on the Drum failure, developing system failure, Uneven pitch image in the horizontal scanning laser exposure system failure or drivedirection. related failure is considered. Uneven Check the density difference between Drum failure or developing system failure is density the front and rear sides. considered. (rear/front) Floor at the installation site is extremely Side Check the left margin. distorted, or the feed system failure is registration considered. Rollers’ feed system failure or laser Check whether horizontal lines appear Shock exposure system failure (drum, Laser on the image. Scanner) is considered. T-6-7

F-6-4

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)

6-5

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)

■■Solid black (TYPE=7)

■■Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)

F-6-5

Check item

6-6

Check method

F-6-6

Assumed cause

Check the evenness of halftone Transfer failure density. Check whether uneven image or foggy image appears. Check whether lines appear on the Uneven pitch image in the horizontal scanning direction. Uneven Check the density difference between density the front and rear sides. (rear/front)

Check item

Transfer system failure is considered.

Black line

Drum failure, developing system failure, laser exposure system failure or driverelated failure is considered.

White line

Drum failure or developing system failure is considered. T-6-8

Uneven pitch Uneven density (rear/front)

Check method Check whether black lines appear on the image. Check whether white lines appear on the image. Check whether lines appear on the image in the horizontal scanning direction. Check the density difference between the front and rear sides.

Assumed cause Laser light path failure, developing system failure, cleaning (drum) failure or transfer roller failure is considered. Developing system failure is considered. Drum failure, developing system failure, laser exposure system failure or driverelated failure is considered. Drum failure or developing system failure is considered. T-6-9

6

Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)

6-6

6

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner

Troubleshooting items

[Occurrence condition] (A lump of) paper dust is stuck on the static eliminator of the pre-registration guide.

Troubleshooting items Category Image failure

Operation failure

Item

[Remedy]

Reference

Dirt

Central image tail trace

6-7 6-7

Blur/Void

Paper reverse side stained with toner Stained leading/trailing edge of paper Image transfer wrong/text void Image deletion/blur/dew condensation Too large curl

Paper jam

6-7

Cleaning of the static eliminator of the pre-registration transfer guide 1) Remove the right cover. 2) Lightly tap a contaminated part of the static eliminator to remove the paper dust.

6-8 6-8 6-9 6-9

Paper jam due to solid image 6-9 printed on paper with small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm) Thin paper jam (63g/m2 or less) 6-10 T-6-10

Image Faults ■■Scattered image at center

F-6-8

■■Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner

F-6-7

[Occurrence area]

F-6-9

Pre-registration guide (Static eliminator)

[Occurrence area] Fixing assembly (circumference of the roller: approx.94mm)

[Cause] An image is scattered by paper dust stuck on the static eliminator of the pre-registration guide.

Transfer roller (circumference: approx.50mm) [Cause]

6

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Paper Reverse Side Stained with Toner

6-7

6

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void

6-8

Fixing assembly: Toner came off the paper sticks to the pressure roller, and then the toner sticks to the reverse side of the paper.

[Occurrence condition]

Transfer roller: Toner remained on the drum that had stopped at occurrence of a jam. During

When halftone or solid-black images are printed in succession

the recovery operation performed later, the toner sticks to the transfer roller. [Remedy] [Occurrence condition]

Using lens-cleaning paper or the like, clean the guide stained with toner.

Fixing assembly: When fixing ability is poor due to low temperature, a halftone image has been printed on a lot of sheets of paper, or the time for replacement of the transfer unit is near

■■Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void

Transfer roller: When a paper jam has occurred or the time for replacement of the transfer roller is near. [Remedy] Fixing assembly: Service mode(Lv.2)> COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> FIX-CLN> OK Transfer Roller: Service mode(Lv.2)> COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEANING> TR-CLN> OK

■■Stained Leading/Trailing Edge of Paper

[Occurrence area] Transfer roller (circumference: 50mm) [Cause] Resistance of paper increases due to reduction in paper water content, resulting in insufficient transfer output. Resistance of paper decreases due to increase in paper water content, resulting in excessive F-6-10

[Occurrence area]

transfer output. [Occurrence condition]

Transfer front guide

Paper left alone in a low-humidity environment

Fixing inlet guide

Paper left alone in a high-humidity environment

[Cause] Transfer front guide: The leading or trailing edge of paper touches the toner stuck to the transfer front upper guide. Fixing inlet guide: The leading or trailing edge of paper touches the toner stuck to the fixing inlet guide.

6

[Remedy] • Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-TR> TROPT-SW> -2 to 1 -2/-1: Transfer output voltage decreases. 0: OFF

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Image Transfer Wrong/Text Void

6-8

6

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with Small Leading-Edge Margin (1-4 mm)

1: Transfer output voltage increases.

6-9

[Cause] The water content on the front surface of paper becomes different from that on the reverse

■■Image Deletion/Blur/Dew Condensation

side of paper, making the curl larger. [Occurrence condition] When the paper has been left alone in a high-humidity environment. [Remedy] • Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TBLC> 0 to 3 0: Auto 1: OFF 2: N1 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes low.) 3: N3 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes moreover low.) • Machine shipped with cassette heater: Turn on the heater. F-6-11

[Occurrence area]

• Install an optional cassette heater.

■■Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with Small

Drum (circumference: 94mm)

Leading-Edge Margin (1-4 mm)

[Cause] Corona products generated on the charging roller stick to the drum, and then water molecules

[Occurrence area]

adsorb onto them, resulting in reduction in resistance.

Fixing assembly

Therefore, a desired latent image cannot be formed, resulting in a blurred image. [Occurrence condition]

[Cause]

When the machine is operated first in the morning under the high-temperature and high

When a solid image is printed on the paper with a small leading-edge margin (1-4 mm), paper

humidity environment.

cannot be easily separated from the fixing film, causing a paper jam.

[Remedy]

[Occurrence condition]

• Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> ENV-SET> IMG-BLD1> 1 to 3

When the paper has been left alone in a high-humidity environment or when a solid image is printed on the paper with a small leading-edge margin.

0: OFF 1: Two minutes extension in the initial rotation 2: Four minutes extension in the initial rotation

[Remedy]

3: Six minutes extension in the initial rotation

• Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> SP-SW> 0 to 2 0: OFF

• Install the optional drum heater.

1: Separation priority mode (thin paper) 2: Separation priority mode (plain paper (2nd side))

■■Too Large Curl

• Service mode (Lv.2)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TBLC> 0 to 3

[Occurrence area]

0: Auto

Fixing assembly

1: OFF

6

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Paper Jam due to Solid Image Printed on Paper with Small Leading-Edge Margin (1-4 mm)

6-9

6

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Thin Paper Jam (63g/m2 or Less)

6-10

2: N1 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes low.) 3: N3 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes moreover low.)

■■Thin Paper Jam (63g/m2 or Less) [Occurrence area] Drum Fixing assembly [Cause] The separation power reduces due to low elasticity of paper, causing a jam in the drum assembly or fixing assembly. [Occurrence condition] When paper thinner than 64g/cm2 paper is used. [Remedy] • Service mode (Lv.1)> COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> TMP-TBL5> 0 to 2 0: OFF 1: S-thin paper mode (-10 degC compared with Thin paper mode table) 2: SS-thin paper mode (-15 degC compared with Thin paper mode table)

6

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting items > Image Faults > Thin Paper Jam (63g/m2 or Less)

6-10

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade

6-11

Version upgrade Overview ■■Overview of Version Upgrade The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.

●● Downloading System Software This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods. 1. Download via the service support tool (hereinafter “SST”) Connect this machine to the PC by the cross cable to download the system software using SST installed in the PC. 2. Download using the USB memory storage device Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device. 3. Download via Contents Delivery System (hereinafter “CDS”) Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine.

SST System Software

System CD System Software

Host Machine Download mode Normal mode /(Safe mode)

Write the system software Restart

Copy the System Software

Automatically restarted USB menu

USB memory storage device

System Software Temporary Memory Space

Activate the machine with the new system software version Done

CDS System Software

Updater F-6-12

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade

6-11

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software

6-12

■■Writing System Software The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the temporary memory space. After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the software in the machine. In case the main power switch is turned OFF during the writing process, the machine may not be started. This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS. When upgrading the system software via CDS, the warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to turn OFF the power switch.

F-6-13

When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system software. If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown. The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message, “version up…..error”. Check the name if the software is for the option not attached to the machine. If so, turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see Troubleshooting for details).

F-6-14

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Writing System Software

6-12

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode

6-13

■■Download Mode When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with other iR-series models.

●● Normal mode(recommend): • Start from Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download.

●● Safe mode: • Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.

Note Usually use Normal mode. Use Safe mode when you cannot use a service mode or an HDD format.

The normal mode of iR-ADV is different from the conventional iR series in two points of the following. • It is not necessary to do ON of power switch with while pushing 1+7 keys to 10 key. With a service mode, You can start a normal mode. • When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed. This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must start Download mode after the version information has been obtained.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode

6-13

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components

■■System Software Components

Software to be upgraded

The table below shows the system software components for this machine. This machine holds the increased number of system software components compared to conventional iR machines to meet vastly extended functionality.

Host Machine

6-14 Display on SST Registered Name of name of system product software

How to upgrade Remarks versions SST USB Others memory

Main Controller iA4245

SYSTEM

○

○

-

MEAP Controller Language Module Controller System Error Diagnosis Remote UI Contents RUI portal

MEAPCON

○

○

-

LANGUAGE ○

○

-

BCT

○

○

-

RUI

○

○

-

RPTL

○

○

-

UI-BOX

BOX

○

○

-

UI-COPY

COPY

○

○

-

UI-Intro

INTRO

○

○

-

UI-SEND

SEND

○

○

-

Voice Synthesis Dictionary Paper Type Information File Service Mode Contents Printer Controller WebDAV Contents Resources for Web Browser Reader Controller(2sided Double Pass) FAX Board Boot Program

TTS

○

○

-

MEDIA

○

○

-

SMCNT

○

○

-

DCON

○

○

-

WEBDAV

○

○

-

BROWSER

○

○

-

RCONS

○

○

-

DADF-AG1

G3CCB

○

○

-

Fax Board Main Program

G3CCM

○

○

-

Super G3 FAX Board-AP1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AP1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1 Super G3 FAX Board-AP1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AP1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1 T-6-11

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components

6-14

6 Software to be upgraded

Display on SST Registered Name of name of system product software

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process

How to upgrade Remarks versions SST USB Others memory

6-15

■■Note on Download Process Warning: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process. Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of machine start-up at power-on.

KEY

○

○

-

Staple Finisher-G1/ Booklet Finisher-G1

FIN_CON ○

○

-

Staple Finisher-G1/ Booklet Finisher-G1

SDL_CON ○

○

-

Booklet Finisher-G1

Finisher Controller

FIN_G1

Saddle Controller

SDICT

○

○

If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad).

Host Machine Key/ iAxxxx Certificatefor Encrypted Communication OCR Libraly

-

When the machine is successfully started in Safe mode, execute formatting of BOOTDEV partition, retry downloading the system software.

External 2-hole Punch Puncher B1 Controller

EXP_B1

EXP_ CON

-

-

○

External 2-hole Puncher B1

Inner Finisher-D1

IFN_D1

FIN_CON ○

○

-

Inner Finisher-D1

-

-

○

Inner 2 Hole Puncher-A1

Finisher Controller

CAUTION: Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not possible to start this machine and enter service mode. In safe mode, version information of SYSTEM, MEAPCONT, LANGUAGE, RUI, and SDICT can be obtained, but version information of other system software such as DCON and RCON cannot be obtained. Therefore the following points to note are required when downloading in safe mode. [RCON]

Inner 2 Hole Puncher-A1

The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or when "Overwrite all" of USB download menu is used. [DCON and others] T-6-12

The following symptoms occur when SST (Single mode) or USB download menu (Auto) is used. • The time for download/write becomes longer because the software is overwritten even when system software of the same version is being written. • A confirmation message is not displayed when a lower version is going to be downloaded.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process

6-15

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview

Version Upgrade via SST

6-16

●● Downloading the System Software System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST.

■■Overview

Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash

The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST. • Assist mode(recommended)

ROM. After the writing has been completed normally, this machine automatically restarts with the new system software.

• Single mode

1) The system software is downloaded.

Assist mode provides the following features. • Attached option types are automatically recognized.

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [

• The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically searched.

- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete

• The set of system software with interactive behavior confirmed is automatically downloaded.

HDD

• The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download

System Software

the system software for each accessory.

System Software Temporary storage area

Single mode provides the following features. • The system software download individually are possible. • The HDD format by manual operation are possible. • The service mode password reset are possible.

2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.

• Upload and the download of data are possible. This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts during operation. Behaviors of such system software should be confirmed when these are downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download the system

3) Writing takes place. <<<<< download shell >>>>> [ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete [ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete [ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete [ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete +++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++

software for this machine.

HDD System Software

Temporary storage area System area BOOT area

4) The main power switch is turned off and then on.

NOTE: Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.

• When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options. • When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted

FLASH ROM

5) The machine starts up using the new version.

F-6-15

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview

6-16

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software

■■Copying System Software

6-17

5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button.

●● System CD -> SST Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST. NOTE: The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity. If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST. Preparation Requirements: • PC with SST Ver.4.72 or later installed • The system CD for this machine Steps to copy the system software 1) Start the PC

F-6-17

2) Set the system CD in the PC

6) The system software stored in the system CD is listed.

3) Start SST

Uncheck the box(es) for unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click “Copy”

4) Click “Register Firmware” button.

button.

F-6-16

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software

F-6-18

6-17

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection

7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click “OK” button.

6-18

■■Connection The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode. • IP address:172.16.1.100 • Subnet mask:255.255.255.0 When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network address to the following. • IP address:172.16.1.160 • Subnet mask:255.255.255.0 • Default gateway: arbitrary

CAUTION:

F-6-19

If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the abovementioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings. Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.

Preparation Requirements • PC with SST Ver. 4.72 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored • Cross cable 10Base-T: Category 3 or 5 100Base-T: Category 5 1000Base-T: Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later

CAUTION: Disconnect USB memory storage device storage devices if connected. Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB memory storage device storage device is recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device storage device cannot be used concurrently.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection

6-18

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection

6-19

4) Check the IP address of the PC. Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt. Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC. If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network settings of the PC.

F-6-21

CAUTION: The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from the network. To check the settings, connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the cross cable.

IP address : 172.16.1.100 Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 Cross cable IP address : 172.16.1.160 10Base-T : category 3, 5 or later Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0 100Base-TX : category 5 or later 1000Base-T：Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later F-6-20

Steps 1) Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed. 2) Turn on the main power switch of this machine. 3) Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode. Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD and press [OK].

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection

6-19

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)

■■Downloading System Software (Assist mode) 1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD).

6-20

NOTE: If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode,when click "Start" botton, the following message is shown.

2) Connect the PC to this machine and start SST. 3) Click “Start Assist mode” button. Skip this step when starting SST in Assist mode.

F-6-23

Click “Next” button to restart the machine. Enter Service mode upon the main menu displayed and start Normal mode as Download mode.

F-6-22

If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically

4) Click “Start” button

selected. NOTE: If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection.

F-6-24

When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing process. The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)

6-20

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)

Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is displayed.

6-21

■■Downloading System Software (Single mode) The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system software can be downloaded similarly). 1) Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.

NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.

2) Connect the PC to this machine to start SST.

• Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message. Skip download of the existing versions. Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.

3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”, check the network settings. Click “Start” button.

• Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message. Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions. Confirm whether to download downgraded versions. • Overwrite all versions Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are downloaded without message.

By default, “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions” is selected.

5) Click"Next"button. F-6-26

F-6-25

6) Disconnect the cross cable from the machine. 7) Enter Service mode to check the system software versions. 8) Click"OK"button. The main menu is displayed.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)

6-21

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)

NOTE: The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.

6-22

NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.

• IP address • Model name • Download mode

Device Information

• Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message. Skip download of the existing versions. Confirm whether to download downgraded versions. • Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions Upgraded versions are downloaded without message. Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions. Confirm whether to download downgraded versions. • Overwrite all versions. Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are downloaded without message.

By default, “Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded

5) When download is completed, click “OK” button.

F-6-27

4) Select the DCON version to be downloaded and click “Start” button. Multiple files can be selected in this step.

F-6-29

The main menu is displayed.

F-6-28

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)

6-22

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)

NOTE: If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted not written on HDD or Flash ROM. 1) Click “Clear” button.

6-23

6) Click “Shutdown / Restart” button.

“Clear”

F-6-33

7) Click “Restart” button. F-6-30

2) Click “Execute Clear” button. The system software, which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD, is deleted.

F-6-34

The machine is restarted. The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM. F-6-31

3) Click“OK”button.

8) Click"OK"button. 9) Enter Service mode to check the versions.

Return to the previous screen.

F-6-32

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)

6-23

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

■■Formatting HDD

When executing format BOOTDEV

●● Overview This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.

Execute format BOOTDEV

• ALL:to format the whole HDD

6-24 When executing format ALL startup in normal mode Execute format ALL Automatically restart

• When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted • When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the system software. Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.

Select download mode ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Select download mode ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Download the system software

Download the system software for the main controller

Automatically restart

Automatically restart

Writing process

Writing process

Automatically restart

Automatically restart

Start in the new version of the system software

Start in the new version of the system software

• BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD. • When clearing the system software storage area and reloading the system software HDD needs not to be formatted at version upgrade. HDD can be formatted only in Single mode. After HDD is formatted, the machine cannot be started before the system software is downloaded. After Format ALL is executed, the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting to HDD. At this time, the machine automatically starts in Download mode. For BOOTDEV format, the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting. After formatting, enter either Assist mode(recommended) or Single mode to download the system software.

F-6-35

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

6-24

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

When executing format ALL startup in normal mode When executing format BOOTDEV When executing format ALL

NOTE: With SSTv4.22, due to sharing the simple mode processing with the existing models, the following screen is displayed. As for the iR ADVANCE series models (or this machine), the procedure displayed on the screen is not necessary; thus, click the “Next” button to go on to the next screen.

Execute format ALL

Execute format ALL Automatically restart

6-25

Automatically restart Device Information

Select Download mode (preferably in assist mode)

Select Download mode (preferably in assist mode)

Download the system software

Download the system software for the main controller

Automatically restart

Automatically restart

Writing process

Writing process

Automatically restart

Automatically restart

F-6-37

Start in Download mode of Normal mode

Start in Download mode of Normal mode

Download the system software for DCON/RCON/option

Since there is no system software to be downloaded, the shutdown sequence is executed

Automatically restart

restart the machine manually Writing process Start in the same version of the system software

Automatically restart Start in the new version of the system software F-6-36

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

6-25

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

●● Steps of Formatting

6-26

5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start".

1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.) 2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST. 3) Select the model to be connected and the information file (“single”) for individual download. Check the network settings and click “Start” button.

F-6-40

6) Click "Execute Format" button.

F-6-38

4) Click“Format HDD”button

F-6-41

HDD is formatted.

F-6-39

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

6-26

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See the steps to download the system software for details.

6-27

●● Mounting New HDD After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted. The figure below shows the abbreviated steps.

Replacing HDDs

Start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad)

Connect to SST F-6-42

CAUTION: After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software is not downloaded, E602 error is triggered at power-on.

Confirm that the new HDD is successfully mounted

Format HDD (Format ALL) CAUTION: Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is downloaded (to write the downloaded software). Down time may be approx. 5 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process. Never turn OFF the machine while Starting screen is shown.

6

Follow the steps as described in Format ALL section.

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD

F-6-43

6-27

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure. Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.

6-28

■■Backup ●● Overview At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the PCB to migrate them to the new PCB. • Backup via SST Backup data Backup data RAM MEAP applications For investigation in Dev Service Print

Downloaded/Uploaded file names SramImg.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded) MeapBack.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded) Sublog.bin((Uploadable)) The text file of the contents which You output to paper with a service mode(Uploadable). T-6-13

F-6-44

Click "Yes" and the message is shown, confirming whether to format HDD.

• Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2. (Because setting data of service mode for the parts counter and the Main Controller are stored, be sure to back up the data when replacing the Main Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB.) • MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD

• Backup via Service mode Backup data Backup of Reader Controller PCB Backup of DC Controller PCB Backup of Main controller PCB 2

Service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP (Backup) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMRES (Restore) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (Backup) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (Restore) COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK [5] BACKUP T-6-14

F-6-45

Click “Initialize” button to initialize HDD (Format ALL). Follow the steps described in Format ALL section to download the system software.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

6-28

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

6-29

●● Steps to Upload Data

Data is stored in HDD NOTE: Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader Controller PCB.

CAUTION:

Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Controller PCB.

• This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon

When there is an HDD Encryption Board, SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB2 is not possible with a service mode.Upload SramImg.bin beforehand and download SramImg. bin after exchange the Main Controller PCB2. Main Controller PCB2 can succeed the setting data such as stored service modes when You carry out this activity.

• Do not select Sublog.bin. • The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were uploaded.

iR ADVNCE xxxx Series Service PC SST iR ---System

Upload/Download

Main controller PCB1

MeapBack / SramImg.bin

Main controller PCB2 SRAM HDD SramImg.bin

Meapback.bin

Main controller F-6-46

Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack. 1) Enter Download mode. 2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

6-29

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

3) Select the model to be connected and the information file for individual download (“Single”).

6-30

5) Select “MeapBack.bin” to click “Start” button.

Check the network settings and click “Start”.

F-6-49 F-6-47

6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click “Save” button.

4) Click “Upload Data” button.

F-6-50 F-6-48

6

7) Click “OK” button.

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

6-30

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

●● Steps to Download Data

6-31

4) Click “Download Data” button.

CAUTION: The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded

Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack. 1) Enter Download mode 2) Connect the PC to the machine and start SST. 3) Select the model to be connected and “Single”. Check the network setting and click “Start” button.

F-6-52

5) Select the data to be downloaded and click “Start” button.

F-6-51

F-6-53

6) When the data are successfully downloaded, click “OK” button. 7) Restart the machine

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup

6-31

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device

Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device ■■Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device

6-32

●● Downloading System Software Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device, the system

When using the USB memory storage device storage device for version upgrade, the system software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device. By inserting the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine, the system software can be upgraded. The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device storage

software is stored in the temporary memory space in HDD. The system software is written in the system memory area, Boot area and Flash ROM upon the machine restarted. When the writing process is successfully completed, the machine is automatically restarted with the new version of the system software.

device.

Tasks in the customer site iR ----

PC

1) Download the system software [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [

- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete

Task in the office USB memory storage device System Software

SST System Software

System software

Copying the System Software システムソフトウェアのコピー USB memory storage device SST

HDD System Software Temporary memory space

Copying the system software

Downloading the system software

HDD

2) 主電源スイッチOFF/ON Automatically restarted 3) The system software is written <<<<< download shell >>>>> [ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete [ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete [ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete [ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete +++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++

Flash ROM

System software

F-6-54

When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below. • Normal mode (recommended)

HDD System Software Temporary memory space System memory area

Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download in Service mode and press [OK].

4) 主電源スイッチOFF/ON Automatically restarted

• Safe mode (only when any system error occurs or the machine is unable to start normally; turn ON the main power switch by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad)

FLASH ROM

5) Start with the new version.

F-6-55

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device

6-32

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software

■■Copying System Software

6-33

5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click “Search” button.

●● System CD to SST Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST. NOTE: The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity. If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.

Preparation Requirements: • PC with SST Ver. 4.72 or later installed • The system CD for this machine Steps to copy the system software

F-6-57

6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the

1) Start the PC.

screen.

2) Set the system CD to the PC.

Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and

3) Start SST.

click “Copy” button.

4) Click “Register Firmware” button.

F-6-56

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software

F-6-58

6-33

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software

7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click “OK” button.

6-34

●● SST to USB memory Storage Device Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device. Preparation Requirements: • PC with SST Ver. 4.72 or later installed • USB memory storage device (*) Requirements for USB memory storage device: Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended) Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software is approx. 500MB). Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)

F-6-59

Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption technology. Steps to copy the system software 1) Start the PC. 2) Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the PC. 3) Start SST.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software

6-34

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software

4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen.

6-35

6) Select “Series” and “Version” (the System Version).

F-6-60

F-6-62

5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is NOTE: The signs shown in the field of “Firmware registration static” indicate the following: Y: Stored in SST N: Not stored in SST

inserted.

7) Click “Start” button. Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device.

F-6-61

F-6-63

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software

6-35

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection

NOTE: When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories.

6-36

■■Connection CAUTION: This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory storage device; therefore, SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at the same time.

8) Click “OK” when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage device storage device.

Preparation Item to prepare: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine is stored. Procedure 1) If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.

F-6-64

USB memory

USB port

F-6-65

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection

6-36

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software

6-37

■■Upgrading System Software

3) Switch to the download mode to use. • In the case of normal mode (Recommended) Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD;

●● Menu/Function Overview

and then press [OK].

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu

• In the case of safe mode (This mode should not be used as general rule. To be used only when normal startup fails, such as a system error, etc.) While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch. Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is displayed on the Control Panel.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu

[Reset]: Shutdown F-6-67

Downloading System Software [1]: Upgrade(Auto) To download/write the system software (automatic) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) To download the system software (confirmation)

[Reset]: Shutdown

[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) F-6-66

To download the system software (overwriting) [4]: Format HDD To format the HDD/BOOTDEV partition

CAUTION: Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB memory storage device.

[5]: Backup

This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60 seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB memory storage device is failed within the time period.

[7]: Clear downloaded files

In such a case, use another USB memory storage device.

Backup of ServicePrint, SRAM(HDD/USB) To clear the system software immediately after downloading (before writing) [8]: Download Menu 2 To move to Download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu Others (e.g.: version information) [Reset]: Shutdown To execute shutdown sequence Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software

6-37

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software

●● Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software NOTE: The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the system software (any download work other than downloading after replacing/formatting the HDD): Download mode --- Normal mode Download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto)

6-38

CAUTION:Caution when the power is turned OFF Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode. Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the shutdown sequence. Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.

CAUTION:Prohibition to turn OFF the power during downloading/writing Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software; otherwise, this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON. If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON, start the machine in safe mode (pressing 2 + 8 keys). When the machine can be started in safe mode, be sure to download the system software once again. If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system software.

F-6-68

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software

6-38

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

■■Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic) ●● [1]: Upgrade (Auto) The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the USB memory storage device to download only the system software with newer version in the USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD. In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the version is compared). SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained, the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded. For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows: For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.

6-39

3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu [Reset]: Shutdown F-6-69

The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.

During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel.

After downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to write the downloaded system software to the HDD system area/flash ROM. Operation procedure 1) Enter download mode. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.

F-6-70

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

6-39

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM. The screen shows the countdown once writing process is properly complete.

6-40

■■Downloading System Software (Confirmation) ●● [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD. When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older, a confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether to overwrite or not. In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the version is compared). SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained, the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded. For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:

F-6-71

Once the countdown shows 0, this machine is automatically restarted. 4) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the lower right on the touch panel and select removal of the memory media, and then remove the USB memory storage device.

For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded. The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded. Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.

CAUTION: After HDD formatting and downloading, this machine takes a long time (for writing the software). This machine, in some cases, stays in standby screen up to 10 min during writing. At this time, do not turn off the main power switch.

6

By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup. In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but execute normal startup to execute writing.

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

6-40

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

6-41

Operation procedure

Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset”

1) Enter download mode.

key.

2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [2] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu /[2] has been selected. Execute?/ - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-72

During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel. NOTE: When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older than the system software in the HDD, a message is displayed in each case to confirm whether to overwrite or not. Press the key on the Control Panel. [0]: To overwrite/Any key other than [0]: Not to overwrite

F-6-74

4) Press the “Reset” key. Shutdown sequence is executed. 5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch. 6) Remove the USB memory storage device. 7) Ensure the LED at the lower right on the Control Panel is turned OFF, and turn ON the Main Power Switch. Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly completed. The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly completed. This machine is restarted with the downloaded system software at the count of 0.

F-6-73

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

6-41

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)

■■Downloading System Software (Overwriting)

6-42

CAUTION:

●● [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the USB memory storage device is downloaded. Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the USB memory storage device is downloaded.

In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well. Uncheck the applicable system software so that the system software of the nonconnecting option is not downloaded when downloading the system software from SST to USB.

Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading. By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup. In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but

Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset” key.

execute normal startup to execute writing. Operation procedure 1) Enter download mode. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [3] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu /[3] has been selected. Execute?/ - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-75

During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel.

6

F-6-76

4) Press the “Reset” key. Shutdown sequence is executed. 5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch. 6) Remove the USB memory storage device. 7) After checking that the LED is turned OFF at the lower right on the Control Panel, turn ON the Main Power Switch. Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly complete. When the countdown shows 0, this machine is restarted with the downloaded system software.

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)

6-42

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD

■■Formatting HDD

When executing format BOOTDEV

●● HDD Format Overview

Execute format BOOTDEV

6-43 When executing format ALL Execute format ALL

The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine: • ALL: To initialize the entire HDD

Automatically restart

• In the case of installing the HDD provided as a service part (a new HDD). • In the case of cleaning the entire software and data in the HDD to reinstall the system software. All the user data and MEAP application in the HDD is deleted when executing Format ALL

Select download mode ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Select download mode ([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Download the system software

Download the system software

Automatically restart

Automatically restart

Writing process

Writing process

Automatically restart

Automatically restart

Start in the new version of the system software

Start in the new version of the system software

with the machine in use; therefore, be sure to obtain agreement from the user to execute Format ALL. • BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD. • In the case of normal upgrading by cleaning the storage area of the system software to reinstall the system software, HDD formatting is not required. • User data is not erased. After formatting, this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded. When Format ALL is executed, initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode. In the case of formatting BOOTDEV, the machine is not automatically restarted, but the system software can be downloaded. After formatting is executed, be sure to download the system software by “[1]: Upgrade (AUTO)” in main menu.

F-6-77

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD

6-43

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD

●● [4]: Format HDD

6-44

4) Press the key on the Control Panel.

This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.

[1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu

Operation procedure

[2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD/Any key other than [0]: To return to the

screen. menu screen.

1) Enter download mode.

[C]: To return to the menu screen.

2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. [4] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu /[4] has been selected. Execute?/ - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-78

F-6-79

Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the “Reset” key. 5) Press any key to return to the menu screen. 6) Download the system software. Refer to “Separate Download” for details.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD

6-44

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2

■■Backup

6-45

■■Clearing Download File

●● [5]: Backup

●● [7]: Clear downloaded files

CAUTION:

This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD.

This function includes R&D review.

This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the

Do not usually use it other than the following function.

system software in menu [2] or [3]. Operation procedure

When the data is sent to the USB memory device: USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using the SST.

1) After downloading by menu [2] or [3], press the “Reset” key to execute shutdown sequence, and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears. 2) Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch). If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the machine in safe mode, the system software is deleted. In such a case, the following message

Operation procedure 1) Enter download mode.

is displayed on the touch panel.

2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.

“All downloaded file is deleted.”

3) Press the key on the Control Panel. 3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.

[5] -> [0]

4) Remove the USB memory storage device.

[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]

ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー

■■Download Menu 2

[1]: Sublog [4]: ServicePrint [5]: Netcap [6]: SRAM(HDD) [7]: SRAM(USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

●● [8]: Download Menu 2 Move to download Menu 2: Operation procedure 1) Enter download mode. 2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port. 3) Press the key on the Control Panel. F-6-80

4) SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB2.

[8]→[0] Move to download Menu 2

[4] ServicePrint -> Forward service print data to USB memory. Service mode level 1 > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > RPT-FILE > [OK]. The created data file is saved in the HDD of the machine. [6] SRAM(HDD) -> Save it to the Host Machine HDD [7] SRAM(USB) -> Save it in USB memory.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Download Menu 2

6-45

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu

6-46

This mode displays the version of download mode.

/[8] has been selected. Execute?/ - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-81

4) Restore the data which backed up in USB memory

F-6-83

Press any key to return to the main menu.

[2]: Restore

Troubleshooting

[[[[[ download Menu 2nd (USB) ]]]]]] ------------------------------------

[1]: Service Mode Password Clear [2]: Restore [C]: Return to Main Menu

■■Error Code: E753-0001 ●● Cause In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E7530001.

F-6-82

●● Remedy

■■Other Menu

The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.

●● [9]: Other Menu

correct target option, and then execute downloading again.

Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the

●● Upgrading by SST

This mode displays other menu.

Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the nonOperation procedure

connecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode.

1) Enter download mode.

In Single mode, it is available to download the system software of the option that is not

2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.

installed.

3) Press the key on the Control Panel.

In the case of downloading the Finisher’s system software, make the download mode of

[9] -> [0]: To display other menu/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system software of the Finisher with the version information displayed at the right side of the SST

●● [1]: Version Information

screen.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001

6-46

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Optional language support > Optional language selection

Optional language support

●● The elimination of normal languages and optional languages

This is the explanation on how to download optional language firmware prepared locally by sales company.

time of factory shipment.

the other is the indication module which saved in other area. from the basic module. If you want to eliminate languages from this machine, you have to delete both of the basic module and the indication module.

General area

You can delete the indication module only in the normal mode. The deletion of the basic

English, Japanese German, French, Italy, Spanish

module is only in the download mode. T-6-15

Asian area Basic languages Normal languages

There are 2 kinds of language modules. One is the basic module which saved in system area, Usually the indication module is used in UI. If there is not the indication module, it is made

The following basic languages and a normal languages are installed in this machine at the

Basic languages Normal languages

6-47

English, Japanese Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean T-6-16

Besides these languages, you can install optional languages for which sales company prepared.

To eliminate normal languages and optional languages, you select following service mode. Copier > FUNCTION > CLEAR > LANG-CLR (Level-2) By selecting this service mode, the indication module of normal languages and optional languages are deleted, then the download mode is activated automatically. At this time, installing firmware set(including SYSTEM) without the deletion languages by SST or USB memory, the basic module is deleted.

You can install basic languages, normal languages, optional languages, collectively 8 languages. The optional languages are prepared for in European area and Asian area. The optional languages are shown below:

The basic languages(English and Japanese) are included in SYSTEM and these languages cannot be deleted.

●● The use case and execution methods

• European area Bulgarian, Catalan, Czech, Danish, Greek, Estonian, Finnish, Croatian, Hungarian, Dutch, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Swedish, Turkish, • Asian area Vietnamese and Thai.

■■The number of the installable languages The number of the installable languages in this machine which are basic languages, normal languages, optional languages, collectively 8 languages. 2 basic languages and 4 normal languages are already installed. So you can install only 2 optional languages.

Work contents Installing the optional languages to the machine of the normal languages. Eliminating the optional languages and restore to the normal languages Interchanging the optional languages Installing the more than 3 optional languages after eliminating the normal languages Updating the machine of the optional languages

SST

USB

CDS

Available

Available

Available

Available

Available

N/A

Available Available

Available Available

N/A N/A

Available

Available

Available T-6-17

■■Optional language selection "Optional Language Setting" is added to "System Management". By default, "Don't download optional language" is selected.

First, select the optional language to be downloaded in the Assist Mode and exported to the USB memory. Optional language confirmation message appears in the Assist Mode. The firmware of the selected optional language is exported to the USB memory.

6

When "Download optional language" is selected, up to two optional languages can be selected. The firmware of the optional languages on the list are excluded from Assist Mode necessary firmware. Assist Mode can be executed without registering the optional language firmware to SST.

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Optional language support > Optional language selection

6-47

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Optional language support > Firmware to be exported to USB memory

6-48

The picture shown below is the example of the case that Finnish is installed to the machine, and Danish and Dutch are selected in the "Optional Language Setting". Only two optional languages can be installed to the machine and Finnish is already installed. Therefore, either Danish or Dutch can be installed to the machine.

F-6-84

■■Optional language confirmation When either of the following conditions is satisfied, the optional language confirmation message appears when "Start" button is clicked.

F-6-85

■■Firmware to be exported to USB memory

Optional language is selected in the "Optional Language Setting" of "System Management". Any optional language is installed to the connected machine. Maximum number of the optional languages installed to the machine is two. The optional language already installed to the connected machine is always selected, and it cannot be removed from the machine with SST.

When the firmware of the selected optional language in "Optional Language Setting" is installed to SST, it is exported to the USB memory. The firmware of the other optional languages are not exported to the USB memory. When Danish and Dutch are selected in the "Optional Language Setting", the firmware of these languages are exported to the USB memory as shown below.

Even if the firmware of the installed optional language is not registered to SST, it is counted as the installed optional language. The number of the selectable optional languages in the "Optional Language Setting" is equivalent to the maximum number of optional languages. The number of the optional languages to be added to the machine is equivalent to the maximum number of optional languages minus the number of the optional languages installed to the machine. Error will not occur even the number of the installed optional languages is greater than the maximum number of the optional languages. In such a case, any new optional language cannot be added, but the firmware of the installed optional language is downloaded in the Assist Mode.

6

Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Optional language support > Firmware to be exported to USB memory

F-6-86

6-48

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Useful Operations > How to Use Startup System Failure Diagnosis

6-49

Startup System Failure Diagnosis Useful Operations The goal of the startup system failure diagnosis is to be able to solve troubles associated with a Control Panel display failure by performing the following steps. It is assumed that the users have already learned the following items: • How to use a tester • Roles of the All-night Power Supply (3.3V) and Non-all-night Power Supply (12V) • How to back up data (HDD and Main Controller)

Power is always supplied to the PCB. Pay attention not to cause short circuit when accessing the PCB. Pay attention not to get an electrical shock.

■■How to Use Startup System Failure Diagnosis Startup System Failure Diagnosis contains "flow diagram" for identifying the failure location and "check item table" where detailed procedure of each item in the flow diagram is described. Before starting the work, be sure to check the working sequence with the flow diagram. Then check the detailed procedure and check items with the check item table. The flow diagram contains numbers (e.g. (1)) corresponding to the numbers on the check item table so that be sure to refer to the relevant check item.

Flow

Check item list

Start

Has only the backlight gone off? (Can you hear the operation sound of the Hard Key?)

Yes [Assumed failure location] (4) 1. Control Panel Inverter PCB 2. Control Panel Unit (2) 3. 12V Connector of the Control Panel 4. Main Controller PCB1

No (1) Is 12V supplied to pin 2 of J504 on the Relay PCB? No Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch

Yes [Assumed failure location] (3) 1. Control Panel CPU PCB 2. Main Controller PCB1 (2) 3. 12V Connector of the Control Panel 4. Control Panel Unit

6

The location of each check item can be referenced by the corresponding number in the flow diagram.

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Useful Operations > How to Use Startup System Failure Diagnosis

6-49

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Startup Failure Analysis Policy

Startup Failure Analysis Policy

6-50

Structure overview of each flow

Select the detailed procedure in accordance with the description in Preconditions shown

Structure of the detailed execution procedure flow is as follow: Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure

below. Preconditions When the following condition is met, execute the detailed procedure. • Execution of "Flow A: Go to Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure" is

Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow

Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow

indicated in the next flow. Power-On

Flow

Lit

Solid black

Only the bar is displayed

The logo is displayed

Display of E-code

EXXX-XXXX

"NG" is displayed as a result in the startup system failure diagnosis

Yes

Flow E: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis

No Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure

Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure

Not lit

Refer to the error code correspondence table for countermeasures

Countermeasures related to system software - Reinstall the system. - Replace the HDD.

Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow

Main purpose

F-6-87 Parts which may be replaced

To narrow down the failure None location To diagnose the failure of the Control Panel

CABLE, CONTROL PANEL Control Panel CPU PCB Power Supply Assembly Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller PCB 2 Control Panel Unit Flow C: To diagnose the failure of Main Controller PCB 1 Main Controller Analysis Flow the Main Controller Main Controller PCB 2 HDD Flow D: To diagnose the failure of AC Inlet Harness Power Supply Assembly Check the All-night Power Supply CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE Flow (3.3 V), Non-all-night Power Power Supply Assembly Supply (12 V), or its supply Main Controller PCB 1 circuit Main Controller PCB 2 Main Switch, CABLE, SWITCH AC

Memo: • It may take about 5 minutes or more to display E XXX-XXXX.

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Startup Failure Analysis Policy

6-50

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure ■■Applicable Condition of the Flow "Preconditions" of "Startup Failure Analysis Policy" are met when the main power is turned ON.

Start 1. Turn OFF the main power switch. 2. Disconnect and then connect the power plug of the host machine from the outlet. 3. Turn ON the main power switch. (1)

●● Overview of the flow The purpose of this flow is to narrow down the failure location in order to take

Is 12V supplied to C1005 of the Control Panel CPU PCB?

countermeasures by expanding the check range when trouble remains unsolved after having implemented the "Simplified Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure". When any troubles associated with a Control Panel display failure occur, it is likely that a failure has occurred at any of the following locations. • Control Panel Unit • Main Controller • All-night Power Supply (3.3 V), Non-all-night Power Supply (12 V), or its supply circuit Implementation of this flow identifies which flow (Flow B, C, or D) should be implemented.

6-51

Yes

Flow C: To Main Controller Analysis Flow

No (2) Is LED 9 of the Main Controller PCB 1 sON?

Yes

Flow B: To Control Panel Check Flow

No Flow D: To Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

Implementation of the identified flow identifies which parts need to be replaced.

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-51

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-52

●● Check item Item (1)

(2)

Check item

Location

Apply 12 V to C1005 on the Control Panel CPU PCB. • Measure the voltage value between the positive (+) and negative (-) electric poles of C1005. Normal value: 12 V

C1005

Main Controller PCB 1 LED 9 activation • Does LED 9 light up in green?

LED9

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-52

Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow

6 Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow ■■Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-53

Implementation of this flow is indicated in "Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure".

Start

●● Overview of the flow If implementation of this flow is indicated in "Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure", a Control Panel failure may have occurred. As shown in the figure below, non-all-night power (12 V) is supplied from the Power Supply

(1)

PCB to the Control Panel Unit. Image signal is input from the Main Controller PCB to the LCD PCB. The purpose of this flow is mainly to identify failure of the Control Panel. AC (e.g. 115 V - 230 V)

Power Supply PCB AC

(e.g. 115 V - 230 V)

DC 12V, 3.3V

All-night Power Supply PCB Non-all-night Power Supply PCB

Main Controller PCB 2

J115 (JPW172)

DC 12V, 3.3V

DC Main Controller PCB 2

DC 12V

(2) Yes Replace the parts. 1.Control Panel CPU PCB 2.Main Controller PCB 1 3.Control Panel Unit

Is 12V supplied to C1005 of the Control Panel CPU PCB? No (3) Is 12V supplied to JPW172 of the Power Supply PCB?

Yes No (4) (8) Disconnect the following connectors: Disconnect the following connectors: - J1002 - J115 on the Power Supply PCB on the Control Panel CPU PCB - J1002 on the Control Panel CPU PCB No (9) Check for short circuit. - JPW172 of the Power Supply PCB

(5) Check for cable disconnection. - CABLE, CONTROL PANEL

Signal Were all measurement values 0 ohm?

Control Panel Unit J1002 (C1005)

No

Parts possibly need to be replaced after having implemented this flow are shown below.

(7) Replace the parts. - CABLE, CONTROL PANEL

Parts should be replaced in order of priority shown in the table below. Be sure to replace one part at a time and check that the machine starts up normally each time. Priority order 1 2 3 4 5 6

Part name CABLE, CONTROL PANEL Control Panel CPU PCB Power Supply Assembly Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 1 Control Panel Unit

6

(6) Yes Replace the parts. 1.Control Panel CPU PCB 2.Control Panel Unit

Was the measurement value 0 ohm?

(10) Yes Replace the parts. 1.CABLE, CONTROL PANEL 2.Power Supply Assembly

No Flow D: To Power Supply Assembly Check Flow

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-53

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

●● Check item Item (1)

(2)

Item

Check item

(3)

Location

Apply 12 V to C1005 on the Control Panel CPU PCB. • Measure the voltage value between the positive (+) and negative (-) electric poles of C1005. Normal value: 12 V

C1005

Replace the parts. Priority order 1. Control Panel CPU PCB 2. Main Controller PCB 1 3. Control Panel Unit

Check item

6-54

Location

Apply 12 V to JPW172 on the Power Supply PCB. • JMeasure the voltage value between JPW172 (+) and the chassis (-). Normal value: 12 V

JPW172

Control Panel CPU PCB

Main Controller PCB 1

Control Panel Unit

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-54

6 Item (4)

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Check item

Location

Disconnect the "CABLE, CONTROL PANEL" from the connector. • J115 on the Power Supply PCB • J1002 on the Control Panel CPU PCB

Item (5)

J115

Check item

6-55

Location

Check if the "CABLE, CONTROL PANEL" is open circuit. • Measure the resistance value between pin 2 (+) of J115 and pin 2 (-) of J1002. • Measure the resistance value between pin 3 (+) of J115 and pin 3 (-) of J1002. Normal value: 0 ohm

J1002

J115

J115 2pin

J1002 2pin

J115 3pin

J1002 3pin

J1002

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-55

6 Item (6)

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Check item

Location

Replace the parts. Priority order 1. Control Panel CPU PCB 2. Control Panel Unit

Item (8)

Check item

6-56

Location

Disconnect the "CABLE, CONTROL PANEL" from the connector. • J1002 on the Control Panel CPU PCB

J1002

Control Panel CPU PCB

Control Panel Unit (7)

Replace the parts. • CABLE, CONTROL PANEL

CABLE, CONTROL PANEL

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-56

6 Item (9)

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Check item

Location

Check if the "CABLE, CONTROL PANEL" is short circuit. • Measure the resistance value between JPW172 (+) and the chassis (-). Normal value: Any value other than 0 ohm

Item (10)

Check item

6-57

Location

Replace the parts. Priority order 1. CABLE, CONTROL PANEL 2.Power Supply Assembly

CABLE, CONTROL PANEL

JPW172

Power Supply Assembly

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-57

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check

Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow ■■Status Check If the Main Controller 1 LED 9 and Main Controller 2 LED 3 cannot be turned ON, identify

6-58

- Check whether the Main Controller 1 and Main Controller 2 are connected properly. - Check whether the cables between the Main Controller 1 and the Control Panel are connected properly.

the location of the failure according to the flow. Has the machine normally started up?

●● Flow for narrowing down troubles

Yes

Analysis complete

No

Pre-check items • Check whether the Main Controller 1 and Main Controller 2 are connected properly. • Check whether the cables between the Main Controller 1 and the Control Panel are

Yes

connected properly.

(1) Is Main Controller 2 LED 3 ON? No

If the Control Panel is not turned ON even after these checks, try identifying the location of the failure through the following procedure.

1. Turning OFF the power of the host machine. 2. Replace the Main Controller 2. 3. Turn ON the power of the host machine.

Has the machine normally started up?

Yes

Analysis complete

No Yes

(2) Is Main Controller 1 LED 9 ON? No

1. Turning OFF the power of the host machine. 2. Replace the Main Controller 1. 3. Turn ON the power of the host machine. Has the machine normally started up?

Yes

Analysis complete

No Replacement of the HDD

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check

6-58

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check

6-59

●● Check item Item Check item (1)

Location

Check the Main Controller 2 LED 3 activation

LED3

(2)

Check the Main Controller 1 LED 9 activation

LED9

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow C: Main Controller Analysis Flow > Status Check

6-59

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow ■■Applicable Condition of the Flow Implementation of this flow is indicated in "Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure" or "Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow".

6-60

Start (1) Are 3.3V and 12V output from the Power Supply PCB?

●● Overview of the flow

(2) Yes Replace the parts. 1.CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE 2.Power Supply Assembly 3.Main Controller PCB 2 4.Main Controller PCB 1

If implementation of this flow is indicated in "Flow A: Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure" or "Flow B: Control Panel Check Flow", a power supply failure may have occurred. As shown in the diagram below, all-night power (3.3 V) and non-all-night power (12 V) are generated by supplying AC (e.g. 115 V - 230 V) from the Power Supply PCB to the All-night Power Supply PCV and Non-all-night Power Supply PCB, and they are supplied to the

No (3) Is AC (e.g. 115 V - 230 V) input to the Power Supply PCB?

PCBs. The purpose of this flow is mainly to identify the failure location of all-night power supply (3.3 V), non-all-night power supply (12 V) or its supply circuit. AC Power Supply PCB (e.g. 115 V - 230 V) J101

(J102)

J110

J111 (JPW128)

AC (e.g. 115 V - 230 V)

DC 12V, 3.3V

Main Controller PCB 1 Signal

DC

DC 12V, 3.3V Parts possibly need to be replaced after having implemented this flow are shown below. Parts should be replaced in order of priority shown in the table below.Be sure to replace one part at a time and check that the machine starts up normally each time. Priority order 1 2 3 4 5 6

(4) Replace the part. - AC Inlet Harness

Yes (5)

All-night Power Supply PCB Non-all-night Power Supply PCB

Main Controller PCB 2 Signal

No

Is the power-on signal input to the Power Supply PCB?

Yes (6)

No

Is the path of AC shorted to GND?

No

(7) Replace the part. - Power Supply Assembly

Yes (8) Report to area-specific staff member. (9) Replace the parts. 1.CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE 2.Power Supply Assembly 3.Main Controller PCB 2 4.Main Controller PCB 1 5.Main SwitchCABLE, SWITCH AC

Part name AC Inlet Harness CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE Power Supply Assembly Main Controller PCB 2 Main Controller PCB 1 Main Switch, CABLE, SWITCH AC

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-60

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

●● Check item Item (1)

Item

Check item

Location

Apply 3.3 V and 12 V to J110 on the Power Supply PCB. • Measure the voltage value between pin 1 (+) of J110 and the chassis (-).

J110

Normal value: 3.3 V

• Measure the voltage value between pin 3 (+) of J110 and the chassis (-).

Normal value:

(2)

Check item Replace the parts. Priority order 1. CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE 2. Power Supply Assembly 3.Main Controller PCB 2 4. Main Controller PCB 1

6-61

Location

Main Controller PCB 2 J8130, J8132

Power Supply PCB J110, J111 CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE

Measure 3.3V

12 V

Measure 12V

Power Supply Assembly

Main Controller PCB 2

6

Main Controller PCB 1

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-61

6 Item (3)

(4)

Check item Apply AC (e.g. 115 V - 230 V) to J101 on the Power Supply PCB. • Measure the voltage value between the pin 1 (H) and pin 2 (N) of J101. Normal value: AC (e.g. 115 V - 230 V)

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Location

Item (5)

Check item

6-62

Location

Input power-on signal to the Power Supply PCB • Measure the voltage value between JPW128 (+) and the chassis (-). Normal value: 3.3 V

J101

Replace the parts. • AC Inlet Harness JPW128

Power Supply PCB J101 AC Inlet Harness

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-62

6 Item (6)

(7)

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Check item Check that there is no earth fault in the route of AC (e.g. 115 V - 230 V). • Measure the resistance value between pin 1 (H) of J101 and the chassis. • Measure the resistance value between pin 2 (N) of J101 and the chassis. • Measure the resistance value between pin 1 (H) of J102 and the chassis. • Measure the resistance value between pin 2 (N) of J102 and the chassis. Normal value: Any value other than 0 ohm

Location

Item (8)

J101

Check item

6-63

Location

Report to areaspecific staff member.

J102

J101 1pin

J102 1pin

J101 2pin

J102 2pin

Replace the parts. • Power Supply Assembly

Power Supply Assembly

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-63

6 Item (9)

Check item Replace the parts. Priority order 1.CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE 2.Power Supply Assembly 3. Main Controller PCB 2 4. Main Controller PCB 1

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

Location

Item (9) Main Controller PCB 2 J8130, J8132

Check item

6-64

Location

Replace the parts. Priority order 5.Main switch CABLE, SWITCH AC

Power Supply PCB J110, J111

Main Switch

CABLE, POWER SUPPLY REMOTE

CABLE, SWITCH AC (J121)

(J2080) (J2081)

10 (J2003)

(J115)

(J412)

(J119)

(FT5)

(J1100) (FT6)

(J77)

Power Supply Assembly

Main Controller PCB 2

6

Main Controller PCB 1

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-64

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-65

Reference: Activation conditions of the Control Panel Backlight ●● Condition Conditions for activation of the Backlight are as follow: (1) Non-all-night power (12 V) is supplied to the Control Panel. Non-all-night power (12 V) is supplied through the following route: Power Supply PCB > Non-all-night Power Supply PCB > Power Supply PCB > Control Panel In order to output non-all-night power (12 V) from the Power Supply PCB, it is required to input the power-on signal which is transmitted through the following route to the Power Supply PCB. Main Controller 1 > Main Controller 2 > Power Supply PCB (2) Control Panel control signal is input to the Control Panel. Control Panel control signal is input through the following route: Main Controller 1 > Control Panel Power-on signal J111

J150

J402

J8132

Non-all-night Power Supply PCB J181

J403

J110 Power Supply PCB

Main Controller PCB 2

3.3V, 12V Power Supply line J8130 J115 12V Power Supply line

Main Controller PCB 1 Control Panel control signal Control Panel

Reference: When the power-on signal is blocked, the power supply stops even if the Power Supply Unit is operating properly. The power-on signal is output at 3V.

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow D: Power Supply Assembly Check Flow > Applicable Condition of the Flow

6-65

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Check item

Flow E: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis ■■Status Check

6-66

■■Check item Startup Method 1. Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4' simultaneously.

If startup does not complete properly with only the Control Panel bar displayed, identify the

Main Power Supply Switch

location of the failure according to the flow. Description The workflow of the Controller system failure diagnosis to be executed when only the Control Panel bar is displayed.

2. Keep pressing the numeric keys until the following screen appears on the Control Panel. (approx. 20 seconds)

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Flow E: Execution Flow of Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Check item

6-66

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Reference: > Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis

6-67

Reference: ■■Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis 1.Perform the following checks if the failure diagnosis does not start. If it starts, proceed to the next step. • Install the system software (Download by 2+8 startup) • Replace the Main Controller PCB1 • Replace the HDD. • Replace the Main Controller PCB2 2. When the detected location is displayed on the screen where "NG" is displayed, identify the location of the failure by referencing the controller system failure diagnosis, and perform the remedy. If the diagnosis does not proceed to a status where "NG" is displayed, proceed to the next step. 3. If the failure diagnosis does not finish, perform the following work: • Install the system software (Download by 2+8 startup) • Replace the HDD. • Replace the Main Controller PCB1 • Replace the Main Controller PCB2

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Reference: > Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis

6-67

6

6

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Reference: > Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis

Troubleshooting > Startup System Failure Diagnosis > Reference: > Procedure A: Detailed Procedure of Startup System Failure Diagnosis

6-68

6-68

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview

Controller Self Diagnosis

6-69

■■Overview Error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations shown below.

Controller Self Diagnosis

DC Controller PCB

■■Introduction

HDD Option

Operation of the error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for errors are

Reader

described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in field and improve the accuracy of specifying error locations. This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.

Flash PCB

• An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 and other related

Controller system

PCBs (child PCBs such as SDRAM or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB 1/2).

failure diagnosis

PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow:

tool

●● Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

Main

• Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, TPM PCB>

Controller PCB1

• Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM (M0*, M1), SDRAM (P), Memory PCB, Open I/F PCB (option)>

Operation panel

• Rizer PCB / HDD

Riser PCB

Main Controller PCB2

All-night Non-all-right Power Supply

Option

* SDRAM (M0) is an option.

F-6-88

Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the blue frame (dotted line).

●● Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview

6-69

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing

■■Layout Drawing

6-70

Main Controller PCB 1

Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis

HDD(Option) Main Controller PCB 2

HDD(Standard) Main Controller PCB 1

Flash PCB

TPM PCB

TPM PCB

Flash PCB F-6-90

F-6-89

Main Controller PCB 2

Memory PCB

DDR2-SDRAM

F-6-91

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller Self Diagnosis > Layout Drawing

6-70

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis

6-71

Operation

■■Basic Flowchart Basic Check Items

■■Controller System Error Diagnosis

Check all of the items shown below.

●● Boot Method

Turn O N the m ain power s witc h.

1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys ‘2’ and ‘4’ simultaneously.

Does the Power Supply LED on the Control Panel light up?

No Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.

Yes

Does the main body boot c orrec tly ?

No

Ex ec ute Controller Sy s tem Error Diagnos is Tool.

F-6-93

Main Power Switch

Yes

Take an ac tion appropriate f or the error. F-6-92

●● Basic Check Items 1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF. 2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected. 3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is disconnected. 4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Rizer PCB definitely? 5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply. Change Non-all-night Power Supply if not recovered.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis

F-6-94

6-71

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis

2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears on the Control Panel.

6-72

●● Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes. The result is displayed on the Control Panel. <When the diagnosis result is normal>

F-6-95

NOTE: When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed. In this case, perform the following remedy. Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown above. If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT. If BCT is not installed correctly, “--.--” is displayed in Service Mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION > BCT) in the main body.

F-6-97

<When an error is detected by diagnosis> Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where an error was detected is indicated.

F-6-98

<When an error is detected by diagnosis> Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name of the test where an error was detected is indicated.

F-6-96

F-6-99

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis

6-72

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis



Test Name

The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.

SN-5 PCI Config SOC

Explanation of the detailed error information is described.

[no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted. When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been occurring. [NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.

SN-6 PCI Config LANC



SN-7 CPLD

The error locations are identified according to the following table. Test Name SN-1 IADDR2 SDRAM SN-2 SM BUS IA DDR2 OnBoard SN-3 SM BUS CLK Gen SN-4 SM BUS SOC DDR2 DIMM

Description

Assumed Error Location

Remedy

Error Code

Check an error between • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller the Main Controller PCB PCB 1 PCB 1. 1 and SDRAM on the • SDRAM on Main Main Controller PCB 1 Check an SDRAM SM • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller bus error in the Main PCB 1 PCB 1. Controller PCB 1 Check an SM bus error in • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller Clock Generator on the PCB 1 PCB 1. Main Controller PCB 1 Check an SDRAM SM • DDR2SDRAM on 1. Remove the DDR2SDRAM bus error in the Main Main Controller (J201) on the Main Controller PCB 1 and the PCB 2(J201) Controller PCB 2, and Main Controller PCB 2 execute Controller System Error Diagnosis. Check that the diagnosis result is [no]. Because the DDR2SDRAM is an option configuration, the final result becomes [OK] even if the diagnosis result is [no]. 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 when the result becomes [NG] in step 1.

6

SN-8 LANC SPI WRITE SN-9 RTC CHECK SN-10 TPM

SN-11 SOCDDR2 SDRAM

SN-12 SRI CHECK SN-13 JUST ROM READ SN-14 FRAM

Description

6-73 Assumed Error Location

Remedy

Check a PCI bus error in • Main Controller 1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB PCB 1 the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller • Main Controller 1, and the Main Controller PCB 2 PCB 2 PCB 2. • SDRAM on Main 2. Replace the Main Controller Controller PCB 2 PCB 1. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. Check a LAN chip error • Main Controller 1.Replace the Main Controller on the Main Controller PCB 1 PCB 1. PCB 1 Check failure of CPLD • Main Controller 1.Replace the Main Controller chip on the Main PCB 1 PCB 1. Controller PCB 1 Check failure of LANC • Main Controller 1.Replace the Main Controller SPI on the Main PCB 1 PCB 1. Controller PCB 1 Check failure of RTC on • Main Controller 1.Replace the Main Controller the Main Controller PCB PCB 1 PCB 1. 1 Check failure of the • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the TPM PCB on the Main PCB 1 TPM PCB. Controller PCB 1 • TPM PCB 2. Replace the TPM PCB. * TPM PCB is not 3.Replace the Main Controller installed in products for PCB 1. China. So, the diagnosis results NG. Check an error between • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of SDRAMs on the Main PCB 2 SDRAM (M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2 • SDRAM on Main Controller PCB 2. Controller PCB 2 2. Replace SDRAM (M1) on the Main Controller PCB 2. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. Check a BUS error on the • Main Controller 1. Replace the Main Controller Main Controller PCB 2 PCB 2 PCB 2. Check On-board ROM on • Main Controller A result does become NG. the Main Controller PCB PCB 2 1. Replace the Main Controller 2 PCB 2. Check failure between • Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the the Main Controller PCB PCB 2 Memory PCB on the Main 2 and the Memory PCB • Memory PCB Controller PCB 2. 2. Replace the Memory PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2. 3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Controller System Error Diagnosis

Error Code -

-

-

-

-

E746

E746

-

E355

6-73

6 Test Name

Description

SN-15 SRAM Check failure of SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2. A battery emptied check SN-16 HDD Check an HDD I/F error

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

Assumed Error Location

Remedy

6-74

Error Code

• Main Controller PCB 2

1. Replace the Main Controller E246/ PCB 2. E350/ E355

• Main Controller PCB 2 • HDD Cable • HDD

1. Check the cable connection E602 of the HDD. 2. Check the connection between the Main Controller PCB 2 and the Main Controller PCB 1. 3. Replace the HDD. T-6-18

■■Restrictions • Main Controller PCB 1 : SN-3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9,10 • Main Controller PCB 2 : SN-12, 13, 14 • When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, the following judgment results are displayed. Standard PCB: [NG] Optional PCB: [OK] However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

6-74

6

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

6-75

6-75

6

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

6-76

6-76

6

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Restrictions

6-77

6-77

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation

Version Upgrade via CDS

■■Preparation ●● Overview of Preparation

■■Overview

The following should be prepared before using Updater.

Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the

• For updating of firmware

following 3 methods are available using Updater functions. a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update) b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

Installation Method

c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) : Operator of each company

: User operation

Firmware Market Release

a

Automatic update

b c

Distribution Setting to UGW (UGW-linked)

Automatic download

6-78

Firmware acquisition

Distribution setting & Download Via Service mode (Local UI)

Apply (Update) Via Service mode (Local UI)

periodical download

Periodical update

Distribution setting & Download Via User mode (Local UI)

Distribution setting & Download Via User mode (Remote UI)

Apply (Update) Via User mode (Local UI)

Apply (Update) Via User mode (Remote UI)

With connection to external network

Download via SST

Update via SST

Without connection to external network F-6-100

*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS. NOTE:

• See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network. • When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the communication with the distribution server is normal.

6

UGW-linked Download and Update UGW-linked Download Manual Download and Update Manual Download and Update via Local UI Manual Download and Update via Remote UI Special Download and Update via Remote UI Periodical update

Enabling Enabling Setting Enabling [Update [Manual Sales Network UGW Firmware] Update] Button Company’s Settings Link Button of User of User Mode HQ Mode (Remote UI)

Periodical update validation

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

-

-

Yes

Yes

-

Yes

-

-

Yes

-

-

-

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

-

-

-

Yes T-6-19

• For Install of Application Installation Method

Network Settings

Enabling [Install Application/ Options] Button of User Mode

LMS-linked Installation LMA-linked installation via Local UI LMS-linked installation via Remote UI

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation

T-6-20

6-78

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation

●● Setting Sales Company’s HQ

2. Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Company’s HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected. Market Canada Latin America Hong Kong

Default Setting of Sales Company's HQ US US/SG SG

Setting of Sales Company's HQ after Change CA LA HK

Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company’s HQ. Service Technician

6-79

Setting of Device Service Mode (Level 1)

This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. NOTE: CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS.

2. Press [Updater] button. T-6-21

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL

NOTE: The list below shows the setting of Sales Company’s HQ for CDS-CTS by market. Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market. Japan = JP USA = US Singapore = SG Europe = NL Korea = KR

China = CN Hong Kong = HK Australia = AU Canada = CA Latin America= LA F-6-101

3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

●● Network Settings 1. Connecting to External Network The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection method. Refer to user manual of the device for details. NOTE:

• See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network. • Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required. "Enabling UGW Link" "Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode" "Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"

NOTE: “External Network” here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet. F-6-102

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation

6-79

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation

4. Press [Settings] button.

6-80

3. Communication Test This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution server and/or the file server. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. NOTE: CDS and RDS are another servers. You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a communication test of the RDS. 2. Press [Updater] button.

F-6-103

5. Ensure to enter “https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif” in the field beside the [Delivery Server URL] button. If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL] button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.

3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.

F-6-105

F-6-104

6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set.

F-6-106

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Preparation

6-80

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Enabling UGW Link

4. Press [Test Communication] button.

6-81

6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown. Press [OK] button to exit this operation.

F-6-107

5. Press [Yes] button.

F-6-109

■■Enabling UGW Link When installing the firmware in the method of “UGW-linked Download and Update” or “UGWlinked Download”, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.

Service Technician

Setting of Device Service Mode (Level 1) Setting of UGW WebPortal

COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW (0 -> 1)

In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware]. See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution Setting of Authorities on Sales Company's HQ Information" to grant the appropriate authorities UGW WebPortal to each account.

NOTE:

F-6-108

Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server

• See “imageWARE Remote Operator’s Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation Manual“ for how to operate UGW WebPortal. • [Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.

(to execute the communication test to the distribution server). Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Version Upgrade via CDS > Enabling UGW Link

6-81

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)

6-82

NOTE: To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update.

See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked Download and Update”.

b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

STEP 1

See the figure below for the operational flow of “UGW-linked download”.

Scheduling via UGW F-6-110

STEP1: Scheduling via UGW The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW. See “UGW-linked Download and Update” in chapter 5 of Operation Manual of Content

STEP 1

STEP 2

Scheduling via UGW

Update using Updater

Delivery System V1.0 for Firmware Distribution for details.

F-6-111

STEP 1: Scheduling via UGW The device checks the schedule concerned every 12 hours on UGW. This allows the device

The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.

to register the firmware distribution setting, enabling automatic firmware download and

See “UGW-linked Download” in Operation Manual of CDS V1.0 (for Firmware Distribution) for

update.

details.

CAUTION: [Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function] Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during non-business hours. [Devices with Wait for EOJ Function] Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the queue. • Print

NOTE: The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated. If a user download the other firmware, the firmware downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.

STEP 2: Update using Updater The firmware downloaded on the device can be updated using Updater functions. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

• Scan • Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation) See the section of “Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function” under “Limitations and Cautions”, “Updater” of Chapter 2 “Technology” of this manual for more detailed information.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

6-82

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

2. Press [Updater] button.

6-83

4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.

F-6-112

3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

F-6-114

5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.

F-6-115 F-6-113

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

6-83

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied. 7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. 1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.

c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode) The figure below shows the operational flow of “Manual Download and Update”.

2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Download using Updater

Update using Updater

3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version]. Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of “Manual Download and Update”.

6-84

F-6-116

CAUTION: [Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function] Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during non-business hours. [Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]

STEP 1: Download using Updater The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button.

Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the queue. • Print • Scan • Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation) See the section of “Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function” under “Limitations and Cautions”, “Updater” of Chapter 2 “Technology” of this manual for more detailed information.

NOTE: To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update. F-6-117

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

6-84

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

6-85

5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.

F-6-120 F-6-118

4. Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways. • To update to the official edition, press [Confirm Applicable Firmware] button and go to Step 6. • To update to the individual response edition, press [Special Firmware] and go to Step 5.

• [Retrieval ID]: Enter numeric up to 8 characters. • [Password]: Enter numeric up to 8 characters. 6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.

F-6-119 F-6-121

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

6-85

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

• [Version]:

6-86

• [Now]:

The current firmware version is shown.

The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set.

• [Applicable Firmware]:

• [Set Time]:

Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.

Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on

• [Additional Languages]:

the specified date and time.

If there are any addtional languages, they are displayed.

Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of “yyyy/mm/dd

More than 1 language can be selected, and it is possible to add another language when upgrading the firmware.

hh:mm:ss” • [Timing to Apply]:

Up to 8 languages can be added. The languages already registered in the device are always selected, and SST is used to delete an unnecessary language from the device. Include English and Japnese in eight languages.

Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button. • [Auto]: The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.

• [Release Note]:

• [Manual]:

If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.

The firmware is automatically downloaded. Go to [Apply Firmware] to set up for updating the downloaded firmware. • [Updated Module Only]:

NOTE: To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and password that you input is displayed in [Applicable Firmware].

Press either [On] or [Off] button. • [On]: Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded. • [Off]:

7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.

The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded. • [E-mail]: E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here. Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge. Enter 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters. • [Comments]: Enter the comment in 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 128 characters. Enter the comment to be automatically included in E-mail. Model Name in the comment will be helpful to identify the device relevant to the E-mail.

F-6-122

• [Delivery Time]: Press either [Now] or [Set Time] button.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

6-86

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

NOTE: [Timing to Apply] • For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in [Timing to Apply]

6-87

9. One of the screens below is shown according to the setting. • When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and [Auto], respectively: Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device. The device is automatically restarted upon update completed. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.

[Updated Module Only] • For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be selected in [Updated Module Only]. [E-mail] • To send E-mails to multiple destinations, each E-mail address should be delimited with comma (,) or semi-colon (;). • For E-mail addresses entered in this field, a notification E-mail is sent at the following timing. -Distribution Set -Distribution Started -Distribution Finished -Update Started -Update Finished -Error Occurred F-6-124

When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and 8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept] button.

[Manual], respectively: Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.

F-6-125 F-6-123

6

• When Distribution Time is set to [Set Time] in Distribution Setting:

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

6-87

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

Confirm the distribution schedule and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully

6-88

3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

completed.

F-6-126

STEP 2: Update using Updater The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions. When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is

F-6-128

4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.

updated automatically. Only when Timing to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to update the firmware. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button.

F-6-129

F-6-127

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

6-88

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.

6-89

CAUTION: [Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function] Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during non-business hours. [Devices with Wait for EOJ Function] Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the queue. • Print • Scan • Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)

F-6-130

6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied.

See the section of “Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function” under “Limitations and Cautions”, “Updater” of Chapter 2 “Technical Information” of this manual for more detailed information.

7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. 1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel. 2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button. 3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version]. Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of “Manual Download and Update”.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

6-89

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule

Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule

6-90

5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.

This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater. 1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

F-6-133

6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button. Now the firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.

F-6-131

4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button.

F-6-132

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule

6-90

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)

Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware) This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware.

6-91

5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

F-6-136

6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied. 7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware. F-6-134

4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.

1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel. 2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button. 3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version]. Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.

F-6-135

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)

6-91

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Deleting Downloaded Firmware

Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater.

6-92

5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button.

1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1. 2. Press [Updater] button. 3. Press [Update Firmware] button.

F-6-139

6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is successfully deleted.

F-6-137

4. Press [Delete Firmware] button.

F-6-138

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Deleting Downloaded Firmware

6-92

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation

Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation

6-93

No.2 Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions.

No.1

Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like.

Symptom: I can’t find the firmware to be updated using Updater.

Action: Retry download. Firmware under download is cancelled upon aborted.

Cause: Preparation has not been properly done. Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Company’s HQ bellow.

No.3

Setting of Device [SERVICE MODE] (Level1)

Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL

device cannot be started. Cause: The power went off due to blackout and the like. Action: Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST. 1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device. 1) Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel. 2) [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI. If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory, service parts) should be replaced (takes up to 1 minute for rewriting). If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps below. F-6-140

2. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.

Cause: The version currently in use is not available for update. Action: Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version available for update. Cause: You try to download firmware from User mode.You can download only the latest version of firmware from User mode.

3. Via SST, install the firmware in the device. No.4 Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule. Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held,

Action: Download from Service mode.

the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule.

<User Mode>

Action: Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution

<Service Mode>

should be rescheduled for the firmware. Cause: At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on CDS. Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware. Cause: After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST. (Status of the firmware in the device is changed.) Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.

F-6-141 F-6-142

Cause: The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time. Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation

6-93

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Information required for Reports > Information to Report

No.5 Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found. Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded was overridden by the newly downloaded one. Action: Retry the firmware download.

6-94

Information required for Reports ■■Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site • Update Logs • System Logs (Log Level: 4)

■■Information to Report • Symptom occurred • Location of the device • Date and Time that symptom occurred • Steps taken for reproduction • Firmware / Application you tried to install • Occurrence frequency • Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models) • Dependency on firmware/MEAP application/system option • Conditions of symptom occurrence • Model • Firmware version installed on the device • List of MEAP applications installed on the device • Network setting information of the device • Service mode setting information Setting of device service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL (Level 1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM

* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided will be helpful for investigation.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Information required for Reports > Information to Report

6-94

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files

Debug Logs

6-95

NOTE:

• See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 3 for details of changing Log Level

■■Obtaining Log Files Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI.

4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the

This procedure is shown below.

original value and then restart the device to enable this setting.

1. Check that the “CDS-MEAP” or “CDS-FIRM” is enabled in the service mode. If they are not enabled, change the value to “1” and then restart the device.

Obtaining the log files is completed.

Service mode (Level1) > Mode List • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP: 1 • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM: 1 2. Log in the remote UI (URL: http://<device’s IP address or host name>) using the system administrator right. 3. From “Display Logs/Communication Test” screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and Update Logs by copy & paste. Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/ Others] > [Register/Update Software] > “Display Logs/Communication Test”

F-6-143

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files

6-95

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

6-96

Error Messages Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list. No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Messages

Timing of display

Cause

Remedy

An error occurred with the delivery In communicating with the System error occurred in server. Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of server. delivery server. Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales Contact your sales representative. company. Error Code: [xxx] Delivery server is stopped. In communicating with the Delivery server stopped. Check the delivery server stop information. After the delivery server starts, perform the Wait a while and then try to perform the delivery server. operation from this application. operation again. When the delivery server stop information is not available, contact the sales company's Check the following URL for details. Support Department. <Stopped Delivery Server URL> Failed to connect to delivery server. In communicating with the Communication error due to incorrect settings of Set correct CDS URL in the Updater settings. Check the delivery server and network. delivery server. CDS URL. Excluding delivery server stop, communication error Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence. to the delivery server occurred. If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Download was stopped because an At the time of file Communication error to the delivery server Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence. error occurred with the file server. download occurred. If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Check the network. Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Downloaded files are invalid. Check At the time of file The received file is broken. After checking the network environment of the device, re-execute the job. the network. download If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Failed to retrieve information of special Acquisition of applicable No information exists about firmware for special Enter the correct firmware ID or Password applicable to the firmware information. firmware. firmware information firmware retrieval ID or Password is invalid. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Check the retrieval ID and password. Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Scheduled delivery information of Acquisition of applicable Delivery information with specified delivery ID does Register the delivery schedule again. If this occurs at the time of canceling file download, firmware does not exist. firmware information not exist. deleting downloaded firmware or deleting scheduled delivery, no remedy is required. Check it because it may already have been deleted. Failed to apply firmware. Firmware application error Error due to the application (NLM) Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

6-96

6 No.

Messages

9

Delivery Server : Connect Failed File Server : Retrieve Failed Error Code: [xxxx]

10

Delivery Server : Connect OK File Server : Retrieve Failed Error Code: [xxxx]

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

Timing of display

Cause

Communication test, etc. In the communication test, failed to connect to the (communication test result delivery server. dialogue) In SOAP communication, failed to success after 1 min retry. ID and Password required for proxy to connect to the internet are not configured in device.

6-97 Remedy

Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Set proxy and restart the communication test. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. The access to the network is limited. Set the user environment to make the access to the following domain available. https://device.cdsknn.net/ http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/ If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Delivery server stopped. Contact Field Support Group in the sale company. After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication test. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company again. Delivery Server : Connect Due to no return of data for the communication test, Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job. OK time-out (in HTTP communication, no response If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version File Server : Retrieve for 1min) occurred. After that, retried but failed to Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the Failed connect to server. sales company. The network cable was disconnected during data Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test. Error Code: [XXXX] download in the communication test. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. The file server stopped during data download in the Contact the sales company's Support Department. communication test. After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication test. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company again. Hash value in the communication test file is Check the network environment and re-execute the job. incorrect. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

6-97

6 No.

11

Messages

An error occurred. Error Code: [xxx]

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

Timing of display

Cause

communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new (main screen) log was not accepted. Normally an old log file is deleted before the max value (space/file) is exceeded, but error may occur due to other element (e.g. I/O error).

6-98 Remedy

Check if the log file exceeded the max value. Max space: 128KB/file Max file number: 4 <System log> Max space: 512KB/file Max file number: 4

If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Notice of version Failed to acquire version information of device Re-execute the job. information (main screen) due to no CDS registration of firmware version of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version device. Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. At the time of notifying version information, failed to Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence. connect to the delivery server. If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version No return of notifying version information Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Network cable was disconnected during notice of Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job. version information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Failed to send notice of version information since Re-execute the job. the main power was turned OFF and then ON If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version during the sending. Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Server stopped at the time of sending notice of Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job. version information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. An internal error occurred at the time of sending Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of notice of version information. Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

6-98

6 No.

11

Messages

An error occurred. Error Code: [xxx]

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

Timing of display

UGW linkage (main screen)

On-site (error dialogue)

Immediate download (error dialogue)

Manual update (error dialogue) Automatic update (error dialogue) Deletion of downloaded firmware

6

Cause

6-99 Remedy

UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the UGW linkage. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job. delivery information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job. applicable firmware information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. An internal error occurred at the time of sending Re-execute the job. approval information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. An internal error occurred at the time of delivery Re-execute the job. order If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. An internal error occurred at the time of requesting Re-execute the job. firmware delivery information. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. During the download, all space in the storage disk After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the job. was occupied. (DiskFull) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. At the end of receipt, an internal error occurred. Re-execute the job. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. At the update start, an internal error occurred. Re-execute the job. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company At the update start, an internal error occurred. Re-execute the job. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. At the time of notifying cancellation, an internal Re-execute the job. error occurred. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

6-99

6 No.

12

Messages

An error occurred. Check the Update Firmware screen.

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

Timing of display

UGW linkage (main screen)

Immediate download (main screen) Manual update (main screen) Automatic update (main screen)

6

Cause

eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect to server.

6-100 Remedy

Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, resend the order from the eRDS. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Delivery server stopped. Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Scheduled date and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again. server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version passed.) Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Scheduled data and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again. server did not exist. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job. then ON the power of device main body. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Updated version was different from the ordered Re-execute the job. version. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. After the update, failed to connect to the delivery Check the network environment and re-execute the job. server. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. After the update, delivery server stopped. Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. After the update, the network cable was Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job. disconnected. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. After the update, server returned an error. Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. After the update, an internal error occurred. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

6-100

6 No.

13

14

15

16

17 18 19 20

Messages

Delivery Error Error Code: [xxx]

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

Timing of display

UGW linkage (Update Firmware screen)

Cause

eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect to the server.

6-101 Remedy

Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause, resend the order from the eRDS. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. The delivery server stopped. Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. The scheduled data and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again. server does not exist. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Delivery Error UGW linkage (Update The scheduled date and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again. Delivery Time Firmware screen) server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Delivery Firmware Label passed). Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the Delivery Firmware version sales company. Immediate download At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job. Error Code: [ xxx ] (Update Firmware screen) then ON the power of device main body. If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Applicable firmware is not registered. On-site (error dialogue) At the user site, no latest firmware exists. This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has no impact. But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g. released new firmware information has been notified, contact Field Support Group in the sales company. No applicable firmware exists on CDS, so the Contact the sales company's Support Department. service person can't select any applicable firmware. Restart failed. Manual update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job. Turn the main power OFF and ON. dialogue) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Automatic update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job. dialogue) If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under “Version Upgrade”of Chapter 6 “Troubleshooting” of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company. Specify [E-Mail Address] with up to 64 At the time of periodical The specified E-mail address exceeded 64 Specify E-mail address within 64 characters. characters. update setting characters. The following characters cannot be At the time of periodical used for the [E-Mail Address]: update setting ,:;“()[]<>\ Specify [Comments] with up to 128 At the time of periodical Comments exceeded 128 characters. Specify comments within 128 characters. characters. update setting The [Delivery Server URL] is incorrect. In setting with the deliver The specified deliver server URL is wrong. Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif) server URL. T-6-22

6

Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Error Messages

6-101

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > How to read an error code

6-102

Error Codes Error Code The following shows the error codes displayed on CDS error dialogs and the Control Panel of the device (local UI) and explanation of those error codes.

■■How to read an error code

84014206 Local UI

Error Message dialogue

Code

Value

The first digit Error field The second digit Operator

8

Error

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Not defined. CDS server Updater UGW Service person IT administrator (User) Scheduled Update

The 3rd - 4th digits Method category The 5th digit Category code

xx

Method

The 6 - 8th digits Description code

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 000-

Contents

Category code

See Error code list

F-6-144

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > How to read an error code

6-102

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

■■List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed In the list shown below, error codes which are likely to be displayed are classified into two groups: • Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81") • Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86") When an error code is displayed, check this list first. If it is not in this list, see "Error Code".

●● Error codes caused by the CDS server (error codes starting with "81") Error Code (hex number)

Description

Remedy

Error codes starting with "81": CDS server 81021008 As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no applicable device code product 81040002 In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/ or character type is/are set against the regulations

81040002 is displayed in the following cases: • The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8. • The registration ID or password includes characters other than single-byte numeric characters. 81041012 Device is "Not applicable to CDS" (Firmware distribution) * It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed. 81060002 In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/ or character type is/are set against the regulations 81060002 is displayed in the following cases: • The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type, Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or Firmware Label does not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters. • The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) includes characters other than numeric values. • The number of digits of E-mail Address mailAddress) is larger than 128. • Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols are used for E-mail Address (mailAddress). • An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, .(dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.)

6

Check registration of LMS. (CINC) When 81040002 is displayed: Enter the correct ID and password for Special Firmware. (User)

Register the device as a CDS device.

When 81060002 is displayed due to an error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or Firmware Group Version, register the correct firmware again.(CINC) When 81060002 is displayed due to an invalid e-mail address, register the correct e-mail address. (User)

Error Code (hex number)

6-103 Description

81081014 When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time-out. CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time. The device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc. 81091001 81091001 is displayed in the following cases: • The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of distribution differs from the firmware information of the device at the time of registration of the distribution schedule. The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution schedule for the device that supports the UGW-linked function had been registered. • As a result, the firmware information of the CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of the distribution schedule. When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated was disabled after distribution schedule was registered using auto update. 8106100A The delivery status is Applying After the firmware was updated and when an update completion notification has not been sent to CDS, distribution of the firmware was attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS. 8108100D The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/ Applying/Finished/Failed 8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule information was checked with CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the status change due to a network 810A1015 When firmware distribution time-out occurs. A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours after the start of the distribution. The device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc. 810B1010 The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/ Distributing/Applying/Finished/Failed 810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid status. (The CDS server failed to receive the status change due to a network error, etc.)

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

Remedy

Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.

If distribution of the firmware is necessary, search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.

After 2 hours and 30 minutes have passed since the failed attempt to distribute the firmware, search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware. Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.

Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.

Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.

6-103

6 Error Code (hex number)

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

Description

Remedy

810C1016 Firmware update time-out occurred. An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after 2 hours since the start of the update.

Error Code (hex number)

Check the device to see if the update has been completed. When the update has ended in failure, execute the operation again if there is no problem with the device. T-6-23

●● Error codes caused by the device (error codes starting with "82" to "86") Error Code (hex number)

Description

Error codes starting with "82": Updater 82001106 Another job existed immediately before the firmware update processing. 82005202 Failed to connect to the server

82005203 82005204

82005205

82005206 82005300 82005304 82005308 82005309

Remedy

Start the operation again after terminating the job of the device

Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS server), and start the operation again. Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again. An input/output error occurred Check that no problem is found in the two items during the connecting process to displayed during the communication test. If any the server problem was found, check the network environment. Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test. If any problem was found, check the network environment. Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. Codes other than the following Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings "3xx" definition and network environment. Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again. Invalid hash code of the Check the network environment of the device, and download file start the operation again. The proxy authentication method Check the proxy authentication method being is not supported, or access to the used, change the setting to use a supported proxy CDS file server is not permitted. authentication, and then start the operation again. Check that access to the following URL is permitted. • device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https) • cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)

6

Description

82007502 The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a certain period of time due to the power of the device being OFF at the scheduled time or other reasons. 82095204 An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server 82095206 Error in a HTTP response 82095300 Codes other than the following "3xx" definition 82095309 The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted.

6-104 Remedy

Scheduled deliveries not executed within the defined period of time are abandoned, so register a scheduled delivery again. When setting the date and time of the scheduled delivery, be sure to designate a time when the device is ON. Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test. If any problem was found, check the network environment. Check the network environment. Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again. Check that access to the following URL is permitted. • device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https) • cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)

Error codes starting with "84": Service person 84001106 Another job existed immediately Start the operation again after terminating the job of before the firmware update the device processing. 84005202 Failed to connect to the server Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS server), and start the operation again. 84005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again. 84005204 An input/output error occurred Check that no problem is found in the two items during the connecting process to displayed during the communication test. If any the server problem was found, check the network environment. 84005205 Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test. If any problem was found, check the network environment. 84005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. 84005300 Codes other than the following Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings "3xx" definition and network environment. 84005304 Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again. 84005308 Invalid hash code of the Check the network environment of the device, and download file start the operation again.

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

6-104

6 Error Code (hex number)

Description

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

Remedy

84005309 The proxy authentication method Check the proxy authentication method being is not supported, or access to the used, change the setting to use a supported proxy CDS file server is not permitted. authentication, and then start the operation again. Check that access to the following URL is permitted. • device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https) • cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http) 84095203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again. 84095204 An input/output error occurred Check that no problem is found in the two items during the connecting process to displayed during the communication test. If any the server problem was found, check the network environment. 84095205 Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test. If any problem was found, check the network environment. 84095206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. 84095300 Codes other than the following Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings "3xx" definition and network environment. 84095309 The proxy authentication method Check the proxy authentication method being is not supported, or access to the used, change the setting to use a supported proxy CDS file server is not permitted. authentication, and then start the operation again. Check that access to the following URL is permitted. • device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https) • cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http) Error codes starting with "85" :IT administrator (User) 85001106 Another job existed immediately Start the operation again after terminating the job of before the firmware update the device processing. 85005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again. 85005204 An input/output error occurred Check that no problem is found in the two items during the connecting process to displayed during the communication test. If any the server problem was found, check the network environment. 85005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. 85005300 Codes other than the following Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings "3xx" definition and network environment. 85005308 Invalid hash code of the Check the network environment of the device, and download file start the operation again. 85005309 The proxy authentication method Check the proxy authentication method being is not supported, or access to the used, change the setting to use a supported proxy CDS file server is not permitted. authentication, and then start the operation again. Check that access to the following URL is permitted. • device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https) • cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http) 85095203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again.

6

Error Code (hex number)

Description

6-105 Remedy

85095204 An input/output error occurred Check that no problem is found in the two items during the connecting process to displayed during the communication test. If any the server problem was found, check the network environment. 85095206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. 85095300 Codes other than the following Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings "3xx" definition and network environment. 850C1104 Session time-out excluding after Start the operation again from the beginning application inquiry (after issuing delivery ID) Error codes starting with "86": Scheduled Update 86001106 Another job existed immediately Start the operation again after terminating the job of before the firmware update the device processing. 86005203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again. 86005204 An input/output error occurred Check that no problem is found in the two items during the connecting process to displayed during the communication test. If any the server problem was found, check the network environment. 86005205 Failed to read a HTTP response Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test. If any problem was found, check the network environment. 86005206 Error in a HTTP response Check the network environment. 86005300 Codes other than the following Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings "3xx" definition and network environment. 86005304 Failed to receive the data Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again. 86005305 Failed to receive the data Check that no problem is found in the HDD. When this error occurs again, contact Support Group of sales companies. 86005308 Invalid hash code of the Check the network environment of the device, and download file start the operation again. 86005309 The proxy authentication method Check the proxy authentication method being is not supported, or access to the used, change the setting to use a supported proxy CDS file server is not permitted. authentication, and then start the operation again. Check that access to the following URL is permitted. • device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https) • cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http) 86095203 Failed to find the server Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again. 86095204 An input/output error occurred Check that no problem is found in the two items during the connecting process to displayed during the communication test. If any the server problem was found, check the network environment. 86095300 Codes other than the following Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings "3xx" definition and network environment.

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > List of Error Codes Likely to Be Displayed

T-6-24

6-105

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

6-106

■■Error Code The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.

003

8

1

x

x

0

004

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

-

ura

0

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

1

-

ura

8

-

Tam

002

ura

0

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

1

Contact the support department of the sales company. In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or character type When 81040002 is displayed: is/are set against the regulations • Enter the correct ID and password for 81040002 is displayed in the following cases: Special Firmware. (User) • The number of digits of the registration ID or password is not 8. • The registration ID or password includes characters other than When 81060002 is displayed due to an single-byte numeric characters. error in Firm Type, Firmware Version, or Firmware Group Version: 81060002 is displayed in the following cases: • Register the correct firmware again. • The number of digits or type of characters used for Firm Type, (CINC) Firmware Version, Firmware Group Version, or Firmware Label does not meet the specified number of digits or type of characters. When 81060002 is displayed due to an • The character string of Firmware Group Version (firmGroupVersion) invalid e-mail address: - Register the includes characters other than numeric values. correct e-mail address. (User) • The number of digits of E-mail Address (mailAddress) is larger than 128. • Characters other than single-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols are used for E-mail Address (mailAddress). • An invalid e-mail address was input (The domain name is missing, . (dot) was input instead of , (comma), etc.) In an data entry item, the value is set against the regulations Contact the support department of the (E.g. the set value is other than "Operator: 4. Service person, 5. User") sales company. No applicable delivery information exists Contact the support department of the sales company.

ura

8

Not defined. CDS server x x Relating method code x x 0 Not categorized x x 0 001 No value is set in a mandatory data entry item

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

Tam

Error 0 1 1 1 1

Remedy

ura

8 8 8 8 8 8

Description

Tam

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

6-106

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

x x

x x

1

1

Operation 001

Inconsistency between the current firmware component in the data entry item and delivery information (E.g. the conditions for automatic update are not met. The settings of a mandatory additional set are invalid)

If distribution of the firmware is necessary, search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

-

ura

1 1

Remedy

Tam

8 8

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-107

Tam

6

-

-

1

003

8

1

x

x

1

004

8

1

x

x

1

005

8

1

x

x

1

006

8

1

x

x

1

007

8

1

x

x

1

008

8

1

x

x

1

009

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

Tam ura

x

Tam ura

x

ura

1

Tam

8

Tam ura

002

Tam ura

1

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

1

Tam

8

81091001 is displayed in the following cases: • The firmware information of the device at the time of execution of distribution differs from the firmware information of the device at the time of registration of the distribution schedule. • The firmware was upgraded without using CDS when distribution schedule for the device that supports the UGW-linked function had been registered. As a result, the firmware information of the CDS server at the time of execution of distribution differs from the firmware information of the CDS server at the time of registration of the distribution schedule. • When the remote update setting for the firmware to be updated was disabled after distribution schedule was registered using auto update. In a notice of delivery-allowed information, an install-set was release to Contact the support department of the the market, but the market release was stopped during the delivery sales company. No mail template file exists Contact the support department of the sales company. The device serial number in the data entry item differs from that in Contact the support department of the delivery information sales company. User is selected as Operator in the data entry items and the retrieval Contact the support department of the type is other than the latest sales company. The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and registration Contact the support department of the ID and individual Password are not set (* Operator did not enter sales company. registration ID and individual Password) The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and Operator is not Contact the support department of the Service person sales company. As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no Check registration of LMS. (CINC) applicable device code product The retrieval type in the data entry items is special and there are no Enter correct ID and the password. basic-set applicable to the registration ID and Password (* When wrong registration ID or Password was entered by an operator)

Tam ura

81071001 is displayed in the following cases: • A cancellation notification was sent to CDS when the distribution status was not correct. (CDS has not received the status change due to a network failure, etc.)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

6-107

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

x

x

1

00D

8

1

x

x

1

00E

8

1

x

x

1

00F

8

1

x

x

1

010

8

1

x

x

1

011

8

1

x

x

1

012

8

1

x

x

1

013

8

1

x

x

1

014

8

1

x

x

1

015

6

The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributed/Applying/ Finished/Failed The delivery code is other than Distributing. (Firmware distribution) The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/Applying/ Finished/Failed 810B1010: An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid status. (The CDS server failed to receive the status change due to a network error, etc.) The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware.

Contact the support department of the sales company. Register the device as a CDS device.

Device is "Not applicable to CDS" (Firmware distribution) * It occurs only when a device that can access CDS is managed. When the specified distribution time was within the time frame of CDS Contact the support department of the distribution stop. sales company. (Firmware distribution) When confirmation of the firmware distribution settings ended in time- Search the applicable firmware again, out. and perform distribution of the firmware. CDS was not accessed within 30 minutes after the distribution time. The device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc. When firmware distribution time-out occurs. Search the applicable firmware again, A reception completion notification was not sent to CDS within 24 hours and perform distribution of the firmware. after the start of the distribution. The device has been turned OFF, the network has been disconnected, etc.

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

ura

1

Tam

8

ura

00C

Tam

1

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

1

Tam

8

ura

00B

Tam

1

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

1

After 2 hours and 30 minutes have passed since the failed attempt to distribute the firmware, search the applicable firmware again, and perform distribution of the firmware. No approval information exists about EULA or the export criteria when Contact the support department of the the delivery is determined sales company. The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again, When the distribution status was not correct, distribution information and perform distribution of the firmware. was obtained from CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the status change due to a network failure, etc.) The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/Finished/Failed Search the applicable firmware again, 8108100D: When the distribution status was not correct, schedule and perform distribution of the firmware. information was checked with CDS. (CDS has not been notified of the status change due to a network

Tam

8

The delivery status is Applying After the firmware was updated and when an update completion notification has not been sent to CDS, distribution of the firmware was attempted again before update time-out is processed in CDS.

Tam ura

00A

Tam ura

1

ura

x

Tam

x

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

1

Remedy

Tam

8

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-108

Tam

6

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

6-108

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

x

1

021

8

1

x

x

1

022

8

1

x

x

1

023

8 8

1 1

x x

x x

2 2

8

1

x

x

8

1

x

8

1

8

I/O

001

The specified license access number does not exist in LMS

2

002

The specified license access number has been deauthorized

x

2

003

x

x

2

004

1

x

x

2

005

8

1

x

x

2

006

8

1

x

x

2

007

The package product of the entered license access number doesn't include MEAP application/System Option The sales company for the MEAP application isn't identical with the sale company for the package product The number of licenses to be issued will exceed the limit number allowed to register As for System Option for the same function, the license keys were issued more than the defined number of times for the same device serial number No device product exists applicable to the optional product

8

1

x

x

2

008

8

1

x

x

2

009

8

1

x

x

2

00A

8

1

x

x

2

00B

8

1

x

x

2

00C

6

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company.

Contact the support department of the sales company. No product exists applicable to the device serial number Contact the support department of the sales company. The product of the entered license access number cannot be used with Contact the support department of the this device because the settings of the sales company are incorrect sales company. No product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS Contact the support department of the for delivery sales company. Although the product linked to the license access number is registered Contact the support department of the in CDS for delivery, the delivery is stopped now sales company. No existence of optional product applicable to the device serial number. Contact the support department of the sales company.

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

ura

x

Tam

1

ura

8

Tam

020

ura

1

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

1

ura

8

Tam

019

ura

1

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

1

ura

8

Tam

018

ura

1

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

1

Tam ura

8

Tam ura

017

Tam ura

1

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

1

Tam

8

Firmware update time-out occurred. Check the device to see if the update has An update completion notification had not been sent to CDS even after been completed. When the update has 2 hours since the start of the update. ended in failure, execute the operation again if there is no problem with the device. When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the in processing the distribution information. sales company. When the firmware distribution information notification showed an error Contact the support department of the sales company. in processing the scheduled update information. Contact the support department of the When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set", sales company. "Finished", or "Failed". Contact the support department of the When the status of the scheduled update information is "Waiting to sales company. Transmit" or "New". Contact the support department of the When the status of the scheduled update information is "Set". sales company. Contact the support department of the The scheduled update setting information differs between the input sales company. information and the distribution information. Contact the support department of the When the distribution status is "Cancel". sales company.

Tam ura

016

ura

1

Tam

x

Tam ura

x

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

1

Remedy

Tam

8

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-109

Tam

6

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

6-109

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

x

2

012

8

1

x

x

2

013

8 8

1 1

x x

x x

F F

000

8

1

x

x

F

001

8

1

x

x

F

003

8

1

x

x

F

007

8

1

x

x

F

008

8

1

x

x

F

009

8

1

x

x

F

00F

8

1

x

x

F

010

8

1

x

x

F

011

8

1

x

x

F

012

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ura

x

-

Tam

1

-

ura

8

-

Tam

011

ura

2

-

Tam

x

-

ura

x

-

Tam

1

-

Tam ura

8

-

ura

010

-

Tam

2

-

ura

x

-

Tam

x

-

Tam ura

1

-

Tam ura

8

-

ura

00E

-

Tam

2

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

1

Contact the support department of the sales company. For the device product applicable to the device serial number, no Contact the support department of the available software (MEAP application, System Option) exists sales company. LMS system error Contact the support department of the * In support of multi-manifest, when the MFP/SFP section value shows sales company. any value other than 0 or 1, LMS returns an error code "-215" to CDS. LMS system error Contact the support department of the * In the case of failure in collection of manifest in support of multisales company. manifest, LMS returns an error code "-999" to CDS. License cannot be issued for the upgrade product. Contact the support department of the Since the configuration has been changed in the upgrade product, sales company. there are no applications and options for which a license can be issued. Not registered in CSA Contact the support department of the CSA associated with the license access number does not include any sales company. products associated with the group ID. L-CDS Unclassified Contact the support department of the sales company. Communication test information not registered Contact the support department of the Download file information for communication test does not exist. sales company. Firmware information not registered Contact the support department of the Firmware information corresponding to the target device serial number sales company. does not exist. Invalid firmware version Contact the support department of the The firmware version at the time of registration of the distribution sales company. schedule differs from the current firmware version. Invalid firmware information Contact the support department of the Firmware information to be distributed does not exist. sales company. Forcible termination Contact the support department of the Distribution information is forcibly terminated from the server UI. sales company. Invalid distribution status Contact the support department of the Distribution status of the server is in a condition where a requested sales company. method from the client cannot be accepted. Invalid parameter Contact the support department of the Requested parameter from the client is not correct. sales company. Version information not registered Contact the support department of the Version information corresponding to the specified serial number has sales company. not been registered. Distribution time-out Contact the support department of the Distribution has not been completed even after a certain period of time sales company. from the start of the distribution.

Tam

8

The license access number has been registered for another device

ura

00D

Tam

2

ura

x

Tam

x

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

1

Remedy

Tam

8

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-110

Tam

6

6-110

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

101

8

2~6

x

x

1

102

8

2~6

x

x

1

103

8

2~6

x

x

1

104

8 8

2~6 2~6

x x

x x

1 1

105 106

8

2~6

x

x

1

201

8

2~6

x

x

1

202

8

2~6

x

x

1

203

8

2~6

x

x

1

204

L-CDS update process for a model that does not support L-CDS

8

2~6

x

x

1

301

Security Token verification error

8

2~6

x

x

1

302

Privilege check error

8

2~6

x

x

1

303

Parameter error

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Perform the authentication as a correct user. Contact the support department of the sales company.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ura

1

Tam

x

-

ura

x

-

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

002

-

ura

1

-

Tam

x

-

ura

x

Start the operation again after terminating other Updater operations being executed simultaneously Stopped Restart the device, and start the operation again. Failed to process preparation for use Contact the support department of the sales company. Failed to process use end Contact the support department of the sales company. Time out during restart of readiness preparation Contact the support department of the sales company. Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after issuing Start the operation again from the delivery ID) beginning CDS URL is not set Set CDS URL Start the operation again after terminating Another job existed immediately before the firmware update the job of the device processing. Specifying of an iR option for a model that does not support iR options Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the Specifying of scheduled update for a model that does not support sales company. scheduled update Contact the support department of the Firmware processing for a model that does not support firmware sales company. processing

Tam

2~6

-

Normally not indicated Normally not indicated

ura

8

Relating method code 0 Not cartelized 0 000 Not defined 0 100 Unknown error 1 Operation 1 001 Processing exclusively

Tam

x x x x x x

-

ura

x x x x x x

-

Tam

2~6 2~6 2~6 2~6 2~6 2~6 2~6

-

Tam ura

8 8 8 8 8 8 8

-

-

ura

FFF

-

Tam

F

-

ura

x

-

Tam

x

-

ura

1

-

-

Tam

8

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company.

ura

FFE

Tam

F

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

1

Contact the support department of the sales company.

Tam

8

Unable to judge the necessity of distribution Version information from a device has not been registered in the local CDS. Since the local CDS does not know the version information of the device, it cannot respond to the distribution request from updater. As a result of that, an error occurred when the request has been made. DB error General error to access DB. DB error Internal error other than error to access DB (file I/O, etc.).

ura

013

Tam

F

ura

x

Tam

x

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

1

Remedy

Tam

8

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-111

Tam

6

6-111

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

x

2

301

Failed to output the license file

8

2~6

x

x

2

400

Codes other than the following "4xx" definition

8

2~6

x

x

2

401

Failure in creation of an auto shutdown stop file

8

2~6

x

x

2

402

Failure in deletion of the auto shutdown stop file

8 8

2~6 2~6

x x

x x

3

Device 1xx

8

2~6

x

x

3

2xx

An internal error in IMI

8

2~6

x

x

3

3xx

An internal error in SMS

8

2~6

x

x

3

4xx

An internal error in NLM

8

2~6

x

x

3

5xx

Configuration Service property setting error

8

2~6

x

x

3

6xx

An internal error related to APL_CDS partition

8

2~6

x

x

3

7xx

DCM-related service error

8 8

2~6 2~6

x x

x

8

2~6

x

x

4

8

2~6

x

x

4

103

The function type is not matched

8

2~6

x

x

4

104

An invalid SOAP response error

8

2~6

x

x

4

201

An internal error about application information

3

4

4

An internal error in CPCA

SOAP communication 101 The processing thread stopped 102

6

Processing SOAP communication now

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Check the network environment. When this problem recurs, contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ura

x

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

An internal error about xML file operation

ura

2xx

-

Tam

2

-

ura

x

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company.

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

-

ura

An internal error about file operation

-

Tam

1xx

2

I/O

ura

Connection server information mismatch error

1

Tam

306

2

-

ura

x x x

-

Tam

x x x

-

ura

2~6 2~6 2~6

-

Tam

8 8 8

-

ura

Version notification is not required.

Tam

305

-

ura

1

-

Tam

x

-

ura

x

-

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Check the connection server settings.

Tam

There is no distribution information from the server.

Tam ura

304

ura

1

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

2~6

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

8

Remedy

Tam

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-112

Tam

6

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

6-112

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

4

207

An unknown host error in performing the web method

8

2~6

x

x

4

301

The delivery server is stopped

8

2~6

x

x

4

302

In response to a download start notification sent from the device, the distribution server returned an error and stopped the operation of the device within a certain period of time before the distribution server maintenance time. The firmware version of the device at the time when the distribution settings were specified and the version at the time immediately before update are different.

8 8

2~6 2~6

x x

x x

5 5

HTTP communication 101 Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown

8

2~6

x

x

5

102

Download file URL is invalid

8

2~6

x

x

5

103

No network cable connection (device side)

8

2~6

x

x

5

201

Invalid HTTP request

8

2~6

x

x

5

202

Failed to connect to the server

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

-

-

-

-

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Specify the distribution settings again, making sure that the firmware version of device at the time when the distribution settings are specified and the version at the time immediately before update are the same. Contact the support department of the sales company. Check the URL setting of CDS server, reset the setting, and then start the operation again. Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again. Contact the support department of the sales company. Check the network environment of the device (check for any problem in the DNS server), and start the operation again.

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ura

A runtime error in performing the web method

-

Tam

206

-

ura

4

-

Tam

x

-

ura

x

-

-

Tam

2~6

-

-

ura

8

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. • Check the network environment of the device and start the operation again • Check if the URL settings of the CDS server are correct, and start the operation again after resetting Contact the support department of the sales company. Specify the distribution settings again, making sure that the distribution server maintenance time and the scheduled update time do not overlap.

-

Tam

An error in creating a service tab

ura

205

Tam

4

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

-

ura

An error in binding type.xml

Tam

204

ura

4

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

type.xml is NOT FOUND

ura

203

Tam

4

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company.

ura

config.xml is NOT FOUND

Tam

202

ura

4

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

2~6

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

8

Remedy

Tam

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-113

Tam

6

6-113

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

Failed to receive the data

8

2~6

x

x

5

305

An error about reserving the file data for receipt

8

2~6

x

x

5

306

Failed to close the data stream

8

2~6

x

x

5

307

Failed to close the file data for receipt

8

2~6

x

x

5

308

Invalid hash code of the download file

8

2~6

x

x

5

309

The proxy authentication method is not supported, or access to the CDS file server is not permitted.

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ura

304

Tam

5

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

-

ura

Failed to create the data stream of the file for receipt

Tam

303

ura

5

Tam

x

ura

x

-

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

Failed to create the file object for receipt

ura

302

Tam

5

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

-

ura

Failed to retrieve the data stream

Tam

301

ura

5

Tam

x

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Tam ura

x

-

Tam ura

2~6

ura

8

-

Tam

Codes other than the following "3xx" definition

ura

300

Tam

5

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

-

ura

Connection time-out

Tam

209

ura

5

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

Certificate check error

Tam ura

208

ura

5

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

Error in a HTTP response Generation of secure socket failed.

ura

206 207

Tam

5 5

ura

x x

Tam

x x

ura

2~6 2~6

-

Tam

8 8

-

ura

205

Tam

5

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server Failed to read a HTTP response

ura

204

Tam

5

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

Check the network environment of the device (the proxy settings, etc.), and start the operation again. Check that no problem is found in the two items displayed during the communication test. If any problem was found, check the network environment. Check the network environment. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Check that no problem is found in the proxy settings and network environment. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again. Check that no problem is found in the HDD. When this error occurs again, contact Support Group of sales companies. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Check the network environment of the device, and start the operation again. Check the proxy authentication method being used, change the setting to use a supported proxy authentication, and then start the operation again. Check that access to the following URL is permitted. • device.c-cdsknn.net (protocol: https) • cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net (protocol: http)

Tam ura

Failed to find the server

ura

203

Tam

5

ura

x

Tam

x

Tam ura

2~6

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

Tam ura

8

Remedy

ura

Description

Tam

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-114

Tam ura

6

6-114

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

x

7

03x

8

2~6

x

x

7

1xx

8

2~6

x

x

7

2xx

8

2~6

x

x

7

301

8

2~6

x

x

7

302

8

2~6

x

x

7

303

8

2~6

x

x

7

304

8

2~6

x

x

7

305

8

2~6

x

x

7

306

8

2~6

x

x

7

401

8

2~6

x

x

7

501

8

2~6

x

x

7

502

6

An internal error in processing the installation

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Contact the support department of the sales company. An error by using invalid API Contact the support department of the sales company. An internal error in SMS Contact the support department of the sales company. No existence of delivery ID Contact the support department of the sales company. Invalid delivery ID Contact the support department of the sales company. The updated firmware information is not identical with the firmware Contact the support department of the information after activation of the Updater sales company. The process of firmware download is incomplete Contact the support department of the It occurs when the power of the device is turned OFF during download. sales company. The update process is incomplete Contact the support department of the The power was turned OFF after completion of download and before sales company. start of update processing. The installment process is incomplete Contact the support department of the sales company. Failed to retrieve delivery information Contact the support department of the sales company. Failed to execute the delivery process Contact the support department of the sales company. The scheduled distribution had not been executed even after a Scheduled deliveries not executed certain period of time due to the power of the device being OFF at the within the defined period of time are scheduled time or other reasons. abandoned, so register a scheduled delivery again. When setting the date and time of the scheduled delivery, be sure to designate a time when the device is ON

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

ura

x

-

Tam

2~6

Contact the support department of the sales company.

ura

8

Other internal codes 002 One of installation, start or authorization failed (When installation or authorization failed, it is regarded as an error) *

Tam

7 7

ura

x x

-

Tam

x x

-

ura

2~6 2~6

-

-

Tam

8 8

-

-

ura

Socket communication time-out

-

Tam

105

ura

6

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

Error of socket reading

ura

104

Tam

6

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

-

ura

No notice of start from the eRDS

Tam

103

ura

6

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

2~6

-

ura

8

-

Tam

No response from eRDS

ura

102

Tam

6

ura

x

Tam

x

-

ura

2~6

-

Tam

8

Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company. Contact the support department of the sales company.

ura

Socket communication 101 Failed to connect the eRDS

Tam

6 6

ura

x x

Tam

x x

ura

2~6 2~6

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

Tam

8 8

Remedy

Tam ura

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-115

Tam

6

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

6-115

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

Application of the firmware failed.

8 8

x x

x x

x x

4 4

8

x

x

x

4

-

6

Tam ura Tam ura

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

ura

Tam

An error occurred in the CDS server due to an unknown host error at execution of Web method.

Contact the support department of the sales company. Check the network environment of the device, and then check that the URL setting of the CDS server is correct, and perform the operation again.

Tam

SOAP communication 104 An error occurred in the CDS server. 207

ura

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

ura

409

-

Tam

3

-

ura

x

Restart the device, and perform the operation again. When this problem recurs, obtain the Updater log, and contact the support department of the sales company. Obtain the Updater log, and contact the support department of the sales company.

-

Tam

x

Restart of the device failed.

ura

x

-

Tam

8

-

ura

Application of the firmware failed.

Tam

401 402 403 404 405 406 407

ura

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

-

Tam

x x x x x x x

-

ura

x x x x x x x

-

Tam

x x x x x x x

-

ura

8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Restart the device, and perform the operation again. When this problem recurs, obtain the Updater log, and contact the support department of the sales company. Obtain the Updater log, and contact the support department of the sales company.

Tam

304

Restart of the device failed.

-

ura

3

-

Tam

x

-

ura

x

Contact the support department of the sales company.

Tam

x

An error occurred in the CDS server.

ura

8

200 201 202 203 Device 303

Tam

I/O

ura

1 1 1 1 1 3 3

Tam

x x x x x x x x

-

ura

x x x x x x x x

x

-

Tam

x x x x x x x x

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Contact the support department of the sales company.

ura

Internal Module xxx Communication error in the internal module

Tam

A A

ura

x x

Tam

x x

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

2~6 2~6

Remedy

ura

8 8

Description

Tam

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-116

Tam

6

6-116

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

* Not displayed on a device UI

ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam Tam

ura

ura

-

-

Tam

ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam

ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura

-

ura

Check the network environment, and perform the operation again. When there is no problem with the network environment, collect the Updater log, and contact the support department of the sales company.

-

Tam

An error occurred in the CDS server due to an invalid hash code of download file.

-

Tam

206 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 309 308

-

ura

HTTP communication 101 Download was canceled due to an error that occurred in the file server. Check the network environment. 201 When there is no problem with the 202 network environment, collect the Updater 203 log, and contact the support department 204 of the sales company. 205

Tam

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

ura

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Tam

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Cause of error CDS Local UP CDS file Network delivery CDS DATER server server server

ura

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Remedy

Tam

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

Description

ura

Error Code (hex number) The first The The 3rd The 5th The 6 - 8th digit Error second - 4th digits digit digits field digit Method Category Description Operator category code code

6-117

Tam

6

T-6-25

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Code

6-117

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function

6-118

■■Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function Codes displayed as eRDS errors when the UGW-linked function is used

8

x

x

x

0

303

8

x

x

x

0

304

8

x

x

x

0

706

8 8 8

x x x

x x x

x x x

0 0 0

707 708 709

-

ura

101

Tam

0

ura

x

Tam

x

ura

x

Tam

8

-

ura

002

Tam

0

ura

x

-

Tam

x

Restart the device, and perform the operation again. When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device needs to be reinstalled (upgraded). A time-out error occurred due to no response from Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department Updater within the specified time (3 seconds). of the sales company. Processing in the device (event processing) Restart the device, and perform the operation again. failed. Restart the device, and perform the When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device operation again. needs to be reinstalled (upgraded). Queue could not be sent due to failure of Restart the device, and perform the operation again. processing in the device (event processing). When this problem recurs, the firmware of the device needs to be reinstalled (upgraded). An error occurred in control of synchronization or Wait for a while, and perform a communication test interruption processing between processes being again. handled in parallel. Communication with Updater failed. Restart the device, and perform the operation again after checking that Updater has been started. When this problem recurs, obtain the sublog, and contact the support department of the sales company. At the time of firmware update, the Tracking Obtain the sublog, and contact the support department ID ordered by UGW and the one to which the of the sales company. Updater responded did not match.

ura

x

An unexpected error occurred in the device.

Tam

8

Unclassified 000

ura

0 0

Tam

x x x

ura

x x x

Cause of error CDS UP CDS file Network delivery DATER server server

Tam

Error x x x x

Remedy

ura

8 8 8 8 8

Description

Tam

Error Code (hex number) The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits digit Error digit digits Method Category Description field Operator category code code

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

T-6-26

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Codes When Using the UGW-linked Function

6-118

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them

6-119

■■Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them ●● Scenes Where an Error Occurs When an error code not included in the error code list is displayed, one of the errors shown in the following scenes may have occurred. Scenes Where an Error Occurs Scenes Where an Error Occurs

Content

Communication test, etc. (main screen) Version information notification (main screen)

Log could not be written due to maximum value (capacity/the number of files) being exceeded. Retrieval of device version information ended in failure because the firmware version of the device was not registered in CDS. Connection to the delivery server failed at the time of notification of version information. The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information. Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was restarted during notification of version information. UGW linkage was turned ON while eRDS was OFF. An internal error occurred when obtaining the applicable firmware information. An internal error occurred at the time of request of firmware delivery information. Free space in the storage destination disk ran out during download. (DiskFull) An internal error occurred at start of update. An internal error occurred at the time of cancellation notification.

UGW linkage (main screen) On-site (error dialog) Immediate download (error dialog) Manual/auto update (error dialog) Deletion of downloaded firmware

T-6-27

●● Remedy Check that the log files shown below do not exceed the maximum values. When this problem recurs, obtain the log, and contact the support department of the sales company. Logs and maximum capacity / number Log name Update log System log

Maximum capacity

Maximum number of files

128KB/ file 512KB/ file

4 4 T-6-28

6

Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code > Error Codes Not Included in the Error Code List and Remedy for Them

6-119

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview

Debug log

6-120

●● Types of Logs There are continuous logs, event logs, and manual logs. Type

Scope of Application

Event log

■■Purpose

Collecting method

Size of logs

Automatically recorded in accordance Less than with the conditions specified in DEBUG-1. 500MB

When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the cause.

Overview ■■Function Overview Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software modules in the device for debug purpose.

Manual log Perform the following procedure. 1. Hold down the [Counter] button (10 seconds or longer). 2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad. 3. Press 2 on the numeric keypad. 4. Press 3 on the numeric keypad. While logs are being obtained, the screen is locked. It takes approx. 3 minutes before obtaining the logs is completed and the user can work on the screen.

Setting Service mode Lev2: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DEBUG-1 > 3 (default) 3: Exception + E code + Reboot Make movement same as 3 even if you change setting of it. n/a

In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D. When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to

T-6-29

●● Conditions of Log Collection • Logs can be collected on a PCB-by-PCB basis. (SUBLOG, SUBLOG_RCON, SUBLOG_ DCON)

determine the cause.

Location

●● Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log

File name

• The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up. • When the error frequency is low. • When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical failure. * Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up.

Automatic collection

Manual collection

Logs generated Event log while the host When an event has machine is occurred being operated.

Manual log

Main Controller

SUBLOG

Yes

Yes

Yes

Reader Controller

SUBLOG_RCON

No

Yes

Yes

DC Controller

SUBLOG_DCON

No

Yes

Yes T-6-30

●● Collection of Logs Connect SST or a USB memory device, and select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK to collect logs.

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview

6-120

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)

■■Description of Log to be Collected

6-121

■■Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)

When operation from the Control Panel or an event log (exceptional operation, error code, or NOTE: When the data is sent to the USB memory device: USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using the SST.

reboot) occurs, the number of logs increases. Logs are stored from the latest one, and the latest file is always stored. Logs earlier than those logs are overwritten and deleted from the oldest log. When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted. Note: The number of files stored differs depending on the model and situation.

1) Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK Connect the USB memory device to the machine. 2) [5] Execute [BACKUP].

Previous time Delete

1

Delete Delete

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

This time 10 F-6-145

Collecting System Information ■■Collection Destination To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP server or SST (Ver. 4.63 or later).

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu /[5] has been selected. Execute?/ - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -

●● Collection Method Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods. • Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode Lev1: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click OK.

F-6-147

3) [1] Execute [Sublog].

• Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log. • Transfer the debug log to a USB memory device that stores the system of the machine.

●● File Name of Sublog Whether the file is new or old can be judged by the year, month, day, hour, and minute.

SUBLOG00_0014_0515204388.Z Log classification mmddhhmm Sequence number F-6-146

6

[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]

ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー

[1]: Sublog [4]: ServicePrint [5]: Netcap [6]: SRAM(HDD) [7]: SRAM(USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)

F-6-148

6-121

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

6-122

■■Uploading Data by SST

●● When the data is sent to the USB memory device A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The log file is saved in the folder.

The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) running to the machine.

■■Preconditions:

Example: Folder 201205241821

In addition to continuous logs, obtained manual logs (holding down the counter + 1, 2, and 3 keys) and event logs (DEBUG-1) are stored in the machine. A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine, and the machine is in download mode. Note: Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.

1. Start SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) and select iRC5051 from Model List. Press the Start button.

F-6-150

F-6-149

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

6-122

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

2. Press the Upload Data button.

6-123

4. Press the "Save" button.

F-6-151

3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button.

F-6-153

5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.

When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload". When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below. It is displayed as "log" in the figure below. Note: The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button. It is deleted from the main body.

F-6-154

F-6-152

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:

6-123

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs

6-124

When to Obtain Logs

6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC. In the initial setting: Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) > 20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm)

The assumed procedure to be taken when a request for log collection has been received is shown below.

●● Preconditions When the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up determines the need for an analysis of debug log by the R&D department, log collection is requested via sales company HQ. Logs are used to determine the cause.

●● Anticipated log collection procedure 1. Contact the user to identify the date and time the failure to be analyzed occurred. ( The date and time of occurrence is used to judge whether it is included in the dates and times of the obtained log files. The date and time of occurrence needs to be informed together with the obtained logs. The information is necessary in order to shorten the time required for the analysis. If multiple failures have occurred, the dates and times of those failures need to be informed. If the exact date and time is not clear, just a rough idea will do. ) 2. At the user’s site, enter download mode and obtain logs. 3. Check that files of around the specified date are included in the logs. 4. If the symptom can be reproduced, reproduce it. 5. Press the counter + 1, 2, and 3 keys to obtain logs. 6. Collect all the obtained logs.

NOTE:

• Prepare a USB memory device of 2 GB or more in capacity as the USB memory device used for log collection. It is necessary in order to secure enough capacity when logs are obtained multiple times. • In order that the USB memory device is recognized in download mode, it is recommended to store the system software of the host machine. In case of emergency, if there is an empty folder named "iAC5255", the USB memory device can be recognized. • As for the collected logs, all the logs moved to the USB memory device should be sent. • The logs are directly saved to the HDD. It is assumed that logs of a day (if various operations are continuously performed) or logs of approx. 30 days (in the case of common use) can be stored. In the case of logs within the foregoing assumed storage period, it is rare that the logs are overwritten and need to be collected again. F-6-155

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs

6-124

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs

●● Checking the name of the log file Check the date of the file whose name begins with SUBLOG00_00. It is highly possible that files of around the date and time the symptom occurred contain information recorded at the time when the failure occurred.

NOTE:

• If the obtained log file name contains "SHT", it means that the log was recorded at the time of shutdown. Example: SUBLOG00_0001_0918140788SHT.TXT

SUBLOG00_0014_0515204388.Z

When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if the performed operations include turning OFF the power, use the file name "SHT" as a clue for identifying the date and time.

Log classification mmddhhmm Sequence number

• If the number of seconds is expressed as "99 + three-digit number", the number shows the cause which triggered the log acquisition (e.g. acquisition due to an error code E[three-digit number]).

F-6-156

An example of log acquisition when the occurrence date has been specified

Example: When an error code E747 occurred SUBLOG00_0001_0918140799747.TXT

• An example of a failure which occurred around 20:38 on October 3: Around 20:38 on October 3 ↓ It is highly possible that logs recorded The time when the status is assumed The time when the symptom is at the time when the symptom to have changed from normal operation assumed to have occurred. occurred are included. to occurrence of the symptom ↑ SUBLOG00_0024_1003193499.Z 19:34 on October 3

6-125

When checking the occurrence date and time with the user, if an error code has occurred, use E[three-digit number] as a clue for identifying the date and time.

↑ SUBLOG00_0025_1003205099.Z 20:50 on October 3 F-6-157

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > When to Obtain Logs

6-125

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.

6-126

■■Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1 • Main Controller PCB 2 - LED3 • Main Controller PCB 1 - LED9, LED16 • Flash PCB - LED1

■■Location of LEDs

Check the LED of the Main Controller

Main Controller PCB1

Main Controller PCB2 Has the fuse of Power Supply PCB blown? -> Replace the Power Supply Unit.

Is LED 3 ON? No

Yes

No

1. Has the fuse of Power Supply PCB blown? -> Replace the Power Supply Unit. 2. Check the connection of the slot-in connector connecting the Main Controller 1 and the Main Controller 2.

No

If an error related to the Main Controller such as E6020001 is displayed, replace the Main Controller 1. If no error is displayed, replace the Main Controller 1 and then the Main Controller 2.

Is LED 16 ON?

Yes

LED1 LED3

Is LED 9 ON?

LED9 LED16

Yes F-6-158

■■ Preconditions

Is LED 1 ON?

Check whether the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 are properly inserted. Check whether the connectors are securely connected. LEDs are not lit when the contaction

No

Yes

is poor. (Power-on is not possible) When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit, check the connection of cables (such as UI Cable).

Check the connection of the Flash PCB. If the problem persists, replace the Flash PCB.

If an error code is displayed, perform a remedy according to the code. If no error code is displayed, replace the Flash PCB.

Is LED 1 ON? Does the host machine start up? No Yes

Normal operation F-6-159

6

Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

6-126

7

Error Code ■ ■Overview ■ Code ■Error ■ Code ■Jam ■ Code ■Alarm

7

Error Code

7

Error Code > Overview > Outline > Pickup size

Overview

7-2 ■■Pickup position code When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. In the

Outline

jam display screen, the “P” row corresponds to the pickup position code. Pickup position

■■Outline This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows. Code type

Explanation

Reference

Error code

This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.

Jam code

This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.

Alarm code

This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned.

(Refer to page 7-4) (Refer to page 7-65) (Refer to page 7-70)

Error code notation

T-7-1

An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However, [000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)

Pickup position code

At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.) Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Multi-purpose Tray Side Paper Deck Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through the Duplex Feed Sensor (S7).)

00 01 02 05 06 F0 T-7-3

■■Pickup size When a jam occurs, a paper size is displayed. (The row displaying "SIZE" on the jam screen refers to the paper size.) Due to the limitation of displayable number of characters, some paper size names are omitted. The following is the list of displayed row of texts and corresponding paper sizes.

■■Location code

* The following is based on the display specification and not all paper sizes can actually be used.

Error code, jam code, and alarm code include the location information. Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows. In the jam display screen, the “L” row corresponds to the location code. Device

JAM

imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235/4225 Series

Printer engine = 00 ADF=01

Image Reader Unit-E1 DADF-AG1 Paper Deck Unit-B2 Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1 Buffer Pass Unit-H1 Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 External 2, 2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher-B2 Inner Finisher-D1 Inner 2, 2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher-A1

ERR

ALARM Others of listed below

ADF=01

Main Controller = 00 Reader+ADF=04 Printer engine = 05 Reader+ADF=04

00 00 00 02

05 05 05 02

04 61, 62

02

02

65

02 02

02 02

61, 62 65

02

T-7-2

7

Error Code > Overview > Outline > Pickup size

Display A0 A1 A2 A3 A3FB A4 A5 A6 A7 I-B0 I-B1 I-B2 I-B3 I-B4 I-B5 I-B6 I-B7 I-C0 I-C1 I-C2

Paper Size A0 A1 A2 A3 A3FULLBLEED A4 A5 A6 A7 ISOB0 ISOB1 ISOB2 ISOB3 ISOB4 ISOB5 ISOB6 ISOB7 ISOC0 ISOC1 ISOC2

Display LDR LDRFB LGL LTR EXE STMT 10x8 12x18 13x19 15x11 17x22 18x24 A-FLS ALGL ALTR OFI A-OFI B-OFI E-OFI M-OFI

Paper Size LEDGER LEDGERFULLBLEED LEGAL LETTER EXECUTIVE STATEMENT 10x8 12x18 13x19 15x11 17x22 18x24 Australian-FOOLSCAP Argentina-LEGAL Argentina-LETTER OFICIO Argentina-OFICIO Bolivia-OFICIO Ecuador-OFICIO Mexico-OFICIO

7-2

7 I-C3 I-C4 I-C5 I-C6 I-C7 I-SRA3 J-B0 J-B1 J-B2 J-B3 J-B4 J-B5 J-B6 J-B7 K16 K8 ND-PCD OTHER PCARD PCARD4 F4A F4B FLSC FOLIO FREE ICARD USER

ISOC3 ISOC4 ISOC5 ISOC6 ISOC7 SRA3 JISB0 JISB1 JISB2 JISB3 JISB4 JISB5 JISB6 JISB7 K16 K8 Newdry Postcard OTHER Postcard 4 on 1 Postcard F4A F4B FOOLCAP FLIO FREE SIZE INDEXCARD Custom

Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD

KLGL GLGL GLTR IND-LGL COM10 DL E_C2 E_C3 E_C4 E_C5 E-K2 E_K3 E_K4 E_K5 E_K6 E_K7 E_K8 E_Y1 E-Y2 E_Y3 E-Y4 E_Y5 E_Y6 E_Y7 EVLP_YN3 E-B5 E-C5 MONA EVLP

Korea-LEGAL Government-LEGAL Government-LETTER India-LEGAL COM10 DL Nagagata 2 Nagagata 3 Nagagata 4 Nagagata 5 Kakugata 2 Kakugata 3 Kakugata 4 Kakugata 5 Kakugata 6 Kakugata 7 Kakugata 8 Yougata 1 Yougata 2 Yougata 3 Yougata 4 Yougata 5 Yougata 6 Yougata 7 Yougatanaga 3 B5 Envelope C5 Envelope MONARCH Unknown size envelope

7-3

■■Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the target partition may be cleared. When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of HDD partition and explain to the user before starting work.

■■Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON • Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation, ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation. • When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is, error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status.

7

Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD

7-3

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Error Code

7-4

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E001 0002 05

Error Code Details

Description

■■E000 to E5F6 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E000 0001 05

E001 0000

E001 0001

05

05

Description

Fixing temperature abnormal rise The temperature detected by the main thermistor does not rise Description to the specified value during startup control. 1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2.Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor Connector: Remedy J2063/J2510/J214, AC Connector: J105). 3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit). 4.Replace the Fixing Main Unit. 5.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Title Fixing unit temperature rise detection The reading of the main thermistor is 250 deg C or more Description continuously for 200 msec. 1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2.Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor Connector: Remedy J2063/J2510/J214, AC Connector: J105). 3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit). 4.Replace the Fixing Main Unit. 5.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Title Fixing unit temperature rise detection The hardware circuit detects overheating of the main or sub Description thermistor for 30 msec. 1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON Remedy the power. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).

Remedy

E002 0000

05

Title

Description

Remedy

E003 0000

05

Title Description

Remedy

E004 0000

05

Title Description

Remedy

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Fixing unit temperature rise detection The reading of the sub thermistor is 295 deg C or more continuously for 200 msec. 1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2.Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor Connector: J2063/J2510/J214, AC Connector: J105). 3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit). 4.Replace the Fixing Main Unit. 5.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Fixing unit temperature insufficient rise 1.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 115 deg C continuously for 400 msec 2.5 sec after it has indicated 100 deg C. 2.The reading of the main thermistor is less than 150 deg C continuously for 400 msec 1.3 sec after it has indicated 140 deg C. 1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2.Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor Connector: J2063/J2510/J214, AC Connector: J105). 3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit). 4.Replace the Fixing Main Unit. 5.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Low fixing temperature detection after standby The reading of the main thermistor is less than 100 deg C continuously for 200 msec or more. 1.Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR; and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2.Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor Connector: J2063/J2510/J214, AC Connector: J105). 3.Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor (Film Unit). 4.Replace the Fixing Main Unit. 5.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Thermistor disconnection detection error When disconnection is detected with connector (J214) for 30 sec continuously. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J2063/J2510/J214). 2.Replace the Film Unit. 3.Replace the Fixing Main Unit. 4.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).

7-4

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E010 0001 05 Description Remedy

E010 0002

05

Title Description Remedy

E014 0001

05

Title Description Remedy

E014 0002

05

Title Description Remedy

E020 0000

05

Title

Description

Remedy

E024 0000

05

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Unstable rotation of the Main Motor (M1) Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, the drive detection signal is absent for 2 sec. 1. Check connection of the Connector (J2002/J2255/J203). 2. Replace the Main Motor (M1). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Unstable rotation of the Main Motor (M1) During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is absent 5 times in sequence. 1. Check connection of the Connector (J2002/J2255/J203). 2. Replace the Main Motor (M1). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Unstable rotation of the Fixing Motor (M2) Detection is executed every 100 msec after the start of motor rotation; however, the drive detection signal is absent for 2 sec. 1. Check connection of the Connector (J2001/J203). 2. Replace the Fixing Motor (M2). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Unstable rotation of the Fixing Motor (M2) During motor rotation, detection is executed every 100 msec; however, the drive signal is absent 5 times in sequence. 1. Check connection of the Connector (J2001/J203). 2. Replace the Fixing Motor (M2). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner. The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25) detects the absence of toner, while the Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (S26) detects the presence of toner. With the Developing Cylinder Clutch (CL1) turned on, the hopper feed screw motor (M16) is rotated for 1 sec intermittently 194 times; still, the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25) does not detect the presence of toner. * Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists. 1.Replace the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25). 2.Replace the Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (S26). 3.Replace the Toner Supply Assembly. 4.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). The connector (J209) of Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25) is disconnected. The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25) connection detection signal is absent for 100 msec 10 times in sequence. * Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J2013/J209). 2.Replace the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).

7

7-5

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E024 0001 05

Description

Remedy

E025 0000

05

Title Description

Remedy

E025 0001

05

Title

Description

Remedy

E032 0001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

00

Title Description Remedy

Description The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25) is disconnected. - The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25) ON counter is checked every 2.5 seconds, and the counter increments 1 count every 25 times when the sensor goes on, and 300 counts are reached. - The Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25) ON counter is checked every 1.5 seconds, and the counter increments 1 count every 15 times when the sensor goes on, and 300 counts are reached. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J2013/J209). 2.Replace the Developing Assembly Toner Sensor (S25). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). The connector (J207) of Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (S26) is disconnected. The Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (S26) connection detection signal is absent for 100 msec 10 times in sequence. * Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J2115/J2503/J207). 2.Replace the Sub Hopper Toner Sensor (S26). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 4.Replace the Power Supply PCB (UN1). Failure of the Bottle Motor (M17) When the disconnection status of the bottle motor (M17) is detected 15 times or more continuously with the 100ms cycle during the intermittent rotation When the disconnection status of the bottle motor (M17) is detected 75 times continuously with the 100ms cycle during the continuous rotation * Error occurs after delivering the remaining paper. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J2216/J2503/J207). 2.Replace the Bottle Motor (M17). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 4.Replace the Power Supply PCB (UN1). Failure of NE Controller Counter Detection of open circuit of count pulse signal. Disconnection of cable.

7-5

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E110 0001 05 Description

Remedy

E110 0002

05

Title

Description

Remedy

E110 0003

05

Title

Description

Remedy

E196 0000

05

Title Description

E196 0001 E196 0002

05 05

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Failure of the Polygon Motor (M11) The Polygon Motor (M11) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state a specific period of time after the Polygon Motor (M11) has been started. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J1/J7/J10/J21/J208/ J8142/J8143). 2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Failure of the Polygon Motor (M11) The speed lock signal indicates a deviation 10 times in sequence at intervals of 100 msec after the signal has indicated a locked state. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J1/J7/J10/J21/J208/ J8142/J8143). 2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Failure of the Polygon Motor (M11) The Polygon Motor (M11) speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state for 6.5 sec. after a switchover is made from low to normal speed or for 8 sec. after a switchover is made from normal to low speed. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connector (J1/J7/J10/J21/J208/ J8142/J8143). 2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Error in EEPROM access 20 retries failed after error occurred during communication with EEPROM. * Error occurs after the delivery if a paper in passage exists. 1.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Main ROM reading/writing error The main ROM reading or writing error occurs. Replace the DC controller PCB (UN2). Option ROM reading/writing error The option ROM reading or writing error occurs. Replace the DC controller PCB (UN2).

7

7-6

E Detail Location Code Code E197 0000 05

Item

Title

Description

Remedy

E197 0001

05

Title Description Remedy

E197 0003

05

Title Description Remedy

E202 0001

04

Title Description

Remedy

E202 0002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

04

Title Description

Remedy

Description Error in communication of Laser Driver PCB Communication time out error between DC Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB 2 Communication error with image PCB (For factory) Communication time out error between DC Controller PCB and Main Controller PCB 2 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 4.Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14) Error in communication of Laser Driver PCB Communication error with image PCB for factory (Serial communication error) 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). The connector of the laser scanner unit is disconnected. The connector of the laser scanner unit is disconnected. 1.Check connection of the connector. 2.Replace the Laser Scanner Unit. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). There is an error in the detection of the CCD home position. The attempt to detect the home position fails when the CCD is moved forward. 1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(Reader Controller PCB (UN4)-Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14)). 2.Replace the flexible cable. 3.Replace the CCD HP sensor (S11). 4.Replace the Polygon Motor (M11). 5.Replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 6.Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14). There is an error in the detection of the CCD home position. The attempt to detect the home position fails when the CCD is moved back. 1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(Reader Controller PCB (UN4)-Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14)). 2.Replace the flexible cable. 3.Replace the CCD HP sensor (S11). 4.Replace the Polygon Motor (M11). 5.Replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 6.Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14).

7-6

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E225 0001 04 Description

Remedy

E227 0001

04

Title Description Remedy

E240 0000

05

Title Description Remedy

E240 0001

05

Title Description Remedy

E246 0001

00

E246 0002

00

E246 0003

00

E246 0005

00

E247 0001

00

E247 0002

00

E247 0003

00

Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description The light intensity of the CCD is faulty. The light intensity of the CCD during shading is under the specified level. 1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable. 2.Replace the flexible cable. 3.Replace the CCD Unit. 4.Replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 5.Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14). The reader unit power supply (24V) is faulty. At time of power-on, the 24V port is off. 1.Disconnect and then connect the power supply harness connector. (J504/J3/J114) 2.Replace the Power Supply PCB (UN1). Error in controller communication The serial communication error such as parity error or overrun error is constantly detected. 1.Check the Connectors. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Error in controller communication The serial communication error such as parity error or overrun error is detected while printing. 1.Check the Connectors. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies.

7

7-7

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E247 0004 00 E248 0000

00

E248 0001

04

Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

E248 0002

04

Title Description Remedy

E248 0003

04

Title Description

Remedy

E261 0000

05

Title Description

Remedy

E280 0003

05

Title Description

Remedy

E315 0007

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

00

Title Description Remedy

Description System error Contact to the sales companies. SRAM error SRAM check error when the power is turned ON. Main Controller PCB 2. EEPROM error of the CCD unit An error has occurred at power-on. 1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(CCD unitReader Controller PCB (UN4)). 2.Replace the flexible cable. 3.Replace the CCD unit. EEPROM error of the CCD unit An error has occurred during write operation. 1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(CCD unitReader Controller PCB (UN4)). 2.Replace the flexible cable. 3.Replace the CCD unit. EEPROM error of the CCD unit An error has occurred during read operation following write operation. 1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(CCD unitReader Controller PCB (UN4)). 2.Replace the flexible cable. 3.Replace the CCD unit. Error in Zero Cross Zero Cross failed to be detected for 500ms or more while the relay was ON. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check the Connectors. (J113/J202) 2.Replace the Power supply PCB (UN1). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Reading unit communication error Reading error after writing. 1.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(Reader Controller PCB (UN4)-Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14)). 2.Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable(CCD unitMain Controller PCB 2 (UN14)). 3.Replace the flexible cable. 4.Replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 5.Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14). Codec error JBIG encode error. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB.

7-7

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E315 0025 00 E315 0027

00

E315 0033

00

E315 0035

00

E315 0100 E315 0500

00 00

Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

E315 0501

00

E315 0510

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

E315 0511

00

E315 0520

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

E315 0521

00

E315 0530

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

E315 0531

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Codec error ROTU hardware error. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB. Codec error ROTU timeout error. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB. MemFill hardware error MemFill hardware error. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB. Codec error MemFill timeout error. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB. Codec error PrcOverRun error. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB. Codec error Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation. jcdImage device.

7

7-8

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E315 0540 00 Description

E315 0541

00

E315 0550

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

E315 0551

00

E315 0560

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

E315 0561

00

E315 000d

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

E315 000e

00

Title Description Remedy

E350 0000

00

E350 0001

00

E350 0002

00

E350 0003

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

Description Codec error Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation. jcdImage device. Codec error JBIG decode error 1.Replace the SDRAM. 2.Replace the HDD. 3.Replace the Main Controller PCB. Codec error Soft decode error 1.Replace the SDRAM. 2.Replace the HDD. 3.Replace the Main Controller PCB. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies.

7-8

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E350 3000 00 E351 0000

00

Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

E354 0001

00

E354 0002

00

E355 0001

00

E355 0003

00

E355 0004

00

E400 0001

04

Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

Remedy

E400 0002

04

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description System error Contact to the sales companies. Main Controller PCB 2 communication error Main Controller PCB 2 communication error. 1.Disconnect and then connect the connector of the Main Controller PCB 2. 2.Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. System error Contact to the sales companies. Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (UN4) and DADF Check sum error occurs at the time of communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF. 1.Connection error between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 2.Failure of the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1). 3.Failure of the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (UN4) and DADF Reception status error occurs at the time of communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF. 1.Connection error between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 2.Failure of the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1). 3.Failure of the Reader Controller PCB (UN4).

7-9

E Detail Location Code Code E400 0003 04

Item Title Description

Remedy

E413 0001

04

Title Description

Remedy

E413 0002

04

Title Description

Remedy

E490 0001

04

Title Description Remedy

E500 0000

02

Title Description Remedy

E500 0001

02

Title Description Remedy

E503 0002

02

Title Description

Remedy

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (UN4) and DADF Reception interrupt error occurs at the time of communication between the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF. 1.Connection error between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1) and the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 2.Failure of the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1). 3.Failure of the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). Release Motor (M2) error The sensing level of the release motor HP sensor (SR11) does not change within a specified period when the release motor (M2) is driven. 1.Replace the Release Motor HP Sensor (SR11). 2.Replace the Release Motor (M2). 3.Replace the ADF Driver PCB. Release Motor (M2) error The sensing level of the release motor HP sensor (SR11) does not change within a specified period when the release motor (M2) is driven. 1.Replace the Release Motor HP Sensor (SR11). 2.Replace the Release Motor (M2). 3.Replace the ADF Driver PCB. Different DADF model error Not proper DADF is installed. 1. Installed DADF is a different model. 2. Replace the Reader Controller PCB (UN4). 3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2 (UN14). Communication error (Staple/Booklet Finisher) The communication with the host machine is interrupted. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB. Communication error (Inner Finisher) The communication with the host machine is interrupted. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB. Communication error Communication between the Saddle Controller and the Finisher Controller is suspended. 1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and saddle controller PCB is faulty. 2. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-9

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E503 0003 02 Description

Remedy

E505 0001

02

Title Description

E505 0002

02

Remedy Title Description

E514 8001

02

Remedy Title Description

Remedy

E514 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E520 0001

02

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Communication error Communication between the Punch Controller and the Finisher Controller is suspended. 1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and punch Controller PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. 4. The host machine DC Controller PCB is faulty. EEPROM error The checksum data for the EEPROM on the finisher controller PCB has an error. 1.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. EEPROM error The checksum data for the EEPROM on the punch controller PCB has an error. 1.Replace the Punch Controller PCB. Rear end assist home position error The stapler does not leave the rear end assist home position when the Rear End Assist Motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The Rear End Assist Home Position Sensor (PI109) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Rear End Assist Motor is faulty. 3. The end assist mechanism is faulty. 4. The Rear End Assist Motor (M109) is faulty. 5. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty. Rear end assist home position error The stapler does not return to the rear end assist home position when the Rear End Assist Motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The Rear End Assist Home Position Sensor (PI109) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Rear End Assist Motor is faulty. 3. The end assist mechanism is faulty. 4. The Rear End Assist Motor (M109) is faulty. 5. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty. Shift Motor fails to move from HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M4) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) Connector is physically removed. 4. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) failure occurs.

7

7-10

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E520 0002 02 Description

Remedy

E530 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E530 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E531 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E531 0002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

02

Title Description

Remedy

Description Shift Motor fails to return to HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M4) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) Connector is physically removed. 4. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) failure occurs. Front aligning plate home position error The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate front home position sensor when the alignment plate front motor has been driven for 4 seconds. 1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and front aligning plate motor is faulty. 3. The front aligning plate is faulty. 4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Front aligning plate home position error The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front home position sensor when the alignment plate front motor has been driven for 4 seconds. 1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and front aligning plate motor is faulty. 3. The front aligning plate is faulty. 4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Staple home position error Stapler fails to move from the staple home position although the Staple Motor is driven for a specified period of time. 1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler is faulty. 2. The stapler is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Staple home position error (Inner Finisher) Stapler fails to move from the staple home position although the Staple Motor is driven for a specified period of time. 1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler is faulty. 2. The stapler is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-10

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E531 8002 02 Description

Remedy

E532 0001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E532 0002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E532 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E532 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Staple home position error (Staple/Booklet Finisher) Stapler fails to move from the staple home position although the Staple Motor is driven for a specified period of time. 1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler is faulty. 2. The stapler is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. STP Move Motor fails to move from HP (Inner Finisher) At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M1) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) Connector is physically removed. 4. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) failure occurs. STP Move Motor fails to return to HP (Inner Finisher) At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M1) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) Connector is physically removed. 4. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) failure occurs. Stapler shift home position error (Staple/Booklet Finisher) The stapler does not leave the stapler shift home position when the stapler shift motor has been driven for 5 seconds. 1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler shift motor is faulty. 3. The stapler shift base is faulty. 4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Stapler shift home position error (Staple/Booklet Finisher) The stapler does not return to the stapler shift home position when the stapler shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds. 1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stapler shift motor is faulty. 3. The stapler shift base is faulty. 4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-11

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E535 8001 02 Description

Remedy

E535 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E537 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E537 8002

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

02

Title Description

Remedy

Description Swing home position error The stapler does not leave the swing home position when the swing motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and swing motor is faulty. 3. The swing mechanism is faulty. 4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Swing home position error The stapler does not return to the swing home position when the swing motor has bee driven for 3 seconds. 1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and swing motor is faulty. 3. The swing mechanism is faulty. 4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Rear aligning plate home position error The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate rear home position sensor when the alignment plate rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds. 1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and aligning plate rear motor is faulty. 3. The rear aligning plate is faulty. 4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Rear aligning plate home position error The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate rear home position sensor when the alignment plate rear motor has been driven for 4 seconds. 1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and aligning plate rear motor is faulty. 3. The rear aligning plate is faulty. 4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-11

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E540 0001 02 Description

Remedy

E540 0005

02

Title Description

Remedy

E540 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E540 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Tray Lift Motor timeout error (Inner Finisher) Unable to complete the operation even after the specified period of time during initial rotation. When the Motor remains in the same area for the specified period of time and the same symptom occurs again after the first retry, it is detected as an error. 1. Check if the Motor (M11) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) Connector is physically removed. 4. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) failure occurs. Tray Lift Motor clock error (Inner Finisher) At initial rotation, when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and clock input is not detected within the specified period of time, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M11) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) Connector is physically removed. 4. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) failure occurs. Tray 1 time out error (Staple/Booklet Finisher) If the tray does not return to home position when the tray 1 shift motor is driven for 25 seconds. If the tray does not move to other area when tray 1 shift motor is driven for 5 seconds. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Tray 1 shift area error The dangerous area is reached before the tray 1 paper surface sensor detects paper surface during the paper surface detection operation. A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-12

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E540 8003 02 Description

Remedy

E540 8004

02

Title Description

Remedy

E540 8005

02

Title Description

Remedy

E540 8006

02

Title Description

Remedy

E540 8007

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

02

Title Description

Remedy

Description Swing guide switch/Staple safety switch error The swing guide switch or staple safety switch is activated while the tray is operating. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 1 shift motor clock error The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 0.2 second. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 1 shift motor speed error (Staple/Booklet Finisher) The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock detection signal turned ON. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 1 shift motor acceleration error The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray 1 shift motor has been driven for 1 second. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 1 shift motor error The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 1 shift motor is at a stop. 1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-12

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E542 0001 02

E542 0002

E542 8001

02

02

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description

Additional Tray Lift Motor timeout error Unable to complete the operation even after the specified period of time during initial rotation. When the Motor remains Description in the same area for the specified period of time and the same symptom occurs again after the first retry, it is detected as an error. 1. Check if the Motor (M12) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) Connector Remedy is physically removed. 4. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) failure occurs. Title Additional Tray Lift Motor clock error At initial rotation, when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and clock signal is not detected within the specified period of time, it is Description detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M12) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) Connector Remedy is physically removed. 4. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) failure occurs. Title Tray 1 time out error If the tray does not return to home position when the tray 1 shift motor is driven for 25 seconds. Description If the tray does not move to other area when tray 2 shift motor is driven for 5 seconds. 1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. Remedy 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-13

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E542 8002 02

Description

Remedy

E542 8004

02

Title Description

Remedy

E542 8005

02

Title Description

Remedy

E542 8006

02

Title Description

Remedy

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Tray 2 shift area error The upper limit area is reached before the tray 2 paper surface sensor 1 detects the paper surface during paper surface detection operation. A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation. During evacuation operation, arrival at the area beyond the tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 is detected before this sensor detects paper surface. 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 2 shift motor clock error The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 0.2 second. 1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 2 shift motor speed error The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock detection signal turned ON. 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. The tray 2 shift motor acceleration error The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray 2 shift motor has been driven for 1 second. 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-13

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E542 8007 02 Description

Remedy

E567 0001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E551 0001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E551 0002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E567 0001

02

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description The tray 2 shift motor error The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 2 shift motor is at a stop. 1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty. 2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2 shift motor is faulty. 3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty. 4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty. 5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Shift Roller Release Motor fails to move from HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M5) Connector is physically removed. 2. Check if the Motor failure occurs. 3. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) Connector is physically removed. 4. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) failure occurs. Front Fan lock error While the front fan is rotating, this machine stops the front fan after detecting the lock signal. Then this machine retries to rotate the front fan, but lock signal is detected again, this machine displays the error. 1. Check the Fan (M8). 2. Replace the finisher controller PCB. Rear Fan lock error While the rear fan is rotating, this machine stops the front fan after detecting the lock signal. Then this machine retries to rotate the rear fan, but lock signal is detected again, this machine displays the error. 1. Check the Fan (M9). 2. Replace the finisher controller PCB. Shift Roller Release Motor fails to move from HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry 1. Check if the Motor (M5) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3).

7

7-14

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E567 0002 02 Description

Remedy

E56F 0001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E56F 0002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E571 0001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

02

Title Description

Remedy

Description Shift Roller Release Motor fails to return to HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M5) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3). Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to move from HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M6) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5). Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to return to HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M6) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor (S5). Gripper Open/Close Motor fails to move from HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M7) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Gripper Arm HP Sensor (S13) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7).

7-14

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E571 0002 02 Description

Remedy

E575 0001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E575 0002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E584 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E584 0002

02

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Gripper Open/Close Motor fails to return to HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M7) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Gripper Arm HP Sensor (S13) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7). Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to move from HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M2) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7). Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to return to HP At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry. 1. Check if the Motor (M2) Connector is physically removed. 2. Replace the Motor. 3. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) Connector is physically removed. 4. Replace the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7). Shutter Home Position Error The stapler does not return to the shutter home position when the Stack Ejection Motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PI113) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Stack Ejection Motor, and between the Finisher Controller PCB and Shutter Clutch is faulty. 3. The shutter mechanism is faulty. 4. The Stack Ejection Motor (M102), Shutter Clutch (CL101), and Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch (CL102) is faulty. 5. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty. Shutter home position error The stapler does not return to the shutter home position when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 3 seconds. 1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty. 2. The shutter mechanism is faulty. 3. The stack ejection motor (M102), shutter clutch (CL101), and stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-15

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E590 8001 02 Description

Remedy

E590 0002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E590 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E591 8001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

02

Title Description

Remedy

Description Punch home position error The puncher does not detect the punch home position sensor when the puncher motor has been driven for 20 msec. 1. The punch home position sensor and punch motor clock sensor is faulty. 2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. 3. The punch mechanism is faulty. 4. The puncher motor is faulty. 5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Punch home position error (Inner Finisher) After the motor has been stopped at time of punch motor initialization, the puncher does not detect punch home position sensor. 1. The punch home position sensor and punch motor clock sensor is faulty. 2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. 3. The punch mechanism is faulty. 4. The puncher motor is faulty. 5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Punch home position error (Staple/Booklet Finisher) After the motor has been stopped at time of punch motor initialization, the puncher does not detect punch home position sensor. 1. The punch home position sensor and punch motor clock sensor is faulty. 2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. 3. The punch mechanism is faulty. 4. The puncher motor is faulty. 5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Scrap full detection error The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector sensor has been increased to 66% or more. 1. The wiring between the scrap full detector PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-15

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E591 8002 02 Description

Remedy

E592 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E592 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E592 8003

02

Title Description

Remedy

E592 8004

02

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Scrap full detection error The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector sensor has been decreased to 0%. 1. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Trailing edge sensor error The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor (LED5,PTR5) has been increased to 66% or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Trailing edge sensor error The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor has been decreased to 0%. 1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 1 error The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 1 (LED1,PTR1) has been increased to 66% or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 1 error The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 1 (LED1,PTR1) has been decreased to 0%. 1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-16

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E592 8005 02 Description

Remedy

E592 8006

02

Title Description

Remedy

E592 8007

02

Title Description

Remedy

E592 8008

02

Title Description

Remedy

E592 8009

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

02

Title Description

Remedy

Description Horizontal registration sensor 2 error The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 2 (LED2,PTR2) has been increased to 66% or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 2 error The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 2 (LED2,PTR2) has been decreased to 0%. 1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 3 error The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 3 (LED3,PTR3) has been increased to 66% or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 3 error The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 3 (LED3,PTR3) has been decreased to 0%. 1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration sensor 4 error The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 4 (LED4,PTR4) has been increased to 66% or more. 1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and punch controller PCB is faulty. 2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 3. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.

7-16

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E592 800A 02 Description

Remedy

E593 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E593 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E5F0 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Horizontal registration sensor 4 error The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 4 (LED4,PTR4) has been decreased to 0%. 1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty. 2. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration home position error At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home position sensor even when it has been driven for the specified distance. 1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. 3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty. 4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty. 5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Horizontal registration home position error At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the punch slide unit does not return to the horizontal registration home position sensor even when the unit has been driven for the specified distance. 1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor is faulty. 3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty. 4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty. 5. The punch controller PCB is faulty. 6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty. Paper positioning plate home position error The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn ON when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1500 pulses. 1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) is faulty. 2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-17

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E5F0 8002 02 Description

Remedy

E5F1 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E5F1 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E5F2 8001

02

Title Description

Remedy

E5F2 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Paper positioning plate home position error The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn OFF when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 300 pulses. 1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) is faulty. 2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Stack Ejection Motor, and between the Finisher Controller PCB and Shutter Clutch is faulty. 3. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty. 4. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty. 5. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Paper folding motor lock error The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/sec or less. 1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21. is faulty. 2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Paper positioning plate home position error The status of Paper Fold Home Position Sensor does not change although the Paper Fold Motor is driven for a specified period of time. 1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21) is faulty. 2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Guide home position error The guide home position sensor does not turn ON when the guide motor has been driven for 700 pulses. 1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty. 2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Guide home position error The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF when the guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses. 1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty. 2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-17

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E5F3 8001 02 Description

Remedy

E5F3 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E5F4 8001

02

Title Description Remedy

E5F4 8002

02

Title Description Remedy

E5F5 8001

02

Title Description Remedy

E5F5 8002

02

Title Description Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

Description Aligning plate home position error The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn ON when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 500 pulses. 1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty. 2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Aligning plate home position error The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn OFF when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 50 pulses. 1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty. 2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Stitcher (rear) home position error The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven backward for 0.5 sec. 1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty. 2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty. 3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Stitcher (rear) home position error The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF when the stitch motor (rear) has been driven forward for 0.5 sec. 1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty. 2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty. 3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Stitcher (front) home position error The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON when the stitch motor (front) has been driven forward for 0.5 sec. 1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty. 2. The stitcher (front) is faulty. 3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Stitcher (front) home position error The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF when the stitch motor (front) has been driven backward for 0.5 sec. 1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty. 2. The stitcher (front) is faulty. 3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7

7-18

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E5F6 8001 02 Description

Remedy

E5F6 8002

02

Title Description

Remedy

E5F6 8003

02

Title Description

Remedy

E5F6 8004

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

02

Title Description

Remedy

Description Paper pushing plate home position error The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.5 sec. 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. Paper pushing plate home position error The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 150 ms. 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. Paper pushing plate motor clock error The number of pulses detected by the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor is 6 pulses or less. 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. Pushing position error The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.1 sec. 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.

7-18

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E5F6 8005 02

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

7-19

Description

Pushing position error The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does not Description turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.5 sec. 1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty. Remedy 2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty. 3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty. 4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty. T-7-4

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E5F6

7-19

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

■■E602 to E996 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0001 00 Description

Remedy

E602 0002

00

Title

Description

Remedy

E602 0003

00

Title Description Remedy

E602 0006

00

Title

Description

Remedy

E602 0007

00

Title Description Remedy

E602 0009

00

Title Description Remedy

Description Hard disk error HDD detection error. Unable to detect HDD, not become Ready, return an error. When the errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. 1. Connection of the HDD cable. 2. Reinstall the system. 3. HDD. 4. Main Controller PCB. Hard disk error There is no startup file. There is no program for main CPU in / BOOTDEV/BOOT/ on HDD. When the errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. 1. Reinstall the system. 2. HDD. Hard disk error HDD WriteAbort error. Unable to read /BOOTDEV sector on HDD. 1. Reinstall the system. 2. HDD. Hard disk error There is no SubBootable for the PDL type in /BOOTDEV/ BOOT. When the errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. 1. Reinstall the system. 2. HDD. Hard disk error No ICC profile corresponding to PDL type exists in /BOOTDEV/ PDL 1. Reinstall the system. 2. HDD. Hard disk error There is no FONT file which is required when executing report print, FAX/IFAX transmission and reception, or stamp print in / BOOTDEV/BOOT. 1. Reinstall the system. 2. HDD.

7

7-20

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0012 00 Description Remedy

E602 0100

00

Title Description

Remedy

E602 0101

00

Title Description

Remedy

E602 0102

00

Title Description

Remedy

E602 0103

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

00

Title Description

Remedy

Description Hard disk error The file on HDD in which the Web browser refers to is corrupted or deleted. 1. Reinstall the system. 2. HDD. Hard disk error Error in /FSTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Hard disk error Error in /FSTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Hard disk error Error in /FSTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Hard disk error Error in /FSTDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power.

7-20

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0104 00

E602 0105

E602 0110

E602 0111

E602 0112

00

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-21

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0113 00

E602 0114

00

E602 0115

00

E602 0121

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-21

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0122 00

E602 0123

00

E602 0124

00

E602 0125

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-22

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0200 00

E602 0201

00

E602 0202

00

E602 0203

00

E602 0204

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-22

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0205 00

E602 0210

E602 0211

E602 0212

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-23

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0213 00

E602 0214

00

E602 0215

00

E602 0221

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-23

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0222 00

E602 0223

00

E602 0224

00

E602 0225

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-24

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0300 00

E602 0301

00

E602 0302

00

E602 0303

00

E602 0304

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /IMG_MNG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-24

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0305 00

E602 0310

E602 0311

E602 0312

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-25

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0313 00

E602 0314

00

E602 0315

00

E602 0321

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-25

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0322 00

E602 0323

00

E602 0324

00

E602 0325

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /FSTCDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-26

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0400 00

E602 0401

00

E602 0402

00

E602 0403

00

E602 0404

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-26

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0405 00

E602 0410

E602 0411

E602 0412

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-27

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0413 00

E602 0414

00

E602 0415

00

E602 0421

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-27

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0422 00

E602 0423

00

E602 0424

00

E602 0425

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /THUMDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-28

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0500 00

E602 0501

00

E602 0502

00

E602 0503

00

E602 0504

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-28

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0505 00

E602 0510

E602 0511

E602 0512

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-29

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0513 00

E602 0514

00

E602 0515

00

E602 0521

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-29

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0522 00

E602 0523

00

E602 0524

00

E602 0525

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_GEN. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-30

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0600 00

E602 0601

00

E602 0602

00

E602 0603

00

E602 0604

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-30

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0605 00

E602 0610

E602 0611

E602 0612

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-31

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0613 00

E602 0614

00

E602 0615

00

E602 0621

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-31

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0622 00

E602 0623

00

E602 0624

00

E602 0625

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_GEN. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-32

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0700 00

E602 0701

00

E602 0702

00

E602 0703

00

E602 0704

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-32

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0705 00

E602 0710

E602 0711

E602 0712

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-33

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0713 00

E602 0714

00

E602 0715

00

E602 0721

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-33

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0722 00

E602 0723

00

E602 0724

00

E602 0725

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_FAX. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-34

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0800 00

E602 0801

00

E602 0802

00

E602 0803

00

E602 0804

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-34

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0805 00

E602 0810

E602 0811

E602 0812

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-35

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0813 00

E602 0814

00

E602 0815

00

E602 0821

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-35

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0822 00

E602 0823

00

E602 0824

00

E602 0825

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /TMP_PSS. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-36

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0900 00

E602 0901

00

E602 0902

00

E602 0903

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Recovery of Boot partition must be executed in Safe Mode using SST. 1. Execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several dozen minutes) with CHK-TYPE = 0, and then turn OFF and then ON the Remedy power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, move to the download mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power.

7-36

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0904 00

E602 0905

E602 0910

E602 0911

E602 0912

00

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Recovery of Boot partition must be executed in Safe Mode using SST. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-37

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0913 00

E602 0914

00

E602 0915

00

E602 0921

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-37

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 0922 00

E602 0923

00

E602 0924

00

E602 0925

00

E602 1000

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /PDLDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-38

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1001 00

E602 1002

00

E602 1003

00

E602 1004

00

E602 1005

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-38

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1010 00

E602 1011

00

E602 1012

00

E602 1013

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-39

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1014 00

E602 1015

00

E602 1021

00

E602 1022

00

E602 1023

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-39

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1024 00

E602 1025

E602 1100

E602 1101

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /BOOTDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-40

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1102 00

E602 1103

00

E602 1104

00

E602 1105

00

E602 1110

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. 1. If possible, ask the customer to retrieve the data in the Address Book from the remote UI. 2. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several Remedy dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 3. If the measures above do not solve the problem, move to the download mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-40

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1111 00

E602 1112

00

E602 1113

00

E602 1114

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-41

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1115 00

E602 1121

00

E602 1122

00

E602 1123

00

E602 1124

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-41

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1125 00

E602 1200

E602 1201

E602 1202

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_MEAP. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-42

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1203 00

E602 1204

00

E602 1205

00

E602 1210

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Recovery of Boot partition must be executed in Safe Mode using SST. 1. Execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several dozen minutes) with CHK-TYPE = 0, and then turn OFF and then ON the Remedy power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, move to the download mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Recovery of Boot partition must be executed in Safe Mode using SST. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-42

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1211 00

E602 1212

00

E602 1213

00

E602 1214

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-43

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1215 00

E602 1221

00

E602 1222

00

E602 1223

00

E602 1224

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-43

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1225 00

E602 1300

E602 1301

E602 1302

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_SEND. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-44

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1303 00

E602 1304

00

E602 1305

00

E602 1310

00

E602 1311

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-44

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1312 00

E602 1313

E602 1314

E602 1315

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-45

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1321 00

E602 1322

00

E602 1323

00

E602 1324

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-45

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1325 00

E602 1400

E602 1401

E602 1402

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_KEEP. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-46

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1403 00

E602 1404

00

E602 1405

00

E602 1410

00

E602 1411

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-46

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1412 00

E602 1413

E602 1414

E602 1415

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-47

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1421 00

E602 1422

00

E602 1423

00

E602 1424

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-47

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1425 00

E602 1500

E602 1501

E602 1502

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_LOG. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-48

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1503 00

E602 1504

00

E602 1505

00

E602 1510

00

E602 1511

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-48

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1512 00

E602 1513

E602 1514

E602 1515

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-49

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1521 00

E602 1522

00

E602 1523

00

E602 1524

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-49

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1525 00

E602 1600

E602 1601

E602 1602

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /CRBDEV. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-50

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1603 00

E602 1604

00

E602 1605

00

E602 1610

00

E602 1611

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-50

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1612 00

E602 1613

E602 1614

E602 1615

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-51

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1621 00

E602 1622

00

E602 1623

00

E602 1624

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-51

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 1625 00

E602 2000

E602 2001

E602 2002

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Error in /APL_CDS. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Authentication error between Host Machine and Encryption Title Board Authentication error between Host Machine and Encryption Description Board. 1. Connection error between the Encryption Board and the Main Controller PCB (turn OFF and then ON the power). Remedy 2. Execute the key clear of the Encryption Board using SST (at this time, HDD becomes unformatted; thus, it is necessary to execute HDD format and system reinstallation). Title Discrepancy in the Encryption Board operation Although the Host Machine does not have the authentication Description information of the Encryption Board, the authenticated Encryption Board is installed. Although the Host Machine does not have the authentication Remedy information of the Encryption Board, the authenticated Encryption Board is installed. Title Failure of Encryption Board, others Description Failure of Encryption Board, others. 1. Connection error between the Encryption Board and the Main Controller PCB (turn Off and then ON the power). 2. Execute the key clear of the Encryption Board using SST (at this time, HDD becomes unformatted; thus, it is necessary to Remedy execute HDD format and system reinstallation). 3. After replacing the Encryption Board, execute HDD format and system reinstallation using SST. 4. Main Controller PCB.

7

7-52

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 4000 00 Description

Remedy

E602 4001

00

Title Description

Remedy

E602 FF00

00

Title Description

Remedy

E602 FF01

00

Title Description

Remedy

E602 FF02

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

00

Title Description

Remedy

Description OS startup error Unable to install OS. When the errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. 1. Cable connection error. 2. After HDD All Format, reinstall the system software. 3. HDD. OS startup error No OS startup script. When the errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log. 1. Cable connection error. 2. After HDD All Format, reinstall the system software. 3. HDD. Hard disk error Unidentified partition error. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Hard disk error Unidentified partition error. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Hard disk error Unidentified partition error. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-52

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 FF03 00

E602 FF04

00

E602 FF05

00

E602 FF10

E602 FF11

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. 1. Execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several dozen minutes) with CHK-TYPE = 0, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, execute HDD-CLEAR with CHK-TYPE = 1, 2, 3, 5, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the Remedy system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. This is the error which does not occur usually. 1. Execute HDD-CLEAR with CHK-TYPE = 1, 2, 3, 5, and then turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-53

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 FF12 00

E602 FF13

00

E602 FF14

00

E602 FF15

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7-53

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 FF21 00

E602 FF22

E602 FF23

E602 FF24

00

00

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write level. 1. Check the Cable and Power Connector. Remedy 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. Error due to data corruption or software bug. 1. Start up in Safe Mode to perform All Format using SST and reinstall the system (SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI), and then Remedy turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system.

7

7-54

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E602 FF25 00

E604 0512

00

E604 1024

00

E604 1536

00

E609 0008

00

E609 0009

00

E610 0001

00

E610 0002

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Hard disk error Description Unidentified partition error. The document data (such as Box on the HDD) can be damaged. 1. Enter the corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. If the measures above do not solve the problem, enter the Remedy corresponding CHK-TYPE in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power. (Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND) 3. If the error still remains, it can be caused by HDD failure; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the system. Title Memory error Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty Remedy Replace Main Controller PCB 1 Title Memory error Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty Remedy Replace Main Controller PCB 1 Title Memory error Description Memory of Main Controler PCB 1 is faulty Remedy Replace Main Controller PCB 1 Title Insufficient memory Temperature of the HDD does not rise to the specified Description temperature within the specified period of time at the time of startup. Remedy HDD. Title Hard disk error At the time of recovery from sleep, it does not reach to the Description specified temperature. Remedy HDD. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration Title error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Description The Encryption Board does not exist. Remedy Check the hardware configuration. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration Title error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Not meeting the memory configuration to execute encryption Description operation. Remedy Check the hardware configuration.

7-54

7 E Detail Location Code Code E610 0101 00

Item

Title Description Remedy

E610 0102

00

Title Description Remedy

E610 0201

00

Title Description Remedy

E610 0202

00

Title Description Remedy

E610 0301

00

Title Description Remedy

E610 0302

00

Title Description Remedy

E610 0303

00

Title Description Remedy

E610 0401

00

Title Description Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Failed to initialize the memory of key storage area. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Failed to initialize the encryption processing part. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Error in the encryption processing part. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Error in the encryption processing part. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Failed to create the encryption key. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Failure of the encryption key is detected. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Due to this error, HDD content is initialized. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Failure of the encryption key is detected. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Due to this error, HDD content is initialized. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Error is detected during encryption. Turn OFF and then ON the power.

7-55

E Detail Location Code Code E610 0402 00

Item

Title Description Remedy

E610 0501

00

Title Description Remedy

E611 0000

07

Title

Description

Remedy

E613 0512

00

E613 1024

00

E613 1536

00

E615 0001

00

Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

E674 0001

07

Title Description Remedy

E674 0002

07

Title Description Remedy

E674 0004

07

Title Description Remedy

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Error is detected during decryption. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption processing error) Error in document management information on /FSTDEV. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Rebooting due to SRAM corruption when executing a transmission job that secures disconnection of the power In the case that reboot is repeated at recovery from power down because SRAM information is corrupted and the job information saved on SRAM cannot be read, the phenomenon that the communication is repeated occurs. Clear SRAM to erase the job that secures disconnection of the power. Memory error Memory of Main Controler PCB 2 is faulty Replace Main Controller PCB 2 Memory error Memory of Main Controler PCB 2 is faulty Replace Main Controller PCB 2 Memory error Memory of Main Controler PCB 2 is faulty Replace Main Controller PCB 2 Self test error of encryption module A self test of the Ipsec Board was conducted, and an error was detected. The encryption module is broken. Upgrade the system after HDD format. When this error occurs, normal network communication cannot be guaranteed. FAX error Communication error with the FAX PCB. Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace the Main Controller PCB. FAX error Communication error with the FAX PCB. Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace the Main Controller PCB. FAX error Error in access of the modem IC. Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace the Main Controller PCB.

7-55

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E674 0008 07

E674 0010

07

E674 0011

07

E674 0030

07

E674 0100

07

E674 0200

E674 000C

E674 0300

E674 0301

E677 0001

07

07

07

07

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

FAX error Description Error in access of the port IC. Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace the Remedy Main Controller PCB. Title FAX error Description FAX error Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB. Title FAX error Description FAX error Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB. Title FAX error Description Checksum error. Remedy Download the system software for 2-line FAX. Title FAX error Logging is failed after completion of FAX communication, and Description unable to read. Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the power. Title HDD access error Description An error occurred when accessing the HDD. 1. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 2. Reinstall all the formats and the system. Remedy 3. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. Title FAX error Description Error in access of the modem IC/port IC. Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace the Remedy Main Controller PCB. Title Fax option configuration error Description An IPFAX license and a multiple-line unit are installed. To use the device as an IPFAX model, remove the multiple-line Remedy unit. To use the device as a G3 Fax model, uninstall the IPFAX license. Title Fax option configuration error Although an IPFAX license is installed, a Fax Unit (1-line) has Description not been installed. To use the device as an IPFAX model, install a Fax Unit (1-Line). Remedy To use the device as a G3 Fax model, uninstall the IPFAX license and install a G3 Fax Unit. Title Print server error Description Exhaust Fan operation error on the print server is detected. 1. Check power supply to the Exhaust Fan. Remedy 2. Replace the Exhaust Fan.

7

7-56

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E677 0003 00 Description

E677 0004

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy

E677 0010

00

E677 0080

00

E710 0001

00

Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description

E711 0001

05

Remedy Title Description Remedy

E711 0002

05

Title Description Remedy

E713 0000

05

Title Description Remedy

E713 0001

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

05

Title Description Remedy

Description Print server error Error is detected at the configuration check performed at startup. Check the cable connection, reinstallation. Print server error CPU Fan operation error on the print server is detected. 1. Check power supply to the CPU Fan. 2. Replace the CPU Fan. Print server error Not proper print server is connected. Replace the print server with the proper one. Print server error Communication error at startup. Check the cable connection, reinstallation. Printer IPC error Error is detected by IPC communication IC of the printer engine at power ON. Disconnection of cable. UFDI communication error Communication system error (reception time out error/ checksum error etc.) 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. IPC communication error Communication system error (packet error occurs without the request of initialization) 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (retry error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (transmission retry error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

7-56

7 E Detail Location Code Code E713 0002 05

Item Title Description Remedy

E713 0004

05

Title Description Remedy

E713 0010

05

Title Description Remedy

E713 0011

05

Title Description Remedy

E713 0020

05

Title Description Remedy

E713 0021

05

Title Description Remedy

E713 0022

05

Title Description Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description Erroneous communication with finisher (transmission data error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (reception error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (reception error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (reception error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (reception data error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (reception time out error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Erroneous communication with finisher (reception data error) The communication does not restart by the error retry after the communication failure with the finisher. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

7

7-57

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E716 0000 05 Description Remedy

E717 0001

00

Title Description

Remedy

E717 0002

00

Title Description Remedy

E719 0001

00

Title Description

Remedy

E719 0002

00

Title

Description

Remedy

E719 0003

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

00

Title Description Remedy

Description Erroneous communication with cassette pedestal After the presence of a cassette pedestal has been detected, the communication fails to be normal for 5 sec. 1.Check the cable. 2.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). 3.Replace the Cassette Pedestal Driver PCB. Communication error with the NE Controller Error when the NE Controller is started. The NE Controller which was connected before turning OFF the power is not connected at power-on. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. Communication error with the NE Controller IPC error at NE Controller operation. Open circuit of IPC, unable to recover the IPC communication. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. Error in coin manager Error when the coin manager is started. The coin manager which was connected before turning OFF the power is not connected at power-on. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. Error in coin manager IPC error at coin manager operation. Open circuit of IPC, unable to recover the IPC communication. When open circuit of the pickup/delivery signal cable is detected. Invalid connection is detected. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. Error in coin manager Communication error with the coin manager occurs during unit price acquisition at startup. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR.

7-57

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E719 0011 00 Description Remedy

E719 0012

00

Title Description Remedy

E719 0031

00

Title Description

Remedy

E719 0032

00

Title Description

Remedy

E730 1001

00

Title Description Remedy

E730 9004

00

Title Description Remedy

E730 9005

00

Title Description Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description Error when the Card Reader is started The Card Reader which was connected before turning OFF the power is not connected at power-on. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. IPC error at Card Reader operation Open circuit of IPC, unable to recover the IPC communication. Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. Communication error when the Card Reader (serial) is started Unable to start communication with the Card Reader at startup. 1. Check the cable connection of the Card Reader (connector connection error, open circuit), and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. 2. After removing the Card Reader, execute the following service mode, and then reinstall the Card Reader. - COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>CARD - COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR Communication error after the Card Reader (serial) is started Although communication with the Card Reader was possible at startup, it became unavailable in the middle of it. Check the cable connection of the Card Reader (connector connection error, open circuit), and then go through the following to clear the error: Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR. PDL software error Systematic fatal error, such as initialization failure, occurs. 1. PDL reset processing. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Third party PDL communication error Communication error with the print server. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the cable connection. 3. Replace the Open I/F PCB, F Link PCB (Main/Sub). 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Third party PDL communication error Error in video cable connection with the print server. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 2. Check the cable connection. 3. Replace the Open I/F PCB, F Link PCB (Main/Sub). 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB.

7

7-58

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E730 100A 00

E730 A006

00

E730 A007

00

E730 B013

00

E732 0000

00

E732 0001

00

E732 0010

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

PDL software error Description Systematic fatal error, such as initialization failure, occurs. 1. PDL reset processing. Remedy 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Title PDL communication error No reply from PDL. Due to failure of Subbootable, or no Description existence, there is no reply from PDL. 1. PDL reset processing. 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 3. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB. 4. Reinstall the firmware. 5. Replace the Main Controller PCB. Title Mismatched PDL version Version of the host machine control software and version of Description PDL control software are different. 1. PDL reset processing. Remedy 2. Turn OFF and then ON the power. 3. System All Format and installation. Title PDL embedded font error Description Font data is corrupted. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the power. Remedy 2. Reinstall the system. 3. System All Format and installation. Title Reader communication error Description Negotiation failure. 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Reader communication error Description Communication error. 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Reader communication error Unable to detect Vsync from the Reader Controller although 2 Description minutes have passed after the completion of register setting of the Main Controller. 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB.

7-58

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E732 0020 04

E732 0021

04

E732 0022

04

E732 0022

00

E732 0023

04

E732 8888

00

E732 9999

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Reader communication error Description Communication error 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Reader communication error Description Communication error 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Reader communication error Description Communication error 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Reader communication error Description Communication error 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Reader communication error Description Communication error 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader. 2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Title Error in the reader type When a scanner for the different model is detected during the Description communication with the reader. Remedy Replace to the proper reader. Title Detection of Reader The Reader is detected for the first time with the printer model. (On the user screen, only the message “Turn OFF and then Description ON the power again”, instead of an error code, is displayed. It is recorded as an error log in Service Mode > DISPLAY > ERR.) Remedy ---

7

7-59

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E733 0000 00

E733 0001

00

E733 0002

00

E733 0010

00

E740 0002

00

E743 0000

05

E744 0001

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Printer communication error Description Unable to communicate with printer at startup. 1. Check the connection of the Connector with the printer. 2. Check the power of the printer (check if the initialization Remedy operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the DC Controller or the Main Controller PCB. Title Printer communication error Communication error between the Main Controller and the DC Description Controller. 1. Check the connection between the DC controller PCB (J210) and the main controller PCB2 (I8112). Remedy 2. Check the power of the printer (check if the initialization operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the DC Controller or the Main Controller PCB 2. Title Printer communication error Communication error between the Main Controller and the DC Description Controller. 1. Check the connection between the DC controller PCB (J210) and the main controller PCB2 (I8112). Remedy 2. Check the power of the printer (check if the initialization operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the DC Controller or the Main Controller PCB 2. Title Printer communication error Description Error to detect printer vertical synchronous signal. 1. Check the connection between the DC controller PCB (J210) and the main controller PCB2 (I8112). Remedy 2. Check the power of the printer (check if the initialization operation is executed at startup). 3. Replace the DC Controller or the Main Controller PCB 2. Title Network Controller error Description Invalid MAC address. 1. Check the connection of the LAN Connector. Remedy 2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1. 3. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB 1. Title DDI communication error The Reader Controller PCB detected the communication error Description between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Controller PCB. 1. Connection error between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Controller PCB. Remedy 2. Failure of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1). 3. Failure of the Main Controller PCB. Title Error in language file/BootROM Version of language in HDD and version of Bootable are Description different. Remedy Download the correct version of the language file.

7-59

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E744 0002 00 E744 0003

00

E744 0004

00

E744 1000

00

E744 2000

00

E744 4000

05

E746 0003

00

E746 0021

00

E746 0022

00

E746 0023

00

E746 0024

00

E746 0031

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Error in language file/BootROM Description Size of the language in HDD is too big. Remedy Download the correct version of the language file. Title Error in language file/BootROM Unable to find the language to be switched to that is described Description in the Config.txt in HDD. Remedy Download the correct version of the language file. Title Error in language file/BootROM Description Unable to switch to the language in HDD. Remedy Download the correct version of the language file. Title Error in language file/BootROM Description The Boot ROM for the different model is installed. Remedy Replace the Boot ROM with the one for the correct model. Title Error in language file/BootROM Description When the engine ID described in Soft ID is invalid. Remedy Replace the Soft ID with the one for the correct model. Title Engine ID error The Main Controller PCB model and the DC Controller PCB Description (UN2) model are not matched. Remedy Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2) or redownload. Title Different Image Analysis PCB model Description Different Image Analysis PCB model. 1. Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB. Remedy 2. Replace the Image Analysis PCB. Title Image Analysis PCB self-check error detection Description Image Analysis PCB self-check error detection. 1. Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB. Remedy 2. Replace the Image Analysis PCB. Title Invalid Image Analysis PCB version Description Invalid Image Analysis PCB version. 1. Upgrade the Image Analysis PCB software. Remedy 2. Replace the Image Analysis PCB. Title No reply from Image Analysis PCB Description No reply from Image Analysis PCB. 1. Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB. Remedy 2. Replace the Image Analysis PCB. Title Image Analysis PCB operation error Description Image Analysis PCB operation error 1. Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB. Remedy 2. Replace the Image Analysis PCB. Title Hardware error (TPM) Description Hardware error (TPM). The TPM PCB is not installed, the TPM PCB for other model is Remedy installed, or failure of TPM Chip.

7

7-60

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E746 0032 00

E746 0033

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

00

Description

Error in engine ID of SoftID Description Mismatched data in TPM Format the system. Format the HDD using SST or USB memory, and download the system software. For details, see “Chapter 6: Upgrading”. For your reference, the method using USB memory is described below. 1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was registered. 2. Execute the following service mode: Remedy COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter the download mode. 3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment. 4. Execute [4]: Format HDD in the main menu. After formatting is completed, the machine reboots automatically and starts with the download mode. 5. Execute [1]: Upgrade (Auto) in the main menu. System software is downloaded and the machine restarts automatically. Title Error in engine ID of SoftID Description Error that can be recovered

7-60

7 E Detail Location Code Code

Item

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description When the TPM key was backed up, it can be restored. 1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key. 2. Go to Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings, and then click “Restore TPM Key”. 3. Enter the password set at backup operation. 4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click “OK”. Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and then ON the main power.

Remedy

E746 0034

00

Title Description Remedy

E746 0035

00

Title Description

E748 2000

00

E748 2001

00

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

When the TPM key was not backed up, formatting the system is required. Format the HDD using SST or USB memory, and download the system software. For details, see “Chapter 6: Upgrading”. For your reference, the method using USB memory is described below. 1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was registered. 2. Execute the following service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter the download mode. 3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment. 4. Execute [4]: Format HDD in the main menu. After formatting is completed, the machine reboots automatically and starts with the download mode. 5. Execute [1]: Upgrade (Auto) in the main menu. System software is downloaded and the machine restarts automatically. Mismatch of TPM key information (TPM) key mismatch occurred due to having formatted the HDD information while TPM was ON. - Execute restoration of the TPM key. - Execute "Initialize All Data/Settings" when the TPM key is not backed up. Wrong installation of TPM PCB TPM PCB is mistakenly installed (The TPM PCB which is not supported is installed). Replace the TPM PCB. Main Controller PCB access error Main Controller PCB Chip access error. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1/2. Main Controller PCB access error Main Controller PCB memory access error. 1. Remove and then reinstall the DDR2-SDRAM(M0/M1/P). 2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1/2.

7

7-61

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E748 2010 00 Description

Remedy

E748 2011

00

E748 2012

00

Title Description Remedy Title Description

E748 2021

00

E748 2023

00

E748 2024

00

E748 4910

00

E748 9000

00

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy Title Description Remedy

Description Flash PCB error / HDD error Flash PCB error has occurred, or the HDD cannot be recognized. 1. After turning OFF the main power, disconnect the HDD interface connector (J102) of the Main Controller PCB 2 and turn ON the main power. 2. If the error code E748-2010 remains unchanged, it means a Flash PCB error, so replace the Flash PCB, and install the system using SST or USB. 3. When it changed to another error code such as E602, refer to the remedy of the applicable code Flash board error OS is not found Flash board replacement Flash board error Cannot mount the OS in safe mode startup or No OS startup script Flash board replacement Main controller board 2 access errors Main controller board 2 access errors Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting, replacement Main controller board 2 access errors Main controller board 2 access errors DDR2-SDRAM (M0/M1/P) removing and inserting, replacement Main controller board 2 access errors Main controller board 2 access errors Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting, replacement Main controller board 2 access errors Main controller board 2 access errors Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. System error --Contact to the sales companies

7-61

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E753 0001 05

E760 0001

E800 0000

00

05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description

Download error System Software Update Error Description Error occurs when updating system software of uninstalled options Check the log to find where the download error has been occurred. FIN_G1 Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 IFN_D1 Inner Finisher-D1 G3CCB Super G3 FAX Board-AK1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AK1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AK1 G3CCM Super G3 FAX Board-AK1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AK1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AK1 Remedy When any of the above system software is displayed, check if the target option has been installed. When the target option has not been installed: Turn OFF and then ON the main power supply to restore (since there is no system software to be updated.). When the target option has been installed: Check if the accessory is correctly installed and if the target system software to be downloaded is for the installed option. Then download the appropriate system software again. Title Main Controller PCB 2 internal error Error was detected in the Image Processing Chip on the Main Description Controller PCB 2. 1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power. 2. Remove and then install the DDR2-SDRAM (J201) on the Main Controller PCB 2. 3. Replace the DDR2-SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2. 4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. Remedy NOTE: If the error occurs periodically or it occurs with specific jobs although it can be solved by turning OFF and then ON the power, upgrade the system software to the latest version. Power condition unmatched error between Main Controller PCB and DC Controller PCB The power of DC controller PCB still keep ON even if it reaches Description 90 sec after detecting the power OFF by the main controller PCB. 1. Wait till the power is turned off. Remedy 2. Turn the main power switch ON.

7-62

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E804 0000 05 Description

Remedy

E804 0001

05

Title Description Remedy

E805 0000

05

Title Description

Remedy

E805 0001

05

Title Description

Remedy

E805 0002

05

Title Description

Title

Remedy

E805 0003

05

Title Description

Remedy

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description Failure of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5) When lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5) is stopped. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors. (J2003/J119) 2.Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5). Unstable rotation of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5) The fan stop signal is detected for 5 minutes or more and the retry operation fails 4 times continuously after generating the ON signal of the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5). 1.Check connection of the Connectors. (J2003/J119) 2.Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM5). Failure of the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3) When lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3) is stopped. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2010/J2501/J206). 2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Unstable rotation of the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3) When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3) is driven. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2010/J2501/J206). 2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Rear) (FM3). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Failure of the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4) When lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4) is stopped. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2010/J2501/J206). 2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Unstable rotation of the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4) When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FM4) is driven. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2010/J2501/J206). 2.Replace the Exhaust Fan (Front) (FAN4). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).

7-62

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E806 0000 05 Description

Remedy

E806 0001

05

Title Description

Remedy

E806 0002

05

Title Description

Remedy

E806 0003

05

Title Description

Remedy

E840 0000

05

Title Description

Remedy

E840 0001

05

Title Description

Remedy

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

Description Failure of the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6) When lock signal is detected for 5 sec while the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6) is stopped. *The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2210/J222). 2.Replace the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Unstable rotation of the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6) When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6) is driven. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2210/J222). 2.Replace the Main Body Cooling Fan (FM6). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Failure of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7) When lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7) is stopped. *The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2209/J2509/J206). 2.Replace the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Unstable rotation of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7) When lock signal failed to be detected for 15 sec while the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7) is driven. * The same condition is detected after the error retry is performed. 1.Check connection of the Connectors (J2209/J2509/J206). 2.Replace the Paper Cooling Fan (FM7). 3.Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2). Edge Shutter Home Position error When the home position of the shutter is not detected 1. Check connection of the Connectors (J2039/J2037/J2507/ J215). 2. Replace the fixing film edge shutter HP sensor (S10). 3. Replace the fixing film edge shutter motor (M8). 4. Replace the DC controller PCB (UN2). Failure of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1) When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film edge cooling fan (rear) stops. * The same status is detected again after the retry operation. 1. Check connection of the Connectors (J2036/J215). 2. Replace the fixing film edge cooling fan (rear) (FM1) 3. Replace the DC controller PCB (UN2).

7

7-63

E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E840 0002 05 Description

Remedy

E840 0003

05

Title Description

Remedy

E840 0004

05

Title Description

Remedy

E880 0001

00

Title Description Remedy

E880 0005

00

Title Description Remedy

E996 0071

04

Title Description

Remedy

E996 0CA0

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

05

Title Description

Remedy

Description Rotation error of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Rear) (FM1) When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film cooling fan (rear) operates. * The same status is detected again after the retry operation. 1. Check connection of the Connectors (J2036/J215). 2. Replace the fixing film edge cooling fan (rear) (FM1) 3. Replace the DC controller PCB (UN2). Failure of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2) When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film edge cooling fan (front) stops. * The same status is detected again after the retry operation. 1. Check connection of the Connectors (J2035/J215). 2. Replace the fixing film edge Cooling fan (front) (FM2) 3. Replace the DC controller PCB (UN2). Rotation error of Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan (Front) (FM2) When the lock signal is detected for 15 sec while the fixing film edge cooling fan (front) operates. * The same status is detected again after the retry operation. 1. Check connection of the Connectors (J2035/J215). 2. Replace the fixing film edge cooling fan (front) (FM2) 3. Replace the DC controller PCB (UN2). Controller Cooling Fan error The failure of the controller cooling fan (FM12) is detected. 1. Check the connector (J1015). 2. Replace the controller cooling fan (FM12) 3. Replace the main controller PCB 1 (UN25). Controller Cooling Fan error The failure of the controller cooling fan (FM12) is detected. 1. Check the connector (J1015). 2. Replace the controller cooling fan (FM12) 3. Replace the main controller PCB 1 (UN25). Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF) Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF) Depending on the setting of JM-ERR-R in service mode, “010071” jam is displayed as an error. Collect log and contact to the sales companies. To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R, and set JM-ERR-R to 0. Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER) Error avoidance jam (PRINTER) Make “000CA0” jam to be displayed as an error by setting JMERR-D in service mode. Collect log and contact to the sales companies. To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D, and set JM-ERR-D to 0.

7-63

7 E Detail Location Item Code Code Title E996 0CAF 05

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

7-64

Description

Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER) Description Error avoidance jam (PRINTER) Make “000CAF” jam to be displayed as an error by setting JMERR-D in service mode. Remedy Collect log and contact to the sales companies. To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D, and set JM-ERR-D to 0. T-7-5

7

Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602 to E996

7-64

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Jam screen display specification

Jam Code

Jam screen display specification Due to one jam code being used for multiple options, the illustration for the different option

Jam Type

may be displayed on the jam screen. In this case, "1/2" or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this

Jam types are shown below. Type DELAY STNRY OVERLAP TIMING NG OHP NG ADF OP COVER OP RESIDUAL PICKUP NG POWER ON DOOR OP SEQ NG DELAY ESC OTH JAM STNRY ESC STP SDL STP INIT ROT UP DEVICE OTHER ERROR RETRY ERR STOP ROT PROGRAM TIME OUT PUNCH MEDIA NG

7-65

area can be pushed. This operation can be used to switch information on the screen.

Meaning Delay jam Stationary jam Double feed detection Timing error Incorrect paper ADF open Cover open Residual jam Pickup error Power ON Door open Sequence jam Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray Other jams Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray Staple Saddle stitch staple Residual (at initial rotation) Upper stream device jam Others Error Retry error Press Stop key Keeps rotating Program Time-out Punch Misprint

F-7-1

T-7-6

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Jam screen display specification

7-65

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Host machine + Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1

Host machine + Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1 S24

S22 S21 S19

S6 S7 S5 S9 S1 S4 S3

S2 S33

S34

S31

PS108

PS109

7-66

ACC ID

Jam Code

Type

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0107 0108 0109 010A 010D 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0207 0208 0209 020A 020D 0A01 0A02 0A03 0A04 0A05 0A07 0A08 0A09 0A0A 0A0D 0B00 0CA0 0CAF

DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY STNRY POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON DOOR OP SEQ NG*1 SEQ NG*1

S1 S33 PS108 PS109 S5 S19 S21 S22 S24 S7 S1 S33 PS108 PS109 S5 S19 S21 S22 S24 S7 S1 S33 PS108 PS109 S5 S19 S21 S22 S24 S7 -

Sensor ID

00 00

0CF1 0D91

RETRY ERR OTHER

-

Sensor Name/Description Cassette 1 pickup sensor Cassette 2 pickup sensor Cassette 3 pickup sensor Cassette 4 pickup sensor Pre-registration sensor Fixing outlet sensor No.1 delivery sensor No.2 delivery sensor Reversal sensor Duplex feed sensor Cassette 1 pickup sensor Cassette 2 pickup sensor Cassette 3 pickup sensor Cassette 4 pickup sensor Pre-registration sensor Fixing outlet sensor No.1 delivery sensor No.2 delivery sensor Reversal sensor Duplex feed sensor Cassette 1 pickup sensor Cassette 2 pickup sensor Cassette 3 pickup sensor Cassette 4 pickup sensor Pre-registration sensor Fixing outlet sensor No.1 delivery sensor No.2 delivery sensor Reversal sensor Duplex feed sensor Door open jam Communication error jam with the controller Communication error jam with the finisher Retry jam Different Size jam T-7-7

*1: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the power supply. If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor. F-7-2

7

Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is open circuit, and replace the sensor.

Error Code > Jam Code > Host machine + Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1

7-66

7

Error Code > Jam Code > DADF-AG1

7-67

Paper Deck Unit-B2

DADF-AG1 SR11 SR2

PS1D

SR1 SR4

SR3

SR5

PS6D

F-7-3

ACC ID

Jam Code

00 00 00

010F 020F 0A0F

Type

Sensor ID

DELAY PS6D STNRY PS6D POWER ON PS6D

Sensor Name/Description Deck pickup sensor Deck pickup sensor Deck pickup sensor

T-7-8 and then ON the *1: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF

power supply. If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor. Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is open circuit, and replace the sensor.

F-7-4

ACC ID Jam Code

Type

01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0071 0073 0084 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094

DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY STNRY DELAY STNRY DELAY STNRY TIMING NG HP NG STNRY ADF OP ADF OP COVER OP COVER OP RESIDUAL

01

0095

PICKUP NG

Sensor ID SR1 SR1 SR1,SR2 SR2 SR2,SR3 SR3 SR1 SR1,SR2 SR2 SR2,SR3 SR3 SR11 SR1 ADF OP ADF OP SR6 SR6 SR1,SR2,SR3 -

Sensor Name/Description Registration sensor Registration sensor Registration sensor/Read sensor Read sensor Registration sensor/Delivery reversal sensor Delivery reversal sensor Registration sensor Registration sensor/Read sensor Read sensor Registration sensor/Delivery reversal sensor Delivery reversal sensor Timing NG jam Release motor HP sensor Registration sensor ADF open jam ADF open jam Cover open/closed sensor Cover open/closed sensor Registration sensor/Read sensor/Delivery reversal sensor Pickup NG jam T-7-9

7

Error Code > Jam Code > DADF-AG1

7-67

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 + External Hole Puncher-B2

Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 + External Hole Puncher-B2

PI63 PCB12 PI104

PI103

PI22

PI18 PI19 PI20

PI17 PI11 PI15

ACC ID Jam Code

Type

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

1001 1002 1004 1101 1102 1104 1200 1300 1400 1500 1644 1645 110F 1F86 1F87

DELAY DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY STNRY EARLY POWER ON DOOR OP STP PUNCH POWER ON ERROR SDL STP POWER ON

02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

1F88 1F8F 1F91 1F92 1F93 1F9F 1FA1 1FA2 1FA3

DOOR OP ERROR*1 DELAY DELAY DELAY OTHER STNRY STNRY STNRY

7-68

Sensor ID PI103 PCB12 PI104 PI103 PCB12 PI104 PI103 PI104 PI63 PCB12 PI1, PI17, PI18, PI19, PI20, PI22 PI18 PI11 PI22 PI18,PI19,PI20 PI11,PI17 PI22

Sensor Name/Description Inlet sensor Photosensor PCB Feed path sensor Inlet sensor Photosensor PCB Feed path sensor Inlet sensor Feed path sensor Door open jam Staple jam Punch jam Power on jam Error evasion jam Saddle staple jam Power on jam Door open jam Error evasion jam No.1 paper sensor Delivery sensor Saddle inlet sensor Saddle time out jam No.1/2/3 paper sensor Delivery sensor/Vertical pat paper sensor Saddle inlet sensor

*1: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON T-7-10 the power supply. If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.

F-7-5

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 + External Hole Puncher-B2

7-68

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Inner Finisher-D1 + Inner Hole Puncher-A1

Buffer Pass Unit-H1

7-69

Inner Finisher-D1 + Inner Hole Puncher-A1 S3 S23

SW1

S5

S2

S1 S18,S19

SR5 SR3 SR1

PS2

S14

PS1

F-7-6

ACC ID Jam Code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0111 0112 0211 0212 0A11 0A12 FF11 FF12

Type DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY POWER ON POWER ON SEQ NG*1 SEQ NG*1

Sensor ID PS1 PS2 PS1 PS2 PS1 PS2 PS1 PS2

Sensor Name/Description Paper in sensor Paper out sensor Paper in sensor Paper out sensor Paper in sensor Paper out sensor Paper in sensor Paper out sensor

T-7-11 *1: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the

power supply. If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor. Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is open circuit, and replace the sensor.

S6

S10

S13 F-7-7

ACC ID Jam Code 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

1001 1002 1101 1102 1300 1400 1500 1701 1644 1646 1C20 1C32 1C40 1C42 1C67 1C6F 1C71 1C75 1F00

Type DELAY DELAY STNRY STNRY POWER ON DOOR OP OTHER INIT ROT OTH JAM OTH JAM POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON POWER ON OTH JAM

Sensor ID S1 SR3 S1 SR3 S1/S6 SW1 S18/S19 S1/SR3 SR5 SR1 S2 S10 S14 S23 S3 S5 S13 S7 S1

Sensor Name/Description Entrance sensor Punch path sensor Entrance sensor Punch path sensor Entrance sensor/Processing tray sensor Front cover switch Stapler HP sensor/Stapler edging sensor Entrance sensor/Punch path sensor Punch HP sensor Punch solenoid sensor Shift roller HP sensor Stapler move HP sensor Stack tray clock sensor Additional tray clock sensor Shift roller release sensor Entrance roller release /stopper HP sensor Gripper arm sensor Gripper unit HP sensor Entrance sensor T-7-12

7

Error Code > Jam Code > Inner Finisher-D1 + Inner Hole Puncher-A1

7-69

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code

Alarm Code

7-70 Alarm Code Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures 04 - 0014 Cassette 4 Paper Feed Retry Movement: No change. error

List of Alarm Code Alarm Code Title 00 - 0085 A notice of state 00 - 0246 Error code display (4-digit) 00 - 0247 Error code display (4-digit) 01 - 0001 Disabled to obtain counter 01 - 0004 01 - 0005

04 - 0008

04 - 0010 04 - 0011

04 - 0012

04 - 0013

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

Soft counter PCB cannot write normally Soft counter PCB cannot restore data Counter information is not set to UGW values for a certain period of * Not displayed on service mode history due to the time alarm being generated by UGW Notification of IP address IP address has been changed change * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW Machine is in restricted The machine has entered limited function mode due to operation mode some reasons * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW Paper Deck Lifter error Movement: The Paper Deck Main Motor (M1D) stops. CAUSE: The Deck Lifter does not rise or the Deck Lifter Position Sensor (PS4D) is failure. Measure: Turn OFF/ON the power swtch to release the error. Jam left untouched Jam is left untouched * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW Cassette 1 Paper Feed Retry Movement: No change. error CAUSE: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. MEASURE: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not. Cassette 2 Paper Feed Retry Movement: No change. error CAUSE: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. MEASURE: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not. Cassette 3 Paper Feed Retry Movement: No change. error CAUSE: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. MEASURE: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code

04 - 0017

04 - 0018

10 - 0001 10 - 0020

10 - 0100 11 - 0001

11 - 0010

31 - 0005

CAUSE: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. MEASURE: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not. Manual Feeder Paper Feed Movement: No change. Retry error CAUSE: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. MEASURE: Check the paper feed roller and the separation pad. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not. Paper Deck Retry error Movement: No change. CAUSE: The paper does not picked up even if the paper feed retry operation is carried out 4 times. MEASURE: Check the pick-up/paper feed/separation rollers. -> Check whether a scrap of paper remains around the paper feed area or not. Toner low (Black) Toner (Bk) level warning display * Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW Toner (Bk) prior delivery alarm Movement: No change. CAUSE: The remaining quantity of the toner became the specific level or less. MEASURE: Replace the toner bottle. Toner bottle replacement The replacement of the Toner bottle was detected. completion alarm Waste Toner Container full Movement: A message “The waste toner container is full.” is displayed on the Control Panel, and the machine is stopped. Cause: The Waste Toner Container becomes full. Measures: Clean the Waste Toner Container. Waste Toner Container prior Movement: A message is displayed on the Control delivery alarm Panel. (Continuous printing is enabled.) Cause: Display of Waste Toner Container preparation alarm Measures: Clean the Waste Toner Container. Environment Sensor reading Movement: It becomes as follow: environment alarm temperature= 0 degC, environment humidity= 0%. Cause: Connection of the Environment Sensor cannot be detected. Measures: 1) Check the connection of the Environment Sensor (THU1). 2) Replace the Environment Sensor (THU1).

7-70

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code

Alarm Code Title A. movement /B. cause /C. measures 31 0006 HDD failure when the mirroring Movement: HDD failure when the mirroring function is function is installed

31 - 0008

33 - 0011

37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 38 38 50

-

0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 1000 2000 0001 0002 0010

installed Cause: The HDD has a failure when the mirroring function is installed Measures: Check the connection among the following: the HDD that corresponds to the red LED on the LED PCB of the Mirroring Kit, the Mirroring Board and the Main Controller PCB 2. Replace the HDD if it cannot be recovered. HDD failure prediction alarm Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due to occurrence of physical error in HDD. It does not occur in the HDD of mirroring configuration. Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD Measures: 1. Back up the data stored in HDD. 2. Replace the HDD. 3. Restore the data. S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in the HDD. The occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing speed, the total number of Motor start-up and stop times, the total length of power-on time, etc. are monitored. Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fan Movement: No change. error CAUSE: Disconnection of the Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fans (FAN1/2) or Failure of the Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fans (FAN1/2) Measure: Check the connector. -> Replace the Fixing Film Edge Cooling Fans (FAN1/2). For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D For R&D Alarm due to original Movement: Nothing in particular. separation failure Cause: Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from the ADF occurs 3 times. Measures: Check rotation of the Pickup Motor (M1) -> Check the life of the Pickup Roller -> Check if paper lint is at the Pickup Slot.

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code

7-71 Alarm Code Title 50 - 0012 Feed Motor Fan alarm

61 - 0001 Finisher Staple alarm

62 - 0001 Saddle Staple alarm

65 - 0001 Punch alarm

73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 73 75 75

-

0006 0007 0008 0009 0011 0014 0015 0017 0021 0024 0026 0001 0002

76 76 76 76 76 76 76

-

0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007

LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS LIPS Error occurred in Yukon Error occurred due to invalid SVG analysis from Yukon Font Font Font Font Font Font Font

76 - 0008 Font 78 - 0003 GL

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures Movement: No change. CAUSE: Disconnection of the ADF Exhaust Fan (FM1) or the failure of ADF Exhaust Fan (FM1) Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the ADF Exhaust Fan (FM1) Movement: A user message is displayed on the Control Panel. If staple job is being processed during a print job, printing is stopped. Measures: Load staples. Movement: A user message is displayed on the Control Panel, and printing is stopped. If staple job is being processed during a print job, printing is stopped. Measures: Load staples. Movement: A user message is displayed on the Control Panel. If punching is being operated during a print job, operation varies depending on the detection level. - Level 1: Continue operation. - Level 2 (in case that punching operated 1000 times after the detection level 1): Stop printing. Measures: Remove the punched trash. Error in configuration acquisition/management Memory management error in LIPS File management error in LIPS Reception data management error Macro management error Font management error Letter drawing error Image drawing error Utility execution control error Boot error in LIPS Data format error of image mode No memory for internal font Fails to access to the file that stores the font. Fails to allocate the FM work memory. Fails to allocate the FM work memory. Fails to analyze the internal font. Alignment of font data is wrong. Fails to allocate work memory with scalar. There are 3 types depending on where to occur. Fails to allocate work memory with scalar. There are 3 types depending on where to occur. Invalid GL entry

7-71

7 Alarm Code Title 78 - 0005 GL 79 - 0001 Canon-made PCL 79 - 0002 Canon-made PCL 79 - 0003 Canon-made PCL 79 - 0004 Canon-made PCL 80 - 0001 BDL 80 - 0003 BDL 80 - 0004 BDL 80 - 0007 BDL 80 - 0008 BDL 80 - 0009 BDL 80 - 0010 BDL 80 - 0011 BDL 80 - 0012 BDL 80 - 0013 BDL 80 - 0015 BDL 80 - 0016 BDL 80 - 0019 BDL 81 - 0001 Imaging 81 - 0002 Imaging 81 - 0003 Imaging 81 - 0004 Imaging 81 - 0005 Imaging 81 - 0006 Imaging 81 83 83 83 83 84 84 84 84 84 84 84 84 84 85 85 85

-

0007 0005 0015 0016 0017 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0001 0002 0003

Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures

System memory full PCL initialization error PCL processing error Overflow of work memory for translator Download overflow Admin error Data Area error Wrapper error Resource error Attribute error Volatile Resource error Graphics error Char error Image error Image error Print data cannot process this version. Overflow of work memory for translator In case of invalid data format in BDL custom mode Fails to allocate the memory. Rendering error Overflow of work memory for translator Imaging initialization error Imaging processing error Error when the setting is long length paper + 1200dpi. (Because of memory, long length paper + 1200dpi is not available.) Imaging Error when long length paper + color is set. PDF PDF memory full PDF PDF data decoding error PDF Page range error PDF PDF error XPS memory full error XPS spool full error XPS print range error XPS document data error XPS page data error XPS image data error XPS font data error XPS non-support image error XPS rendering error A notice of state1 A notice of state2 A notice of state3 -

7

Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code

7-72 Alarm Code Title 85 - 0004 A notice of state4 85 - 0005 A notice of state5 85 - 0006 A notice of state6

A. movement /B. cause /C. measures T-7-13

7-72

8

Service Mode ■ ■Overview ■ ■COPIER ■ ■FEEDER ■ ■SORTER ■ ■BOARD

8

Service Mode

8

Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations

Overview

8-2

Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be

Overview

displayed.

Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself. The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.

Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item. E.g., COPIER > DISPLAY > Version window

Entering Service Mode Contact the sales company for the method to enter service mode

Service Mode Menu 1) Press [i]

TOP Screen

2) Minor item titles are displayed.

4) A detailed explanation on the item will be displayed (usage scenarios, instructions, settings range, etc.).

F-8-1

"MODELIST"

"MODELIST CLASSIC" “Updater”

A brand new additional mode in the host machine. A function that can be used as a reference on how to use each item in Service Mode is installed. The new function, which will be described later, is available in MODELIST Mode. This mode is same as the old machine. The new function, which will be described later, is not available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode. This is a MEAP application with functions of network communication to Content Delivery System V1.0 (hereinafter CDS) and installation of firmware, MEAP applications or system options. (Refer to Updater V1.0 service manual.)

3) Select the desired minor item and press [i] F-8-2

• The service mode contents can be displayed in J/E/F/I/G/S languages. • Service mode contents, like system software, can be upgraded by SST.

If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " or “Updater” is pressed, the screen will switch to initial screen for each mode.

8

Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations

8-2

8

Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description

Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description

■■I/O information enhancement On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor, motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.

The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code occurrence record screen.

And the screen will also display the input output signal.

ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR

Device classification

Electrical parts classification

8-3

1) Press the button. Which button to press, will depend on which electrical parts intended and its device classification. For instance, if the host machine uses paper pass detection sensor, then press the button on the "COPIER" and "P-Sensor" position.

2) Then the selected electrical parts classification's mark, name, port number and 0/1 content will appear.

F-8-4

3) If the "i" button is pressed, the screen displaying the electrical parts array will appear.

F-8-3

8

Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description

8-3

8

Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation

8-4

COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation

ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR

On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item. In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to 15 categories. Classification

F-8-5

Name

Description

Function switching

FNC-SW

Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/ DA connection, count-up spec., document size detection, dirt detection level

Display switching/ display timing

DSPLY-SW

UI (User Interface) display related

Image related (fixing)

IMG-FIX

Fixing related

Image related (transfer)

IMG-TR

Transfer related

Image related (developing)

IMG-DEV

Developer related

Image related (laser/ latent image) IMG-LSR

Laser, latent image related

Image related (reader/ ADF)

IMG-RDR

Reader, ADF image related

Image related (controller, other general items)

IMG-MCON MN-CON image related, and image related items other than those referred to above.

Image quality/ copy speed

IMG-SPD

Power down sequence

Cleaning

CLEANING

Cleaning of charging unit, drum, transfer roller, etc.

Environment settings

ENV-SET

Temperature, humidity, environmental heater, condensation, log acquisition

Paper feed (pickup, delivery)

FEED-SW

Stack performance, motor speed adjustment, delivery functions, etc.

Noise reduction

SOUND

Noise related

Network

NETWORK

Network settings, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS, etc.

Customization

CUSTOM

Customization T-8-1

8

Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation

8-4

8

Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes

Security features

8-5

1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System

To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled.

Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button.

■■Related service modes • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level1) Set password type for transition to service mode.

System Manager ID

<Setting range> 0: No password (default)

System Password

1: Service engineer 2: System administrator and Service engineer. • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD (Level2) Password for service engineer for transition to service mode. • <Setting range>

F-8-6

To reinforce the security, change the password from a default.

2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD), press OK button.

******** (eight digit numeral) [default: 11111111] After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.

SM-PSWD

F-8-7

MEMO : If Service Engineer’s password is forgotten, password function is cancelable by using Service Support Tool (SST).

8

Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes

8-5

8

Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

8-6

Language switch The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by

Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier. When level 1 screen is displayed, press in the right upper side of the screen, and it will switch to level 2.

performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in HDD. Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST. Additional Functions > Common Settings > Language Switch

Settings/Registration

Language

English Japanese French German Italian Dutch Keyboard Layout English(USA)Layout Cancel

1/1

Set

OK

F-8-9

NOTE: If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed, English explanatory text will be displayed. If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory text can't be displayed.

F-8-8

8

Service Mode > Overview > Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)

8-6

8

Service Mode > Overview > Service Label

Back-up of service mode

8-7

Service Label

In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written

• Service label of the reader assembly

in the service label. When you replaced the CCD unit (CCD PCB) or the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments and changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed values in the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in a blank field. • Service label [A] of the reader assembly: inside of the reader rear cover • Service label [B] of the printer assembly: inside of the front cover

F-8-11

F-8-10

8

Service Mode > Overview > Service Label

8-7

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > Service Prints and Data File Names That Support File Output

8-8

The data output of the service data print

• Service label of the printer assembly

■■Overview • Data output of service print such as P-PRINT is supported. • Service mode level 1 > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > RPT-FILE > [OK]. The created data file is saved in the HDD of the machine. • The created (saved) data is deleted when it is moved to the SST or a USB memory device. • Even if the machine has stopped operation due to a no-paper error, data can be moved to the SST or the USB memory device as long as the machine can enter download mode.

NOTE:

• While an error is occurring, data of service print cannot be create. • When connecting a USB device that operates on an external power supply, the machine needs to be started with the USB device ON. A USB device connected after starting the machine cannot be recognized.

■■Service Prints and Data File Names That Support File Output Service Mode

F-8-12

P-PRINT HIST-PRT USER-PRT D-PRINT ENV-PRT PJH-P-1 PJH-P-2 KEY-HIST USBH-PRT

Content Output of service mode setting value Output of jam and error history Output of user mode list Output of service mode (DISPLAY) Inside temp/hmdy & fix roller temp log Detail info of print job history:100 job Detail info of print job history:all job Not used Output of USB device information report T-8-2

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > Service Prints and Data File Names That Support File Output

8-8

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device

■■How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device ●● Preparation

8-9

2. Generating report file After the “ACTIVE” blinks for 3 to 4 minutes, generation of a report file is complete as “OK!” is displayed.

• PC with SST running, or • USB memory device FAT32 format file system, with no password locks. To display the USB menu, the firmware of the corresponding model needs to have been registered.

●● Overall flow 1. Selecting RPT-FILE

PJH-P-2 USBH-PRT RPT-FILE RPT2USB

OK!

Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press OK. 2. Generating report file 3. Using SST or USB memory device to collect the report file Transfer the report data which was collected from the machine to the USB memory device.

●● operation 1. Select service mode (Level 1) > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE; and then press "OK“.

F-8-14

3. Enter download mode. 4. Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.

PJH-P-2 USBH-PRT RPT-FILE RPT2USB

OK F-8-13

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a USB Memory Device

8-9

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST

8-10

■■How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST

5. Press the control panel keys. [5] -> [0]:

[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]] ------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) [4]: Format HDD [5]: Backup [7]: Clear downloaded files [8]: download Menu 2 [9]: Other Menu

Introduce it in SST Ver.4.72. 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START]. 7

[1] [2]

iA4245

[Reset]: Shutdown /[5] has been selected. Execute?/ - (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-8-15

6. Download ServicePrint.

F-8-17

[4] ServicePrint : Transfer the report data from the machine to the USB memory device.

3) Click [Upload Data]. 7

[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]

iA4245

ーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーーー

[1]: Sublog [4]: ServicePrint [5]: Netcap [6]: SRAM(HDD) [7]: SRAM(USB) [C]: Return to Main Menu

iA4245

iA4245

F-8-16

NOTE:

F-8-18

• If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which makes it difficult to read the data. • When the file is dragged to WordPad, an image similar to the image output on paper may be displayed in some cases.

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST

8-10

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST

8-11

4) Select 'Report', and click [Start]. 7

iA4245

F-8-19

5) Select the name of the Folder to store and, as necessary, a brief description; then, click [Save]. 7

iA4245

F-8-20

6) Click [OK].

8

Service Mode > Overview > The data output of the service data print > How to Move Service Print Files to a PC using the SST

8-11

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER

8-12 COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

DISPLAY ■■VERSION COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION DC-CON

Dspl of DCON firmware version

Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range R-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range PANEL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ECO Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range FEEDER Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SORTER Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range NIB Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of RCON firmware version To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ECO-ID PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of DADF Driver PCB ROM version To display the DADF Driver PCB ROM version When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of FIN-CONT firmware version To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of network software version To display the network software version When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

SDL-STCH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MN-CONT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range DIAG-DVC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range RUI Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range PUNCH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-EN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver To display the Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of MNCON firmware version To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of self diagnosis device ROM ver To display the self diagnosis device ROM version When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of remote UI version To display the remote UI version When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Finisher Inner Punch Unit To display the version of Finisher Inner Punch Unit. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of English language file version To display the version of English language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of French language file version To display the version of French language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of German language file version To display the version of German language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-12

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION LANG-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-JP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Display of Italian language file version To display the version of Italian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Japanese language file version To display the version of Japanese language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Czech language file version To display the version of Czech language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Danish language file version To display the version of Danish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Greek language file version To display the version of Greek language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Spanish language file version To display the version of Spanish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Estonian language file version To display the version of Estonian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Finnish language file version To display the version of Finnish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-13

LANG-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Hungarian language file version To display the version of Hungarian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Korean language file version To display the version of Korean language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Dutch language file version To display the version of Dutch language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Norwegian language file version To display the version of Norwegian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Polish language file version To display the version of Polish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Portuguese language file version To display the version of Portuguese language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Russian language file version To display the version of Russian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Slovenian language file version To display the version of Slovenian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-13

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION LANG-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Display of Swedish language file version To display the version of Swedish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Bulgarian language file version To display the version of Bulgarian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Croatian language file version To display the version of Croatian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Romanian language file version To display the version of Romanian language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Slovak language file version To display the version of Slovak language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Turkish language file version To display the version of Turkish language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-14

MEAP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range OCR-CN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range OCR-JP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range OCR-KR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range OCR-TW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range TTS-JA Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range TTS-EN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of MEAP contents version To display the version of MEAP contents in HDD. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese OCR version: simplified To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified). “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Japanese OCR version To display the version of Japanese OCR. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Korean OCR version To display the version of Korean OCR. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese OCR version: traditional To display the version of Chinese OCR (traditional). “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Japanese voice dictionary ver To display the version of Japanese voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of English voice dictionary version To display the version of English voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-14

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION TTS-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range TTS-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range TTS-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range TTS-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range WEB-BRWS Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range HELP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of Italian voice dictionary version To display the version of Italian voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of French voice dictionary version To display the version of French voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Spanish voice dictionary version To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of German voice dictionary version To display the version of German voice dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Web browser version To display the version of Web browser. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of easy NAVI version To display the version of “EASY NAVI” file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) Version should be displayed for EASY NAVI function because it is an external file. 00.01 to 99.99 EASY NAVI function is equipped as standard instead of the conventional HELP function.

8

8-15

LANG-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range WEBDAV Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range TIMESTMP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ASR-JA Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ASR-EN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo MEDIA-JA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-EN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of Catalan language file version To display the version of Catalan language file. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of WebDAV version To display the version of “WebDAV” file. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of timestamp version To display the version of “Time Stamp” file. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Japanese ASR dictionary version To display the version of Japanese automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition (voice recognition) Dspl of English ASR dictionary version To display the version of English automatic speech recognition dictionary. “--.--” is displayed when no file is found. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition (voice recognition) Dspl of Japanese media information ver To display the version of Japanese media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of English media information ver To display the version of English media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-15

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION MEDIA-DE Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-IT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-FR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of German media information version To display the version of German media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Italian media information ver To display the version of Italian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of French media information version To display the version of French media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese media info version: smpl To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Slovak media information version To display the version of Slovak media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Turkish media information ver To display the version of Turkish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Czech media information version To display the version of Czech media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Greek media information version To display the version of Greek media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-16

MEDIA-ES Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Spanish media information ver To display the version of Spanish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Estonian media information ver To display the version of Estonian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Finnish media information ver To display the version of Finnish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Hungarian media information ver To display the version of Hungarian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Korean media information version To display the version of Korean media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Dutch media information version To display the version of Dutch media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Norwegian media information ver To display the version of Norwegian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Polish media information version To display the version of Polish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-16

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION MEDIA-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range MEDIA-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of Portuguese media information ver To display the version of Portuguese media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Russian media information ver To display the version of Russian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Slovenian media information ver To display the version of Slovenian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Swedish media information ver To display the version of Swedish media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Chinese media info version: trad To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver To display the version of Bulgarian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Croatian media information ver To display the version of Croatian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Romanian media information ver To display the version of Romanian media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-17

MEDIA-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range FAX1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range FAX2/3/4 Lv.1 Details Use case Display/adj/set range IOCS Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SYSTEM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ROOT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range S-LNG-JP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range S-LNG-EN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of Catalan media information ver To display the version of Catalan media information. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB. Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) ASCII character string (21 digits) Dspl of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB ROM version To display the ROM version of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB. “NULL” is displayed if the PCB is not connected. When upgrading the firmware ASCII character string (21 digits) Display of BIOS version To display the BIOS version. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ROOT version To display the ROOT version. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode English file ver To display the version of English language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-17

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION S-LNG-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range S-LNG-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range S-LNG-GR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range S-LNG-SP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range UI-RES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of service mode French file version To display the version of French language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Italian file ver To display the version of Italian language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode German file version To display the version of German language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of service mode Spanish file ver To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UI resource file version To display the UIRES version. UIRES consists of the resource file which is necessary to display the native screen (top screen and software keyboard screen) of UI. When checking the version at the time of downloading UIRES to MFP N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of COPY (JAVA UI) version To display the version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of SEND (JAVA UI) version To display the version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX (JAVA UI) version To display the version of BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-18

MOBPR-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range RPTL-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range TSP-JLK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-FR Lv.1 Details

Display of mobile print(JAVA UI) version To display the version of the mobile print application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of RUI portal version To display the RUI portal version. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful func introduce appli ver To display the version of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of PCAM Option Board version To display the version of the PCAM Option Board. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli French file version To display the French language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range Dspl of COPY appli Italian file version COPY-IT To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA Lv.1 Details UI). When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range Dspl of COPY appli German file version COPY-DE To display the German language file version of COPY application Lv.1 Details (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

8-18

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION COPY-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of COPY appli Spanish file version To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Chinese file ver:smpl To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Chinese file ver:trad To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Korean file version To display the Korean language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of COPY appli Czech file version To display the Czech language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Danish file version To display the Danish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of COPY appli Greek file version To display the Greek language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-19

COPY-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of COPY appli Estonian file version To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Finnish file version To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Hungarian file ver To display the Hungarian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of COPY appli Dutch file version To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Norwegian file ver To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Polish file version To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Portuguese file ver To display the Portuguese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-19

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION COPY-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of COPY appli Russian file version To display the Russian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Slovenian file ver To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Swedish file version To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Indonesian file ver To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Bulgarian file ver To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Croatian file version To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Romanian file version To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-20

COPY-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range COPY-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of COPY appli Slovak file version To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Turkish file version To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of COPY appli Thai file version To display the Thai language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli French file version To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Italian file version To display the Italian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-20

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION SEND-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of SEND appli German file version To display the German language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Spanish file version To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Chinese file ver:smpl To display the simplified Chinese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Chinese file ver:trad To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Korean file version To display the Korean language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of SEND appli Czech file version To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Danish file version To display the Danish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-21

SEND-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of SEND appli Greek file version To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Estonian file version To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Finnish file version To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Hungarian file ver To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of SEND appli Dutch file version To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Norwegian file ver To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Polish file version To display the Polish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-21

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION SEND-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of SEND appli Portuguese file ver To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Russian file version To display the Russian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Slovenian file ver To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Swedish file version To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Indonesian file ver To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Bulgarian file ver To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Croatian file version To display the Croatian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-22

SEND-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of SEND appli Romanian file version To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Slovak file version To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Turkish file version To display the Turkish language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Catalan file version To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of SEND appli Thai file version To display the Thai language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of usful feat intro French file ver To display the version of French language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-22

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION INTRO-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl useful feat intro Italian file ver To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of usful feat intro German file ver To display the version of German language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Spanish file ver To display the version of Spanish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Useful feat intro Chinese file ver: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Useful feat intro Chinese file ver: trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of usful feat intro Korean file ver To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful feat intro Czech file ver To display the version of Czech language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-23

INTRO-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of usful feat intro Danish file ver To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful feat intro Greek file ver To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Estonian file ver To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Finnish file ver To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl usful feat intro Hungarian file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful feat intro Dutch file ver To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl usful feat intro Norwegian file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-23

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION INTRO-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of usful feat intro Polish file ver To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Useful feat intro Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Russian file ver To display the version of Russian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl usful feat intro Slovenian file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Swedish file ver To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of useful feat intro Indon file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl usful feat intro Bulgarian file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-24

INTRO-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range INTRO-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl useful feat intro Croatian file ver To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Romanian file ver To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of usful feat intro Slovak file ver To display the version of Slovak language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Turkish file ver To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Catalan file ver To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl useful feat intro Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Useful feat intro Vietnamese file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-24

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION CSTMN-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of custom menu French file version To display the version of French language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu German file version To display the version of German language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver: trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-25

CSTMN-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Estonian file ver To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Hungarian file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-25

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION CSTMN-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Norwegian file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Slovenian file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-26

CSTMN-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range CSTMN-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Bulgarian file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Croatian file ver To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Romanian file ver To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of custom menu Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of custom menu Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-26

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION CSTMN-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of custom menu Vietnamese file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility French file ver To display the version of French language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Italian file ver To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility German file ver To display the version of German language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Spanish file ver To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl accessibility Chinese file ver:smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl accessibility Chinese file ver:trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-27

ACSBT-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of accessibility Korean file ver To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Danish file ver To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Estonian file ver To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Finnish file ver To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Hungarian file ver To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-27

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION ACSBT-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of accessibility Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Norwegian file ver To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Polish file ver To display the version of Polish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl accessibility Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Russian file ver To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Slovenian file ver To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Swedish file ver To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-28

ACSBT-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl accessibility Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Bulgarian file ver To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Croatian file ver To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Romanian file ver To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl accessibility Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Turkish file ver To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of accessibility Catalan file ver To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-28

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION ACSBT-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ACSBT-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ERS-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of accessibility Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl accessibility Vietnamese file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of ERS French file version To display the version of French language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS German file version To display the version of German language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Dspl of ERS Chinese file version: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System

8

8-29

ERS-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of ERS Chinese file version: trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Estonian file version To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System

8-29

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION ERS-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Display of ERS Hungarian file version To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Norwegian file version To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System

8

8-30

ERS-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of ERS Slovenian file version To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Bulgarian file version To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Croatian file version To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Romanian file version To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System

8-30

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION ERS-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ERS-VN Lv.2 Details

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Display of ERS Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 ERS: Error Recovery System Display of ERS Vietnamese file version To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS application. When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range ERS: Error Recovery System Supplement/memo Display of UAC French file version NLS-FR To display the version of French language file for UAC application. Lv.1 Details When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range UAC:User Access Control Supplement/memo Display of UAC Italian file version NLS-IT To display the version of Italian language file for UAC application. Lv.1 Details When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range UAC:User Access Control Supplement/memo

8

8-31

NLS-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of UAC German file version To display the version of German language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Dspl of UAC Chinese file version: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Dspl of UAC Chinese file version: trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control

8-31

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION NLS-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-HU Lv.2 Details

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Display of UAC Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Estonian file version To display the version of Estonian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Hungarian file version To display the version of Hungarian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range UAC:User Access Control Supplement/memo Display of UAC Dutch file version NLS-NL To display the version of Dutch language file for UAC application. Lv.2 Details When upgrading the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display/adj/set range UAC:User Access Control Supplement/memo

8

8-32

NLS-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of UAC Norwegian file version To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Portuguese file version To display the version of Portuguese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Slovenian file version To display the version of Slovenian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control

8-32

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION NLS-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Display of UAC Indonesian file version To display the version of Indonesian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Bulgarian file version To display the version of Bulgarian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Croatian file version To display the version of Croatian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Romanian file version To display the version of Romanian language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control

8

8-33

NLS-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo BCT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ASR-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ASR-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ASR-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ASR-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range LANG-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of UAC Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of self diagnosis tool version To display the version of self diagnosis tool. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Spanish voice dictionary version To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of French voice dictionary version To display the version of French voice dictionary. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Italian voice dictionary version To display the version of Italian voice dictionary. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of German voice dictionary version To display the version of German voice dictionary. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of Thai language file version To display the version of Thai language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of Vietnamese language file version To display the version of Vietnamese language file. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-33

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION BOX-FR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-IT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-DE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-ES Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-ZH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-TW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-KO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Display of BOX appli French file version To display the version of French language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Italian file version To display the version of Italian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli German file version To display the version of German language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Spanish file version To display the version of Spanish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver: smpl To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver: trad To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Korean file version To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-34

BOX-CS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-DA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-EL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-ET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-FI Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-HU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-NL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Display of BOX appli Czech file version To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Danish file version To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Greek file version To display the version of Greek language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Estonian file version To display the version of Estonian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Finnish file version To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Hungarian file version To display the version of Hungarian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Dutch file version To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-34

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION BOX-NO Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-PL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-PT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-RU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-SL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-SV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-ID Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION

Dspl of BOX appli Norwegian file version To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Polish file version To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Portuguese file ver To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Russian file version To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Slovenian file version To display the version of Slovenian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Swedish file version To display the version of Swedish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8

8-35

BOX-BU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-CR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-RM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-SK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-TK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-CA Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BOX-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

Dspl of BOX appli Bulgarian file version To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Croatian file version To display the version of Croatian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Romanian file version To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Slovak file version To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Turkish file version To display the version of Turkish language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Dspl of BOX appli Catalan file version To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of BOX appli Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99

8-35

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

8-36

COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION BOX-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range WSDS-AP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range NLS-TH Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo NLS-VN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo

Dspl of BOX appli Vietnamese file ver To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of WSD-SCAN (JAVA UI) version To display the version of WSD-SCAN application (JAVA UI). When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 Display of UAC Thai file version To display the version of Thai language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control Display of UAC Vietnamese file version To display the version of Vietnamese language file for UAC application. When upgrading the firmware N/A (Display only) 00.01 to 99.99 UAC:User Access Control T-8-3

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION

8-36

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

■■USER

■■ACC-STS COPIER>DISPLAY>USER

SPDTYPE

8-37 COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS

FEEDER

Display of Ctrollr Board engine speed type

Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range BRWS-STS Lv.1 Details

To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board. When checking the engine speed type of Controller Board N/A (Display only) 25 to 51 Display of service browser use status To display the use status of the browser for service engineers in the service mode initial screen. Go to COPIER> FUCNTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT to turn ON/ OFF the browser for service engineers. When checking the operation mode of the browser for service Use case engineers Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 1 to 2 Display/adj/set range 1: ON (Available), 2: OFF (Not available) Related service mode COPIER> FUCNTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT T-8-4

8

Display of DADF connection state

Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

To display the connecting state of DADF. When checking the connection between the machine and DADF N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Display of connect state of Finisher-related option SORTER To display the connecting state of Finisher-related options. Lv.1 Details When checking the connection of Finisher-related options Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) Left column (connecting state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 2 Display/adj/set range 1: Without Saddle 2: With SaddleRight column (connecting state of Finisher-belonged Punch Unit): 0 to 4 0: no hole, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4-hole (SW) Display of Paper Deck connection state DECK To display the connecting state of the Paper Deck. Lv.1 Details When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper Use case Decks Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 0 to 5 0: Not connected, 1: Connected, 2 to 4: Not used, 5: MultiDisplay/adj/set range purpose Tray only Display of connection state of Card Reader CARD To display the connecting state of Card Reader. Lv.1 Details When checking the connection between the machine and the Card Use case Reader Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is not available.) 1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is available.)

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

8-37

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS DATA-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range RAM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Unit COINROBO Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range NIB Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range PS/PCL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS

Display of NE Controller connection state To display the connecting state of NE Controller. When checking the connection between the machine and the NE Controller N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Display of MNCON PCB memory capacity To display the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB. When checking the memory capacity of the machine N/A (Display only) MB Display of Coin Manager connection state To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager. When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin Manager N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not connected, 1: Connected Display of Network PCB connection state To display the connecting state of the Network PCB. When checking the connection between the machine and the Network PCB N/A (Display only) 0 to 3 0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet PCB connected, 2: Token Ring PCB connected, 3: Ethernet PCB + Token Ring PCB connected Install state dspl of PS/PCL firmware To display the installation state of PS/PCL firmware. When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 2 0: Not installed, 1: PS/PCL, 2: PS Kanji

8

8-38

NETWARE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SEND Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range HDD Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method PCI1 PCI2 PCI3 IA-RAM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Unit

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS

Display of NetWare firmware install state To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware. When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Display of SEND support PCB existence To display whether there is PCB to support SEND function. SEND function can be used only when the PCB is mounted. When checking the connection between the machine and the PCB that supports SEND function N/A (Display only) 0 to 1 0: Not mounted, 1: Mounted Display of HDD model name To display the model name of HDD. When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine N/A (Display only) [Not used] [Not used] [Not used] Display of MNCON PCB memory(IA) capacity To display the memory (IA) capacity of the Main Controller PCB. When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB N/A (Display only) MB T-8-5

8-38

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

■■ANALOG

COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG FIX-C Lv.1 Details

COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG TEMP

Display of inside temperature

Lv.1 Details

To display the temperature inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor. When checking the temperature inside the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 60 deg C 20 - 27 COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, ABS-HUM Display of inside humidity To display the humidity inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor. When checking the humidity inside the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 100 % 30 - 70 COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, ABS-HUM Display of inside moisture content To display the absolute moisture content inside the machine detected by Environment Sensor. When checking the moisture content inside the machine N/A (Display only) 0 to 100 g (g/m3) 0 - 22 COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, HUM

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Appropriate target value Related service mode HUM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Appropriate target value Related service mode ABS-HUM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Appropriate target value Related service mode

8-39

8

Display of Fixing Roller center temperature To display the center temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor. When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Roller Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 0 to 999 Display/adj/set range deg C Unit Display of Fixing Roller edge temperature FIX-E To display the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Lv.1 Details Fixing Sub Thermistor 1. Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 is located in the rear nip inlet side of Fixing Roller. When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 0 to 999 Display/adj/set range deg C Unit Display of Fixing Roller edge temperature 2 FIX-UE2 To display the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the Lv.1 Details Fixing Sub Thermistor 2. Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 is located in the rear nip inlet side of Fixing Roller. When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 0 to 999 Display/adj/set range deg C Unit

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

T-8-6

8-39

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

■■CST-STS

8-40

■■CCD COPIER>DISPLAY>CST-STS

COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD

WIDTH-MF

Display of Multi-purpose Tray paper width size

TARGET-B

Shading target value (B)

Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Unit

To display the paper width size set on the Multi-purpose Tray. When checking the paper width side set on the Multi-purpose Tray N/A (Display only) mm

Lv.2 Details

To display the shading target value of Blue. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is considered a failure of the CCD unit (CCD PCB). - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB) - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 512 - 2047 Shading target value (G) To display the shading target value of Green. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is considered a failure of the CCD unit (CCD PCB). - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB) - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 512 - 2047 Shading target value (R) To display the shading target value of Red. Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is considered a failure of the CCD unit (CCD PCB). - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB) - At scanned image failure N/A (Display only) 0 to FFFF 512 - 2047 CCD offset level adj value (blue) To display the CCD offset level value for blue When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 CCD offset level adj value (green) To display the CCD offset level value for green When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255

T-8-7

■■HV-STS COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS PRIMARY

Display of primary charging current

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TARGET-G Lv.2 Details

Lv.1 Details

To display the current that is applied to the Primacy Charging Assembly at the latest. When checking ON/OFF of potential control Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) 0 to 2000 Display/adj/set range Micro A Unit Display of transfer current: Plain, 1st side TR To display the current that is applied to plain paper (1st side) in the Lv.1 Details Pre-transfer Charging Assembly at the latest. For checking Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) Micro A Unit Display of developing DC bias setting value BIAS To display the setting value of developing DC bias. Lv.1 Details For checking Use case Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) V Unit T-8-8

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value TARGET-R Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value OFST-B Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value OFST-G Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

8-40

8

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR

COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD OFST-R Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value OFST-O Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value OFST-E Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value GAIN-B Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value GAIN-G Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value GAIN-R Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value GAIN-O Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value

8-41 COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD

CCD offset level adj value (red) To display the CCD offset level value for red When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 CCD offset level adj value in odd bit To display the offset level in odd bit on CCD When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 CCD offset level adj value in even bit To display the offset level in even bit on CCD When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 CCD gain level adjustment value (blue) To display the CCD gain level value for blue When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 CCD gain level adjustment value (green) To display the CCD gain level value for green When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 CCD gain level adjustment value (red) To display the CCD gain level value for red When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 CCD gain level adj value in odd bit To display the gain level in odd bit on CCD When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255

8

GAIN-E Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value MFIL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value SFIL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Appropriate target value

CCD gain level adj value in even bit To display the gain level in even bit on CCD When image failure is caused by CCD, check whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 MTF adj index: main scanning direction Display of MTF adjustment for the main scanning direction When the image fault is caused by CCD, ensure whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 MTF adj index: sub scanning direction Display of MTF adjustment for the sun scanning direction When the image fault is caused by CCD, ensure whether the adjustment value is proper or not. N/A (Display only) 0 - 255 T-8-9

■■SENSOR COPIER>DISPLAY>SENSOR DOC-SZ

Dspl size detect by Original Size Sensr

Lv.2 Details Use case

To display the original size detected by Original Size Sensor. When checking whether the machine detects the paper on Copyboard Glass correctly Adj/set/operate method 1) Place the original on Copyboard Glass. 2) Close the Copyboard Cover/DADF. 3) Select the item. Unless the Copyboard Cover/DADF is closed, this is not displayed Caution correctly. A, B, L configuration size Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR

T-8-10

8-41

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

I/O ■■Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016) Main Body Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1 Buffer Pass Unit-H1 Paper Deck Unit-B2 bit

Name

Symbol

Remarks

P001

15

Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 4 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 3 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 2 Cassette 1 Paper Length Detection Switch 1 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 4 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 3 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 2 Cassette 1 Paper Width Detection Switch 1 Pre-Registration Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A

S35

Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual.

Loop Sensor Duplex Feed Sensor Not used

S6 S7

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

2 1 0

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P002

15

Manual Feeder Paper Sensor Exhaust Fan (Front) Lock Detect Signal Exhaust Fan (Rear) Lock Detect Signal Reversal Sensor No.2 Delivery Full Sensor No.2 Delivery Sensor No.1 Delivery Full Sensor No.1 Delivery Sensor Wste Toner Sensor Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Connect Detect Signal Sub Hopper Toner Sensor Sub Hopper Toner Sensor Connect Detect Signal Hopper Motor Error Detct Signal Bottle Motor Error Detct Signal Paper Cooling Fan Lock Detect Signal

S9

14 13

Address

S30

S5 S1 S2 S3 S4

Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual. 0:Paper presence 0:Paper presence Detect paper level by combination of 3 sensors 0: ON 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual 1:Paper presence 1:Paper presence

8

8-42

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5

4 3 2 1 0

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

Remarks 0:Paper presence

FM4

0:Lock

FM3

0:Lock

S24 S23 S22 S20 S21 S17 S25

1:Paper presence 0:Non-full 1:Paper presence 0:Non-full 1:Paper presence 1:Full 1:Toner presence

S25

0:Not connect

S26 S26

1:Toner presence 0:Not connect

M16

1:Error

M17

1:Error

FM7

0:Lock

8-42

8 Address

bit

Name

P003

15 14

For R&D use Buffer Pass Motor Drive Permission Signal For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Bottle Motor Error Latch Release Signal Cassette 1 Pickup Motor Drive Permission Signal Duplex Feed Motor Drive Permission Signal No.1 Delivery Motor Drive Permission Signal For R&D use For R&D use Hopper Motor Drive Signal Bottle Motor Drive Signal Paper Cooling Fan Half Speed Drive Signal Paper Cooling Fan Full Speed Drive Signal

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Symbol M3

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

Remarks 1:Drive permission

Address

bit

Name

P004

15 14 13

For R&D use For R&D use Reversal Motor Drive Permission Signal Exhaust Fan Half Speed Drive Signal Exhaust Fan Full Speed Drive Signal Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid Drive Signal For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Manual Feed Pickup Clutch Drive Signal Developing Cylinder Clutch Drive Signal Registration Clutch Drive Signal Cassette 1 Pickup Solenoid Drive Signal Fixing Motor Break Signal Main Motor Break Signal

12 11 M17

1:Latch release

M13

0:Drive permission

M9

0:Drive permission

M10

0:Drive permission

10 9 8 7 6 5 4

M16 M17 FM7

1:Drive 1:Drive 1:Half speed drive

FM7

1:Full speed drive

8

3 2 1 0

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

8-43 Symbol

Remarks

M20

1:Drive permission

FM3/4

1:Half speed drive

FM3/4

1:Full speed drive

SL2

1:Drive

CL12

1:Drive

CL1

1:Drive

CL3

1:Drive

SL1

1:Drive

M2 M1

1:Brake 1:Brake

8-43

8 Address

bit

Name

P005

15 14 13 12 11 10

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Laser Scanner Unit Connection Detection For R&D use Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Front) Lock Detect Signal Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Rear) Lock Detect Signal Paper Edge Shutter HP Sensor Fixing Outlet Sensor Polygon Motor Speed Lock Detect Signal Main Body Cooling Fan Lock Detect Signal Fixing Motor Speed Lock Detect Signal Main Motor Speed Lock Detect Signal Cassette Cover Sensor Open/Close Detect Signal

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

Symbol

Remarks

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P006

15

Buffer Pass Unit Connection Detection Buffer Pass Paper Out Sensor Buffer Pass Paper In Sensor Buffer Pass Open Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Sensor Cassette 2 Paper Sensor Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A

-

14 13 -

0:Connect

FM2

0:Lock

FM1

0:Lock

S10

0:HP

S19 M11

0:Paper absence 0:Lock

FM6

0:Lock

M2

1:Lock

M1

1:Lock

S39

0:Open

12 11 10 9 8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

8-44

Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 4 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 3 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 2 Cassette 2 Paper Width Detection Switch 1 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 4 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 3 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 2 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch 1

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

Remarks 0:Connect

SR3

1:Paper absence

SR2

1:Paper absence

SR1 S33 S31 S34

0:Open 1:Paper presence Detect paper level by combination of 3 sensors 0: ON 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual.

S32

S28

S29

Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual.

8-44

8 Address

bit

P007

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch 4 Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch 3 Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch 2 Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch 1 Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch 4 Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch 3 Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch 2 Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch 1 Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch 4 Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch 3 Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch 2 Cassette 4 Paper Width Detection Switch 1 Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch 4 Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch 3 Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch 2 Cassette 4 Paper Length Detection Switch 1

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

8-45

Symbol

Remarks

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

SW102

Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual.

P008

15

Cassette 2 Pickup Solenoid Drive Signal Fixing Film Cooling Fan Half Speed Drive Signal Cassette 2 Pickup Motor Drive Permission Signal For R&D use For R&D use Fixing Film Cooling Fan Full Speed Drive Signal For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use

SL11

1:Drive

FM1/2

1:Drive

SW101

Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual.

SW104

Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual.

SW103

Detect paper size by combination of 4 switches 0: ON (Condition that the switch is pressed) 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual.

8

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

M3

FM1/2

Remarks

0:Drive permission

1:Drive

8-45

8 Address

bit

P009

15 14 13

12 11 10 9

8 7

6 5 4 3

P010

P011

2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

Symbol

Remarks

Address

bit

Name

Cassette 3 Paper Sensor Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor A Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor B

PS102 PS104

P012

7 6 5

Cassette 3 Retry Sensor Cassette 4 Paper Sensor Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor A Cassette 4 Paper Level Sensor B

PS108 PS103 PS106

Detect paper level by combination of 3 sensors 0: ON 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual 1:Paper presence Detect paper level by combination of 3 sensors 0: ON 1: OFF As for the combination, refer to the Pickup/Feed System in Service Manual 1:Paper presence 0:Open

For R&D use For R&D use Fixing Main Thermistor Connect Detect Siganal For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Enviorment Heater Connect Detect Siganal Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Error Detect Signal For R&D use Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Error Detect Signal Fixing Main Thermistor Error Detect Signal Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor Toner Cover Open/Closed Sensor For R&D use Main Switch/Front Door Switch For R&D use Deck Lifter Motor Drive Signal Deck Pickup Clutch Drive Signal Deck Pickup Roller Release Solenoid Drive Signal For R&D use Hopper Motor Error Latch Signal Main Body Cooling Fan Half Speed Drive Signal Main Body Cooling Fan Full Speed Drive Signal

Cassette 4 Retry Sensor Pedestal Right Cover Sensor Open/Close Detect Signal Not used Paper Deck Connection Detection Deck Paper Level Sensor Deck Paper Replenishing Position Sensor Deck Pickup Sensor Deck Paper-out Sensor Deck Open Switch For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Deck Open Solenoid Drive Signal For R&D use Polygon Motor Drive Signal Fixing Motor Drive Signal Main Motor Drive Signal Enviorment Heater Drive Signal For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Relay Drive Signal

PS105

PS107

PS109 PS101

4 3 2 1 0 P013

7 6 5 4 3

-

2

1:Separation From the Host Machine

PS7D PS8D

1:Paper absence 1:Paper absence

PS6D PS2D SW100D

0:Paper presence 1:Paper absence 1:Push

1 0 P014

7 6 5 4

SL2D

M11 M2 M1

-

1:Drive

1:Drive 1:Drive 1:Drive 1:Heater OFF

3 2 1 0

8-46 Symbol

Remarks

TH1

0:Connect

S16

0:Connect

TH3

1:Normal

TH2

1:Normal

TH1

1:Normal

S18

1:Close

S46

1:Close

SW1/SW2 1:Open

M2D

1:Drive

CL2D

1:Drive

SL1D

1:Drive

M16

1:Latch release

FM6

1:Drive

FM6

1:Drive

0:Relay ON

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Main Body_DC controller (DC-CON>P001 to P016)

8-46

8 Address

bit

Name

P015

7 6 5 4 3

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Cassette 3 Pickup Motor Drive Permission Signal Cassette 4 Pickup Motor Drive Permission Signal Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid Drive Signal Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid For R&D use For R&D use Deck Lifter Lower Limit Sensing Switch Deck Lifter Upper Limit Sensor Deck Lifter Position Sensor Deck Feed Sensor Not used Deck Open Sensor

2 1 0 P016

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P008)

Symbol

■■Reader (R-CON>P001 to P008)

Remarks

Address P001 M101

1:Drive permission

M102

1:Drive permission

SL102

1:Drive

SL101

1:Drive

0:Lower limit

PS3D

0:Upper limit

PS4D PS1D

0:Lifter position 0:Paper presence

PS9D

1:Open

bit

Name

Symbol SR2 S13

1: Paper presence 1: 0-15 degrees

S12

1: 5-25 degrees

M14

0: CW

M14

1:Output stop

4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7

ADF Read Sensor Copyboard Cover Open/ Closed Sensor (rear) Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor (front) Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use Reader Motor Rotatory Direction Change Signal Not used Reader Motor Output Enable Signal Reader Motor Standby Signal Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use Original Size Sensor 1

M14

0:Stop

S15

6

Original Size Sensor 2

S14

0: Paper presence or copy board closed 0: Paper presence or copy board closed

5 4 3 2 1

Not used Not used Not used Not used CCD Unit Flexible Cable Connection Detection Signal Not used

7 6 5

P002 SW2D

4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5

T-8-11

P003

P004

0

8

8-47

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P008)

Remarks

1: Incorrect connection

8-47

8 Address P005

P006

P007

P008

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name For R&D use ADF Registration Sensor Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used For R&D use Not used Not used For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Symbol SR1

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > DADF-AG1 FEEDER > P001 to P009

■■DADF-AG1 FEEDER > P001 to P009

Remarks 1: Paper presence

Address

bit

P001

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2

P002

P003

P004

T-8-12

P005

P006 P007 P008

8

8-48

1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0to7 0to15 0to15

Name Not used Not used Not used Not used Delivery reversal sensor Read sensor Registration sensor Timing sensor Registration Clutch Drive Pick up Clutch Drive Not used Not used Not used Stamp Solenoid Drive Fan Motor Drive Document Detection LED Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used ADF Fan Motor Lock Siganal Not used Not used Not used Not used A4R/LTRR Sensor Empty Sensor Not used Cover Open/Closed Sensor Release Motor HP Sensor Document Length Sensor 2 Document Length Sensor 1 For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > DADF-AG1 FEEDER > P001 to P009

Symbol

Remarks

SR3 SR2 SR1 SR4 CL2 CL1

1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence 1: ON 1: ON

SL2

1: ON

FM1 PCB3

1: ON 1: ON

FM1

1: Lock

SR8 SR5

1: A4R 0: Paper presence

SR6 SR11 SR10 SR7

0: Open 1: HP 1: Paper presence 1: Paper presence

8-48

8 Address

bit

P009

0to15

Name

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

Symbol

■■Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to

Remarks

For R&D use T-8-13

P031 Address

bit

P001

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P002

P003

P004

P005

8

8-49

Name Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 Not used For R&D use For R&D use Front Cover Open/Close Sensor Saddle Unit Detection For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used For R&D use Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Punch Paper Detection(Rear) Not used Not used Punch Unit Connect Signal For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

Symbol

Remarks

PI120

0:Paper present

PI102

0:Open 0: Present

1: Detection

0: Connect

8-49

8 Address

bit

P006

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

P007

P008

P009

P010

Name Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Tray 1 Shift Motor Lock Signal For R&D use For R&D use Front Cover Open/Close Switch Tray2 Shift Area Sensor 1 Tray2 Shift Area Sensor 2 Tray2 Shift Area Sensor 3 Inlet sensor Swing Guide HP Sensor For R&D use Not used Not used Tray 1 Paper Sensor For R&D use For R&D use Tray1 Shift Area Sensor 1 Tray1 Shift Area Sensor 2 Tray1 Shift Area Sensor 3 Tray 2 Shift Motor Lock Signal Tray 2 Paper Sensor For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

Remarks

Address

bit

P011

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6

P012

M107

1: Lock

MS101 PCB5 PCB5 PCB5 PI103 PI105

1:Open 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0:Paper present 1: HP

PI111

0:Paper present

PCB4 PCB4 PCB4 M108 PI112

0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: Lock 0:Paper present

P013

P014

5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

8

Name For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Swing Height Sensor Not used Upper Cover Sensor Rear End Assist HP Sensor Processing Tray Sensor Rear Aligning Plate HP Sensor Front Aligning Plate HP Sensor For R&D use Tray 2 Shift Motor ON Tray 2 Shift Motor Direction Change Signal Feed Roller Separation Solenoid Punch Motor Standby For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Tray 1 Shift Motor Direction Change Signal Tray 1 Shift Motor ON For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Rear End Assist Motor Direction Change Signal Not used

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

8-50 Symbol

Remarks

PI123

1:Open

PI101 PI109 PI108 PI107 PI106

0:Open 0: HP 1:Paper present 1: HP 1: HP

M108 M108

0: ON 0: CW 1: CCW

SL101

1: ON 0: Standby

M107

0: CW 1: CCW

M107

0: ON

M109

0: CW 1: CCW

8-50

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

Address

bit

Name

Symbol

P015

7

Staple Motor Direction Change Signal (CW) Staple Motor Direction Change Signal (CCW) For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Stack Ejection Motor Direction Change Signal For R&D use Swing Motor Direction Change Signal Not used Eaer Aligning Plate Motor Direction Change Signal For R&D use For R&D use Not used For R&D use Front aligning plate motor Direction Change Signal For R&D use Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 1 Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor Shutter HP Sensor Stapler Shift HP Sensor Stapler Alignment Interference Sensor Staple Existence Staple READY Staple HP Detection Stapler Shift Motor Direction Change Signal Buffer Roller Separation Solenoid Shutter Clutch Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch Buffer Rear End Holding Solenoid 1st Delivery Roller Separation Solenoid For R&D use For R&D use

M111

1: ON

M111

1: ON

M102

0: CW 1: CCW

6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P016

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P017

P018

0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Remarks

Address

bit

Name

P019

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3

Not used Feed Path Sensor Swing Guide Lock Signal Staple Lock Signal Not used Not used Not used For R&D use Alignment Plate HP Sensor Not used Not used Not used Saddle Stapl Unit Connect Detection Vertical Path Paper Sensor Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Stitcher HP Sensor (Rear) Stitcher HP Sensor (Front) Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used For R&D use For R&D use Feed Motor Direction Change Signal For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used

P020 M106

0: CW 1: CCW

M104

0: CW 1: CCW

P021 M103

0: CW 1: CCW

PI115 PI114 PI113 PI110 PI116

0:Paper present 0:Paper present 0: HP 0: HP 0:Interference

M105

1:Staple present 1: Standby 1: HP 0: CCW 1: CW

SL102 CL101 CL102

1: ON 1: ON 1: ON

SL104 SL103

1: ON 1: ON

8

P022

P023

2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

8-51 Symbol

Remarks

PI104 MSW32 MSW104

0:Paper present 1: Lock 1: Lock

PI5

1: HP

0: Connect PI17

1:Paper present

SW5 SW7 PI15

1: HP 1: HP 0: ON

PI14

1: HP

M1

0: CCW 1: CW

8-51

8 Address

bit

P024

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3

P025

P026

P027

2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P028

0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Not used Not used No.2 Paper Deflecting Solenoid No.1 Paper Deflecting Solenoid Saddle Inlet Solenoid Paper Folding HP Sensor For R&D use For R&D use Not used For R&D use Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Stitcher Motor (Rear) Direction Change Signal (CW) Not used Staple Sensor (Rear) 24V Detection Not used Feed Plate Contact Solenoid Paper Folding Motor RV For R&D use For R&D use Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor Paper Positioning Plate HP Sensor Tray Paper Sensor Paper Pushing Plate Motor EN Paper Pushing Plate Motor FWD Paper Pushing Plate Motor RV Paper Folding Motor FWD Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

Symbol

SL2 SL1 SL5 PI21

Remarks

Address

bit

P029

7 6 5 4

1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON

3

P030

P031 M6

0: ON

SW4

1:Staple present 0: ON

SL4 M2

1: ON 1: ON

PI8

0:Paper present

PI7

0: HP

PI6 M8 M8 M8 M2

0:Paper present 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON

8

2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name Stitcher Motor (Rear) Direction Change Signal CCW For R&D use For R&D use Stitcher Motor (Front) Direction Change Signal CW Stitcher Motor (Front) Direction Change Signal CCW Staple Sensor (Front) Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Saddle Inlet Sensor Guide HP Sensor Crescent Roller Phase Sensor Delivery Sensor Lower Right Cover Sensor No.3 Paper Sensor No.2 Paper Sensor No.1 Paper Sensor

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Staple Finisher-G1/Booklet Finisher-G1 SORTER > P001 to P031

8-52 Symbol

Remarks

M6

0: ON

M7

0: ON

M7

0: ON

SW6

1:Staple present

PI22 PI13 PI12 PI11 PI9 PI20 PI19 PI18

1:Paper present 1: HP 1: HP 0:Paper present 1:Open 1:Paper present 1:Paper present 1:Paper present T-8-14

8-52

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > External 2, 2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher-B2 SORTER > P032 to P037

■■External 2, 2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher-B2 SORTER > P032 to P037 Address

bit

P032

7 6 5

Punch HP sensor For R&D use Rear End Detector Sensor

4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7

For R&D use Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Punch Motor Direction Change Signal (CW) Punch Motor Direction Change Signal (CWW) Horizontal Registration Motor Standby Horizontal Registration HP Sensor For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used

P033

P034

6 5 4

P035

3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Name

Symbol PI63 PCB11/12

Address

bit

Name

P036

7 6 5 4 3 2

For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Front Door Switch For R&D use Horizontal Registration Motor B

1

Horizontal Registration Motor A

0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

For R&D use Not used Not used Upper Door Switch Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Remarks 0: HP 0:Paper presence (LED5,PTR5)

P037

8-53 Symbol

MSW62 M62 M62

MSW61

Remarks

1:open 0:Phase B* ON, 1:Phase B ON 0:Phase A* ON, 1:Phase A ON

0:Open

T-8-15

M61

0: ON

M61

0: ON

M62

0: Standby

PI61

1: HP

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > External 2, 2/3, 2/4, 4 Hole Puncher-B2 SORTER > P032 to P037

8-53

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Inner Finisher-D1/Inner Hole Puncher-A1 SORTER>P001 to P015

■■Inner Finisher-D1/Inner Hole Puncher-A1 SORTER>P001 to P015 Address P001

P002

P003

P004

P005

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7

Name Entrance Sensor Grip Arm Sensor Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Horizontal registration HP

6 5 4 7 6 5

sensor Punch Path Sensor For R&D use For R&D use Not used Scrap Full Detector PCB Photosensor PCB (Rear

4 3 2 1 0

Symbol S1 S13

Address P006

Remarks 1:Paper presence 0: HP

P007

P008

SR1

1: HP

SR3

1:Paper presence

PCB13 PCB11

0: Full 1:Paper presence

Edge of Paper) Punch HP Sensor Additional Tray Clock

SR5 S23

1: HP

Sensor Stack Tray Clock Sensor Stapler Move HP Sensor Stapler HP Sensor

S14 S10 S18

P009

bit 7 6 5

Name Punch Clock Sensor Not used Entrance Roller Release /

4 3

Stopper HP Sensor Gripper Unit HP Sensor Shift Roller Release

2 1 0 7

Sensor Shift roller HP Sensor For R&D use Not used Additional Tray Upper/

6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Lower Lmit Sensor Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use Additional Tray Paper

5 4 3 2 1

Sensor Release Sensor Not used Not used Not used Puncher Unit Connect

0

Detection Not used

8-54

Symbol SR4

Remarks

S5

0: HP

S7 S3

0: Evacuation 1: Release

S2

0: HP

S21

1: Upper or lower limit

S22

1:Paper presence

SR2

1: Release

0: Connect

1: HP 1: HP

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Inner Finisher-D1/Inner Hole Puncher-A1 SORTER>P001 to P015

8-54

8 Address P010

P011

P012

P013

P014

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2

Name Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use For R&D use Stack Tray Paper Sensor Stack Tray Lower Limit

1 0 7 6 5 4

Sensor Stack Tray Middle Sensor Not used Processing Tray Sensor Stapler Safety Switch Not used Gripper Stapler

3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Connection Sensor Not used Front Fan Lock Signal Rear fan Lock Signal Not used For R&D use Not used Paper Surface Sensor 2 Paper Surface Sensor 1 Stapler Edging Sensor Stapler Sensor Not used Front Cover Switch

Symbol

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Inner Finisher-D1/Inner Hole Puncher-A1 SORTER>P001 to P015

Remarks

Address P015

bit 3 2 1 0

Name Not used Not used Not used Not used

Symbol

8-55 Remarks

T-8-16

S15 S17

1:Paper presence 1: Lower limit

S16

1:Paper presence

S6 SW2

1:Paper presence 1: ON

S9

1: Connection

FM1 FM2

1: Lock 1: Lock

S12 S11 S19 S20

1:Paper presence 1:Paper presence 1: Edging 1: No needle

SW1

1: Open

8

Service Mode > COPIER > I/O > Inner Finisher-D1/Inner Hole Puncher-A1 SORTER>P001 to P015

8-55

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

ADJUST

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY ADJ-Y Lv.1 Details

■■AE COPIER>ADJUST>AE AE-TBL

Adj of density at image density adj

Lv.1 Details

To increase/decrease the overall density with a focus on the highlighted area according to the adjustment value.As the value is larger, overall density is increased. When clearing the RAM data of the CCD unit (CCD PCB) Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 9 Display/adj/set range 5 Default value T-8-17

■■ADJ-XY COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY ADJ-X

8-56

Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan

Lv.1 Details

To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in vertical scanning direction. When clearing the RAM data of the CCD unit (CCD PCB), enter the value of service label. When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the larger value. When out of original area is copied, set the smaller value. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the leading edge side by 0.1 mm. When clearing the RAM data of the CCD unit (CCD PCB) Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this at the normal service. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 1 to 100 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 20 Default value

8

Adj of img pstn in book mode: horz scan To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the larger value. When out of original area is copied, set the smaller value. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the front side by 0.1 mm. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. 45 to 254 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 78 Default value Adj pstn to measure data: shading crrct ADJ-S Adjust the position to measure data for shading correction with Lv.1 Details standard white plate. (horizontal scanning direction) When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this at the normal service.After the setting value is Caution changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 500 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 141 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

8-56

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY ADJ-Y-DF Lv.1 Details

COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY

Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[Frt] To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning direction at DADF reading. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the front side by 0.1 mm. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. 45 to 254 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 78 Default value Adj read pstn in DADF mode:vert scan[frt] STRD-POS To adjust the reading position in vertical scanning direction at DADF Lv.1 Details reading (front side). When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. 1 to 200 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit Appropriate target value 70 to 130 100 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS

8

8-57

ADJ-X-MG Lv.1 Details

Adj img ratio in book mod:vert scan[frt] To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification changes by 0.01 %. +: Enlarge -: Reduce When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -50 to 50 Display/adj/set range 0.01 % Unit 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY

T-8-18

8-57

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

■■CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

W-PLT-X Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode W-PLT-Y Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode W-PLT-Z Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode SH-TRGT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-58

White level data(X) entry of white plate When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. When replacing the Copyboard Glass 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this at the normal service. 1 to 9999 8273 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z White level data(Y) entry of white plate When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. When replacing the Copyboard Glass 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 1 to 9999 8737 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z White level data(Z) entry of white plate When replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass. When replacing the Copyboard Glass 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 1 to 9999 9427 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y Shading target value (B&W) [Copyboard] To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data - When replacing the Scanner unit 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 1079

8

50-RG Lv.1 Details

Clr displc offset value dspl (R-G): rear To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displc offset value dspl (G-B): rear 50-GB To correct the color displacement (B and G lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displc offset value dspl (R-G): rear 100-RG To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-58

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

8-59 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

100-GB Lv.1 Details

Clr displc offset value dspl (G-B): rear To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displace offset value display (R-G) 50DF-RG To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at ADF/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displace offset value display (G-B) 50DF-GB To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at ADF/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value

8

100DF-RG Lv.1 Details

Clr displace offset value display (G-R) To correct the color displacement (G and R lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit at ADF/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displace offset value display (G-B) 100DF-GB To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at ADF/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Shading target value (R) DFTAR-R In case of image fault (due to chart soil, etc) after executing: Lv.1 Details COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DFWLVL3/DF-WLVL4, enter the factory measurement value using this mode. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner unit (paper front) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 Display/adj/set range 1063 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-59

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-60

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

DFTAR-G Lv.1 Details

Shading target value (G) In case of image fault (due to chart soil, etc) after executing: COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DFWLVL3/DF-WLVL4, enter the factory measurement value using this mode. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner unit (paper front) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 Display/adj/set range 1075 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 Shading target value (B) DFTAR-B In case of image fault (due to chart soil, etc) after executing: Lv.1 Details COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DFWLVL3/DF-WLVL4, enter the factory measurement value using this mode. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case - When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner unit (paper front) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 Display/adj/set range 1088 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3, DF-WLVL4 Scanner Unit(ppr frt) rplce flag setting CCD-CHNG To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at Lv.1 Details the replacement of Scanner Unit. When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front), enter 1. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. - When replacing the Scanner unit Use case - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: Data at factory shipment is used. 1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit is already replaced.) 0 Default value

DFTAR-K Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode MTF3-M1 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M2 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M3 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M4 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Shading target value (Black) at ADF mode In case of image fault (due to chart soil, etc) after executing: COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DFWLVL1/DF-WLVL2, enter the factory measurement value using this mode. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 2047 1079 COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 MTF setting VL for R: horz scan (front) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: horz scan (center) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: horz scan (rear) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: horz scan (front) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8-60

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-61

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD MTF3-M5 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M6 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M7 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M8 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M9 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

MTF setting VL for G: horz scan (center) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: horz scan (rear) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: horz scan (front) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: horz scan (center) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: horz scan (rear) Enter the value of service label on the CCD unit in the following case. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8

MTF setting VL for K: horz scan (front) MTF3-M10 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M11 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-M12 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S1 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S2 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for K: horz scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for K: horz scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: vert scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: vert scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8-61

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-62

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

MTF setting VL for R: vert scan (rear) MTF3-S3 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S4 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S5 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S6 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S7 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: vert scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: vert scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: vert scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: vert scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8

MTF setting VL for B: vert scan (center) MTF3-S8 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S9 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S10 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S11 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF3-S12 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: vert scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for K: vert scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for K: vert scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for K: vert scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8-62

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-63

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

MTF setting VL for R: horz scan (front) MTF4-M1 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M2 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M3 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M4 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M5 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: horz scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: horz scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: horz scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: horz scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8

MTF setting VL for G: horz scan (rear) MTF4-M6 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M7 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M8 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M9 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M10 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: horz scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: horz scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: horz scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for K: horz scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8-63

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-64

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

MTF setting VL for K: horz scan (center) MTF4-M11 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-M12 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-S1 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-S2 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-S3 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for K: horz scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: vert scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: vert scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for R: vert scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8

MTF setting VL for G: vert scan (front) MTF4-S4 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-S5 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-S6 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-S7 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MTF4-S8 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: vert scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for G: vert scan (rear) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: vert scan (front) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55 MTF setting VL for B: vert scan (center) Not used usually 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 55

8-64

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

8-65 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

MTF setting VL for B: vert scan (rear) MTF4-S9 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 20 to 80 Display/adj/set range 55 Default value MTF setting VL for K: vert scan (front) MTF4-S10 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. 20 to 80 Display/adj/set range 55 Default value MTF setting VL for K: vert scan (center) MTF4-S11 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. 20 to 80 Display/adj/set range 55 Default value MTF setting VL for K: vert scan (rear) MTF4-S12 Not used usually Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. 20 to 80 Display/adj/set range 55 Default value

Caution

8

100-GB-2 Lv.1 Details

Clr displc offset value dspl(G-B):center To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displc offset value dspl(G-B): front 100-GB-3 To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displc offset value dspl(R-G):center 100-RG-2 To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

8-65

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

8-66 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD

100-RG-3 Lv.1 Details

Clr displc offset value dspl(R-G): front To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/100% scanning mode. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displc offset value dspl(G-B):center 50-GB-2 To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displc offset value dspl(G-B): front 50-GB-3 To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value

8

50-RG-2 Lv.1 Details

Clr displc offset value dspl(R-G):center To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value Clr displc offset value dspl(R-G): front 50-RG-3 To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction due to the Scanner Unit at Book/50% scanning mode.When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the service label value packaged in the service parts content. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -256 to 256 Display/adj/set range 0.001 line Unit 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

T-8-19

8-66

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > LASER

■■LASER

COPIER>ADJUST>LASER LDADJ2-K Lv.1 Details

COPIER>ADJUST>LASER PVE-OFST

8-67

Adj of write start position of laser

Lv.1 Details

To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position. As the value is incremented by 1, the image moves by 0.01 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward frontWhen replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. When adjusting image positionUse this only when replacing the DC Use case Controller PCB/Laser Scanner Unit. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -512 to 511 Display/adj/set range 0.01 mm Unit 0 Default value Trailing edge OFF adjustment for laser LA-OFF Trailing edge OFF timing adjustment for the laser in the case of free Lv.1 Details size paper As the value is incremented by 1, the OFF timing for laser becomes late. Use this only when replacing the DC Controller PCB/Laser Scanner Use case Unit. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value POWER [Not used] Magnification between A-B laser (K) LDADJ1-K When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service Lv.1 Details label stuck on the laser scanner unit. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM dataUse case When replacing the laser scanner unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -512 to 511 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value

8

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value LDADJ3-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value LDADJ4-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value LDADJ5-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > LASER

Magnification between A-C laser (K) When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser scanner unit. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM dataWhen replacing the laser scanner unit 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -512 to 511 0 Magnification between A-D laser (K) When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser scanner unit. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM dataWhen replacing the laser scanner unit 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -512 to 511 0 Phase difference between A-B laser (K) When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser scanner unit. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM dataWhen replacing the laser scanner unit 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -512 to 511 0 Phase difference between A-C laser (K) When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser scanner unit. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM dataWhen replacing the laser scanner unit 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -512 to 511 0

8-67

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

■■BLANK

COPIER>ADJUST>LASER LDADJ6-K Lv.1 Details

Phase difference between A-D laser (K) When replacing the laser scanner unit, enter the value of service label stuck on the laser scanner unit. - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM dataUse case When replacing the laser scanner unit Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -512 to 511 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value T-8-20

■■DEVELOP COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP DE-OFST Lv.1 Details

Enter offset value for develop DC bias To set the Vdc offset auto adjustment value for potential control of copy image manually.As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 1V.+: Increase-: Decrease. As the value is increased, copy image gets darker. When the abnormal image appears (high or low density) Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value T-8-21

■■DENS

8-68 COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK

BLANK-T

Adjustment of leading edge margin

Lv.1 Details

To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0212 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user’s request Use case - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Do not use this at the normal service. Caution After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. 0 to 1000 Display/adj/set range 0.0212 mm Unit 118 Default value Adjustment of trailing edge margin BLANK-B To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper. Lv.1 Details As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0212 mm). - When reducing the margin upon user’s request Use case - When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. 0 to 1000 Display/adj/set range 0.0212 mm Unit 118 Default value T-8-23

■■PASCAL COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL

COPIER>ADJUST>DENS DENS-ADJ Lv.1 Details

Density correction of copy image To correct the density of copy image by changing the F-value table. Blurring is alleviated when the value is increased, and fogging is alleviated when the value is decreased. When fogging or blurring at high density area occurs with a copy Use case image Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Density of printer output image cannot be corrected. Caution 1 to 9 Display/adj/set range Appropriate target value 4 to 6 5 Default value F-value table: shows the relationship between original density and Supplement/memo image density. T-8-22

8

OFST-P-K Lv.1 Details

Bk density adj at test print reading To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust). When clearing the RAM data of the CCD unit (CCD PCB), enter the value of service label. As the greater value is set, the image after adjustment gets darker. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -128 to 128 Display/adj/set range According to the setting at shipment Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL

T-8-24

8-68

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

■■HV-PRI

8-69

■■HV-TR COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI

COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR

OFST1-DC Lv.1 Use case

Adj primary charge DC offset 1 When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Adj primary charge AC offset 1 OFST1-AC When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the Lv.1 Use case value of service label. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value T-8-25

TR-OFST

Adj transfer target current offset

When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and

press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the service label. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value [Not used] TR-SPP Adj transfer lead edge weak bias time TR-TP-TM This mode determines the time to apply voltage for transfer lead Lv.1 Details edge weak bias. This item is used when the fixing delivery delay jam of the 2nd side Use case of 2-sided occurs in the following condition. - High temperature/high humidity environment - The cassette heater is ON - Use of plain paper 1/2 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 127 Display/adj/set range 1 msec Unit 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-TP-LV

Caution

The setting value of TR-TP-TM and a reference value for the application width iR-ADV 4251/4245/4235 Setting value Application width from the lead edge of paper 40 60 65 70 80 90 90 to 127

Approx. 9.0 to 9.5mm Approx. 33.0 to 33.5mm Approx. 38.0 to 39.0mm Approx. 44.0 to 45.0mm Approx. 55.0 to 56.0mm Approx. 60.0 to 61.0mm Approx. 61.0mm

T-8-26

iR-ADV 4225 Setting value Application width from the lead edge of paper 70 73 75 80 100 127

Approx. 5.5 to 6.0mm Approx. 8.0 to 9.0mm Approx. 9.0 to 10.0mm Approx. 13.0 to 14.0mm Approx. 27.0 to 28.0mm Approx. 30.0 to 31.0mm T-8-27

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

8-69

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-70

■■FEED-ADJ

COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR TR-TP-LV Lv.1 Details

Adj transfer lead edge weak bias level This mode determines the level to apply voltage for transfer lead edge weak bias. This item is used when the fixing delivery delay jam of the 2nd side Use case of 2-sided occurs in the following condition. - High temperature/high humidity environment - The cassette heater is ON - Use of plain paper 1/2 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -50 to 50 Display/adj/set range 0.01 % Unit 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-TP-TM T-8-28

8

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ REGIST

Adj of registration start timing

Lv.1 Details

To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor.As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Top margin becomes larger. -: Top margin becomes smaller.In the case of iR-ADV4225, this item is effective by both paper feedings for the same speed in the cassette feeding and the manual feeding.In the case of iR-ADV4251/4245/4235, this item is effective for only the cassette feeding of the normal speed. Perform the setting of the manual feeding in COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> RG-HF-SP.When replacing the DC Controller PCB/ clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> RG-HF-SP Registration loop amnt adj: cst feeding LOOP-CST The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the Lv.1 Details value. +: The loop amount increases. -: The loop amount decreases. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case When the casette feeding paper is skewed Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit Rgst loop amnt adj: MP-feeding LOOP-MF The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the Lv.1 Details value. +: The loop amount increases. -: The loop amount decreases. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case When the manual feeding paper is skewed Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-70

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ ADJ-REFE Lv.1 Details

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ

Side rgst adj: 2-sided with s-ppr (
8

8-71

RG-HF-SP Lv.1 Details

Rgst clutch on timing adj:manual feeding The on timing of the registration clutch becomes fast/slow by changing the value. +: The on timing becomes fast. -: The on timing becomes slow.In the case of iR-ADV4225, this item is not work.Perform the setting in COPIER> ADJUST> FEEDADJ> RGHF-SP.In the case of iR-ADV4251/4235/4225, this item is effective for only the manual feeding of the half speed.When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> REGIST Side rgst adj: 2-sided with l-ppr (
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

8-71

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

■■CST-ADJ

COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ LOOP-SP Lv.2 Details

Rgst loop amount adj: special paper feed The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the value. +: The loop amount increases. -: The loop amount decreases. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case When the special paper is skewed Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Reg loop amnt adj: casette feed of envlp LOOP-ENV The paper feeding distance is increased/decreased by changing the Lv.2 Details value. +: The loop amount increases. -: The loop amount decreases. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case When the envelope is skewed at the casette feeding Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -128 to 127 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Feed timing Adj ADJ-PTMG To adjust the paper feeding timing according to the feed allowance Lv.2 Details temperature. (regardless of the fixing mode) Use to shorten the first copy time or the warm up time. Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK key. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C Display/adj/set range 3 to 11: each 3 deg C12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value T-8-29

8

8-72 COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ

MF-A4R

Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width

Lv.1 Details

To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data- When Use case replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1024 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R Adj of MP Tray A6R paper width MF-A6R To adjust the width of A6R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. Lv.1 Details When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A6R. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case - When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1024 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A6R

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

8-72

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING

COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ

COPIER>ADJUST>FIXING

MF-A4 Lv.1 Details

Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4. - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Use case - When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray paper Width Detection PCB or registering a new value Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the Caution service label. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1024 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4 T-8-30

■■FIXING COPIER>ADJUST>FIXING FX-FL-SP

Adj of fixing film speed at normal speed

Lv.2 Details Use case

To adjust the fixing film speed at the normal speed When paper passes through the registration roller, the density difference occurs by slack/tension of the paper on the image trailing edge (about 45mm).When executing RAM clear of DC controller PCB/replacing the PCB Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item to be highlighted to enter the setting value (switch with +/- key), and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value [Not used] FX-FL-TH

8

8-73

FX-FL-LW Lv.2 Details Use case

Adj of fixing film speed at half speed To adjust the fixing film speed at the half speed When paper passes through the registration roller, the density difference occurs by slack/tension of the paper on the image trailing edge (about 45mm).When executing RAM clear of DC controller PCB/replacing the PCB Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item to be highlighted to enter the setting value (switch with +/- key), and then press OK key.2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Change rotational SPD: ppr edg cool fan FN-MV-SW When the rotational speed for the paper edge cooling fan is changed Lv.2 Details to reduce the curl amount of the moist paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item to be highlighted to enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF , 1: Half speed , 2: Full speed 1 Default value Open wid adj of ppr edg cool fan shutter ADJ-FNSH When the open width for the paper edge cooling fan shutter is Lv.2 Details changed to reduce the curl amount of the moist paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item to be highlighted to enter the setting value (switch with +/- key), and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch. 0 to 14 Display/adj/set range 0 to 6: Open width is 0 to 24 mm (4 mm unit) 7 to 14: Open width is 30 to 58 mm (4 mm unit) 7 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FIXING

T-8-31

8-73

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

■■MISC

COPIER>ADJUST>MISC ACS-CNT Lv.2 Details

COPIER>ADJUST>MISC SEG-ADJ

8-74

Set criteria for text/photo: front side

Lv.1 Details

To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map mode. As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document. When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/Photo/ Use case Map mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not use this at the normal service. Caution Display/adj/set range -4 to 4 0 Default value Set criteria for black text: front side K-ADJ To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing. Lv.1 Details As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black. When preferring the text to be judged as black Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 0 Default value Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front ACS-ADJ To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode. Lv.1 Details As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a color document. When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -3 to 3 0 Default value Set judgment area in ACS mode:front side ACS-EN To set the judgment area in ACS mode. Lv.2 Details As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 1 Default value

8

Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode. As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color Use case presence in ACS mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 0 Default value Enter Cassette1 side register adj value C1-ADJ-Y As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper Lv.2 Details is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the rightl.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette Use case 1, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after Caution adjustment. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Enter Cassette2 side register adj value C2-ADJ-Y As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper Lv.2 Details is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette Use case 2, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after Caution adjustment. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

8-74

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

COPIER>ADJUST>MISC

8-75 COPIER>ADJUST>MISC

C3-ADJ-Y Lv.2 Details

Enter Cassette3 side register adj value As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette Use case 3, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after Caution adjustment. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Enter Cassette4 side register adj value C4-ADJ-Y As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper Lv.2 Details is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Cassette Use case 4, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after Caution adjustment. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value

8

MF-ADJ-Y Lv.2 Details

Enter MP Tray side register adj value As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from MultiUse case purpose Tray, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after Caution adjustment. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Enter Paper Deck side register adj value DK-ADJ-Y As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of paper Lv.2 Details is increased by 0.1 mm. +: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.) -: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.) When adjusting side registration of paper picked up from Paper Use case Deck, when executing RAM clear of the DC Controller PCB, or when replacing the PCB (Enter the value of service label.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to enter the adjustment value on the service label after Caution adjustment. Display/adj/set range -128 to 127 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode ACS-EN2 To set the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading. Lv.2 Details As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 1 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

8-75

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

8-76

COPIER>ADJUST>MISC ACS-CNT2 Lv.2 Details

Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area in DADF To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in ACS mode at DADF reading. As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened. When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color Use case presence in ACS mode at DADF reading Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range -2 to 2 0 Default value T-8-32

8

Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC

8-76

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

FUNCTION

COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL CARD Lv.1 Details

■■INSTALL COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL TONER-S

8-77

Toner supply to Developing Assembly

Lv.1 Details

To execute a series of operation necessary for supplying toner to the Developing Assembly/Toner Supply area (drive the Developing Cylinder, Toner Stirring/Feed Member) as a whole. After counting down from 600 seconds, it is stopped automatically. - At installation Use case - When replacing the Developing Assembly - When replacing toner in the Developing Assembly Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the items. “Check the Developer” is displayed. 2) Check connection, and then press OK key. It automatically stops after 10 minutes. - Although “Check the Developer” is displayed when selecting the Caution item, be sure to check the connection between the Developing Assembly and connector. - The operation can stop manually with OK key when a failure occurs. During operation: xxx second (remaining time), When operation Display/adj/set range finished normally: END 600 Default value Scan position auto adj in DADF mode STRD-POS To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically. Lv.1 Details At DADF installation/uninstallation Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The operation automatically stops after the adjustment. 2) Write the value displayed by COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS in the service label. Write the adjusted value in the service label. Caution At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Display/adj/set range 10 sec Required time Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS For the details of paper for stream reading position adjustment, refer Supplement/memo to the Service Manual.

8

Card number setting To set the card number to be used for Card Reader. A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards specified by CARD-RNG can be used. - At installation of the Card Reader Use case - After replacement of the HDD Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The card management information (department ID and password) is Caution initialized. 1 to 2001 Display/adj/set range 1 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG (level2) Set use/no use of Embedded-RDS function E-RDS To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function. Lv.1 Details When using Embedded-RDS Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and Caution RGW-ADR as a set. 0 to 10: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.) Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COMLOG, RGW-ADR COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERDS-DAT Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Supplement/memo device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol Set port number of Sales Co’s server RGW-PORT To set the port number of the sales company’s server to be used for Lv.1 Details Embedded-RDS. When using Embedded-RDS Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and Caution RGW-ADR as a set. 1 to 65535 Display/adj/set range 443 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERDS-DAT Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Supplement/memo device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

8-77

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL COM-TEST Lv.1 Details

COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL

Dspl connect result w/ Sales Co’s server To display the result of the connection test with the sales company’s server. When using Embedded-RDS Use case Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and Caution RGW-ADR as a set. During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK, Display/adj/set range When connection is failed: NG Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG, RGW-ADR Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Supplement/memo device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol Dspl connect error w/ Sales Co’s server COM-LOG To display error information when the connection with the sales Lv.1 Details company’s server failed. When using Embedded-RDS Use case Adj/set/operate method Display only Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and Caution RGW-ADR as a set. Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128 Display/adj/set range characters) Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COMTEST, RGW-ADR COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERDS-DAT Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Supplement/memo device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol

8

8-78

RGW-ADR Lv.1 Details

URL setting of Sales Company’s server To set the URL of the sales company’s server to be used for Embedded-RDS. When using Embedded-RDS Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the URL. 2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Do not use Shift-JIS character strings. Caution - be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and RGW-ADR as a set. URL Display/adj/set range https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COMTEST, COM-LOG COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERDS-DAT Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Supplement/memo device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol Set counter send start date to SC server CNT-DATE To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter Lv.1 Details information to the sales company’s server. This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available. When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits) Display/adj/set range YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute 0 Default value Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the Supplement/memo device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

8-78

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL CNT-INTV Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value Supplement/memo BRWS-ACT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution CDS-CTL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode Supplement/memo DRM-INIT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Related service mode

COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL

Set counter send interval to SC server To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales company’s server in a unit of one hour. This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available. - When restarting potential control After execution of COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT - When the D-max control condition is changed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 168 (=1 week) 1 hour 24 Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales company’s server via SOAP protocol ON/OFF of service browser To set whether to set ON/OFF of the browser for servicing. When 2 is specified, the browser becomes enabled temporarily. This mode can be used when checking operation. - When using the browser for servicing - At operation check 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After execution, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After reboot, be sure to check the usage status in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS. Set country/area when using CDS To set country/area to enable CDS. When enabling CDS 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Country/area set in COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG, CA (Canada), LA (Latin America) and HK (Hong Kong) The default differs according to the location. COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG CDS: Contents Delivery System Initialization of Photosensitive Drum To initialize Photosensitive Drum. Clear drum counter (COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> PT-DRM, COPIER> COUNTER> LF> K-DRM-LF) stored in the DC Controller. After replacement of the Photosensitive Drum Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> DRM-CNTR

8

8-79

HD-CRYP Lv.1 Details

Exe HDD Encrypt Board ini install mod To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the HDD Encryption Board. By turning OFF the main power switch after execution, the HDD Encryption Board can be installed. At installation of the HDD Encryption Board Use case Adj/set/operate method During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! OFF/ON of Web Service of eRDS BIT-SVC To switch ON/OFF of the Web Service function of eRDS. Lv.1 Details When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be obtained from eRDS. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0:OFF 1:ON 1 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL

T-8-33

8-79

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

■■CCD

8-80 COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD

COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD Gain adj judgmt of the anlg prcssr in CCD CCD-ADJ Replacing the CCD Unit Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Select this item to highlight, and press the OK key.2) See that

auto adjustment takes place (about 3 sec).During adjustment, will be indicated on the upper right of the screen.3) See that the scanning lamp goes on twice during adjustment. At the end of auto adjustment, the screen will show . During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range White level adj in book mode: (B&W) DF-WLVL1 To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically Lv.1 Details by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. The result is reflected for COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Use case - When replacing the Scanner unit - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row. Caution During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K White level adj in DADF mode: (B&W) DF-WLVL2 To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting Lv.1 Details the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Use case - When replacing the Scanner unit - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1. Caution During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-K Deriving of MTF filter coefficient MTF-CLC To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the Lv.1 Details MTF value of the DADF complex chart. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF3-M1 to M12, MTF3-S1 to S12, MTF4-M1 to M12, MTF4-S1 to S12

8

DF-WLVL3 Lv.1 Details

White level adj in book mode (Color) To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard Glass. The result is reflected for COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R/ DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Use case - When replacing the Scanner unit - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row. Caution During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL4 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R/DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B White level adj in DADF mode (Color) DF-WLVL4 To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting Lv.1 Details the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF. The result is reflected for COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R/ DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B. - When replacing the Copyboard Glass Use case - When replacing the Scanner unit - When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3. Caution During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL3 COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R/DFTAR-G/DFTAR-B

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

T-8-34

8-80

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING

■■CST

■■CLEANING COPIER>FUNCTION>CST

MF-A4R

8-81 COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING

Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width

Lv.1 Details

To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210 mm) on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MFA4R. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> Caution CST-ADJ> MF-A4R, and write it down on the service label. Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R Reg Multi-purpose Tray A6R stdrd width MF-A6R To register the standard value of A6R paper width (105 mm) on the Lv.1 Details Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MFA6R. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A6R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> Caution CST-ADJ> MF-A6R, and write it down on the service label. Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width MF-A4 To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the Lv.1 Details Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4. Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4 paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that it fits the paper width. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. The value is registered after automatic adjustment. After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST> Caution CST-ADJ> MF-A4, and write it down on the service label. Related service mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4

DRM-IDL Lv.2 Details Use case

Drum cleaning To perform the drum cleaning When the black spots appear on the copy image in the drum circumference cycle. (Toner adheres on the drum surface.) Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. 80 sec Required time Transfer roller cleaning TR-CLN To clean the transfer roller Lv.2 Details When the back side of paper is soiled with toner (the transfer roller Use case is soiled with toner). Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. 35 sec Required time Fixing film cleaning FIX-CLN To clean the fixing film Lv.2 Details When the fixing pressure roller is soiled with tonner. Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Print out the cleaning pattern (setting value: 44) with COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE.2) Set printing side on the Multi-purpose Tray in an upturn.3) Set the paper size of of the Multi-purpose Tray.4) Press OK key to execute operation. The paper size set on the Multi-purpose Tray use A4 or LTR. Caution 80 sec Required time T-8-36

T-8-35

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING

8-81

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL

■■FIXING

■■PANEL COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING

NIP-CHK

8-82 COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL

Check of fixing nip width

Lv.1 Details

To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing. If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur. - When replacing the fixing-related parts (fixing Roller, Pressure Use case Roller) - When a fixing failure occurs Adj/set/operate method 1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper. 2) Make a solid black print (setting value: 7) with COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE. 3) Set the output of step 2 on the Multi-purpose Tray while placing the printed side down.4) Perform the size setting of the Multipurpose Tray.5) Select the item, and then press OK key.A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and is delivered approx. 20 seconds later.6) Measure the nip width of delivered sheet. It is judged as normal: (iR-ADV 4251: 8.1 to 10.1 mm, iR-ADV 4245/4235/4225 :7.5 to 9.5 mm) at the center, and difference between front and rear is within 1.0 mm. If there is an error, execute step 6. 7) Check the Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller, and Fixing Lower Unit, and replace damaged part. Related service mode COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE T-8-37

LCD-CHK

Check of LCD Panel dot missing

Lv.1 Details

To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black, red, green and blue. 3) Press STOP key to terminate checking. Check of Control Panel LED To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that the LED lights up in the order. 3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking. COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF End check of Control Panel LED To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel. During execution of LED-CHK Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK Check of key entry To check the key input on the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel. 2) Check that the input value is displayed. 3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking. Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control Panel. When replacing the LCD Panel 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Press the nine “+” keys in sequence.

Use case Adj/set/operate method

LED-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode LED-OFF Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode KEY-CHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method TOUCHCHK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

T-8-38

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL

8-82

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

■■PART-CHK

COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK MTR-ON Lv.1 Details

COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK CL

8-83

Specification of operation Clutch

Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

To specify the Clutch to operate. When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Enter the value, and then press OK key. 1 to 6 1: Manual feed pickup clutch (CL12) 2: Registration clutch (CL3) 3: Developing cylinder clutch (CL1) 4: Not used 5: Not used 6: Deck pickup clutch (CL2D) Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON Operation check of Clutch CL-ON To start operation check of the Clutch specified by CL. Lv.1 Details The operation stops after “ON for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 10 sec” => “ON for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 10 sec” => “ON for 0.5 sec”. When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation Use case Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range 0 Default value 22 sec Required time Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL Specification of operation Motor MTR To specify the Motor to operate. Lv.1 Details When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the value, and then press OK key. Be sure to remove the Toner Container before Bottle motor (M17) is Caution activated. If it remains to be installed, toner is supplied. 1 to 161: Polygon motor (M11)2: Main motor (M1)3: Fixing motor Display/adj/set range (M2)4: No.1 delivery motor (M10)5: Bottle motor (M17)6: Cassette 1 pickup motor (M13)7: Cassette 2 pickup motor (M3)8: Duplex feed motor (M9)9: Hopper motor (M16)10: Cassette 3 pickup motor11: Cassette 4 pickup motor12: Deck open solenoid (M101)13: Deck lifter motor (M102)14: Reversal motor (M20)15: Not used16: Buffer pass motor (M3) Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON

8

Operation check of Motor To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR. The operation automatically stops after operation of 20 seconds. When replacing the Motor/checking the operation Use case Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to remove the Toner Container before Toner Supply Motor Caution (M10) is activated. If it remains to be installed, toner is supplied. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range 1 min Required time Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR Specification of operation Solenoid SL To specify the Solenoid to operate. Lv.1 Details When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the value, and then press OK key. 1 to 10 Display/adj/set range 1: Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL1) 2: Cassette 2 pickup solenoid (SL2) 3: Cassette 3 pickup solenoid 4: Cassette 4 pickup solenoid 5: Deck pickup roller release solenoid (SL1D) 6: Deck open solenoid (SL2D) 7: Reversal Solenoid (SL12) 8: No. 2 Delivery Solenoid (SL13) 9: Not used 10: Manual feed pickup solenoid (SL2) Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON Operation check of Solenoid SL-ON To start operation check for the Solenoid specified by SL. Lv.1 Details The operation stops after “ON for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 5 sec” => “ON for 0.5 sec” => “OFF for 5 sec” => “ON for 0.5 sec”. When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation Use case Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! Display/adj/set range 12 sec Required time Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

T-8-39

8-83

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

■■CLEAR

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR

ERR Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method DC-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode R-CON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode JAM-HIST Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode ERR-HIST Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode

8-84

Clear of error code To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E717, E719). E000, E001, E002, and E003 are fixing-related errors. E004 (IH Power Supply) and E005 (Web absence) do not need to be cleared. At error occurrence 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. RAM clear of DC Controller PCB To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB. When clearing the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ ON. - If the setting value in COPIER> OPTION> ACC> IN-TRAY is "1", set "1" again. And turn off/on the main power switch. - Set the life in COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> PT-DRM by referring data output in P-PRINT. (Except JP) COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT COPIER> OPTION> ACC> IN-TRAY RAM clear of the CCD unit (CCD PCB) To clear the RAM data of the CCD unit (CCD PCB). When clearing the RAM data of the CCD unit (CCD PCB) 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values. - the RAM data is cleared After the main power switch is turned OFF/ ON. - The setting value in FEEDER> OPTION> SIZE-SW is not cleared. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Clear of jam history To clear the jam history. When clearing the jam history Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> DISPLAY> JAM Clear of error code history To clear the error code history. When clearing the error code history Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> DISPLAY> ERR

8

PWD-CLR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method ADRS-BK Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution CNT-MCON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode CNT-DCON Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode OPTION Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode MMI Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

Clear of system administrator password To clear the password of the system administrator set in the user mode. When clearing the password of the system administrator 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Clear of address book To clear the address book data. When clearing the address book data 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. Clear of Main Controller service counter To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB. When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> COUNTER Clear of DC Controller service counter To clear the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB. When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller PCB Select the item, and then press OK key. COPIER> COUNTER Clear of service mode setting VL(OPTION) To return the value specified in service mode (OPTION) to the default value (value at the time of RAM clear). 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values. - This item is executed for the data on the Main Controller PCB, DC Controller PCB and CCD unit (CCD PCB). COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Clear Settings/Registration setting VL To clear the Settings/Registration setting values. - Preferences (excluding values for Paper Type Management Settings) - Adjustment/Maintenance - Function Settings - Set Destination (excluding Address Lists) - Management Settings (excluding Department ID Management) When clearing various setting values of Settings/Registration 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ ON.

8-84

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR MN-CON Lv.1 Details

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR

RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board. All data on the SRAM Board is initialized. Use case When clearing the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The machine is automatically rebooted. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Preferences), adjustment/Maintenance, function Settings, Set Destination, management - Inform the user that all images in Inbox will be deleted and get approval for it. - Since the file management information is initialized, images ON the HDD cannot be read. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values. - The RAM data is cleared After the main power switch is turned OFF/ ON. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT CARD Clear of card ID-related data Lv.1 Details To clear the data related to the card ID (department). Use case When clearing the data related to the card ID Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution The value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. ALARM Clear of alarm code history Lv.1 Details Clear of alarm code history Use case When clearing the alarm code history Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution The alarm log is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ ON. Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ALARM-2, ALARM-3

8

8-85

CA-KEY Lv.2 Details

Init of key pair, certificate and CRL To simultaneously delete the key pair, certificate and CRL which are additionally registered by the user, and return to the default state. Use case When a service person replaces/discards the device Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that OK is displayed. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard of the device, the key pair, certificate and CRL which are additionally registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem in terms of security. - Do not execute this item carelessly because the key pair,certificate and CRL which are additionally registered are deleted when it is executed. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be again registered by the user. If no CA certificate and key pair are additionally registered, the machine condition becomes the same as the one at the time of factory - When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion was not executed. In this case, surely execute the deletion by initializing the HDD, etc. Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Supplement/memo After this function is executed, the registered key pair, certificate and CRL are initialized upon turning OFF and the ON the main power, and the key pair, certificate and CRL registered at the time of factory shipment are decompressed from the archive. ERDS-DAT Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data Lv.1 Details To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded-RDS stored in the SRAM. SCM values are ON/OFF of E-RDS, server's port number, server's SOAP URL, and communication schedule with the server (how often the data is acquired), etc. The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGWPORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared. Use case When upgrading the Bootable in the E-RDS environment Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Caution The method of using the SRAM in E-RDS differs depending on the Bootable version. Therefore, unless the SRAM data is cleared at the time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs. Display/adj/set range At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

8-85

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR KEY-CLR Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution

USBM-CLR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

JV-CACHE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method FXTX-CLR LANG-CLR Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range FIN-MCON Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR

Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security Kit) for replacement. Processing is executed at the time of replacement of the Encryption Board, and a new encryption key is generated. When replacing the encryption key for the HDD Encryption Board 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that OK is displayed. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Since all data in the HDD becomes unavailable when executing this item, be sure to initialize the HDD after turning OFF/ON the main power switch. Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling the API provided by the OS. When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Check that OK is displayed. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Cache clear of JAVA application To clear the cache information used by JAVA application. When initializing the JAVA application 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. [Not used] Uninstallation of language files To uninstall the language files other than English file. When rebooting the machine after execution, language files other than English file are deleted, and language displayed on the screen becomes English. When uninstalling language files 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Reboot the machine. At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG Clearing Finisher info in controller To clear the Finisher information which the Main Controller retains. After execution, set the Delivery Tray again in Control Panel menu (Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Settings). When switching to another type of Finisher in the field 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Reboot the machine. The language files are not uninstalled if a language file is not installed by SST after the execution of this service mode.

8

8-86

PLPW-CLR Lv.2 Details

Clear security policy setting password To clear the password of the security administrator set in the security policy settings. Use case When clearing the password of the security administrator Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

T-8-40

8-86

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

■■MISC-R

8-87

■■MISC-P COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P

COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R SCANLAMP

Light-up check of LED

Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Required time

To light up the LED for 3 seconds. When replacing the LED Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 3 sec T-8-41

P-PRINT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Required time Related service mode KEY-HIST Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Required time HIST-PRT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Required time Related service mode TRS-DATA Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method USER-PRT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Related service mode Supplement/memo LBL-PRNT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Required time Supplement/memo

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

Output of service mode setting value To print the service mode setting value. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (P-PRINT-RPT.TXT). Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc. Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. 60 sec COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE Output of Ctrl Panel key input history To print the key input history on the Control Panel. When printing the key input history on the Control Panel Select the item, and then press OK key. 40 sec Output of jam and error history To print the jam history and error history. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (HIST-PRT-RPT.TXT). When printing the jam/error history Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. 30 sec COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE Moving memory reception data to Inbox To move the data received in memory to Inbox. When moving the data received in memory to Inbox 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Output of Settings/Registration list To print the Settings/Registration list. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (USER-PRT-RPT.TXT). When printing the Settings/Registration list Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE It takes approximately 3 seconds before printing starts. Output of service label To print the service label. When printing the service label 1) Place A4/LTR paper in Cassette 1. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. 55 sec It takes approximately 15 seconds before printing starts.

8-87

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P ENV-PRT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Required time Related service mode PJH-P-1 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Related service mode Supplement/memo

PJH-P-2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Related service mode Supplement/memo

USBH-PRT Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method Caution Related service mode

COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P

Temp&hmdy/surface temp of Fix Roll log To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/ surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (ENV-PRT-RPT.TXT). When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing temperature information at trouble analysis Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK! 30 sec COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE Detail info of print job history:100 job To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed information. In the case of less than 100 jobs, the history of all print jobs is printed. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-1-RPT.TXT). When printing the print job history with detailed information Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE Output the print job history with detailed information which is not displayed/printed in the job history screen under "System Monitor> Print> Log> Printer" and in the report of the print job history. Detail info of print job history:all job To print the history of all print jobs stored in the machine with detailed information (for maximum 5000 jobs). The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of jobs printed. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (PJH-P-2-RPT.TXT). When printing the print job history with detailed information Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE Output the print job history with detailed information which is not displayed/printed in the job history screen under "System Monitor> Print> Log> Printer" and in the report of the print job history. Output of USB device information report To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a report. Text data is saved in HDD as a file (USBH-PRT-RPT.TXT). Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to use A4/LTR size plain paper/recycled paper. COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE

8

8-88

RPT-FILE Lv.1 Details

Saving of service report as a file To save various service reports in HDD as a file. The saved files can be obtained using PC to which SST has been installed or USB memory after starting the machine in download mode. Use case When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printout Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT2USB RPT2USB Storage of file in HDD to USB memory Lv.1 Details To store the report file of service mode saved in HDD to the USB memory. To execute this service mode, it is necessary to generate the report file of service mode. Use case When storing the report file of service mode in HDD to the USB memory Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> RPT-FILE

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

T-8-42

8-88

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

■■SYSTEM

COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM

DOWNLOAD Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Supplement/memo CHK-TYPE Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Related service mode Supplement/memo HD-CHECK Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Related service mode HD-CLEAR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Related service mode

8-89

Shift to download mode To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a command. Perform downloading by SST/USB. At upgrade 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Perform downloading by SST/USB. SST: Service Support Tool HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No. To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/ HD-CHECK. When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK Enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 16 0: Entire HDD 1 to 4: Image data storage area 5: Universal file storage area 6 to 8: Universal file storage area (temporary file) 9: PDL file storage area 10: Program file storage area 11: MEAP application 12: Address book/transfer setting 13: MEAP stored data 14: System log storage area 15: Advanced Box area 16: Delivery server area COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK Universal file: Management information of user setting data, various log data, PDL spool data, and image data, etc. Entire HDD check and recovery To check the entire HDD and execute recovery processing. Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. During operation: Progress ratio (%), When operation finished normally: OK! COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE Initialization of specified partition To initialize the HDD partition specified by CHK-TYPE. When initializing the HDD partition Select the item, and then press OK key. Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE. When operation finished: OK!/NG! COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE

DSRAMBUP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode DSRAMRES Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode RSRAMBUP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode RSRAMRES Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Related service mode R-REBOOT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP Backup of CCD unit (CCD PCB) SRAM To back up the setting data in SRAM of the CCD unit (CCD PCB). When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB) for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES Restore of CCD unit (CCD PCB) SRAM To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of the CCD unit (CCD PCB). When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB) for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Select the item, and then press OK key. During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old data is deleted. COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP Reboot of the device Perform the reboot from the service mode When the reboot is carried out with the remote control by VNC Select the item, and then press OK key. T-8-43

8

Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

8-89

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

OPTION

8-90 COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

CONFIG Lv.1 Details

■■FNC-SW COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW MODEL-SZ Lv.1 Details

Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF. It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E) for North/Middle/South America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania, South America The default differs according to the location. Default value ON/OFF of scan area calculate function SCANSLCT To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the Lv.2 Details specified paper size. When matching the scanning area with the paper size Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size) 1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size) 0 Default value Setting of original detection size SENS-CNF To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch Lv.2 Details configuration/A configuration. Select 1 (Inch configuration) for Inch configuration/A configuration machine. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW>MODEL-SZ

8

Set country/area/lang/location/ppr size To set the country/region, language, location, paper size configuration for multiple system software in HDD. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the setting item. 2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range XX YY.ZZ.AA XX: Country/region JP: Japan, US: United States, GB: England, FR: France, DE: Germany, IT: Italia, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands, KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT: Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU: Hungary, CZ: Czech, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greek, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, AD: Andorra, AL: Albania, AM: Armenia, AR: Argentine, AT: Austria, BA: Bosnia Herzegovina, BE: Belgium, BG: Bulgaria, BO: Bolivia, BR: Brazil, CA: Canada, CH: Switzerland, CL: Chile, CY: Cyprus, HR: Croatia, ID: Indonesia, IE: Ireland, IL: Israel, IN: India, IS: Iseland, LU: Luxembourg, LV: Latvia, MX: Mexico, MY: Malaysia, NZ: New Zealand, PE: Peru, PH: Philippine, PY: Paraguay, RO: Romania, SK: Slovakia, TH: Thailand, TR: Turkey, UA: Ukraine, UY: Uruguay, VE: Venezuela, VN: Vietnam YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03: Inch/AB configuration) Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ Setting of Reader Unit installation W/SCNR To set installation of the Reader Unit. Lv.1 Details 1 (Installed) is automatically selected once the Reader Unit is detected at the start of the machine. When installing/removing the Reader Unit Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed The default differs according to the location. Default value Fan drive extension mode after job FAN-EXTN Lv.2 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 10: OFF, 1: ON 1 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-90

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW ORG-LGL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value ORG-LTR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value ORG-LTRR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value ORG-LDR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

Special paper size set in DADF mode: LGL To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10[Inch type]0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: Not used,, 4: Australian FOOLSCAP-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Argentine LEGAL-R, 9: Government LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R[AB/Inch type]0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R, 2: F4A 0 Special paper size set in DADF mode: LTR To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government LETTER 0 Special paper size set in DADF mode:LTRR To set the size of special paper (LTRR configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0 : LETTER-R, 1 : OFICIO-R, 2 : Ecuador-OFICIO-R 0 Special paper size set in DADF mode: LDR To set the size of special paper (LDR configuration) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: LEDGER-R (11x17), 1: Argentine LETTER 0

8

8-91

ORG-B5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value MODELSZ2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range Default value SVMD-ENT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value KSIZE-SW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

Special paper size set in DADF mode: B5 To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in DADF stream reading mode. - Upon user’s request - When picking up special paper size original from DADF 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: Not used 0 Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in copyboard reading mode. Upon user’s request (mixed media original with AB/Inch configuration) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Do not use this at the normal service. - The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required to correctly detect the document size when the original consists of mixed media (AB/Inch configuration). 0 to 1 0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected with AB/Inch mixed media. 0 Setting of entry method to service mode To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak. As needed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Factory default 1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time [Settings/Registration] 0 Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K). When using K size paper 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Go through the following: COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODELSZ; and if MODEL-SZ is “0: AB configuration”, this mode is enabled. 0 to 1 0: Not supported, 1: Supported JP:0, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:1, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ 8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm

8-91

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW ORG-B4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value PDF-RDCT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value REBOOTSW Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo SJB-UNW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

Setting of special paper size (B4 type) with DADF Setting of special paper size (B4 type) which cannot be recognized when using DADF Upon User’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0:JIS B4-R1:FOLIO-R 0 PDF reduction set at forwarding To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting the image received by IFAX into PDF for e-mail/file transmission. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Following the current setting, 1: Image reduction 0 Restart setting at E240 error occurrence To set whether to reboot in the case of E240 error. In the case of E240 error, the machine is automatically rebooted due to the possibility of continuous operation of the drive system while the spooled print job is cleared. Print job can be obtained if selecting the setting not to reboot. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Do not use this At the normal service. - Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the possibility of continuous operation of the drive system in the case of E240 error. 0 to 1 0: Rebooted, 1: Not rebooted 0 E240 error: Communication error between the Main Controller and the DC Controller. Reserve upper limit of secure print job To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secure print job. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs, 2: No limit 1

8

8-92

WEBV-SW Lv.2 Details

ON/OFF of WebDAV function To set ON/OFF of WebDAV function. OFF setting can reduce memory use of the machine. In addition, the following WebDAV-related items are hidden in user mode. - Settings/Registration> Set Destination> Register Destinations> Register New Dest.> File> Protocol> WebDAV - Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Send> Common Settings> Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX When reducing memory use of the machine Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0 Default value Settings/Registration> Set Destination> Register Destinations> Related UI menu Register New Dest.> File> Protocol> WebDAV Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Send> Common Settings> Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX WebDAV function is equipped as standard with the machine. Supplement/memo Card number setting (department number) CARD-RNG To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the Lv.2 Details Card Reader. When setting the number of cards (departments) Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 1000 1000 Default value Set of scan job canceling by logout SJOB-CL To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the Lv.1 Details user. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Cancel only scan job in waiting state, 1: Cancel all scan jobs, 2: Not canceled 0 Default value Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed. Supplement/memo

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-92

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW USB-RCNT Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value MIBCOUNT Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value Related service mode CNTR-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value ILSZ-JAM W/RAID Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

Auto connect set at USB device disconnct To set to enable/disable automatic connection when the USB device is disconnected. With the setting to disable automatic connection, USB device cannot be used if disconnecting and then connecting the USB device. To enable connection again, the power needs to be turned OFF/ON. With the setting to enable automatic connection, reconnection is made after disconnecting, and then connecting the USB device. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. With the setting to enable automatic connection, disconnecting of 1 area makes automatic connection of all USB devices if there is USB hub. 0 to 1 0: No automatic connection, 1: Automatic connection 0 Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB (Management Information Base). 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only displayed counter* is obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained * : Counter specified by the following: COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER 1 to 6 0 COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1 to 6 Init of parts counter replacement timing To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value. Upon user’s request 1) Enter 0, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: Returned to the initial value 0 [Not used] Setting of RAID Board installation To set installation condition of RAID Board (HDD Mirroring Kit).Select “1: Installed” when installing the RAID Board. Select “0: Not installed” when removing the RAID Board. When installing/removing RAID Board 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: Not installed, 1: Installed 0

8

8-93

PSWD-SW Lv.1 Details

Password type set to enter service mode To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into service mode. 2 types are available: one for “service technician” and the other for “system administrator + service technician”. When selecting the type for “system administrator + service technician”, enter the password for service technician after the password entry by the user’s system administrator. Upon request from the user who concerns security Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator + service technician 0 Default value Password setting for service technician SM-PSWD To set password for service technician that is used when getting into Lv.2 Details service mode. When password is required to get into service mode Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance. Caution Display/adj/set range 1 to 99999999 11111111 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output RPT2SIDE To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service Lv.1 Details mode. When making 2-sided report output to reduce the number of output Use case pages Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided 1 Default value Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT Set of service browser favorite register BRWS-FAV To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for Lv.2 Details service. When 1 is set, favorites in the browser for service can be edited, and any URLs can be accessed. When service engineers edit favorites in the browser for service Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-93

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW INVALPDL Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

Disable of PDL license To disable the registered PDL license. When “1: Disabled” is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license is registered. This is set to the machines installed at convenience stores, which do not allow PDL to be used. When prohibiting the use of PDL Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled 0 Default value Set to allow firmware update by admin CDS-FIRM To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user Lv.1 Details (administrator). When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater can be activated from the user mode. When allowing the administrator to update the firmware Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled JP:0, USA:0, EUR:1, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> LCDSFLG CDS: Contents Delivery System Supplement/memo Set to allow MEAP installation by admin CDS-MEAP To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to install MEAP Lv.1 Details applications and enable iR options from CDS. When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater can be activated from the user mode. When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and Use case enable iR options from CDS Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (This setting can be specified for China, Korea and Taiwan models only.) 1 Default value CDS: Contents Delivery System Supplement/memo Set to allow firmware update from UGW CDS-UGW To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW server. Lv.1 Details When “1: Enabled” is set, Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with CDS. When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server Use case Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Default value CDS: Contents Delivery System Supplement/memo

8

8-94

LOCLFIRM Lv.1 Details

Set to allow firmware update by file To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the firmware from the remote UI using a local file. This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency situations. When allowing the administrator to update the firmware using a file Use case Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 1 Default value ON/OFF of Nup log at Inbox print BXNUPLOG To set whether to keep Nup log at Inbox print. Lv.2 Details When keeping Nup log at Inbox print Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON At normal service: 0, At customization: 1 Default value Cpcty warn dspl ON/OFF: E-mail/I-Fax TX SDLMTWRN To set whether to display the warning message when sending data Lv.1 Details that exceeds the upper limit value for the transmission data size via E-mail/I-Fax. For customization Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Default value Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size Related UI menu for Sending ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan JLK-PWSC To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document Lv.2 Details with the MEAP application. When scanning the PCAM password authentication document Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-94

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW FAX-INT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution

Display/adj/set range Default value CDS-LVUP Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo WTM-DENS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UA-OFFSW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception print automatically. Upon user’s request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Do not set this item while charge management (charging by Coin Manager, a device alone, etc.) is used. - During an ongoing job for which delivery setting (offset, stapling, etc.) is made, interruption operation is performed between sets. 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode 0 ON/OFF of CDS periodical update function To set ON/OFF of periodical update function by CDS. If 1 is set, Updater automatically updates on a periodical basis. Administrator can use the periodical update function from the user mode. When allowing the administrator to use the periodical update function 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON JP:0, USA:0, EUR:1, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 CDS: Contents Delivery System Set density at watermark/PCAM setting When the watermark/PCAM is set, the density becomes high by changing the developing /primary charge DC voltage so that the watermark/PCAM is reappeared. To increased the density when the watermark/PCAM is selected at the security print mode 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF , 1: ON 0 ON/OFF of unified auth function To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function. Set 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function because of security concern. Upon user’s request (not to use the Unified Authentication function) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0

8

8-95

MIB-NVTA Lv.1 Details

RFC-compatible character stringMIB write As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in order to link with LUI entry value. This violates RFC order, so a problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP monitoring system, such as the 3rd vendor’s MPS. Whether non-RFC-compatible character strings are written in MIB can be set using this mode. When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible with RFC are written. (Writing operation is executed from the SNMP manager.) LUI is not linked. Upon user’s request (operation with RFC-compatible system) Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3: Not used 0 Default value ON/OFF of link with Ex-Cont on network MIB-EXT To set whether to link with External Controller on network (HewlettLv.1 Details Packard Co.). When linking with External Controller of Hewlett-Packard Co. Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Not used 0 Default value Enabling of RUI function for servicing SVC-RUI To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided Lv.1 Details to end users). When 0 is set, the RUI function is disabled.When setting the value other than 0, RUI function is enabled. The value entered becomes password to use the RUI function. The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. When preferring to use the import function of background image file Use case of main menu Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. The data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-95

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW LCDSFLG Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

Enabling of local CDS server To set whether to use the local CDS server. When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled. When this setting is enabled, the [Setting] screen is displayed Settings/ Registration> Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Software Management Setting. When using the local CDS server Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This mode is enabled only when 1 is selected in COPIER> OPTION> Caution FNC-SW> CDS-FIRM. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CDS-FIRM Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software> Related UI menu Software Management Setting> Setting When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plug-in Supplement/memo is required. Set oprtn when pressing Energy Saver Key STNDBY-A To set the sleep operation when pressing the Control Panel Energy Lv.1 Details Saver Key. Normally, the entire machine shifts to sleep mode. When 1 is set, only the LCD backlight is turned off. Upon user’s request (FCOT) Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. By setting 1 when the machine is not frequently used, the life may Caution become shorter than the estimated life. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: The entire machine is in sleep mode, 1: Only the LDC backligh is turned off 0 Default value

8

8-96

BXSHIFT Lv.1 Details

Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin To set whether to judge the job as a job “without binding” when storing a PDL job in Inbox while the binding margin is set to “0”. By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while “0” is set, the job is processed as “without binding”. “Booklet” in “Other Functions” on the Inbox screen can be also used. When “1” is set, it is judged as “with binding” even the binding margin is 0 mm so “Booklet”, which has an exclusive relationship with “binding”, cannot be used. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When storing a PDL job in Inbox while 1 is set, “Booklet” in “Other Caution Functions” on the Inbox screen cannot be used. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Without binding, 1: With binding 0 Default value Display/hide of logout button NO-LGOUT To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.When 0 is set, Lv.1 Details [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout with the ID key is enabled. (Normal)When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the ID key is disabled. Upon user’s request (for customization, etc.) Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Display, 1: Hide 0 Default value Set of Bk-toner level displaying alarm T-DLV-BK To set the Bk-toner level to display “absence of toner” message. Lv.1 Details When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the Use case usage status Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count, Caution some errors may occur. Display/adj/set range 0 to 40 JP:10, USA:28, EUR:0, AU:28, CN:28, KR:28, TW:28, ASIA:28 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

8-96

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW JM-ERR-D Lv.2 Details

COPIER>OPTION>FNC-SW

Handling 0CAx jam as an error: DCON To display 0CAx jam as the error E996-0CAx. By handling the jam as an error, the machine stops, so that loss of the log can be prevented. Be sure to enable the service mode at the user’s site where 0CAx jam occurs. After that, if the error E996-0CAx occurs, the log which has been backed up can be obtained. When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAx jam Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-R Handling 0071 jam as an error: RCON JM-ERR-R To display 0071 jam as the error E996-0071.By handling the jam as Lv.2 Details an error, the machine stops, so that loss of the log can be prevented. Be sure to enable the service mode at the user’s site where 0071 jam occurs.After that, if the error E996-0071 occurs, the log which has been backed up can be obtained. When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D Set auto sleep shift time maximum value ASLPMAX Set auto sleep shift time maximum value Lv.1 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 4 hours, 1: 60 minutes JP:0, USA:0, EUR:1, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value

8

8-97

B4-USE Lv.2 Details

ON/OFF of B4 size detection To set whether to detect B4 size paper with Inch configuration machine. If the Trailing Edge Guide Plate is not set properly when LTR size paper is set in a cassette, the machine may recognize the paper size as B4. Since B4 size paper is rarely used with Inch configuration machine, it is set not to detect B4 size paper. When 0 is set, a pop-up message prompting to set the Trailing Edge Guide Plate properly is displayed if the machine recognizes paper size as B4. When 1 is set, B4 size can be detected. The setting is applied to all cassettes except the Multi-purpose Tray. Use case When using B4 size paper with Inch configuration machine Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution The setting is enabled only with Inch configuration machine. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

T-8-44

8-97

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

■■DSPLY-SW

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

UI-COPY Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-BOX Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value UI-SEND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-FAX Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value NWERR-SW Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-98

Display/hide of copy screen To set whether to display or hide the copy function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Display/hide of Inbox screen To set whether to display or hide the Inbox function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: No Inbox function (Storing is not available even with PDL to Inbox.) 1: Inbox function is active 2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with PDL to Inbox despite no display on the Control Panel/remote UI) 1 Display/hide of send screen To set whether to display or hide the SEND function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Display/hide of FAX screen To set whether to display or hide the FAX function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 OFF/ON of network-related error display To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display. When setting "0: OFF" while the machine is not connected to network, the error message "Check the network connection." is not displayed. When using the machine as a copy machine 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1

8

ANIM-SW UI-PRINT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-RSCAN Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-EPRNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value UI-WEB Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value RMT-CNSL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

[Not used] Display/hide of print job screen To set whether to display or hide the print job screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Display/hide of remote scan screen To set whether to display or hide the remote scan screen on the Control Panel. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Display/hide of extended print screen To set whether to display or hide the extended print screen (print screen for print server). Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Display/hide of Web browser screen To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Allow console application connection To set whether to allow connection from a console application (RemoteConsole). When 1 is set, logs of MEAP application can be collected via the console application activated on a PC. When collecting logs of MEAP application 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8-98

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW UI-SBOX Lv.2 Details Use case Display/adj/set range

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel. When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value JP:0, USA:0, EUR:1, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 UI-MEM ON/OFF of memory media screen display Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control Panel. Use case When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 UI-NAVI Dspl/hide introduce to useful features Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide "Introduction to Useful Features" in the main menu. Use case Upon user's request Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 UI-CUSTM ON/OFF of custom menu screen display Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control Panel. Use case When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 1

8

8-99

SCT-BTN Lv.1 Details

Set No. of shortcut buttons upper limit To set an upper limit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear at the top of the Control Panel screen. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution When 1 is set, the number of shortcut buttons that can be set increases from 2 to 4. However, the buttons become smalled in width, and the number of characters that can be displayed decreases. Depending on the MEAP application allocated to the shortcut button, the character strings displayed may not be fully displayed. Since the character strings displayed on the shortcut button are specified by the MEAP application, they cannot be changed. Therefore, if the number of characters are too many, foregoing symptom occurs. To prevent the symptom, a measure such as decreasing the number of characters on the MEAP application side needs to be taken. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: 2 buttons, 1: 4 buttons Default value 0 Supplement/memo The settings for shortcut buttons are made in [Top Buttons Settings] which is displayed by pressing Advanced Menu button in upper right of the screen. USER-DSP Display/hide of login user name Lv.1 Details To set whether to display the name of the user who logs in to the machine on the screen of the Control Panel (upper left area). Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Hide, 1: Display the user name, 2: Display the display name Default value 0 SDTM-DSP Display/hide of auto shutdown time Lv.1 Details To set whether to display "Auto Shutdown Time" in user mode. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution When "Hide" is set, auto shutdown time is reset. (Auto shutdown is not performed.) Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value JP:0, USA:0, EUR:1, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Related user mode Settings/Registration> Preferences> Time/Energy Settings> Auto Shutdown Time

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

8-99

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW WT-WARN Lv.1 Details

Dspl/hide of Wst Tonr Cntner prep mssg To set whether to display the preparation warning message of the Waste Toner Container on the status area of LUI. Use case When there is no need to notify the preparation timing of the Waste Toner Container to the user Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 SCPL-DSP ON/OFF of security policy set scrn dspl Lv.2 Details To set whether to display the security policy setting screen on remote UI. Clearing of the setting values in [Settings/Registration] does not affect the setting (display/hide) of this item. Use case Upon user's request (to use security policy) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution If settings of service mode are initialized by MN-CON while user is using the security policy, the setting value is returned to 0 and the security policy setting screen is hidden. Make the setting again as needed. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> MN-CON T-8-45

8

8-100

■■IMG-FIX COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX FIX-CLN

Set fixing cln sequence execution temp

Lv.2 Details

To set the execution temperature for the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence Change the condition (temperature deference between the main thermistor and the sub thermistors) to execute the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence. When the input value is increased, the execution period is extended. When an image failure due to the Pressure Roller occurs Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. As the short execution interval is set, productivity decreases. Caution 0 to 3 Display/adj/set range 0: 35 deg C , 1: 40 deg C, 2: 45 deg C, 3: 50 deg C 0 Default value Set fix ctrl temp table: Pln 1/Cassette FIX-TEMP To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper 1 mode Lv.1 Details at the cassette feeding When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain Use case paper 1 mode at the cassette feeding Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. (Fixing grade priority)0 to 2: +15 deg C3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 Display/adj/set range deg C unit)7: OFF8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)12 to 14: -15 deg C(Productivity priority) 7 Default value Set fixing control temp table: Thick 1 TEMP-CON To change the fixing control temperature in the thick paper 1 mode Lv.1 Details When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thick Use case paper 1 mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. (Fixing grade priority)0 to 2: +15 deg C3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 Display/adj/set range deg C unit)7: OFF8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)12 to 14: -15 deg C(Productivity priority) 7 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-100

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX TEMPCON2 Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX

Switch of fixing temp mode: Manual feed Switch the fixing temperature mode when plain paper is fed from the manual feed tray. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. (Fixing grade priority)0 to 2: +15 deg C3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 Display/adj/set range deg C unit)7: OFF8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)12 to 14: -15 deg C(Productivity priority) 7 Default value [Not used] FIX-LOW Set fixing temperature: Curl correction FX-S-TMP To change the fixing temperature to correct the curl, the low fixing Lv.1 Details and the paper slip in the fixing N mode When the curl, the low fixing or the paper slip occurs in the fixing N Use case mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. (Fixing grade priority)0 to 2: +15 deg C3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 Display/adj/set range deg C unit)7: OFF8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit)12 to 14: -15 deg C(Productivity priority) 7 Default value Set fixing control temp table: Thick 2 TMP-TBL2 To change the fixing temperature to correct the curl, the low fixing Lv.1 Details and the paper slip in the fixing thick paper mode 2 When the curl, the low fixing or the paper slip occurs in the thick Use case paper mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 14 Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 deg C 3 to 11: +12 to -15 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value

8

8-101

TMP-TBL4 Lv.1 Details

Set fixing control temp table: Thick 3 To change the fixing temperature to correct the curl, the low fixing and the paper slip in the fixing thick paper mode 3 When the curl, the low fixing or the paper slip occurs in the thick Use case paper mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 14 Display/adj/set range 0 to 2: +15 deg C 3 to 11: +12 to -15 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value Thin paper curl correction mode TMP-TBL5 To change the fixing control temperature to correct the curl in the Lv.1 Details thin paper mode For the thin paper which is moist and soft Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 20: OFF Display/adj/set range 1: S-thin paper mode (-10 deg C compared with Thin paper mode table) 2: SS-thin paper mode (-15 deg C compared with Thin paper mode table) 0 Default value Set fix ctrl temp table:Envlp/Crd/S-Crd TMP-TBL6 To change the fixing control temperature in the envelope mode, Lv.1 Details postcard mode and S-postcard mode When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the envelope Use case mode, postcard mode and S-postcard mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 deg C unit) Display/adj/set range 7: OFF 8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-101

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX TMP-TBL7 Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX

Set fix ctrl temp table:Pln ppr 2/Casstt To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper 2 mode at the cassette feeding When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain Use case paper 2 mode at the cassette feeding Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C Display/adj/set range 3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 deg C unit) 7: OFF 8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value Set fix smeared image ctrl mode level RAG-CONT To set level of the mode (skipping) to control smeared image caused Lv.1 Details by fixing area. When a smeared image occurs Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Set RAG-SW to 1 to 3 to enable skipping. Caution 0 to 3 Display/adj/set range 0: No skipping, 1: Small skipping, 2: Medium skipping, 3: Large skipping 2 Default value When this mode is ineffective, use COPIER> ADJUST> DEVELOP> Supplement/memo DE-OFS together. [Not used] FIX-PROT [Not used] FIX-OFST

8

8-102

EDG-WAIT Lv.2 Details

Change of Detection Temp for Fixing Edge To change the detection temperature of the fixing sub thermistors 1/2 to switch the paper edge cooling fans to the full speed control, and to shift the machine control to the down sequence To reduce the switching frequency of the down sequence, to lower Use case the fixing edge temperature, and to prevent the high temperature offset Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 40: +20 deg C, 1: +10 deg C, 2: 0 deg C, 3: -10 deg C, 4: -20 Display/adj/set range deg C 2 Default value Set fixing control tmp table: curled ppr TMP-TBLC To set the control temperature table to the N1 mode or the N3 mode Lv.2 Details so that the paper curl is reduced When the paper is moist so that the paper curl occurs Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 30: Auto Display/adj/set range 1: OFF 2: N1 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes low.) 3: N3 mode with plain paper 1/2 (Target temperature becomes moreover low.) The default differs according to the location. Default value When the setting value is “0”, change the normal temperature Supplement/memo control and the N1 mode depending on environment (temperature/ humidity). N3 mode is only hand-operated setting. Set fixing grade priority mode FIX-PR The productivity lowers 4 ppm in the thick paper mode, thick paper Lv.2 Details H mode and bond paper mode. The productivity lowers 5 ppm in the plain paper mode, thin paper mode and S-thin paper mode when the environment sensor detects less than 18 deg C. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF Display/adj/set range , 1: ON (Fixing grade priority mode) 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

8-102

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX TMP-TB12 Lv.2 Details

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX

Set fix control temp table:Pln/Manual fd To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper 2 mode at the manual feeding When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain Use case paper 2 mode at the manual feeding Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C Display/adj/set range 3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 deg C unit) 7: OFF 8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value Set fix ctrl temp table: Thin paper/cst TMP-TB13 To change the fixing control temperature in the thin paper mode at Lv.2 Details the cassette feeding When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin Use case paper mode at the cassette feeding Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C Display/adj/set range 3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 deg C unit) 7: OFF 8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value Set fix ctrl temp table: Thin/Manual fd TMP-TB14 To change the fixing control temperature in the thin paper mode at Lv.2 Details the manual feeding When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the thin Use case paper mode at the manual feeding Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C Display/adj/set range 3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 deg C unit) 7: OFF 8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value

8

8-103

TMP-TB15 Lv.2 Details

Set fix control temp table: Pln/2-sided To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper mode 1 during the second printing of 2-sided mode When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain Use case paper mode 1 during the second printing of 2-sided mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C Display/adj/set range 3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 deg C unit) 7: OFF 8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value Set fix control temp table:Pln 2/2-sided TMP-TB16 To change the fixing control temperature in the plain paper mode 2 Lv.2 Details during the second printing of 2-sided mode When the poor fixing, paper slip or paper curl occurs in the plain Use case paper mode 2 during the second printing of 2-sided mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 140 to 2: +15 deg C Display/adj/set range 3 to 6: +12 to +3 deg C (3 deg C unit) 7: OFF 8 to 11: -3 to -12 deg C (3 deg C unit) 12 to 14: -15 deg C 7 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

T-8-46

8-103

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR

■■IMG-TR

■■IMG-LSR COPIER>OPTION>IMG-TR

HUM-SW

8-104 COPIER>OPTION>IMG-LSR

COTDPC-D

Switching of environmental fixed mode

Lv.2 Details

Use this item when a failure occurs to the environment sensor. The output level of transfer current is controlled in accordance with the specified environment. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0: Automatic control by the environment sensor Display/adj/set range 1: N/L (temperature: 23 deg C, humidity: 5 %) 2: N/N (temperature: 23 deg C, humidity: 50 %) 3: H/H (temperature: 30 deg C, humidity: 80 %) Make the setting in accordance with the installation environment. The transfer current output level is controlled in accordance with the specified environment. Low-humidity environment: The transfer current output level increases. High-humidity environment: The transfer current output level decreases. 0 Default value [Not used] TRANS-SW Adj of transfer output TROPT-SW To adjust the transfer roller voltage Lv.2 Details - When the moist paper or recycled paper is used so that the Use case transfer failure occurs, decrease the transfer output. - When the thick paper is used so that the transfer failure occurs, increase the transfer output. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -2 to 1-2/-1: Transfer output voltage decreases. Display/adj/set range 0: OFF 1: Transfer output voltage increases. 0 Default value Set transfer bias highland ev mode TR-BS-SW To control the transfer bias in printing so that it does not exceed a Lv.2 Details specified level When the black spots appear on the image (caused by leak occurs Use case at high latitude) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: Normal, 1: Voltage reduction mode 0 Default value

Toner usage reduction mode

Reduce toner usage. (The potential VD is decreased.) Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 20: No reduction1: Reduction by approx. 15 %2: Reduction by approx. 30 % 0 Default value Set scanner last rotation time SC-PR-SW To stop the polygon motor immediately after the last rotation so that Lv.2 Details a noise of the polygon motor is reduced Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF Display/adj/set range , 1: ON 0 Default value

Display/adj/set range

T-8-48

T-8-47

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR

8-104

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

■■IMG-RDR

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-RDR COPIER>OPTION>IMG-RDR

DF-BLINE

8-105

ON/OFF of dust dtct in DADF stream read

Lv.2 Details

To set ON/OFF of dust detection in DADF stream reading mode (measures for black line). When black line occurs due to dust on the Platen Roller Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When “1: ON” is set, black line is resolved, but sharpness of image Caution edge is decreased. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Default value DADF mode dust crrct level adj: ppr intvl DFDST-L1 To adjust dust correction level with dust detection correction control Lv.1 Details that is executed at paper interval in DADF mode. Increase the value in the case of black lines. As the value is larger, the light dust is more likely detected. - When black line occurs due to dust Use case - Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When increasing the value too much, the brightness to detect dust Caution rises.Then, the image may not be corrected to recognize the whole white roller as dust.If the setting value of COPIER>OPTION>IMGRDR>DFDST-L2 is “0”, the correction movement is not executed. 0 to 255 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF 182 Default value Related service mode COPIER>OPTION>IMG-RDR>DFDST-L2 Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust Supplement/memo detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.

8

DFDST-L2 Lv.1 Details

DADF mode dust dtct level adj: after job To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode. Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the dust is less detected. Increase the value in the case of black lines. As the value is larger, the small dust is more likely detected. - When black line occurs due to dust Use case - Upon user’s request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction Caution screen may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared on the image can be detected. When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the image. 0 to 255 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF 182 Default value Related service mode COPIER>OPTION>IMG-RDR>DFDST-L1 Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust Supplement/memo detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected.

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

T-8-49

8-105

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

■■IMG-MCON

8-106 COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-MCON PASCAL Lv.1 Details

Use/no use of auto gradation adj data To set to use/not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT that is generated by auto gradation adjustment (Full/Quick Adjust) control. Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of image formation. When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of Use case PASCAL-related failure Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 Display/adj/set range 0: Initial LUT is used. (Automatic gradation adjustment is not used.) 1: Auto gradation adjustment is used. 2 to 3: Not used 1 Default value Setting of sharpness level of image SHARP To set the setting level (center value) of sharpness of image. Lv.2 Details As the value is increased, the image tends to be sharp, and as the value is decreased, image tends to be soft. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 5 Display/adj/set range 3 Default value Setting of line art processing VP-ART To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF. Lv.2 Details In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as line art, and is converted into vector data. Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data or to recognize it as one line (as a thin line). For the thin line, the line width can be specified. Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a widewidth line as one line rather than as an outline (when you want to prioritize edit operation as a line rather than image quality). Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 99 Display/adj/set range 1 Default value

8

VP-TXT Lv.2 Details

Setting of character vectorization To set vector conversion processing for text on scalable PDF. In the vector conversion processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the field which is recognized as text, and is converted into vector data. In regular vector conversion, function approximation is not used for small text because the image quality is not changed. When the value is changed, function approximation processing is executed for small text, which realizes smooth text although the image quality is changed. Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small text. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 99 Display/adj/set range 1 Default value Set special paper added dot amnt offset LIN-OFST To set the offset amount of dots added to vertical/horizontal direction Lv.1 Details when lines on special paper are thinner than those on plain paper. When printing special paper, compared to plain paper, the amount of dots specified with this item is added. As the value is larger, lines become thicker. When WDREDUCT is 0, this setting is enabled. When the line width of special paper is thinner than the one of plain Use case paper Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 4 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

T-8-50

8-106

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD

■■IMG-SPD

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-SPD COPIER>OPTION>IMG-SPD

CPMKP-SW

8-107

ON/OFF sequence to decrease copy speed

Decrease the copy speed to maintain fixing performance. Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF, 1: ON 0 Set productivity priority mode To lower the fixing temperature for the paper feed start at the paper size change. The priority is given to the productivity so that the fixing offset may occur. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON (Productivity priority mode) 0 Default value Productivity priority mode: post card PSP-PR2 To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade Lv.2 Details To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade in printing Use case the post card Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON (Productivity priority) 0 Default value Productivity priority mode: Thick PSP-PR3 To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade Lv.2 Details To improve the productivity and to reduce the fixing grade in printing Use case the thick paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF (Productivity priority) 1: ON (Fixing grade priority) 2: Auto (Fixing grade priority only in the low humidity environment) 2 Default value

Display/adj/set range Default value PSP-PR1 Lv.2 Details

8

PSP-PR4 Lv.2 Details

Set prdctvty prrty: rotn collation mode To set the productivity priority in the rotation collation mode by lowering the fixing temperature for the paper feed start Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 3 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF 1: Productivity priority 1 (fixing temp: -40 deg C) 2: Productivity priority 2 (fixing temp: -60 deg C) 3: Fixing grade priority (fixing temp: -20 deg C) 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD

T-8-51

8-107

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET

■■CLEANING

■■ENV-SET COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING

FX-CN-SW

8-108 COPIER>OPTION>ENV-SET

ENVP-INT

Set fix pressure roller cln sequence

Lv.2 Details Use case

Lv.1 Details

To set the fixing pressure roller cleaning sequence Upon user’s request (When the fixing motor sound which is generated in the cleaning sequence is claimed from user) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF Display/adj/set range , 1: ON 1 Default value T-8-52

8

Temp, humid/Fix Roll temp log get cycle

To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside the machine or the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller. As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute. Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following: COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT At trouble analysis Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 480 Display/adj/set range minute Unit 60 Default value Related service mode COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT Set image smear prevention mode IMG-BLD1 To warm around the Developing Assembly and the Photosensitive Lv.2 Details Drum with the following operation to prevent image smear.When either 1, 2 or 3 is set, “Clean Drum” is displayed in user mode, and user can execute only setting 2.When the value is increased, the effect becomes big. When image smear occurs Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 30: OFF1: Two minutes extension in the initial rotation2: Four Display/adj/set range minutes extension in the initial rotation3: Six minutes extension in the initial rotation 0 Default value Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Clean Drum> Start Related UI menu Change of the charge frequency IMG-BLD2 The quantity of electric discharge decreases by lowering charged Lv.2 Details frequency.Therefore, the electric discharge product generated on the drum decreases. - When the drum that an image smear occurred is replaced by a Use case new drum- When the image flow is improved more by using the image smear prevention mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF, 1: ON Display/adj/set range 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET

8-108

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

COPIER>OPTION>ENV-SET IMG-BLD3 Lv.2 Details

Black band mode To prevent the image smear in the high humidity, the cleaning ability of the drum surface is raised by this mode and the deteriorated toner is removed.When the value is increased, the effect becomes big. When the image smear occurs. Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The toner consumption is increased and it influences the dirt of the Caution transfer roller. 0 to 30: default (no black band)1: The making of the black band at Display/adj/set range the last rotation for 75 jobs once2: The making of the black band at the last rotation for 50 jobs once3: The making of the black band at the last rotation for 25 jobs once 0 Default value T-8-53

8-109

■■FEED-SW COPIER>OPTION>FEED-SW TFL-RTC

Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full

Lv.1 Details

To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after recovering the Delivery Tray that reaches the full level. When 0 (default) is set, a job is output from the delivery destination again from which the last job was delivered. When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which priority is set as high at “Output Tray Settings” in user mode. When changing the delivery tray Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output. 1: Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among the delivery trays. 0 Default value Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray Related UI menu Settings Set separation priority mode SP-SW To set the separation priority mode for using thin paper or plain paper Lv.2 Details (2nd side).Setting the value to 1 enables the following separation control in the thin paper mode. Transfer leading edge weak bias is OFF. Static Eliminator leading edge strong bias is ON.Setting the value to 2 enables the following separation in plain paper (N1 mode). Transfer leading edge weak bias of plain paper (2nd side) is OFF. When transfer separation failure occurs in thin paper or plain paper Use case (2nd side). Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 20: OFF1: Separation priority mode (thin paper)2: Separation priority mode (plain paper (2nd side)) 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER >OPTION>IMG-FX >TMP-TBLC [Not used] PK-SP-SW T-8-54

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW

8-109

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

■■NETWORK COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK RAW-DATA

Setting of received data print mode

Lv.2 Details

To set print mode for the received image data. This item is used to identify the cause whether it’s due to image data or image processing in the case of trouble with received image. When received image trouble occurs Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to set the value back to “0: Normal print operation” after Caution recovering from the trouble. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image processing 0 Default value No. of max print lines at IFAX reception IFAX-LIM To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed when Lv.2 Details receiving IFAX. Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file data in the case of receiving an error e-mail or failure in interpretation of the context. Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail text without attached file. When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited 500 Default value Setting of SMTP TX port number SMTPTXPN To set SMTP transmission port number. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 25 Default value Setting of SMTP reception port number SMTPRXPN To set SMTP reception port number. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 25 Default value

8

8-110

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK Setting of POP3 reception port number POP3PN To set POP3 reception port number. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 110 Default value Specification of SEND port (FTP) number FTPTXPN To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND. Lv.1 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 65535 21 Setting of network data transfer speed To set the data transfer speed when the service network is connected. When downloading the firmware through network, use 0 in the normal operation. When fixed to 100Base-TX/10Base-T for any reason, change the setting. When fixing the communication speed Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Auto, 1: 100Base-TX, 2: 10Base-T 0 Default value [Not used] STS-PORT [Not used] CMD-PORT Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth NS-CMD5 To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of Lv.2 Details SMTP authentication. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 Default value SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function Supplement/memo is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated.

Display/adj/set range Default value NW-SPEED Lv.2 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-110

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK NS-GSAPI Lv.2 Details

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK

Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 Default value SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function Supplement/memo is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated. Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth NS-NTLM To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP Lv.2 Details authentication. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 Default value SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function Supplement/memo is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated. Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry NS-PLNWS To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at Lv.2 Details the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is encrypted. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 Default value SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function Supplement/memo is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated.

8

8-111

NS-PLN Lv.2 Details

Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the communication packet is not encrypted. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 Default value SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function Supplement/memo is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated. Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth NS-LGN To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP Lv.2 Details authentication. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used 0 Default value SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication function Supplement/memo is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail transmission only when it’s authenticated. HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application MEAP-PN To set HTTP port number of MEAP application. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected. Caution Otherwise, you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.) Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 8000 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-111

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK SSH-SW Lv.2 Details Use case

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK

ON/OFF of SSH server function To set ON/OFF of SSH server function. As needed (This mode is used for the Japanese models only and not used with overseas models (outside Japan)). Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Default value SSH: Secure Shell. A program for logging into other PC through Supplement/memo network, executing command from a remote PC, or moving files to other PC. Data on network is encrypted, so that a series of operation can be performed securely even through internet. Set to allow remote login to SSH server RMT-LGIN To set whether to allow remote login from the remote host (SSH Lv.2 Details client: DA) to debug console of the SSH server. As needed (This mode is used for the Japanese models only and not Use case used with overseas models (outside Japan)). Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This item is enabled when the setting value of SSH-SW is ON. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW (level2) DA: Digital Accessory Supplement/memo Regeneration setting of SSH server key RE-PKEY To set whether to regenerate the SSH server pair key at the start of Lv.2 Details the machine. With the setting to regenerate the key, the SSH server host regenerates the pair key (private key/public key) at power-off/on, output to key file and store in HDD. As needed (This mode is used for the Japanese models only and not Use case used with overseas models (outside Japan)). Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - This item is enabled when the setting value of SSH-SW is ON.Caution Start of the machine might be approx. 3 to 4 minutes longer than the normal operation because regeneration process takes time. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not regenerated, 1: Generated 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW (level2)

8

8-112

U-NAME Lv.2 Details

Setting of SSH server login user name To set the login user name which enables to connect to the SSH server. Only one user (host) is allowed to login. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and select the entry field. Keyboard is displayed. 2) Enter the character, and then press OK key. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW is 1 Caution (ON). Display/adj/set range 0 to 8 characters (1-byte alphanumeric characters) gN3Fp2A Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW (leve2) Set user password for SSH server connect U-PASWD To set user password required for connecting to the SSH server.The Lv.2 Details entered characters are displayed as asterisks (*). Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and select the entry field. Keyboard is displayed. 2) Enter the character, and then press OK key. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW is 1 Caution (ON). Display/adj/set range 0 to 8 characters (1-byte alphanumeric characters) Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW (leve2) Set of TOT status connection port number CHNG-STS To set the port number for status connection with T.O.T. Lv.2 Details When the Service NAVI is used Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535 20010 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT Set of TOT command connection port No. CHNG-CMD To set the port number for command connection with T.O.T. Lv.2 Details When the Service NAVI is used Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535 20000 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-112

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK MEAP-SSL Lv.2 Details

HTTPS port setting of MEAP To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP of MEAP. When specifying the setting of HTTPS port for MEAP Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 8443 Default value Setting of LPD port number LPD-PORT To set the LPD port number. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535 515 Default value LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making Supplement/memo prints through network. Setting of sleep notification execution WUEV-SW To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application Lv.2 Details (imageWARE, etc) on the network when shifting to/recovering from the sleep mode. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Notified, 1: Not notified 0 Default value Setting of sleep notification interval WUEV-INT To set the interval of sleep notification. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is Caution set to 0: Notified. Display/adj/set range 60 to 65535 sec Unit 600 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW

8

8-113

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK Port number setting for sleep notice WUEV-POT To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is set to 0: Notified. Display/adj/set range 1 to 65535 11427 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW Setting of sleep notification range WUEV-RTR To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep Lv.2 Details notification. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is Caution set to 0: Notified. Display/adj/set range 0 to 254 3 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW Recovery time setting after sleep notice WUEN-LIV To set the time from the sleep start from network without job Lv.2 Details assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode. When setting the startup time after sleep notification Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 10 to 600 sec Unit 15 Default value

Caution

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-113

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK IFX-CHIG Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK

Set operation by IFAX recv mail content To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content, so that the mail is not printed/forwarded when the characters in the text is less than the number of specified characters. This machine can output blank paper because some senders send e-mail text consists of linefeed codes only. In such case, specify 2 (number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank paper. In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e-mail (body) text is less than the specified value while no TIFF file is attached. As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in e-mail body text is increased by 1 character. When reducing print of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no Caution print of e-mail (body) text if the number of characters is less than the specified value. Display/adj/set range 0 to 999 0: E-mail (body) text is not ignored. character Unit 0 Default value 1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control Supplement/memo codes (such as linefeed code, etc) are included in the number of characters. Setting of DNS transfer priority DNSTRANS To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS Lv.1 Details query. In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server supports IPv4, it takes time because of timeout when executing DNS query with priority on IPv6. Giving priority on query by IPv4 can shorten the time. When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6 Use case because the DNS server supports IPv4 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: IPv4, 1: IPv6 1 Default value

8

8-114

PROXYRES Lv.2 Details

Setting of proxy response to Windows To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep mode. When executing status response for query from Windows correctly Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response 1 Default value Setting of sleep recovery protocol WOLTRANS To set the protocol for recovery from sleep mode according to the Lv.1 Details value of WOL (Wake On LAN) trans. Reception of a specific network packet is one of the requirements for the device to recover from sleep mode. When the number of network protocols supported by the device increases, the types of network packets which activate recovery from sleep mode vary. However, there is a possibility that the existing network protocol is actually used. Select the type of network packet which activates recovery from sleep mode according to the environment where the device is used. When selecting protocol for sleep recovery Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 3 1: WSD and SNMP, 2: WSD and CPCA, 3: CPCA and SNMP 1 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-114

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK 802XTOUT Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK

Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication. If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time for response from the authentication server. When response from the authentication server is slow/fast Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 10 to 120 sec Unit 30 Default value Setting of IKE retry times IKERETRY To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the Lv.1 Details communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 1 Default value IKE: Internet Key Exchange Supplement/memo Initialization of SPD value SPDALDEL To initialize all the SPD values that are under management. Lv.2 Details SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM. At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Default value SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association). Supplement/memo SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM needs to be cleared in the case of mismatch in SPD value. ON/OFF of Network Configurator function NCONF-SW To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function. Lv.1 Details If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote attack through network. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Default value Network Configurator function is a function to be used for Supplement/memo communication with NetSpot Device Installer, etc., and the network setting can be changed from the remote.

8

8-115

IKEINTVL Lv.1 Details

Setting of IKE retry interval To set retry interval in the case of no response from the communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 30 sec Unit 5 Default value IKE: Internet Key Exchange Supplement/memo [Not used] IPSDEBLV Mode setting at 1W sleep SP-LINK Switch to execute 10base-T standby as default to realize the standby Lv.1 Details power 1W in sleep mode. When shifting to sleep mode after negotiation (same as conventional Use case machines) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Shift to sleep mode with 10base-T 1: Shift to sleep mode after negotiation 0 Default value Set of SMB client authentication method LM-LEVEL To set the authentication method (LM, NTLMv1, NTLMv2) that the Lv.1 Details SMB client uses for authentication. In SMB authentication, authentication is generally made by the authentication method with higher level, and if it fails, the authentication level is lowered. (NLTMv2 => NLTMv1 => LM) It is possible to limit the authentication level by setting 1 or 2 to avoid using the authentication method with lower level. Upon user’s request Use case Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Authentication is made by LM, NTLMv1 and NTLMv2 1: Authentication is made by NTLMv1 and NTLMv2 2: Authentication is made by NTLMv2 0 Default value Windows NT LAN Manager authentication: A user authentication Supplement/memo method for network logon, which was generally used in the OS for Windows NT Series prior to Windows NT 4.0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-115

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK AFS-JOB Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK

Set of FAX server job reception port To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends jobs. When changing the job reception port of the fax server Use case Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 20317 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT Set of FAX client event reception port AFC-EVNT To set the event notification reception port of a fax client. Lv.1 Details When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client Use case Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 29400 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB Setting of IP address block mode ILOGMODE To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of IP Lv.1 Details block. When 0 is set, the machine responds to ARP, ICMP multicast and broadcast which have no direct relation, and consequently the number of logs is increased. When 1 is set, the machine filters TCP, UDP and ICMP unicast only. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 0 to 3 0: All protocols support mode 1: TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast support mode 2, 3: Not used 0 Default value Set of IP address block log hold time ILOGKEEP To set the retention time from the log time of IP block. Lv.1 Details When access is made again from a same IP address which was blocked before, if it is within the retention time of the previous log, its log is not recorded. If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record of the UI might be filled with its logs. If the user considers that a single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer retention time. Upon user’s request Use case Display/adj/set range 0 to 48 0: 1 minute (special mode) , 1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours 1 Default value

8

8-116

IPTBROAD Lv.1 Details

Set to allow broad/multicast TX To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets. Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is permitted without specifying an exception address. It is permitted within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the IPv4/v6 transmission filter. Set “1: Disabled” when the user does not want to send them. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used 0 Default value Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND PFWFTPRT When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets from Lv.1 Details a specific remote PC are rejected, SYN is returned to the port 113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113. However, since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased and the performance is lowered. When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking packets. When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports Use case authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-116

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK IPMTU Lv.1 Details

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK

Setting of MTU size of network packet To set MTU size of network packet. This item is used when performing SEND communication between locations connected with Ethernet in a field environment where MTU black hole problem occurs. When MTU black hole problem occur Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. With IPv6, use of MTU which size is less than 1280 bytes is not Caution recommended by RFC.Therefore, when setting IPv6 to ON and MTU to 7 or smaller, communication using IPv6 may not be available. Display/adj/set range 1 to 10 1: 600 byte, 2: 700 byte, ..., 9: 1400 byte, 10: 1500 byte 100 byte Unit 10 Default value MTU: A unit of transmission showing the maximum value of data Supplement/memo which can be sent per 1 transfer (1 frame) in a network MTU black hole: A problem which occurs when ICMP packet is being filtered by firewall, etc. (Since the message does not reach the sender, the sender is not aware of the packet being lost, which then results in time-out.) Set of DDNS periodical update interval DDNSINTV DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current iR, Lv.1 Details so the registered contents are deleted in an environment where the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals. To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the registered contents. When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 48 0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47: 47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour interval hour Unit 24 Default value

8

8-117

SIPAUDIO Lv.2 Details

Sw SIP session establishment procedure To switch whether to establish audio session or t.38 session as a first session for establishing SIP session. The following shows the normal procedure for IPFAX in an intranet Use case environment:(1) Establish SIP session with audio first.(2) Switch to SIP session with t.38 to perform IPFAX.However, this procedure is not specified by the standards; therefore, there is a possibility that SIP server or device which does not perform IPFAX with the procedure shown above (will) exist.When connecting to SIP server/device where it starts from SIP session with t.38, switch the setting of this mode. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 10: Establish SIP session with audio first1: Establish SIP session with t.38 first 0 Default value Switching of NGN internal/external line SIPINOUT To switch whether to set external line or internal line for URI in an Lv.2 Details NGN environment. When using NGN line Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 10: External line, 1: Internal line 0 Default value Switching of protocol for Regsit SIPREGPR To switch a protocol for Regist which differs from that for Proxy. Lv.2 Details With UI setting, the same protocol is used for communicating with Use case Regist and Proxy server.Setting of Regist server and Proxy server can be made separately so that there will be a need to use different protocols for communicating with Regist server and Proxy server depending on customer or environment. This switch enables to forcibly specify the protocol for communicating with Regist server on the assumption of such cases. Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 30: Regist server performs transmission with protocol comply with UI settings1: Regist server performs transmission with UDP2: Regist server performs transmission with TCP3: Regist server performs transmission with SSL 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-117

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK PRCLTYPE Lv.2 Details Use case

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK

Setting of dedicated protocol type To switch the type of dedicated protocol. Upon customer’s request (Assumed to make change from the default value only for customization.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 10: TYPE 0 (Compatible in conventional manner), 1: TYPE 1 0 Default value Switch for VLAN participation packets VLAN-SW Switch for sending packets for participating dynamic VLAN at startup. Lv.2 Details For the packets to be sent, a static IP address is set as the sender. When allowing a device whose IP address has not been decided yet Use case to participate in VLAN by sending packets for participating dynamic VLAN at startup Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 10: Packets for participating in dynamic VLAN are not sent.1: Packets for participating in dynamic VLAN are sent. 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> VLAN-PKT VLAN: Virtual LAN Supplement/memo A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the HUB, switch connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc. Set of number of VLAN packets to send VLAN-PKT To set the number of packets for participating in VLAN to be sent from Lv.2 Details the Main Controller when the LAN cable is connected or when the device recovers from deep sleep. When setting the number of packets to be sent with the setting made Use case to send packets for participating in VLAN Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. This setting is ignored when the setting is made not to send packets Caution for participating in VLAN (VLAN-SW=0). Display/adj/set range 0 to 10VLAN participation packets of three times as much as the setting value are sent.Example) Setting value 13 (=1*3) sets of VLAN participation packet are sent. 1 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> VLAN-SW VLAN: Virtual LAN Supplement/memo A method for realizing grouping of terminals depending on the HUB, switch connection port, MAC address, protocol, etc.

8

8-118

SSLMODE Lv.2 Details

Setting of HTTP/HTTPS port open/close To set whether to open or close HTTP/HTTPS port. When 1 is set while [Use HTTP] is ON and [SSL Settings] is OFF in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed. When 2 is set while both [Use HTTP] and [SSL Settings] are ON in Settings/Registration menu, HTTP port is closed whereas HTTPS port is opened. When limiting the port to open because of security concern Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Normal, 1: Open HTTP port (80/8000) only, 2: Open HTTPS port (443/8443) only 0 Default value Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> Use HTTP Related user mode Management Settings> License/Other> MEAP Settings> SSL Settings Allow weak encryption algorithm for SSL SSLSTRNG "To set whether to allow using weak encryption algorithm for SSL. Lv.2 Details When 1 is set, weak encryption algorithm cannot be used." When prohibiting weak encryption algorithm because of security Use case concern Adj/set/operate method "1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch." Display/adj/set range "0 to 1 0: Normal mode, 1: Secure mode ( Not used TLS_RSA_WITH_ RC4_128_SHA, TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5)" 0 Default value Set of reception timeout at printing RAWTOUT To set the duration of time before disconnecting the connection when Lv.2 Details packet reception is delayed during printing with RAW/LPR setting. If connection is not disconnected after making prints from a Windows PC via network, failure such as unable to make print from other devices occurs. In such case, shorten the timeout time so that connection is disconnected earlier. When failure (unable to make print, etc.) occurs on the network where Use case a Windows PC is connected Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 5 1: 1 minute, 2: 3 minutes, 3: 5 minutes, 4: 10 minutes, 5: 60 minutes 1 min Unit 5 Default value [For customization] RAW-PORT 9100 Lv.2 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

8-118

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

■■CUSTOM

COPIER>OPTION>NETWORK SSL30 Lv.2 Details

ON/OFF of SSL 3.0 To set whether to use SSL 3.0 with the installed machine. Set the value to 0 when not using SSL 3.0 because of security concern. Upon user's request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Default value

COPIER>OPTION>CUSTOM SC-L-CNT

Set large paper judgmt reference at scan

Lv.1 Details

T-8-55

8

8-119

To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use B4 or LTR to determine large size. The threshold of B4 is determined by the combination with the setting of B4-L-CNT. SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size, paper with B4 or smaller is determined as small size. SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as large size, paper smaller than B4 is determined as small size. As needed Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: B4 size, 1: LTR size 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT Set batch chng of factory setting values FACT-DEF To set the batch change of factory setting values for customization. Lv.2 Details 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Set auto add to e-mail Subject/File name MAILYEAR To set whether to add date, time and split number automatically to Lv.2 Details the end of a character string of e-mail Subject/File name. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: Following the current setting, 1: Adding 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

8-119

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>CUSTOM BOX-BKUP Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value ABK-TOOL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo FLK-RD Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value TMP-TBL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Set to allow Inbox backup data restore To set whether to permit restoration of Inbox backup data. Machine subject to restoration can be selected from either the same model or the next model. When restoration is completed normally, the setting value is returned to 0. At replacement, permit to restore backup data of other model (some models). 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Permit restoration only from own device to own device (same model only) 1: Permit restoration only from old device to new device (next model only) 0 Allow access from address book mntc tool To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance tool. When executing import from the address book maintenance tool 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 0 Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ. Flicker reduction mode To change the fixing temperature control to cancel fluorescent flicking during printing When the fluorescent flicking occurs during printing 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF , 1: ON 0 Shortening FCOT To lower the fixing temperature for the paper feed start during the first copying (-40 deg C) To shorten the first copy time, the fixing temperature for the paper feed start is lowered (-40 deg C). 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 10: OFF , 1: ON 0

8-120

■■USER COPIER>OPTION>USER COPY-LIM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SLEEP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode Supplement/memo SIZE-DET Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Default value COUNTER2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Setting of upper limit for copy To set the upper limit value for copy. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 9999 999 Setting of auto sleep function To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Setting/Registration> Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time The time to shift to the sleep mode can be set in the Setting/ Registration (Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Auto Sleep Time). ON/OFF of original size detect function To set ON/OFF of original size detection function. Upon user's request (glare of the scan lamp, etc) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Display of software counter 1 To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request N/A (Display only) Display only. No change is available. The default differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 2 To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 The default differs according to the location.

T-8-56

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-120

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER COUNTER3 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER4 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER5 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value COUNTER6 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DATE-DSP Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode

8-121 COPIER>OPTION>USER

Setting of software counter 3 To set counter type for software counter 3 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 The default differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 4 To set counter type for software counter 4 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 The default differs according to the location. Setting of software counter 5 To set counter type for software counter 5 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0 Setting of software counter 6 To set counter type for software counter 6 on the Counter Check screen. Upon user/dealer's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 999 0 Setting of data/time display format To set date/time display format according to the country or region. After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is reflected to the followings: Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Date/ Time Settings, and report output. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY The default differs according to the location. Preferences> Timer/Energy Settings> Date/Time Settings

8

MB-CCV Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Control card usage limit for Mail Box To restrict use of control card for Mail Box. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Unlimited, 1: Limited Default value 1 CONTROL Charge setting of PDL job Lv.1 Details To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control card). Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: No charge, 1: Charge Default value 0 B4-L-CNT Count setting of B4 size Lv.1 Details To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 6 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small size. Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper smaller than B4 size as small size. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Small size, 1: Large size Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION > CUSTOM > SC-L-CNT TRY-STP Set of suspension at full Finisher Tray Lv.2 Details To set whether to suspend or continue output when the full Finisher Tray is detected. When 1 is set, the detection of full stacking by the number of sets is ignored to continue output in the staple mode. When full stacking is detected by the height of the tray, the output is stopped. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Detection of full stacking by the number of sets or detection of height, 1: Detection of height only Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-121

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER MF-LG-ST Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode Supplement/memo CNT-DISP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value PH-D-SEL Lv.2 Details

Use case

Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode COPY-JOB Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-122 COPIER>OPTION>USER

Display/hide of long strip mode To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button. When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy> Options screen and the long strip paper becomes available. Upon user's request (use of long strip original or long strip paper) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Copy> Options Up to 630 mm length paper is supported when DADF is used. Display/hide of serial No. To set whether to display or hide the serial No. on the Counter Check screen. When setting to display/hide serial No. on the Counter Check screen 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Display, 1: Hide 0 Set dither matrix at screen processing To set the screen dither matrix to be used for halftoning processing at the time of copy output, B&W Inbox scan output and B&W SEND output. When moire occurs frequently, set to "1: 141 lines". When the setting is changed, the number of PG lines to be output at PASCAL control is also changed. When moire frequently occurs at the time of copy output, B&W Inbox scan output and B&W SEND output. Especially when moire frequently occurs in the halftone density area of photo and image gradation areas 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: 134 lines, 1: 141 lines 1 COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SL2 Setting of copy job reservation To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/ Coin Manager is used. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled 0

8

OP-SZ-DT Lv.2 Details

Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is opened. When "0: OFF" is set, enter original size manually from the Control Panel. When "1: ON" is set, original size is detected automatically. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 NW-SCAN Setting of network scan function usage Lv.2 Details To set to enable/disable use of network scan function. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Do not change this mode in Japan. - For PS/PCL machines for overseas (outside Japan), fix the setting value as "1: Enabled". For others, permit the use. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled HDCR-DSP Setting of HDD complete delete method Lv.2 Details To set the deletion method of HDD data complete deletion function. Use case When switching the deletion method in HDD data complete deletion mode Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 1 to 4 1: 1-time deletion with 0 data, 2: 1-time deletion with random data, 3: 3-time deletion with random data, 4: DOD Default value 1 Supplement/memo HDD data complete deletion function: a function to completely delete data in HDD by overwriting with 0 (null) data or random data to the file data when logically deleting file on HDD (deleting management information data).

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-122

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER

8-123 COPIER>OPTION>USER

JOB-INVL Lv.2 Details

Job intvl setting at interruption copy To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy. Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous output of the next job. Paper interval becomes longer when starting pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous job is delivered. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job 1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is delivered all. 2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered all. (For all jobs) Default value 0 PR-PSESW Display/hide of output Stop button Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide [Stop] button on the Status Monitor screen. Use case - Upon user's request - When promptly stopping the print job in operation or under reservation Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 IDPRN-SW Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr Lv.1 Details To set the job type that advances the department management counter. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: PRINT category: Inbox Print, Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print COPY category: COPY 1: PRINT category: Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print COPY category: COPY, Inbox Print Default value 0

8

PCL-COPY Lv.2 Details

Set of PCL COPIES command control method To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL. Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or use the same control method of non-Canon-made PCL. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of COPIES command that is specified for each page to control on a page basis) 1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value of COPIES command, which is specified for page 1 at the time of Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL at the time of non-sorted mode) 2 to 65535: For future use Default value 0 CNT-SW Set default dspl items on charge counter Lv.1 Details To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter Check screen. For details of each type, refer to the Service Manual. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0:Type1 , 1:Type2 Default value 0 BCNT-AST Set of box print charge target job Lv.1 Details To set the job type that advances the count in box print with NE Controller (ASSIST). Use case When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the box print with NE Controller Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: PDL job, 1: Copy job Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-123

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER PRJOB-CP Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo DOC-REM Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value DPT-ID-7 Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value RUI-RJT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-124 COPIER>OPTION>USER

Set count TX at RX/report print To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the charging management device at the time of reception print or report print. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: No transmission, 1: Transmission 0 Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made control card Dspl/hide of original removal message To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original when scanning with DADF without opening/closing DADF after scanning with the Copyboard. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/ authentication of department ID. With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required as well as entry of department ID. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry 0 Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid authentication from remote UI 3 times. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected 0

8

FREG-SW Lv.2 Details

Dspl/hide of MEAP counter free rgst area To set whether to display or hide the free register area of MEAP counter for SEND Use case At trouble analysis Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution - Do not use this At the normal service. - Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Supplement/memo Individual count-up (counter advance) of MEAP application is available in the free register area of MEAP counter. IFAX-SZL Setting of IFAX send size limit Lv.2 Details To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that does not go through the server. With the setting to restrict the data size, there will be #830 error in the case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value. In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of transmission data is always restricted. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Limited, 1: Not limited (Restriction applies when data goes through the server.) Default value 1 Related user mode Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending Supplement/memo Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode.

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-124

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER IFAX-PGD Lv.2 Details

Set page split TX at IFAX Simple mode TX To set to enable/disable split-data transmission on a page basis in the case that the transmission size in IFAX Simple mode exceeds the upper limit value. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to get approval from the user by explaining the following: - No guarantee for page order on the reception side - There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between pages. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-P Related user mode Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data Size for Sending Supplement/memo Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode. MEAPSAFE Setting of MEAP safe mode Lv.2 Details To set safe mode for MEAP platform. MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode. In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system application, which starts with initial state, is activated. This mode enables obtaining log for cause analysis of MEAP failure. Use case Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to be activated due to resource confliction between MEAP applications, service registration or use order. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode Default value 0 AFN-PSWD Access limit setting to user mode Lv.2 Details To set to restrict password entry when accessing to the user mode. With the setting to enable this mode, password entry of system administrator is required after pressing Settings/Registration key. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required Default value 0

8

8-125 COPIER>OPTION>USER

PTJAM-RC Lv.2 Details

Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs with PDL print. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted Default value 1 PDL-NCSW Card mngm setting for PDL print job Lv.2 Details To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by the Card Reader. With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches the department ID. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: PDL print is available with no card inserted. 1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the department ID in the case that the card is inserted. Default value 0 SLP-SLCT Usage setting of network applications Lv.2 Details With the setting to use network-related application, the machine can be recovered through network because it does not move to sleep mode 1. For this machine to recover from sleep mode 1 through network, a particular packet needs to be received; however, the existing networkrelated application does not send this packet. With the setting not to use the network-related application, this machine cannot recover from sleep mode 1 through network when it gets into sleep mode 1. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Do not use this at the normal service. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is available.) 1: Used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is not available.) Default value 0 Supplement/memo Network-related application: NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-125

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER

8-126 COPIER>OPTION>USER

PS-MODE Lv.2 Details

Compatible mode setting at PS usage To set the image processing at PS print. Although the same line width is set, it may differ depending on the drawing position. By selecting 8, line widths which vary depending on the drawing position can be uniformed. Use case At replacement Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 65535 0 to 7: Spare 8: Strokeadjustment is enabled. 9 to 65535: Spare Default value 0 CNCT-RLZ Setting of connection serialize function Lv.2 Details Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement because the machine does not receive job data from other connection until it completes job data reception from the current connection. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0 Supplement/memo Connection: Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts (PC, etc). Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. This is to prevent job interruption from other PC by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission). JA-FUNC ON/OFF of job archive function Lv.2 Details To set ON/OFF of job archive function. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is available (in service mode). This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job archive. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Default value 0

8

JA-JOB Lv.2 Details

Setting of job archive target job To set the job type subject to job archive. With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed when executing the target job. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is available (in service mode). This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job archive. Display/adj/set range 0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> JA-FUNC LDAP-SW Retrieval condition set for LDAP server Lv.1 Details To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server. Use case When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 5 0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the next, 3: Not equivalent to the next, 4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes with the next Default value 4 Supplement/memo LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP server enables to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server and the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc. Registration is available by the following: Set Destination> Register LDAP Server FROM-OF Deletion of mail sender's address Lv.1 Details To set whether to delete the sender's address (From) at the time of e-mail transmission. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Retained, 1: Deleted Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-126

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER

8-127 COPIER>OPTION>USER

DOM-ADD Lv.2 Details

Additional entry of mail destn domain To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the sending address (To) entered at the time of e-mail transmission. If specifying "xxx.com" as a domain in user mode in advance, just entering "aura" enables to display "[email protected]" when sending e-mail. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Not added, 1: Added Default value 0 FILE-OF File send prohibition to entered address Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit address entry at the time of file transmission. File transmission is not available by entering the address because of no display of "File" on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Default value 0 MAIL-OF Mail send prohibition to entered address Lv.1 Details To set to prohibit address entry at the time of e-mail transmission. E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because of no display of "E-Mail" on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Default value 0

8

IFAX-OF Lv.1 Details

IFAX send prohibition to entered address To set to prohibit address entry at the time of I-Fax transmission. IFAX transmission is not available by entering the address because of no display of "I-Fax" on the transmission screen. The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled Default value 0 LDAP-DEF Initial condtn set of LDAP server search Lv.1 Details To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at the time of LDAP server Details search. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 6 0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5: No registration 1 (any setting), 6: No registration 2 (any setting) Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> LDAP-SW FREE-DSP Display/hide of charge disable screen Lv.2 Details To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management screen for switching between charge and no charge. The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available for free (store manager mode) by temporarily releasing the charging system. Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched with the software switch when it is set to display the Use Charge Management screen in Settings/Registration. Use case When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily releasing the charging system Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Related user mode Management Settings> Charge Management> Use Charge Management

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-127

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER TNRB-SW Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CLR-TIM Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value HDCR-DSW Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Related user mode SCALL-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8-128 COPIER>OPTION>USER

Setting of Toner Cntner counter display To set whether to display or hide the Toner Container counter on the Counter Check screen. When not showing the screen to users 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Hide, 1: Display (Toner Container counter only), 2: Not use 0 Set of HDD Entry Kit data delete timing To set the timing to completely delete the data when HDD Encryption Kit is used. Selecting 0 may reduce the job processing speed because page data that has been already processed is deleted while the other job is in process, causing overload to CPU and HDD access. Selecting 1 improves the job processing speed because the process is executed after a job is completed. Upon request to improve the job processing speed 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: During job process, 1: After the job is completed 0 Dspl/hide of HDD complete delete ON/OFF To set whether to display or hide "Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion" in user mode. With this setting, HDD data complete deletion function is available with ON/OFF button on the screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 1 Management Settings> Data Management> HDD Data Complete Deletion> Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion Display/hide of repair request button To set whether to display or hide the repair-request button on the Control Panel. When the sales company supports service by the repair-request button 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0

8

SCALLCMP Lv.1 Details

Set of repair request complete notice With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent to UGW server to clear the repair-request status that is retained internally. Use case Service technician uses this mode after completing repair. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 Default value 0 USBH-DSP Display/hide of "Use USB Host" Lv.2 Details To set whether to display "Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host". By selecting "1: Display", whether to use USB host on USB Settings screen can be selected. Use case When switching to display or hide "Use USB Host" on USB Settings screen Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Related user mode Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use USB Host USBM-DSP Dspl/hide of USB ex-memory device driver Lv.2 Details To set whether to display "Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device". By selecting "0: Hide", the item is not displayed, and the user administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the USB external memory device. Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of "Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device", set 0 after the specified setting is completed. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 Related user mode Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-128

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER

8-129 COPIER>OPTION>USER

USBI-DSP Lv.2 Details

Dspl/hide of USB input device driver set To set whether to display "Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device". By selecting "0: Hide", the item is not displayed, and the user administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the USB input device. Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of "Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device", set 0 after the specified setting is completed. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 Related user mode Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device CTCHKDSP Display/hide of counter print Lv.1 Details To set whether to display or hide "Print List" on the Counter Check screen. Model name, model number information, counter check date and counter information can be output as a total count management report. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 1 DFLT-ADJ Tgt Auto Adj Gradation initial dspl set Lv.1 Details To set the initial display of the target Full Adjust/Quick Adjust items on Auto Adjust Gradation screen of user mode. This setting is enabled when EFI Controller is connected or only on the copy model which Adobe PS/PDF is available. When 0 is set, the adjustment item is not displayed. When 1 is set, the target adjustment item (Copy/Printer/Both) is displayed to select. Use case When switching the initial display at the time of Auto Adjust Gradation Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Hide, 1: Display, 2 to 3: Not used Default value 0 Related user mode Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation

8

USBR-DSP Lv.2 Details

Dspl/hide of USB infrared device driver To set whether to display "Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device." Use case When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of "Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device," set 0 after the specified setting is completed. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value 0 Related user mode Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device POL-SCAN Dspl/hide Rights Management Server set Lv.1 Details When "1: Display" is set, the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed. While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, it is possible to hide if not necessary. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display Default value JP:1, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-129

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER

8-130 COPIER>OPTION>USER

PH-D-SL2 Lv.2 Details

Set halftone process in text/photo mode When copying or B&W scanning to Inbox in text/photo mode, halftone processing of the image which reproduces gradation of text and photo judgment areas can be specified with this setting. Set to 1 when jaggy occurs or request to use the same half toning method (text area) as conventional one is raised. Set to 2 when moire occurs frequently or request to use the same half toning method as conventional B&W MFP method is raised. Even 0 is set, TBIC is used for text judgment area and low screen ruling for photo judgment area at the time of B&W Inbox scan. The setting is disabled when the B&W Inbox scanning density is set to auto. Use case - When jaggy occurs ON the edge of text or thin lines At copy output. Especially When jaggy occurs in the text or thin lines (text in halftone dots) of the area where gradation in the halftone density is expressed like Photo, graphics, etc. - When moire occurs frequently At the time of copy or B&W Inbox scan Especially When moire frequently occurs in the area where gradation in the halftone density is expressed like Photo, graphics, etc. and this symptom is not alleviated with PH-D-SEL or sharpness adjustment - When receiving a request to use the same half toning method (text area) as the conventional one (model with image area separation method) At copy Output - When receiving a request to use the same half toning method (both text and Photo areas) as the conventional B&W MFP method At the time of copy or B&W Inbox Output Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: Low screen ruling (134 lines) is used for photo judgment area and high screen ruling (141 lines) for text judgment area. 1: Low screen ruling is used for photo judgment area and TBIC for text judgment area. 2: TBIC is used for both photo and text judgment areas. Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SEL JA-SBOX Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM Lv.2 Details To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0

8

JA-DFAX Lv.2 Details

Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-REP Setting of TX Report with image: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-FREP Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-BOX Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-FORM Setting of image composition: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-PREV Setting of preview page deletion: SAM Lv.2 Details To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-130

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

8-131

COPIER>OPTION>USER

COPIER>OPTION>USER

JA-PULL Lv.2 Details

Setting of network scan: SAM To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-PDLB Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM Lv.2 Details To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver at the time of iW SAM. When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from the printer driver. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-JOBK Setting of job merge allowance:SAM Lv.2 Details To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, jobs can be merged. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-RUI Setting of Inbox document access: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0 JA-WEB Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM Lv.2 Details To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time of iW SAM. When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web Browser is enabled. Use case When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Default value 0

EXP-CRYP Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value SLEEP1SW Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value CNCL-ATH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range SMD-EXPT Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER

Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Address Book when exporting the Address Book and device settings via RUI. When 0 is set, the confidential part in the Address Book is exported without encryption. When there is a need to export password without encryption because of operation and tool 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption because of security concern. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Power supply when shifting to SLEEP1 When shifting to SLEEP1 mode, the power stops to be supplied, so it takes time to activate after a job is received. When 1 is set, the power keeps to be supplied even after shifting to SLEEP1 mode, so the activation of job processing becomes earlier. Upon user's request (when job processing after shifting to SLEEP1 is slow) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 ON/OFF of secure print domain judgment To set whether to conduct authentication when stopping a secured job. By setting 1, security for the secured job is enhanced when user authentication is not conducted. Upon user's request Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON Setting of export target data: remote UI To set whether to export "service mode data" from remote UI. When 1 is set, "service mode data" is displayed as the target data of export on remote UI. When installing more than 1 machine at the same time, the same service mode data can be registered. When installing more than 1 machine at the same time 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 If selecting "service mode data" as the target data of export on remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT to 1, service mode data can be exported.

8-131

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

COPIER>OPTION>USER SNDSTREN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Default value FAXSTREN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SJ-UNMSK Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Default value Related service mode SJ-CLMSK Lv.2 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Default value Related service mode

Set of setting delete aftr scan and send To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from the "Scan and Send" screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Delete, 1: Retain only the transmission setting, 2: Retain the transmission setting and address JP:1, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the address after transmission from the "Fax" screen. Upon user's request 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Delete, 1: Retain JP:1, USA:0, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Secured job masking cancellation switch Switch to cancel the masking of secured jobs even if they are other people's jobs and allow to perform job operation. 0: Mask other people's secured jobs 1: Not mask other people's secured jobs * This switch is enabled at the time of MEAP authentication. * This switch is turned ON when setting of COIN 6 and 7 are made. When this switch is turned ON in charge mode type-C mode, operation of secured job becomes possible. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 COPIER> OPTIOIN> ACC> COIN Switch for masking secured job stop Switch to mask (gray out) the stop button of secured job. 0: OFF (Not mask the stop button of secured job) 1: ON (Mask the stop button of secured job) * This switch is turned ON when setting of COIN 6 and 7 are made. When this switch is turned ON in charge mode type-C mode, operation to stop secured job is prohibited. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 COPIER> OPTIOIN> ACC> COIN T-8-57

8

8-132

■■CST COPIER>OPTION>CST U1-NAME

Dspl/hide ppr name in ppr size group U1

Lv.2 Details

To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U1 detection. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST1-U1, CST2-U1, CST3-U1, CST4-U1 Dspl/hide ppr name in ppr size group U2 U2-NAME To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U2 Lv.2 Details detection. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST1-U2, CST2-U2, CST3-U2, CST4-U2 Dspl/hide ppr name in ppr size group U3 U3-NAME To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U3 Lv.2 Details detection. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST1-U3, CST2-U3, CST3-U3, CST4-U3 Dspl/hide ppr name in ppr size group U4 U4-NAME To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U4 Lv.2 Details detection. Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Default value Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST1-U4, CST2-U4, CST4-U3, CST4-U4 [Not used] ENV1 [Not used] ENV2 Setting of Cst1 paper size(A5R/STMTR) CST1-P1

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-132

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

COPIER>OPTION>CST To set the paper size used in Cassette 1. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. 0 to 1 0: A5R, 1: STMTR JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection Related UI menu Setting of Cst1 paper size (B5/EXEC) CST1-P2 To set the paper size used in Cassette 1. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection Related UI menu Setting of Cst2 paper size(A5R/STMTR) CST2-P1 To set the paper size used in Cassette 2. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 2 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A5R, 1: STMTR JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection Related UI menu Setting of Cst2 paper size (B5/EXEC) CST2-P2 To set the paper size used in Cassette 2. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 2 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection Related UI menu

Caution Display/adj/set range

8

8-133

COPIER>OPTION>CST Setting of Cst3 paper size (A5R/STMTR) CST3-P1 To set the paper size used in Cassette 3. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 3 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. 0 to 1 0: A5R, 1: STMTR JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection Related UI menu Setting of Cst3 paper size (B5/EXEC) CST3-P2 To set the paper size used in Cassette 3. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 3 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection Related UI menu Setting of Cst4 paper size (A5R/STMTR) CST4-P1 To set the paper size used in Cassette 4. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: A5R, 1: STMTR JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection Related UI menu Setting of Cst4 paper size (B5/EXEC) CST4-P2 To set the paper size used in Cassette 4. Lv.1 Details When setting the paper size for the Cassette 4 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Be sure to match with the hardware setting size. Caution Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: B5, 1: EXEC JP:0, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:0, CN:0, KR:0, TW:0, ASIA:0 Default value Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection Related UI menu

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

Caution Display/adj/set range

8-133

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

COPIER>OPTION>CST

8-134 COPIER>OPTION>CST

CST1-U1 Lv.1 Details

Set Cst1 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in Cassette 1. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 43 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: F4A, 43: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst1 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry2 CST1-U2 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 2 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 1. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 34 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst1 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry3 CST1-U3 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 3 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 1. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 31 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 28: Not used, 29:A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR 0 Default value Set Cst1 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry4 CST1-U4 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 4 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 1. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 1 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 28 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI 0 Default value

8

CST2-U1 Lv.1 Details

Set Cst2 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in Cassette 2. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 2 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 43 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: F4A, 43: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst2 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry2 CST2-U2 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 2 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 2. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 2 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 34 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst2 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry3 CST2-U3 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 3 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 2. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 2 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 31 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 28: Not used, 29:A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR 0 Default value Set Cst2 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry4 CST2-U4 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 4 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 2. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 2 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 28 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-134

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

COPIER>OPTION>CST

8-135 COPIER>OPTION>CST

CST3-U1 Lv.1 Details

Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in Cassette 3. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 3 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 43 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: F4A, 43: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry2 CST3-U2 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 2 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 3. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 3 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 34 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry3 CST3-U3 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 3 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 3. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 3 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 31 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 28: Not used, 29:A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR 0 Default value Set Cst3 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry4 CST3-U4 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 4 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 3. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 3 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 28 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI 0 Default value

CST4-U1 Lv.1 Details

Set Cst4 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry1 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 1 used in Cassette 4. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 4 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 43 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: F4A, 43: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst4 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry2 CST4-U2 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 2 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 4. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 4 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 34 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used 0 Default value Set Cst4 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry3 CST4-U3 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 3 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 4. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 4 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 31 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 28: Not used, 29:A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR 0 Default value Set Cst4 area-spec stdrd size ppr ctgry4 CST4-U4 To set the area-specific standard size paper category 4 used in Lv.1 Details Cassette 4. When setting area-specific standard size paper for the Cassette 4 Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 28 0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI 0 Default value T-8-58

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST

8-135

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

■■ACC

8-136 COPIER>OPTION>ACC

COPIER>OPTION>ACC Setting of charge management To set charging management method. Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Following items are automatically specified when changing the value to 3 (from 0 to 2). The change will not be returned even if changing back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once the mode has been changed. - COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL=1 - COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1 - COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0 - Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings> SMTP Receive, POP=OFF - Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> FTP Print Settings> Use FTP Printing=OFF - Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> IPP Print Settings> Use IPP Printing=ON Display/adj/set range 0 to 7 0: No charge 1: Charge with Coin Manager 2: Charge with remote counter 3: Charge with DA (only in Japan) 4: Charge with this machine itself 5: Not used 6: External charge mode 6 7: External charge mode 7 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR Related user mode Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Communication Settings Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> FTP Print Settings Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> DNS Settings> IPP Print Settings Supplement/memo Control card can be used with "0: No charge". DA: Digital Accessory Setting of Paper Deck paper size DK-P To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck. Lv.1 Details Display/adj/set range 0 to 2 0: A4, 1: Not used, 2: LTR Default value 0

COIN Lv.1 Details

8

Screen set when Coin Manager connected To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager is connected. Use case Upon user's request Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 3 0: Card, 1: certification by external device, 2: Coin and card, 3: Card Support setting of control card I/F CC-SPSW To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface. Lv.2 Details Use case Upon user's request (when connecting to the external counter management system using the control card interface) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: No support, 1: Support Default value 0 Setting of Coin Manager currency unit UNIT-PRC To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager Lv.2 Details Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 6 0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No currency unit (no fractional unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional unit) Default value 0 Presence/absence of inner 2 way tray IN-TRAY Set the presence/absence of the inner 2 way tray. Lv.1 Details Use case When the inner 2 way tray is installed Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: The inner 2 way tray is absent 1: The inner 2 way tray is present. Default value 0

CARD-SW Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

8-136

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

COPIER>OPTION>ACC

8-137 COPIER>OPTION>ACC

Set of Coin Manager minimum price To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen. In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50). Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN. Display/adj/set range 0 to 9999 Default value 10 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC Supplement/memo As for the charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the value that is smaller than the minimum currency unit with Settings/ Registration mode. The unit differs according to the setting value by the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC. Set of Coin Manager maximum price MAX-PRC To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager. Lv.1 Details Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen. In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC, entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50). Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN. Display/adj/set range 0 to 9999 Default value 8800 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC Supplement/memo As for charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the value that is larger than the maximum currency unit with Settings/Registration mode. The unit differs according to the setting value by the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC.

MIN-PRC Lv.1 Details

8

Manual adj of voice recognize microphone To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the connected voice recognition microphone. Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in user mode; however, adjust it manually as needed. Use case When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning Display/adj/set range 0 to 255 Default value 128 Related user mode Preferences> Accessibility> Voice Navigation Settings> Tune Microphone Norm PDL pnt set:External charge mode6/7 PDL-THR To set normal PDL print job processing at external charge mode 6/7. Lv.2 Details When 1 is set and external charge mode 6/7 is set with COIN, normal PDL print job is executed without being cancelled. Use case When setting the normal PDL print processing in external charge mode 6/7 Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Cancel, 1: Execute Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN [Not used] CR-TYPE

MIC-TUN Lv.1 Details

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

T-8-59

8-137

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

■■INT-FACE

8-138

■■LCNS-TR COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE IMG-CONT

[Not used]

NWCT-TM

Timeout setting of network connection

Lv.2 Details

To set the time to keep network connection between this machine and the PC application (keep-alive setting). As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute. Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 1 to 5 Display/adj/set range minute Unit 5 Default value Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function, Supplement/memo cascade copy, MEAP network application, etc. T-8-60

ST-SEND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-SEND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-ENPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-ENPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-SPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Installation state dspl of SEND function To display installation state of SEND function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether SEND function is installed 1) Select ST-SEND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND. When operation finished normally: OK! 1 Trns license key dspl of SEND function To display transfer license key to use SEND function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SEND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND. 24 digits Install state dspl of Encryption PDF To display installation state of Encryption PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed 1) Select ST-ENPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns license key dspl of Encryption PDF To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-ENPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of Searchable PDF To display installation state of Searchable PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed 1) Select ST-SPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0

8-138

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR TR-SPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-EXPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-EXPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-PDFDR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PDFDR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

Trns license key dspl of Searchable PDF To display transfer license key to use Searchable PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Instal state of Encry PDF + Searchbl PDF To display installation state of Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF is installed 1) Select ST-EXPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key of Encry PDF+Searchbl PDF To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-EXPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan. 24 digits Install state dspl of Direct Print PDF To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed 1) Select ST-PDFDR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print PDF To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PDFDR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR. 24 digits

8

8-139

ST-SCR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-SCR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-BRDIM Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-BRDIM Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-VNC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print To display installation state of Encrypted Secure Print when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Encrypted Secure Print is installed 1) Select ST-SCR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns license key dspl: Encry Secure Pnt To display transfer license key to use Encrypted Secure Print when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SCR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR. This mode is enabled when there is "3DES+USH-H" Board. 24 digits Inst state: BarDIMM upon trns invalid Display the installation status of the BarDIMM. 1) Select ST-BRDIM. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key: BarDIMM upon trn invalid This item is used when replacing the HDD, or when changing the machine. Display the transfer license key of the BarDIMM. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-BRDIM. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM. 24 digits Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed 1) Select ST-VNC. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC. When operation finished normally: OK! 0

8-139

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR TR-VNC Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-WEB Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-WEB Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-HRPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-HRPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Soft To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-VNC. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC. 24 digits Install state dspl: Web Access Software To display installation state of Web Access Software when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Web Access Software is installed 1) Select ST-WEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-WEB. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB. 24 digits Install state dspl of High Compress PDF To display installation state of High Compression PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether High Compression PDF is installed 1) Select ST-HRPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 1 Trns lcns key dspl of High Compress PDF To display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HRPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF. 24 digits

8

8-140

ST-TRSND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-TRSND Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-WTMRK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-WTMRK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-TSPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl: Trial SEND function To display installation state of Trial SEND function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed 1) Select ST-TRSND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl: Trial SEND function To display transfer license key to use Trial SEND function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-TRSND. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND. 24 digits Install state dspl of Secure Watermark To display installation state of Secure Watermark when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed 1) Select ST-WTMRK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns license key dspl: Secure Watermark To display transfer license key to use Secure Watermark when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-WTMRK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK. 24 digits Install state dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP To display installation state of Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Time Stamp PDF (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-TSPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0

8-140

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR TR-TSPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-USPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-USPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-DVPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-DVPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP To display transfer license key to use Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-TSPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Digital User Signature PDF is installed 1) Select ST-USPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-USPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of Device Sign PDF To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed 1) Select ST-DVPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Device Sign PDF To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-DVPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits

8

8-141

ST-SCPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-SCPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range ST-AMS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-AMS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed 1) Select ST-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-SCPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF. This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed. 24 digits Install state dspl of Access Mngm System To display installation state of Access Management System when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Access Management System is installed 1) Select ST-AMS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System To display transfer license key to use Access Management System when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-AMS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS. 24 digits

8-141

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR ST-ERDS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value Supplement/memo TR-ERDS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Supplement/memo ST-PS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

Install state dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn To display installation state of E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion when transfer is disabled. When checking whether E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion is installed 1) Select ST-ERDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion: A function to send charge counter to the third party's charge server. Trns lcns key dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn To display transfer license key to use E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-ERDS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS. 24 digits E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion: A function to send charge counter to the third party's charge server. Install state display of PS function To display installation state of PS function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PS function is installed 1) Select ST-PS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Transfer license key dspl of PS function To display transfer license key to use PS function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS. 24 digits

ST-PCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-PSLI5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PSLI5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-LIPS5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

8

8-142

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state display of PCL function To display installation state of PCL function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PCL function is installed 1) Select ST-PCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Transfer license key dspl: PCL function To display transfer license key to use PCL function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL. 24 digits Install state dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP To display installation state of PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-PSLI5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSLI5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5. 24 digits Install state dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-LIPS5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5. When operation finished normally: OK! 0

8-142

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR TR-LIPS5 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-LIPS4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-LIPS4 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-PSPCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PSPCL Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

Trns lcns key dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP To display transfer license key to use LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LIPS5. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5. 24 digits Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-LIPS4. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LIPS4. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4. 24 digits Install state dspl of PS/PCL function To display installation state of PS/PCL function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed 1) Select ST-PSPCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSPCL. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL. 24 digits

8

8-143

ST-PCLUF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PCLUF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-PSLIP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-PSLIP Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-PSPCU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl: PCL/UFR II function To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-PCLUF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PCLUF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF. 24 digits Install state dspl of PS/LIPS4 func: JP To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed 1) Select ST-PSLIP. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns license key dspl: PS/LIPS4 func:JP To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSLIP. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP. 24 digits Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-PSPCU. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU. When operation finished normally: OK! 0

8-143

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR TR-PSPCU Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-LXUFR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-LXUFR Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-HDCR2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-HDCR2 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-PSPCU. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU. 24 digits Install state display of UFR II function To display installation state of UFR II function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether UFR II function is installed 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR. When operation finished normally: OK! 1 Trns license key dspl of UFR II function To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-LXUFR. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR. 24 digits Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when transfer is disabled. When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed 1) Select ST-HDCR2. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-HDCR2. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2. 24 digits

8

8-144

ST-JBLK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-JBLK Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-AFAX Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-AFAX Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-REPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed 1) Select ST-JBLK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-JBLK. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK. 24 digits Installation state display of Remote Fax To display installation state of Remote Fax when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Remote Fax is installed 1) Select ST-AFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Transfer license key dspl of Remote Fax To display transfer license key to use Remote Fax when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-AFAX. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX. 24 digits Install state dspl:Reader Extensions PDF To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed 1) Select ST-REPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF. When operation finished normally: OK! 0

8-144

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR TR-REPDF Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-OOXML Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-OOXML Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-XPS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-XPS Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

8-145 COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR

Trns lcns key dspl:Reader Extensions PDF To display transfer license key to use Reader Extensions PDF when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-REPDF. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF. 24 digits Install state display of Office Open XML To display installation state of Office Open XML when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Office Open XML is installed 1) Select ST-OOXML. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key display of Office Open XML To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-OOXML. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML. 24 digits Install state dspl of Direct Print XPS To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when transfer is disabled. When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed 1) Select ST-XPS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print XPS To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-XPS. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS. 24 digits

ST-2600 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value TR-2600 Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-OPFNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range TR-OPFNT Lv.2 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range ST-IPFAX Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range ST-IPFAX Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func To display installation state of the IEEE2600.1 security function when transfer is disabled. When checking whether the IEEE2600.1 security function is installed 1) Select ST-2600. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600. When operation finished normally: OK! 0 Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func To display transfer license key of the IEEE2600.1 security function when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select ST-2600. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600. 24 digits Install state display of PCL Font Set To display the installation status of PCL option font when transfer is disabled When checking whether PCL option font is installed 1) Select ST-OPFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under ST-OPFNT. 0 to 1 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Trns lcns key display of PCL option font To display transfer license key to use PCL option font function with Policy when transfer is disabled. - When replacing the device 1) Select TR-OPFNT. 2) Enter 0, and then press OK key. The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT. 24 digits Install state dspl: IPFAX w/ lcns trns To display installation state of IPFAX when disabling the function with license transfer. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 Trns lcns key dspl: IPFAX w/ lcns trns To display transfer license key to use IPFAX with another MFP. 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 24 digits T-8-61

8

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

8-145

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG

TEST

COPIER>TEST>PG PG-PICK Lv.1 Details Use case

■■PG COPIER>TEST>PG TYPE

Test print

To execute the test print. Lv.1 Details At trouble analysis Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press Start key.

Caution Display/adj/set range

Default value TXPH

8-146

Test print is executed. Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output. 0 to 50 0: Normal print 1: Grid 2: 17 gradations Tbic rank 2 3: 17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen) 4: Solid white 5: Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) 6: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) 7: Solid black 8: Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces) 9: Horizontal line (6 dots, 50 spaces) 10: Horizontal line (2 dots, 3 spaces) 11: Halftone (density: 60H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) 12: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) 13: Halftone (density: 30H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction) 14: Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without image correction) 15 to 43: For development 44: Fixing cleaning pattern 45 to 50: For development 0 [Not used]

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG

Setting of test print Pickup Cassette To set the Pickup Cassette for test print output. - At trouble analysis - At TEST PRINT Output Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 8 Display/adj/set range 1: Cassette 1, 2: Cassette 2, 3: Cassette 3 (Option Cassette), 4: Cassette 4 (Option Cassette), 5: Paper Deck, 6: Multi-purpose Tray, 7 to 8: Not used Setting of PG 2-sided mode 2-SIDE To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output. Lv.1 Details At trouble analysis Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided 0 Default value Setting of PG output quantity PG-QTY To set the number of sheets for PG output. Lv.1 Details At trouble analysis Use case Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 1 to 999 Display/adj/set range sheet Unit 1 Default value

8-146

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

COPIER>TEST>PG FINISH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Default value Related service mode

Accessory processing function test print To execute the test print relating to accessory processing func. When checking operation of accessory processing function 1) Enter the number of sheets for PG-QTY, and then press OK key. 2) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 3) Press Start button. The machine outputs a test print. 0 to 99 0: N/A 1: Staple (front) *1 2: Staple (2 points) *1 3: Staple (rear) *1 4: Booklet (saddle stitch) *1 5: Z-fold (single sleeve) *1 6: 2-fold *1 7 to 10: Not used 11: Punch (Inner Puncher) *3 12: Not used 13: Not used 14 to 99: Spare (for future use) *1 Finisher, *3 Inner Puncher 0 COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY T-8-62

8

8-147

■■NETWORK COPIER>TEST>NETWORK PING

Network connection check

Lv.1 Details Use case

To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network. - When checking network connection At the time of installation - At network connection failure Adj/set/operate method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the main power switch. 3) Inform the system administrator at user’s site that installation of this machine is complete, and ask for network setting. 4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection, and check the remote host address of PING transmission target. 5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press OK key and Start key. OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete. NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK. In case of cable connection failure, connect again and then go to step 5). 6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK key and Start key. OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to check NIC. NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to check the setting again. 7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press OK key. OK: Network setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform the system administrator that the trouble is due to network environment and ask for countermeasure. NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/ replace NIC. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 Display/adj/set range At normal state: OK At failure occurrence: NG - Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network. Supplement/memo - Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is available because the signal is returned before NIC. - NIC: Network interface board - Local host address: IP address of this mac

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

8-147

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

COPIER>TEST>NETWORK IPV6-ADR Lv.1 Details

Setting of PING send address (IPv6) To set the IPv6 address to send PING. When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6, the network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. - Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6. Caution - Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal numbers (0-9, a-f) and a separator (:). Related service mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6 PING transmission to IPv6 address PING-IP6 To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR. Lv.1 Details The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be checked. Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key. Related service mode COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR T-8-63

8-148

■■NET-CAP COPIER>TEST>NET-CAP CAPOFFON

To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function. Lv.2 Details Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range

Default value Related service mode Related UI menu STT-STP Lv.2 Details Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode Related UI menu CAPSTATE Lv.2 Details Related service mode Related UI menu PONSTART Lv.2 Details Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode Related UI menu OVERWRIT Lv.2 Details Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode Related UI menu

8

ON/OFF of NetCap function

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Start and stop of network packet capture To start and stop network packet capture. 0 to 1 0: Stop, 1: Start 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log State display of network packet capture To display the state of network packet capture. COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Set network packet capture start timing To set whether to perform network packet capture from power-on. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Setting of NetCap data overwriting To set whether to finish network capturing or overwrite when HDD becomes full. 0 to 1 0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting 1 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log

8-148

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

8-149

COPIER>TEST>NET-CAP PAYLOAD Lv.2 Details Display/adj/set range Default value Related service mode Related UI menu FILE-CLR Lv.2 Details SIMPFILT Lv.2 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range ENCDATA Lv.2 Details Use case Caution Display/adj/set range

Default value

Set network packet capture data save To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet data. 0 to 1 0: Save captured packet data as is, 1: Discard payload and save the packet data 0 COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP Store Network Packet Log Deletion of network packet capture data To delete the captured packet data. Settings of packet data filtering To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data.When 0 is set, filtering is not performed (All the data are captured.) When 1 is set, packet data is captured only when the receiver’s or sender’s address coincides with the Mac address of this machine. At problem analysis (at packet data analysis) 0 to 1 0: Not filtered, 1: Filtered Setting of packet data encryption To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured packet data to the USB memory. - At problem analysis (at packet data analysis) - When improving security of written packet data This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB memory. Even when the packet data is loaded using SST, the file is specified, therefore the setting is disabled. 0 to 2 0: Encrypted (encrypted file) 1: Not encrypted (plain text file) 2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file) 0 T-8-64

8

Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

8-149

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL

COUNTER

COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL FAX-PRT Lv.1 Details

■■TOTAL COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL SERVICE1

Service-purposed total counter 1

Lv.1 Details

To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 Service-purposed total counter 2 To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 2, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 Total copy counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 PDL print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at PDL print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999

Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range SERVICE2 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range COPY Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range PDL-PRT Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

8-150

8

Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range RMT-PRT BOX-PRT Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range RPT-PRT Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range 2-SIDE Lv.1 Details

Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL

FAX reception print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at FAX reception. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 [Not used] Inbox print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 Report print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at report print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 2-sided copy/print counter To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at 2-sided copy/print. Large size: 1, small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999

8-150

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP

COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL SCAN Lv.1 Details

Scan counter To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning operation is complete. Large size: 1, small size: 1 Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range T-8-65

8-151

■■PICK-UP COPIER>COUNTER>PICKUP C1

Cassette 1 pickup total counter

Small size: 1, Large size: 1 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Cassette 2 pickup total counter C2 Small size: 1, Large size: 1 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Cassette 3 pickup total counter C3 Large size: 1, Small size: 1 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Cassette 4 pickup total counter C4 Large size: 1, Small size: 1 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter MF Large size: 1, Small size: 1 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Deck pickup total counter DK Small size: 1 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

2-sided pickup total counter 2-SIDE Large size: 1, Small size: 1 Lv.1 Details Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

T-8-66

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP

8-151

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM

■■FEEDER

■■JAM COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER

FEED

8-152 COPIER>COUNTER>JAM

TOTAL

DADF original pickup total counter

Host machine total jam counter

When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear

When checking the total jam counter of the host machine Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear

DADF hinge open/close counter DFOP-CNT When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear

Feeder total jam counter FEEDER When checking the total jam counter of feeder Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear

key.

key.

T-8-67

key.

key.

Finisher total jam counter SORTER When checking the total jam counter of finisher Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Duplex Unit jam counter 2-SIDE When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Multi-purpose Tray jam counter MF When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Right Deck jam counter C1 When checking the jam counter of machine’s Right Deck Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Left Deck jam counter C2 When checking the jam counter of machine’s Left Deck Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Cassette 3 pickup jam counter C3 When checking the jam counter of machine’s Cassette 3 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Cassette 4 pickup jam counter C4 When checking the jam counter of machine’s Cassette 4 Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

Pickup decks jam counter DK When checking the jam counter of all pickup decks Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.

T-8-68

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > JAM

8-152

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC

■■MISC

COPIER>COUNTER>MISC COPIER>COUNTER>MISC

T-SPLY-K

Toner supply counter

Lv.1 Details

Number of toner supply blocks. Counted for rotation of Toner Feed Motor. When checking the usage status of toner To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. Number of rotation Laser scanner motor counter Use a reference data for the judgment when the laser scanner is replaced. To count up at start-up. When checking the usage status of the product To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. Number of DCON PCB power-on times Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit). To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit). When checking the usage status of the product Number of HDD start-up times To count up at HDD start-up. When checking the usage status of the product Staple needle cntr: Inner/External Fin To count the use of the staple needle. When checking the usage status of the product Entrance paper path cntr: External Fin Entrance paper path counter When checking the usage status of the product To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. Tray change counter: External finisher Tray change counter When checking the usage status of the product To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. Punch unit operation counter: Puncher 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the usage status of the product To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. 0 to 99999999

Use case Adj/set/operate method Unit LSR-MTR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method ALLPW-ON Lv.1 Details Use case HDD-ON Lv.1 Details Use case ST-NDL Lv.1 Details Use case ENT-PTH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method TRAY-CHA Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method PUNCH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

8-153

8

PUN-CAB Lv.1 Details Use case PUN-WST Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Punch Unit Cable cntr: External finisher Punch Unit Cable counter When checking the usage status of the product Punch waste counter: External finisher Punch Unit punch waste counter When checking the usage status of the product To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. Sddl feed path feed paper cntr: Bklt Fin SADDLE When checking the usage status of the product Lv.1 Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range Saddle staple needle cntr: Booklet Fin SDL-NDL To count the use of the saddle staple needle. Lv.1 Details When checking the usage status of the product Use case

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC

T-8-69

8-153

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

■■JOB

■■DRBL-1 COPIER>COUNTER>JOB

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1

DVPAPLEN

Average paper length of job

TR-ROLL

Lv.1 Details

Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation. Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job, the average paper length affects calculation of the life. When checking the average paper length of job. 0 to 99999999 mm Average distance of job Average running distance in the period from when the printer engine starts printing operation to when it stops the operation. Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed continuously as a large job, the average running distance affects calculation of the life. When checking the average distance of job. 0 to 99999999 mm

Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit DVRUNLEN Lv.1 Details

Use case Display/adj/set range Unit

8-154

T-8-70

8

Transfer Roller parts counter

1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value This is commonly used as operator maintenance parts counter. Supplement/memo Separation Static Eliminator prts cntr SP-SC-EL 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Photosensitive Drum parts counter PT-DRM 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value in COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> DRMCaution INIT after replacement.COPIER> COUNTER> LF> K-DRM-LF is cleared at the same time. 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

8-154

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 DV-UNT-K Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C1-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C1-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C1-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1

Developing Unit parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 1 Separation Roller parts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 1 Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

8-155

C2-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C2-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C2-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value M-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1

Cassette 2 Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 2 Separation Roller prts cntr 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 2 Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Multifeed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8-155

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 M-SP-PD Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value FX-UNIT Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value WST-TNR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Display/adj/set range Default value OZ-FIL1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Multifeed separation Pad prts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Fixing Main Unit parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Waste toner container parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. 0 to 99999999 0 Ozone Filter parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8-156

■■DRBL-2 COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 DF-PU-RL

Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF

Lv.1 Details

1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is Supplement/memo advanced every time a sheet is fed. Separation Pad parts counter: DADF DF-SP-PD 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is Supplement/memo advanced every time a sheet is fed. Dust Removal Sheet 1 counter: DADF LNT-TAP1 Dust-colleting Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is Supplement/memo advanced every time a sheet is fed.

T-8-71

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

8-156

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 STAMP Lv.1 Details

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1

Stamp parts counter: DADF To display the estimated life and parts counter of DADF stamp. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator At replacement Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck PD-PU-RL Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck Lv.1 Details (Upper) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Separation Roller parts counter: Deck PD-SP-RL Separation Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper) Lv.1 Details 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value

PD-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C3-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C3-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C3-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

8

8-157

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Feed Roller parts counter: Deck Feed Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 3 Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette3 Separation Roller prts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 3 Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8-157

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 C4-PU-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C4-SP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value C4-FD-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value FIN-STPR Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1

Cassette 4 Pickup Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette4 Separation Roller prts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Stapler parts counter:Inner/External Fin Stapler Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8

8-158

SDL-STPL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value FN-BFFRL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value ENT-STC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value DL-STC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method

Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2

Saddle stpl unit oprtn cntr: Booklet Fin 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Buffer Roller parts counter:External Fin 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Inlet Sttc Elim prts cntr: Inner/Ex-Fin 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0 Dvry Sttc Elim prts cntr: Inner/Ex-Fin 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. 0 to 99999999 0

8-158

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF

COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1 OFST-RL Lv.1 Details

Offset roller parts counter: Inner Fin 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Return roller parts counter:External Fin RET-RL 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value Swing Middle Sttc Elim prts cntr: Ex-Fin SWG-STC 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement Lv.1 Details 2nd line: Estimated life When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Use case Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and then press OK key. Clear the counter value after replacement. Caution 0 to 99999999 Display/adj/set range 0 Default value

8-159

■■LF COPIER>COUNTER>LF K-DRM-LF

Drum unit (Bk) counter

Lv.1 Details Use case Caution

The consumption degree of the drum unit (Bk) is displayed by “%”. To check the consumption degree of the drum unit (Bk) Clear the counter value in COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> DRMINIT after replacement.COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> PT-DRM is cleared at the same time. 0 to 99999999 %

Display/adj/set range Unit

T-8-73

T-8-72

8

Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF

8-159

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST

FEEDER

ADJUST FEEDER>ADJUST

DISPLAY

DOCST Lv.1

FEEDER>DISPLAY FEEDSIZE Lv.1 TRY-WIDE Lv.1

8-160

Dis of original size detected by DADF To display the original size detected by DADF. Details Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only) Distance of Original Width Detect Slider To display the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders. At original size detection error Use case Adj/set/operate method Check whether the value matching the slide position is displayed when the Original Width Slider is moved to the specified size width position. Display/adj/set range 0 to approx. 2970 0.1 mm Unit

Details

T-8-74

Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF scanning. Execute when the output image after DADF installation is dislocated. When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of the image is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction of the leading edge of the sheet.) - When installing DADF Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -50 to 50 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: front LA-SPEED To adjust the image magnification in vertical scanning Lv.1 Details direction for DADF scanning. When replacing the CCD unit (CCD PCB)/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the image is reduced.) - When installing DADF Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -30 to 30 Display/adj/set range 0.10% Unit DADF paper detection adj for the long sheet/free size DOC-LNGH mode When DADF is installed (to adjust the detection margin of Lv.1 Details error for the long sheet/free size mode) - When installing DADF Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. -100 to 100 Display/adj/set range 0.1mm Unit

Details

T-8-75

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST

8-160

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION

FUNCTION

FEEDER>FUNCTION FEED-CHK Lv.1 Details

FEEDER>FUNCTION MTR-CHK Lv.1

Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

TRY-A4 Lv.1

TRY-A5R Lv.1

TRY-LTR Lv.1

TRY-LTRR Lv.1

8-161

Specifying DADF Operation Motor To specify the DADF Motor to operate. The motor is activated by MTR-ON. At operation check Enter the value, and then press OK key.

0 to 1 0: Pickup motor (M1) 1: Release motor (M2) Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4 To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference Details point 1 for the DADF Tray. (A4) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference Details point 2 for the DADF Tray. (A5R) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference Details point 1 for the DADF Tray. (LTR) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference Details point 2 for the DADF Tray. (LTRR) - When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR) Use case - When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

CL-CHK Lv.1

Specifying DADF individual feed mode To specify the feed mode for DADF. Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON. At operation check Enter the value, and then press OK key.

0 to 3 0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation 1: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation 2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp) 3: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp) Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON Specifying DADF Operation Clutch To specify the DADF clutch to operate. Details The clutch is activated by CL-ON. At operation check Use case Enter the value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate

method Display/adj/set range

CL-ON Lv.1

FAN-CHK Lv.1

0 to 1 0: Paper feed clutch (CL1) 1: Registration clutch (CL2) Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> CL-ON Operation check of DADF Clutch To start operation check for the clutch specified by CL-CHK Details At operation check Use case 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and method automatically stops. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Approx. 5 seconds Required time Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION>CL-CHK Specifying DADF Operation Fan To specify the DADF Fan to operate. Details The fan is activated by FAN-ON. At operation check Use case Enter the value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate

method Display/adj/set range

0 0: Cooling Fan (FM1) Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION>FAN-ON

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION

8-161

8

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > OPTION

8-162

FEEDER>FUNCTION FAN-ON Lv.1

SL-CHK Lv.1

FEEDER>FUNCTION

Operation check of DADF Fan To start operation check for the fan specified by FAN-CHK. Details At operation check Use case 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and method automatically stops. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Approx. 5 seconds Required time Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK Specifying DADF Operation Solenoid To specify the DADF solenoid to operate. Details The solenoid is activated by SL-ON. At operation check Use case Enter the value, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate

ROLL-CLN Lv.1

Use case Adj/set/operate method

FEED-ON Lv.1

SL-ON Lv.1

MTR-ON Lv.1

8

Details

Rotation of DADF Rollers To rotate for cleaning the DADF Rollers. Clean the roller by putting the lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while it is rotating. At roller cleaning 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol. 3) Press OK key. The rollers stop. Operation check of DADF individual feed To start operation check for the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK. At operation check Select the item, and then press OK key.

Use case Adj/set/operate method Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK

method Display/adj/set range

0 to 1 0: Disengagement Solenoid (SL1) 1: Stamp Solenoid (SL2) Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON Operation check of DADF Solenoid To start operation check for the solenoid specified by SLDetails CHK. At operation check Use case 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and method automatically stops. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Approx. 5 seconds Required time Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK Operation check of Motor To start operation check for the motor specified by MTRDetails CHK. At operation check Use case 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. Adj/set/operate The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and method automatically stops. 2) Press OK key. The operation check is completed. Approx. 5 seconds Required time Related service mode FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK

Details

T-8-76

■■OPTION FEEDER>OPTION SIZE-SW Lv.1

Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION > OPTION

Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range

ON/OFF of mixed paper detection:AB, Inch To set ON/OFF of mixed paper detection: AB configuration and Inch configuration When enabling to mix AB and Inch configuration sizes original Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF (Mixed paper is not detected), 1: ON (Mixed paper is detected) T-8-77

8-162

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

SORTER

SORTER>ADJUST STP-F2 Lv.1 Details

ADJUST

Use case Adj/set/operate method

SORTER>ADJUST PNCH-Y

8-163

Punch Hole Side-Reg Position Adj

Lv.1 Details

To adjust the punch hole position in the side registration direction. (for Inner Finisher)The punch hole is moved 0.1 mm by changing the value. +: towards rear -: towards front When the punch hole position is incorrect in the side registration Use case direction Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Switch Back Amount Adj CLCT-SB To adjust the switch back amount when the paper is delivered to the Lv.1 Details process tray. (for Inner finisher) When the stack failure is caused by the curled paper in the process Use case tray Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value Adj frt staple pstn (45deg)(A4/LTR) STP-F1 To adjust the one front staple position on the A4/LTR size paper. Lv.1 Details (for External finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on A4/LTR Use case size paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -6 to 6 Display/adj/set range 0.49 mm Unit 0 Default value

Display/adj/set range Unit Default value STP-R1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value STP-R2 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value STP-2P Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

Adj frt staple pstn (<45deg)(A4R/LTRR) To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R/LTRR size paper. (for External finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When the A4R/LTRR paper front staple position is displaced 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -6 to 6 0.49 mm 0 Adj rear staple pstn (45deg)(A4/LTR) To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4/LTR size paper. (for External finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on A4/LTR size paper 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -6 to 6 0.49 mm 0 Adj rear staple pstn (<45deg)(A4R/LTRR) To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4R/LTRR size paper. (for External finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the rear side by 0.49 mm. When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on A4R/LTRR size paper 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -6 to 6 0.49 mm 0 Adj 2-staple position in feed direction To adjust the 2-staple position in feed direction on Finisher. (for Inner finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.1 mm.+: Toward delivery direction-: Toward inlet direction When the 2-staple position in feed direction is displaced 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -25 to 25 0.1 mm 0

8-163

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-164

SORTER>ADJUST PNCH-X Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value SDL-STP Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value SDL-ALG Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value ST-ALG1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER>ADJUST

Punch hole position in feed way To adjust the punch hole position on Finisher in feed direction. (for Inner finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole moves by 0.1 mm. +: Toward delivery direction -: Toward inlet direction When the punch hole is displaced in feed direction 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -50 to 50 0.1 mm 0 Adj of Saddle Stitcher staple position: To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher. (for Booklet finisher) As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by 0.5 mm. When the staple position of the Saddle Stitcher is displaced 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key.2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. -3 to 3 0.5mm 0 Adj of Saddle Stitcher alignment width To adjust the alignment width of Saddle Stitcher. (for Booklet finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the alignment width is increased by 0.5 mm. When the misalignment occurs within a paper stack on the Saddle Stitcher 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0.5mm 0 Adj Stacker A4 size align pstn To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position. (for External finisher) As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment Plate is increased by 0.42 mm. When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -10 to 10 0.42 mm -10

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

SW-UP-RL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PUN-V-RG Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value PRCS-RET Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value UP-CL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

Adj Swing Roller falling pstn To adjust the Swing Roller fall position. (for External finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the Swing Roller fall position moves downward by 0.2 mm. When paper fails to be transported to the Processing Tray and misalignment occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -17 to 33 0.2 mm 0 Adj punch vertical rgst pstn To adjust the vertical registration position of the paper to be punched. (for External Puncher)As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole position moves toward the edge by 1 mm. When misalignment of punch hole position occurs Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -4 to 2 1 mm 0 Adj Process Tray return amount To adjust the pull-back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray. (for External finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the pull-back amount is decreased by 1.4 mm. When the paper is bent in the Processing Tray Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 5 1.4 mm 0 Upward curl prevention mode Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs. (for External finisher) When upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8-164

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-165

SORTER>ADJUST DW-CL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value THC-CL Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value THC-PUSH Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value OFST-STC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

SORTER>ADJUST

Downward curl prevention mode Set 1 when downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs. (for External finisher) When downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Heavy ppr curl prevention mode Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, the amount of Stack Tray dissension for stack delivery increases. The paper surface detection is performed for every sheet, not for every 5 sheets. When upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Heavy ppr out prevention mode Set 1 when the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of heavy paper delivery. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, the Stack Tray moves down temporarily before the heavy paper is delivered to the Processing Tray if the leading sheet is heavy paper. When the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of heavy paper delivery Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Poor offset stack prev mode Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small-size offset mode. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, buffer operation is not performed in the small-size offset mode. When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small-size offset mode Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

THN-STC Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value STP-P-CH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value TRY-NIS Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value TRY-SU Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value FIN-NIS 1SHT-SHF Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

Poor thin ppr stack prev mode Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, the stacking condition of thin paper improves. When thin paper is not appropriately stacked Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1 Stpl stack displace prev mode Set 1 when the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, paper stack alignment operation is executed twice immediately before stapling. When the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Tray switch noise reduct mode Set 1 when the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise operation becomes slow. When the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Tray switching speedup mode Set 1 when the Stack Tray switching time is long. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise speed becomes fast. When the Stack Tray switching time is long Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 [Not used] Set 1-sheet Offset+Collate Set 1 when setting Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document. (for External finisher) When setting Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0

8-165

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

8-166

SORTER>ADJUST SDL-SWCH Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SDL-ALM Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value SFT-AMT1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value SFT-AMT2 Lv.1 Details

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value

SORTER>ADJUST

Sddl stck capacity switch mode Set 1 when increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching. (for Booklet finisher)When 1 is set, the stacking capacity increases over the upper limit. When increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Saddle full stack alarm mode Set 1 when disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching. (for Booklet finisher) When disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0 Adj shft amnt of Shft Roll (frt) To adjust the front shift amount of the Shift Roller. (for Inner finisher) As the value is incremented by 1, the Shift Roller moves toward the guide by 0.1 mm. When the front shift amount of the paper is inappropriate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 0.1 mm 0 Adj shft amnt of Shft Roll (Rear) To adjust the rear shift amount of the Shift Roller. (for Inner finisher) As the value is incremented by 1, the Shift Roller moves toward the guide by 0.1 mm. (The paper length to be detected is shortened by 0.1mm.) When the rear shift amount of the paper is inappropriate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 0.1 mm 0

STP-NTN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value INSTP-F1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value INSTP-R1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Unit Default value THN-STCL Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value

8

Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST

Adj of Staple Needle pitch (A4) To adjust the pitch between needles for 2-point stapling. (for Inner finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the pitch between needles becomes wider by 0.27 mm. When the pitch between needles for 2-point stapling is inappropriate Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -8 to 8 0.27 mm 0 Adj of front staple position To adjust the paper pull-in amount of the Gripper at the time of front 1-point stapling. (for Inner finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the paper pull-in amount is increased by 0.1 mm. When misalignment occurs at the front staple position Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 0.1 mm 0 Adj of rear staple position To adjust the paper pull-in amount of the Gripper at the time of rear 1-point stapling. (for Inner finisher)As the value is incremented by 1, the paper pull-in amount is increased by 0.1 mm. When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and press OK key. -50 to 50 0.1 mm 0 Poor large/thin ppr stack prev mode Set 1 when large/thin paper is not appropriately stacked. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, the stacking condition of large/thin paper improves. When large/thin paper is not appropriately stacked Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON 1

8-166

8

Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION

SORTER>ADJUST DSTP-F1 Lv.1 Details

Adj the frnt stpl pstn in 2-stplng mode Adjust the front staple position in the middle 2-stapling mode. (for Inner finisher)Incrementing the value by 1 shifts the front stapling position to the paper edge side by 0.1 mm. When the middle 2-staple position is displaced between the front Use case and rear stapling positions. Adj/set/operate method After inputting value, press the OK key. 0 to 33 Display/adj/set range 0.1 mm Unit 0 Default value T-8-78

8-167

FUNCTION SORTER>FUNCTION FIN-CON

Controller PCB RAM clear:

Lv.1 Details

To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents and counter information. (for Inner/External finisher) Execute counter clear on the Finisher when the RAM clear does not execute. Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. 2) Stand by 12 seconds after the RAM clear is executed, then turn OFF/ON the main power switch. - Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before Caution execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values.- Stand by 12 seconds after the RAM clear is executed, then turn OFF/ON the main power switch. The RAM clear does not execute when standby is less than 13 seconds. - The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.- The setting value of SORTER> OPTION > BLNK-SW does not clear.- SORTER>ADJUST>SDL-STP becomes the value at the time of the factory shipment. 12 sec Required time Related service mode COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT When E505-0001 is occurred, turn OFF/ON the main power switch Supplement/memo after adjusting the Finisher. T-8-79

8

Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION

8-167

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

OPTION

SORTER>OPTION FDPL-SL Lv.1 Details

SORTER>OPTION BLNK-SW

Set Saddle Finisher fold position margin

Lv.1 Details

To set the margin width of fold position on Saddle Finisher. (for Booklet finisher) When changing the margin width of fold position 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 2 0: Normal, 1: Wider, 2: Entire image (no margin) 2 Restricted operation at Finisher error To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher. When preferring to run the machine at Finisher error occurrence 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When “1” is set, staple operation or alignment operation is not executed. Set “0” normally. 0 to 1 0: Normal, 1: Restricted operation 0 Setting Finisher buffer operation To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher. (for External finisher)Set 1 in case of misalignment due to charging between papers in staple mode for small size papers. When misalignment of paper stack occurs in staple mode for small size papers 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity decreases. 0 to 1 0: ON, 1: OFF 0 Change of ppr stack spd for buffered ppr When the value is changed to 1, the paper stack speed becomes fast in the sort or staple mode. (for External finisher) When the alignment failure occurs in the sort or staple mode. (Paper does not reach to the process tray stopper) 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. When this mode is activated, the productivity goes down. 0 to 10: OFF (600 mm/s) , 1: ON (700 mm/s) * Paper stack speed for buffered paper 1

Use case Adj/set/operate method Display/adj/set range Default value MD-SPRTN Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value BUFF-SW Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value PRCS-SP1 Lv.1 Details Use case Adj/set/operate method Caution Display/adj/set range Default value

8-168

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

Set soil prev for back of Saddle To set ON/OFF of the Feed Plate Engagement Solenoid at the time of Saddle stacking operation. (for Booklet finisher)When 1 is set, the Intermediate Feed Roller is disengaged by turning OFF the Feed Plate Engagement Solenoid at the time of Saddle stacking operation.Set 1 when the back of paper is soiled by the Intermediate Feed Roller. But the alignment condition of papers at the time of saddle stitching decreases. When the back of paper is soiled due to the Intermediate Feed Use case Roller at the time of Saddle stacking operation Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: ON (Engagement), 1: OFF (Disengagement) 0 Default value Set occasional misalign prev mode STCR-DWN When misalignment in feed direction occurs at approx. every 30 Lv.1 Details sheets for thin/plain paper (105 g/m2 and less), set 1. (for External finisher) When misalignment in feed direction occurs occasionally for thin/ Use case plain paper Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Default value Ppr intvl after buffer ppr ejctn BUFF-INT In case of paper with excessive upward curl, paper right after Lv.1 Details the buffer paper is ejected at the Finisher hits the Stack Delivery Roller, causing Saddle Delivery Sensor stationary jam. (for External finisher)When 1 is set, the jam can be avoided since the paper intervals between the present and the following papers after the buffer paper ejection become wider. When stationary jam occurs at the Stack Delivery Roller at buffer Use case operation Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 Display/adj/set range 0: OFF, 1: ON 0 Default value

8-168

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-169

SORTER>OPTION PRCS-SP3 Lv.1 Details

Set non-buffer stack Fd SPD to Proc Tray When the value is changed to 1, the paper stack speed becomes slow in the non-buffer mode. (for External finisher) When the alignment failure occurs with the plain/thin paper. (Paper Use case is spent to the process tray stopper more than required.) Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 80: 700 mm/s Display/adj/set range , 1: 650 mm/s , 2: 600 mm/s , 3: 550 mm/s , 4: 500 mm/s , 5 to 8: 450mm/s 0.49 mm Unit 0 Default value Set alignment at non-sort delivery NSRT-STC To deliver to the Stack Tray after aligning only 2-sided printed paper Lv.1 Details in the Processing Tray at non-sort delivery. (for External finisher)When 2 is set, 1-sided printed paper is also delivered via the Processing Tray, so the stacking performance improves. When the paper delivered with non-sort mode is not appropriately Use case stacked Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 0 to 2 Display/adj/set range 0: Deliver directly to the Stack Tray 1: Deliver only 2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray 2: Deliver 1-sided/2-sided printed paper via the Processing Tray 1 Default value THN-TRSW Set narrow width thin paper delvry dest Lv.1 Details When delivering thin paper (63 g/m2 and less) which width direction is 139.6 mm and smaller to the Stacker, delivery stationary jam may occur. When 1 is set, thin paper which width direction is 139.6 mm and smaller is forcibly delivered to the tray of the host machine. Use case When delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering narrow-width thin paper to the First/Second Delivery Tray Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/adj/set range 0 to 1 0: Destination specified on UI, 1: Tray of the host machine Default value 0 T-8-80

8

Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION

8-169

8

Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION

8-170

BOARD OPTION BOARD>OPTION MENU-1

Hide/dspl printer setting menu level 1

To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu. Lv.2 Details Upon user’s request Use case Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

Display/adj/set range Default value MENU-2 MENU-3 MENU-4

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. 0 to 1 0: Hide, 1: Display 0 Not used Not used Not used

T-8-81

8

Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION

8-170

9

Installation

■ Memory Type A ■Additional (512MB) ■ Tray-A2 ■Utility ■ Pre-Checks ■Making ■ Operation Kit-C2 ■Voice ■ and ■Unpacking ■ Card Reader-F1 ■Copy Installation Procedure ■ Guidance Kit-F2 ■ Model (for Europe) ■Voice ■Printer ■ Unit-B1 ■Stamp ■ of Printer ■Contents ■ Scan Lock ■Document Cover-E1 Kit-B1 ■ Kit-K1 ■Heater ■ 2Way Tray-H1 ■Inner ■ Heater Unit-H1 ■Reader ■ Device Port-E3/ ■USB ■ Heater-C1 ■Drum E4/Multimedia Reader/ ■ Deck Heater ■Paper Writer-A2/A3 Unit-C1 ■ of HDD ■Combination ■ Interface Kit-K1/ ■Serial Options K2_Copy Control ■ the Machine ■Relocating Interface Kit-A1 9

Installation

9

Installation > Making Pre-Checks > Selecting the Site of Installation

How to check this Installation Procedure

9-2

Making Pre-Checks

When Using the parts included in the package

Selecting the Site of Installation

A symbol is described on the illustration in the case of using the parts included in the package

The followings are the condition for installation environment.

of this product.

It is better to see the planned location of installation before carrying the host machine in the user site. 1) The host machine can singly connect to the outlet of rated +/-10V, 15A or more. 2) The installation site must be in the following environment. Especially, avoid installing the machine near the faucet, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.

Packaged Item

• Guaranteed range for operation Temperature: 2.5 to 37.5 deg C • Guaranteed range for image Temperature: 15.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 10 to 80%RH

F-9-1

3) Avoid installing the machine near fire, in an area subject to dust or ammonia gas. When

Symbols in the Illustration

installing the machine in a place exposed to direct rays of the sun, it is recommended that curtains be hung over the windows.

The frequently-performed operations are described with symbols in this procedure. Screw

4) The amount of ozone generated during use of the machine is below the harmful level. However, if the machine is used for a long time in a poor-ventilated room, ozone may smell.

Harness

Connector

To keep the work environment comfortable, the room must be well-ventilated properly. 5) None of the machine feet should float. The machine must be held level constantly. 6) Install the machine in a well-ventilated place. Do not install the machine close to the Tighten

Remove

Connect

Disconnect

Secure

ventilation duct of the room.

Free

7) The machine must be installed at least 100 mm away from the surrounding walls and there must be an adequate space for operating the machine.

Claw

Insert

Remove

Push

Plug in

Turn on

Checking instruction

Check

Visual Check

Sound Check F-9-2

9

Installation > Making Pre-Checks > Selecting the Site of Installation

9-2

9

Installation > Making Pre-Checks > Selecting the Site of Installation

• When the option is not attached

9-3

• When the Inner Finisher-D1, Inner Hole Puncher-A1 and Paper Deck Unit-B2 is attached 500 mm or more

100 mm or more

500 mm or more

F-9-5

F-9-3

• When the Booklet Finisher-G1, External 2 Hole Puncher-B2, Buffer Pass Unit-H1 and

• When the Inner Finisher-D1 and Paper Deck Unit-B2 is attached 500 mm or more

Paper Deck Unit-B2 is attached 100 mm or more

1,406 mm

500 mm or more

F-9-4

9

Installation > Making Pre-Checks > Selecting the Site of Installation

2,105 mm

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

1,167 mm

1,167 mm

100 mm or more

1,666 mm

500 mm or more

1,094 mm

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

500 mm or more

1,167 mm

1,167 mm

100 mm or more

F-9-6

9-3

9

Installation > Table of Options Combination

9-4

Points to Make Before Installation Be sure to go through the following before starting the work. 1) Imaging faults can result due to dew condensation that occurs when the machine is moved from a cold place to a warm place. Leave the unpacked machine as it is for at least two hours before installing it. (Dew condensation: When a metallic object is brought from a low-temperature place to a high-temperature place, water vapor around it is cooled abruptly and consequently water drops stick to the surface of the metallic object.) 2) The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 78.9 kg ( FAX standard model). Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country. In addition, be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it. 3) This product was designed considering the potential connection to the Norwegian IT power distribution system

Table of Options Combination NOTE: • Following table shows the combination of options to be installed at the right side of the host machine. • Refer to the table below to install the options described in the table. Be sure to check the combination before the installation work.

Utility Tray

Voice Operation Kit

Voice Card Reader Guidance Kit

Utility Tray

-

No

No

Yes

Voice Operation Kit Voice Guidance Kit Card Reader

No No Yes

No Yes

No Yes

Yes Yes -

Yes: installation is available No: installation is not available

T-9-1

9

Installation > Table of Options Combination

9-4

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-5

Checking the Contents NOTE: Remove all the parts in the cassette.

[1] Toner cartridge x 1 (CN/KR/TW only)

[6] Cassette size label x 2

[11] Seal x 2

[2] Drum unit x 1

[3] Subtray x 1

[7] Handle cover x 2

[8] Air Filter x 2

[12] Copy inhibition label for US x 3

[13] Glass cleaning/lamp caution label x 1 for US

[4] Reverse tray x 1

[9] Right Cover (Lower) X 1 (only when the cassette feeding unit is not installed)

[14] Finger pinch caution label 1 x1 for US/Asia with ADF standard

[5] Power cord x 1 (230V model only)

[10] Service Book Holder X 1

[15] Finger pinch caution label 2 x1 for US/Asia with ADF standard

T-9-2

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-5

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-6

Check to make sure that none of the following documentations and CDs is missing: Before Using This Machine Setup Guide Basic Operation Guide e-Manual CD UFR II User Software CD Features of AMS AMS KIT Software/Manual CD Main unit warranty Chinese Certificate Installation Procedure Service Log Book HDD-related Option Integration Installation Procedure Notice for Latest Software User's Guide PCL User Software CD Blue Angel Notice

US

ASIA, AU

KR

TW

CN

IN

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -

1 1 1 1 1 -

1 1 1 1 1 1 -

1 1 1 1 1 -

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 -

1 -

1 -

1 -

1 -

1 -

1 T-9-3

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-6

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

9-7

Unpacking and Installation Procedure Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials 1) Unpack the machine and remove the vinyl cover. NOTE: When installing the host machine and the options at the same time, install the options first by following the procedure below for better workability. 1. Installing the Cassette Feeding Unit (Refer to Installation Procedure for the Cassette Feeding Unit.) 2. Installing the DADF (if it is an option) (Refer to Installation Procedure for the DADF.) 3. Installing the host machine

2) While holding four handles on the left and right sides of the machine, lift the machine to take it down from the palette. CAUTION: The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 78.9 kg (FAX standard model). Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country. In addition, be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it.

F-9-7

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

9-7

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

3) Remove the tapes on the exterior of the host machine.

9-8

7) Press the cassette release button to draw out the cassette 1/2 forward. 8) Remove the wire that secures the intermediate plate of the cassette 1/2 and the fixing tape

CAUTION:

of the cassette 2. 9) Insert the cassette 1/2.

Remove the following in later step. • Front cover inside (fixing tape of the waste toner container mount) • Reader assembly (two optical system fixing screws) • Cassette inside (wire of the cassette intermediate plate) • Right cover inside (fixing pressure release material)

4) Open the ADF or platen cover, and remove the cushioning material. 5) Close the ADF or platen cover.

6) Remove two optical system fixing screws on the left side of the reader. (Keep the removed

F-9-9

screws because they may be used later for machine relocation.) 10) Push the button to open the right cover.

x2

F-9-8

9

F-9-10

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

9-8

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Toner Cartridge

9-9

Installing the Toner Cartridge

11) Remove the fixing pressure release material.

1) Open the toner supply cover.

F-9-12 F-9-11

2) Unpack the new toner cartridge, and then remove the cap.

12) Close the right cover.

NOTE: The toner cartridge is bundled with only CN/KR/TW model.

CAUTION: Do not shake the toner cartridge so that the leak of the toner happens.

F-9-13

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Toner Cartridge

9-9

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Drum Unit

9-10

Installing the Drum Unit

3) Insert the toner cartridge until it stops.

1) Open the front cover. 2) Press the button on the right cover to open the right cover. CAUTION: To prevent the drum unit from being damaged, keep the right cover open at least 5 cm during the installation procedure.

3) Turn the lock lever to release the waste toner container as shown below. 4) Take out the waste toner container.

F-9-14

4) Close the toner supply cover.

F-9-15

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Drum Unit

9-10

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Drum Unit

5) Remove the tapes on the toner cartridge mount.

9-11

8) Remove the drum cover. (Keep the drum cover because it may be used later for machine relocation.)

F-9-16

6) Remove 1 screw from the developer pressure lever.

F-9-18

9) Unpack the new drum unit, remove packaging materials, and then pull two orange rings to

7) Turn the lever as shown below to release the drum unit.

remove the protective cover. CAUTION: • Do not touch the drum surface while at work.

x1

• Do not expose the drum surface to light for a long period of time.

F-9-17 F-9-19

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Drum Unit

9-11

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Drum Unit

10) While holding the drum unit at the handle and the position shown below, insert it into the body slowly until it stops.

9-12

11) Turn the lever as shown below to lock the drum unit. 12) Secure the developer pressure lever. • 1 Screw removed at the step 7)

CAUTION: When inserting the drum unit, check that the drum unit fits precisely with the rail of the host machine.

x1

F-9-21

13) Place the waste toner container in the machine. 14) Lower the lock lever to lock the waste toner container.

F-9-20

F-9-22

15) Close the front cover.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Drum Unit

9-12

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Connecting the cord

Installing the Air Filter

9-13

3) Install the filter cover (front/rear). (2 claws) 4) Close the right cover.

1) Remove the filter cover (front/rear). • 2 Claws

Connecting the cord x2

1) Insert the connector of the power cord into the AC inlet. (230V model only)

F-9-23

2) Install the air filter (front/rear).

F-9-25

F-9-24

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Connecting the cord

9-13

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Stirring Toner

Setting the Environment Heater Switch (if equipped with the cassette heater) 1) On the customers request, turn the enviorment heater switch ON according to the climate condition. (Default: OFF)

9-14

Stirring Toner 1) Enter the following service mode. Service mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S 2) Check that "Check the Developer" is displayed. 3) Press “OK” . Then toner supply is executed. (For approx. 5 minutes)

ON

NOTE: Install trays, cassettes, and other parts until toner stirring is completed.

4) If it ends successfully, the screen shows [OK]. 5) Get out from service mode.

F-9-26

Turning ON the Main Power 1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 2) Remove the protection sheet on the control panel. 3) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.

NOTE: Turning OFF the Main Power 1) Open the Switch Cover and turn OFF the main power switch. 2) Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Stirring Toner

9-14

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing Trays

Installing Trays

9-15

2) Install the reverse tray. (When the inner finisher is installed at the same time, this procedure is not necessary.)

1) Install the subtray. • 4 Claws

NOTE: Surely insert the reverse tray till a gap disappears.

• 1 Boss

F-9-28

x4

F-9-27

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing Trays

9-15

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Setting the Cassettes

Setting the Cassettes

9-16

6) Cut the 2 points of the cassette size label with nippers.

1) Press the cassette release button to draw out the cassette forward. 2) Confirm the type of paper used by the customer. 3) While nipping the trail edge guide plate lever, slide the trail edge guide plate to the position corresponding to the prescribed paper size. 4) While nipping the side guide plate lever, slide the side guide palte to the position corresponding to the prescribed paper size. <550 sheets cassette>

Side Guide Plate

Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever

Side Guide Plate Lever F-9-31

7) Following the paper size, set the cassette size label (unused size plates should be put together).

Trail Edge Guide Plate F-9-29

5) Set paper and open the cover at the insertion area of the size plate. Paper Cover F-9-32

8) Close the cover at the insertion area of the cassette size label and push in the cassette. 9) Set another cassette as well.

F-9-30

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Setting the Cassettes

9-16

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Other Parts > Affixing the ADF Label (only for the standard model with an ADF)

9-17

Installing the Other Parts

■■Affixing the ADF Label (only for the standard model with an ADF)

■■Attaching the Handle Covers

1) If the following labels are supplied, go through the steps described below.

1) Attach the 2 handle covers.

• Finger pinch caution label 1

• 2 Claws

• Finger pinch caution label 2

2) Affix the finger pinch caution label 1 written in an appropriate language to the existing label.

x2

F-9-33

■■Affixing the seal F-9-35

1) Affix the 2 seals on the 2 screw holes of the left side of the reader. 3) Open the DADF. 4) Affix the finger pinch caution label 2 written in an appropriate language to the existing label..

F-9-34 F-9-36

9

9-17

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Other Parts > Affixing the ADF Label (only for the standard model with an ADF)

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Other Parts > Affix the Service Book Holder

■■Affixing the Labels to the Reader

9-18

■■Affix the Service Book Holder

1) If the following labels are supplied, go through the steps described below.

1) Remove the double-sided tape on back side of the service book holder, and affix the holder

• Glass cleaning/lamp caution label

on the base plate of the host machine. If the cassette feeding unit is not installed, put it on

• Copy inhibition label

the left cover of the host machine.

2) Open the DADF. 3) Affix the copy inhibition label [A] (written in an appropriate language) to the existing label. 4) Affix the glass cleaning/lamp caution label [B] written in an appropriate language.

F-9-38

[A]

[B]

F-9-37

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Other Parts > Affix the Service Book Holder

9-18

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking the Print Image

■■Installing the Right Cover (Lower) (only when the cassette

9-19

Securing the Host Machine

feeding unit is not installed) 1) Move the main body to the installation position, and secure it in place by turning the 4

1) Install the right cover (lower) in the direction of the arrow.

adjusters of the Cassette Feeding Unit.

NOTE: Securing of the adjuster is not earthquake resistant.

F-9-40

F-9-39

Auto Adjust Gradation 1) Clean the Copyboard Glass surface of the host machine. 2) Set A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR size papers in a cassette. (Refer to the cassette settings.) 3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment /Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto Adjust Gradation]. 4) Select the source of paper for test print, and press [OK]. 5) From this point on, follow the instruction on UI.

Checking the Print Image 1) Place a document on the document glass, copy it by feeding paper from the cassette or manual-feed tray, and then check the resultant print image. • Check that no abnormal noise is heard. • Check the image quality at respective magnifications. • Check that the document is copied normally on the specified number of sheets.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking the Print Image

9-19

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

Image Position Adjustment

9-20

■■Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

■■Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side) Adjustment of Cassette/Manual feed pickup tray Print from each cassette/Manual feed pickup tray, and check that the left edge margin of the

NOTE: By executing the margin adjustment (2nd side) for the Cassette 1, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper.

image is within L1=2.5 +/- 1.5mm. If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.

Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 1, and check that the left edge margin is within L1=2.5+/- 2.0mm.

Feeding direction of paper

If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.

L1

image

Feeding direction of paper L1

image F-9-41

1) Adjust the image position in service mode. Cassette 1: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > C1-ADJ-Y

F-9-42

Cassette 2: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > C2-ADJ-Y Cassette 3: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > C3-ADJ-Y Cassette 4: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > C4-ADJ-Y Manual feed pickup tray: Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC > MF-

1) Adjust the image position in service mode. Service mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE

ADJ-Y

NOTE: <Setting Range> -128 to 127 (0.1mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the left edge margin is increased by 0.1mm.

NOTE: <Setting Range> -128 to 127 (0.1mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the left edge margin is decreased by 0.1mm.

2) When the setting value was changed in step 1), write down the new numerical value in the service label. 2) When the setting value was changed in step 1), write down the new numerical value in the service label.

3) Exit from the service mode. 4) Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 1, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5 +/- 2.0mm.

3) Exit from the service mode. 4) Print from the cassette/manual feed pickup tray, and check that the left edge margin of the image is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)

9-20

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking the Network Connection > Checking the Network Connection

9-21

Checking the Network Connection

■■Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side) NOTE: By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 1, the adjustment is applied to all source of paper.

■■Overview If the user's network environment is TCP/IP, use the Ping function to check that the network setting is properly performed. If the user's network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, there is no need to check the

Execute printing from the Cassette 1, and check that the leading edge margin is within L1=4.0 +1.5mm/-1.0mm. If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.

network environment.

■■Checking the Network Connection

L1

CAUTION:

Feeding direction of paper

Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or higher. In addition, a sealed type (STP cable) is recommended.

image

Using the non-shield type can affect the peripheral electrical equipment through the network cable. F-9-43

1) Adjust the image position in service mode.

1) Turn OFF the main power switch.

Service mode (Level 1) > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST

2) Connect the network cable to the Host Machine and turn ON the main power switch. 3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that installation of the Host Machine

NOTE: <Setting Range> -128 to 127 (0.1mm per unit) As the value is incremented by 1, the leading edge margin is increased by 0.1mm.

2) When the setting value was changed in step 1), write down the new numerical value in the service label.

is complete, and then, ask for the network setting.

NOTE: Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator. Factory default password is as follows. • System administration division ID: 7654321 • System administration password: 7654321

3) Exit from the service mode. 4) Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 1, and check that the left edge margin is within L1=4.0 +1.5mm/-1.0mm.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking the Network Connection > Checking the Network Connection

9-21

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine

9-22

Network Troubleshooting

CAUTION: To perform the network setting, the following Additional Functions items must be set "ON". • [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [Change network settings/ check connection] • [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Use IPv4]

■■Checking Connection of the Network Cable To check whether the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet Port.

■■Operation Procedure Using Ping 1) Ask the network administrator at the user’s site to write down the IP address of the PC that is connected to the network.

4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.

2) [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric keypad and press

■■Operation Procedure Using Ping

Execute key. • The network is properly connected if the message say "Response from the host". • If the message say "No response from the host", check the following.

CAUTION: To execute Ping command with the Windows Vista-installed PC, set OFF the firewall, or execute Ping command from the Windows Vista-installed PC to the Host Machine.

NOTE: The IP address of the PC can be checked by the following procedure: Select the following on a Windows PC: Start > Program > Accessory > Command Prompt; and enter “ipconfig” and press Enter key to display information of the IP address.

1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [PING command] 2) Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the Control Panel and press "Execute" key. "Response from the host" is displayed if Ping command is succeeded while "no response from the host" is displayed if failed.

Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine Check if the IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct. 1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting]

■■Checking by the Remote Host Address

> [IPv4 setting] > [IP address setting]; and write down the address in the IP address field.

Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check whether connection to the network is enabled or not.

2) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address.

Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal connected/running on TCP/IP network

• The IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct if the message say "Response

environment that connects to this equipment.

from the host". • If the message say "No response from the host", check the following.

1) Inform the system administrator about checking of the network connection using Ping. 2) Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator. 3) Enter the remote host address to Ping. • The network is properly connected if the message say "Response from the host".

NOTE: When setting the address by manually input, set the Subnet Mask by following the instruction of the administrator.

• The network is not properly connected if the message say "No response from the host", therefore, execute the following troubleshooting.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine

9-22

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller

9-23

Checking Network Function on the Main Controller Perform checking by the loopback address. 1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address, "127.0.0.1" with the numeric keypad and enter Execute key. • The network function of the Main Controller is working properly if the message say "Response from the host". • If the message say "No response from the host", the network function of the Main Controller is faulty. 2) Replace with a Main Controller that works properly, and then check connection.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller

9-23

9

Installation > Printer Model (for Europe) > Points to Note at Installation

9-24

Printer Model (for Europe) Points to Note at Installation If the machine is used as a copier model, "Image Reader Unit-H1" is required. Follow the Installation Procedure included in the package of the Image Reader Unit to install it, and then install from the "Installing the Toner Cartridge". If the machine is used as a printer model, "Printer Cover-E1" is required. Follow the this installation procedure to install the Printer Cover, and then install from the "Installing the Toner Cartridge". Items of Installation Procedure Making Pre-Checks Points to Make Before Installation Table of Options Combination Checking the Contents Unpacking and Unpacking the Machine and Removing Installation the Packaging Materials Procedure Insatallation of "Printer Cover-E1" or "Image Reader Unit-H1" Installing the Toner Cartridge Installing the Drum Unit Installing the Air Filter Connecting the cord Setting the Environment Heater Switch Turning ON the Main Power Stirring Toner Installing Trays Setting the Cassettes Installing the Other Parts Securing the Host Machine Auto Adjust Gradation Checking the Print Image Image Position Adjustment Checking the Network Connection Network Troubleshooting Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine Checking Network Function on the Main Controller Turning OFF the Main Power

Reference Procedure reference of the Copier model Reference of this procedure

Procedure reference of the Copier model

Reference of this procedure Procedure reference of the Copier model

T-9-4

9

Installation > Printer Model (for Europe) > Points to Note at Installation

9-24

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-25

Checking the Contents [1] Drum unit x 1

[2] Subtray x 1

[3] Reverse tray x 1

[4] Cassette size label x 2

[5] Handle cover x 2

[6] Right lower cover X 1

[7] Operation panel x 1

[8] Service Book Holder x 1

[9] Filter x 2

[10] Power cord x 1

[11] Screw x 2

T-9-5

Check to make sure that none of the following documentations and CDs is missing: [1] e-Manual [2] UFR II User Software CD [3] Notice for Latest Software [4] User's Guide [5] PCL User Software CD [6] Blue Angel Notice

9

Installation > Checking the Contents

9-25

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

Contents of Printer Cover-E1

9-26

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

[1] Printer Top Cover Unit X 1

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

[2] Printer Top Front Cover X 1

2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

Unpacking and Installation Procedure Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials [3] Reader Left Cover X 1

1) Unpack the machine and remove the vinyl cover.

[4] Reader Right Cover X 1

NOTE:

• When installing the host machine and the options at the same time, install the options first by following the procedure below for better workability. 1. Installing the Cassette Pedestal (Refer to Installation Procedure for the Cassette Pedestal.) 2. Installing the host machine • When installing the host machine and the USB Device Port at the same time, install the USB Device Port before installing the Control Panel (after step 9 of “Installing the Printer Cover”)

[5] Screws (Binding; M4x6) X 10

2) While holding four handles on the left and right sides of the machine, lift the machine to

[6] Screws (RS Tightening; M3x8) X 10

take it down from the palette.

CAUTION: The maximum weight of the machine is approx. 63.5 kg. Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country. In addition, be sure to keep the machine leveled when lifting it.

F-9-44

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

9-26

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

9-27

3) Remove the tapes on the exterior of the host machine. CAUTION: Remove the following in later step. • Cassette inside (wire of the cassette intermediate plate) • Front cover inside (fixing tape of the waste toner container mount) • Right cover inside (fixing pressure release material)

4) Press the cassette release button to draw out the cassette forward. 5) Remove the wire that secures the intermediate plate of the cassette 1/2 and the fixing tape. 6) Insert the cassette 1/2 the host machine.

F-9-46

F-9-45

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Unpacking the Machine and Removing the Packaging Materials

9-27

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-28

Installing the Printer Cover

7) Press the button on the right cover to open the right cover.

1) Remove tapes on the printer cover. 2) Remove the printer top front fover, the reader right cover and the reader left cover are secured with tapes.

F-9-47

8) Remove the fixing pressure release material.

F-9-49

F-9-48

9) Close the right cover.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-28

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-29

5) Fix the left stay. 3) Take out the cable of the host machine outward.

• 4 Screws (Binding, M4×6)

x4

F-9-52

6) Fix the printer top cover unit. • 2 Screws (Binding, M4×6)

F-9-50

4) Attach the printer top cover unit on the host machine. Set the left stay with the bosses aligned. Put the left stay of the host machine in the inside of the reader rear cover.

x2

F-9-53

F-9-51

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-29

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

7) Remove the operation panel fixing plate from the bundled operation panel in the host machine.

9-30

8) Do it through the cables in the hole of the operation panel fixing plate as shown in the figure.

• 2 Screws (Save the removed screws for later use. )

x2

F-9-55 F-9-54

9) Fix the operation panel fixing plate . • 4 Screws (Binding, M4×6) • 4 Screws (RS-tight, M3×8)

x8

F-9-56

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-30

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-31

10) Route the cables as shown in the figure. • 1 Wire saddle

12) Attach the operation panel.

• 1 Edge saddle

• 2 Screw (RS-tight, M3×8) removed at the step 7) • 2 Claws

x2

x2 x2

F-9-57 F-9-59

11) Attach the following parts to the operation panel. • 2 Connectors • 1 Reuse Band • 6 Wire saddles • 2 Screws (Bundled in the Host Machine) Reuse Band Wire Saddle

x2 x6 x2 Wire Saddle F-9-58

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-31

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

13) Attach the reader right cover with the printer top cover slightly lifted.

14) Attach the reader left cover with the printer top cover slightly lifted.

• 3 Claws

• 3 Claws

• 2 Screw (RS-tight, M3×8)

• 2 Screws (RS-tight, M3×8)

9-32

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

Be careful not to lift the printer top cover too high when attaching the reader right

Be careful not to lift the printer top cover too high when attaching the reader left

cover.

cover.

x2

x2

x3

x3 F-9-60 F-9-61

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-32

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-33

15) Attach the printer top front cover. • 2 Screws (RS-tight, M3×8)

x2

F-9-62

16) Execute the installation procedure of the host machine from "Installing the Toner Cartridge" in chapter 9 of Installation.

9

Installation > Unpacking and Installation Procedure > Installing the Printer Cover

9-33

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Outline Drawing

Heater Kit-K1

9-34

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

■■Checking the Contents

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

*1: When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, this item is installed. Therefore, this item is not used. [1] Heater PCB X1

[2] Heater SW harness X 1(*1)

[3] Heater AC harness X 1(*1)

[4] Heater DC harness X 1

2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

[5] Screw (RS-tight, M3x8) X 1(*1)

F-9-64

F-9-63

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-34

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

Points to Note Before Installation

9-35

Installation Procedure

1.Install the cassette heater unit before installing the heater PCB. 2.When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, replace the cassette heater PCB with the heater PCB bundled in the Heater Kit-K1.

1) Remove the power cord clamp. (100/120V only) • 1 Screw 2) Remove the power cord.

• Cassette heater PCB mounted as standard

x1

J1106 J1101

To PSU

J1102 F-9-65

• Heater PCB J1105 J1107

J1104

J1106 READER DECK

ENV

F-9-67

J1101

To Ecnt To PSU

J1103 J1102 F-9-66

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-35

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-36

3) Remove the rear cover.

5) Remove the connector cover.

• 4 Screws

• 1 Screw

• 4 Claws

x1 x4

x4 F-9-70

6) When the cassette pedestal is installed, remove the connector.

x3 F-9-68

4) Remove the left rear cover. • 4 Screws • 2 Claws

x2

F-9-71

x4

F-9-69

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-36

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

7) Remove the lower rear cover.

9-37

9) Open the front cover of the host machine and remove the screw, bend the left cover and

• 4 Screws

remove the inside base cover.

• 3 Claws

• 1 Screw • 3 Claws

x4

x3

x1 x3

F-9-72

8) Using a nipper, remove the precut portion of the lower rear cover as shown below.

F-9-74

NOTE: Be sure to check that there is no burr after cutting with nippers.

F-9-73

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-37

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

10) Remove the left cover.

9-38

11) Install the heater SW harness firmly in the power cord bracket. (When the cassette heater

• 2 Screws

PCB as standard is installed, this procedure is not needed.)

NOTE: Install the heater SW harness in the correct direction referring to the figure in the power cord bracket.

x2

F-9-75

F-9-76

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-38

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

12) Put the long Heater SW harness through the edge saddle on the rear frame. (When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, this procedure is not needed.)

9-39

13) Joint the connector of the heater SW harness to J102 of the power supply unit. (When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, this procedure is not needed.)

• 1 Edge Saddle

x1 F-9-78

F-9-77

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-39

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

14) Attach the heater PCB. (When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, remove it. Then attach the bundled heater PCB.)

9-40

15) Joint the connector of the shorter harness of the heater SW harness to J1101 of the heater PCB.

• 1 Screw (RS ; M3X8) NOTE: When the cassette heater is installed, take out the cassette heater connector in the front of the heater PCB.

x1

x1

F-9-80

16) When the cassette heater is installed, joint the connector to J1102 on the heater PCB [A] as shown figure. When the cassette heater is not installed, remove the harness which connects with DC controller from the wire saddle, then joint it to J1102 on the heater PCB [B] as shown figure.

x1

x1 x2

F-9-79

F-9-81

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-40

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

17) Joint the connector of the heater DC harness to J205 on the DC controller PCB. (Joint the connector without the protective tube.)

9-41

20) Remove the cassette relay bracket. When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, this procedure is not needed.

18) Route the harness as shown in the figure.

• 1 Screw

• 8 Wire Saddles • 1 Connector

x1

x8 x1 F-9-82

19) Joint the connector of the heater DC harness to J1103 on the heater PCB.

x1 F-9-84

F-9-83

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-41

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

21) Joint the connector of the longest branch of the heater AC harness to the cassette relay bracket.（When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, this procedure is not needed.）

9-42

24) When the cassette heater is installed, joint the connector to J1106 [A] on the heater PCB. When the cassette heater is not installed clamp the heater AC harness to [B] as shown figure.

x1

F-9-85

22) Attach the cassette relay bracket.（When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, this procedure is not needed.） 23) Route the heater AC harness as shown in the figure.（When the cassette heater PCB as standard is installed, this procedure is not needed.） • 3 Wire Saddles F-9-87

x3

F-9-86

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-42

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

25) When the cassette heater is installed, joint the connector to the cassette heater connector.

9-43

26) Restore the removed parts:

When the cassette heater is not installed, insert the connector between the heater PCB

• Left cover <2 Screws (RS; M3x8)>

and the frame as shown in the figure. And fix it.

• Inside base cover <1 Screw (RS; M3x8), 3 Claws> • Lower rear cover <4 Screws (RS; M3x8), 3 Claws> • Connector (When the cassette pedestal is installed.) • Connector cover <1 Screw (RS; M3x8)> • Left rear cover <4 Screws (RS; M3x8), 2 Claws> • Rear cover <4 Screws (TP; M3x8), 4 Claws> • Power cord clamp <1 Screw (TP; M3x6)>(100/120V model only) • Power cord

27) When the optional heater was installed at the same time, turn the environmental heater switch ON.

F-9-88

9

Installation > Heater Kit-K1 > Installation Procedure

9-43

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Points to Note Before Installation

Reader Heater Unit-H1

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

■■Checking the Contents [1] Reader heater X 2

9-44

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then

[2] Heater harness A X 1

disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

[3] Wire saddle (middle) X 4

[4] Wire saddle (small) X 3

[5] Screw (Binding; M4x6) X 2

[6] Heater harness B X 1

[7] Wire saddle (large) X 3

F-9-90

Points to Note Before Installation Confirm that the Heater Kit-K1 has already been installed in the host machine. F-9-89

When the cassette heater PCB is installed as standard, replace the cassette heater PCB with the heater PCB in the Heater Kit-K1. When the G3 Line Fax Unit (2/3/4 line) is installed, remove it.

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Points to Note Before Installation

9-44

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Harness

Installation Procedure

9-45

3) Remove the rear cover.

■■Installing the Reader Harness

• 4 Screws • 4 Claws

1) Remove the power cord clamp. (100/120V only) • 1 Screw 2) Remove the power cord.

x4

x4

x1

F-9-92

F-9-91

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Harness

9-45

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Harness

4) Remove the left rear cover.

9-46

6) When the cassette pedestal is installed, remove the connector.

• 4 Screws • 2 Claws

x3 x2

x4

F-9-95

7) Remove the lower rear cover. F-9-93

• 4 Screws • 3 Claws

5) Remove the connector cover. • 1 Screw

x4

x1

x3

F-9-94

F-9-96

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Harness

9-46

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Harness

8) Unlock the wire saddles and stretch the folded harness as shown.

9-47

10) Attach the 4 supplied wire saddles (middle). 11) Attach the heater harness B. • 5 Wire saddles

x1 Caution: Route the heater harness B as shown in the figure below.

F-9-97

9) Joint 1 connector of the heater harness B to the connector of the reader unit.

x1

x5 Wire saddle (middle)

F-9-98

F-9-99

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Harness

9-47

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Heater

9-48

■■Installing the Reader Heater

12) Joint the connector to J1105 of the heater PCB.

1) Open the ADF (or platen Cover). 2) Detach the glass retainer (right). • 2 Screws

x1

3) Remove the platen glass.

x2

F-9-100

F-9-101

4) Move the drive belt [A] in the arrow direction to shift the CCD unit [B] to the center.

[A]

[B]

F-9-102

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Heater

9-48

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Heater

5) Attach the 2 supplied wire saddles (small).

10) Restore the following parts:

6) Attach the heater on the left of the reader.

• Platen glass

• 1 Connector

• Glass retainer (right) (2 Flat Head Screws)

• 1 Screw(Binding; M4x6)

• Lower rear cover <4 Screws (RS; M3x8), 3 Claws>

• 2 Wire Saddles

• Connector (When the cassette pedestal is installed.)

9-49

• Connector cover <1 Screw (RS; M3x8)> • Left rear cover <4 Screws (RS; M3x8), 2 Claws> • Rear cover<4 Screws (TP; M3x8), 4 Claws>

x1

• Power cord clamp (100/120V model only)<1 Screw (TP; M3x6)> • Power cord

x2

x1

11) Turn the enviorment heater switch ON.

F-9-103

7) Attach the 1 supplied wire saddle (small). 8) Joint the 1 connector. 9) Attach the heater on the left of the reader. • 1 Screw(Binding; M4x6) • 1 Wire Saddle

x1 x1

x1

F-9-104

9

Installation > Reader Heater Unit-H1 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Reader Heater

9-49

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Confirmation of Heater Driver PCB

Drum Heater-C1

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Checking the Contents [1] Drum heater unit X1

9-50

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

[2] Wire saddle X 2

Installation Outline Drawing

[3] Edge saddle X 1

[4] Relay cable X 1

F-9-105

F-9-106

Confirmation of Heater Driver PCB Confirm that the Heater Kit-K1 has already been installed in the host machine. When the cassette heater PCB is installed as standard, replace the cassette heater PCB with the heater PCB in the Heater Kit-K1.

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Confirmation of Heater Driver PCB

9-50

9 Installation Procedure

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-51

3) Turn the lock lever as shown in the figure. 4) Remove the waste toner container.

1) Open the front cover.

F-9-107 F-9-109

2) Push the button to open the right cover.

5) Remove 1 screw from the developing pressure lever. 6) Turn the developing pressure lever as shown in the figure and release the drum unit.

x1

F-9-110 F-9-108

CAUTION: To avoid any damage on the drum unit, keep the right cover open by 5 cm or more during installation.

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-51

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

7) Remove the drum unit.

9-52

11) Remove the link cover. • 1 Claw 12) Remove the link lever from the shaft.

x1

F-9-111

CAUTION: Do not touch the drum surface during the work.

Claw

Be sure to block light to the removed drum unit using paper.

F-9-113

8) Open the toner supply cover. 9) Remove the toner container. 10) Remove the 2 screws.

x2

F-9-112

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-52

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-53

NOTE: When closing the toner cover without the toner container, push the lock release lever.

13) Remove the toner supply cover. • 1 Claw Claw

x1 F-9-115

F-9-114

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-53

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

14) Detach 1 connector and draw the developing unit out.

9-54

16) Remove the power cord clamp. (100/120V only) • 1 Screw 17) Remove the power cord.

x1 x1

F-9-116

15) Remove the cable from the guide and then remove 2 screws to detach the developing stay. (Removed developing stay is no longer used. Save the removed screw for later use. ) F-9-118

18) Remove the rear cover.

x2

• 4 Screws • 4 Claws

x4

x4

F-9-117

F-9-119

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-54

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

19) Remove the left rear cover.

9-55

21) When the cassette pedestal is installed, remove the connector.

• 4 Screws • 2 Claws

x3 x2

x4

F-9-122

22) Remove the lower rear cover. F-9-120

• 4 Screws • 3 Claws

20) Remove the connector cover. • 1 Screw

x4

x1

x3

F-9-121

F-9-123

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-55

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-56

23) Bend the left cover and remove the inside base cover.

24) Remove the left cover.

• 1 Screw

• 2 Screws

• 3 Claws

x2

x1 x3

F-9-125

25) Remove the power supply unit. • All connectors on the power supply unit F-9-124

• 3 Screws

x3

F-9-126

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-56

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

26) Joint the connector of the supplied relay cable to the connector of the drum heater unit.

9-57

NOTE: Insert the positioning pins of the drum heater unit to the holes of rear frame.

x1

F-9-127

F-9-129

27) Attach the drum heater unit in the host machine. • 2 Screws removed at the step 15) CAUTION: Do not damage the pre-transfer guide when installing the drum heater unit.

x2

F-9-128

F-9-130

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-57

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

28) Mount 2 supplied wire saddles on the rear frame.

9-58

30)Joint the connector of the drum heater harness to J1104 on the heater PCB.

29) Route the drum heater harness as shown in the figure. • 2 Wire Saddles • 1 Edge Saddle

x1 x3

F-9-132

F-9-131

31) Restore the removed parts: • Power supply unit <3 Screws (RS; M3x8), 1 Connector> • Left cover <2 Screws (RS; M3x8)> • Inner base cover <1 Screw (RS; M3x8), 3 Claws> • Lower rear cover <4 Screws (RS; M3x8), 3 Claws> • Connector (When the cassette pedestal is installed.) • Connector cover <1 Screw (RS; M3x8)> • Left rear cover <4 Screws (RS; M3x8), 2 Claws> • Rear cover <4 Screws (TP; M3x8), 4 Claws> • Developing unit <1 Connector> • Link cover <1 Claw> • Toner supply cover (2 Screws (RS; M3x8), 1 Claw) • Power cord clamp (100/120V model only)<1 Screw (TP; M3x6)> • Power cord

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-58

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

32) Attach the drum unit.

9-59

35) Attach the waste toner cartridge. 36) Turn the lock lever as shown in the figure and lock the waste toner container.

CAUTION: When inserting the drum unit, confirm engagement of the drum unit and the drum unit rail of the host machine.

F-9-135

37) Close the front cover. 38) Close the right cover. 39) Turn the environment heater switch ON. F-9-133

33) Turn the developing pressure lever to set the drum unit. 34) Fix the the developing pressure lever. • 1 Screw

x1

F-9-134

9

Installation > Drum Heater-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-59

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Turning OFF the Main Power Switch

Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1



Confirmation of Heater Driver PC Confirm that the Heater Kit-K1 has already been installed in the host machine. (Refer to the host machine installation “Heater Kit-K1”.)

Checking Bundled Components [14] [3]

[6]

[1]

[5]

[13] [12]

[7] [4]

[5]

9-60

[2]

[10]

[1]

Heater unit

1 pc.

[2]

AC input connector

1 pc.

[3]

Relay harness

1 pc.

[4]

AC Cable

1 pc.

[5]

W/ washer screw (M4x8)

2 pcs.

[6]

Cable protection bushing

1 pc.

[7]

Power supply label

2 pcs. (*Only 1 pc. is used)

[8]

Wire saddle (white)

3 pcs. (*Only 2 pcs. are used)

[9]

Plug cover

1 pc.

[10]

Binding screw (M4x4)

1 pc.

[11]

Wire saddle (black)

5 pcs.

[12]

AC output connector

1 pc.

[13]

Binding screw (M4x6)

1 pc.

[14]

Toothed washer

1 pc.

Turning OFF the Main Power Switch Check that the main power switch is OFF.

[9]

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. [8]

2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then

[11] F-9-136

disconnect the power plug.

When installing the heater to the paper deck, take the following precautions: a. The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet. b. Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck.

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Turning OFF the Main Power Switch

9-60

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

Installation Procedure

9-61

3) Detach the right cover of the paper deck in the direction of the arrow shown.

1) Release the interface cable of the paper deck from the wire saddle, and then disconnect

• 3 Screws

the connector from the host machine.

x3 x1

x1 F-9-139

4) Detach the rear cover of the paper deck. • 4 RS tight screws (M4x8) F-9-137

2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the paper deck to open the compartment.

• 2 TP screws (M3x6) NOTE: When the rear cover is removed, loosen the screw shown by an arrow in the figure, if it is difficult to remove the rear cover because of contacting to the left rear cover.

x6

F-9-138

F-9-140

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-61

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

5) Detach the front upper cover.

9-62

7) Attach the supplied cable protection bushing to the hole on the top plate of the paper deck.

• 3 Screws • 1 Connector

x3 x1

F-9-143

F-9-141

8) Place the heater unit under the top plate of the paper deck, and then take the connector out of the hole on the top plate.

6) Detach the top cover. • 2 Screws

9) Insert the 2 hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck, and then secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck. • 1 W/washer screw (M4x8)

x2

x2 F-9-142

x1

F-9-144

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-62

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

10)Attach the heater connector to the panel mount.

9-63

12)Install the supplied AC input connector in order of [A] -> [B]. • 1 W/washer screw (M4x8)

[A] [B]

x1

F-9-145 F-9-147

11)Remove the blindfold plate from the power cord mount of the paper deck.

13)Attach the 5 wire saddles (black) to the rear side panel of the paper deck as shown.

• 1 Screw NOTE: Removed screw and blindfold cover are no longer reused.

x1

x5

F-9-148

F-9-146

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-63

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

14)Put the relay harness in the 5 wire saddles (black), and then attach the connector.

9-64

16)Reattach the external covers of the paper deck in the following sequence: [1] Top cover (2 RS tight screws (M4x8))

NOTE: 2 snap-bands (A) equipped with the relay harness are not used.

[2] Front upper cover (1 connector and 3 RS tight screws (M4x8)) [3] Rear cover (4 RS tight screws (M4x8) and 2 TP screws (M3x6)) [4] Right cover (3 RS tight screws (M4x8))

17)Close the compartment and manually slide the paper deck to the left to place it aside of the host machine

x5

18)Remove the connector cover at the rear side of the host machine. And then disconnect 3 connectors for the cassette pedestal. • 1 Screw

A F-9-149

15)Put the relay harness in the 2 wire saddles on the power cord mount, and then connect the connector.

x2

F-9-151

F-9-150

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-64

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

19)Remove the lower rear cover, and then cut out the blindfold cover with the nipper. • 4 Screws

9-65

21)Reattach the external covers of the host machine in the following sequence: [1] Lower rear cover (4 RS tight screws (M3x8)) [2] Connector cover (3 connctors and 1 RS tight screw (M3x8))

22)Put the interface cable of the paper deck in the wire saddle and then connect the connector of the paper deck to the back of the host machine. Detach the 2 blindfold seals from the rear cover of the host machine, and then attach the 2 wire saddles (white).

x1 F-9-152

x1

20)Attach the connector of the AC output connector to the heater PCB and then attach the AC

1

2

input connector to the power cord mount. • 1 Binding screw (M4x6) • 1 Toothed washer

F-9-154

x1 x1

F-9-153

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-65

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

23)Connect the connector of the supplied AC cable to the power cord mount of the paper

9-66

25)Stick the supplied power supply label to the rear cover of the paper deck.

deck. Put the AC cable in the wire saddles, and then connect the other connector (plug) to the receptacle of the host machine.

x2 x2 F-9-157

F-9-155

24)Attach the supplied plug cover. • 1 Binding screw (M4x4)

x1

F-9-156

9

Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-C1 > Installation Procedure

9-66

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Checking the Contents > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2

Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 Points to Note at Installation

9-67

Checking the Contents ■■Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2 [1] Serial RS Conversion Board X 1

[2] PCB Spacer X 1

[3] RS Conversion Cable (Short) X 1

[4] Hexagonal Screw X 2

[5] Washer X 2

[6] IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1

[7] Support Plate X 1

[8] RS Conversion Cable (Long) X 1

[9] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 3

• To use this equipment with be sure to install the Serial Interface Kit or Copy Control Interface Kit beforehand. • The following options cannot be used in combination with each other. • Serial Interface Kit • Copy Control Interface Kit • Copy Card Reader

K2 only

K2 only

K2 only

F-9-158

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Checking the Contents > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2

9-67

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Preparation before Installation

9-68

Installation Outline Drawing

■■Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 [1] CC-VI Cable X 1

[2] D-SUB Support Plate X1

[4] Hexagonal Screw (Spring Washer (Small) ,Nut) X 2

Do not use a Nut

[3] Washer (large) X 2

[5] IA Harness Protection Sheet X 1

F-9-160

Installation Procedure ■■Preparation before Installation F-9-159

1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

• 2 Screws • 2 Protrusions • 1 Claw

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

x2 Protrusion

Claw F-9-161

9

9-68

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > Preparation before Installation

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > When Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2

9-69

CAUTION:

2) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. 3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 on flat surface.

• 2 Screws (beside of arrow mark)

Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.

• 1 Connector CAUTION: Be sure to move the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable to the Reader side to prevent the cables from being trapped. USB Cable

x3

Arrow Mark

Control Panel Communication Cable

x2

F-9-163

Connector

Arrow Mark

■■When Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2 1) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate will not be used.) • 2 Screws (One of the removed screws will be used in step 4), and the other will not be used.)

x2

Main Controller PCB 1 F-9-162

F-9-164

9

9-69

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > When Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > When Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2

9-70

2) Install the PCB Spacer.

4) Install the Serial RS Conversion Board. • 2 Hexagon Screws • 2 Washers • 1 Screw (Use one of the screws removed in step 1.) • 1 Connector NOTE: Be sure to tighten the Hexagon Screw with needlenose pliers.

x3

F-9-165

3) Connect the RS Conversion Cable to the Serial RS Conversion Board.

F-9-167

F-9-166

9

9-70

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > When Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > When Installing the Control Interface Kit-A1

9-71

■■When Installing the Control Interface Kit-A1

3) Connect the CC-VI Cable to the Main Controller PCB 1. • 2 Hexagon Screws (Nuts will not be used.)

1) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate will not be used.)

• 2 Spring Washers (Small)

• 2 Screws (The removed Screw will not be used.)

• 2 Washers (Large) • 1 Connector NOTE: Be sure to tighten the Hexagon Screw with needlenose pliers.

x2

x2 Washer (Large) Spring Washer (Small) F-9-168

Washer (Large)

2) Put the CC-VI Cable through the D-SUB Support Plate.

Spring Washer (Small)

CAUTION: Install the extruded side of the D-SUB Support Plate as shown in the figure.

Hexagon Screw F-9-170

Inside

D-SUB Support Plate CC-VI Cable F-9-169

9

9-71

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > Installation Procedure > When Installing the Control Interface Kit-A1

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > After Installation

9-72

After Installation 1) Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws) CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

2) Insert the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. 3) Install the Right Rear Cover (Upper). (2 Screws) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

4) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 5) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

Installation > Serial Interface Kit-K1/K2_Copy Control Interface Kit-A1 > After Installation

9-72

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type A (512MB) > Installation Outline Drawing

Additional Memory Type A (512MB)

9-73

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Checking the Contents

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

[1] Expansion RAM X 1

Installation Outline Drawing

F-9-171

Pre-Check F-9-172

1) Check the memory capacity. Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > Display > ACC-STS > RAM 2) Exit the service mode.

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type A (512MB) > Installation Outline Drawing

9-73

9

Installation > Additional Memory Type A (512MB) > Checking after installation

Installation Procedure

9-74

3) Install the Expansion RAM.

1) Remove the Rear Cover.

CAUTION:

• 4 Screws

After installing the Additional Memory, check that the Claw is properly on the upper side of memory.

• 4 Claws

x4 Claw

x4 Claw

Rear Cover F-9-173 F-9-175

2) Remove the Controller Box Cover.

4) Install the removed cover.

• 6 Hooks

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left,

Hook

upper right, and then lower right.) 5) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 6) Turn ON the main power switch.

Checking after installation

Hook

1) After adding the Expansion RAM, check that the memory capacity is increased. Service mode (Level 1) > COPIER > Display> ACC-STS > RAM

Hook F-9-174

9

2) Exit the service mode.

Installation > Additional Memory Type A (512MB) > Checking after installation

9-74

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Outline Drawing

Utility Tray-A2

9-75

Installation Outline Drawing

Points to Note at Installation Refer to "Table of Options Combination" when installing this equipment before operation. Table of Options Combination Voice Guidance Kit

Voice Operation Kit

Card Reader

no

no

yes

Utility Tray

Yes : Installation is available No : Installation is not available

F-9-177

Checking the Contents [1] Utility Tray Unit X 1

[2] Wire Saddle X 5

Use when installing the USB Keyboard

[4] Keyboard Table Plate X1

[5] Screw (TP ; M4x14) X 4

[3] Screw (TP; M4x8 Black) X 10

Use 7 of them

[6] Screw (TP ; M4x10) X 2

F-9-176

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-75

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure

Installation Procedure

9-76

3) While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.

1) Remove Packing tapes.

CAUTION: To avoid damage, do not pull the [A] part of the Utility Tray too much.

2) Loosen the 2 screws, and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow until it stops.

[A]

Utility Tray Mounting Plate

F-9-179 F-9-178

4) Remove the 5 Face Seals from the Reader Right Cover. (The removed Face Seals will not be used.)

F-9-180

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure

9-76

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When Installing the USB Keyboard

5) Install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.

6) Install the Utility Tray.

• 5 Screws (TP; M4x8 Black)

• 2 Screws (TP; M4x8 Black)

9-77

• 2 Screws (Tighten the screws loosened in step 2.) CAUTION: Points to Note at Installation If the holes are marked as shown below, align the holes marked with A, E, H, K and Q with the holes in the host machine. AB Q R

C D

E

F G

H

I

J

K

L M

N

O P

S

x2 F-9-181

Tighten Tighten

F-9-183

When Installing the USB Keyboard

x5

1) Remove the 2 Cap Covers, and install the 5 Wire Saddles. (The removed Cap Covers will not be used.)

Wire Saddle F-9-182

Cap Cover

F-9-184

9

Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When Installing the USB Keyboard

9-77

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents

Voice Operation Kit-C2

9-78

Checking the Contents

Points to note when Installing

[1] Speaker Unit X 1

[2] Voice Operation Board Unit X 1

[3] DVI Cable X 1

[4] Ring Core X 2

[5] Card Spacer X 1

[6] Screw (Bind; M4x14) X 2

[7] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

[8] Wire Saddle X 3

[9] Support Plate X 1

[10] Cable Face Seal X 1

[11] Cord Guide X 7

[12] Ring Core X 1

[13] Screw (Bind; M4x20) X 2

[14] Screw (Bind; M3x14) X 1

• When installing the equipment, see the ‘Combination Table of Accessory Installation’. • The Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment.

F-9-185

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents

9-78

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-79

Installation Procedure

• Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide (5 pc.) • Voice Operation Kit Users Guide (5 pc.)

1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).

• Voice Operation Quick Reference Guide (5 pc.)

• 2 Screws

• Voice Guidance Guide CD

• 2 Protrusions

• Voice Operation Kit Manual CD

• 1 Claw

• Notice for FCC/IC

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

x2

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then

Protrusion

disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing Claw F-9-187

F-9-186

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-79

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-80

CAUTION:

2) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. 3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 on flat surface.

• 2 Screws (beside of arrow mark)

Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.

• 1 Connector CAUTION: Be sure to move the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable to the Reader side to prevent the cables from being trapped. USB Cable

x3

Arrow Mark

Control Panel Communication Cable F-9-189

x2 Connector

Arrow Mark

4) Remove the Screw and the Spacer from the Voice Operation Board Unit. (The removed screw and spacer will not be used.) Screw

Spacer

Main Controller PCB 1 F-9-188

9

Voice operation board unit

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

F-9-190

9-80

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

5) Remove the Face Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1 (The removed Face Plate will not be used.)

9-81

6) Install the Voice Operation Board Unit. • 1 Connector

• 2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 6.)

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5) • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6) NOTE: Check that the connector is connected properly.

x2

F-9-191

x4

F-9-192

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-81

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

7) Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

10)

9-82

Remove the 2 Face Seals from the Reader Right Cover. (The removed Face Seals

will not be used.) CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

8) Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.

9) Remove the Speaker Unit (Lower) from the Speaker Unit. • 2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 12.)

F-9-194

x2

Speaker Unit (Lower)

11)

Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).

• 2 Screws (Binding; M4x14)

F-9-193

x2

F-9-195

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-82

9 12)

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).

14)

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 9.)

9-83

Remove off the part of the Right Rear Cover (Upper) shown in the drawing with a flat-

blade screwdriver.

x2

F-9-198

F-9-196

13)

Install the Ring Cores to both ends of the DVI Cable, and remove the cap.

15)

Connect the DVI Cable to the Speaker Unit.

16)

Put the DVI Cable through the Right Rear Cover (Upper), and connect the other end

of the DVI Cable. 17) Ring Core

Install the Right Rear Cover (Upper).

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 1.)

DVI Cable Cap

F-9-197

NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

x2

x2

F-9-199

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure

9-83

9 18)

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Operation Check > When Stopping to Use

Remove the 3 Face Seals, and install the 3 Wire Saddles as shown in the figure.

(The removed Face Seals will not be used.)

9-84

Checking after Installation NOTE: When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator.

1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet. 2) Turn ON the main power switch. 3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Use Voice Navigation], and check that the setting is ON. 4) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice Navigation at Startup], and check that "Select Mode at Startup" is set. 5) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings], and check that "Tune Microphone" is displayed. F-9-200

19)

Secure the DVI Cable using the 3 Wire Saddles as shown in the figure.

6) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.

Operation Check ■■When Starting to Use

x3

1) Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds. 2) In "Select the Voice Navigation type." on the Control Panel screen, select "Manual + Vocal Mode", "Vocal Mode" or "Manual Mode", and press OK. 3) Once the indication on the screen is framed in red, the "Voice Operation Kit" becomes enabled. NOTE: When "Manual Mode" is selected in "Select the Voice Navigation type.", nothing happens by pressing the Voice Recognition button. F-9-201

■■When Stopping to Use 1) Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.

9

Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Operation Check > When Stopping to Use

9-84

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3

Copy Card Reader-F1

9-85

■■ Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3

Points to Note at Installation

[1] Card Reader Mounting Plate (front) Unit X 1

[2] Card Reader Mounting Plate (rear) Unit X 1

[3] Card Reader Mounting Plate (lower) Unit X 1

[4] Card Reader Relay Unit X 1

[5] Connector Cover X 1

[6] Card Reader External Relay Harness X 1

[7] Cord Guide X 2

[8] PCB Spacer X 1

[9] Wire Saddle X 1

[10] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 5

[11] Screw (Bind; M4x6) X 4

[12] Screw (TP; M4x12) X 2

• When installing the equipment, see the ‘Combination Table of Accessory Installation’. • To install the Card Reader-F1, the Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3 is required. • The following options cannot be used in combination with each other. • Serial Interface Kit • Copy Control Interface Kit

Checking the Contents ■■Copy Card Reader-F1 [1] Card Reader Unit X 1

[2] Screw (RS tight; M4x10) X 1

[3] Toothed washer X 1

F-9-202

[13] Screw (TP; M3x12) X 2

F-9-203

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-B3

9-85

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-86

Installation Procedure

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).

2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then

• 2 Screws

disconnect the power plug.

• 2 Protrusions • 1 Claw

Installation Outline Drawing x2 Protrusion

Claw F-9-205

F-9-204

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-86

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-87

CAUTION:

2) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. 3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 on flat surface.

• 2 Screws (beside of arrow mark)

Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.

• 1 Connector CAUTION: Be sure to move the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable to the Reader side to prevent the cables from being trapped. USB Cable

x3

Arrow Mark

Control Panel Communication Cable F-9-207

x2 Connector

Arrow Mark

4) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate will not be used.) • 3 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 6.)

x3

Main Controller PCB 1

F-9-208 F-9-206

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-87

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

5) Install the PCB Spacer.

9-88

7) Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws) CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

8) Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.

9) Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate (Rear) to the Card Reader Mounting Plate (Lower). • 2 Screws (Binding; M4x6) F-9-209

6) Install the Card Reader Reply Unit. • 3 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 4.) • 1 Connector

x2

F-9-211

x3

F-9-210

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-88

9 10)

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

Remove Short Connector from the connector of the Card Reader Unit. (The removed

Short Connector will not be used.)

13)

9-89

Install the Card Reader Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate (Front).

• 2 Bosses • 1 Toothed Washer • 1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4x10) • 1 Wire Saddle

Wire Saddle

Toothed Washer

F-9-212

Bosse

11)

Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the

cable by putting it through the groove shown in the figure below. • 1 Screws 12)

F-9-214

14)

Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the connector of the Card

Reader Unit.

Install the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit.

• 1 Connector • 1 Edge Saddle

Lower Cover

CAUTION: Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle.

Groove

F-9-213

F-9-215

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-89

9 15)

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate (Rear) to the Card Reader Mounting Plate

(Front).

17)

9-90

Install the Card Reader to the host machine.

• 2 Bosses

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x6)

• 2 Screws (Binding; M4x6)

CAUTION: Be careful not to trap the harness.

x2 Boss

x4 Boss

18) F-9-216

16)

Remove the Face Seal from the Reader Right Cover.

Install the Right Rear Cover (Upper). (2 Screws)

NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

F-9-217

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-90

9 19)

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

Connect the connector of the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the host

20)

machine, and install the Connector Cover.

9-91

Remove the Face Seal from the Reader Rear Cover, and install the Wire Saddle. (The

removed Face Seal will not be used.)

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6) <When using the Card Reader only> CAUTION:

• Use the Wire Saddles included in the package of this equipment.

When installing the Connector Cover, be sure to place the tie-wrap on the Card Reader External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover.

F-9-219

<When using in combination with the Voice Operation Kit> F-9-218

• Use the 2 Wire Saddles included in the Voice Operation Kit

F-9-220

9

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure

9-91

9 21)

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking after Installation

Remove the covers of 2 Cord Guides. (When using in combination with the Voice

Operation Kit, use 1 Cord Guide.)

25)

Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.

26)

Turn ON the main power switch.

9-92

Checking after Installation 1) Enter Service Mode, and set the model of the Card Reader. • Check the Service Mode(Level 1) (COPIER > Option > ACC > CR-TYPE) to see that the setting value is "0". NOTE:

F-9-221

22)

Remove the release paper from the Cord Guides, and affix the guides to the 2 areas

indicated in the figure. NOTE: When using in combination with the Voice Operation Kit, the Cord Guide [A] is not needed. 23)

any value. • Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the setting value. • After that, perform from step 1.

Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Cord Guides, and install

the covers of the guides. (When using in combination with the Voice Operation Kit, put the harness through 1 Cord Guide.) 24)

Upon user's request, number of cards (departments) can be changed. This setting change must be performed before performing step 2. • Select Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > CARD-RNG, and set

2) Enter Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > CARD, and enter the card number to be used (1 to 2001).

Secure the harness in place using the Wire Saddle. (When using in combination with

the Voice Operation Kit, secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles.)

• Enter the smallest card number to be used by a user. • From the entered card number, 1000 cards can be used. 3) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the setting value. 4) Insert a card which card number has been registered, and check that the machine moves to standby condition. NOTE:

x2

When changing number of cards (departments) upon user's request after specifying the setting, specify the following settings. In such a case, the department ID counter information is reset. • Select Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > Function> CLEAR > CARD.

[A]

• Select Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Option > FNC-SW > CARD-RNG, and set any value. • Select Service Mode > COPIER > Function > INSTALL > CARD, and enter the card

F-9-222

9

number to be used (1 to 2001). • Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch to enable the setting value. • After that, perform from step 1.

Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking after Installation

9-92

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Checking the Contents

Voice Guidance Kit-F2

9-93

Checking the Contents

Points to note when Installing

[1] Speaker Unit (Upper) X 1

[2] Speaker Unit (Lower) X 1

[3] Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1

[4] Speaker Cable X 1

[5] Cord Guide X 7

[6] Ring Core X 2

• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same. • The Color Image Reader is necessary to operate this equipment. • When installing the equipment, see the ‘Combination Table of Accessory Installation’.

Use 4 of them

[7] Card Spacer X 1

[8] Screw (Bind; M3x16) X 1

[9] Screw (Bind; M4x6) X 1

[10] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 4

[11] Screw (Bind; M4x16) X 2

[12] Support Plate X 1

Use 1 of them

[13] Cable Face Seal X 1

[14] Screw (Bind; M4x20) X 2

F-9-223

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Checking the Contents

9-93

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-94

Installation Procedure

• Voice Guidance Kit User’s Guide (E, F, I, G, S) • Voice Guidance User’s Guide CD

1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper).

• FCC/IC sheet

• 2 Screws

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

• 2 Protrusions • 1 Claw

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

x2 Protrusion

Installation Outline Drawing

Claw F-9-225

F-9-224

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-94

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-95

CAUTION:

2) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable. 3) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

Be sure to place the removed Main Controller PCB 1 on flat surface.

• 2 Screws (beside of arrow mark)

Reason: Since the fan protrudes, if it is placed at a tilt, it may be damaged.

• 1 Connector CAUTION: Be sure to move the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable to the Reader side to prevent the cables from being trapped. USB Cable

x3

Arrow Mark

Control Panel Communication Cable

x2

F-9-227

Connector

Arrow Mark

4) Remove the Screw and the Spacer from the Voice Guidance Board Unit. (The removed screw and spacer will not be used.) Screw

Voice Guidance Board Unit

Main Controller PCB 1 F-9-226

Spacer F-9-228

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-95

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

5) Remove the Face Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1 . (The removed Face Plate will not be used.)

9-96

6) Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit. • 1 Connector • 4 Screws (TP; M3x6) NOTE: Check that the connector is connected properly.

x2

F-9-229

x4

F-9-230

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-96

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

7) Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

10)

9-97

Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).

• 1 Screw (Binding; M3x16) CAUTION:

• 1 Screw (Binding; M4x16)

• Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

8) Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.

x2

9) Remove the screw and the Face Seal from the Reader Right Cover. • 1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.) Screw (Binding ; M4x16)

• 1 Face Seal (The removed Face Seal will not be used.)

Screw (Binding ; M3x16) F-9-232

11)

Install the Speaker Unit (Upper).

• 1 Screw (Binding; M4x6)

F-9-231

F-9-233

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-97

9 12)

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

Install the Ring Cores to both ends of the Speaker Cable.

14)

9-98

Cut off [A] part of the Right Upper Sub Cover with nippers.

NOTE: When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs. [A]

50mm F-9-234

13)

Connect the Speaker Cable to 2 points.

x2 F-9-236

15)

Put the Speaker Cable through the cut-off of the Right Cover (Upper Rear), and

return the cover to its original position. • 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 1.) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier. F-9-235

x2

F-9-237

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-98

9 16)

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-99

NOTE: When installing the Card Reader simultaneously, affix a Cord Guide to the area indicated in the figure.

Remove the covers of 4 Cord Guides.

F-9-238

17)

Remove the release paper from the Cord Guides, and affix the guides to the 4 areas

indicated in the figure. 18)

Put the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guides and install the covers of the guides.

F-9-240

x4

F-9-239

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure

9-99

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check > When Stopping to Use

9-100

Checking the Settings NOTE: When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator.

1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet. 2) Turn ON the main power switch. 3) Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Use Voice Navigation, and check that the setting is ON. 4) Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings, and check that "Voice Guide from Speakers" is displayed. 5) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.

Operation Check ■■When Using 1) Press “Reset” key for more than 3 seconds. 2) Press "Main Menu" on the Control Panel. 3) Once the indication on the screen is framed in red, the "Voice Guidance Kit" becomes enabled.

■■When Stopping to Use 1) Press “Reset” key for more than 3 seconds.

9

Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check > When Stopping to Use

9-100

9

Installation > Stamp Unit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing

Stamp Unit-B1

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Checking the contents [1] Stamp Solenoid X 1

9-101

[2] Stamp Ink Cartridge X 1

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned [3] Screw (P Tightening; M3x12) X 1

off, then disconnect the power plug.

Installation Outline Drawing

[4] Screw (Binding; M3x6) X 1

[5] Relay connector X 1

F-9-241 F-9-242

9

Installation > Stamp Unit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-101

9

Installation > Stamp Unit-B1 > Installation procedure

Installation procedure

9-102

3) Remove the Stamp Cover. • 1 Screw

1) Open the Feeder Cover and the Middle Cover.

CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the [A] part of the Feed Guide with a screwdriver when removing the screw.

[A]

F-9-243

2) Remove the Delivery Guide while pushing the hook [A] in the direction of the arrow. F-9-245

4) Install the Stamp Ink Cartridge to the Stamp Solenoid. [A]

CAUTION: Be sure to push the Stamp Ink Cartridge in until it clicks.

Stamp Ink Cartridge

F-9-244

Stamp Solenoid

F-9-246

9

Installation > Stamp Unit-B1 > Installation procedure

9-102

9

Installation > Stamp Unit-B1 > Operation Check

9-103

Operation Check

5) After installing the Stamp Solenoid, connect the connector.

Be sure to perform the following procedure for operation check of the Stamp Unit.

• 1 Screw (P Tightening; M3x12)

1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.

• 1 Boss

2) Turn ON the main power switch. 3) Press “Finished Stamp” key. • [Scan and Send] > [Other Function] > [Finished Stamp] 4) Put an original in the Feeder, perform a send test, and check that a stamp is printed on the original.

Connector Screw Boss Stamp Solenoid F-9-247

6) Return the removed covers to their original positions. • Stamp Cover (1 Screw) • Delivery Guide • Middle Cover • Feeder Cover

9

Installation > Stamp Unit-B1 > Operation Check

9-103

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Document Scan Lock Kit-B1

9-104

Checking the Contents

Points to note before installation

[1] Image Data Analyzer Board X 1

[2] PCB Spacer X 4

[4] Image Data Analyzer Board Support Plate X 1

[5] Screw (Binding; M3x4) X 1

[3] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 4

• To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", it is necessary to install the license which comes with the product. • Be sure to ask users to install the license after the installation.

Installation Outline Drawing

F-9-249

< CD/Guides > • License Access Number Certificate • Document Scan Code Analyzer for MEAP CD

F-9-248

• FCC/IC sheet (only for USA/Europe) • Notice for Delivered Installation sheet

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-104

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure

Installation Procedure

9-105

3) Remove the 1 Screw. (The removed screw will not be used.)

1) Remove the Rear Cover. • 4 Screws • 4 Claws

x4 Claw

x4 Claw

F-9-252

Rear Cover

4) Install the 4 PCB Spacers.

F-9-250

2) Remove the Controller Box Cover. • 6 Hooks Hook

F-9-253

Hook

Hook F-9-251

9

Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure

9-105

9

Installation > Checking after Installation

9-106

Checking after Installation

5) Install the Image Data Analyzer Board. • 1 Connector • 4 Screws (TP; M3x6)

1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 2) Turn ON the main power switch. 3) Ask users to install license. 4) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

x4

5) Press the counter check key on the control panel. 6) Press [Check Device Configuration]. 7) Check that "Image Data Analyzer Board" is displayed in option field.

F-9-254

6) Install the Controller Box Cover. 7) Install the Rear Cover. (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.)

9

Installation > Checking after Installation

9-106

9

Installation > Inner 2Way Tray-H1 > Installation Procedures

Inner 2Way Tray-H1

9-107

Installation Procedures

Points to Note When Installing

1) Insert a Inner 2Way Tray in the plug hole (2 places).

At servicing, be sure to turn off the power source according to the specified steps and disconnect the power plug.

Checking Bundled Components

F-9-257

1.Inner 2Way Tray 1 pc

F-9-255

2) Hang the Inner 2Way Tray leg on the plug hole.

Confirmation item of host machine main power supply OFF. 1) Do OFF of the main power supply of host machine. 2) Take off a power supply plug after confirming that a indication and the main power supply lamp of the operation panel disappeared.

Diagrammatical view at the time of the installation.

F-9-258

CAUTION: Confirm that an inner 2Way tray is inserted in plug hole or Tray leg precisely.

3) Insert a power supply plug in an outlet.

F-9-256

9

Installation > Inner 2Way Tray-H1 > Installation Procedures

9-107

9

Installation > Inner 2Way Tray-H1 > Setting after installation

9-108

Setting after installation 1) Turn on the main power switch. 2) Enter in the service mode. 3) COPIER > OPTION > ACC > choose IN-TRAY and register "1". 4) Do OFF/ON of the main power supply. 5) [ Settings / Registration] > [ Function settings] > [ Common] > [ Paper output settings] > [ Output Tray settings] of confirm that a menu is added. 6) Select copy to the Tray B, and perform test copy. 7) Check that a copy is delivered to the Inner 2way Tray. 8) Set the tray in accordance with user’s request.

9

Installation > Inner 2Way Tray-H1 > Setting after installation

9-108

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E3

USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/ Writer-A2/A3 Points to Note at Installation

9-109

Checking the Contents ■■USB

Device Port-E3

[1] DP Fireproof Sheet X 1

[2] Cusion X 2

[3] DP Sheet (for Japan) X 1

[4] DP Sheet (for Europe) X 1

[5] DP Board X 1

[6] Screw (RS tight; M3×8.5) X 1

[7] Screw

[8] Screw (Bind; M4×6) X9

[9] DP Upper Cover Unit X1

• Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may differ from the actual things, the procedure is the same. • When installing the Inner Finisher or the Buffer Pass simultaneously, be sure to install this equipment first. • If the Inner Finisher or the Buffer Pass is installed, this equipment cannot be installed unless it is removed. For details of installation procedure, refer to the Service Manual. • When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer or the Card Reader ,the USB Device Port must be installed beforehand. • The Multimedia Reader/Writer cannot be used in combination with the Card Reader (sales company's option)

Check Item when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 19)

Be sure that Control Panel Display and the Main Power lamp are both turned OFF,

and then disconnect the power plug.

(TP Round End; M3×6) X 10

Use 4 of them

Use 8 of them

Installation Outline Drawing

[10] DP Base Cover X 1

[11] DP Base X 1

[12] DP USB Cable X 1

F-9-259 F-9-260

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E3

9-109

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E3

9-110

[13] DP Support Plate X 1

[14] DP Cable Guide Unit X1

[15] DP Bottom Cover X 1

[25] DP Mounting Plate B X1

[26] DP Base Cover X 1

[27] DP Mounting Plate C X1

[16] DP Bottom Cover X 1

[17] DP Support Plate X 1

[18] DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate X 1

[28] DP Support Plate C X1

[29] Wire Saddle X 1

[30] Wire Saddle X 1

[19] DP Mounting Plate W X 1

[20] DP Shield Plate X 2

[21] Paper Feed Sheet W X 1

[31] Edge Saddle X 1

[22] Paper Feed Sheet P X 1

[23] DP Mounting Plate P X 1

[24] USB Cable X 1

F-9-262

FCC/IC Instruction Sheet

F-9-261

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E3

9-110

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E4

■■USB Device Port-E4

[13] Wire Saddle X 1

9-111

[14] Edge Saddle X 1

Be sure to use A and F with this product. Others are the parts for other products.

●● A [1] DP Base X 1

[2] DP Upper Cover Unit X1

[3] DP Board X 1

F-9-264

●● B [1] DP Bottom Cover X 1 [4] DP Sheet (for Japan) X 1

[5] DP Sheet (for Europe) X 1

[6] DP Fireproof Sheet X1

[7] Cusion X 2

[8] DP USB Cable X 1

[9] Screw (TP Round End; M3×6) X 10

[10] Screw (Binding; M4×6) X 10

Use 8 of them

[11] Screw (RS Tightening Round End ; M3×8.5) X 1

[3] DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate H X 1

F-9-265

●● C [1] DP Mounting Plate P X1

Use 4 of them

[2] DP Support Plate X 1

[2] Paper Feed Sheet P X1

[3] USB Cable X 1

[12] Wire Saddle X 1

F-9-266

F-9-263

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E4

9-111

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E4

●● D [1] DP Mounting Plate W X1

●● G [2] Paper Feed Sheet W X1

[3] DP Shield Plate X 2

[1] DP Mounting Plate X 1

F-9-267

●● E [1] DP Mounting Plate B X1

9-112

[2] DP Support Plate B X 1

[2] DP Support Plate X 1

[3] DP Support Plate Cover X1

[4] DP Cable Guide Unit X1

[3] DP Cable Guide Unit X1

F-9-270

●● H F-9-268

[1] DP Bottom Cover B X 1

●● F [1] DP Base Cover X 1

[2] DP Mounting Plate C X1

[3] DP Reinforcing Plate C X1

F-9-271

F-9-269

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-E4

9-112

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3

9-113

■■Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3

●● J [1] DP Base Cover X 1



[1] Multimedia Card Slot X 1

[2] Card Slot X 1

[3] Card Slot X 1

[4] USB Cable X 1

[5] Slot Holder X 1

[6] Multimedia Label X1

[7] Screw (TP; M3x6)

[8] Media Reader Mounting Plate Unit X 1

[9] Media Reader Cover X 1

F-9-272

FCC/IC Instruction Sheet

A2 : 4 pcs A3 : 7 pcs (4 pcs used)

A3 only

A3 only

F-9-273

FCC/IC Instruction Sheet

9

9-113

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Checking the Contents > Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9-114

Installation Procedure

3) Remove the screws securing the Control Panel.

■■Installing the USB Device Port

• 2 Screws

1) Open the ADF, and remove the Reader Front Cover in the direction of the arrow while pushing the claw at the bottom of the cover.

x2

• 2 Screws • 1 Claw

x2

F-9-276

4) Turn the Control Panel over in the direction of the arrow. CAUTION: F-9-274

2) Remove the Reader Front Sub Cover. (The removed Sub Cover and screws are no longer used.)

• Be careful not to hit the Control Panel against the plate to prevent the Control Panel or the harness from being damaged. • Be careful not to pull the Control Panel because it is connected with the Control Panel Cable and the Control Panel Power Supply Cable.

• 2 Screws • 2 Bosses

x2

Bosse

F-9-275

9

F-9-277

9-114

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9-115

5) Remove the Control Panel from the machine after disconnecting the Control Panel Cable, Control Panel Power Supply Cable, and USB Cable.

6) Install the DP Base Cover to the DP Base. • 2 Bosses

• 2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 14.)

• 4 Hooks

• 1 Reuse Band NOTE: Align 2 hooks [A] and bosses (long holes) to the DP Base and then insert them. The installation will be difficult if the positioning holes for bosses are aligned first.

• 5 Wire Saddles • 1 Connector CAUTION: • Be careful not to hit the Control Panel against the plate to prevent the Control Panel or the harness from being damaged. • Be careful not to pull the Control Panel because it is connected with the Control Panel Cable and the Control Panel Power Supply Cable.

Hook[A]

Reuse Band Hook[A]

Wire Saddle

x2

Hook

Boss Hook

x2

F-9-279

x6

7) Install the DP Mounting Plate C to the DP Lower Cover Unit. • 2 Bosses

Connector Wire Saddle

• 2 Screws (Binding; M4x6) F-9-278

Boss

x2

F-9-280

9

9-115

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9-116

8) Install the DP Support Plate C to the DP Lower Cover Unit.

10) Install the DP Lower Cover Unit.

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Bosses

• 2 Screws (Binding; M4x6)

• 4 Screws (Binding; M4x6) Boss

Boss

Boss

x2

x3

F-9-283

F-9-281

11) Install the USB Cable removed in step 5 to the DP Board.

9) Install the DP Board.

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x6)

• 3 Screws (TP; M3x6)

• 2 Edge Saddles (Do not close them.) • 1 Wire Saddle (Do not close them.) • 1 Connector

x3

Connector

x3 x2 F-9-282

Edge Saddle

Wire Saddle

F-9-284

9

9-116

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9-117

12) Connect the DP USB Cable to the DP Board, and route it to the Control Panel.

13) Installing the Control Panel Cable and Control Panel Power Supply Cable.

• 2 Edge Saddles (Close them.)

• 2 Wire Saddles

• 1 Wire Saddle (Close them.)

• 1 Reuse Band • 1 Connector

CAUTION:

14) Installing the DP USB Cable.

When installing the DP USB Cable to the DP Board, insert straight into the connector.

• 2 Screws (The screws removed in step 5.) • 2 Wire Saddles CAUTION: • Be careful not to hit the Control Panel against the plate to prevent the Control Panel or the harness from being damaged.

x3

• Be careful not to pull the Control Panel because it is connected with the Control Panel Cable and the Control Panel Power Supply Cable. • Be sure to note that how the DP USB Cable is routed is different from how the USB Cable used to be routed.

Reuse Band

x2

Wire Saddle

F-9-285

x2 x5 コネクタ Connector

Wire Saddle F-9-286

15) Return the Control Panel Base Cover its original position(2 Screws). 16) Install the Reader Front Cover(2 Screws). 17) Close the ADF.

18) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 19) Turn ON the main power switch.

9

9-117

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installation Procedure > Installing the USB Device Port

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Card Reader

20) Connect the memory media to the USB slot and perform the operation check.

9-118

2) Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow. • 1 Protrusion

NOTE: Refer to the "Operation Check" (Page 12) to perform the connection check of the memory media.

CAUTION: In the following work, the installation procedure varies between "Installing the Card Reader" and "Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2".

• 2 Hooks • 2 Claws

Claw

x2

When installing, be sure to see "Installing the Card Reader" or "Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2", and perform installation accordingly.

Claw

Installing the Card Reader

Protrusion

Hook F-9-288

1) Remove the Transparent Cover.

3) Install the Card Reader and place the cable as shown in the figure.

• 1 Claw NOTE: Work the cable to make sure that the Transparent Cover fits securely in step 8.

• 2 Hooks Transparent Cover

Hook Claw

F-9-287 F-9-289

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Card Reader

9-118

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Card Reader

4) Remove the release sheet of the DP Fireproof Sheet, and affix the sheet by aligning the 3

9-119

6) Align 4 Ribs and temporarily place the Card Reader.

ribs and pushing it against the Rib [A].

Rib [A]

Rib Rib

Rib

F-9-292 F-9-290

7) Remove the Release sheet of the DP Sheet (for Europe) and affix it to the Card Reader by 5) Place the cushion on the DP Fireproof Sheet.

aligning [A] area with the location on the LED Indicator.

NOTE: Be sure to adjust the number of cushions (1 or 2 sheets) according to how the cable of the Card Reader is stored.

NOTE: Insert the DP Sheet (for Europe) to the [B] area with the illustration side facing up and bending the bar code area. Release sheet

DP Sheet

Cushion

[A] F-9-291

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Card Reader

F-9-293

9-119

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-120

Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

8) Install the Transparent Cover. • 2 Hooks • 1 Claw

1) Remove the Transparent Cover.

CAUTION:

• 1 Claw

• Be sure that the Transparent Cover is installed properly.

• 2 Hooks

• Be sure that the [A] part is fitted in the [B] part. Hook

Transparent Cover Transparent Cover

Hook Claw

Claw DP Sheet

[A]

F-9-295

[B] F-9-294

2) Remove the Card Slot (closed) from the DP Upper Cover and attach the Card Slot.

9) Remove the release sheet of the Transparent Cover. 10) Return the Control Panel Base Cover its original position(2 Screws). 11) Install the Reader Front Cover(2 Screws). 12) Close the ADF.

13) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 14) Turn ON the main power switch.

15) Connect the memory media to the USB slot and perform the operation check. F-9-296

NOTE: Refer to the "Operation Check" (Page 12) to perform the connection check of the memory media.

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-120

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

3) Install Multimedia Card Slot and Slot Holder together.

9-121

5) Connect the USB Cable.

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x6) CAUTION: When installing the USB Cable to the DP Board, insert straight into the connector.

x4 x2

F-9-297

4) Install the DP Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow. • 2 Hooks

F-9-299

• 1 Protrusion 6) Remove the release sheet of the DP Fireproof Sheet, and affix the sheet by aligning the 3

• 2 Claws

Ribs and pushing it against the Rib [A].

Claw

x2

Rib[A] Claw

Protrusion

Rib

Hook F-9-298

F-9-300

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-121

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

7) Affix the Multimedia Label to the back side of the DP Sheet (for Europe) as shown in the

9-122

9) Remove the release sheet of the Transparent Cover.

figure. 10) Return the Control Panel Base Cover its original position(2 Screws). 11) Install the Reader Front Cover(2 Screws). 12) Close the ADF.

13) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet. 14) Turn ON the main power switch.

15) Connect the memory media to the USB slot and perform the operation check. 16) Connect the memory media to the Card Slot of the USB Device Port and perform the F-9-301

operation check. NOTE: Refer to the "Operation Check" to perform the connection check of the memory media.

8) Install the DP Sheet (for Europe) and the Transparent Cover. • 2 Hooks • 1 Claw NOTE: • Be sure that the Transparent Cover is installed properly. • Be sure that the [A] part is fitted in the [B] part. Hook

Transparent Cover

Claw DP Sheet

[A]

[B] F-9-302

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer

9-122

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Operation Check > Writing Check

Operation Check

9-123

4) Make the following selection:[Scan and Store] > [Memory Media] > [Memory Media (A:)]

NOTE:

• Connect a USB memory device to the USB Device Port and perform the operation check. • To the Multimedia Reader/Writer, Memory Media of the SC Card, Memory Stick, and CF Card can be connected. With one of the 3 types of Memory Media, perform the operation check 1 through 3. • When changing the settings upon user’s request, it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator. F-9-304

■■Writing Check 1) Select "1" for the following service mode (Level 2).(Default value "0") COPIER > Option> DSPLY-SW > UI-MEM 2) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.

3) Mount the Memory Media to the Multimedia Card Reader/Writer. (Check that the Mount Mark is indicated in the bottom right.) 5) Set originals to Copyboard, and press the [Scan] button. Then, press the Start button on the Control Panel.

F-9-305

F-9-303

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Operation Check > Writing Check

9-123

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Operation Check > Writing Check

6) After scanning of the original is completed, press [Start Storing] when it is displayed. Confirm that data is stored in the media and press [Main Menu] on the Control Panel.

9-124

■■Reading Check 1) Make the following selection from Main Menu: [Access Stored Files] > [Memory Media] > [Memory Media(A:)]

F-9-306 F-9-307

2) Select the files stored in step 4) and 5), 6), and then press the [Print] button.

F-9-308

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Operation Check > Writing Check

9-124

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Operation Check > Writing Check

3) Press the [Start Printing] button, and print the file. Then check that the file is printed correctly.

9-125

■■Memory Media Removal 1) Press the [Mount Mark] in the bottom right. Then, select the memory media to be removed, and press the [Remove] button.

F-9-309 F-9-311

4) Press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel. 2) Press the [OK] button. Then, check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom right on the Main Menu screen.

F-9-310

F-9-312

9

Installation > USB Device Port-E3/E4/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2/A3 > Operation Check > Writing Check

9-125

9

Installation > Combination of HDD Options

9-126

Combination of HDD Options

CAUTION:

When installing the HDD options (5 products indicated below), refer to the pages indicated in

• When using the mirroring function, be sure to install 2 HDDs of the same capacity.

the following table. • 2.5inch/160GB HDD-G1

• The system software needs to be installed after replacing the HDD or after installing the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. • In case of TYPE-2 to 11, HDD needs to be backed up/exported (see "Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export").

• 2.5inch/1TB HDD-K1 • Removable HDD Kit-AJ1 • HDD Mirroring Kit-H1 • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4

From the following patterns, see the page of a corresponding pattern. Title. TYPE-1

Combination of Product Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit

Reference Pages

TYPE-2 Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-144 to p. 9-150

TYPE-3 Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit+ HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit TYPE-4 Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-151 to p. 9-163

TYPE-5

TYPE-6 TYPE-7

Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit Option HDD (1TB) Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

Remarks

p. 9-135 to p. 9-143

p. 9-164 to p. 9-173 p. 9-174 to p. 9-190

These types correspond to "CASE-8" described in Installation Procedure included in the package of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4. (In the Case of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4.)

p. 9-191 to p. 9-195 p. 9-196 to p. 9-205

TYPE-8 Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-206 to p. 9-215

TYPE-9 Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-216 to p. 9-228

TYPE-10 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-229 to p. 9-239

TYPE-11 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

p. 9-240 to p. 9-256

These types correspond to "CASE-8" described in Installation Procedure included in the package of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4. (In the Case of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C4.)

T-9-6

9

Installation > Combination of HDD Options

9-126

9

Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export:

9-127

Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export:

*1 Can only be backed up using the Remote UI.

When the HDD has been replaced or when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been

*3 Only the following items are backed up.

installed

• Mail Box Settings (mail box names, passwords, and auto erase times)

Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of

• Files in Mail Box

the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.

• Files in Advanced Box

Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security

• Forms registered for the Superimpose Image

considerations.

*4 You may not be able to back up, depending on the type of the password.

In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for

*5 Only the stored Favorite Settings can be backed up.

*2 Depending on the MEAP application.

reference.

List of Data that can be backed up

List of Data to be Deleted

Data that can be backed up Data to be Deleted

Availability of Backup

Information registered in the Address Book Settings made from the Settings/Registration screen (When an option HDD is installed to a model without HDD, the data remains unerased.) Forwarding Settings License files for MEAP applications MEAP applications Data saved using MEAP applications Favorite Settings registered in the Copy and Mail Box functions Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box (Excluding the products without Box/Advanced Box function) Scan modes registered in the Send Function Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image (When an option HDD is installed to a model without HDD, the data remains unerased.) MEAP SMS (Service Management Service) password (the password will return to its default password if it was changed) Job logs User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) Registration information for the Network Place Key Pair and Certificate and CRL Log information for the IP address/MAC address restriction settings Password that is protected by TPM Encryption key that is protected by TPM (When an option HDD is installed to a model without HDD, the data remains unerased.) Information for Web browser settings Quick Menu Information User Information of the Advanced Box (Excluding the products without Box/ Advanced Box function)

Yes Yes *1

Reference

Address Book For information on exporting data, see the "e-Manual > Remote UI". Settings/Registration settings Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address List, Favorite Settings) Printer Settings Paper Information Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image Quick Menu Information User Information of the Advanced Box Favorite Settings for Web browser See the e-Manual > Web Access. (You can select this if web browser (Option) is installed.) License files for MEAP applications For information on downloading license files, see the "e-Manual > MEAP". Data saved by MEAP applications Data saved by MEAP applications may be able to be backed up, depending on the MEAP application. See the documentation included with the MEAP application.

Yes Yes No Yes *2 No Yes *3 No No Yes No

Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box See the e-Manual > Remote UI "Setting the Backup Location for Stored Data ".

No Yes

SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) user authentication See the e-Manual > MEAP. information T-9-8

No No No Yes *4 No

CAUTION: Work to Perform After Installing the Kit • When you start using this product, passwords set for Mail Boxes, Confidential Fax Inboxes, and the Memory RX Inbox are erased. Set these passwords again. • If you have logged on to the machine using a login service, such as SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) before using this product, you must select the login service again using SMS (Service Management Service) after restarting the machine. For more information on using SMS, see the e-Manual > MEAP.

Yes *5 Yes Yes T-9-7

9

Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export:

9-127

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of MEAP Application

Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) The data items that have been backed up may be restored when the this product has been installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be performed by the system administrator. The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up) in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.

9-128

Backup of MEAP Application When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup. If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download the invalid license file. The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and

Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings

download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the MEAPSMS Administrator Guide

Following data can be batch exported. • Address Book • Settings/Registration settings • Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address List, Favorite Settings) • Printer Settings • Paper Information • Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image • Quick Menu Information • User Information of the Advanced Box 1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI. http://[IP address of the device]/ If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password in Password, and then click [Administrator Login]. 2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/ Export ALL] > [Export]. 3) Select items to export. CAUTION: When exporting only specific items, this may cause setting information relating to multiple items to lose its relations and cause setting details to be switched. In this case, export all related items simultaneously. 4) Enter the password into [Encryption Password] and click on [Start Exporting]. 5) Click [Check Status]. 6) Check the batch export result.

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of MEAP Application

9-128

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)

9-129

Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Uninstallation 1) Select the URL given below and access SMS.

User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H) In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to

http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sms/

make a backup of the user authentication information.

The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user

1) Access the URL given below.

to change the password again after the use of this product is started.

http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sso/ 2) Login with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO-H.

CAUTION:

The default administrator user name and password are as follows:

The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.

User Name: Administrator Password: password 3) Click [User Control].

2) Click [MEAP Application Management]. 3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application Management page.

4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export]. 5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export]. 6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click

4) Check the status of MEAP Application is [Stop],

[Save].

5) Click on the name of applications to disable. 6) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. 7) Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for disabling the license. 8) Return to the MEAP Application Management page and click on the appropriate application names. 9) Click [License Management] on the Application/License Information page. 10) Click [Download]. 11) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for license deletion. 12) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If there are several applications, repeat the procedures 1) to 7). 13) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).

9

9-129

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON H)

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data

Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data CAUTION: Backup of "Advanced Box" When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD. Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might not be performed.

The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below. Specify the backup destination of a document data: • Backup to SMB server Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password, and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up. • Backup to USB HDD Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to which saved data is backed up.

9-130

CAUTION: • Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the e-Manual. • A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input' modes. • A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes). • A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input' modes. • A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and 'mark (1 byte)' modes. • The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1 byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character. [Backup method of User inbox and Advanced Box document data] 1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup]. 2) Select 'All' or 'Changes' for the backup method. 3) Click [Execute].

CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see Points to Note for Installation.

CAUTION: • If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not correctly entered, a backup cannot be made. • If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer. [Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]

CAUTION: If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot be referred.

1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore]. 2) Click [Display Backup Data]. 3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute]. CAUTION: • If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when backing up the data. • Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely restored, or some documents may be automatically printed. • Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.

9

Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data

9-130

9

Installation > Removing the HDD

Removing the HDD

9-131

2) Remove the Rear Cover. • 4 Screws

CAUTION: Points to Note before Installation

• 4 Claws

When installing the HDD Data Encryption/Mirroring Kit, be sure to perform "Setting Before Turning OFF the Power" before turning OFF the main power.

x4



x4

1) Remove the Right Rear Cover (Upper). • 2 Screws • 2 Protrusions • 1 Claw

x2 F-9-314

Protrusion

3) Remove the Controller Box Cover. • 6 Hooks Hook Claw F-9-313

Hook

Hook F-9-315

9

Installation > Removing the HDD

9-131

9

Installation > Removing the HDD





4) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

6) Open the plate in the direction of the arrow.

9-132

• 2 Hooks

x2

F-9-316



F-9-318

5) Remove the Main Controller PCB 1.

7) Disconnect the 2 cables.

• 2 Screws (beside of arrow mark)

• 2 Connectors

• 1 Connector

• 1 Wire Saddle

CAUTION: Be sure to move the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable to the Reader side to prevent the cables from being trapped. USB Cable

x2

Control Panel Communication Cable

x2

Arrow Mark

Connector

F-9-319

Fan Cover F-9-317

9

Installation > Removing the HDD

9-132

9

Installation > Removing the HDD

8) Close the Wire Saddle opened in the previous step.

9-133

9) Remove the HDD Unit. • 2 Screws

CAUTION: Be sure to close the Wire Saddle after disconnecting the cables. When putting the HDD Unit back in the host machine, it may not be put back in due to being caught by the Wire Saddle. Also, the Wire Saddle may be damaged.

CAUTION: • Be careful not to drop the screw. • Pull out the HDD Unit until it stops, and then move it in the direction of the arrow to remove. • Be careful not to drop the HDD Unit.

x2

F-9-320

9

Installation > Removing the HDD

9-133

9

Installation > Removing the HDD

9-134

10) Remove the HDD Box from the HDD Unit.

11) Remove the HDD Fixation Plate Unit from the HDD Box.

• 4 Screws

• 2 Screws

CAUTION: When removing screws, be careful not to lose the spacers which may come off together with the screws.

NOTE: When removing the HDD Fixation Plate Unit, it clicks.

x2 x4

F-9-322 F-9-321

9

Installation > Removing the HDD

9-134

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation Outline Drawing

TYPE-1

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

Checking the Contents [1] Hinge Shaft Stopper

X1

9-135

[2] HDD Handle X 2

Use 1 of them

2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug. [3] HDD Connector Plate

X2

Points to Note at Installation

Use 1 of them

CAUTION: [4] HDD Cover X 2

Use 1 of them

[5] Connector Fixing Block

X2

Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

[6] HDD Door Unit X 1

Use 1 of them

Installation Outline Drawing [7] HDD Lock Plate Shaft

[8] Shutdown Caution

[9] HDD Blanking Plate

[10] Conversion Connector

[11] IV Cable X 1

[12] Screw (R round head

X1

X2

Label X 1

X1

TP; M3x6) X 6

Use 5 of them

Use 1 of them

Removable HDD (Standard HDD) F-9-324

[13] Screw (P Tight; M3x8)

X4

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

Use 2 of them

F-9-323

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-135

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-136

3) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (Use the HDD and screws removed in previous step.) • 4 Screws

1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit. (The removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used.) • 2 Screws

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

x2

Anti-vibration Damper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-327

F-9-325

HDD

2) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate. (The removed HDD and screws will be used in a later step.)

x4 HDD Connector Plate

• 4 Screws

x4 HDD Support Plate F-9-328

HDD HDD Support Plate F-9-326

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-136

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

CAUTION:

9-137

5) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

it.

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

• 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

• Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

CAUTION: Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

Screw hole

Label

Connector

x2

Boss

Screw hole F-9-329

Hole

4) Install the Conversion Connector. F-9-331

CAUTION: Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-332 F-9-330

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-137

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

6) Install the HDD Cover.

7) Install the HDD Handle.

• 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

9-138

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION: CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2

F-9-333 F-9-334

8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-335

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-138

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

Installation to the Host Machine

9-139

2) Install the HDD Door Unit to the HDD Box. • 1 Boss

1) Install the HDD Face Plate to the HDD Box.

• 1 HDD Lock Plate Shaft

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

• 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Hinge Shaft Stopper

Boss HDD Lock Plate Shaft

x2

F-9-337

3) Remove the plate from the HDD Box. (The removed plate will not be used.) • 1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in step 6.) F-9-336

F-9-338

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-139

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

4) Remove the Drawer Cable (Blue). (The removed parts will not be used.)

6) Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 2 Screws

• 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 3.)

9-140

• 2 Springs • 2 Washers 5) Remove the Drawer Cable (Red) and replace them with the IV cables. (The removed Drawer Cable (Red) will not be used.) • 2 Screws • 2 Springs • 2 Washers

x4

Washer Spring Screw

IV Cable

x2

Washer Spring Screw

F-9-340

Drawer cable

7) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. • 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.)

F-9-339

x4

F-9-341

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-140

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

8) Put the 2 cables through, and return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

9-141

9) Disconnect the 2 cables on the Controller side. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.) • 2 Connectors

NOTE:

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the cable in the host machine.

• 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles

x6 x2

F-9-343

Protrusion

Protrusion

F-9-342

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-141

9 10)

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

Connect the 2 cables of the HDD Unit.

11)

• 2 Connectors

9-142

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

• 3 Edge Saddles CAUTION:

• 4 Wire Saddles

• Be careful not to drop the screw.

NOTE: Be sure to pass the cable through the Wire Saddle [A] when connecting.

• Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

x7 [A]

x2

x2

F-9-344 F-9-345

12)

Close the plate.

13)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-142

9

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

14)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

15)

Install the covers.

17)

9-143

Open the HDD Door Unit.

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

16)

Open the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover, and affix the Shutdown Caution Label

F-9-347

in the appropriate language. 18)

Install the Removable HDD 1 (front).

Shutdown Caution Label

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops.

Right Rear Cover F-9-346

F-9-348

9

19)

Close the HDD Door Unit.

20)

Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.

21)

Close the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover.

Installation > TYPE-1 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-143

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Points to Note at Installation

TYPE-2



Standard HDD + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

• HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice

• HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • Noticd for FCC/IC

Checking the Contents [1] Encryption Board X 1

9-144

[2] Signal Cable

(A:Cont-Sig) X 1

• Installation Procedure [3] Power Cable

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power

(A:Cont-Pow) X 1

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. [4] LED Board X 1

[5] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD

[6] LED Label X 1

Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

[7] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig1) X 1

[8] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

[9] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig2) X 1

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). • COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power [10] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4)

X9

Use 5 of them

[12] Wire Saddle (large)

X3

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

Points to Note at Installation [13] Wire Saddle (Small)

X3

[14] Anti-vibration Damper

X4

[15] HDD Connection

Plate X 1

CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 9 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

F-9-349

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Points to Note at Installation

9-144

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

Installation Outline Drawing

9-145

2) Install the Encryption Board. • 4 Screws (TP; M3x4) NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

Encryption Board 4 Connectors

Fixation HDD (Standard HDD)

x4

F-9-350

Installing the Encryption Board 1) Install the Wire Saddles to the HDD Unit removed from the host machine. • 3 Wire Saddles (Large) • 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

F-9-352

Wire Saddle (Large)

3) Install the LED Board (A:LED) . • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)

Boss Wire Saddle (Small)

F-9-351

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

F-9-353

9-145

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

4) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

6) Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

• 2 Connectors

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

9-146

• 1 Plastic Film Sheet NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

x3

x2 x4

[A] F-9-354

5) Connect the "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to the slot [A] of the HDD and [CH-A]

F-9-356

of the PCB. A:HDD-Pow1

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) Slot A

x4 CH A A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) A:HDD-Pow1 F-9-355

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

9-146

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

7) Disconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

9-147

9) Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

• 2 Connectors NOTE:

• 3 Wire Saddles

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 3 Edge Saddles

x2 x6

F-9-357

8) Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow). • 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

x6

Protrusion

Protrusion F-9-359

x2 Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-358

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

9-147

9 10)

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

11)

9-148

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

• 1 Wire Saddle CAUTION: NOTE:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

• Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

x2 x2

F-9-361 F-9-360

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the Encryption Board

9-148

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-149

Installing the System Software Using the SST

12)

Close the plate.

13)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product.

CAUTION:

It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the

• Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables.

machine may start up properly after installation of this product.

• Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

Details follow. 1. Requirements

14)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

15)

Install the covers.

1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.)

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

• Right Rear Cover (2 Screws)

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode). 3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware.

16)

4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover.

5) Click REGISTER. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”.

LED Label

4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. Right Rear Cover F-9-362

9

6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

Installation > TYPE-2 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-149

9

Installation > TYPE-2 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

Checking the Security Version

9-150

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel. 2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the

3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version

following:

information of the security chip.

At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and

CAUTION:

request <servicing work when a failure occurs>.

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version.

Checking the Security Mark The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

9

Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

Maintenance of the Security Functions:

)

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

Installation > TYPE-2 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-150

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-3

[13] Screw (P Tight; M3x8)

X4

9-151 [14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

Use 2 of them

Standard HDD + Removable HDD Kit+ HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Checking the Contents [Removable HDD Kit] [1] Hinge Shaft Stopper

X1

[4] HDD Cover X 2

Use 1 of them

[2] HDD Handle X 2

Use 1 of them

[5] Connector Fixing Block

X2

[3] HDD Connector Plate

F-9-364

X2

Use 1 of them

[HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit]

[9] HDD Blanking Plate

[10] Conversion Connector

[11] IV Cable X 1

[12] Screw (R round head

Use 1 of them

[3] Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) X1

[4] LED Board (A:LED) X 1

[5] LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) X 1

[6] LED Label X 1

[7] Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1) X1

[8] Power Cable (A:HDD-Pow1) X1

[9] Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig2) X1

Use 1 of them

[8] Shutdown Caution

X2

[2] Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) X 1

[6] HDD Door Unit X 1

[7] HDD Lock Plate Shaft

X1

[1] Encryption Board X 1

Label X 1

X1

TP; M3x6) X 6

Use 5 of them

F-9-363

F-9-365

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Checking the Contents

9-151

9 [10] Power Cable (A:HDD-Pow2) X1

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4) X9

Use 5 of them

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation Outline Drawing

[12] Wire Saddle (large) X3

9-152

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

Points to Note at Installation [13] Wire Saddle (Small) X3

[14] Anti-vibration Damper X4

[15] HDD Connection Plate X 1

CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

Installation Outline Drawing F-9-366

• HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • Noticd for FCC/IC • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power Encryption Board

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board.

Removable HDD (Standard HDD) F-9-367

When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). • COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-152

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine 1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit. (The removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used. )

9-153

3) Assemble the HDD. NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD.

• 2 Screws

HDD

HDD Support Plate

x2 Anti-vibration Damper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-370

• 1 HDD Support Plate (Use the parts removed in the previous procedure.) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (enclosed with HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.) • 1 HDD Connector Plate (enclosed with option Removable HDD)

F-9-368

• HDD (Use the parts removed in the previous procedure.)

2) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate. (Parts other than the Anti-vibration Damper will be used later.)

• 4 Spacers (Use the parts removed in the previous procedure.) • 4 Screws (Use the parts removed in the previous procedure.)

• 4 Screws

HDD

• 4 Spacers • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (The removed Anti-vibration Dampers will not be used.)

x4 HDD Connector Plate

x4 HDD Support Plate Spacer HDD

Anti-vibration Damper

HDD Support Plate F-9-369 F-9-371

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-153

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

CAUTION:

9-154

5) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

it.

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

• 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

• Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

CAUTION: Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

Screw hole

Label

Connector

x2

Boss

Screw hole F-9-372

Hole

4) Install the Conversion Connector.

F-9-374

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-375 F-9-373

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-154

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

6) Install the HDD Cover.

7) Install the HDD Handle.

• 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

9-155

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION: CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2

F-9-376

F-9-377

8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-378

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine

9-155

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

Installation to the Host Machine

9-156

2) Install the HDD Door Unit to the HDD Box. • 1 Boss

1) Install the HDD Face Plate to the HDD Box.

• 1 HDD Lock Plate Shaft

• 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

• 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Hinge Shaft Stopper

Boss HDD Lock Plate Shaft

x2

F-9-380

3) Remove the plate from the HDD Box. (The removed plate will not be used.) • 1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in step 4.) F-9-379

F-9-381

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-156

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

4) Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

6) Install the Wire Saddles.

• 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 3.)

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

9-157

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small) Wire Saddle (Large)

F-9-382

5) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. Wire Saddle (Small)

• 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.)

F-9-384

x4

F-9-383

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-157

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

7) Install the Encryption Board.

8) Install the LED Board (A:LED) .

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x4)

• 1 Boss

9-158

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x4) CAUTION: Be sure to put the cables on the Wire Saddle to prevent it from getting under the board.

NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

Boss 4 Connectors F-9-386

9) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

x4

• 2 Connectors • 1 Plastic Film Sheet • 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

F-9-385

x2 x4

F-9-387

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-158

9 10)

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

Connect the cables of the HDD Drawer Unit.

12)

Dsconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to CH-A of the PCB.

• 2 Connectors

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig2: Blue" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to CH-B of the PCB.

• 3 Wire Saddles • 3 Edge Saddles

A:HDD-Pow2

CH B

9-159

A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

x4

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)

x2

A:HDD-Pow1

x6 CH A

F-9-388 F-9-390

11)

Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

13)

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

• 3 Edge Saddles

NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

• 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

x3

x6 x2 [A] Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-391

F-9-389

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-159

9 14)

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

15)

9-160

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow). NOTE:

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 1 Wire Saddle NOTE:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

x2

F-9-393

Protrusion

Protrusion

F-9-392

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-160

9 16)

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-161

NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.) CAUTION: • Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

21)

Open the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover, and affix the Shutdown Caution Label

in the appropriate language. 22)

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover. Shutdown Caution Label

x2

LED Label

Right Rear Cover F-9-394

17)

Close the plate.

18)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

F-9-395

23)

Open the HDD Door Unit.

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly. 19)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

20)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws) F-9-396

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-161

9 24)

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-162

Installing the System Software Using the SST

Install the Removable HDD 1. (front)

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product.

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops.

It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode). 3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.

F-9-397

2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware. 25)

Close the HDD Door Unit.

4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.

26)

Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.

5) Click REGISTER.

27)

Close the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover.

6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-162

9

Installation > TYPE-3 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

Checking the Security Version

9-163

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel. 2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the

3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version

following:

information of the security chip.

At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and

CAUTION:

request <servicing work when a failure occurs>.

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version.

Checking the Security Mark The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

9

Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

Maintenance of the Security Functions:

)

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

Installation > TYPE-3 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-163

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-4

9-164

[HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit]

Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) +

[1] Mirroring Board or

[2] Signal Cable

[3] Power Cable

[4] LED Board

[5] LED Cable

[6] LED Label X 1

[7] Signal Cable

[8] Power Cable

[9] Signal Cable

[10] Power Cable

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4)

[12] Wire Saddle (large)

[13] Wire Saddle (Small)

[14] Anti-vibration Damper

[15] HDD Connection

Encryption Board X 1

HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

(A:Cont-Sig) X 1

(A:Cont-Pow) X 1

Checking the Contents [Option HDD (160GB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Spacer X 4

(A:LED) X 1

(A:HDD-Sig1) X 1

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Sig2) X 1

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1

X9

X3

[7] Gasket X 1

X3

X4

Plate X 1

F-9-398



F-9-399

• Noticd for FCC/IC

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Checking the Contents

9-164

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-165

Points to Note at Installation

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation • Notice for FCC/IC

CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • Noticd for FCC/IC • Installation Procedure

Installation Outline Drawing

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

Fixation HDD (Option HDD)

Fixation HDD (Standard HDD)

Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

F-9-400

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). • COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-165

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-166

Assembling the Option HDD

Option HDD

1) Assemble the option HDD. HDD Support Plate

CAUTION:

x4

Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Damper included in HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (160GB)".

Spacer

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-402

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.

Anti-vibration Damper

Label

F-9-401

• 1 HDD Support Pate • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.) • 4 spacers • 1 Option HDD • 4 screws (Sems; M3x14)

[A]

Connector F-9-403

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-166

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

Installation to the Host Machine

9-167

3) Return the HDD Fixation Plate Unit to the HDD Box. • 2 Screws (Use the 2 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 11.)

1) Install the Option HDD (Second HDD) to the HDD Fixation Plate. • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (enclosed with Option HDD)

4) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. • 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.)

x2 5) Install the Wire Saddles to the HDD Unit removed from the host machine. • 3 Wire Saddles (Large) • 3 Wire Saddles (Small) Wire Saddle (Large)

F-9-404

2) Install the HDD Connection Plate. (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.) • 4 Screws (TP; M3x4) (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.)

x4 Wire Saddle (Small) F-9-406

F-9-405

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-167

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

6) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

8) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x4)

• 2 Connectors

9-168

• 1 Plastic Film Sheet NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

4 Connectors

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

x2 x4

x4

F-9-409

F-9-407

7) Install the LED Board (A:LED) . • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)

Boss F-9-408

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-168

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

9) Install the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1: Red) (A:HDD-Sig2: Blue) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1) (A:HDD-Pow2).

10)

9-169

Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

• Be sure to connect "A:HDD-Sig2: Blue" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to the slot [B] of the HDD and [CH-B of the PCB. • Be sure to connect "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to the slot [A] of the HDD and [CH-A] of the PCB. A:HDD-Pow1

NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) Slot A

LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

Slot B

x3

A:HDD-Pow2

x8

CH B

A:HDD-Pow2 A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

CH A

CH B

A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

CH A

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) [A] A:HDD-Pow1 F-9-410 F-9-411

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-169

9 11)

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

Disconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

13)

9-170

Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

• 2 Connectors NOTE:

• 3 Wire Saddles

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 3 Edge Saddles

x2 x6

F-9-412

12)

Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

• 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

x6

Protrusion

Protrusion F-9-414

x2 Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-413

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-170

9 14)

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-171

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

x2

• 1 Wire Saddle NOTE:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

x2

F-9-416

16)

Close the plate.

17)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

F-9-415

15)

18)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

19)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

• Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws)

CAUTION: • Be careful not to drop the screw.

NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

• Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-171

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-172

3. Selecting the System Software 20)

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover.

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search. 5) Click REGISTER. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen.

LED Label

2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. Right Rear Cover F-9-417

3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted.

Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the

7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

machine may start up properly after installation of this product.

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

Details follow.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

1. Requirements

3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip.

1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC.

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-172

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is operating correctly.

9-173

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

)

request <servicing work when a failure occurs>. Completion of the Installation Work:

Setting the Mirroring

Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP

1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine. 2) Make a setting of mirroring. • Specify “1” under “Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID”. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value. 4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description

5) Make sure that the LED blinks.

of Checking the Security Mark.

• HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink. CAUTION:

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

Rebuild process starts after setting “1” for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure.

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for

1) Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.

Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

auto gradation adjustment.

2) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set “0”. 3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set "1". 5) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation. An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.

9

Installation > TYPE-4 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-173

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-5

9-174

[Removable HDD Kit]

Standard HDD + Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit +

[1] Hinge Shaft Stopper

[2] HDD Handle X 2

[3] HDD Connector Plate

[4] HDD Cover X 2

[5] Connector Fixing Block

[6] HDD Door Unit X 1

[7] HDD Lock Plate Shaft

[8] Shutdown Caution

[9] Conversion Connector

[10] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[11] Screw (R round head

[12] Screw (P Tight; M3x8)

[13] R-HDD Label X 1

[14] HDD Blanking Plate

[15] IV Cable X 1

X1

HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

X2

Checking the Contents [Option HDD (160GB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Spacer X 4

X1

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

X2

Label X 1

X2

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

TP; M3x6) X 6

X4

[7] Gasket X 1

F-9-418



X1

F-9-419

• Noticd for FCC/IC

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Checking the Contents

9-174

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

[HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit] [1] Mirroring Board or

Encryption Board X 1

[2] Signal Cable

(A:Cont-Sig) X 1

9-175

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation

[3] Power Cable

• Notice for FCC/IC

(A:Cont-Pow) X 1

< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Ki-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • Noticd for FCC/IC [4] LED Board

(A:LED) X 1

[5] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

• Installation Procedure

[6] LED Label X 1

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting.

[7] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig1) X 1

[8] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD

[9] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig2) X 1

Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed. [10] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4)

X9

[12] Wire Saddle (large)

X3

Use 5 of them

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). • COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power [13] Wire Saddle (Small)

X3

[14] Anti-vibration Damper

X4

Check that the main power switch is OFF.

[15] HDD Connection

Plate X 1

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-420

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-175

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)

Points to Note at Installation

9-176

Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)

CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit. (The removed HDD Fixation Plate and the screws will not be used. ) • 2 Screws

Installation Outline Drawing x2

Removable HDD (Standard HDD)

F-9-422

Mirroring Board or Encryption Board Removable HDD (Option HDD)

2) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate. (The removed HDD and screws will be used in a later step.) F-9-421

• 4 Screws

x4

HDD HDD Support Plate F-9-423

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)

9-176

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)

3) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (Use the HDD and screws removed in previous step.)

9-177

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

• 4 Screws NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

• Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

Screw hole

HDD Support Plate

Label Anti-vibration Damper

Connector

HDD Connector Plate F-9-424

Screw hole F-9-426

HDD

x4 HDD Connector Plate

4) Install the Conversion Connector. CAUTION: Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

HDD Support Plate F-9-425

F-9-427

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)

9-177

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)

5) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it.

9-178

6) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2

Boss

F-9-430

Hole

F-9-428

CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-429

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Disassembling / Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)

9-178

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-179

Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

7) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

1) Purchase option HDD and assemble the second HDD. CAUTION: Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Damper included in HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (160GB)".

x2

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

F-9-431

Anti-vibration Damper

8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD Connector Plate F-9-433

• 1 HDD Support Plate (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.) • 1 HDD Connector Plate (enclosed with removable HDD Kit) • 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD)

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-432

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-179

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

2) Install the Conversion Connector.

Option HDD

CAUTION:

HDD Connector Plate

x4

9-180

Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-434

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

F-9-436

• Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

3) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it. • 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

Screw hole

Label

Connector

Screw hole

CAUTION: Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

x2

Boss

F-9-435

Hole

F-9-437

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-180

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

9-181

5) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2 F-9-438

4) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION:

F-9-440

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

6) Affix the HDD No.2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

F-9-439

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX F-9-441

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-181

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

Installation to the Host Machine

9-182

3) Install the HDD Drawer Unit. • 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)

1) Install the HDD Door Unit to the HDD Box. • 1 Boss • 1 HDD Lock Plate Shaft • 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper

Hinge Shaft Stopper

Boss HDD Lock Plate Shaft

F-9-444

4) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. • 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.) F-9-442

2) Remove the plate from the HDD Box. (The removed plate will not be used.) • 1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in step 3.)

x4

F-9-445

F-9-443

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-182

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

5) Install the Wire Saddles.

6) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x4)

9-183

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small) CAUTION:

Wire Saddle (Large)

Be sure to put the cables on the Wire Saddle to prevent it from getting under the board.

NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

4 Connectors

x4

Wire Saddle (Small) F-9-446

F-9-447

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-183

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-184

7) Install the LED Board (A:LED) .

9) Connect the cables of the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 1 Boss

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to CH-A of the PCB.

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig2: Blue" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to CH-B of the PCB. A:HDD-Pow2

CH B

A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

x4

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) A:HDD-Pow1

CH A Boss

F-9-448

F-9-450

8) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

10)

• 2 Connectors

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

• 1 Plastic Film Sheet NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

x3

x2 x4

[A] F-9-449

F-9-451

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-184

9 11)

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

Disconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

13)

9-185

Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

• 2 Connectors NOTE:

• 3 Wire Saddles

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 3 Edge Saddles

x2 x6

F-9-452

12)

Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

• 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

Protrusion

x6

Protrusion

F-9-454

x2 Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-453

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-185

9 14)

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

15)

9-186

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

• 1 Wire Saddle CAUTION: NOTE:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

• Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

x2 x2

F-9-456 F-9-455

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-186

9 16)

Close the plate.

17)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

22)

9-187

Open the HDD Door Unit.

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly. 18)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

19)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

F-9-458

23)

Install the Removable HDD 1. (front)

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops. 20)

Open the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover, and affix the Shutdown Caution

Label in the appropriate language. 21)

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover. Shutdown Caution Label

LED Label

F-9-459

Right Rear Cover F-9-457

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-187

9 24)

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-188

Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

Install the Removable HDD 2. (rear)

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops.

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

F-9-460

3. Selecting the System Software

25)

Close the HDD Door Unit.

26)

Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.

27)

Close the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover.

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search. 5) Click REGISTER. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

9-188

Installation > TYPE-5 > Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Setting the Mirroring

Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-189

Setting the Mirroring 1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine. 2) Make a setting of mirroring.

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

• Specify “1” under “Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID”.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.

3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version

4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

information of the security chip.

5) Make sure that the LED blinks.

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

• HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

CAUTION: Rebuild process starts after setting “1” for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure.

Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained.

1) Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set “0”. 3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set "1".

operating correctly.

5) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine.

The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.



An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.

The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

9

)

Installation > TYPE-5 > Setting the Mirroring

9-189

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-190

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request <servicing work when a failure occurs>. Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > TYPE-5 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-190

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Installation Outline Drawing

TYPE-6

9-191

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Option HDD (1TB)

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then

Checking the Contents

disconnect the power plug.

[Option HDD (1TB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

Points to Note at Installation

[3] Spacer X 4

CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

Installation Outline Drawing

[7] Gasket X 1

Fixation HDD (Standard HDD) F-9-462

F-9-461

• Noticd for FCC/IC

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Installation Outline Drawing

9-191

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Assembling the Option HDD

Assembling the Option HDD

9-192

3) Assemble the option HDD.

1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit.

CAUTION:

• 2 Screws (The removed screws will not be used.)

Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Dampers removed from the standard HDD. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

x2

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

F-9-463

Anti-vibration Damper

2) Remove the 4 Anti-vibration Dampers from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the Anti-vibration

F-9-465

Dampers only.) • 4 Screws

• 1 HDD Support Pate (enclosed with option HDD)

• 4 Spacers

• 4 Anti-vibration Damper (Anti-vibration Damper removed from the standard HDD.)

• HDD

• 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD) • 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD)

x4

Option HDD

HDD Support Plate

x4 HDD Spacer HDD Support Plate F-9-464

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-466

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-192

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Installation to the Host Machine

CAUTION:

9-193

2) Return the HDD Fixation Plate Unit to the HDD Box.

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

• 2 Screws (Use the 2 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 11.)

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.

3) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. • 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10)

Label

4) Return the HDD Unit to the host machine. NOTE:

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the cable in the host machine.

[A]

Connector F-9-467

Installation to the Host Machine 1) Install the Option HDD to the HDD Fixation Plate. • 2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (enclosed with option HDD)

x2

Protrusion F-9-468

9

Protrusion F-9-469

Installation > TYPE-6 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-193

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Installation to the Host Machine

5) Connect the 2 connectors.

6) Secure the HDD Unit.

• 1 Wire Saddle

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

NOTE:

9-194

CAUTION:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the cable through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

• Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

x2 x2

F-9-470 F-9-471

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-194

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-195

3. Selecting the System Software 7) Close the plate.

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.

8) Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware.

CAUTION:

4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.

• Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables.

5) Click REGISTER.

• Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly.

6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software

9) Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen.

10) Install the covers.

2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.)

download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.

• Right Rear Cover (2 Screws)

5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.

NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

9

Installation > TYPE-6 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-195

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-7

9-196

[Removable HDD Kit] [1] Hinge Shaft Stopper

Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

X1

Checking the Contents

[2] HDD Handle X 2

Use 1 of them

[3] HDD Connector Plate

X2

Use 1 of them

[Option HDD (1TB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Spacer X 4

[4] HDD Cover X 2

Use 1 of them

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

[5] Connector Fixing Block

X2

Use 1 of them

[7] HDD Lock Plate Shaft

[8] Shutdown Caution

[9] HDD Blanking Plate

[10] Conversion Connector

[11] IV Cable X 1

[12] Screw (R round head

X1

X2

Label X 1

[13] Screw (P Tight; M3x8)

X4

X1

TP; M3x6) X 6

Use 5 of them

Use 1 of them

[7] Gasket X 1

[6] HDD Door Unit X 1

[14] R-HDD Label X 1

[15] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

Use 2 of them F-9-472

• Noticd for FCC/IC

F-9-473

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Checking the Contents

9-196

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-197

Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit. (The removed HDD Fixation Plate and

2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

the screws will not be used.) • 2 Screws

Points to Note at Installation

x2

CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

Installation Outline Drawing

F-9-475

2) Remove the 4 Anti-vibration Dampers from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the Anti-vibration Dampers only.) • 4 Screws • 4 Spacers • 1 HDD

x4 Removable HDD (Option HDD) F-9-474

HDD HDD Support Plate F-9-476

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-197

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-198

3) Purchase option HDD and assemble the second HDD.

x4

CAUTION: Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Dampers removed from the standard HDD. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

HDD Connector Plate

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD

HDD Support Plate Spacer

HDD Support Plate

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-478

Anti-vibration Damper

CAUTION:

HDD Connector Plate F-9-477

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

• 1 HDD Support Plate (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (Anti-vibration Damper removed from the standard HDD.) • 1 HDD Connector Plate (enclosed with removable HDD Kit)

Screw hole

• 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD) Label

Connector

Screw hole F-9-479

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-198

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-199

CAUTION:

4) Install the Conversion Connector.

• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.

CAUTION: Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-482

F-9-480

6) Install the HDD Cover.

5) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it. • 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION:

CAUTION: Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

x2

• 1 Claw

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Boss

Hole

F-9-483

F-9-481

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-199

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-200

Installation to the Host Machine

7) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Install the HDD Face Plate to the HDD Box. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2

x2

F-9-484 F-9-486

8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-485

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-200

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-201

2) Install the HDD Door Unit to the HDD Box.

4) Remove the Drawer Cable (Blue). (The removed parts will not be used.)

• 1 Boss

• 2 Screws

• 1 HDD Lock Plate Shaft

• 2 Springs

• 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper

• 2 Washers 5) Remove the Drawer Cable (Red) and replace them with the IV cables. (The removed Drawer Cable (Red) will not be used.) • 2 Screws • 2 Springs

Hinge Shaft Stopper

• 2 Washers

Boss

x4

HDD Lock Plate Shaft

Washer Spring Screw

IV Cable

x2

Washer Spring Screw

Drawer cable F-9-487

3) Remove the plate from the HDD Box. (The removed plate will not be used.) • 1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in step 6.) F-9-489

F-9-488

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-201

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

6) Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

9-202

8) Put the 2 cables through, and return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

• 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 3.) NOTE:

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the cable in the host machine.

F-9-490

7) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. • 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.)

x4

Protrusion

Protrusion

F-9-492

F-9-491

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-202

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9) Disconnect the 2 cables on the Controller side. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

11)

• 2 Connectors

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

9-203

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 3 Edge Saddles CAUTION:

• 3 Wire Saddles

• Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

x6 x2

x2

F-9-493

10)

Connect the 2 cables of the HDD Unit.

• 2 Connectors • 3 Edge Saddles • 4 Wire Saddles

F-9-495

NOTE: Be sure to pass the cable through the Wire Saddle [A] when connecting.

x7 [A]

x2

F-9-494

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-203

9 12)

Close the plate.

13)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

17)

9-204

Open the HDD Door Unit.

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly. 14)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

15)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

F-9-497

18)

Install the Removable HDD 1 (front).

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops. 16)

Open the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover, and affix the Shutdown Caution Label

in the appropriate language. Shutdown Caution Label

Right Rear Cover F-9-496

9

F-9-498

19)

Close the HDD Door Unit.

20)

Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.

21)

Close the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover.

Installation > TYPE-7 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-204

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-205

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for

the machine is first started up after installing this product.

auto gradation adjustment.

It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the

Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode). 3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search. 5) Click REGISTER. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > TYPE-7 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-205

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-8

9-206

[HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit]

Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] Encryption Board X 1

[2] Signal Cable

[3] Power Cable

[4] LED Board

[5] LED Cable

[6] LED Label X 1

[7] Signal Cable

[8] Power Cable

[9] Signal Cable

[10] Power Cable

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4)

[12] Wire Saddle (large)

(A:Cont-Sig) X 1

(A:Cont-Pow) X 1

Checking the Contents [Option HDD (1TB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Spacer X 4 (A:LED) X 1

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

(A:HDD-Sig1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

X9

Use 5 of them

(A:HDD-Sig2) X 1

X3

[7] Gasket X 1

[13] Wire Saddle (Small)

X3

[14] Anti-vibration Damper

X4

[15] HDD Connection

Plate X 1

F-9-499

• Noticd for FCC/IC

F-9-500

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Checking the Contents

9-206

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-207

Installation Outline Drawing

< CD/Guides> • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • Noticd for FCC/IC • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting.

Encryption Board

Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD

Fixation HDD (Option HDD)

Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

F-9-501

Assembling the Option HDD 1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit. (The removed HDD and the screws

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1).

will not be used.)

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

• 2 Screws

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power x2

Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

Points to Note at Installation F-9-502

CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-207

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-208

CAUTION:

2) Assemble the option HDD.

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

CAUTION:

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Damper included in HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

• Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector. Label

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

Anti-vibration Damper

[A] F-9-503

Connector F-9-505

• 1 HDD Support Pate (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (enclosed with HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.) • 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD) • 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD) Option HDD

HDD Support Plate

x4 Spacer

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-504

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-208

9 Installation to the Host Machine

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-209

4) Install the Wire Saddles. • 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

1) Install the Option HDD to the HDD Fixation Plate.

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

• 2 Screws (TP; M3x6)

Wire Saddle (Large)

x2

F-9-506

2) Return the HDD Fixation Plate Unit to the HDD Box. • 2 Screws (Use the 2 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 11.)

Wire Saddle (Small) F-9-507

3) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. • 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.)

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-209

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

5) Install the Encryption Board.

7) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x4)

• 2 Connectors

9-210

• 1 Plastic Film Sheet NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

4 Connectors

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

x2 x4

x4

F-9-510

F-9-508

6) Install the LED Board (A:LED) . • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)

Boss F-9-509

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-210

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

8) Connect the "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to the slot [A] of the HDD and [CH-A] of the PCB.

10)

9-211

Disconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

• 2 Connectors A:HDD-Pow1

• 3 Wire Saddles

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)

• 3 Edge Saddles

Slot A

x2

x4 CH A

x6 A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) A:HDD-Pow1 F-9-511

9) Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

F-9-513

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large) NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

11)

Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

• 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

x3 x6 x2

[A]

Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) F-9-512

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-514

9-211

9 12)

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

13)

9-212

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow). NOTE:

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 1 Wire Saddle NOTE:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

x2

F-9-516

Protrusion

Protrusion F-9-515

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-212

9 14)

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

9-213

15)

Close the plate.

16)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

• Be careful not to drop the screw.

• Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables.

• Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

• Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly. 17)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

18)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover

x2

• Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

F-9-517

19)

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover.

LED Label

Right Rear Cover F-9-518

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-213

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Checking the Security Mark

Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-214

Checking the Security Version

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

the machine is first started up after installing this product.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the

3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version

machine may start up properly after installation of this product.

information of the security chip.

Details follow.

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

1. Requirements

CAUTION:

1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

Checking the Security Mark

3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host

3. Selecting the System Software

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained.

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST.

The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is operating correctly. The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

3) Click Register Firmware. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search. 5) Click REGISTER.



6) Click OK.

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

4. Downloading the System Software

)

1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Checking the Security Mark

9-214

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-215

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request <servicing work when a failure occurs>. Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > TYPE-8 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-215

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-9

9-216

[Removable HDD Kit] [1] Hinge Shaft Stopper

Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit +

X1

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[2] HDD Handle X 2

Use 1 of them

[3] HDD Connector Plate

X2

Use 1 of them

Checking the Contents [Option HDD (1TB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[4] HDD Cover X 2

[3] Spacer X 4

Use 1 of them

[7] HDD Lock Plate Shaft

X1

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

[5] Connector Fixing Block

X2

Use 1 of them

[8] Shutdown Caution

Label X 1

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

[10] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[6] HDD Door Unit X 1

[11] Screw (R round head

TP; M3x6) X 6

Use 5 of them

[9] Conversion Connector

X2

Use 1 of them

[12] Screw (P Tight; M3x8)

X4

Use 2 of them

[7] Gasket X 1

[13] R-HDD Label X 1

[14] HDD Blanking Plate

X1

[15] IV Cable X 1

F-9-519



F-9-520

• Noticd for FCC/IC

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Checking the Contents

9-216

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

[HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit] [1] Mirroring Board or

Encryption Board X 1

9-217

< CD/Guides>

[2] Signal Cable

(A:Cont-Sig) X 1

• HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation

[3] Power Cable

• HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice

(A:Cont-Pow) X 1

• Noticd for FCC/IC • Installation Procedure

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power [4] LED Board

(A:LED) X 1

[5] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

[6] LED Label X 1

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD

[7] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig1) X 1

[8] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board.

[9] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig2) X 1

When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). [10] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4)

X9

[12] Wire Saddle (large)

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

X3

Use 5 of them

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then

[13] Wire Saddle (Small)

X3

[14] Anti-vibration Damper

X4

disconnect the power plug.

[15] HDD Connection

Plate X 1

F-9-521

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-217

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

Points to Note at Installation

9-218

Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

CAUTION:

1) Purchase option HDD and assemble the second HDD.

• Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

CAUTION: Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Damper included in HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

• The HDD Unit removed from the HDD Box will not be used.

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

F-9-522

Installation Outline Drawing

Anti-vibration Damper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-524

Encryption Board Removable HDD (Option HDD) F-9-523

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-218

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-219

• 1 HDD Support Plate (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption &

2) Install the Conversion Connector.

Mirroring Kit.) • 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD)

CAUTION:

• 1 HDD Connector Plate (enclosed with removable HDD Kit)

Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

• 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD) Option HDD

HDD Connector Plate

x4

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

F-9-527

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-525

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

Screw hole

Label

Connector

Screw hole F-9-526

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-219

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

3) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it.

9-220

4) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw

• 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION:

CAUTION:

Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2

Boss

Hole F-9-530

F-9-528

CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-529

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD

9-220

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-221

Installation to the Host Machine

5) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

1) Install the HDD Face Plate to the HDD Box. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2

x2

F-9-531 F-9-533

6) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-532

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-221

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

2) Install the HDD Door Unit to the HDD Box.

4) Install the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 1 Boss

• 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 3.)

9-222

• 1 HDD Lock Plate Shaft • 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper

Hinge Shaft Stopper

Boss HDD Lock Plate Shaft F-9-536

F-9-534

5) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. • 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.) 3) Remove the plate from the HDD Box. (The removed plate will not be used.) • 1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in step 4.)

x4

F-9-537

F-9-535

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-222

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-223

6) Install the Wire Saddles. • 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

4 Connectors

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small) Wire Saddle (Large)

x4

F-9-539

8) Install the LED Board (A:LED) . • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)

Wire Saddle (Small) F-9-538

7) Install the Encryption Board. • 4 Screws (TP; M3x4) CAUTION: Be sure to put the cables on the Wire Saddle to prevent it from getting under the board.

Boss

NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

F-9-540

9-223

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

11)

• 2 Connectors

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

9-224

Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

• 1 Plastic Film Sheet NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

x3

x2 x4

[A] F-9-541

10)

F-9-543

Connect the cables of the HDD Drawer Unit.

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to CH-A of the PCB. • Connect the "A:HDD-Sig2: Blue" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to CH-B of the PCB. A:HDD-Pow2

CH B

A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

x4

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) A:HDD-Pow1

CH A

F-9-542

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-224

9 12)

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

Disconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

14)

9-225

Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

• 2 Connectors NOTE:

• 3 Wire Saddles

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 3 Edge Saddles

x2 x6

F-9-544

13)

Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

• 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

Protrusion

Protrusion

x6 F-9-546

x2 Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-545

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-225

9 15)

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-226

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

x2

• 1 Wire Saddle NOTE

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

F-9-548

x2 17)

Close the plate.

18)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly. F-9-547

19)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

20)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover 16)

• Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left,

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.) CAUTION:

upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

• Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-226

9 21)

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

Open the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover, and affix the Shutdown Caution

24)

9-227

Install the Removable HDD 1 (front).

Label in the appropriate language. 22)

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops.

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover. Shutdown Caution Label

LED Label

Right Rear Cover F-9-549

23)

Open the HDD Door Unit.

F-9-551

25)

Close the HDD Door Unit.

26)

Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.

27)

Close the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover.

Installing the System Software Using the SST The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. F-9-550

1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-227

9

Installation > TYPE-9 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-228

Checking the Security Mark

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained.

3) Turn on the PC.

The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is

4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

operating correctly.

3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST.

The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

3) Click Register Firmware. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search. 5) Click REGISTER. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode.

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

)

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following:

3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”.

At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST.

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request <servicing work when a failure occurs>. Completion of the Installation Work:

8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description

Checking the Security Version

of Checking the Security Version.

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel. 2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel. 3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip. When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

9

Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

Installation > TYPE-9 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-228

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-10

9-229

[HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit]

2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] Mirroring Board or

[2] Signal Cable

[3] Power Cable

[4] LED Board

[5] LED Cable

[6] LED Label X 1

[7] Signal Cable

[8] Power Cable

[9] Signal Cable

[10] Power Cable

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4)

[12] Wire Saddle (large)

[13] Wire Saddle (Small)

[14] Anti-vibration Damper

[15] HDD Connection

Encryption Board X 1

(A:Cont-Sig) X 1

(A:Cont-Pow) X 1

Checking the Contents [Option HDD (1TB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Spacer X 4 (A:LED) X 1

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

(A:HDD-Sig1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

X9

(A:HDD-Sig2) X 1

X3

[7] Gasket X 1

X3

X4

Plate X 1

F-9-552

• Noticd for FCC/IC

F-9-553

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Checking the Contents

9-229

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-230

Installation Outline Drawing

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation • Notice for FCC/IC < CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • Noticd for FCC/IC • Installation Procedure

Fixation HDD 2 (Option HDD)

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power

Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

CAUTION:

Fixation HDD 1 (Option HDD)

Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting. Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed.

F-9-554

Assembling the Option HDD 1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit. • 2 Screws (The removed screws will not be used.)

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1).

x2

• COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF. 1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-555

Points to Note at Installation CAUTION: Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-230

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Assembling the Option HDD

9-231

• 1 HDD Support Pate (enclosed with option HDD) 2) Remove the 4 Anti-vibration Dampers from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the Anti-vibration Dampers only.)

• 4 Anti-vibration Damper (Anti-vibration Damper removed from the standard HDD.) • 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD)

• 4 Screws

• 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD)

• 4 Spacers

• 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD)

• HDD Option HDD

x4

HDD Support Plate

x4 Spacer HDD Anti-vibration Damper HDD Support Plate

F-9-558

F-9-556

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

3) Assemble the option HDD.

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

CAUTION: Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Dampers removed from the standard HDD. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

• Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector. Label

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

[A]

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-557

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Assembling the Option HDD

Connector F-9-559

9-231

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-232

CAUTION:

4) Assemble the second Option HDD.

• Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.

CAUTION:

• Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Damper included in HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

• Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector. Label

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD. HDD

HDD Support Plate

[A]

Anti-vibration Damper

Connector F-9-562

F-9-560

• 1 HDD Support Pate (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.) • 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD)

Installation to the Host Machine 1) Install the Option HDD to the HDD Fixation Plate.

• 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD)

• 2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (enclosed with option HDD)

• 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD) Option HDD

x2

HDD Support Plate

x4 Spacer

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-561

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

F-9-563

9-232

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-233

2) Install the Option HDD (Second HDD) to the HDD Fixation Plate.

4) Return the HDD Fixation Plate Unit to the HDD Box.

• 2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (enclosed with option HDD)

• 2 Screws (Use the 2 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 11.)

5) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail.

x2

• 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.)

6) Install the Wire Saddles. • 3 Wire Saddles (Large) • 3 Wire Saddles (Small) Wire Saddle (Large) F-9-564

3) Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. • 4 Screws (TP; M3x4) (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

x4

Wire Saddle (Small) F-9-566

F-9-565

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-233

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

7) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

9) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x4)

• 2 Connectors

9-234

• 1 Plastic Film Sheet NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

4 Connectors

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

x2 x4

x4

F-9-569

F-9-567

8) Install the LED Board (A:LED) . • 1 Boss • 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)

Boss F-9-568

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-234

9 10)

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

Install the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1: Red) (A:HDD-Sig2: Blue) and the Power

11)

Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1) (A:HDD-Pow2).

9-235

Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig2: Blue" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to the slot [B] of the HDD and [CH-B of the PCB. • Connect the "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to the slot [A] of the HDD and [CH-A] of the PCB. A:HDD-Pow1

NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

Slot A Slot B

x3

A:HDD-Pow2

x8

CH B

A:HDD-Pow2 A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

CH A

CH B

A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

CH A

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) [A] A:HDD-Pow1 F-9-570

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

F-9-571

9-235

9 12)

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

Disconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

14)

9-236

Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

• 2 Connectors NOTE:

• 3 Wire Saddles

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 3 Edge Saddles

x2 x6

F-9-572

13)

Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

• 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

x6

Protrusion

x2

Protrusion F-9-574

Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-573

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-236

9 15)

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-237

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) .

x2

• 1 Wire Saddle NOTE:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

x2

F-9-576

17)

Close the plate.

18)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly. F-9-575

16)

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

19)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

20)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.)

CAUTION:

• Right Rear Cover (2 Screws)

• Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-237

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-238

3. Selecting the System Software 21)

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover.

1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used. 2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware. 4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search. 5) Click REGISTER. 6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen.

LED Label

2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. Right Rear Cover F-9-577

3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted.

Installing the System Software Using the SST

7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product. It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements

Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) 1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel. 3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version information of the security chip.

2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed. CAUTION:

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable.

The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-238

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained. The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is operating correctly.

9-239

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that

The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

)

request <servicing work when a failure occurs>. Completion of the Installation Work:

Setting the Mirroring

Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP

1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine. 2) Make a setting of mirroring. • Specify “1” under “Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID”. 3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value. 4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description

5) Make sure that the LED blinks.

of Checking the Security Mark.

• HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

CAUTION: Rebuild process starts after setting “1” for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure.

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

1) Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set “0”. 3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set "1". 5) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation. An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.

9

Installation > TYPE-10 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-239

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Checking the Contents

TYPE-11

9-240

[Removable HDD Kit]

2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit +

[1] Hinge Shaft Stopper

[2] HDD Handle X 2

[3] HDD Connector Plate

[4] HDD Cover X 2

[5] Connector Fixing Block

[6] HDD Door Unit X 1

[7] HDD Lock Plate Shaft

[8] Shutdown Caution

[9] Conversion Connector

[10] HDD Drawer Unit X 1

[11] Screw (R round head

[12] Screw (P Tight; M3x8)

[13] R-HDD Label X 1

[14] HDD Blanking Plate

[15] IV Cable X 1

X1

HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

X2

Checking the Contents [Option HDD (1TB)] [1] HDD Support Plate X 1

[2] HDD X 1

[3] Spacer X 4

X1

[4] Screw (Sems; M3x14) X 4

[5] Screw (TP; M3x6) X 2

X2

Label X 1

X2

[6] Anti-vibration Damper X4

TP; M3x6) X 6

X4

[7] Gasket X 1

X1

F-9-578



F-9-579

• Noticd for FCC/IC

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Checking the Contents

9-240

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

[HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit] [1] Mirroring Board or

Encryption Board X 1

[2] Signal Cable

(A:Cont-Sig) X 1

9-241

< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit > • HDD Mirroring Kit User Documentation

[3] Power Cable

• Notice for FCC/IC

(A:Cont-Pow) X 1

< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > • HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C Series User Documentation • HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice • Noticd for FCC/IC [4] LED Board

(A:LED) X 1

[5] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

• Installation Procedure

[6] LED Label X 1

Setting Before Turning OFF the Power CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting.

[7] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig1) X 1

[8] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001 (procedure error before installing the HDD

[9] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig2) X 1

Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board. When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed. [10] Power Cable

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1

[11] Screw (TP; M3x4)

X9

[12] Wire Saddle (large)

X3

Use 5 of them

1) Execute the following service mode (level 1). • COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power [13] Wire Saddle (Small)

X3

[14] Anti-vibration Damper

X4

[15] HDD Connection

Check that the main power switch is OFF.

Plate X 1

1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine. 2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then disconnect the power plug.

F-9-580

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

9-241

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)

Points to Note at Installation

9-242

Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)

CAUTION:

1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Fixation Plate Unit. (The removed HDD Fixation Plate and

Be sure to perform steps 1 to 11 of "Removing the HDD" before performing the following work. (p. 9-131 to p. 9-134)

• 2 Screws

the screws will not be used. )

Installation Outline Drawing

Removable HDD 1 (Option HDD)

x2

F-9-582

Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

2) Remove the 4 Anti-vibration Dampers from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the Anti-vibration Dampers only.)

Removable HDD 2 (Option HDD)

• 4 Screws F-9-581

• 4 Spacers • 1 HDD

x4

HDD HDD Support Plate F-9-583

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)

9-242

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)

9-243

3) Assemble the option HDD.

x4

CAUTION:

HDD

Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Dampers removed from the standard HDD. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

HDD Connector Plate

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD.

HDD Support Plate

HDD

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-585

Anti-vibration Damper

HDD Connector Plate F-9-584

• 1 HDD Support Plate (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (Anti-vibration Damper removed from the standard HDD.) • 1 HDD Connector Plate (enclosed with removable HDD Kit) • 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD)

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up. • Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

• 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD)

Screw hole

Label

Connector

Screw hole F-9-586

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)

9-243

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)

9-244

CAUTION:

4) Install the Conversion Connector.

• Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.

CAUTION: Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

• Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

F-9-589

F-9-587

6) Install the HDD Cover.

5) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it. • 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

• 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION:

CAUTION: Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

x2

• 1 Claw

Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

Boss

Hole

F-9-590

F-9-588

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (First HDD)

9-244

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-245

Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

7) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

1) Assemble the option HDD. CAUTION: Be sure to use the Anti-vibration Damper included in HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit. Never use the Anti-vibration Damper included in the "Option HDD (1TB)".

x2

NOTE: When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD Connector Plate and HDD. HDD

F-9-591

Anti-vibration Damper

HDD Support Plate

HDD Connector Plate

8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.

F-9-593

9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

• 1 HDD Support Plate (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Anti-vibration Damper (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit.) • 1 HDD Connector Plate (enclosed with removable HDD Kit) • 1 Option HDD (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Spacers (enclosed with option HDD) • 4 Screws (Sems; M3x14) (enclosed with option HDD)

HDD No.

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX

F-9-592

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-245

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

2) Install the Conversion Connector.

Option HDD

CAUTION:

HDD Connector Plate

x4

9-246

Make sure that there is no opening between the Conversion Connector and part of HDD.

HDD Support Plate

Spacer

Anti-vibration Damper F-9-594

CAUTION: • Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction. • Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.

F-9-596

• Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)

3) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it. • 2 Screws (P Tight; M3x8)

Screw hole

Label

Connector

Screw hole

CAUTION: Be sure not to tighten the screws in wrong order. Otherwise, the Conversion Connector will not be secured properly.

x2

Boss

F-9-595

Hole

F-9-597

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-246

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

CAUTION: • Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws. • Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.

9-247

5) Install the HDD Handle. • 2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6) CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

x2 F-9-598

4) Install the HDD Cover. • 1 Claw • 1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6) F-9-600

CAUTION: Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.

6) Affix the HDD No.2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD. 7) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.

HDD No.

F-9-599

Serial No.

XXXXXXXX F-9-601

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Assembling and Installing the Option HDD (Second HDD)

9-247

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

Installation to the Host Machine

9-248

3) Install the HDD Drawer Unit. • 1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)

1) Install the HDD Door Unit to the HDD Box. • 1 Boss • 1 HDD Lock Plate Shaft • 1 Hinge Shaft Stopper

Hinge Shaft Stopper

Boss HDD Lock Plate Shaft

F-9-604

4) Install the HDD Box to the HDD Slide Rail. F-9-602

2) Remove the plate from the HDD Box. (The removed plate will not be used.) • 1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in step 3.)

• 4 Screws (Use the 4 screws removed in ”Removing the HDD" step 10.)

x4

F-9-605

F-9-603

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-248

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

5) Install the Wire Saddles.

6) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

• 4 Screws (TP; M3x4)

9-249

• 3 Wire Saddles (Small) CAUTION:

Wire Saddle (Large)

Be sure to put the cables on the Wire Saddle to prevent it from getting under the board.

NOTE:

• Be sure to place the side with the 4 connectors in the direction shown in the figure when installing. • Tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

4 Connectors

Wire Saddle (Small) F-9-606

x4

F-9-607

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-249

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-250

7) Install the LED Board (A:LED) .

9) Connect the cables of the HDD Drawer Unit.

• 1 Boss

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig1: Red" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to CH-A of the PCB.

• 1 Screw (TP; M3x4)

• Connect the "A:HDD-Sig2: Blue" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to CH-B of the PCB. A:HDD-Pow2

CH B

A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)

x4

A:HDD-Sig1 (Red) A:HDD-Pow1

CH A Boss

F-9-608

F-9-610

10) 8) Connect the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) .

Secure the cables in place using the Wire Saddles.

• 3 Wire Saddles (Large)

• 2 Connectors NOTE: Be sure to secure the LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) in place together with other cables using the Wire Saddle [A].

• 1 Plastic Film Sheet • 3 Wire Saddles (Small)

LED Cable (A:LED-Sig)

x3 x2 x4 [A]

F-9-609 F-9-611

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-250

9 11)

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

Disconnect the 2 cables. (The 2 removed cables will not be used.)

13)

9-251

Return the HDD Unit to the host machine.

• 2 Connectors NOTE:

• 3 Wire Saddles

• Be sure to move the unit in the direction of the arrow when installing it to prevent the protrusion of the HDD Slide Rail from coming in contact with the plate of the host machine. • Be sure not to push the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) into the host machine.

• 3 Edge Saddles

x2 x6

F-9-612

12)

Install the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

• 3 Edge Saddles • 3 Wire Saddles • 2 Connectors

Protrusion

x6

Protrusion

F-9-614

x2 Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)

Power Cable (A:Cont-Pow) F-9-613

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-251

9 14)

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

Connect the Connector of the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Connector of the

Power cable (A:Cont-Pow).

15)

9-252

Secure the HDD Unit.

• 2 Screws (Use the screws removed in "Removing the HDD" step 9.)

• 1 Wire Saddle CAUTION: NOTE:

• When connecting the connector, be sure to connect it with the terminals inside the connector is on the rear side. • Be sure to pass the Signal cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power cable (A:Cont-Pow) through the Wire Saddle when connecting.

• Be careful not to drop the screw. • Be sure to tighten the screws in the order shown in the figure.

x2

x2

F-9-615

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

F-9-616

9-252

9 16)

Close the plate.

17)

Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops. (2 Screws)

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

22)

9-253

Open the HDD Door Unit.

CAUTION: • Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables. • Check that the Main Controller PCB 1 is installed properly. 18)

Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.

19)

Install the covers.

• Controller Box Cover • Rear Cover (4 Screws) (Tighten the screws in the following order: upper left, lower left, upper right, and then lower right.) • Right Rear Cover (2 Screws) NOTE: When installing the Right Cover (Upper Rear), open the Right Cover to make the work easier.

F-9-618

23)

Install the Removable HDD 1. (front)

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops. 20)

Open the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover, and affix the Shutdown Caution

Label in the appropriate language. 21)

Affix the LED label to the Right Rear Cover. Shutdown Caution Label

LED Label

Right Rear Cover

F-9-619

F-9-617

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installation to the Host Machine

9-253

9 24)

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-254

Installing the System Software Using the SST

Install the Removable HDD 2. (rear)

The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when the machine is first started up after installing this product.

NOTE: Be sure to insert it until it stops.

It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the machine may start up properly after installation of this product. Details follow. 1. Requirements 1) PC Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed. 2) Cross Ethernet Cable 2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine 1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off. 2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable. 3) Turn on the PC. 4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode). 3. Selecting the System Software 1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.

F-9-620

2) Start up the SST. 3) Click Register Firmware. 25)

Close the HDD Door Unit.

4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.

26)

Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft.

5) Click REGISTER.

27)

Close the Small Cover of the Right Rear Cover.

6) Click OK. 4. Downloading the System Software 1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen. 2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters download mode. 3) Select the version to be downloaded and click “Start”. 4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted. 6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is automatically restarted. 7) Terminate the SST. 8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Installing the System Software Using the SST

9-254

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Setting the Mirroring

Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

9-255

Setting the Mirroring 1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine. 2) Make a setting of mirroring.

1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.

• Specify “1” under “Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID”.

2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.

3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.

3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as version

4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.

information of the security chip.

5) Make sure that the LED blinks.

When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.

• HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks. • HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.

CAUTION: The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip of the correct version with CC Certification is functioning normally by referring to the version information indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’.

CAUTION: Rebuild process starts after setting “1” for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.), reexecute the process with the following procedure.

Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained.

1) Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2. 2) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set “0”. 3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine. 4) Select Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set "1".

operating correctly.

5) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host machine.

The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.



An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in the consideration.

The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark( is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

9

)

Installation > TYPE-11 > Setting the Mirroring

9-255

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-256

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit) When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the following: At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and request <servicing work when a failure occurs>. Completion of the Installation Work: Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for ‘Canon MFP Security Chip’ as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of Checking the Security Version. Maintenance of the Security Functions: Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description of Checking the Security Mark.

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for auto gradation adjustment. Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.

9

Installation > TYPE-11 > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

9-256

9

Installation > Relocating the Machine > Work Procedure

Relocating the Machine

9-257

Work Procedure 1) Remove the drum unit, and then attach the drum cover removed during installation.

Required Articles Have the following articles on hand: • Fixing tape • Drum cover removed during installation • Optical system fixing screws (2 pcs.) removed during installation

Preparation for Relocating the Machine When moving the machine using stairs (including steps) or transporting the machine to a different place using a truck, go through the steps described below. CAUTION: • When lifting the machine with a double-cassette pedestal, be sure to remove the F-9-621

double-cassette pedestal in advance. • If the machine is lifted with the double-cassette pedestal installed, they may separate

2) Secure the optical system using the two screws removed during installation.

from each other and consequently the machine can damage.

x2

NOTE: When dividing the reader part and the printer part, refer to the follwing procedure. "Removing the Reader Assembly"(page 4-32).

F-9-622

3) Secure the front cover, toner supply cover, delivery section, and cassette with tape. 4) Place an A3-size sheet on the document glass, and then secure the document glass cover (ADF) with tape.

9

Installation > Relocating the Machine > Work Procedure

9-257

Appendix ■ Tools ■Service ■ Circuit Diagram ■General ■ Timing Chart ■General ■ of User Mode ■List ■ of HDD partition ■Detail ■ Counter List ■Soft ■ Data ■Backup ■ ■Removal

10 Appendix > Service Tools Service Tools ■■Special Tools

10-2 Tool name

Tool No.

Rank (*)

Mirror cleaning tool

FL2-9842

--

Shape

Uses Used for cleaning the mirror in the CCD unit. This part is installed in the reader unit. (Not a service tool)

In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine: Tool name

Tool No.

Rank (*)

Digital multimeter

FY9-2002

A

Shape

Uses For making electrical checks.

A: each service engineer is expected to carry one.

T-10-1

B: each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one. C: each workshop is expected to carry one.

■■Oils and Solvents Name Tester extension pin

FY9-3038

A

As an addition when making an electrical check.

Tester extension pin (L-shipped)

FY9-3039

A

As an addition when making an electrical check.

NA-3 Test Chart

FY9-9196

A

For checking and adjusting images.

Uses

Composition

Remarks

Alcohol

Cleaning; e.g., glass, plastic, rubber; external covers.

Fluoride-family hydrocarbon Alcohol Surface activating agent Water

• Do not bring near fire. • Procure locally. • Substitute: IPA (isopropyl alcohol)

Solvent

Cleaning; e.g., metal; oil or toner stain.

Fluoride-family hydrocarbon Chlorine-family hydrocarbon Alcohol

• Do not bring near fire. • Procure locally • Substitute: MEK

Lubricating oil (EM-50L)

Lubrication; e.g., gears.

Special oil Special solid lubricating agent Lithium soap

• Tool No.: HY9-0007

Lubricating oil

Lubrication; e.g., drive areas, friction areas, scanner rail.

Silicone oil

• Tool No.: FY9-6022

T-10-2

10

Appendix > Service Tools

10-2

10-3

6

5

CT

2

3 2

3

5

6

COM

GND

24VE

GND

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

12V_C

1

2

3

4

5

3

J121

3.3V

GND

2

GND

1

J114

12V_C

4

GND

3

1

J115

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

E

D

J119

SW2

UN1

Front Door Switch

Power Supply PCB

1

5

4

3

2

1

1

CZ

2

2

P1

1

J2018

4

1 2 3

2

3

Power Cord

1 1

3

2

2 2

4

SOLD1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

C

J1103

SOLD3

N

3

2

1

SW4

SOLD2

J2000

Enviorment Switch

DOOR_SNS

GND

+5R

GND

+3.3R

ENV_HUM

GND

MT25

ENV_TEMP

ENV_SNS_DETECT*

GND

HEATER2_ON*

HEATER1_ON*

HEATER_RELAY_DRIVE2*

HEATER_RELAY_DRIVE1*

ZERO_CROSS

DOOR_MSW

PSU_DETECT1*

PSU_DETECT2*

1

2

Heater PCB (Option)

H

1 2 3

COR1

B

UN3

3

COR5 SOLD4

1

3 3

1

SOLD5

Enviorment Sensor J2017

N

S16

C

H

S18 Front Cover Open/Closed Sensor

2

J1102

J102

J101

2

6

1

7

J1101

8

SOLD6

9

SOLD7

J113

DF22

24VE

2

24V_E

GND

1

J180

POW_FAN_ERR

12V_E

6

GND

5

GND

4

3.3V

GND

3

J181

3.3V

24V

2

GND

1

7

24V

12V

GND

6

GND

4

GND

4

3

POW_FAN_ON

3

2

SHUTOFF_DRIVE

2

1

GND

1

J3

COR7

J3L

J412D

2

6

GND

5

24V_E

4

4

2

3

NO

2

3

J412DH

J9914

NC

1

1

2

Main Switch

J412L

4

2

To Inner Finisher-D1

1

3

2

2

5

UN1

1

4

J2003D

Power Supply PCB

J77

2

Front Door Switch

F

J2003DH

3 1

FT5

3

N

2

H

H

N 1

J150

2 2

CT

1

1

D

1 3

SW1

FT6

1

J504

1

1

SW2

J403 3

J2081

3

R_SEESAW

2 3

1

PSU

2

2

1

123

J78

Reader Conteroller PCB

1

Device Port PCB

2

Power Supply Cooling Fan

2

J400

UN4

J402

Operation Panel Assembly 1

To Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1

E

UN54

J2080

3

FM5

UN55

3

3.3V PSU

4

1

1

J401

F

7

2

8

1

9

J1100

10

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (1/11)

4

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

General Circuit Diagram

B

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 2

J205

J202

3

UN2 A

A

DC controller PCB

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.1 F-10-1

10-3

10-4

6

J2002

4

2

5

6

7

J2028DH J2028D

M 1

2

1

2

3

4

5

POLYGON_M_FG*

24V_E

POLYGON_M_ACC*

POLYGON_M_DEC*

GND

13 12 11 10 9

1

2

3

4

5

1 2 2 1

1 2

2

1

6 8

7

8

7

6

1 2

4

3

2

3 3

2 2

J208

GND

FIX_M_ACC*

FIX_M_DEC*

MAIN_M_FG*

MAIN_M_DEC*

MAIN_M_ACC*

3

4

5

6

7

8

3 3

2 2

F

1 1

J2073

J2075DH J2075D

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

10 9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

J2155L J2155DH J2155D

1

J2255D

1

9 10 11 12

1

J203

24V_E

FIX_M_FG* 2

1 1

J2058

24V_E

V_24U 1

J2057 2 2

2 1

J2255DH COR10

3 3

1 1

J2255L

9 10 11 12 13 5

4 4 4 4

2 1

J2074

M

2

J1 1

E

J2027DH 1 J2027D

24V_U

3

2

24V_U

4

3

GND

5

4

GND

5

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

+5R

3

3

EXIT1_SNS

2

4

1

No.1 Delivery Sensor

GND

1

5

+5R

1

6

EXIT1_FULL_SNS

2

7

2

S21

1 1

GND

3

1

2 2

DUPLEX_M_A

4

2

DUPLEX_M_A*

5

J2001

3

M

DUPLEX_M_B

4

3 3

CL

DUPLEX_M_B*

M

1 5

No.1 Delivery Full Sensor

No.1 Delivery Motor

EXIT_M_A

M

Polygon Motor

CL

CL

M10

M9

Duplex Feed Motor

EXIT_M_A*

Main Motor

CL1

Developing Manual Feed Cylinder Clutch Pickup Clutch

3

S20

EXIT_M_B

M11

Registration Clutch

EXIT_M_B*

Fixing Motor

F

CL3

M1

4

MP_CL_ON

M2

5

CL12

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

7

24V_R

8

SLEEVE_CL_ON

9

REGIST_CL_ON

10

E

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

J213

UN2 DC controller PCB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J2501L

3 2 1 2

3 8

4 7

5 6

6 5

7 4

8 3

9 10 2

J2013

1 4

3

2

1

1 2 3 4

1 5

PH 1 3

S25 J2012

B

1 1

2 2

3 3

Developing Assembly Toner Sensor

J2216DH J2216L

1

2

2

1

1

2

2

1

J2114DH J2114L

J2010D

Paper Cooling Fan J2059D

1 2

2 1

1 2 3 3 2 1

2

SOLD42

SOLD43

SOLD40 M

M17

Bottle Motor

10

9

1

4

3

2

1

1 2 3 4

M

Hopper Motor

S26

Sub Hopper Toner Sensor

8

2 2

3 1

1 3

2 2

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 2

J2571DH

5 1

J2571D J2571L

J2671D

J2008D J2008DH

3 1

J2671DH

J2005 1 3

2 2

3 1

321

2

FM3

FM4

2 1

1

SL

1 1

1 1

2 2

3 3

J2004 1 1

2 2

3 3

J2671L

Mi2 1 2

2 2

S7

3 3

S9

1

2

3

Duplex Feed Sensor

B

S6

Loop Sensor

Manual Feeder J2006 Exhaust Exhaust Paper Sensor SL2 Fan (Rear) Fan (Front) Manual Feed S27 Pickup Solenoid Manual Feeder

Paper Size Sensor

1

SL

SL12

J2211

A

Reversal Solenoid

2

M16

1 3

321

J2059DH J2059L

J2115

PH 2

3 3

J2007

J2080D

1

J2009D J2009DH

J2010DH

321

J2080DH

A

2 4

3 1

FM7

Waste Toner Sensor

J2114D

2 2

J2209D J2209DH

S17

J2216D

3

1

10 9

2

J2503D J2503DH J2503L

C

1

C

J2506L

D

J2506DH

1

+5R

DEVELOP_LEVEL_SNS

2

GND

24V_E

3

LOOP_A_SNS

GND

4

+5R

+5R

5

GND

GND

6

DUPLEX_SNS

WASTE_TONER_FULL_SNS

7

3.3V

+5R

J2501D J2501DH

8

MP_SIZE_SNS

GND

J206 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

TONER_COVER_SNS

1

+5R

HOPPER_LEVEL_SNS

2

GND

24V_E

3

MP_PAPER_SNS

GND

4

24V_E

HOPPER_M_ON

J221 5

MP_SL_ON

1

FAN_F_ON

2

GND

3

FAN_F_LOCK*

4

FAN_R_ON

5

GND

6

FAN_R_LOCK*

1

24V_R

2

REV_SL_ON

3

N.C.

4

PAPER_COOLINGFAN_ON

5

GND

6

PAPER_COOLING_FAN_LOCK*

7

GND

BOTTLE_M_ON

GND

D

J209

8

J2506D

J207 10 9

SOLD41

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (2/11)

S46

Toner Cover Open/Closed Sensor

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.2 F-10-2

10-4

10-5

9

8

7

J2019 5

4

J2020

3

2

1

5

4

3

2

3 3

1

2 2

5

S3

S4

SL1

3 3

2 2

1 1

2 2

1 1

3 3

J2022

J2021

2 2

1 1

3 3

J2023

2 2

1 1

1

3

1 2

J2034

2 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

6

5

4

3

2

1

J2026

J2061

3 3

2 2

1

1 1

J2060DH

2 1

S24

S23

2

1 2

J2060D

3 3

J2062

2 2

1 1

3 3

J2063 J2545LH J2545L 1 6

J2545D

J2532L

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2 5

3 4

4 3

5 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

6 1

J2532DH J2532D

Reversal Motor M

No.2 Selivery Reversal Full Sensor Sensor

SL

No.2 Delivery Sensor

M

1

M20

Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 2

S22

2

J2024

1 1

2

SL13

Cassette 1 Pickup Motor

SL 3 3

4

M13

Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A Paper Level Sensor B Pickup Solenoid

Cassette 1 Paper Sensor

Cassette 1 Pickup Sensor

S30

F

S2

S1

Cassette 1 Paper Length Cassette 1 Paper Width S5 Detection Switch Detection Switch Pre-Registration Sensor S35

6

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10

2 2

4

1 1

3

2

1

F

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

J2064

J2025DH J2025D

J2533L J2533LH J2533D

1 5

2 4

3 3

4 2

5 1

1

2

3

4

5

J2561L J2561DH J2561D

E

D

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

J234

Cassete 1

J2511DH J2511D

1

REVERSE_M_/B

8

2

REVERSE_M_B

7

3

REVERSE_M_/A

6

4

REVERSE_M_A

5

5

REVERSE_SNS

4

6

GND

3

+5R

2

+5R

7

EXIT2_FULL_SNS

FEED_M_B*

CST_FEED_SL_ON

FEED_M_A

24V_E

FEED_M_A*

PAPER_LEVEL_B_SNS

PAPER_LEVEL_A_SNS

GND

+5R

GND

+5R

CST_PAPER_SNS

REGIST_SNS_LED_ON

GND

+5R

REGIST_SNS_LED_ON

CST_FEED_SNS

REGIST_SNS

GND

GND

C_SIZE_W1

FEED_M_B

1

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

8

EXIT2_SL_ON

8

6

GND

7

C_SIZE_W2

GND

C_SIZE_W3

6

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

24V_E

5

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

+5R

4

C_SIZE_W4

C_SIZE_L1

C_SIZE_L2

3

J232

8

EXIT2_SNS

2

J2511L 7

GND

1

GND

C_SIZE_L3

E

C_SIZE_L4

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (3/11)

CSR

D

UN2 DC controller PCB Cassete 2

J211

J215

CSR

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

GND

OP2_READY

RESET*

GND

OP2_M2_CLK

GND

OP2_M1_CLK

GND

OP2_EX_CLK

GND

OP2_EX_SEND

OP2_EX_LOAD

+5R

6 2

J223

CSR

1

GND

5 3

2

OP2_DETECT

4 4

3

EDGE_FAN_F_LOCK*

C_SIZE_L4 3 5

4

EDGE_FAN_ON

C_SIZE_L3

2 6

5

GND

GND

1 7

6

EDGE_FAN_R_LOCK*

C_SIZE_L2

J2507LH J2507L

7

EDGE_FAN_ON

C_SIZE_L1

J2507D

8

SHUTTER_M_A

C_SIZE_W4

13 12 11 10 9

GND

1

SHUTTER_M_A*

2

SHUTTER_M_B

3

SHUTTER_M_B*

4

SHUTTER_HP_SNS

5

GND

6

+5R

7

C_SIZE_W3

C_SIZE_W2

C_SIZE_W1

+5R

GND

CST_DOOR_SNS

CST2_PAPER_SNS

+5R

GND

+5R

GND

PAPER_LEVEL_A_SNS_CST2

PAPER_LEVEL_B_SNS_CST2

+5R

GND

+5R

GND

24V_E

CST2_FEED_SL_ON

CST2_FEED_SNS

FEED_M_A*

FEED_M_A

FEED_M_B*

FEED_M_B

C

8

GND

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

C

7 1

J2056

B

J9908D 1 6

2 5

3

4

4

3

5 2

J2563D

6

1 2 3 4 5 6 14 13 12 11 10 9

J2563DH

1

J2563L

M

7 8

8 7

J2037D J2037DH

J2039

9 10 11 12 13 14 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 1

2 2

3 3

1 4

Cassette 2 Pickup Motor 3 8

4 7

5 6

6 5

7 4

8 3

9 10 2 1

J2572DH

4

J2055D J2055DH

1 2

2 1

J2054 2

1

1 1

2 2

3 3

1 1

2 2

SL11

1 1

S33

S34

2 2

3 3

S32

Cassette 2 Paper Sensor

Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Paper Cassette 2 Paper Pickup Solenoid Pickup Sensor Level Sensor B Level Sensor A

8

2

M8

J2077 1 1

2 2

1

S39

2

3

4

5

1

J2075

Cassette Cover Sensor

7

2

3

4

5

J2076

S29

6

5

4

3

2

B

1

J9908DH

To Cassette Feeding Unit-AF1

1

J2036D J2036DH

1 3

2 2

3 1

1 3

2 2

3 1

321

321

FM1

FM2

Fixing Film Cooling Fixing Film Cooling Fan (Rear) Fan (Front)

3 3

J2052

3 3

3

Fixing Film Shutter Motor

3 3

S31

J2053

SL

2 2

7

M

J2572L

1 1

8

J2035DH

J2051

9

4 1

J2035D

Fixing Film Shutter HP Sensor

J2572D 1 2 10 9

10

3 2

CSR

S10

M3

A

2 3

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

A

S28

Cassette 2 Cassette 2 Paper Length Detection Switch Paper Width Detection Switch

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.3 F-10-3

10-5

10-6

6 5

1

4

5

6

7

+24VR

TXENB

3

GND

RX

2

MT10

3

J231

E

+5R

RXLD

1

CSR

TX

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

2

1

J250

2

1

2

J2510LWH

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

4

5

6

7

8

24V_U

24V_U

GND

GND

+3.3R

L-GND

DIS_DC_ON

DEV_DC_ON

TR_N_DC_ON

CHRG_DC_ON

CHRG_AC_DRV

HVT_ENB

DEV_AC_ON*

CHRG_I_SNS

TR_CHG

TR_CC_CTRL

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

DEV_DC_CTRL

8

CHRG_AC_CTRL

FIX_N_DRV

7

9

C

J2510LA

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

J2510LB

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

8

7

6

5

4

CSR

1

JP3,4

ET4

3

2

1

J301

UN6

N.C.

ET3

3

6

J2510DB

Connector, Drawer, Fixing N.C.

MT5

2 1

2

5

DEV_AC_DRV*

9 10 1

FIX_CTRL

8

4

DIS_CTRL

7

3

TR_P_DRV*

6

2

DC_CLK

5

1

Connector, Drawer, Fixing

10 9

J9913L

4

CSR

CHRG_DC_CTRL

N.C.

VL

VL

N.C.

MT6

J2505D

J2505L

1 2 3

H1

COM

H2 N.C.

3

RWZ RWZ

N.C.

N.C.

8

2

J204

1

+5R

4

2

GND

5

J2510DWH

J9913

3

J2510DA 6

FIX_OUT_SNS

2

MAIN_TH

1

GND

J2104D J2104

3

SUB1_TH

1 1

4

GND

2 2

5

SUB2_TH

3

3 3

6

GND

2

NewMolex

1

4 4

7

TH_DETECT*

1

5

2

5 5

8

GND

11 10 9

4

3

7

3

D

N

3

4

6

4

1

2

5

5

5

1

1

2

H

1

J1104

J1106 6

4

4

J105 3

J214

7

3

3

DC controller PCB

*Cassette Heater PCB is only J1106/J1102.

C

2

6

TXEND

1

2

COR2

J230

CSR

7

GND

9 10 11

8

CLK

8

GND

7

FIN_BIT

6

FIN_ENABLE

GND

5

GND

FIN_DL_RESET

4

FIN_MODE

3

GND

2

1

J2068DB

UN2

2

24V_U

1

J226

FIN_RxD

9 10 11

GND

8

J233

GND

7

FIN_TxD

6

GND

5

FIN_MODE

4

FIN_ENABLE

GND

3

FIN_DL_RESET

FIN_TxD

2

FIN_BIT

FIN_RxD

1

4

GND

GND

CCL_FAN_LK*

GND

GND

3

1

J201

24V_E GND

2

Heater PCB (Option)

2

J2210D

3

3

Power Supply PCB

GND

4

12V_E

4

UN3

CCL_FAN_ON

ET1

GND

5

UN1

1

J2210L J2210DH

2

GND

1

3

GND

2

4

+24V_E

3

GND

4

5

GND

5

1

6

+5R

6

2

BUFFER_M_STANBY*

7

3

7

BUFFER_DETECT*

8

4

8

+3.3R

1

5

BUFFER_M_I0

2

6

BUFFER_M_CWCCW

3

7

BUFFER_M_I1

3 1

4

8

BUFFER_M_CLK

2 2

5

11 10 9

BUFFER_PAPER_OUT_SEN

1 3

6

J2067DB

GND

3 1

7

J222

24VE

6

J1105

J1107

GND 7

3

8

3

N

2

2 2

J411DH J411D

J2067DA

F

J38 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

J9915DH J9915D

5

J112

1

1 3

1

lattice

J2068DH

To Inner Finisher-D1

MT11

H

N

2

To Buffer Path Unit-H1

4

MT1

4

ET2

1

3

BUFFER_PAPER_IN_SEN

2

1

SOLD12

SOLD11

SOLD13

3

E H

2

123

2

2

To Paper Deck Unit-B2 1

1

3

J2067DH

FM6

J9912D

D

2

MT20

4

To Staple Finisher/ Booklet Finisher-G1

J410

J409

Reader Heater (Option)

5

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

6

H5

J2099

F

7

GND

8

BUFFER_OPEN_SEN

9

1

10

1 2 3

HVT PCB

JP1,2

JP5,6

T6

JP7,8

ET5

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

3

2

1

DEV

TR

B

2

To Cassette Heater

2

J9912

H1

4

MT8

J9911D

To Option Cassette Heater

5

DRM

1

6

SE(Elminator, Static Charge)

J2100

MAKER

1

H2

2

MAKER

3

1

4

1

2

5

TP1 TP

6

2

1

B

Drum Heater (Option)

MT7

H3

ET6

N.C.

1

2

J2101

GUIDE BIAS MT2

MT4 MT3

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (4/11)

J2063DH

UNIT71 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J2063D

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

J2063L 1 1

2 2

3 3

J2046

S19

A

H4

Fixing Sub Thermistor 2

Cassette Heater

A

Fixing Outlet Sensor

TH3 TH2

TH1

Fixing Main Thermistor

Fixing Sub Thermistor 1

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.4 F-10-4

10-6

10-7

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10

Control Panel Assembly

F

UN8

TTP PCB

GND

E

J1009

J1005

J1010

J1008

ERROR_LED

ACCSS_LED

E8_LED

START_LED

/SKEY7

/SKEY6

/SKEY5

K-DGT4

K-DGT3

K-DGT2

/SKEY1

J3001

K-DGT0

KEYD7

KEYD2

KEYD1

K-RTN0

DLED2

GND

POWER_LED

SOFT_SW

J3002

E

F

UN9

Key Top PCB

UN12

UN11

Sub Key PCB

Volume key PCB

KEYD5 K-DGT2

GND

K-DGT3

VOLUME

HIGHIIMPRTANCE

K-DGT4

+2.5V

GND

+2.5V

TXCLKOUTGND

J1003

UN13

TXCLKOUT+

Control Panel CPU PCB

TXOUT2+

VOLUME GND GND

J4002

LCD PCB

K-RTN0

GND H_LEVEL

K-DGT4 K-RTN0

D J5001

UN7

GND

J4001

D

TXOUT2GND TXOUT1+ TXOUT1GND

C

C

TXOUT0+ TXOUT0GND

J1007

GND +3.3A

J2080

J1001

CONT_RESET

GND

TXD_C

RXD_C

GND

UI-PEDY

LCDON

POWER_LED

SOFT_SW

USB+

USB-

GND

GND

TXCLKOUT+

TXCLKOUT-

GND

GND

TXOUT2+

TXOUT2-

TXOUT1+

TXOUT1-

GND

To Power Supply PCB (J115)

GND

B

TXOUT0+

+3.3A

TXOUT0-

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (5/11)

B

J1003

UN25

A

A

Main Controller PCB 1

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.5 F-10-5

10-7

10-8

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10

SP1

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

2

MONI USB

J28

1

3

CSR

J601

1

GMD

3

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

2

J11

FC_USB_IN

2

J4

HDD

GMD

1

G3 FAX PCB

UN66

GMD 2

J600

3

3Line_L4

2

J15

J9

J603

1

UN15

J13

E

2

3

2

1

2

1

2

3Line_L3

1

2 1

J23

1

3Line_L2

8

3Line_L1

7

2Line_L2

6

1

CI_EU1

5

UN18

J29

1

3

2

J22

G3 2rd Line FAX PCB

J14

4

GND

3

GND

2

CI_EU2

1

J12

J17

2 1

J16

F

Mojular PCB (2 to 4 lines)

2Line_L1

Mojular PCB (1 line)

1LINE_T1

1

1LINE_T2

2

Power Supply PCB

1LINE_CT1

2

1LINE_CT2

J30DH J30D

1

1LINE_L1

J30L

UN19

UN1

UN20

1LINE_L2

1

F

2

Speaker (For G3)

G3 3rd/4th Line FAX PCB

USB

1

E

UN70 UN17

1 2 3 4 5

J25 7

USB

4

3

2

1

USB

GND

3

ECO_POW

2

GND

GND

1

ECO_SCL

ECO_SDA

GND

D

1 2 3 4 5

1

J51

UN14

RST_FAX_USB*

2

USBFAX_DP

3

USBFAX_DN

4

3.3R FAX

GND

CSR

12V

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

J2

GND

12V

GND

#INT_FAX

#MODEM_SNS

#FCID_USB

+3.3R

#FCID

#RESET_FAX

#FOFFHK

#EXB_CS1

#EXB_WE

#EXB_OE

EXB_DT7

EXB_ADDR8

EXB_DT6

EXB_ADDR7

GND

GND

8

EXB_DT5

7

EXB_ADDR6

6

EXB_DT4

5

EXB_ADDR5

EXB_DT2

4

EXB_DT3

EXB_ADDR3

3

EXB_ADDR4

EXB_DT1

2

EXB_ADDR2

GND

1

USB

EXB_DT0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J102

EXB_ADDR1

GND

SATA_RXN0 SATA_PXP0

GND

SATA_TXN0

SATA_TXP0

GND

GND

5V

GND

GND

1 2 3 4

J103

5

COR22

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

D

6

ECO_DET*

1 2 3 4

12V

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (6/11)

4

5

6

7

J5

J204

Main Controller PCB 2

4

3

2

1

13 12 11 10 9

6

5

2

1

2

1

13 12 11 10 9

COR3

J8132

SEESAW

3

GND

4

PW_FAN_FULL_ON

CSR

5

POW_FAN_ERR

J8130 6

PW_FAN_HALF_ON

3

BD

4

+3.3V

GND

PWM

7

CTRL0_2

GND

DATA_C+

DETECT

DATA_C-

GND

DATA_B-

DATA_B+

GND

DATA_A-

DATA_A+

GND

DATA_D+

DATA_D-

GND

DETECT

8

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

RELAY_ON

5

RMT_DCON

6

R_PW_MONITOR

7

RMT_RCON

8

RMT_CONT

14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

1

RMT_SYS

2

BD

3

+3.3V

4

SHUTOFF_SW

5

+3.3V

6

GND

7

PWM

GND

CTRL0_2

CTRL1_0

CTRL1_1

CTRL1_2

DETECT

DATA_C+

DATA_C-

GND

DATA_B-

DATA_B+

GND

DATA_A-

DATA_A+

GND

DATA_D+

DATA_D-

GND

COR3

J8142

J8142 8

GND

1

12V_C

miniCT 13 12 11 10 9

2

12V_C

J8143

J8143 3

GND

4

+5V

5

GND

6

CTRL0_0

7

+5V

8

GND

14 13 12 11 10 9

CTRL0_0

1

CTRL0_1

2

DETECT

IMG1L_TXD

3

GND

IMG1L_RXD

4

GND

5

/DDI_ITOP_OUT

6

/IMG1L_IMAGE_END

7

GND

DDI_PI0

/DDI_DOWNLOAD

/IMG_SYS_RST

GND

/DDI_RESET

/DDI_POWER

/DDI_CPRDY

/DDI_PPRDY

GND

/DDI_CTS

/DDI_RTS

DDI_TXD

DDI_RXD

GND

/DDI_PPRTST

/LASER_DETECT

GND

/HAND_SET

/POLYGON_M_BD

8

DDI_LIVEWAKE

27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

GND

J8112

CSR

CTRL0_1

C

B

C

B COR13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

6

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

J210

14 13 12 11 10 9

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

J10

CZ

UN2

A

8

UN23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

J7

J21

2

3

9

6

5

4

3

2

1

1

J10

UN24

Laser Scanner Unit

8

7

2

3

4

J21

UN60

Laser Driver PCB (2 beams)

5

6

7

J7

1

2

3

5

4

3

2

1

J110

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10 11 12 13

J111

UN1

UN24

BD PCB

A

Power Supply PCB

Laser Scanner Unit iR ADV 4251/4245/4235 series

10

8

BD PCB

Laser Driver PCB (4 beams)

DC Controller PCB

1

14 13 12 11 10 9

7

6

iR ADV 4225 series

5

4

3

2

1

P.6 F-10-6

10-8

10-9

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10

1

SP2 Speaker (For G4) J41DH J41D

F

1 2

2 1

1

2

J61

F

2 1

2

J17

J8

GND

J9

1

1

GND

2

2

J34

1

UN1 J18

G4 FAX I/F

Power Supply PCB

J72

2

IOPD0

3

IOPD1

4

IOPD2

5

IOPD3

6

GND

7

IOPD4

8

IOPD5

C

IOPD7 GND IOSELIN* IOSTB* GND IOBUSY GND IOSEL IOACK* IOPE IOINT* IOFAULT*

UN56

G4 Adapter PCB

G4 Connecting PCB

UN29

PCI Expansion PCB

D

G4 Converter PCB

6

N.C

5

N.C FOPTION0

3

4

RST_G4FAX* GND N.C

1 2

J33

GND

UN55

7

GND

12V

UN27

E

8

IOAUTOFD*

2

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

G4 FAX PCB

IOPD6

J46

1

J45

UN26 D

GND

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

E

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (7/11)

J6 1

C

2

3

J49 1

2

3

4

5

B

B

1

2

3

4

5

J50

UN28 G4 Mojular PCB

A

10

9

A

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.7 F-10-7

10-9

10-10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10

UN34 FM12

Multimedia Card Reader PCB

Controller Cooling Fan

F

UN36

UN35

or

B5 A5

B7

B6 A6

A7

B8 A8

B9 A9

B10 A10

B11

B12 A12

A11

B13 A13

B14 A14

B15

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

A15

B8

A11

A10

B9

B10

A12 B11

A13 B12

A14 B13

A15 B14

J1031

J1026

CT

GND USB_OCS*

MDI0P A MDI0N A MDI1P A MDI1N A MDI2P A

USBA_VCC

MDI2N A

UN25

MDI3P A MDI3N A

Main Controller PCB 1

C

D

To Ethernet

To USB(H)

C

J1025

B1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

A1

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

B8 A8

B1

B9 A9

B10

B11 A11

A10

B12 A12

B13

A1

B8 A8

B9 A9

B10 A10

GND

B

A9

B8

N.C

GND

B7

SATA_RXPO

A8

N.C

B6

SATA_RXNO

B5

A7

GND

A13 B12

B4

A6

GND

A12 B11

A5

GND

B10

A7

GND

A11

A10

B9

B3

GND

A9 B8

B2

A4

SATA_TXNO

A8 B7

B7

B6 A6

GND

A7 B6

A3

SATA_TXPO

A6 B5

B5 A5

3.3S

A5 B4

B4 A4

3.3S

A4 B3

GND

A3 B2

3.3S

GND

3.3S

GND

GND

12S

GND

A2

B3 A3

A2 B1

B1

B2 A2

A13

12S

GND

12S

GND

12S

GND 3.3A

GND

3.3A

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

B3 A3

A1

A1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

B2 A2

GND

CLK_PCIE_RISER

CLK_PCIE_RISER*

PCIE TXP3

PCIE RXP3

PCIE TXN3

PCIE RXN3

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

BUF PLT RST*

N.C

PCIE WAKE*

SMB DATA

SMB CLK

PEN EXPCI

PG EXPCI

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

B

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Board to Board

J1020

Board to Board

A10

B9

B10

UN32

B13

UN31

A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

USBA+

USBA-

E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4 5 USBA_VCC

USBA+

J1007

USBA-

GND

COM_TXD1

J1002

CC-VI_OP

USB

1 2 3 4 B15

GND

Board to Board

AUDIO VOLM

AUDIO VOLP

GND AUDIO PHNDET

AUDIO MICDET

GND

AUDIO TYPE

N.C N.C

N.C

N.C

A9

B7

GND

ACZ RST*

A8

B6

USB

COM_RXD1

USB

A7

A6 B5

1 2 3 4 5

3.3S

1 2 3 4

GND AUDIO SW

A5 B4

J1015

D

N.C

ACZ SYNC

3.3S

A4 B3

GND N.C

A3 B2

ACZ SDATAOUT

3.3S

ACZ SDATAINO

GND

A2 B1

GND ACZ BITCLK

A1

N.C

12S

3

N.C

SNS_FAN_COM

2

12S

GND

1

E

Device Port HUB PCB

J1017

12S

UN33

GND

B4 A4

5S

B3 A3

CC-VI_CPENB

B2 A2

CC-VI_COUNT

B1 A1

(OPTION) CC-VI I/F Cable

Voice Operation PCB

Voice Guidance PCB

CC-VI CL/BW

123

CC-VI_L/S

F

J1021

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (8/11)

Flash PCB

UN29

Wireless LAN PCB

A

PCI Expansion PCB

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.8 F-10-8

10-10

10-11

8

7

UN68

F

UN37

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

A15

A16 B15

A17 B16

A18 B17

A19 B18

CPLD_TCO

GND

CPLD_TCK

CPLD_TMS

3.3A

N.C

GND

J1004

D

J1000

Board to Board 144p

CSR

Board to Board 144p

144p

144p

C

UN64

UN63

DDR2-SDRAM

Card Reader

A20 B19

ECO_DOUT

COIN_B_CRDY

COIN_C_CRDY

COIN_C_CRDY

COM_TXD2

COM_RXD2

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

EXB_DT3

EXB_DT4

EXB_DT2

EXB_DT5

A15 B14

ECO_DIN

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J1029

GND

UN25

Main Controller PCB 1

J1013

ECO_SCK

B15

ECO_CS

B14

ECO_POW

CPLD_TDI

GND

SATA_PXP0

SATA_RXN0

GND

SATA_TXN0

SATA_TXP0

GND

5V

GND

3.3A

3.3A

INT_SERIRQ

GND

A14 B13

B15 A15

LPC_AD0

CP96

A13 B12

B14 A14

PM_SUS_STAT*

VBAT

A12 B11

B13 A13

LPC_AD1

GND

GND

B10

B12 A12

A11

A10

B9

B11 A11

LPC_FRAME*

SMB_DATA

A9 B8

B10 A10

CLK_PCI_TPM

GND

GND

A9

A8 B7

B9

SMB_CLK

SMB_ALERT*

GND

A7 B6

B8 A8

LPC_AD2

FWH_INIT*

PCI_GNT5*

GND

LPC_AD3

B20 A20

GND

CP178

B19 A19

A7

A6 B5

B7

GND

B18 A18

10 9

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND

B17 A17

11 10 9

A6

A5 B4

B6

DDR2-SDRAM

A14 B13

B16 A16

EXB_DT1

EXB_DT6

A13 B12

B15 A15

EXB_DT0

EXB_DT7

A12 B11

B14 A14

EXB_ADDR0

CS_FRAM*

B10

B13 A13

EXB_ADDR1

EXB_ADDR10

A11

A10

B9

B12 A12

EXB_ADDR2

EXB_OE*

A9 B8

B11 A11

EXB_ADDR3

EXB_ADDR11

A8 B7

B10 A10

EXB_ADDR4

EXB_ADDR9

A7 B6

B9 A9

EXB_ADDR5

EXB_ADDR8

A6 B5

A8

EXB_ADDR6

EXB_ADDR13

A5 B4

A7

EXB_ADDR7

A4 B3

EXB_WE*

A3 B2

A6

EXB_ADDR12

A2 B1

3.3V

A1

EXB_ADDR14

3.3V

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

C

A5

B8

GND

A4

B7

B6

GND

A3

B5

GND

A2

B4

5S

A1

B3

RUF_PLT_RST*

Board to Board

J105

A5

A4 B3

B5

Board to Board

J1027

CT

B4 A4

A3 B2

UN14 Main Controller PCB 2

B2

A2 B1

J1022 J102

B1

GND

A1

USB

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

B3 A3

3.3S

1 2 3 4 J103

A2

3.3S

12V

A1

B2

GND

B1

D

E

TPM PCB

N.C

5 1

7

N.C

UN22 HDD LED PCB

N.C

6

J20

Drv_B_Fail

3

5

Drv_B_Act

2

4

Mirroring Encryption PCB

J48

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

GND

4

Drv_A_Fail

3

UN21

6

Drv_A_Act

7

5V

2

USB

J19

RXPLUSB_H

RXMINUSB_H

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J43

USB

J40 1 2 3 4

1

GND

TXMINUSB_H

TXPLUSB_H

GND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

USB

E

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

5V

GND

12V

GND

RXPLUSA_H

RXMINUSA_H

1 2 3 4

GND

TXMINUSA_H

TXPLUSA_H

GND

5V

GND

GND

12V

1 2 3 4 J41

3

USB

J44

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4

4

HDD1

USB

GND

F

5

UN67

HDD2 J42

6

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

9

GND

10

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (9/11)

B20

(Option)

B

B

or

UN44 FRAM PCB

Serial Interface Kit

A

A

Dsub 9p

Coin Manager

(Option)

(Option)

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.9 F-10-9

10-11

10-12

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

F

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10

F

UN47 Image Analysis PCB (Option)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

USBMDS DN

USBMDS DP

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

PG_MINE

GND

GND

DDI_SVD23

DDI_SVD22

GND

DDI_SVD21

DDI_SVD20

DDI_SVD19

DDI_SVD18

DDI_SVD17

DDI_SVD16

DDI_SVD15

DDI_SVD14

GND

DDI_SVD13

DDI_SVD12

DDI_SVD11

DDI_SVD10

DDI_SVD9

DDI_SVD8

DDI_SVD7

DDI_SVD6

GND

DDI_SVD5

DDI_SVD4

DDI_SVD3

DDI_SVD2

DDI_SVD1

DDI_SVCLK_M_MINE*

GND

1 2 3 4

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

J117

GND

3.3V

J208

GIO_CMD1

Board to Board

GIO_STS1

117p

UN25

Main Controller PCB 1

J203

D

Board to Board

D

E DDI_SVD0

DDI_SVCLK_M_MINE*

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

GND

DDI_SVCLK_MINE

INT_CPLK

INT_MDS

GND

GND

3.3V

GND

12V

E

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

UN14 Main Controller PCB 2

Board to Board EXB_ADDR19

EXB_ADDR20

EXB_ADDR21

EXB_ADDR22

EXB_CS0*

16

EXB_ADDR18

17

EXB_ADDR17

18

EXB_ADDR16

19

EXB_ADDR15

20

EXB_ADDR14

21

EXB_ADDR13

22

EXB_ADDR12

EXB_ADDR8

23

EXB_ADDR9

EXB_ADDR7

24

EXB_ADDR11

EXB_ADDR6

25

EXB_ADDR10

EXB_ADDR5

26

EXB_ADDR4

27

EXB_ADDR3

28

EXB_ADDR2

29

GND

30

EXB_ADDR1

31

GND

32

EXB_ADDR0

33

GND

34

EXB_WE

35

EXB_OE*

36

EXB_DT0

37

EXB_DT1

38

GND

39

EXB_DT2

40

EXB_DT3

41

EXB_DT4

42

EXB_DT5

43

GND

44

EXB_DT6

45

EXB_DT7

46

EXB_DT8

47

EXB_DT9

EXB_DT12

48

GND

EXB_DT13

49

EXB_DT10

EXB_DT14

50

EXB_DT11

3.3V

3.3V

J101

C

EXB_DT15

117p

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (10/11)

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

J201

J207

Board to Board

C

144p

144p

UN65 DDR2-SDRAM

B

B

(Option)

A

A

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.10 F-10-10

10-12

10-13

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

10

To ADF J570

UN14

F

J570A

Main Controller PCB 2

F

J570C

J570B

5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J8133 4

6

3

5

8 7

10 9

12 11

14 13

16 15

18 17

20 19

24

22 21

26 25

23

28 27

32

30 29

31

36

34 33

35

40

38 37

42 41

39

44 43

46 45

48 47

50 49

2 1

H5 Reader Heater (Option)

N N 2 1

J512

COR1

1 2 3 4 5

2 1

J513

H H

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

S13

4

M

5

M14

3

*B

2

B

Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 2

D

1

A

1

*A

2

CVR SENS S2

Copyboard Cover Open/Closed Sensor 1 3

GND

Reader Motor

6

1 2 3 4 5 6

24V

GND

GND

GND

ADF_MCLK

GND

READ_SENS

GND

REG_SENS

ADF_LOAD

ADF_SCLK

ADF_DATA_OUT

GND

GND

CVR SENS S1 3.3V

S12

4 3 2 1

J503

UN4

GND

1

D

CCD Unit HP Sensor 2

J505

HP SENS 3.3V

3

J509

GND

S11

J502

3.3V

1

2

1 2

10 11 12 13 14 15

2

4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3

1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

6

E

MT21

J506

3

DDIS_CPRDY_S

8

GND

5

GND

10

TxOUT3+

7

TxOUT3-

12

GND

14

9

GND

11

TxCLKOUT3+

GND

16

GND

13

TxCLKOUT3-

GND

18

TxOUT2+

20

15

TxOUT2-

17

GND

TxOUT1+

22

24

GND

19

TxOUT1-

21

GND

TxOUT0+

26

TxOUT0-

GND

GND 23

25

28

30

GND

GND

27

DDIS_IMGGET

32

DDIS_SBTMODE

GND

GND

29

31

34

DDIS_PRDY_S

GND

36

DDIS_SRTS

DDIS_SCTS 33

35

38

40

GND

37

DDIS_SCMD

42

GND

GND

39

41

DDIS_SSTS

DDIS_SPO1

44

MD0

46

43

GND

48

GND

45

DDIS_SLIVEWAKE

GND

GND

47

3.3V

GND

50

3.3V

3.3V

DDIS_CPRDY_S

49

ADF_DATA_IN

E

12V

30

28 27

32 31

29

34

36 35

33

40

38 37

42 41

39

44 43

46 45

48 47

1 2 3

1

26 25

23

P

24

22 21

2

20 19

3

18 17

S

16 15

Original Size Sensor 2

S15

14 13

1

12 11

P

10 9

2

8 7

SIZE 1 5V

3

6 5

GND

S

4 3

SIZE 2 5V

S14

J508

2 1

3 2 1

J501

3 2 1

J507

C

GND

1 2 3

Reader Conteroller PCB

Original Size Sensor 1

C

50

J510

49

J504 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

4 3 2 1

24V

GND

12V

GND

CCD_FFC_OUT

GND

12V

12V

12V

GND

GND

GND

6V

6V

6V

6V

CCD_UNIT_JUDGE

GND

GND

EEP_CLK

GND

GND

EEP_CS0

GND

EEP_TX

GND

AF_SIO_DI

EEP_RX

GND

AF_SIO_XCE

GND

AF_SIO_DO

GND

AF_SIO_CLK

GND

LED_PWM

SH_R

GND

RCLK+

RCLK-

GND

RC+

RC-

GND

RB+

RB-

GND

RA+

RA-

GND

GND

CCD_FFC_IN

GND

GND

To Power Supply PCB (J114)

COR20

B

5 4

7 6

9 8

11 10

13 12

15 14

17 16

19 18

21 20

23 22

27

25 24

26

29 28

33

31 30

32

37

35 34

36

39 38

J531

A

UN48 CCD PCB

41 40

43 42

45 44

47 46

49 48

50

5 4 3 2 1

12V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3 2

J532

1

CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 12V

9

8

7

UN51 LED Unit (R)

A

CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1

10

10

UN50 LED Unit (L)

J533

COR21

J534

B COR4

5 4 3 2 1

Appendix > General Circuit Diagram

■■General Circuit Diagram (11/11)

6

5

4

3

2

1

P.11 F-10-11

10-13

10-14

2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1

Appendix > General Timing Chart > 2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1

Appendix > General Timing Chart > 2 Prints, Continuous, Cassette 1

General Timing Chart

Print start PSTBY

PINTR

PRINT

LSTR

PSTBY

Cassette 1 pickup motor (M13) Cassette 1 pickup solenoid (SL1) Main motor (M1) Primary charging bias Laser Developing AC bias Developing DC bias Developing cylinder clutch (CL1) Pre-registration sensor (S5) Registration clutch (CL3) Transfer bias Static eliminator bias Fixing Motor (M2) Fixing Heater 1 (H1) Fixing Heater 2 (H2) Fixing Outlet Sensor (S19) No.1 Delivery Motor (M10) No.1 Delivery Sensor (S21) F-10-12

10-14

Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings

10-15

List of User Mode Device Information Delivery Settings Registering device information in your machine enables you to set the machine to deliver the same device information to other machines that are connected to the same network. This enables you to easily manage multiple machines at the same time. Your machine is capable of both sending and receiving device information, which can be delivered manually and automatically.

parent machine

child machines

child machines

child machines F-10-13

Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings

10-15

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings

10-16

Environment Settings ■■Paper Settings *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item [Paper Settings] [A5R/STMTR Paper Selection] [B5/EXEC Paper Selection] [Paper Type Management Settings]

[Register Envelope Drawer]*1 [Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults] [Register Custom Size]

Default Setting Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Setting Description Paper Source Set: Thin, Plain 1, Plain 2, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Color, Recycled, Pre-Punched, Envelope A5R, STMTR B5, EXEC Details/Edit • Name, Category, Basis Weight, Finish, Type, Color, Adjust Creep Correction Duplicate, Delete ENV.1:No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, DL, ISO-C5 ENV.2:No. 10 (COM10), Monarch, DL, ISO-C5 On, Off • Register(Paper Size/Paper Type) S1 to S5 : Register/Edit, Rename Delete

Plain 2 (17-24 lb bond) STMTR EXEC -

Yes

No

No No Yes

No No No

Yes No. 10 (COM10) No

No No

Off

No

No

-

No No

Yes No T-10-3

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings

10-16

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings

10-17

■■Display Settings *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. Item [Default Screen after Startup/Restoration]

[Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel)]

[Copy Screen Display Settings] [Display Fax Function]*1 [Store Location Display Settings]

[Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off] [Language/Keyboard Switch] [Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature] [Display Remaining Paper Message] [No. of Copies/Job Duration Status] [Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area] [Paper Type Selection Screen Priority] [mm/Inch Entry Switch] [ID/User Name Display On/Off]

Default Setting

Setting Description Main Menu, Quick Menu, Copy, Scan and Send, Fax*1, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/ I-Fax Inbox, Secure Print, Web Access*1, Workflow Composer*1, Scanner, Print Server*1, Scan Lock Analyzer*1, Tutorial, WSD Scan Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off Default Status Type: Copy/Print, Send, Receive, Store, Consmbls./Others Status/Log: Job Status, Log Details (Copy/Print, Job Status): Copy, Print Details (Send, Job Status): Send, Fax*1 Details (Receive, Job Status): Fax*1, Forward Details (Copy/Print, Log): Copy, Printer, Local Print, Cascade Copy; RX, Received Job Print, Print Report, Cascade Copy*1 Details (Send, Log): Send, Fax*1 Details (Receive, Log): Receive, Fax*1 Regular Copy, Express Copy On, Off Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function*1: On, Off Mail Box: On, Off Advanced Box/Network: On, Off Memory Media: On, Off On, Off Language, Keyboard Layout On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off Simple, Detailed mm, Inch On, Off

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Main Menu

No

No

Off Copy/Print Job Status -

No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

Regular Copy On Off On On Off Off Off On On On Simple Inch On

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No Yes No No No No Yes No T-10-4

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings

10-17

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings

10-18

■■Timer/Energy Settings *1 It is recommended that you use the default setting for this item. Item [Adjust Time] [Date/Time Settings]

Default Setting

Setting Description 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments Date and Time Setting (12 digit number) Time Zone: GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 Daylight Saving Time: On, Off Start Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23)) End Date (Month/Day/Time (0 to 23))

[Time Format] [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] [Auto Reset Time] [Restrict Auto Reset Time] [Function After Auto Reset] [Auto Sleep Time] [Sleep Mode Energy Use] [Auto Sleep Weekly Timer] [Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings]

24 Hour, 12 Hour On, Off 0 min=Off, 10 to 50 seconds in 10 second increments, 1 to 9 minutes in one minute increments On, Off Initial Function, Selected Function 10 secs, 1, 2, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 mins, 1 hour, 90min., 2, 3, 4 hours Low, High Sun to Sat, 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments

GMT -05:00 Off March, 2nd, Sunday, 2:00 November, 1st, Sunday, 2:00 12 Hour On 2 mins Off Initial Function 1 min*1 Low -

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available No Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes T-10-5

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings

10-18

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-19

■■Network If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI. If you are using a NetWare or AppleTalk network, you must use the TCP/IP protocol if you want to specify settings using software other than the control panel of the machine. *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the PS Printer Kit is activated. Item Output Report [Output Report] Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes [Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes] TCP/IP Settings: IPv4 Settings [IPv4 Settings] [Use IPv4] [IP Address Settings]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Yes, No

-

Yes

No

On, Off

Off

No

Yes

On, Off IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DHCP: On, Off RARP: On, Off BOOTP: On, Off Acquire Host Name: On, Off DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off IP Address

On 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 On Off Off On Off 0.0.0.0

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No

On, Off Use Stateless Address: On, Off Use Manual Address: On, Off Manual Address (IPv6 Address (39 characters maximum)) Prefix Length: 0 to 128 Default Router Addr. (39 characters maximum) On, Off IPv6 Address (39 characters maximum) Host Name

Off On Off 64 Off -

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

No No No No No No Yes No No

[DNS Host/Domain Name Settings]

Primary DNS Server (IP Address) Secondary DNS Server (IP Address) Host Name

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

[DNS Dynamic Update Settings]

Domain Name DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.) (NULL) Off

Yes Yes

No No

[DHCP Option Settings] [PING Command] TCP/IP Settings: IPv6 Settings [IPv6 Settings] [Use IPv6] [Stateless Address Settings] [Manual Address Settings]

[Use DHCPv6] [PING Command] TCP/IP Settings: DNS Settings [DNS Settings] [DNS Server Address Settings]

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-19

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item TCP/IP Settings: DNS Settings [DNS Settings] [DNS Server Address Settings]

[DNS Host/Domain Name Settings]

[DNS Dynamic Update Settings]

TCP/IP Settings [WINS Settings]

[LPD Print Settings] [RAW Print Settings] [SNTP Settings]

[FTP Print Settings]

[WSD Settings]

[Use FTP PASV Mode] [IPP Print Settings]

[Multicast Discovery Settings] [Use HTTP] [Use WebDAV Server] [SSL Settings]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Primary DNS Server (IPv6 Address) (39 characters maximum) Secondary DNS Server (IPv6 Address) (39 characters maximum) Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4: On, Off Host Name

10-20

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

-

Yes

No

-

Yes

No

Yes Yes

No No

Domain Name DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off Register Stateless Address: On, Off Register Manual Address: On, Off Register Stateful Address: On, Off

Off Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.) Off Off Off Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

WINS Resolution: On, Off WINS Server Address (IP Address) Node Type: Auto (display only) Scope ID On, Off LPD Banner Page*1: On, Off On, Off Bidirectional Communication: On, Off Use SNTP: On, Off Polling Interval: 1 to 48 hrs, in one hour increments NTP Server Address (IP Address or Host Name) Check NTP Server Use FTP Printing: On, Off User Name Password Use WSD: On, Off Use WSD Browsing: On, Off Use WSD Scan Function: On, Off On, Off On, Off Use SSL: On, Off Use Authentication: On, Off User Name Password Response: On, Off Scope Name On, Off On, Off Settings that use SSL

Off 0.0.0.0 (NULL) On Off On Off Off 24 (NULL) Off guest 7654321 Off Off Off Off Off Off On guest 7654321 On default On Off -

Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No Yes Yes No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-20

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item [Key and Certificate]

[Proxy Settings]

[Set Authentication]

[Confirm Dept. ID PIN] IPSec Settings [IPSec Settings] <Use IPSec> [Policy On/Off] [Reg.] [Selector Settings]

Default Setting

Setting Description

10-21

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Set as the Default Key Certificate Details(Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.) Display Use Location (Key and Certificate) Use Proxy: On, Off Server Address (IP Address or FQDN) Port Number: 1 to 65535 Use Proxy within the Same Domain: On, Off Use Proxy Auth.: On, Off User Name Password On, Off

-

Yes Yes

No No

Off (NULL) 80 Off Off (NULL) (NULL) Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No

On, Off Allow, Reject On, Off Policy Name (24 characters maximum) Local Address(All IP Addresses, IPv4 Address, IPv6 Address, IPv4 Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual Settings) • IPv4 Manual Settings(Single Address, Address Range(First Address, Last Address), Subnet Settings(Address, Subnet Mask)) • IPv6 Manual Settings (Single Address(Address), Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length)) Prefix Length (0 to 128) • Remote Address(All IP Addresses, All IPv4 Addresses, All IPv6 Addresses, IPv4 Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual Settings) • IPv4 Manual Settings(Single Address, Address Range(First Address, Last Address), Subnet Settings(Address, Subnet Mask)) • IPv6 Manual Settings (Single Address(Address), Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length)) Prefix Length (0 to 128) Port (Specify by Port Number, Specify by Service Name) • Specify by Port Number(Local Port(All Ports, Single Port), Remote Port(All Ports, Single Port)) Single Port (1 to 65535) • Specify by Service Name Service On/Off: On, Off

Off Allow On (NULL) All IP Addresses

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

Single Address

Yes

No

Single Address

Yes

No

64 All IP Addresses

Yes Yes

No No

Single Address

Yes

No

Single Address

Yes

No

64 Specify by Port Number All Ports

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

0 Off

Yes Yes

No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-21

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item [IKE Settings]

[IPSec Network Settings]

[Edit] [Delete] [Print List]

Default Setting

Setting Description IKE Mode: Main, Aggressive Authentication Method: Pre-Shared Key Method (Shared Key), Digital Sig. Method (Key and Certificate) • Key and Certificate: Set as the Default Key Certificate Details(Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.) Display Use Location (Key and Certificate) Auth./Encryption Algorithm(Auto, Manual Settings) Auth./Encryption Algorithm: Manual Settings • Authentication SHA1: On, Off SHA2: On, Off • Encryption 3DES-CBC: On, Off AES-CBC: On, Off • DH Group: Group1 (768), Group2 (1024), Group14 (2048), ECDH-P256, ECDH-P384 Validity Time: On, Off • On: (1 to 65535 mins) Validity Size: On, Off • On: (1 to 65535 MB) PFS: On, Off Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto, Manual Settings Auth./Encryption Algorithm: Manual Settings(ESP, ESP (AES-GCM), AH (SHA1)) ESP Settings: • ESP Auth. SHA1: On, Off NULL: On, Off • ESP Encryption 3DES-CBC: On, Off AES-CBC: On, Off NULL: On, Off ESP (AES-GCM) Settings: None AH (SHA1) Settings: None Connect. Mode Transport (display only) Yes, No

10-22

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Main Pre-Shared Key Method

Yes Yes

No No

-

Yes

No

-

Yes

No

Auto On

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

On On

Yes Yes

No No

Off Group2 (1024)

Yes Yes

No No

On

Yes

No

480 mins Off

Yes Yes

No No

0 MB Off Auto

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

ESP On

Yes Yes

No No

Off On

Yes Yes

No No

Off Off -

Yes Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No No

-

Yes Yes

No No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-22

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item NetWare Settings [NetWare Settings] <Use NetWare> <Packet Signature> [Bindery PServer]

[RPrinter]

[NDS PServer]

[NPrinter]

AppleTalk Settings [AppleTalk Settings] <Use AppleTalk> [Service Name] [Zone] *2

Setting Description

Default Setting

10-23

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

On, Off Auto Detect, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet SNAP Auto (display only) Auto (display only) Bindery PServer, RPrinter, NDS PServer, NPrinter Auto (display only) Print Server Name File Server Name Print Server Password Printer Number: 0 to 15 Polling Interval: 1 to 15 sec Printer Form: 0 to 255 Buffer Size: 1 to 20 KB Service Mode: Minimize form changes within print queues, Minimize form changes across print queues, Change forms as needed, Service only currently mounted form Print Server Name File Server Name Printer Number: 0 to 15 Print Server Name Tree Name Context Name Print Server Password Printer Number: 0 to 254 Polling Interval: 1 to 255 sec Printer Form: 0 to 255 Buffer Size: 3 to 20 KB Service Mode: Minimize form changes within print queues, Minimize form changes across print queues, Change forms as needed, Service only currently mounted form Print Server Name Tree Name Context Name Printer Number: 0 to 254

Off Auto Detect NDS PServer (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) 0 5 sec 0 20 KB Minimize form changes within print queues (NULL) (NULL) 0 (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) 0 5 sec 0 20 KB Minimize form changes within print queues (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) 0

Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

On, Off Phase 2 (display only) Name Zone Both, Spool, Direct

Off Device Name * Both

Yes No Yes Yes Yes

Yes No No No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-23

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item SMB Server Settings [SMB Server Settings] <Use SMB Server> [Server Name] [Workgroup Name] [Comment] [Set SMB Printer] [SMB Auth. Settings]

SNMP Settings [SNMP Settings] <Use SNMP v. 1> [Dedicated Comm. Settings] [Set Community Name 1]

[Set Community Name 2]

<Use SNMP v. 3> [User Settings]

[Context Settings]

[Reject SNMP Packets While in Sleep Mode]

Default Setting

Setting Description

On, Off Server Name Workgroup Name Comment On, Off Use SMB: On, Off Printer Name Use SMB Authentication: On, Off Authentication Type: • NTLMv1: On, Off • NTLMv2: On, Off

On, Off Dedicated Community: On, Off MIB Access Permission: Read/Write, Read Only Community Name 1: On, Off MIB Access Permission: Read/Write, Read Only Community Name Community Name 2: On, Off MIB Access Permission: Read/Write, Read Only Community Name On, Off User On/Off: On, Off Register (User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5, SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm (DES, AES), Encryption Password) Details/Edit (User Name, MIB Access Permis. (Read/Write, Read Only), Security Settings (Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes, Auth. Yes/Encry. No, Auth. No/Encrypt. No), Authent. Algorithm (MD5, SHA1), Authent. Password, Encryption Algorithm (DES, AES), Encryption Password) Delete Register (Context name) Edit (Context name) Delete On, Off On, Off

10-24

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Off Canon****** ("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address.) WORKGROUP (NULL) Off Off PRINTER Off Off

Yes Yes

No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No

Off

Yes

No

On On Read Only On Read Only public Off Read Only public2 Off On -

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No No No No No No No No No No No

-

Yes

No

Off Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No Yes No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-24

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item Dedicated Port Settings [Dedicated Port Settings] Use Spool Function Startup Settings [Startup Settings] Ethernet Driver Settings [Ethernet Driver Settings] <Ethernet Type> <MAC Address> IEEE802.1X Settings [IEEE802.1X Settings] <Use IEEE802.1X> [Login Name] <Use TLS> [Key and Certificate]

<Use TTLS> <Use PEAP> [User Name] [Password] [Same User Name as Login Name] Firewall Settings: IPv4 Address Filter [IPv4 Address Filter] [TX Filter]

[RX Filter]

Default Setting

Setting Description

10-25

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

On, Off

On

Yes

Yes

0 to 300 sec

0 sec

Yes

No

On, Off • Off: Half Duplex, Full Duplex • Off: 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T Display only

On Half Duplex 10 Base-T -

Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No

On, Off Login Name On, Off Set as the Default Key Certificate Details (Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.) On, Off • TTLS Settings (TTLS Protocol): MSCHAPv2, PAP On, Off Name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication Password of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication On, Off

Off (NULL) Off -

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

Off MSCHAPv2 Off (NULL) (NULL) On

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No

Use Filter: On, Off Default Policy: Allow, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Edit, Delete • Register Single Address, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length) Prefix Length (0 to 32) Use Filter: On, Off Default Policy: Allow, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Details/Edit, Delete • Register Single Address, Address Range (First Address, Last Address), Specify Prefix (Address, Prefix Length), Port Number (Do Not Specify, Specify) Prefix Length (0 to 32)

Off Allow Single Address

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Off Allow Single Address

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

-

Yes

No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-25

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

Item Firewall Settings: IPv6 Address Filter [IPv6 Address Filter] [TX Filter]

[RX Filter]

Firewall Settings: MAC Address Filter [MAC Address Filter] [TX Filter]

[RX Filter]

Firewall Settings: IP Address Block Log [IP Address Block Log]

Default Setting

Setting Description

10-26

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Use Filter: On, Off Default Policy: Allow, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv4 addresses), Edit, Delete • Register Single Address (Address), Specify Prefix (IPv6 Prefix, Prefix Length) Prefix Length (0 to 128) Use Filter: On, Off Default Policy: Allow, Reject Register (Up to 16 IPv6 addresses), Details/Edit, Delete • Register Single Address (Address), Specify Prefix (IPv6 Prefix, Prefix Length), Port Number (Do Not Specify, Specify) Prefix Length (0 to 128)

Off Allow Single Address

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Off Allow Single Address

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

-

Yes

No

Use Filter: On, Off Default Policy: Allow, Reject Register (Up to 100 Mac addresses), Edit, Delete Use Filter: On, Off Default Policy: Allow, Reject Register (Up to 100 Mac addresses), Edit, Delete

Off Allow Off Allow -

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No

Time, Type, IP Address, Port Number, Result

-

Yes

No T-10-6

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network

10-26

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility

10-27

■■External Interface Item [USB Settings] [Use as USB Device] [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device] [Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device]

Setting Description On, Off On, Off On, Off

Default Setting

On Off Off

Can be set in Remote UI Yes Yes Yes

Device Information Delivery Available Yes Yes Yes T-10-7

■■Accessibility Item [Key Repetition Settings] [Reversed Display (Color)]

Setting Description Standard, Slightly Slow, Slow On, Off

Default Setting Standard Off

Can be set in Remote UI No No

Device Information Delivery Available No No T-10-8

Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility

10-27

Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance

10-28

Adjustment/Maintenance ■■Adjust Image Quality Item [Auto Adjust Gradation] [Correct Density] [Fine Adjust Zoom]

Default Setting

Setting Description Paper Select, Start Printing key Black & White Scan for Copy/Scan and Store (Mail Box), Black & White Scan for Send/Scan and Store (Other Than Mail Box), Color Scan for Send/Scan and Store: 9 levels each X: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1% increments Y: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1% increments

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

5 levels

No No

No No

X: 0% Y: 0%

No

No T-10-9

■■Adjust Action *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item [Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning]*1 [Change Fold/Stitch Position]*1 [Adjust Fold Position]*1

Default Setting

Setting Description Start key -2.00 mm to +2.00 mm, in 0.25 mm increments -2.00 mm to +2.00 mm, in 0.25 mm increments

0.00 mm 0.00 mm

Can be set in Remote UI No No No

Device Information Delivery Available No No No T-10-10

■■Maintenance *1 If you are using the imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4235/4225, this item appears only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. Item [Clean Feeder]*1

Default Setting

Setting Description Start key

-

Can be set in Remote UI No

Device Information Delivery Available No T-10-11

Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance

10-28

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-29

Function Settings ■■Common *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. *2 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays is the same for the machine that is sending device information and the device receiving the information. *3 Indicates items with no serial number or ID/user name. *4 Indicates items with no serial number, ID/user name, or Forced Doc. Scan Lock settings. *5 Indicates items with no serial number, ID/user name, or Driver Doc. Scan Lock settings. *6 If you are using the imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4235/4225, this item appears only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. Item [Paper Feed Settings] [Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off]

[Feed Method Switch] [Suspended Job Timeout] [Paper Output Settings] [Output Tray Settings]*1

[Offset Jobs]*1 [Job Separator Between Jobs]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Copy, Printer, Access Stored Files, Receive/Fax*1, Other • MP Tray: On, Off • Other: On, Off Copy: Consider Paper Type: On, Off MP Tray and Other: Speed Priority, Print Side Priority On, Off 0 to 999 mins

Off On On Speed Priority Off 5 mins

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No Yes Yes

Tray A: Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer, Receive, Fax*1, Other Tray B: Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer, Receive, Fax*1, Other Tray C: Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer, Receive, Fax*1, Other Tray Home Position: Tray A, Tray B, Off

If the Inner 2Way Tray-H1, or Inner Finisher-D1 and Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 are attached: Tray A: 1 Copy, 1 Access Stored Files, 1 Printer, 2 Receive, 2 Fax, 2 Other Tray B: 2 Copy, 2 Access Stored Files, 2 Printer, 1 Receive, 1 Fax, 1 Other If the Staple Finisher-G1, or Booklet Finisher-G1 and Buffer Pass Unit-H1 are attached: Tray A: 1 Copy, 1 Access Stored Files, 1 Printer Tray B: 2 Copy, 2 Access Stored Files, 2 Printer Tray C: 1 Receive, 1 Fax, 1 Other Tray Home Position: Tray A Off Off Off 10 On

Yes

No*2

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes No No No No

1 2 3

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

On, Off On, Off Change (Select Paper Source) [Job Separator Between Copies] On, Off Copies (1 to 9999) Change (Select Paper Source) [Different Paper Sizes for Output Tray] On, Off [Print Settings] [Print Priority] Copy: 1, 2, 3 Printer: 1, 2, 3 Access Strd File, Receive/Fax*1, Other: 1, 2, 3

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-29

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

Item [Local Print Default Settings]

Default Setting

Setting Description Select Paper: Auto, Select Paper Source No. of Prints: 1 to 9999 Finishing*1: • If no finisher is attached and only the Inner 2Way Tray-H1 is attached: No Settings, Collate (Page Order), Group (Same Pages), Rotate 90 Degrees • If the Inner Finisher-D1 is attached: No Settings, Collate (Page Order), Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner (Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), Double (Left, Right)), Offset • If the Inner Finisher-D1 and inner puncher are attached: No Settings, Collate (Page Order), Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner (Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), Double (Left, Right)), Offset, Hole Punch • If the Staple Finisher-G1 and Buffer Pass Unit-H1 are attached: No Settings, Collate (Page Order), Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner (Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), Double (Left, Right)), Offset • If the Staple Finisher-G1, Buffer Pass Unit-H1, and extermal puncher are attached: No Settings, Collate (Page Order), Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner (Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), Double (Left, Right)), Offset, Hole Punch • If the Booklet Finisher-G1 and Buffer Pass Unit-H1 are attached: No Settings, Collate (Page Order), Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner (Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right)), Double (Left, Right)), Offset, Saddle Fold, Adjust Fold Position • If the Booklet Finisher-G1, Buffer Pass Unit-H1, and external puncher are attached: No Settings, Collate (Page Order), Group (Same Pages), Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Offset, Face Up/Face Down, Saddle Fold, Adjust Fold Position 2-Sided Printing: On, Off On: Book Type, Calendar Type Delete File After Printing: On, Off Merge Files and Print: On, Off 2-Sided Printing: On, Off Register (Solid/Transparent), Delete, Check Print, Details Register, Edit, Delete

[Output Report Default Settings] [Register Form] [Register Characters for Page No./ Watermark] [Copy Set Numbering Option Settings] On, Off Select Option • ID/User Name: On, Off • Date: On, Off • Text: On, Off Copy Set Numbering Option Settings: Date Settings (mm/dd/yyyy, yyyy/ mm/dd, dd/mm/yyyy, yyyy.mm.dd, mm.dd.yyyy, dd.mm.yyyy) Set Characters Alignment Settings (Align Left, Align Center, Align Right)

10-30

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Auto 1 Collate + Other

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

Off Book Type Off Off Off -

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No Yes Yes Yes

Off Off

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

dd/mm/yyyy

Yes

Yes

Align Left

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-30

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

Item

Default Setting

Setting Description

[Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock]*1 [Forced Secure Watermark/Doc. Scan When Using TL Code: Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer: Do Not Set, Lock] Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock When Using QR Code: Copy, Access Stored Files, Printer: Do Not Set, Force Secure Watermark, Forced Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. + Scan Lock [Printer Driver Watermark/Doc. Scan When Using TL Code: Do Not Set, Driver Secure Watermark, Driver Doc. Lock] Scan Lock When Using QR Code: Do Not Set, Driver Secure Watermark, Driver Doc. Scan Lock, Sec. Water. + Scan Lock [Adjust Background/Character Sample Print Contrast] Relative Contrast: (-7 to +7) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235) Relative Contrast: (-7 to +7) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4225) Print Settings Background Pattern: None, Arabesque, Fans, Polka Dots, Stars, Mesh, Clouds, Cherry Blossoms, Leaves Print Settings Size: Small (36 points), Medium (54 points), Large (72 points) Print Settings Print Vertically: On, Off Print Settings White Letters on Colored Bkg.: On, Off Initialize Standard Value Set.: (1 to 64) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235) Standard Value Set.: (1 to 64) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4225) Latent Area Density: (1 to 36) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235) Latent Area Density: (1 to 36) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4225) [Adjust TL Code] Dot Size: (1 to 7) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4251/4245/4235) Dot Size: (1 to 7) (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4225) Dot Density: Standard, Rough Initialize [QR Code Print Position] Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right

10-31

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

Do Not Set

Yes

Yes*3

Do Not Set

Yes

Yes*4

Do Not Set

Yes

Yes*3

Do Not Set

Yes

Yes*5

0

No No

No No

1

No

No

Fans

No

No

54 points

No

No

Off

No

No

On

No

No

12

No No

No No

8

No

No

6

No

No

5

No

No

4

No

No

3

No

No

Standard Top Right

No No Yes

Yes No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-31

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

Item [Scan Settings] [Feeder Jam Recovery Method]*6 [LTRR/STMT Original Selection] [Remote Scan Gamma Value] [Auto Online] [Auto Offline] [Generate File] [High Compression Image Quality Level] [OCR (Text Searchable) Settings] [Trace & Smooth Settings]*1

[OOXML Settings]

[Specify Minimum PDF Version] [Format PDF to PDF/A] [Optimize PDF for Web] [256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF]*1 [Rights Management Server Settings]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Device Information Remote UI Delivery Available

From 1st Page, From Suspnd. Original Select Manually, Use LTRR Format, Use STMT Format Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2 On, Off On, Off

From 1st Page Use LTRR Format Gamma 1.8 Off Off

Yes Yes Yes No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Image Level in Text Mode: Data Size Priority, Normal, Quality Priority Image Level in Text Mode: Data Size Priority, Normal, Quality Priority Smart Scan: On, Off No. of OCR File Name Characters: 1 to 24 Outline Graphics: On, Off Graphics Recognition Level: Normal, Moderate, High Background Image Level: Data Size Priority, Normal, Quality Priority Background Image Level: Quality Priority, Standard, Data Size Priority Color Image Recognition Level: High, Standard, Do Not Recognize Color Image Line Width Recognition: On, Off Do Not Specify, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7 On, Off On, Off Acrobat 9.0 or Equivalent, Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent

Normal Normal On 24 Char On Normal Normal Standard Standard On Do Not Specify Off Off Acrobat 10.0 or Equivalent

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No

(NULL) (NULL) (NULL) Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

Use TL Code On Cancel Job Off A Mode (Standard) Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No

Device Settings

Yes

No

Regist. Info. for Each User

Yes

No

Standard

Yes

No

Server URL User Name Password Use Password for Each User: On, Off [Document Scan Lock Operational Settings]*1 [Use Document Scan Lock] Use TL Code, Use QR Code, Do not use [Document Scan Lock TL Code Scan Job Restriction: On, Off Settings] Multiple Embedded Information Action: Continue Job, Cancel Job Restrict Functions Affecting Doc. Scan Lock: On, Off [Document Scan Lock QR Code Scan Job Restriction: A Mode (Standard), B Mode (Secured), Off Settings] Restrict Functions Affecting Doc. Scan Lock: On, Off [Set Authentication Method] [Info. Used for LDAP Server Device Settings, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User Authentication] [Info. Used for SMTP Server Device Settings, Regist. Info. for Each User Authentication] [Info. Used for File TX/Browsing Auth.] Standard, Device Login Auth. Info., Regist. Info. for Each User

10-32

T-10-12

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common

10-32

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

10-33

■■Copy Item [Register/Edit Favorite Settings] [Change Default Settings] [Register Options Shortcuts]

[Register Options Shortcuts] (Express Copy) [Auto Collate] [Auto Orientation] [Photo Printout Mode] [Register Remote Device for Cascade Copy] [Cascade Copy Communication Timeout]

Setting Description M1 to M9: Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content Register, Initialize Shortcut 1: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 2: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 3: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 4: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 5: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 1 to 6: Each mode, Unassigned On, Off On, Off On, Off Register (Up to seven printers), Details, Delete 5 to 30 seconds

Default Setting Finishing 2-Sided Density Original Type Unassigned Unassigned On On Off 30 seconds

Can be set in Remote UI No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No

Device Information Delivery Available No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No Yes T-10-13

■■Printer *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use or the appropriate setting is specified. *2 PCL Printer only. *3 PS Printer only. *4 Settings are applicable only for the Imaging mode of Direct Print. *5 XPS Direct Print Printer only. Item

Default Setting

Setting Description

Output Report PCL*1 Configuration Page Yes, No Font List Yes, No PS*1 Configuration Page Yes, No Font List Yes, No Common Settings (Printer Settings > Custom Settings) [Copies] 1 to 9999 [2-Sided Printing] On, Off [Paper Feed] [Default Paper Size] Letter, Legal, A4, A3, A5, B4, B5, 11x17, Statement, Executive, Env. No. 10, Envelope ISO-C5, Envelope DL, Envelope Monarch, Env. NAGAGATA 3, Env. YOGATANAGA3, Env. KAKUGATA 2 [Default Paper Type] Thin, Plain 1, Plain 2, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Heavy 3, Heavy 4, Color, Recycled, Pre-Punched, Transparency, Tracing, Labels, Bond, Envelope [Paper Size Override] On, Off [Paper Output]

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

-

Yes Yes

No No

-

Yes Yes

No No

1 Off

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Letter

Yes

No

Plain 2

Yes

No

Off

Yes

Yes

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

10-33

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

Item [Finishing]

[Punch] [Print Quality] [Image Refinement] [Density]*1 [Density (Fine Adjust)]*1

[Toner Save] [Line Refinement] [Horizontal Line Refinement] [Vertical Line Refinement] [Resolution] [Layout] [Binding Location] [Gutter] [Offset Short Edge (Front)] [Offset Long Edge (Front)] [Offset Short Edge (Back)] [Offset Long Edge (Back)] [Auto Error Skip] [Secure Print Delete Time] [Timeout] [Print After Completing RIP] [Booklet] [Saddle Stitch]*1 [Creep Correction]*1 [Transparency Interleaving]*1 [Copy Set Numbering] [Copy Set Numbering] [Print Position]*1 [Starting Number]*1 [Number Size]*1 [Density]*1 [Number Position Vertical]*1 [Number Position Horizontal]*1 [Personality]*1 [Mode Priority]*1

Setting Description

Default Setting

Can be set in Remote UI

10-34

Device Information Delivery Available

Off, Collate, Group, Rotate+Collate, Rotate+Group, Offset+Collate, Offset+Group, Staple+Collate, Group Staple Position (Staple+Collate): Corner (Upper-L), Double (Top), Corner (Upper-R), Double (Right), Corner (Lower-R), Double (Bottom), Corner (Lower-L), Double (Left) Staple Position (Staple+Group): Grp Upp L-Corner, Grp Double (Top), Grp Upp R-Corner, Grp Double (R), Grp Lwr R-Corner, Grp Double (Btm), Grp Lwr L-Corner, Grp Double (L) Off, Top, Bottom, Left, Right Off

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

On, Off -8 to 8 High:-8 to 8 Medium:-8 to 8 Low:-8 to 8 On, Off On, Off Off, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4 Off, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4 1200 dpi, 600 dpi

On 0 0

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Off Off Off Level 1 600 dpi

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Long Edge, Short Edge -1.90 to +1.90 inches -2.00 to +2.00 inches -2.00 to +2.00 inches -2.00 to +2.00 inches -2.00 to +2.00 inches On, Off 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours Timeout (5 to 300 seconds), Off On, Off Off, Left Opening, Right Opening On, Off Off, Auto, Correction Width Off, Blank, Printed

Long Edge 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Off 1 hour 15 seconds Off Off Off Off Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

On, Off 5 Locations, Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right, Full Surface 1 to 9999 [Small(12 point)], [Medium(24 point)], [Large(36 point)] 1 to 5 -5/16 to +5/16 inches -5/16 to +5/16 inches Auto, PS, PCL, Imaging, PDF, XPS None, PS, PCL, PDF, XPS

Off 5 Locations 1 Large(36 point) 3 0 0 Auto None

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

10-34

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

Item

Default Setting

Setting Description

[Initialize] Yes, No UFR II Settings (Printer Settings > Custom Settings > UFR II) [Halftones] Text: Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Graphics: Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Image: Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution [Paper Save] On, Off PCL Settings (Printer Settings > Custom Settings > PCL) *2 [Paper Save] On, Off [Orientation] Portrait, Landscape [Font Number] 0 to 104 [Point Size]*1 4.00 to 999.75 point [Pitch]*1 0.44 to 99.99 cpi [Form Lines] 5 to 128 lines [Character Code] ARABIC8, DESKTOP, GREEK8, HEBREW7, HEBREW8, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOCYR, ISOGRK, ISOHEB, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775, PC8, PC850, PC851, PC852, PC862, PC864, PC866, PC8DN, PC8GRK, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINARB, WINBALT, WINCYR, WINGRK, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5 [Custom Paper] On, Off [Unit of Measure]*1 Millimeters, Inches [X dimension]*1 5.82 inches to 24.80 inches [Y dimension]*1 3.89 inches to 11.69 inches [Append CR to LF] Yes, No [Enlarge A4 Print Width] On, Off [Halftones] Text: Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Graphics: Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Image: Color Tone, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution [BarDIMM] Enable, Disable [FreeScape]*1 Off, ~, ", #, $, /, \, ?, {, }, | PS Settings (Printer Settings > Custom Settings > PS) *3 [Job Timeout] 0 to 3600 seconds [Print PS Errors] On, Off [Halftones] Text: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Graphics: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Image: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution [Grayscale Conversion]*1 sRGB, NTSC, Uniform RGB [Dot Gain Adjustment] -10%, -5%, Standard, +5%, +10% Imaging Settings (Printer Settings > Custom Settings > Imaging) *4 [Image Orientation] Auto, Vertical, Horizontal [Zoom Mode] Off, Auto [Print Position] Auto, Center, Top Left [Show Warnings] On, Off [Enlarge Print Area] On, Off [Halftones] Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution

Can be set in Remote UI

10-35

Device Information Delivery Available

-

No

Yes

Resolution Color Tone Color Tone On

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Off Portrait 0 12.00 point 10.00 cpi 60 lines PC8

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No No No No Yes

Off Inches 17.00 inches 11.69 inches No Off Resolution Color Tone Color Tone Disable ~

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

0 Off Resolution Resolution Resolution NTSC Standard

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes No

Auto Off Auto On Off Gradation

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

10-35

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

Item

Default Setting

Setting Description

[Grayscale Conversion]*1 sRGB, NTSC, Uniform RGB PDF Settings (Printer Settings > Custom Settings > PDF) *3 [Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Size] On, Off [Enlarge Print Area] On, Off [N on 1] Off, 2 on 1, 4 on 1, 6 on 1, 8 on 1, 9 on 1, 16 on 1 [Comment Print] Off, Auto [Halftones] Text: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Graphics: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Image: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution [Grayscale Conversion]*1 sRGB, NTSC, Uniform RGB [Dot Gain Adjustment] -10%, -5%, Standard, +5%, +10% XPS Settings (Printer Settings > Custom Settings > XPS) *5 [Halftones] Text: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Graphics: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution Image: Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution [Grayscale Conversion]*1 Text: sRGB, NTSC, Uniform RGB Graphics: sRGB, NTSC, Uniform RGB Image: sRGB, NTSC, Uniform RGB Utility Settings (Printer Settings > Utility) [Initialize PCL Hard Disk]*1 Yes, No [Initialize PS Hard Disk]*1 Yes, No [Reset Printer] Yes, No Printer Menu [Restrict Printer Jobs] On, Off When On is selected: • Select Jobs to Allow: Rsrvd Jobs, Rsrvd Jobs + Secure Print [PDL Selection (Plug-n-Play)] UFR II, PCL5e*1, PCL6*1, PS3*1, Fax*1, UFR II (XPS)

Can be set in Remote UI

10-36

Device Information Delivery Available

NTSC

Yes

Yes

Off Off Off Auto Resolution Resolution Resolution NTSC Standard

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes No

Resolution Resolution Resolution sRGB sRGB sRGB

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

No No No

No No No

Off Rsrvd Jobs

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

UFR II

Yes

No T-10-14

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer

10-36

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-37

■■Send *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use. *2 If you are using the imageRUNNER ADVANCE 4235/4225, this item appears only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. *3 Indicates item that is not delivered as device information. Details/Edit, Delete *4 Displays according to the number of lines set in [No. of TX Lines]. Item [Output Report] [TX/RX User Data List] [Fax User Data List]*1 [Common Settings] [Register Favorite Settings]

[Edit Favorite Settings] [Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings] [Default Screen] [Change Default Settings] [Register Options Shortcuts] [TX Report] [Communication Management Report]

[TX Terminal ID]

[Delete Failed TX Jobs] [Retry Times] [Data Compression Ratio] [YCbCr TX Gamma Value] [Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX] [Confirm SSL Certificate for WebDAV TX]

[Limit New Destination]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes, No Yes, No

-

Yes Yes

No No

Checking Settings, Location to Register Button: M1 to M18 Show Comments: On, Off Name, Comment Delete, Check Content, Rename (Name, Comment): M1 to M18 Show Comments: On, Off On, Off Standard, One-Touch, Favorite Settings, Address Book Register, Initialize Shortcut 1: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 2: Each mode, Unassigned For Error Only, On, Off Report with TX Image: On, Off Auto Print (100 Transmissions): On, Off Specify Print Time: On, Off Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59 Send/Receive Separate: On, Off TX Terminal ID: Print, Do Not Print Print Position: Inside, Outside Display Destination Unit Name: On, Off Telephone # Mark*1: Fax, TEL On, Off 0 to 5 times High Ratio, Normal, Low Ratio Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2 On, Off On, Off Add Items to Verify CN: On, Off Fax: On, Off E-Mail: On, Off I-Fax: On, Off File: On, Off

-

No

Yes

Off Off On Standard 2-Sided Original*2 Different Size Originals*2 For Error Only On On Off 0:00 Off Print Outside On Fax On 3 times Normal Gamma 1.8 On Off Off

No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No Yes Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

Off Off Off Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-37

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

Item [Always Add Device Signature to Send]*1 [Limit E-Mail to Send to Myself] [Restrict File TX to Personal Folder] [Personal Folder Specification Method]

[Restrict Resending from Log]*1 [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] [Register Unit Name] [Communication Settings]

[Authent./Encryption]

[Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX]

[Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX]

[Maximum Data Size for Sending] [Default Subject] [Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply] [Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender] [Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail] [Full Mode TX Timeout] [Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt] [Use Send via Server] [Allow MDN Not via Server]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

10-38

Device Information Delivery Available

On, Off Restrict File Formats: On, Off On, Off On, Off Home Folder, Register for Each User, Use Login Server Home Folder Settings (Protocol, Host Name, Folder Path) Use Auth. Info. of Each User: On, Off On, Off

Off On Off Off Register for Each User Off Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Register Unit Name SMTP RX: On, Off POP: On, Off SMTP Server (Server name or IP address) E-Mail Address POP Server (Server name or IP address) POP Login Name POP Password POP Interval 0 min (Off), 1 to 99 mins POP AUTH Method: Standard, APOP, POP AUTH POP Authentication Before Send: On, Off Allow SSL (POP): On, Off SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH): On, Off User Name Password Allow SSL (SMTPReceive): Always SSL, On, Off Allow SSL (SMTP Send): On, Off Display Auth. Screen When Send: On, Off On, Off Add Items to Verify CN: On, Off On, Off Add Items to Verify CN: On, Off 0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB Default Subject On, Off On, Off On, Off 1 to 99 hrs On, Off On, Off On, Off

(NULL) Off On (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) 0 mins

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No Yes Yes No No No No No No

Standard Off Off Off (NULL) (NULL) Off Off Off Off Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No

Off Off

Yes Yes

No No

3 MB Attached Image Off On Off 24 hrs Off Off On

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-38

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

Item [Restrict TX Destination Domain]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Restrict Sending to Domains: On, Off Permitted Domains: Register, Details/Edit, Delete [Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail Addresses] On, Off [Fax Settings]*1 [Register Favorite Settings] Checking Settings, Location to Register Button: M1 to M18 Show Comments: On, Off Name, Comment [Edit Favorite Settings] Delete, Check Content, Rename (Name, Comment): M1 to M18 Show Comments: On, Off [Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings] On, Off [Default Screen] Standard, Favorite Settings, Address Book [Change Default Settings] Register, Initialize [Register Options Shortcuts] Shortcut 1: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 2: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 3: Each mode, Unassigned Shortcut 4: Each mode, Unassigned [Register Sender Name (TTI)] 01 to 99: Register/Edit, Delete [Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name] On, Off [ECM TX] On, Off [Set Pause Time] 1 to 15 sec [Auto Redial] On, Off Set Details: Redial Times (1 to 10 times) Set Details: Redial Interval (2 to 99 mins) Set Details: Redial When TX Error (Error and 1st Page, All Pages, Off) [Check Dial Tone Before Sending] On, Off [Fax TX Report] For Error Only, On, Off Report with TX Image: On, Off [Fax Activity Report] Auto Print (40 Transmissions): On, Off Specify Print Time: On, Off Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59 Send/Receive Separate: On, Off [Set Line] [Line 1] to [Line 4] If only the Super G3 FAX Board is installed: • Line 1 If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1, Line 2 If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1, Line 2, Line 3, Line 4 [Register Unit Telephone Number] User Telephone No. [Register Unit Name] Register Unit Name [Select Line Type] Pulse, Tone [Edit Line Name for Select Line Screen] Edit line name

Can be set in Remote UI

10-39

Device Information Delivery Available

Off On

Yes Yes No

Yes Yes*3 Yes

-

No

No

Off Off On Standard Density Original Type 2-Sided Original*2 Different Size Originals*2 Off On 2 sec On 2 times 2 mins Error and 1st Page On Off On Off Off 0:00 Off

No No No No No No No No No No No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

-

Yes

No

-

Yes

No

-

Yes

No

(NULL) (NULL) Tone -

Yes Yes Yes No

No No No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-39

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

Item [Default Address List When Selecting Line] [Select TX Line]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Address List 1 to Address List 10, All Address Lists If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1: Priority TX, Prohibit TX • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed: • Line 1: Priority TX, Prohibit TX • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX • Line 3: Priority TX, Prohibit TX • Line 4: Priority TX, Prohibit TX [TX Start Speed] 33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps [PIN Code Access] On, Off [Confirm Entered Fax Number] On, Off [Allow Fax Driver TX] On, Off [Confirm Before Sending when Fax Dest. Incl.] On, Off On: Only for Seq. Broadcast, All [Restrict Seq. Broadcast When Fax Dest. On, Off Incl.] [Remote Fax TX Settings]*1 [Remote Fax Server Address] IP address or host name (48 characters maximum) [TX Timeout] 1 to 99 hrs (one hour increments) [No. of TX Lines] 1 to 4 Line [Select Priority Line] Auto, Line 1, Line 2*4, Line 3*4, Line 4*4 [Remote Fax Settings] [Use Remote Fax] On, Off

Can be set in Remote UI

10-40

Device Information Delivery Available

All Address Lists Line 1: Priority TX

No Yes

No No

Line 1: Priority TX

Yes

No

33600 bps Off Off On Off Only for Seq. Broadcast Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No

(NULL) 24 hrs 1 Auto

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No Yes No No

Off

Yes

Yes T-10-15

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send

10-40

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward

10-41

■■Receive/Forward *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional products are available for use. *2 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information. Receive Method:, E-Mail Priority, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List *3 Indicates items that are not delivered if a PIN is set. Item [Output Report] [TX/RX User Data List] [Fax User Data List]*1 [Common Settings] [Print on Both Sides] [Select Drawer]

[Reduce Fax RX Size]

[2 on 1 Log] [Received Page Footer] [Interrupt and Print RX Jobs] [Handle Files with Forwarding Errors] [Forwarding Settings] [Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox] [Set/Register Confidential Fax Inboxes]

[Memory RX Inbox PIN] [Use Fax Memory Lock]*1 [Use I-Fax Memory Lock] [Memory Lock Start Time] [Memory Lock End Time] [Divided Data RX Timeout] [Always Send Notice for RX Errors] [Fax Settings]*1 [ECM RX] [Fax RX Report] [Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report] [RX Start Speed] [RX Password]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Yes, No Yes, No

-

Yes Yes

No No

On, Off Switch A: On, Off Switch B: On, Off Switch C: On, Off Switch D: On, Off On, Off • Reduction Mode: Auto, Fixed • Reduction %: 75% to 97% • Reduction Direction: Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only On, Off Print, Do Not Print On, Off Always Print, Store/Print, Off Receive Method:, Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding Settings), Delete, Details/Edit, Print List, Forward w/o Conditions, E-Mail Priority

Off On On On On On Auto 90% Vertical Only Off Do Not Print Off Always Print -

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes*2

Inbox No.: 00 to 49 Register Box Name PIN URL Send Settings Initialize Seven digits maximum On, Off On, Off Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off 0 to 99 hrs On, Off

(NULL) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) Off Off Off Off 24 hrs On

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes*3 Yes Yes*3 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

On, Off For Error Only, On, Off On, Off 33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps 20 digits maximum

On Off On 33600 bps (NULL)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes No T-10-16

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward

10-41

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files

10-42

■■Store/Access Files *1 Indicates items that are not delivered if a PIN is set. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item [Common Settings] [Scan and Store Settings] [Access Stored Files Settings] [Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits/Restrict Access] [Mail Box Settings] [Set/Register Mail Boxes]

[Settings for All Mail Boxes] [Box Security Settings] [Photo Printout Mode] [Advanced Box Settings] [Open to Public] [WebDAV Server Settings] [Allow to Create Personal Space] [Delete All Personal Spaces] [Initialize Shared Space] [Prohibit Writing from External] [Authentication Management] [File Formats Allowed for Storing] [Save Operation Log] [Network Settings] [Network Place Settings] [Protocol for External Reference] [Confirm SSL Certificate for Network Access]

[Memory Media Settings] [Use Scan/Print Function]*2

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Register/Edit Favorite Settings: Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9) Change Default Settings: Register, Initialize Register/Edit Favorite Settings: Register, Rename, Delete, Check Content (M1 to M9) Change Default Settings: Register, Initialize On, Off

Off

No No No No Yes

No No No No No

Mail Box No.: 00 to 99 Register Box Name PIN Time Until File Auto Delete: 0=None, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days URL Send Settings Print upon Storing from Printer Driver : On, Off Initialize Time Until File Auto Delete: 0=None, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hrs, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days Print When Storing from Printer Driver: On, Off Disp. Print When Storing from Printer Driver: On, Off On, Off

(NULL) (NULL) 3 days (NULL) Off 3 days Off On Off

No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No

No Yes*1 No No Yes*1 Yes*1 No No No Yes No

Off, By WebDAV, By SMB Authentication Type: Basic, Off Use SSL: On, Off On, Off Yes, No Yes, No On, Off On, Off Dev. Supt. Formats, Comm. Office Formats, All On, Off

Off Off Off On On Off Dev. Supt. Formats On

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No

Register (Name, Protocol, Location), Details, Delete SMB: On, Off WebDAV: On, Off On, Off Add Items to Verify CN: On, Off

On On Off Off

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No

Use Scan Function: On, Off Use Print Function: On, Off

On On

Yes Yes

Yes Yes T-10-17

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files

10-42

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

10-43

■■Secure Print *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item [Simple Authentication Settings] [Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs]*1

Default Setting

Setting Description Skip PIN Entry for Secure Print Job: On, Off Require Domain Name to Determine My Job: On, Off On, Off

Off On Off

Can be set in Remote UI Yes Yes Yes

Device Information Delivery Available No No No T-10-18

■■Web Access Item [Settings] [View Settings]

[Home Page Settings]

[Auto Clear Settings] [Security]

[Cache]

Default Setting

Setting Description Show Images: On, Off Show Animated GIF Images: On, Off Enable Table: On, Off Fit Web Page Into Screen Size: On, Off Use JavaScript: On, Off Use Word Wrap: On, Off Use Japanese Hyphenation: On, Off Format: Std CSS only, Std CSS + Style Attribute, Std CSS + Style Attribute + External Imported CSS Standard CSS: CSS1, CSS2, CSS3 Show Flash Contents: On, Off Flash Animation Frame Interval: Short, Medium, Long URL • Use Current Page as Home Home Page during Startup: On, Off Display during Auto Clear: Show Home Page, Show Blank Page, Keep Last Page Use SSL 2.0: On, Off Use SSL 3.0: On, Off Use TLS 1.0: On, Off Certificates • Enable/Disable • Details Display Mixed HTTPS/HTTP Pg: On, Off Trusted Server Address Restrict Share Device Information: On, Off Display Server Certificate Auth. Warning: On, Off Displ Warning when Entering Secured Page: On, Off Displ. Warning when Leaving Secured Page: On, Off Use Cache: On, Off • Each Session, Each Access, Cache Priority Clear Cache: Yes, No

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

On On On Off On Off Off Std CSS + Style Attribute + External Imported CSS CSS1 On Medium (NULL)

No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No

No No No No

No No No No

On Show Home Page On On On -

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

On On Off Off Off Off

No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

-

No

No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

10-43

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

Item [Cookie] [Privacy Policy and Regulations]

[Proxy Settings]

[Version]

Default Setting

Setting Description Cookie Handling: Accept, Block, Prompt Delete Cookies: Yes, No Restrict URL Entry: On, Off Restrict Add/Edit Favorites: On, Off Restrict Editing Home Pages: On, Off Restrict Add/Edit Page Memos: On, Off Restrict Printing: On, Off Restrict File Upload: On, Off Restrict History Display: On, Off Dept. ID/User Name with History: On, Off Full Screen: On, Off Hide Buttons in Toolbar: On, Off Hide Address in Toolbar: On, Off Hide Web Access Button: On, Off Use a proxy server (Display Only) Proxy Server Address (Display Only) Port Number (Display Only) Use proxy auth. (Display Only) Address Without Using Proxy Use HTTP1.1 for proxy connection: On, Off Version (Display Only)

Accept Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off (NULL) Off -

Can be set in Remote UI No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

10-44

Device Information Delivery Available No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No T-10-19

Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Web Access

10-44

Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination

10-45

Set Destination ■■ Set Destination *1 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name *2 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information: Edit, Delete *3 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item [Address Lists] [Register Destinations] [Rename Address List] [Register One-Touch] [Change Default Display of Address Book] [Address Book PIN] [Manage Address Book Access Numbers] [Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book] [Register LDAP Server] [Auto Search When Using LDAP Server] [Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions] [Change Default LDAP Search Conditions] [Acquire Remote Address Book]*3 [Acquire Address Book] [Remote Address Book Server Address] [Communication Timeout] [Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment] [Make Remote Add. Book Open] [Make Address Book Open]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Address List 1 to Address List 10, One-Touch Print List: Yes, No Register New Dest., Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name Address List 1 to Address List 10 Rename Register/Edit, Delete Local, LDAP Server, Remote PIN: Seven digits maximum On, Off On, Off Register, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List On, Off Display Name, Attribute Name Register, Initialize

-

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No Yes*1 Yes

Local (NULL) Off Off On -

Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Yes*2 No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No

On, Off IP Address or Host Name 15 to 120 sec On, Off

Off 30 sec On

Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No Yes Yes

On, Off

Off

Yes

Yes T-10-20

Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination

10-45

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-46

Management Settings ■■User Management Item [System Manager Information Settings]

[Department ID Management]

Setting Description System Manager ID (Seven digits maximum) System PIN (Seven digits maximum) System Manager E-Mail Address Contact Information Comment Department ID Management: On, Off Register PIN: Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions Page Totals: Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals, Large2 Count Management Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs: On, Off Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs: On, Off

Default Setting 7654321 7654321 (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) Off On On

Can be set in Remote UI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Device Information Delivery Available Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes T-10-21

■■Device Management *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is available for use. Item [Device Information Settings] [Device Information Delivery Settings] [Register Destinations]

[Set Auto Delivery]

Default Setting

Setting Description

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Device Name Location

Model Name (NULL)

Yes Yes

No No

Auto Search/Register, Reg., Details, Delete, Print List Auto Search/Register: • Search Depth (Router): 1 to 8 • Display Host Name: On, Off • Start Auto Search Everyday (1 to 5), Specify Days (Sun to Sat, 1 to 5), Off Settings/Registration Value: On, Off • Network Settings: Include, Exclude Dept. ID: On, Off Address Book: On, Off Web Access Favorites*1: On, Off Printer Settings: On, Off Paper Information: On, Off Workflow Composer*1: On, Off

1

No No

No No

Off Off Off Network Settings: Exclude Off Off Off Off Off Off

No No No No

No No No No

No No No No No No

No No No No No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-46

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

Item [Manual Delivery]

[Set MEAP Authentication] [Restrict Receiving Device Information] [Restore Data] [Restrict Receiving for Each Function]

[Use MEAP Auth. When Receive] [Communication Log]

[Limited Functions Mode]*1 [Confirm Device Signature Certificate]*1 [Confirm User Signature Certificate]*1 [Certificate Settings] [Generate Key]

Default Setting

Setting Description Settings/Registration Value: On, Off • Network Settings: Include, Exclude Dept. ID: On, Off Address Book: On, Off Web Access Favorites*1: On, Off Printer Settings: On, Off Paper Information: On, Off Workflow Composer*1: On, Off User Name, Password, Login Destination On, Off Settings/Reg. Value, Dept. ID, Address Book, Web Access Favorites*1, Printer Settings, Paper Information, Start Settings/Registration Value: On, Off Dept. ID: On, Off Address Book: On, Off Web Access Favorites*1: On, Off Printer Settings: On, Off Paper Information: On, Off Workflow Composer*1: On, Off On, Off Details, Print List, Report Settings Report Settings • Auto Print (100 Transmissions): On, Off • Specify Print Time: On, Off • 00:00 to 23:59 • Separate Report Type: On, Off On, Off Certificate Details: Verify Cert. Certificate Details: Verify Cert.

Can be set in Remote UI

10-47

Device Information Delivery Available

Off Network Settings: Exclude Off Off Off Off Off Off On -

No

No

No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No

On On On On On On On Off On

No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No No No No

Off 0:00 Off Off -

No No No No Yes Yes

No No No No No No

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-47

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

Item [Generate Network Communication Key]

[Generate/Update Device Signature Key] [Key and Certificate List] [Key and Certificate List for Users]*1

Default Setting

Setting Description Key Name Signature Algorithm: SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512 Key Algorithm: RSA, ECDSA • When RSA is selected Key Length (bit): RSA:512, 1024, 2048, 4096, ECDSA:256, 384, 521 • When ECDSA is selected Key Type: P256, P384, P521 Validity Start Date: Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) Validity End Date: Month, Date, Year (01/01/2000 - 12/31/2037) Country/Region: Country/Region name and code State City Organization Organization Unit Common Name (IP address of the machine or FQDN (41 characters maximum)) Yes, No

Certificate Details: (Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.) Delete [Key and Certificate List for This Device]*1 Certificate Details: (Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.) Delete Display Use Location (Key and Certificate) [CA Certificate List] Certificate Details: (Version, Serial Number, Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start Date, Validity End Date, Issuer, Public Key, Certificate Thumbprint, Verify Cert.) Delete [Cert. Revocation List (CRL)] CRL Details: Serial Number, Expires, Verify CRL Delete [Register Key and Certificate] Register Delete [Register CA Certificate] Register Delete [Display Job Status Before Authentication] On, Off [Display Log] On, Off Off • Obtain Job Log with Management Software: Allow, Do Not Allow [Save Audit Log] On, Off [Store Key Operation Log] On, Off [Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2] On, Off

Can be set in Remote UI

10-48

Device Information Delivery Available

(NULL) SHA1 RSA 512

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No

P256

Yes

No

(NULL) (NULL) United States (US) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) (NULL) -

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No

-

Yes

No

-

Yes Yes

No No

-

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

On On Do Not Allow

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

No No No No No No No No No No

Off Off Off

Yes Yes Yes

No No No T-10-22

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management

10-48

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management

10-49

■■License/Other *1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional product is available for use. *2 For more information, see "Adding New Functions." *3 Indicates items that appear only when ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is activated. Item [Register License] [MEAP Settings] [Print System Information] [Use SSL] [Remote UI]

[Delete Message Board Contents] [Use ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM]*3 [Register/Update Software]*2

Setting Description

Default Setting

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

24 characters maximum, Start

(NULL)

No

No

Yes, No On, Off On, Off Use SSL: On, Off Use Reference Print*1: On, Off Yes, No On, Off Install Applications/Options, Software Management Settings

Off On Off

No Yes No Yes

No No Yes No

Off

Yes

Yes

Off -

No Yes Yes

No No No T-10-23

■■Data Management Item [HDD Data Complete Deletion] [Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion] [Timing of Deletion] [Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode] [Initialize All Data/Settings] [TPM Settings]

Default Setting

Setting Description On, Off During Job, After Job Once with 0 (Null) Data, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data, DoD Standard Once with 0 (Null) Data, Once with Random Data, 3 Times with Random Data, 9 Times with Random Data, DoD Standard Use TPM: On, Off Back Up TPM Key(12 characters maximum for password), Restore TPM Key

Can be set in Remote UI

Device Information Delivery Available

Off During Job Once with 0 (Null) Data

Yes Yes Yes

No No No

Once with 0 (Null) Data

No

No

Off -

No No

No No T-10-24

Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management

10-49

10-50

CHK-TYPE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CHK-TYPE Group

Partition name

Four same time

FSTDEV IMG-MNG FSTCDEV THUMDEV APL_GEN TMP_GEN TMP_FAX TMP_PSS PDLDEV BOOTDEV APL_MEAP APL_SEND APL_KEEP APL_LOG CRBDEV APL_CDS

One Three same time

One One One One One One One One

Description

HDD Format Using SST or USB memory

HD-CLEAR Image data storage area (Box etc) Management data of image Image data storage area (for Job archive system) Thumbnail Storage area of universal data (Note: For details, see the following list.) Storage area of universal data (temporary file) FAX (temporary file) PSS (temporary file) PDL-related file storage area (font, registration form, color correction information file for ICCProfile-PDL function) Firmware storage area (Bootable/MEAP/key/certificate/PDF dictionary/RUI contents/voice dictionary (ICC profile. PS test data.)) MEAP Address book, Setting for Forwarding MEAP stored data System log storage area Advanced Box area Area for distribution server

enable

Entering SST menu or USB menu • Select "ALL" All partition format same time. • Select "BOOTDEV" Only BOOTDEV is erased.

enable enable

Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled T-10-25

Selecting "CHK-TYPE1" means selecting four partitions. APL_GEN Details of universal data Category Settings / Registration

Setting items for each menu in Main Menu

Data Preferences Adjustment/Maintenance Function Settings Set Destination Management Settings Printer Settings Paper Information Settings Favorite Settings Default Settings Shortcut settings for “Options” Previous Settings

Category Setting for Advance Box Setting for Web Access Setting for Universal Data

Data User information of Advanced Box Registration information of Network Place Web Access Setting information Unsent document (which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission) Job log information Key pair and certificate and CRL which are registered in Management Settings>Device Settings>Certificate Setting Auto Adjust Gradation setting values PS font

T-10-26

10-50

Appendix > Detail of HDD partition

Appendix > Detail of HDD partition

Detail of HDD partition

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 000 to 099

Soft Counter List Soft counter specifications

Soft Counter List ■■000 to 099 Valid or invalid

Number

000 to 099: Remote copy

no

002

Remote copy (full color 1)

100 to 199: Total

no

003

Remote copy (full color 2)

200 to 299: Copy

no

004

Remote copy (mono color 1)

300 to 399: Print

no

005

Remote copy (mono color 2)

yes

006

Remote copy (black and white 1)

yes

007

Remote copy (black and white 2)

no

008

Remote copy (full color / large)

no

009

Remote copy (full color / small)

no

010

Remote copy (mono color / large)

400 to 499: Copy and print 500 to 599: Scan 600 to 699: Box 700 to 799: Reception print 800 to 899: Report print 900 to 999: Transmission

Counter Details

no

011

Remote copy (mono color / small)

yes

012

Remote copy (black and white / large)

yes

013

Remote copy (black and white / small)

no

014

Remote copy (full color + mono color / large)

no

015

Remote copy (full color + mono color / small)

no

016

Remote copy (full color + mono color 2)

no

017

Remote copy (full color + mono color 1)

• S: Small size (smaller than B4 size)

no

018

Remote copy (full color / large / double sided)

• Numbers 1, 2 indicated under "Counter Details": Number of counts for large size paper

no

019

Remote copy (full color / small / double sided)

• It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4_L_CNT) so that

no

020

Remote copy (mono color / large / double sided)

- Explanation of symbols shown in the table • yes: Valid counter for this machine • 4C: Full color • Mono: Mono color (Y, M, C / R, G, B / retro monochrome) • Bk: Single black color • L: Large size (larger than B4 size)

the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper.

no

021

Remote copy (mono color / small / double sided)

• Copy: Local copy + remote copy

yes

022

Remote copy (black and white / large / double sided)

• Copy A: Local copy + remote copy + box print

yes

023

Remote copy (black and white / small / double sided)

• Print: PDL print + report print + box print

no

071

Toner bottle black

• Print A: PDL print + report print

no

072

Toner bottle yellow

no

073

Toner bottle magenta

no

074

Toner bottle cyan

no

075

Toner bottle clear

no

081

Toner bottle + Halfway replacement black

no

082

Toner bottle + Halfway replacement yellow

no

083

Toner bottle + Halfway replacement magenta

no

084

Toner bottle + Halfway replacement cyan

no

091

1/10 Toner bottle black

• Scan: Black and white scan + color scan

10-51

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 000 to 099

10-51

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 100 to 199

Valid or invalid

Number

no

092

no

093

no no

Counter Details

Valid or invalid

Number

1/10 Toner bottle yellow

no

130

Total A (full color 1)

1/10 Toner bottle magenta

no

131

Total A (full color 2)

094

1/10 Toner bottle cyan

yes

132

Total A (black and white 1)

095

1/10 Toner bottle clear

yes

133

Total A (black and white 2)

no

134

Total A (mono color / large)

no

135

Total A (mono color / small)

yes

136

Total A (black and white / large)

yes

137

Total A (black and white / small)

yes

138

Total A 1 (double sided)

yes

139

Total A 2 (double sided)

yes

140

large A (double sided)

yes

141

small A (double sided)

no

142

Total A (mono color 1)

no

143

Total A (mono color 2)

no

144

Total A (full color / large)

no

145

Total A (full color / small)

no

146

Total A (full color + mono color / large)

no

147

Total A (full color + mono color / small)

no

148

Total A (full color + mono color 2)

T-10-27

■■100 to 199 Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

yes

101

Total 1

yes

102

Total 2

yes

103

Total (large)

yes

104

Total (small)

no

105

Total (full color 1)

no

106

Total (full color 2)

yes

108

Total (black and white 1)

yes

109

Total (black and white 2)

no

110

Total (mono color / large)

no

111

Total (mono color / small)

yes

112

Total (black and white / large)

yes

113

Total (black and white / small)

yes

114

Total 1 (double sided)

yes

115

Total 2 (double sided)

yes

116

large (double sided)

yes

117

small (double sided)

no

118

Total (mono color 1)

no

119

Total (mono color 2)

no

120

Total (full color / large)

no

121

Total (full color / small)

no

122

Total (full color + mono color / large)

no

123

Total (full color + mono color / small)

no

124

Total (full color + mono color 2)

no

125

Total (full color + mono color 1)

yes

126

Total A1

yes

127

Total A2

yes

128

Total A (large)

yes

129

Total A (small)

10-52

Counter Details

no

149

Total A (full color + mono color 1)

yes

150

Total B1

yes

151

Total B2

yes

152

Total B (large)

yes

153

Total B (small)

no

154

Total B (full color 1)

no

155

Total B (full color 2)

yes

156

Total B (black and white 1)

yes

157

Total B (black and white 2)

no

158

Total B (mono color / large)

no

159

Total B (mono color / small)

yes

160

Total B (black and white / large)

yes

161

Total B (black and white / small)

yes

162

Total B1 (double sided)

yes

163

Total B2 (double sided)

yes

164

large B (double sided)

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 100 to 199

10-52

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 200 to 299

Valid or invalid

Number

yes

165

no

166

no

167

no

168

no no

Counter Details

Valid or invalid

Number

small B (double sided)

no

218

Copy (full color 2)

Total B (mono color 1)

no

219

Copy (mono color 1)

Total B (mono color 2)

no

220

Copy (mono color 2)

Total B (full color / large)

yes

221

Copy (black and white 1)

169

Total B (full color / small)

yes

222

Copy (black and white 2)

170

Total B (full color + mono color / large)

no

223

Copy (full color / large)

no

171

Total B (full color + mono color / small)

no

224

Copy (full color / small)

no

172

Total B (full color + mono color 2)

no

225

Copy (mono color / large)

no

173

Total B (full color + mono color 1)

no

226

Copy (mono color / small)

no

191

Toner replacement / yellow

yes

227

Copy (black and white / large)

no

192

Toner replacement / magenta

yes

228

Copy (black and white / small)

no

193

Toner replacement / cyan

no

229

Copy (full color + mono color / large)

no

194

Toner replacement / black

no

230

Copy (full color + mono color / small)

no

195

Toner replacement / clear

no

231

Copy (full color + mono color / 2)

no

196

Toner replacement / expansion

no

232

Copy (full color + mono color / 1)

no

233

Copy (full color / large / double sided)

no

234

Copy (full color / small / double sided)

no

235

Copy (mono color / large / double sided)

no

236

Copy (mono color / small / double sided)

yes

237

Copy (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

238

Copy (black and white / small / double sided)

no

245

Copy A (full color 1)

no

246

Copy A (full color 2)

no

247

Copy A (mono color 1)

T-10-28

■■200 to 299 Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

yes

201

Copy (Total 1)

yes

202

Copy (Total 2)

yes

203

Copy (large)

yes

204

Copy (small)

yes

205

Copy A (Total 1)

yes

206

Copy A (Total 2)

yes

207

Copy A (large)

yes

208

Copy A (small)

yes

209

Local copy (Total 1)

yes

210

Local copy (Total 2)

yes

211

Local copy (large)

yes

212

Local copy (small)

yes

213

Remote copy (Total 1)

yes

214

Remote copy (Total 2)

yes

215

Remote copy (large)

yes

216

Remote copy (small)

no

217

Copy (full color 1)

10-53

Counter Details

no

248

Copy A (mono color 2)

yes

249

Copy A (black and white 1)

yes

250

Copy A (black and white 2)

no

251

Copy A (full color / large)

no

252

Copy A (full color / small)

no

253

Copy A (mono color / large)

no

254

Copy A (mono color / small)

yes

255

Copy A (black and white / large)

yes

256

Copy A (black and white / small)

no

257

Copy A (full color +mono color / large)

no

258

Copy A (full color +mono color / small)

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 200 to 299

10-53

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 300 to 399

10-54

■■300 to 399

Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

no

259

Copy A (full color +mono color 2)

Valid or invalid

Number

no

260

Copy A (full color +mono color 1)

yes

301

Print (Total 1)

no

261

Copy A (full color / large / double sided)

yes

302

Print (Total 2)

no

262

Copy A (full color / small / double sided)

yes

303

Print (large)

no

263

Copy A (mono color / large / double sided)

yes

304

Print (small)

no

264

Copy A (mono color / small / double sided)

yes

305

Print A (Total 1)

yes

265

Copy A (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

306

Print A (Total 2)

yes

266

Copy A (black and white / small / double sided)

yes

307

Print A (large )

no

273

Local copy (full color 1)

yes

308

Print A (small)

no

274

Local copy (full color 2)

no

309

Print (full color 1)

no

275

Local copy (mono color 1)

no

310

Print (full color 2)

no

276

Local copy (mono color 2)

no

311

Print (mono color 1)

yes

277

Local copy (black and white 1)

no

312

Print (mono color 2)

yes

278

Local copy (black and white 2)

yes

313

Print (black and white 1)

no

279

Local copy (full color / large)

yes

314

Print (black and white 2)

no

280

Local copy (full color / small)

no

315

Print (full color / large)

no

281

Local copy (mono color / large)

no

316

Print (full color / small)

no

282

Local copy (mono color / small)

no

317

Print (mono color / large)

yes

283

Local copy (black and white / large)

no

318

Print (mono color / small)

yes

284

Local copy (black and white / small)

yes

319

Print (black and white / large)

no

285

Local copy (full color + mono color / large)

yes

320

Print (black and white / small)

no

286

Local copy (full color + mono color / small)

no

321

Print (full color +mono color / large)

no

287

Local copy (full color + mono color 2)

no

322

Print (full color +mono color / small)

no

288

Local copy (full color + mono color 1)

no

323

Print (full color +mono color / 2)

no

289

Local copy (full color / large / double sided)

no

324

Print (full color +mono color / 1)

no

290

Local copy (full color / small / double sided)

no

325

Print (full color / large / double sided)

no

291

Local copy (mono color / large / double sided)

no

326

Print (full color / small / double sided)

no

292

Local copy (mono color / small / double sided)

no

327

Print (mono color / large / double sided)

yes

293

Local copy (black and white / large / double sided)

no

328

Print (mono color / small / double sided)

yes

294

Local copy (black and white / small / double sided)

yes

329

Print (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

330

Print (black and white / small / double sided)

yes

331

PDLPrint (Total 1)

yes

332

PDLPrint (Total 2)

yes

333

PDLPrint (large)

yes

334

PDLPrint (small)

T-10-29

Counter Details

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 300 to 399

10-54

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 400 to 499

Valid or invalid

Number

no

335

no

336

yes yes

Counter Details

Valid or invalid

Number

PDLPrint (full color 1)

yes

421

Copy + print (black and white / large / double sided)

PDLPrint (full color 2)

yes

422

Copy + print (black and white / small / double sided)

339

PDLPrint (black and white 1)

no

431

Clear mixed + mono-clear (total 1)

340

PDLPrint (black and white 2)

no

432

Clear mixed + mono-clear (total 2)

no

341

PDLPrint (full color / large)

no

433

Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page 1)

no

342

PDLPrint (full color / small)

no

434

Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page 2)

yes

345

PDLPrint (black and white / large)

no

435

Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial 1)

yes

346

PDLPrint (black and white / small)

no

436

Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial 2)

no

351

PDLPrint (full color / large / double sided)

no

437

Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page / large)

Counter Details

no

352

PDLPrint (full color / small / double sided)

no

438

Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page / small)

yes

355

PDLPrint (black and white / large / double sided)

no

439

Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial / large)

yes

356

PDLPrint (black and white / small / double sided)

no

440

Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial / small)

no

441

Clear mixed (total 1)

no

442

Clear mixed (total 2)

no

443

Clear mixed (full-page 1)

no

444

Clear mixed (full-page 2)

no

445

Clear mixed (partial 1)

no

446

Clear mixed (partial 2)

no

447

Clear mixed (full-page / large)

no

448

Clear mixed (full-page / small)

no

449

Clear mixed (partial / large)

no

450

Clear mixed (partial / small)

no

451

Mono-clear (total 1)

no

452

Mono-clear (total 2)

no

453

Mono-clear (full-page 1)

no

454

Mono-clear (full-page 2)

no

455

Mono-clear (partial 1)

no

456

Mono-clear (partial 2)

no

457

Mono-clear (full-page / large)

no

458

Mono-clear (full-page / small)

no

459

Mono-clear (partial / large)

no

460

Mono-clear (partial / small)

T-10-30

■■400 to 499 Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

no

401

Copy + print (full color / large)

no

402

Copy + print (full color / small)

yes

403

Copy + print (black and white / large)

yes

404

Copy + print (black and white / small)

yes

405

Copy + print (black and white 2)

yes

406

Copy + print (black and white 1)

no

407

Copy + print (full color + mono color / large)

no

408

Copy + print (full color + mono color / small)

no

409

Copy + print (full color + mono color / 2)

no

410

Copy + print (full color + mono color / 1)

yes

411

Copy + print (large)

yes

412

Copy + print (small)

yes

413

Copy + print (2)

yes

414

Copy + print (1)

no

415

Copy + print (mono color / large)

no

416

Copy + print (mono color / small)

no

417

Copy + print (full color / large / double sided)

no

418

Copy + print (full color / small / double sided)

no

419

Copy + print (mono color / large / double sided)

no

420

Copy + print (mono color / small / double sided)

10-55

T-10-31

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 400 to 499

10-55

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 700 to 799

■■500 to 599 Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

Valid or invalid

Number

no

619

Box print (full color + mono color 2)

620

Box print (full color + mono color 1)

Counter Details

yes

501

Scan (Total 1)

no

yes

502

Scan (Total 2)

no

621

Box print (full color / large / double sided)

622

Box print (full color / small / double sided)

yes

503

Scan (large)

no

yes

504

Scan (small)

no

623

Box print (mono color / large / double sided)

Black and white Scan (Total 1)

no

624

Box print (mono color / small / double sided)

625

Box print (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

505

10-56

yes

506

Black and white Scan (Total 2)

yes

yes

507

Black and white Scan (large)

yes

626

Box print (black and white / small / double sided)

631

Memory media print (Total 1)

yes

508

Black and white Scan (small)

yes

yes

509

Color scan (Total 1)

yes

632

Memory media print (Total 2)

Color scan (Total 2)

yes

633

Memory media print (large)

yes

634

Memory media print (small)

yes

639

Memory media print (black and white 1)

yes

640

Memory media print (black and white 2)

yes

645

Memory media print (black and white / large)

yes

646

Memory media print (black and white / small)

yes

655

Memory media print (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

656

Memory media print (black and white / small / double sided)

yes

510

yes

511

Color scan (large)

yes

512

Color scan (small) T-10-32

■■600 to 699 Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

yes

601

Box print (Total 1)

yes

602

Box print (Total 2)

yes

603

Box print (large)

yes

604

Box print (small)

no

605

Box print (full color 1)

Valid or invalid

Number

no

606

Box print (full color 2)

yes

701

Reception print (Total 1)

702

Reception print (Total 2)

T-10-33

■■700 to 799 Counter Details

no

607

Box print (mono color 1)

yes

no

608

Box print (mono color 2)

yes

703

Reception print (large)

704

Reception print (small)

yes

609

Box print (black and white 1)

yes

yes

610

Box print (black and white 2)

no

705

Reception print (full color 1)

Box print (full color / large)

no

706

Reception print (full color 2)

no

707

Reception print (Gray scale 1)

no

611

no

612

Box print (full color / small)

no

613

Box print (mono color / large)

no

708

Reception print (Gray scale 2)

709

Reception print (black and white 1)

no

614

Box print (mono color / small)

yes

yes

615

Box print (black and white / large)

yes

710

Reception print (black and white 2)

Box print (black and white / small)

no

711

Reception print (full color / large)

712

Reception print (full color / small)

yes

616

no

617

Box print (full color + mono color / large)

no

no

618

Box print (full color + mono color / small)

no

713

Reception print (Gray scale / large)

no

714

Reception print (Gray scale / small)

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 700 to 799

10-56

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 800 to 899

Valid or invalid

Number

yes

715

yes

716

no

717

no

718

no no

Counter Details

Valid or invalid

Number

Reception print (black and white / large)

yes

750

Network print (black and white 2)

Reception print (black and white / small)

no

751

Network print (full color / large)

Reception print (full color + Gray scale / large)

no

752

Network print (full color / small)

Reception print (full color + Gray scale / small)

yes

753

Network print (black and white / large)

719

Reception print (full color + Gray scale 2)

yes

754

Network print (black and white / small)

720

Reception print (full color + Gray scale 1)

no

755

Network print (full color / large / double sided)

no

721

Reception print (full color / large / double sided)

no

756

Network print (full color / small / double sided)

no

722

Reception print (full color / small / double sided)

yes

757

Network print (black and white / large / double sided)

no

723

Reception print (Gray scale / large / double sided)

yes

758

Network print (black and white / small / double sided)

10-57

Counter Details

no

724

Reception print (Gray scale / small / double sided)

yes

759

Mobile print (Total 1)

yes

725

Reception print (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

760

Mobile print (Total 2)

yes

726

Reception print (black and white / small / double sided)

yes

761

Mobile print (large)

yes

727

Advance box print (Total 1)

yes

762

Mobile print (small)

yes

728

Advance box print (Total 2)

no

763

Mobile print (full color 1)

yes

729

Advance box print (large)

no

764

Mobile print (full color 2)

yes

730

Advance box print (small)

yes

765

Mobile print (black and white 1)

no

731

Advance box print (full color 1)

yes

766

Mobile print (black and white 2)

no

732

Advance box print (full color 2)

no

767

Mobile print (full color / large)

yes

733

Advance box print (black and white 1)

no

768

Mobile print (full color / small)

yes

734

Advance box print (black and white 2)

yes

769

Mobile print (black and white / large)

no

735

Advance box print (full color / large)

yes

770

Mobile print (black and white / small)

no

736

Advance box print (full color / small)

no

771

Mobile print (full color / large / double sided)

yes

737

Advance box print (black and white / large)

no

772

Mobile print (full color / small / double sided)

yes

738

Advance box print (black and white / small)

yes

773

Mobile print (black and white / large / double sided)

no

739

Advance box print (full color / large / double sided)

yes

774

Mobile print (black and white / small / double sided)

no

740

Advance box print (full color / small / double sided)

yes

741

Advance box print (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

742

Advance box print (black and white / small / double sided)

yes

743

Network print (Total 1)

yes

744

Network print (Total 2)

yes

745

Network print (large)

yes

746

Network print (small)

no

747

Network print (full color 1)

no

748

Network print (full color 2)

yes

749

Network print (black and white 1)

T-10-34

■■800 to 899 Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

yes

801

Report print (Total 1)

yes

802

Report print (Total 2)

yes

803

Report print (large)

yes

804

Report print (small)

no

805

Report print (full color 1)

no

806

Report print (full color 2)

no

807

Report print (Gray scale 1)

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 800 to 899

10-57

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999

Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

no

808

Report print (Gray scale 2)

no

914

Transmission scan total 1 (black and white)

yes

809

Report print (black and white 1)

yes

915

Transmission scan total 2 (color)

yes

810

Report print (black and white 2)

yes

916

Transmission scan total 2 (black and white)

no

811

Report print (full color / large)

yes

917

Transmission scan total 3 (color)

no

812

Report print (full color / small)

yes

918

Transmission scan total 3 (black and white)

no

813

Report print (Gray scale / large)

no

919

Transmission scan total 4 (color)

no

814

Report print (Gray scale / small)

no

920

Transmission scan total 4 (black and white)

yes

815

Report print (black and white / large)

yes

921

Transmission scan total 5 (color)

yes

816

Report print (black and white / small)

yes

922

Transmission scan total 5 (black and white)

no

817

Report print (full color + Gray scale / large)

yes

929

Transmission scan total 6 (color)

no

818

Report print (full color + Gray scale / small)

yes

930

Transmission scan total 6 (black and white)

no

819

Report print (full color + Gray scale 2)

no

931

Transmission scan total 7 (color)

no

820

Report print (full color + Gray scale 1)

no

932

Transmission scan total 7 (black and white)

no

821

Report print (full color / large / double sided)

no

933

Transmission scan total 8 (color)

no

822

Report print (full color / small / double sided)

no

934

Transmission scan total 8 (black and white)

no

823

Report print (Gray scale / large / double sided)

no

935

Universal transmission scan total (color)

no

824

Report print (Gray scale / small / double sided)

no

936

Universal transmission scan total (black and white)

yes

825

Report print (black and white / large / double sided)

yes

937

Box scan (color)

yes

826

Report print (black and white / small / double sided)

yes

938

Box scan (black and white)

yes

939

Remote scan (color)

yes

940

Remote scan (black and white)

no

941

Transmission scan / Fax (color)

no

942

Transmission scan / Fax (black and white)

no

943

Transmission scan / I Fax (color )

T-10-35

■■900 to 999 Valid or invalid

Number

Counter Details

no

901

Copy scan total 1 (color)

no

902

Copy scan total 1 (black and white)

no

903

Copy scan total 2 (color)

no

904

Copy scan total 2 (black and white)

no

905

Copy scan total 3 (color)

no

906

Copy scan total 3 (black and white)

no

907

Copy scan total 4 (color)

no

908

Copy scan total 4 (black and white)

no

909

Local copy scan (color)

no

910

Local copy scan (black and white)

no

911

Remote copy scan (color)

no

912

Remote copy scan (black and white)

no

913

Transmission scan total 1 (color)

10-58

no

944

Transmission scan / I Fax (black and white)

yes

945

Transmission scan / E-mail (color)

yes

946

Transmission scan / E-mail (black and white)

no

947

Transmission scan / FTP (color)

no

948

Transmission scan / FTP (black and white)

no

949

Transmission scan / SMB (color)

no

950

Transmission scan / SMB (black and white)

no

951

Transmission scan / IPX (color)

no

952

Transmission scan / IPX (black and white)

no

953

Transmission scan / Database (color)

no

954

Transmission scan / Database (black and white)

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999

10-58

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999

Valid or invalid

Number

no

955

Transmission scan / Local print (color )

no

956

Transmission scan / Local print (black and white)

no

957

Transmission scan / Box (color)

no

958

Transmission scan / Box (black and white)

yes

959

Media scan (color)

yes

960

Media scan (black and white)

yes

961

Application scan (Total 1)

yes

962

Application black and white scan (Total 1)

yes

963

Application color scan (Total 1)

yes

964

Super Box Local scan (color)

yes

965

Super Box Local scan (black and white)

10-59

Counter Details

T-10-36

Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 900 to 999

10-59

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-60

Backup Data Clear

Replace

Data

Address List

Forwarding Settings

User function Settings/Registration> Function Settings Send > Send Common > Fax Printer Replace Replace Replace DC Reader Replace Initialize Copy > Settings Settings Settings the Location Change the the Cont- Contthe All > > > HDD Main Main roller roller TPM Data/ Default Change Change Custom / All PCB 1 PCB 2 PCB PCB PCB Settings Settings Default Default Settings format > Settings Settings > Initialize > > Initialize Initialize Initialize HDD/ Clear SRAM (MCON2) HDD/ Clear SRAM (MCON2)

Settings / Registration Preferences SRAM (Except for Paper Type (MCON2) Management Settings) Adjustment/Maintenance SRAM (MCON2) Function Settingss SRAM (Except for Printer (MCON2/ Custom Settings, DCON) Forwarding Settings) Set Destination SRAM (Except for Address List) (MCON2) Management Settings SRAM (Except for Address List) (MCON2) Printer Settings Set Paper Information

Service function Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function Function Function Function Function Function > > > > > > CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > > MN> DC> > JV> MMI ADRSCONT CON R-CON CASHE BK

Clear

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

Clear (*1)

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear -

-

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

-

-

Clear

Clear

Clear (*2)

Clear

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

SRAM (MCON2) HDD Clear

Department ID Management System Manager ID

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-60

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-61 Clear

Replace

Data

User function Settings/Registration> Function Settings Send > Send Common > Fax Printer Replace Replace Replace DC Reader Replace Initialize Copy > Settings Settings Settings the Location Change the the Cont- Contthe All > > > HDD Main Main roller roller TPM Data/ Default Change Change Custom / All PCB 1 PCB 2 PCB PCB PCB Settings Settings Default Default Settings format > Settings Settings > Initialize > > Initialize Initialize Initialize

Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox) Favorite Settings HDD Clear Default Settings HDD Clear Shortcut settings for HDD Clear Options Previous Settings HDD Clear -

Service function Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function Function Function Function Function Function > > > > > > CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > > MN> DC> > JV> MMI ADRSCONT CON R-CON CASHE BK

Clear Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear Clear Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Setting items for Quick Menu Button Size information HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Wallpaper Setting

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Button information in Quick Menu

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Restrict Quick Menu

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Setting items for Main Menu Button settings in Main HDD Menu Button settings on the top HDD of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Other settings for Main Menu Box settings

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-61

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-62 Clear

Replace

Data

User Box specification settings (Register Box Name, Password, Time until Document Auto Erase, Print uponstoring from the printer driver) Image data of User Box, Confidential Fax Box, and System Box Image Data Data File of Advanced Box Advanced box settings Advanced box account Network place setting information Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode Web browser settings Web Access setting information MEAP settings MEAP application License files for MEAP applications User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)

User function Settings/Registration> Function Settings Send > Send Common > Fax Printer Replace Replace Replace DC Reader Replace Initialize Copy > Settings Settings Settings the Location Change the the Cont- Contthe All > > > HDD Main Main roller roller TPM Data/ Default Change Change Custom / All PCB 1 PCB 2 PCB PCB PCB Settings Settings Default Default Settings format > Settings Settings > Initialize > > Initialize Initialize Initialize

Service function Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function Function Function Function Function Function > > > > > > CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > > MN> DC> > JV> MMI ADRSCONT CON R-CON CASHE BK

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

(*12)

-

-

-

-

-

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

HDD HDD

Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear -

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

HDD HDD

Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear Clear

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-62

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-63 Clear

Replace

Data

Data saved using MEAP applications SMS (Service Management Service) password of MEAP Universal data settings Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Job logs Key Pair and Certificate and CRL in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values

User function Settings/Registration> Function Settings Send > Send Common > Fax Printer Replace Replace Replace DC Reader Replace Initialize Copy > Settings Settings Settings the Location Change the the Cont- Contthe All > > > HDD Main Main roller roller TPM Data/ Default Change Change Custom / All PCB 1 PCB 2 PCB PCB PCB Settings Settings Default Default Settings format > Settings Settings > Initialize > > Initialize Initialize Initialize

Service function Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function Function Function Function Function Function > > > > > > CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > > MN> DC> > JV> MMI ADRSCONT CON R-CON CASHE BK

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear (*20)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

HDD

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

HDD HDD

Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear Clear (*21)

-

Clear (*22)

-

-

-

Clear Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear (*22)

-

-

Clear (*22)

-

-

Clear (*23)

-

Clear (*24)

-

-

Clear

Clear (*25)

-

-

-

-

-

Clear (*24)

-

-

Clear (*24)

-

-

HDD (SRAM (MCON2)) PS font HDD Key information to be SRAM used for encryption when (MCON2) TPM is OFF Key and settings SRAM information to be used for (MCON2) encryption when TPM is HDD ON TPM Board Service Mode

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-63

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-64 Clear

Replace

Data

Service mode setting values (MN-CON) Service mode setting values (DC-CON) Service mode setting values (R-CON) Audit Log

User function Settings/Registration> Function Settings Send > Send Common > Fax Printer Replace Replace Replace DC Reader Replace Initialize Copy > Settings Settings Settings the Location Change the the Cont- Contthe All > > > HDD Main Main roller roller TPM Data/ Default Change Change Custom / All PCB 1 PCB 2 PCB PCB PCB Settings Settings Default Default Settings format > Settings Settings > Initialize > > Initialize Initialize Initialize SRAM (MCON2) SRAM (DC-CON) EEPROM (R-CON) HDD

Service function Advanced Box Settings > Delete Personal/ Shared Space > Delete All

Function Function Function Function Function Function > > > > > > CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR CLEAR > > MN> DC> > JV> MMI ADRSCONT CON R-CON CASHE BK

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

Clear

-

-

-

-

-

(*29)

-

-

-

-

Clear T-10-37

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-64

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-65

Backup Method Backup Method (excluding DCM and device information delivery) Data

Address List

Forwarding Settings

Yes/ No Yes

Yes

Settings / Registration Preferences No (Except for Paper Type Management Settings) Adjustment/Maintenance No

Method Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Address Lists))

Backup by User Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Yes/ Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to No this model this model this model

Method

Backup by Service Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to this model this model this model

PC

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

-

-

No

No

No

PC

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

-

-

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

SST (Sramimg)

PC

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

SST (Sramimg) SST (Sramimg)

PC

SST (Sramimg) SST (Sramimg) SST (Sramimg)

PC

Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Device Settings)) Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Device Settings))

Function Settingss (Except for Printer Custom Settings, Forwarding Settings) Set Destination (Except for Address List) Management Settings (Except for Address List) Printer Settings

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

PC

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Set Paper Information

Yes

Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Printer Settings)) Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Paper Information)) -

PC

Yes (*3)

Yes (*3)

Yes (*3)

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes (*6)

SST (Meapback)

PC/USB

No

No

Yes (*6)

SST (Meapback)

PC/USB

Department ID No No Management System Manager ID Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox) Favorite Settings Yes Remote UI PC No (*5) (Import/Export Individually (Device Settings)) Default Settings No No

10

Appendix > Backup Data

PC

PC PC

10-65

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-66

Backup Method Backup Method (excluding DCM and device information delivery) Data

Shortcut settings for Options Previous Settings

Yes/ No No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Quick Menu)) Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Quick Menu)) Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Quick Menu)) Remote UI (Import/Export Individually (Quick Menu))

PC

No

No

PC

No

PC

Method

Backup by Service Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to this model this model this model

Yes (*6) Yes (*6)

SST (Meapback) SST (Meapback)

PC/USB

Yes (*9)

Yes (*6)

SST/USB (MEAP Backup)

PC/USB

No

Yes (*9)

Yes (*6)

SST/USB (MEAP Backup)

PC/USB

No

No

Yes (*9)

Yes (*6)

SST/USB (MEAP Backup)

PC/USB

PC

No

No

Yes (*9)

Yes (*6)

SST/USB (MEAP Backup)

PC/USB

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes (*10)

Remote UI (Bacup/Restore)

PC/ USBHDD

No

No

Yes (*11)

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes (*10)

Remote UI (Bacup/Restore)

PC/ USBHDD

No

No

Yes (*11)

No

-

-

No

No

No

Setting items for Quick Menu Button Size information Yes

Wallpaper Setting

Yes

Button information in Quick Menu

Yes

Restrict Quick Menu

Yes

Setting items for Main Menu Button settings in Main No Menu Button settings on the top No of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main No Menu Other settings for Main Menu Box settings User Box specification settings (Register Box Name, Password, Time until Document Auto Erase, Print uponstoring from the printer driver) Image data of User Box, Confidential Fax Box, and System Box Image Data

Method

Backup by User Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Yes/ Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to No this model this model this model

10

Appendix > Backup Data

PC/USB

10-66

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-67

Backup Method Backup Method (excluding DCM and device information delivery) Data

Yes/ No

Method

Backup by User Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Yes/ Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to No this model this model this model

Method

Backup by Service Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to this model this model this model

Data File of Advanced Box

Yes (*13)

Remote UI (Bacup/Restore)

PC/ USBHDD (*14)

No

Yes

Yes (*15)

No

-

-

Advanced box settings Advanced box account

Yes

PC

No

Yes

Yes

Yes (*6)

SST (Meapback)

PC

(*16) No

Remote UI (User Access Control for Advanced Box) -

-

No

No

No

No

-

Yes (*10)

Remote UI (Bacup/Restore)

PC

No

No

Yes (*11)

No

Yes (*17)

Remote UI (block of Export/Import)

PC

Yes (*17)

Yes (*17)

Yes (*17)

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

SMS

PC

Yes

Yes

SSO-H

PC

Yes

Yes (*18) No

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Network place setting information Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode Web browser settings Web Access setting information MEAP settings MEAP application License files for MEAP applications User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) Data saved using MEAP applications SMS (Service Management Service) password of MEAP Universal data settings Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Job logs

10

Appendix > Backup Data

No

No

No

-

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

SST (Meapback) SST (Meapback) SST (Meapback)

PC

SST (Meapback) SST (Meapback)

PC

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

PC PC

PC

10-67

10 Appendix > Backup Data

10-68

Backup Method Backup Method (excluding DCM and device information delivery) Data

Yes/ No

Method

Backup by User Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Yes/ Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to No this model this model this model

Method

Backup by Service Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to this model this model this model

Key Pair and Certificate and CRL in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values PS font Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON Service Mode Service mode setting values (MN-CON) Service mode setting values (DC-CON)

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

PC

No No

-

-

No No

No No

No No

No Yes

SST (Sramimg) SST (Sramimg)

Yes (*26)

Settings/Registration USB (Management Settings > Data Managemnet > TPM Settings)

No

No

No

Yes

SST (Sramimg)

PC

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes (*27) Yes (*27)

HDD/ USB HDD/ USB

Service mode setting values (R-CON)

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes (*27)

Audit Log

Yes

Remote UI PC (Settings/Registration > Device Management > Export/Clear Audit Log)(*30)

No

No

No

Yes

SST (Sramimg) COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP SST (Meapback)

PC

No

No

No

No

No

No

HDD/ USB

PC

T-10-38

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-68

10 Appendix > Backup Data

Data

Address List Forwarding Settings Settings / Registration Preferences (Except for Paper Type Management Settings) Adjustment/Maintenance Function Settingss (Except for Printer Custom Settings, Forwarding Settings) Set Destination (Except for Address List) Management Settings (Except for Address List) Printer Settings Set Paper Information

Yes/ No

Method

10-69

Backup Method Backup Method using DCM Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Yes/ Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to No this model this model this model

Backup Method using Device Information Delivery Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Method Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to this model this model this model

Yes Yes

RUI / WebService PC RUI / WebService PC

No No

No No

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

WebService PC WebService PC

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes

Yes

WebService PC

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes

RUI / WebService PC RUI / WebService PC

No No

No No

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

WebService PC WebService PC

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes Yes

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes

Yes

WebService PC

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes

Yes

WebService PC

Yes

Yes

Yes

No Yes (*4) Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No No

No No

No Yes (*4) Yes

Yes Yes (*3) Yes

WebService PC WebService PC WebService PC

Yes Yes (*3) Yes

Yes Yes (*3) Yes

Yes Yes (*3) Yes

Yes (*7) Yes (*7) Yes (*7) No

Yes (*8) No

WebService PC

No

-

-

No

Yes (*8) No

Yes (*8) No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes (*9) Yes (*9) Yes (*9) Yes (*9)

No

-

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

-

-

-

No

-

-

-

-

-

Department ID Management RUI / WebService PC No System Manager ID Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox) Favorite Settings Yes RUI / WebService PC No

No

Default Settings

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Shortcut settings for Options

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Previous Settings Setting items for Quick Menu Button Size information

No

-

No

No

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Wallpaper Setting

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Button information in Quick Menu

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Restrict Quick Menu

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes Yes

RUI / WebService PC RUI / WebService PC

No No

No No

Yes Yes

No No

-

-

-

-

-

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes

No

-

-

-

-

-

Setting items for Main Menu Button settings in Main Menu Button settings on the top of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu

-

10

No

Appendix > Backup Data

10-69

10 Appendix > Backup Data

Data

Other settings for Main Menu Box settings User Box specification settings (Register Box Name, Password, Time until Document Auto Erase, Print uponstoring from the printer driver) Image data of User Box, Confidential Fax Box, and System Box Image Data Data File of Advanced Box Advanced box settings Advanced box account Network place setting information Box settings Image forms stored in the Form Composition mode Web browser settings Web Access setting information MEAP settings MEAP application License files for MEAP applications User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) Data saved using MEAP applications SMS (Service Management Service) password of MEAP Universal data settings Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode) Job logs

Yes/ No

Method

10-70

Backup Method Backup Method using DCM Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Yes/ Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to No this model this model this model

Backup Method using Device Information Delivery Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Method Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to this model this model this model

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes

No

-

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

Yes Yes

RUI / WebService PC RUI / WebService PC

No No

No

-

-

-

-

WebService PC

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No No

Yes Yes

No No

-

-

No No

No No

No No

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

RUI / WebService PC

No

No

Yes

Yes WebService PC (*17)

Yes (*17)

Yes (*17)

Yes (*17)

No No No

-

No No No

No No No

No No No

No No No

-

-

No No No

No No No

No No No

Yes RUI / WebService PC (*19) No -

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

No

Yes (*19) No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

-

-

10

Appendix > Backup Data

-

10-70

10 Appendix > Backup Data

Data

Key Pair and Certificate and CRL in Certificate Settings in TCP/ IP Settings in Network Set-tings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) Auto Adjust Gradation setting values PS font Key information to be used for encryption when TPM is OFF Key and settings information to be used for encryption when TPM is ON Service Mode Service mode setting values (MNCON) Service mode setting values (DCCON) Service mode setting values (R-CON) Audit Log

Yes/ No

Method

10-71

Backup Method Backup Method using DCM Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Yes/ Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to No this model this model this model

Backup Method using Device Information Delivery Compatibility: Compatibility: Compatibility: Method Location Old model to iR-ADV (1) to iR-ADV (2) to this model this model this model

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No No

-

-

No No

No No

No No

No No

-

-

No No

No No

No No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

PC/USB/ HDD PC/USB/ HDD PC/USB/ HDD -

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

No

No

-

-

No

No

No

No

No

Yes (*28) Yes (*28) Yes (*28) No

No

-

-

No

No

No

Yes RUI / USB /HDD (*28) Yes RUI / USB /HDD (*28) Yes RUI / USB /HDD (*28) No -

T-10-39 (1)

iR-ADV iR ADVANCE C2030/C2025/C2020 Series iR ADVANCE C5051/5045/5035/5030 Series iR ADVANCE C7065/C7055 Series iR ADVANCE C9075PRO/C9070PRO/C9065PRO/C9060PRO Series iR ADVANCE 4045/4035/4025 Series iR ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 Series iR ADVANCE 8105/8095/8085 Series

(2)

iR-ADV iR ADVANCE C2230/C2225/C2220 Series iR ADVANCE C5255/C5250/C5240/C5235 Series iR ADVANCE C7280/C7270/C7260 Series iR ADVANCE C9280 PRO/9270 PRO Series iR ADVANCE 4245/4235/4225 Series iR ADVANCE 6275/6265/6255 Series iR ADVANCE 8205/8285/8295 Series T-10-40

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-71

10 Appendix > Backup Data 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

No

10-72

Explanation

The following items are Deleted. Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Envelope Drawer Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Paper Selection Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection The following items are Deleted. Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Feed Method Switch Detailed parameters cannot be imported by default. Only basic parameters can be imported. When OFF is set for "Restrict Receiving for Each Function" in “Device Information Delivery Settings" in "Settings/Registration", the detailed parameters can also be imported. However, import of detailed parameters between different models is not recommended. Detailed parameters cannot be imported by default. Only basic parameters can be imported. When OFF is set for "Restrict Receiving for Each Function" in “Device Information Delivery Settings" in "Settings/Registration", the detailed parameters can also be imported. However, import of detailed parameters between different models is not recommended. Import and export is possible only on Type 2. Backup is available only "Favorite Settings" in "Scan to Send". "Copy", "Scan and Store" and "Fax" are not supported. If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by checking that the machine starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data. Send only between different models. Send only. Copy, Box, Fax are not supported. Between the same models only. Login System Administrator and do backup. Between the same models only. Restoration of only this item is not possible, but "document files in the Advanced Box", "Mail Box settings", "Mail Box image data" and "Form for Superimpose Image" are also restored. Because clearing MN-CONT changes the memory reception setting to "OFF", the image data saved in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically printed after restart. After a print, it is deleted from a system box. IIt is possible only when logging in as an administrator user. When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration. When the optional high-capacity HDD is installed, backup can be done only to USB-HDD. "Mail Box image data", "Fax Box image data", "System Box image data" and "Form for Superimpose Image" are also restored. When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration. Only "favorites of web browser" can be backed improves. Only when the MEAP applications have a backup function Only when MEAP applications have a backup function The password is TPM-encrypted and saved. Therefore, the password backed up after all data/settings have been initialized cannot be reused, or restored to another device (because the TPM encryption key will be changed). In such case, initialize the password using a switch license for password initialization. If the backup key information in the HDD is missing, it is automatically recovered from the key in the SRAM (MCON2). When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same time, the automatic restoration of the key information is not performed. If the key information in the SRAM (MCON2) is missing, it is automatically recovered from the backup key in the HDD. When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same time, the automatic restoration of the key information is not performed. An error code is displayed when the TPM setting is “ON". After all data/settings are initialized after restart, select "ON" for the TPM setting to enable the TPM setting. If the TPM key information in the SRAM of the HDD or the Main Controller PCB 2 becomes missing, the key information in the SRAM is automatically recovered from the backup of the common key in the HDD. Then the internal state of TPM setting changes to "ON". Note that the TPM setting needs to be manually changed to "ON" since "OFF" is displayed for UI. TPM settings becomes "OFF" when all data/settings are initialized. Backup only against TPM PCB failure is possible. In addition, restoration cannot be done to other machines whose TPM setting is set to "ON". Backup is possible in SramImg, DSRAMBUP, RSRAMBUP. When You set it in COPIER> OPTION> USER> SMD-EXPT> ON, a backup/restore is possible in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI. There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode. HDD and USB memory can back up Service Mode Settings by backup button. When Audit Log Collection is set to "Start" in remote UI (Settings/Registration)> Device Management> Export/Clear Audit Log, clearing of MN-CONT changes the setting to "Stop"; therefore, the setting needs to be changed again to "Start" from remote UI. Audit log that was exported cannot be put back to the device from which the log was exported. T-10-41

10

Appendix > Backup Data

10-72

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure

Removal

10-73

■■Work Procedure If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if

Removal ■■Overview • User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users can recognize. • By using the copy, print, or send function, there is also information left on the HDD of

necessary.

●● User data delete procedure Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize Select a deletion mode If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used, select the default "Once with 0 (Null) Data".

MFPs that is generally not recognizable but can be recovered as documents. (Refer to the illustration on the next page.) • For security, the user mode is provided to delete data on SRAM and perform overwrite deletion to render user data on HDD unrecoverable.

●● User data delete • To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize All Data/Settings in user mode. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns user mode setting values to their factory defaults. • Usually, one overwrite is enough. Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases the time required for the deletion operation.

Note: • When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced. If MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance. • Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option. • When all the data is initialized, all the passwords will be initialized or deleted. • If a password is set for the security policies, you will be prompted to enter the password when you execute deletion. This prevents a malicious user from initializing all the data and freely using the device.

●●Deletion of Service Mode Settings The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the service mode setting values should be changed back to the default values before removing the machine.

F-10-14

Note: • When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 are deleted. For the items to be deleted, refer to the backup list. • Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal operation the next time, the operation performed at installation is necessary. • Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure

10-73

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure

Report output upon completion of Initialize All Data/Settings

10-74

Limitations

With MN-CONT Ver. 2.01 and later, a report is output after executing Initialize All Data/

The language of the report is only English, and cannot be changed.

Settings. Consider using this report to provide to user as a material to inform of work details

The report is output without fail (a function to select ON/OFF of report output is not provided).

when executing Initialize All Data/Settings upon user's request.

There is no second output of report when the machine is turned ON without paper. Only the output of this report remains in the job log.

Operation after Initialize All Data/Settings The machine is started normally at restart after Initialize All Data/Settings without displaying the message (Turn OFF the main power supply on the right side of the machine) on the

●● Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT

screen to prompt shutdown The report is output after startup.

****************************** *** System Information *** ******************************

<< Initialize All Data/Settings Report >> Serial Number Device Name

ZZZ99999 iR-ADV 8205 (iA8205)

Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode

Once with Random Data (*1) F-10-16

The following data stored in the device has been completely erased. - Data stored in the temporary data area - User generated data - Settings under Settings/Registration (restored to factory defaults)

Note:

• When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for the user data, initialize all the data. • When MN-CON clear is executed, the password for the security policies will be deleted. F-10-15

*1 display following one. "Once with 0 (Null) Data" "Once with Random Data" "3 Times with Random Data" "9 Times with Random Data" "DoD Standard"

Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure

10-74